Elementor #16557

NAME DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH COMMAND
 3D

Create a 3D set joining points offset from horizontal and vertical alignments.

Create a set in the current layer connecting points at offsets from selected alignments.

Options

Plan view:
Select a horizontal alignment pline or set. The default is the active HAL.
Profile view:
Select a vertical alignment pline or set. The default is a profile with the same name as the HAL, or a profile which refers to the HAL, if existing. If no record is selected, or the VAL is out of the HAL range, the the new points have no elevations.
Settings
Chainage
Begin:
Enter beginning chainage
End
Enter ending chainage
Incr:
Enter chainage increment
Use Xlines
Also create points at Xlines
Offset distance
Enter the horizontal offset
Delta elevation
Enter the elevation difference
Name
Enter the name of the new points and set or leave blank to name points with chainages
OK
Accept the new settings
Cancel
Retain the old settings
OK
Create points and set
Cancel
Cancel without creating new points or set

See also

GC3D
Create a 3D set offset from horizontal and vertical alignments, with the elevation offset vertical or perpendicular to the VAL
3DROAD
Create a 3D set offset from the main alignments in a roadjob
GC28
Create points along horizontal and vertical alignments
GC283D
Create points along horizontal and vertical alignments at 3D distances
TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Cogo|​Streets|​3D Geocomp Update or $200 77
 3DFILTER

Filter superfluous points from a DTM.

Filter large point DTMs generated by laser scanners, hydrographic surveys and photogrametry where much of the data is not significant.

Filter points on spikes, on similar grade and where removal would make insignificant changes to the volume.

Select a DTM layer and a boundary

Settings

Max Triangle Grade %
Filter out spikes and troughs by removing points where all surrounding triangles exceed the grade and all are either sloping away (a peak) or sloping toward the point (a trough).
Max Common Side Grade Diff %
Filter large triangles of similar grade by removing points where surrounding triangles have a small difference in Common Side Grade.
Max Volume Difference m³
Filter small triangles by removing points where the resultant local difference in volume is small.
Max Effective Area
Filter points where the total area of surrounding triangles is small.
Max Number of iterations
Reform the DTM and repeat the filter for the number of iterations or, if 0.00, until less than 10% is removed by the last iteration.
Colour of Removed Points
Modify the colour of the filtered points so you can select for deletion by colour.
Move Filtered Points to layer zero
Move filtered points layer 0 or make them non-​contourable.
Only Filter point if same colour
Protect points where colours vary
Keep Points on Breaklines
Protect points that lie on a breakline.
Keep Points on DTM Edge
Protect points on the DTM Edge.
Keep Points > 1 Standard Deviations.
Protect points with an elevation difference of more than 1 standard deviation from the new DTM.
Compute Volume Difference
Report the difference in volume between the start and final surfaces.
Generate Report.
Report the results to P3Pad.

Points inside dead regions defined by SETSMOOTH are not modified.

See also FILTER to filter plines, BLFILTER to filter along sets and GC31 to remove duplicate points and GC53 to change and identify non-​contourable points. GCGEOCODE is a separate application, which can quickly filter points not close to an average surface model.

TML dateGuide Source 
01/09/18 Help button   POA  
 3DMCOUT

Export MCA file for Topcon 3D-MC Machine Control.

Compute cross sections where xlines intersect selected 3D sets, then export hal, val and sections to a single MCA file and report to P3Pad.

MCA files are the input files for the now-obsolete Topcon 3D-MC machine control system. They are not usable by current Topcon 3D machine control systems which import .DWG and other files. Check with your Topcon dealer.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     POA  
 3DPIPE

Report 3D lengths and angles of sets.

Report the record number and name of selected sets, then the following values for each point:

  • Back, Intersection and Forward Point Numbers
  • Xline chainages and coordinates (if selected)
  • True 3D Angle
  • 3D and 2D Chainage of Intersection Point
  • Horizontal Deflection Angle and Direction
  • Vertical Deflection Angle
  • Bearing In and Out
  • 3D Distance In and Out
  • Zenith Angle In and Out
  • Slope In and Out.

This information is especially useful for designing and laying out long pipe networks.

You can also

  • Create Xlines labelled with chainages at an interval
  • Append the horizontal deflection angle and direction to each point name
  • Write the report to a CSV file.

See also PIPEINFO and TP10.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Reports|​More...|​Pipe lengths Geocomp Update or $200  
 3DROAD

Create a 3D set joining points offset from a roadway.

Create a set in the current layer connecting points at offsets from the main horizontal and vertical alignments on a roadjob.

Options

Road:
Select a roadjob.
Settings
Chainage
Begin:
Enter beginning chainage
End
Enter ending chainage
Incr:
Enter chainage increment
Use Xlines
Also create points at Xlines
Offset distance
Enter the horizontal offset
Delta elevation
Enter the elevation difference
Name
Enter the name of the new points and set or leave blank to name points with chainages
OK
Accept the new settings
Cancel
Retain the old settings
OK
Create points and set
Cancel
Cancel without creating new points or set

See also

3D
Create a 3D set offset from horizontal and vertical alignment plines
GC3D
Create a 3D set offset from horizontal and vertical alignment plines, with the elevation offset either vertical or perpendicular to the VAL
GC28
Create points along horizontal and vertical alignments
GC283D
Create points along horizontal and vertical alignments at 3D distances

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 77
 3DVISUALISER

3D visualiser toolbar button

3D Visualiser.

Project a DTM surface in a perspective, orthographic or plan view.

Functions

  • Display a single DTM surface with points, links, coloured bands, grids, shadows and elevation ranges.
  • Each surface is displayed in a new window; display multiple surfaces.
  • The elevation colour ranges can be configured, saved and imported.
  • Shadows can be controlled using configurable light sources.
  • Navigate using the mouse in flying or rotating modes.
  • View the data in perspective, orthographic or plan views.
  • Export the image in .bmp, .jpg, .psd, .gif, .tif or .tga format; or as a stereo pair.

Recover lost windows

The 3D Visualiser window can be maximised, minimised and restored. The window is displayed where the previous window was last located. If that location is not visible, because that display has since been disconnected or turned off, the window is not visible and import scripts appear to lock up. Recovery is often as simple as re-attaching a removed external display or turning on a laptop display.

To reset the window to a location on the primary display:

  1. Exit Terramodel
  2. If the file TVLite_window.reg is not present in C:\TMCUSTOM​\Geocomp​\, download that registration file to that folder and then rename the file to TVLite_window.reg
  3. Open TVLite_window.reg
  4. Accept the changes to the Windows registry
  5. Start Terramodel
  6. Try 3D Visualizer again.

This registration file also enables "Data field emphasis" and "Smaller data tags" in "Raw Data Appearance" settings.

White display

If 3D Visualiser displays a white display for a very long time before rendering the image, this could be a problem with the video drivers. This could also be due to many sets having Hard or Sharp smoothness. To avoid this, modify the smoothness of existing sets to Soft with SETSMOOTH and of new sets with DESIGNSET.

Help

3D Visualiser Help is available from the Help menu in 3D Visualizer, from the Index submenu in the Help menu and by the HELPTVL command.

Other names

3D Visualiser is also known as 3D Visualizer, TVLITE, Terravista Lite, TVL and 3D Views.

TV

3D Visualiser is included with the Field data module. TV (Terramodel Visualizer) is a separate application that also displays Terramodel project files in perspective and in movies with points, sets, multiple surfaces, textured regions, trees and draped orthophotos. Visualizer is separately installed from the Terramodel installation disk. If you don't have any TV modules on your key, you can trial Visualizer with supplied demonstration projects.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09 ADD 9.7 51 DTM|​3D Visualiser
DTM|​3D Visualizer
Tunnels|​3D Visualiser
Tunnels|​3D Visualizer
Toolbar button
S MM 8
 ABBREVSET

Set prefix abbreviations for labelling and display.

Abbreviations are used in display, reports, and labelling. They apply to both attribute text and text objects created while labeling. Once you have made changes to the abbreviations, attribute text will be updated when the display is redrawn, but text objects created by labeling must be re-labeled to be updated.

Curve
Abbreviations for circular curves. Each label can have a maximum of eight characters. You can use any ASCII character in a prefix label by entering "\" and the number of the character. For example, enter \131 for the delta symbol in TMODELF.FNT.
Spiral
Abbreviations for spiral curves. Each curve prefix label can have a maximum of eight characters.
Vertical
Abbreviations for vertical curves. Each curve prefix label can have a maximum of eight characters.
Table
Line and curve table headings for LABELTABLE. Each label can have a maximum of 16 characters.
Point
Abbreviations for point names. Each prefix label can have a maximum of eight characters. These abbreviations are only used by commands that create points along an alignment at positions where IP or curve information are listed.
Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Settings|​Abbreviations S  
 ABOUT

Report Terramodel version number and modules.

Report Terramodel version number, Terramodel Toolpak version, copyright details, and list Modules.

Click on the Modules button to see the list of modules:

Family
List modules for families of Trimble products other than Terramodel
Serial Number
The serial number is also the licence number written on the key. The - extension indicates the number of times the key has been updated with different modules.
Lock version
The lock version enables certain versions of Terramodel.
Days of trial
The number of days remaining on any trial period
Order form
Report the modules and purchase code details to printer or email
Upgrade
Enter Upgrade codes when requested by a Trimble dealer.

If there is no Products button, the Terramodel key cannot be found and Field data is the only module. If you suspect the key is faulty, or not programmed with your modules, contact Geocomp Systems. See www.geocomp.com.au/​support/​dongle.html for more about security keys and their system drivers.

See also GCHELP.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Help|​About S  
 ACADCONV

Convert DWG and DXF files to R2000 DWG files.

Use ODA File Converter to convert every DWG and DXF file in a specified folder to DWG files in R2000 format.

ACADCONV command provides a simple interface in Terramodel to ODA File Converter so you can convert all DWG or DXF files in a specified folder to R2000 DWG files in another specified folder.

Open Design Alliance

ODA File Converter and ODA Drawings Explorer can import most variations of DWG and DXF files and export them as .DWG or .DXF files of any version from R9 to R2013.

Download and install ODA File Converter, then in ACADCONV, browse to select the location of the .exe and \In and \Out data folders.

Errors when importing

If you get an error message or crash when you IMPORT, this could be because the DWG or DXF file:

ProblemPossible solution
Is too new.Use ODA Viewer or File Converter to downgrade the version.
Is too new.Install Geocomp Update M so you can import DWG and DXF files in formats up and including R2018.
Contains objects that are unsupported by the command.Upgrade to Geocomp Update K, L or M and IMPORT again, or use ACADCONV to convert to R2000 .DWG or ODA to convert to .R10 DXF.
Contains proxy objects created by third-party software.Use that software to export a standard .DWG or .DXF.
Contains vports that are not recognised. Use ODA to downgrade to R10 .DXF format.

To use ACADCONV

  1. Download the latest Windows version of the ODA File Converter.
  2. Install onto a computer with Terramodel.
  3. Create a dedicated Input data folder.
  4. Create a dedicated Output data folder.
  5. Place only the DWG or DXF files that you want to convert into the Input folder.
  6. Start Terramodel.
  7. Run ACADCONV.
  8. In Settings, specify the paths for ODA software and data. For example:
    • C:\Program Files\​ODA\​ODAFileConverter_title 19.8.0\​ODAFileConverter.exe
    • X:\TMData\Project1\In
    • X:\TMData\Project1\Out
  9. Click Convert.
  10. Specify the input files filter and the output version.
  11. Exit ACADCONV.
  12. IMPORT each DWG file from the Output folder.

2000 is earliest DWG version that supports spaces in file names. R10 is the first version that supports 3D coordinates and is the last version before vports. In most cases, converting to .R10 is the best way to prepare a .DWG or DXF data for IMPORT.

TML dateGuide Source 
01/09/18 built-in   Geocomp Update or $200  
 ACTIVE

Set, clear or list the current active alignment.

Active alignment
Select the set or pline to be the active alignment
Set
Make the set or pline the active alignment
Clear
Clear the active alignment

Active alignments are used to select alignments quickly when prompted and control the display visibility of referenced objects.

Objects that refer to alignments derive their chainage properties from those alignments and can be replaced by alignment labelling commands.

See also GCACTIVE which selects the active alignment from alignments registered in HALMANAGER.

See also REFER which refers objects to an alignment.

PROFILE refers the profile it creates to the selected alignment. Objects in the profile are invisible if they refer to alignments other than the active alignment. If the selected alignment refers to another alignment, PROFILE will use the chainages of that other alignment.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09UG 125 Settings|​Active alignment S 415
 ACTIVE​STATION

Set the active station.

Set, clear or list the current active alignment and station.

ACTIVE​CHAINAGE is an alias to ACTIVE​STATION.

The active chainage, or active station, is the chainage of a specified xline on the active alignment. In the XSect view, set the active alignment and active chainage to view only one cross section at a time. Clear the active alignment to see all cross sections of that alignment drawn on top of each other.

In the XSect view, X value is horizontal offset, Y value is vertical offset and Z value is chainage. Each pline, text and block drawn in the Xsect view is given the Z value equal to active chainage at the time. The Z value can be modified using commands such as ELEVATION that modify elevation in the Plan view.

Cross sections are drawn as plines and text in the XSect view using RDX, RDXGC, XSHEET or XSHEETGC. Each pline and text object created by these commands has a Z value, from the chainage of its xline, and refers to the active alignment, or to another pline that refers to that alignment.

Plines, text and blocks in the Xsect view that refer to other chainages or alignments are hidden in the XSect view. Each cross section dynaview in the Sheet view only shows objects for one chainage and alignment.

Other visible objects are displayed including points, sets, and those objects with no chainage (Z value = *). Objects which are off, such as the plotboxes for the sheets, and objects on layers that are off, are also hidden in the normal way.

These rules enable you to control which cross sections is visible and to draw, edit, measure and so on.

Options

Alignment
Select the set or pline to be the active alignment
Chainage|Station
Select the chainage along the alignment to be the current active chainage
Next
Make the next xline with a greater chainage, along the current active alignment, the active chainage
Previous
Make the previous xline with a lesser chainage, along the current active alignment, the active chainage
Set
Set the selected set or pline to the active alignment and make the specified chainage the active chainage
Clear
Clear the active alignment and active chainage

If the US English language version is installed, Terramodel dialogs and menus refer to Station. If British English, the dialogs refer to Chainage. The Terramodel Help refers to Station. This TML List refers to Chainage.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Settings|​Active chainage
Settings|​Active station
S 410
 ADD2NAME

Add prefix or suffix to names of selected points, sets or plines.

Change the names of selected points to add a common prefix or suffix.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 ADD2PTNO

Add prefix or suffix to selected point numbers.

Change the point numbers of selected points to add a common prefix or suffix.

If you are adding alpha characters, or any modified point number will exceed the "Max integer pn" in POINTSET, ensure that SYSTEM has sufficient "Max Alpha pts".

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     U  
 ADD2TXT

Add a prefix and suffix to selected text.

Add a prefix and suffix to selected text; for example, add parentheses around text.

Extended text objects with more than 255 characters are not supported.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Modify|​Text|​Prefix or suffix Geocomp Update or $200  
 ADDIMAGE

Add an image located by multiple plotboxes.

Add one image to multiple plot boxes.

The same image is added to image manager at the lower left and upper right extents of each selected plotbox.

These plotboxes may be evenly spaced using MATRIX.

If all the plotboxes are the same size and refer to a mastersheet, use ASAPIMAG.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 ADDISO

Add the depth indicated by an isopach layer to the points contained within a DTM layer.

Determine the depth of the isopach at the location of each point on a DTM surface, and then add that depth to the elevation of selected points.

If the DTM point is beyond the limits of the isopach layer's DTM edge, the point's elevation is unchanged.

See also GC54 and GC87.

TML date MenuSourceGC
29/10/08   DTM|​Add isopach thickness S 240
 ADDMAPSY

Add coordinate mapping systems.

Import coordinate systems from a file into the Mentor database for use with commands that transform coordinates from one mapping system to another.

The fields are: #HORIZ_DATUM,​Ellipsoid,​PROJECTION_ID,​PROJECTION_NAME,​CM_ZONE_DD,​FALSE_EASTING,​FALSE_NORTHING,​CENTRAL_SCALE_FACTOR. For example: GDA2020,​GRS1980,​BRO2020,​Broome Grid 2020,​122.3333333333,​50000.0000000000,​2300000.0000000000,​1.0000029800.

Importing coordinate systems from a file that you prepare is easier than using the "Define CS" button in GCCOORD or COORDCON. Run GCCOORD or COORDCON at least once in a session before ADDMAPSY.

Commands that use coordinate systems in the Mentor database include COORDCON, GCCOORD, FYATBOUT, GCKMLIN, GCKMLOUT, GCLLGRID, LLTABLE and SHADOW.

TML date  Source 
04/09/20     Geocomp Update or $200  
 ADDTIDES

Add tide corrections to depth records.

Apply or reapply tide corrections from a tide file to selected depth records within a time period.

The tide file must in the format dd/mm/yyyy,hh:mm:ss,t.ttt where t.ttt is the tide value in metres and correctly sorted by increasing date and time.

Depth records are points with negative elevations when deeper than tide datum or positive when drying heights (above water). The point name must have been formatted by HDMS.

Restore any depths rounded with HDMSRTR prior to running ADDTIDES. Relabel depths after running ADDTIDES.

TML dateGuide Source 
01/09/18 built-in help   HDMS  
 ADJAREA

Adjust a lot to match a specified area.

Create a lot (closed set) that encloses a specified area by moving a reference boundary relative to fixed boundary sets or plines.

Operation

Bndy Objs:
Select the plines or sets that define the stationary part of the boundary. Corners of the boundary are created where the lines overlap. Curve types other than circular arcs are converted to chords.
Ref Bndy:
Select a reference line that overlaps the adjacent segments of the final figure. Create the boundary so that as it moves, it continues to overlap the adjacent segments.
Center
Select a location near the centre of the adjusted lot. This can distingush between two possible solutions.
Settings
Adjusted Area:
Enter the target area in square project units
Type of Adjustments
Adjust by Azimuth
Shift the reference line along the specified azimuth
Pivot Point
Rotate the reference line about a specified Rotation point
OK or Cancel
Accept or reject changes to Settings and position the mouse to select a location near the centre.
OK
Create the closed pline with the specified area.

How to adjust a lot

  1. Decide on the desired lot area in square project units
  2. Decide which boundaries are fixed
  3. Create a reference boundary to be moved until the target area is reached
  4. Check that the fixed objects and the reference boundary together enclose a region and will still do so after the boundary is moved.
  5. Run ADJAREA
  6. Select the fixed boundary objects
  7. Select a reference boundary pline or set that crosses the fixed objects to define a closed region
  8. In Settings
    • Enter the desired adjusted area in square project units
    • Specify azimuth direction in which to move, or a pivot point around which to rotate
  9. Specify a location within the proposed lot
  10. OK to create a closed pline with the adjusted area

Please refer to Adjarea.pdf or Terramodel Help for an illustrated example.

ADJAREA is also known as ADJUSTAREA.

See also PREDAREA.

Differences with PREDAREA:

AdjAreaPredArea
Create single lotCreate multiple lots
Use set and pline boundariesUse set boundaries
Create closed plineCreate closed set
Consider boundaries, area and direction or rotationConsider frontage, minimum area, rear length, angle and setback

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 Adjarea.pdf Cogo|​Lots|​Adjust area
Cogo|​Adjust area
S  
 AIRVALVE

Label a pipe with airvalve blocks.

Place blocks on a HAL and VAL to show the location of airvalves.

The blocks must be named AirValvePlan and AirValveProfile.

The blocks are placed at high points, such as airvalves, and low points, such as scour valves.

See also TP40.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 ALIAS

Create, edit and delete command aliases.

Create, edit and delete aliases for commands.

An alias is a command that substitutes for other text entered at the command line or in a menu, toolbar button or workspace button.

Aliases are for commands which need command line arguments, are unfamiliar, renamed, misspelled, replaced or are easier to remember in your own language, dialect, idiom or standard.

Use EXEC in an alias to execute an external command.

Alias editor

Add
Enter a new alias in the Alias field, the command name the alias is for in the Command field and any command arguments, up to 66 characters, in the Arguments field. The alias cannot include spaces. The command must be an an installed Terramodel command or TML and not another alias. To copy an alias, select an existing alias and enter a new alias name and modify the command or argumnents. Click Add to add the new alias.
Update
Select an alias from the list and enter any new values in Alias, Command or Arguments field. Click Update to replace the alias.
Delete
Select an alias from the list. Click Delete to remove the alias.
Print
Report all aliases to P3Pad
OK
Accept all changes and update the ALIAS.INI file
Cancel
Cancel without making any changes

Examples

User action Result Example of
Type UNITSET Execute UNITSSET Common misspelling
Type FAVOURITE Execute FAVORITES Alternative spelling
Type FAVORITOS Execute FAVORITES Spanish language
Type REVEAL Reveal hidden set segments with UNHIDE Rename obscure command
Type VOLUME Execute EARTHWORK Keep Terramodel 9.8 command
Execute THREEPC command Execute GC3PTARC command Substitute with alternative command
Click on  profile view toolbar button in Views toolbox Open Profile view using SVIEW Command line argument and toolbox
Click on  vpan toolbox west arrow button in VPAN toolbox Pan left by one screen Command line argument and toolbox
Type Z or W ZOOM using a window Like AutoCAD
Type MOOZ MAGNIFY the view scale by 0.5 to zoom out Like SDRMap
Type DXFOUT or DWGOUT Execute the AutoCAD (dwg or dxf) EXPORT script Like AutoCAD
Type 17 Measure 3D vector using GC29 Like Geocomp
Type CASCADE Cascade views by "MACROPLAY Cascade" Execute a macro
Type DCEDIT Launch the Trimble DC File Editor Launch an external executable application using EXEC
Type UG Open the User Guide Open an external file using TMRUN in a fixed location
Type RUN C:\TMCUSTOM\​GEOCOMP\​DOCS UG.PDF Open the User Guide Open an external file using TMRUN in a user-specified location

ALIAS.INI

Aliases are defined in the first ALIAS.INI file in the Terramodel Search Path (TSP). If you use ALIAS command to add or edit aliases, please keep note of your changes as the default ALIAS.INI, which has over 2000 aliases, is replaced during each Geocomp Update. Many commands and menu items in the Geocomp Update rely on these aliases. The default is usually in C:\​TMCUSTOM\​GEOCOMP or C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Terramodel\​Geocomp.

Use TSP to check which ALIAS.INI is in use (although if ALIAS.INI is in any location under C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Terramodel\, the file actually in use might be a copy in the Windows VirtualStore).

You can define your own ALIAS.INI from scratch. If you do, many commands added or edited by Geocomp Systems will not run. Don't try to manually edit any file under C:\Program files (x86)\. Copy to a location under C:\TMCUSTOM where you can edit. Lines that start with a semi-colon ";" are hidden from the Alias Editor. Changes take effect when you restart or, if you use a ALIAS command, when you click OK.

Any remnant aliases in TMODWIN.INI files take precedence over aliases in ALIAS.INI so should be avoided. Use EDITINI (Import sections) to show if there is an [Alias] section in an INI file and, if so, use EDITINI (Fix Status Bar) to remove it.

ALIAS.INI in the Geocomp Update includes all commands on the English, French and Spanish menus. If you use the German menu, and want to help us add German aliases, please let us know.

See also

RUN
An alias to open an external file

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM File|​System Configuration|​Command alias S  
 ALIGNIMP

Import alignments from an ASCII text file.

Import HAL, VAL or SLOPE alignments with horizontal curve radii or vertical curve lengths from a comma-​delimited file.

Browse or enter the filename.

The Settings control the Name, Colour, and Linetype for the alignment created.

The check box "Adjust for HAL Equations", allows you to select the registered HAL from which to extract chainage equations.

The current view determines how the file is interpreted. Where there is no curve, omit the value in [ ].

Plan (Y before X in View Settings OFF)
East,North,[,Radius]
Plan (with Y before X in View Settings ON)
North,East[,Radius]
Profile
Chainage, Elevation[,Vertical Curve Length]
XSect
Offset, Elevation[,Radius]
Super
Chainage, Elevation[,Vertical Curve Length]

See also GC65FILE.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     U  
 ALIGNOFF

Import alignments offsets from a text file.

Import chainages and offsets for a horizontal or vertical alignment.

These are added to the Alignment Offsets in the HAL or VAL Manager.

  • Browse to select the comma-​delimited file.
  • The format is assumed to be: Chainage, Offset.
  • Pick the Pline or Set that you want to use for the registered HAL.
  • Enter a name for the HAL to be registered. The default is the filename.

This will overwrite any already-registered HAL with the same name.

See also GC65FILE.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     U  
 ALIGNTXT

Make text perpendicular to alignment.

Rotate selected text to be perpendicular to alignment.

See also TEXTALIGN.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Modify|​Text|​Align to HAL Geocomp Update or $250  
 ALL

view all toolbar button

Function key F12

Zoom to extents

Zoom to the extents of all visible objects in the active view and refresh.

The extents of objects inside blocks are not considered. Use ALL to see the effect of changes to vertical exaggeration in VIEWSET.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM View|​All
Toolbar button
Function key F12
S 131
 ALT

Function key F10

Enable menus for entry by keyboard.

Enable the menu for key entry so you can then select a menu by pressing the underlined character then select an item from the menu, without using the Mouse.

ALT is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY ALT which simulates the standard Windows functions of pressing ALT key or F10 function key.

Macro date MenuSource 
15/11/12   Function key F10
File|​Macro|​Play|​alt
S
User-​definable
 
 ANG

Report angle-right between points.

Reports the horizontal angle at an instrument point subtended to the right from the backsight point to the foresight point.

Also reports the distance from the instrument point to the foresight point.

Uses the current Angle Units setting.

If all three of the coordinate locations are point objects, the point numbers will be displayed.

See also IDANGLE, GCANG, GCLABIP and LABELANG.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     U  
 ARC

Draw a pline arc from any three parameters.

Choose one of 10 Types of arc, for example "Start, Center, End" or "3 Point".

ARC defaults to the last Type used.

If you need Sets, use CONVERT or GCCONVRT command to change the Plines to Sets, or use GCARC.

The arc is drawn from the first point to the last point.

If a radius is used, a negative radius will draw the arc on the right-hand side.

In Terramodel Help, this command is called ARCS.

See also GC3PTARC, ARC2P and CURVESOL.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Draw|​Pline|​Arc S 21
  ARC2P

Create an arc pline by two locations and a radius.

The arc is drawn anti-clockwise to the left of the locations.

Use a negative radius to draw the arc on the right-hand side.

See also ARC, ARC2PSET and GCARC.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Draw|​Arc|​Pline by 2 points Geocomp Update or $250 21
 ARC2PSET

Create an arc set by two points and the radius.

The arc is drawn from the first point to the second point.

Use a negative radius to draw the arc on the right-hand side.

See also ARC, ARC2P, GCARC and GC3PTARC.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Draw|​Arc|​Set by 2 points Geocomp Update or $250 21
  ARCBL

Create breaklines along the arc segments of all sets on a designated DTM layer.

Create points at regular intervals along the arc and connect a set from the existing first TP to each of the new points and finally to the end TP of the arc. The number of chords created is based on a specified maximum middle ordinate (arc-to-chord tolerance) value which indicates the maximum allowable deviation from the true arc for any breakline chord.

The elevation of each point is interpolated along the arc from the elevations of the points at the arc TPs. If either TP has an undefined elevation, Breaklines will not be formed along that arc, and a warning message will be issued in the message area.

The new sets are named "SETARCBL", and given the current line colour, so they can be selected separately from the arcs.

See also GCARCBL to make the chords invisible and BLFILTER to filters out excess breakline points.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
01/09/18 RG 1217 DTM|​Arc breaklines S  
 ARC​BREAK

Replace arc segments in sets with points and arcs or chords.

Replace all arcs in selected sets with additional segments by number of points, chords or an arc-to-chord tolerance.

Method

Points
Create the specified number of new points per arc and replace the arc segments with new arcs.
Chords
Create the specified number of new points per arc and replace the arc segments with chords.
Arc to chord
Create new points at the specified maximum distance from the arc and replace the arc segments with chords.

Layer

Set layer
Create the new points on the same layer as the set
Current layer
Create the new points on the current layer

Notes

The smoothness of sets is not changed so any dead regions still apply.

See also GCCHORD which can also create chords along plines and GCARCBL which creates chords in separate sets.

TML date MenuSourceGeocomp
01/09/18   Draw|​Arc|​Break into chords Geocomp Update or $25 39
 ARCENTRE

Toggle visibility of set arc centres.

Turn off or on the visibility of all points at the centre of arc segments in sets.

If sets are visible, their arc centres are also visible unless ARCENTRE has been used to toggle off project variable GC_ARC_CENTRE.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Modify|​On/Off|​Arc centres Geocomp Update or $250  
 AREA

Report the area inside plines or sets.

Report the area and perimeter if closed and length if open.

Line
Report to message scroll the area of a single figure and the accumulated area after subsequent selections.
Multiple
Report to P3pad for each selected figure including the sum.
Digitiser
Report area inside selected locations, without creating having to create a new object.

The unit labelling is configured by UNITSSET.

The message “Unable to get record's area” usually means that the figure crosses itself somewhere. If you cannot find where the set or pline crosses itself, you can get the area using GC10 and User-defined REPORTS such as Closure Report and Geometry Report. With GC10 and REPORTS the area inside the enclosed part is subtracted from the larger part, not added, and figures with spirals are not valid.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Reports|​Area/Perimeter
Inquire|​Area/Perimeter
S 63
 ARRANGE

Arrange icons of minimised views at the bottom left of the display.

Arrange icons of minimised views at the bottom left of the display.

Arrange is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY ARRANGEICONS which simulates the Arrange icons command in the Window menu.

Macro date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Window|​Arrange icons
File|​Macro|​Play|​arrange​icons
S
User-​definable
 
 ASAPIMAG

Add mastersheet images to plotboxes.

Add to each plotbox the same images that are in the mastersheet.

After you have used PLANSET to create plotboxes, place each logo image once in the mastersheet using IMAGE Manager then use ASAPIMAG to copy the logos in IMAGE Manager so they appear on each sheet.

The plotboxes don't have to have been created by PLANSET, they just need to all be the same size and shape and all refer to the same plotbox (which PLANSET calls a "mastersheet" ).

See also ADDIMAGE.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 ASHIN

Import an Ashtech points file

Import an Ashtech formatted points file (.PTS).

TML date  Source 
29/10/08     S  
 ASM01

Renumber points in chainage|​station order.

Renumber selected points to increase in the direction of a selected alignment.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 ASSETLAY

Relayer objects to match Asset_ID attribute.

Asset_ID attributes are feature attributes commonly used with pipe survey commands.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 AUSGEOID

Import an AusGeoid DAT or TXT file

Import a file of elevation differences (N-values) to be used to transform AUSGeoid98, AUSGeoid09 or AUSGeoid2020 elevations to or from Australian Height Datum.

In the same way, AUSGEOID can also import AUSGeoid2020 uncertainty values.

The N-values are in a one-minute grid of Latitude and Longitude. For AUSGeoid98 and AUSGeoid09 data, the coordinate system is LL-GDA94. For AUSGeoid2020, LL-GDA2020.

Select a suitable boundary to limit the number of imported points. For example, importing Ausgeoid2020 with no boundary creates over 15,000,000 points. At the other extreme, selecting a boundary that is too small will import insufficient grid points to interpolate N-values over your whole site.

Prepare an N-values grid

  1. Obtain a suitable AUSGeoid .DAT or .TXT file containing N-Values.
  2. In Terramodel,
    1. Start a NEW project.
    2. Import any clipping boundaries.
    3. Select or create an empty current layer with a suitable name like N-VALUES 09 LL or N-VALUES 2020 54.
    4. Run AUSGEOID to import N-values from the file.
    5. Use TMXOUT to export the clipped N-Value grid to .TMX for later use.

Settings

Change
Select a geodetic coordinate system
For Bdy:
Select a limiting boundary in that coordinate system
Transform Lat. Long into East, North
Transform the grid into Eastings and Northings in that coordinate system if for adjusting elevations. Do not transform if for adjusting distances.
Import N values into Current Layer
Import points from the file that fall within the boundary
Cancel

Downloads

Download AUSGeoid2020 .DAT files from Geoscience Australia. These .DAT files are huge.

Download AUSGeoid09 .TXT files from NSW, NT, QLD, SA, TAS, VIC or WA or from Geoscience Australia.

For more information and more .DAT and .TXT files, see Geoscience Australia.

GGF

Surveyors with certain Trimble instruments can apply elevation differences while importing "Trimble raw survey (.dc)" points using .GGF files (such as these AUSGeoid09 .GGF files for Australia or for just South East Australia). Matching .GGF files must be correctly installed on the instrument and in Coordinate System Manager (CSM). Contact your Trimble instrument supplier for details.

Commands that use N-values

NZGEOID
Import New Zealand N-values
GC54
Correct elevations
GC29UTM
Measure distances
TRAVUTM
Traverse
GCSCANIN
Import lidar

TML date  Source 
04/02/20     Geocomp Update or $200  
 AUTO​DRAFT

Create line, block and text features based on field codes.

Create pline, sets, blocks and text to names of selected points according to field codes defined in an AutoDraft Configuration (.ADC) file.

To join all selected points with sets based on common field code and string number in the point name, leave the ADC field blank.

To automatically draft surveys where standard survey coding procedures have been followed, select a corresponding .ADC file.

Browse to select a predefined ADC file such as Geocomp Field Codes Revised.ADC, USStandard.ADC or UKStandard.ADC, or Edit to modify or create your own.

AutoDraft can accommodate many survey conventions. One common convention is start each point name with a field code (also known as a feature code) followed immediately by a string code. Prefix each comment, global code or parameter with a space.

Points
Select points to be automatically drafted.
Config file
Browse to select an AutoDraft Configuration (.ADC) file. The default file and location is stored as a project variable. Leave blank to join points with the same names.
Edit
Open the AutoDraft Editor.
File
Open or create a new AutoDraft Configuration (.ADC) File
Edit
Edit an AutoDraft Configuration (.ADC) File.
Undo
Undo changes to the .ADC
New Global Code
Select Global Settings then add a new global code or modify global settings.
Global Settings
Specify a multiple field code separator, the processing order, where to expect the string number (e.g. to the right) and the layer for radius points.
Global code
Specify codes which can apply to any feature, for example CLOSE to close a string or POC for the mid point of an arc.
Unknown codes
Optionally, define specific characters to indicate lines and arcs.
New Feature Category
Select Feature Definitions then add a new feature category of edit feature definitions
Feature Category
Define Categories such as Vegetation or Electricity
New Feature
Within each category, add a new feature or edit features
New field code
For each feature, add a new field code or edit field codes. For example, TOP or 102 for Top of Bank, up to 9 characters long. String numbers can be up to 3 characters. In Point Display, specify the new point layer and colour
New line definition
For each feature description with type Line, specify the name, layer, colour, linetype, type, smoothness, direction and offsets of any new lines.
New block association
For each feature, optionally add block associations. Specify the block names, layer, colour, scaling parameter numbers, rotation and number of points of any new blocks
New text label
For each feature, optionally add text. Specify the text, EAT codes, layer, style, colour, leader line, border and offsets of any new text.
Delete, cut, copy, paste, replace
Edit entries in the .ADC.
View
View only certain features.
Reports
Report some or all details of the .ADC to P3Pad.
Help
Display AutoDraft editor Help. Windows 10 users, please use HELPTM instead to find AutoDraft pages in the Index.

Unknown features

If any point names don't match a field code, you can add them to the ADC. If you do, identify the discrepancy, undo the AutoDrafting, correct the survey or the ADC, delete the unknown features from the ADC and then rerun AutoDraft on the survey until you are no longer prompted.

Groups

All new objects are given the same new group number which is one more than the previous largest group number.

Error messages

Watch out for any error messages in message scroll, especially when editing a new or imported .ADC.

See also

CSV2ADC, PTS2ADC, BLKPTS, GC16ADC, GCIMPORT, GCINSBLK, GCJOINMP, GCJOINPT, MAPPOINTS, MULTCODE, PTJOIN, PTLAYCOL, RELAYER and SURPIMPT.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09 FDM UG
HELPTM
Draft|​Automated drafting from points S 125
 AUTOSAVE

Enable automatic saving of project files.

AutoSave attempts to back up the current project file at a user-​specified time interval so it may help you recover from unexpected power failures or computer crashes. It does not help you recover from closing without saving, overwriting backups, and so on. The project file is autosaved with a randomly generated name in a randomly generation subfolder of the folder you specify in the AutoSave Configuration dialog box.

To use AutoSave

  1. Click FILE, Config System, and AutoSave [AutoSave].
  2. To turn AutoSave on or off, click the AutoSave On check box.
  3. To set the time interval for each autosave, type the time (in minutes) between autosaves into the Check Every box.
  4. To change the directory for autosave files:
    1. Turn off AutoSave (see step 2), and click Browse. The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.
    2. Find and click on the folder for the autosave files.
    3. Click OK. The new folder name appears in the Directory for AutoSave Files area.
    4. Turn on AutoSave if desired.
  5. Click OK.

Recommendations:

  • Do not rely on AutoSave.
  • You cannot continue working during an autosave. This can be annoying and take a long time.
  • It's quicker and safer to turn off AutoSave and habitually save early and save often with SAVE and SAVEAS.
  • Look for files in the project folder with extensions .~pr or .pr~. These are recent backups created by SAVE and SAVEAS.
  • Check to see if you have enough disk space.
  • Check to see a directory used by Terramodel was deleted.
  • Make sure your network server is working properly if your computer is on a network.
  • If your AutoSave path is on a network, you may be opening someone else's file.
Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM File|​System Configuration|​Autosave
File|​Config system|​Autosave
S  
 AUTOSET

Create a clockwise set joining points.

Create a closed set on the current layer joining at least three selected points clockwise from the southwest around a location at the mean of the coordinates.

See also QSET, GCTRACE, LOTJOIN, PTS2BDY and DTMEDGE.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Set|​Autoset S  
 AVERPTS

Compute average coordinates of points

Compute average easting, northing and elevation of selected points.

See also RANGE, DTMSTATS, GC05 and GC31.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 AVGEND

Compute volumes by average end-area between DTMs

Compute volumes by end-area given an alignment, Xlines and two dtm layers

Use AVGEND to compute end-area volumes if you do not have the Site Design or Roadway modules. Compare totals with EARTHWORK reports.

Create XLINES along an alignment first. Smaller intervals give more accurate volumes.

Options

ALIGN
Enter the alignment (pline or set object) along which Terramodel will compute volumes. Select the same alignment you used to create the xlines.
OUTSIDE
Select the first DTM layer from which you will calculate volumes. This layer should completely encompass the second, or inside, layer and must contain 3D points.
INSIDE
Use this layer control to select the second DTM layer. Make sure that, within the limits of the xlines, the points on this layer lie within the extents of the outside layer and have elevations.
CALC
Specify the chainage limits of the volumes and whether to send the report to the screen or to an external file.

See also VOLUME to compute cut and fill volumes between surfaces, GCGRDVOL and GC20 to compute volumes between surfaces within multiple boundaries.

GCGRDVOL can also report volumes within chainage ranges so it can give a similar report to AVGEND but with more accurate volumes.

EARTHWRK and XVOLUMES report volumes by end-area of roadjobs. GCGRDVOL reports prismoidal volumes between xlines which is more accurate that AVGEND.

If you get zero volumes when you expect sensible values, see FIXLAYERS.

TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
01/09/18 RG 402 DTM|​Volumes from XSections S 471
 BARRIER

Report on installation of pre-cast road barriers.

Report on installation of pre-cast barriers along a roadjob.

Select a roadjob, and as-built points at the base and top of barriers.

In Settings, specify the chainage range, asphalt thickness, barrier height and barrier width.

<
TML date  Source 
10/02/20    Geocomp Update or $250  
 BASIN

Create, enter and edit basin attributes for a point.

Create, enter and edit basin attributes for a point.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro|​Basin|​Define basin S  
 BBEAR

Create a point at the intersection of two bearings or two lines.

Select a point or line to indicate the starting and second point and bearings. If you select a point, enter a bearing to indicate the direction from the point.

For each solution, BBEAR creates a new point at the intersection of the two bearings on the current layer.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Cogo|​Lines|​Bearing-​bearing intersection S 23
 BCPIPEIN

Import a pipe survey from Business Center.

Import a pipe survey with attributes which has been exported from Trimble Business Center as a CSV file.

You can string the pipes by Asset ID or String No.

Command date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 BDIST

Create a point at the intersection of a line and an arc.

Solve for the intersection of two arcs or distances, and create a point object at the intersection.

Each arc is defined by a centre point and distance or by selecting an arc segment to define the centre point and distance.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Cogo|​Lines|​Bearing-​distance intersection S 12
 BEARTEXT

Add a datum angle to bearing text.

Add a specified datum angle to text containing bearings expressed as degrees, minutes and seconds (DMS)

Enter the datum angle as a DMS string in HP notation like this: 125.30451 for 125°30′45.1″.

If the bearing is EAT text, the bearing is exploded to normal text then the angle is added. Any other characters in the text, such as brackets, distances and new lines are left alone.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 8
 BESTFITA

Draw a curve or plane of best fit through selected points.

Create points and a set on a specified layer by fitting an equation to selected points.

Create points and a set on a specified layer by fitting an equation to selected points.

For each curve type, enter Settings for the result layer and other parameters as required.

Curve types

2D Line
Create a set between new two points with no elevations. See also BFITLINE.
Plane
Create a centre point and a rectangular set on a 3D plane. See also ELEVREFPLANE and IRBAY.
2D Circle
Create a 2D pline circle and centre point. See also CIRCLE and BFITCURV.
3D Circle
Create a set with a specified number of straight segments joining points on an ellipse which represents a circle in 3D space observed from above. See also ELLIPSE.
Parabola
Create a pline with a parabolic vertical curve. You can edit the vertical curve with CURVE if the pline is in a view mode with vertical exaggeration such as Profile or Xsect. See also PLINE, GCPRFEDT and PARABOLA.
Catenary
Create a pline of segments on a catenary through three points. See also CAT.
TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 BFITCURV

Draw an arc of best fit through selected points.

Create a pline arc fitted through three or more points using the Least Squares method.

Best-fit curve options

SELECT POINTS
Select the points through which a curve will be fitted.
OPTIONS
Select layers for the points and curves, set the location method and vary the weight of each point in the computations.
LAYER
Store points on
Specify the layer on which the PC, PT and radius points will be stored when using the Create option.
Store curve on
Specify the layer on which the set arc that connects the PC, PT and radius points will be stored when using the Create option.
LOCATION METHOD
Auto select/User select
Auto automatically calculates the beginning point. User lets you enter a beginning point. When you select User, you can enter a trial location for the centre of the radius and the radius length. BFITCURV uses the first three points to determine an initial radius and location for the radius point, and then uses an iterative process to find the solution. If, with the Auto option, BFITCURV suggests an arc in the opposite direction than desired, try again with the User option. Guessing a radius point and radius close to the true answer will speed the calculation process.
Radius center
Select a trial position for the calculation of the true radius center.
Radius length
Select a trial radius for the calculation of the true radius.
NUMBER
Lists the points you selected and through which a curve will be fit. From this box, you can select a point and edit its weight of importance. When you highlight a row in this list box, its corresponding weight will appear in the Weight box for you to change.
POINT
Display the selected point numbers.
WEIGHT
Set the weight of importance of each point through which the curve will pass. Bfitcurv will ignore any points having a weight of zero. A high weight will force the arc to go through the point. If fewer than three points are given a high weight of importance, Bfitcurv will not find a valid solution. When three points are given a high weight, an arc is passed through the three points.
LOCATE
Show the solution by creating a pline circle with the computed radius point and radius distance. In some situations, it may take several minutes to calculate the solution.
CREATE
Create a set arc, PC point, PT point and radius point.
REPORT
List the points used to calculate the arc, the weight of importance of each point, their distances from the arc and their coordinates on the arc perpendicular to their position.
DELETE
Delete the last set and points created with the Create option.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
01/09/18 RG 558 Cogo|​Curves|​Best-fit curve S  
 BFITLINE

Create a line of best fit through selected points.

Create a pline fitted through two or more points using the Least Squares computation method.

Best-Fit Line Options

SELECT POINTS
Select the points through which a line will be fitted.
OPTIONS
Assign independent layers for the new objects, and vary the weight of importance of each point in the computations.
LAYER
Store points on
Specify the layer on which points will be stored.
Store line on
Specify the layer on which the set line will be stored.
NUMBER
List the points you selected and through which a line will be fit. When you highlight a row in this list box, its corresponding weight of importance will appear in the Weight box for you to change.
POINT
Display the point numbers of the points whose weight will be edited.
WEIGHT
Set the weight of importance of each point through which the line will pass. A weight of zero will force the line to go through the point. When two points are given a weight of zero, a line is passed through the two points. To ignore a point remove it from the selection. Higher weights pull the line towards the point.
CREATE
Create a set line and two points showing the solution.
REPORT
List the points used to calculate the line, their weight, their distance to the line and their coordinates on the line perpendicular to their position.
DELETE
Delete the last set and points created with the Create option.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
01/09/18 RG 567 Cogo|​Lines|​Best-fit line S  
 BGELEV

Create an elevation view of points.

Copy selected points into an "Elevation" drawing in View 6.

The position of the point along the selected Baseline determines the horizontal position in View 6, while the Z coordinate of the Point determines the vertical position in View 6.

The points in View 6 are placed on the same layer that the points were originally placed on in the Plan View.

The points in View 6 are given an alphanumeric identifier (point number). If the baseline has a Name, then this name and the original identifier are combined to create the identifier for the point in View 6. If the baseline does not have a name, a (2) is combined with the original identifier to create the identifier for the point in View 6.

Max Alpha Points must be set in SYSTEM to a large enough number.

See also FLIPUP which is similar but has more features.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     S  
 BHOLE01

Import boreholes from a CSV.

Import points from a CSV file of bore hole data with elevations below a specified Top DTM layer.

The CSV file format is similar to this example:

First line HEADERHoleName, East, North, Layer01 name, Layer02 name, Layer03 name, Layer04 name, etc., etc., .....
Additional linesHoleName, E, N, depth to Layer01, depth to Layer02, depth to Layer03, ....
ExampleBH3A , 318128.00, 7345997.30, 0.5, 1.4, , 6.1, 9.8

See also BOREHOLE.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 BIGXMLIN

Import LandXML points within boundaries without new lines.

Import points from a LandXML file that fall within a closed pline or within an offset from an open pline, when the XML file has long lines of points.

Try to import LandXML files with GCPTSIN, GCXMLIN or LandXML import script first. If they choke on XML files because it has more than 255 characters per line, try BIGXMLIN to read points one character at a time.

BIGXMLIN, GCPTSIN and GCXMLIN read points only. GCFIXXML adds a new line after each > character into any XML file. The LandXML import script can also read surfaces and alignments.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 BIN2IMG

Create a coloured image from depths.

Create a coordinated image file of colours representing the elevation from hydrographic data created using HDMS.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     POA  
 BL

Create a breakline set.

Create a set that is also a breakline.

Create set between points that have elevations and are on the same layer as the first selected point. The set is created on the same layer as the points.

See also SET, GCDTMEDG and DELETE​SEGMENT.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Set|​Breakline S 15
 BLDG

Create a pline with right angles.

Specify an origin, enter a bearing and distance and then click OK to enter the first wall segment.

Then enter a positive distance to create a segment to the right, a negative distance for a segment to the left, New for a new building, Undo to undo the last segment or OK to complete the command.

See also BUILDING, QSET and TRAVPLIN.

TML date MenuSourceGC
29/10/08   Draw|​Pline|​Building
Cogo|​Traverse|​Simple building
S 4
 BLFILTER

Filter excess points from breaklines.

Replace straight set segments with fewer segments using a filter "tube" on the selected layer within any boundaries.

The initial filter tube is of the specified width, length and height and is orientated to the first segment on the set. The width is perpendicular to the segment and height is vertical.

BLFILTER checks for additional points within the limits of the filter tube. Any points inside the tube are discarded. The first point BLFILTER finds outside of the tube is kept, and the last discarded point inside the tube is added back to the set. The tube is then reoriented to the last two points, and the process is repeated.

See also FILTER which filters plines only, SETFILT and GCFILTER which filter by 2D offset tolerance and 3DFILTER which filters insignificant points from a DTM. Commands that add points include ARCBL, GCCHORD, GCDIVIDE and GCCHORD.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Modify|​More...|​Filter breaklines Geocomp Update or $200 127
 BLINECHK

Check for crossing sets on a layer.

Wherever sets on the selected layer cross, create a point with the name "bl-cross" on layer CROSSING and labelled with symbol 40 (circle).

These points give an indication of crossing breaklines.

Some points may be created at set segments which are not breaklines, such as arc segments or sets with points that are 2D, non-​contourable or on different layers.

Any previously created points on layer CROSSING will be deleted.

As each set is checked against all the other sets, the count will appear slower at first then speed up.

Use CROSSCHK to check all selected sets or plines.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Reports|​Mark|​​Crossing breaklines Geocomp Update or $250 43
 BLKPTS

Place blocks at points based upon names in the BLOCK.MAP file.

Replaced by AUTODRAFT or GCLABPNT for most purposes.

TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
29/10/08 RG 1217 Draft|​Blocks/symbols on points S 125
 BLKREAD

Reread a block

Replace an internal block with a different external block with the same name.

See also MKBLKINT.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Draw|​Block|​Replace internal S  
 BLOCK

Create, place, list or purge blocks.

Combine objects into a single object that can be manipulated as a block.

Blocks can consist of points, 3DFaces, plines, dynaviews, text and other blocks. Objects in blocks do not retain layer names.

A block can be inserted multiple times into projects, shared between projects, scaled, rotated and otherwise edited.

Create both internal blocks (which can only be used within a single project file) and external blocks (which can be used by any Terramodel project file). If you specify an External block, Terramodel will use the first block with that name on the Terramodel Search Path.

Points included in blocks lose point numbers. Sets are stored as plines when they are included in blocks.

Block Options

CREATE
Create a block definition. Select objects and the origin of the block. Click Name to enter a block name of up to 15 characters and a description. Do not define the block as External. Click Create to create the Internal block. To create an External block, first create the Internal block then use the SAVE Option.
SETTINGS
Establish default parameters used when inserting blocks. These block settings apply to all subsequently created blocks.
SCALE
Enter a scale factor for the X, Y, and Z dimensions of all inserted blocks. The factors are measured in relation to the sizes of the original objects. For example, if you want to place a block 2.5 metres in diameter, and the block you are placing is 1 unit in diameter, use a scale factor of 2.5.
ROTATION
Establish the amount of clockwise rotation for the X, Y, and Z ordinates of each inserted block, rotated about the insertion point.
INTERNAL|​EXTERNAL radio buttons
Specify whether all blocks are to be created as internal or external.
AUTO SCALE
Apply the current drawing scale of the active view to the block insert. Use this feature when you want to keep the plotted size of the block the same regardless of the current drawing scale. One example would be a north arrow that you always want plotted 4 inches high regardless of the drawing scale.
AUTO ROTATE
Cause blocks to rotate automatically through a dynaview as the dynaview is rotated. This should not be used with a north arrow but could be used with other symbols to keep them oriented upright on the final plotted sheets.
CLIP
Clip the block to the limits of rectangular dynaviews, even if the insertion point falls outside the dynaview. Clipping complex blocks such as hatch patterns can cause the screen redraw speed to decrease.
MAP COLOUR
When a block is inserted, it is assigned the line colour of the current layer. This block colour is retained if the block is later relayered.
ON
All objects within the block are drawn with the colour of the block.
OFF
The objects in the block are drawn with their original colours. Blocks which contain block objects with colour 0 are drawn with the colour BYLAYER.
EDIT
Edit the attributes of an inserted block.
LAYER
Lists the available layers, where you choose one on which to place the block.
COLOUR
Modify the colour of the inserted block.
ATTRIBUTE
List any attributes that have been attached to the block. Any attributes must be edited using specific commands.
GROUP
Modify the integer group number. Set 0 for no group.
REF. OBJ
Specify record number of a parent object to which the blocked is referenced.
OBJ
This area displays the record number of the block.
NAME
Modify the name of the block to match another available block. For example, if you change the name of a block named CIRCLE to TREE1, the circle block will be replaced with a tree canopy block of different size.
DESCRIPTION
Displays the description you assigned to the block definition when you created it.
ORIGIN
Modify the X and Y of the origin of the block.
ELEV
Modify the elevation of the block. See PN below.
SCALE
Modify the X, Y or Z scale of the block.
ROTATION
Modify the X, Y, or Z rotation angles of the block.
AUTO SCALE
Apply the current view scale so the block is always the same size on the plot. Auto scale is off by default. Use SCLBLKS to turn Auto scale on.
MAP COLOUR
ON
All objects within the block are drawn with the colour of the block.
OFF
The objects in the block are drawn with their original colours. Blocks which contain block objects with colour 0 are drawn with the colour BYLAYER
AUTO ROTATION
Cause block objects to rotate automatically through a dynaview as the dynaview is rotated. This should not be used with a north arrow but could be used with blocks that oriented to the top of final plotted sheets.
PN
When a subject point number is specified the block origin is computed relative to the coordinates of the point. When the point is deleted any attached block will also be deleted. EAT text in the block can refer to the subject point.
INSERT
Insert a block into a project file.
Block name
Specify the name of the block you want to insert. Pick from a list of blocks already inserted in the project, or type in the name of a block in the Terramodel Search Path.
LOC
Locate the origin of the block.
SCALE
Set the size of the block relative to the size of the block definition. Most blocks are defined as one unit high so the scale you enter becomes the height of the inserted block in the units of the view. Note that the CIRCLE block is one unit in radius, and point label blocks vary in height as specified.
ROT
Enter the rotation of the block around the origin.
MAP COLOUR
When a block is inserted, it is assigned the line colour of the current layer. This block colour is retained if the block is later relayered.
ON
All objects within the block are drawn with the colour of the block.
OFF
The objects in the block are drawn with their original colours. Blocks which contain block objects with colour 0 are drawn with the colour BYLAYER
INSERT
Insert the block once you have set the location, etc.
LIST
List the internal and external blocks contained in your project file. The list includes the block name, whether it is an internal or external block, the view in which the block was created, the number of lines (plines or sets) contained in the block definition, the number of text objects contained in the block definition, the number of inserted blocks of that block definition, and the description of the block.
SAVE
Save a block definition as an external BLK file.
NAME
Select a block definition from this drop-down list box of blocks you have created.
FILE
Enter up to 8 characters for the name of an external .BLK file.
SAVE
Save the block as External and create the .BLK in the current project location. To make the block available in any project, use a file manager to move the .BLK to a location on the TSP such as C:\TMCUSTOM.
MODIFY
Select one block from a list of external blocks that have been inserted and modify it to an internal block. See also MKBLKINT.
MULTIPLE
Place multiple identical blocks on selected points.
Name
Specify the name of the block you want to insert. Pick from a list of blocks already inserted in the project, or type in the name of a block in the Terramodel Search Path.
Pts
Select the points.
SCALE
Set the size of the block relative to the size of the block definition. Most blocks are defined as one unit high so the scale you enter becomes the height of the inserted block in the units of the view. Note that the CIRCLE block is one unit in radius, and point label blocks vary in height as specified. Also enter the rotation of the block around the origin.
MULTIPLE
Insert the blocks on each selected point.
PURGE
Delete selected unused block definitions from the project file. To purge more than 130 block definitions, or purge unused blocks nested in other unused blocks, repeat the Purge. Large numbers of unused blocks imported from .DWG can take hours to purge. To purge all unused blocks in seconds, use GCPURGE instead. You may want to delete missing blocks first with DELBLKS.

Block notes

  • Depending on how the blocks were created, GCEXPLOD and EXPLODE explode blocks differently with respect to layers, colours, elevations, names and sets. If one command doesn't do what you hoped, try the other one.
  • If the exploded block or text object has an elevation, the pline retains the elevation.
  • Points in blocks do not retain their point numbers.
  • Blocks can be nested inside blocks, so you may need to repeat.
  • Recursive blocks, that contain blocks with same name, cannot be exploded. Simply delete them.
  • Blocks imported from DWG or DXF files can include 3DFaces. These become points and sets when the block is exploded in Terramodel. To create a block with 3DFaces of a Terramodel DTM, export that DTM surface as 3DFaces to DWG, block that layer in some CAD program then import as DWG into Terramodel.
  • A block with Map colour ON is displayed in the colour of the block; with Map colour OFF, in the colour of the objects in the block.
  • Use SCLBLKS to change the map colour status of multiple blocks.
  • Use SYM2BLK to replace symbols with blocks.

See also AUTODRAFT, BLKREAD, BLKPTS, GC09, GCBLKFIX, GCINSBLK, HATCH, MKBLK, TEXT2PNT and UNITBLK.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Block|​Block
Draw|​Block
S 189
 BLOCKDIR

Modify the direction of blocks.

Modify the direction of selected blocks to a new bearing.

Block:
Select blocks
Bearing of Blocks
Enter a new bearing
Modify Block Bearings
Modify the direction of selected blocks to the new bearing
Close
Close command with selected blocks in the new direction

The initial new bearing is the new bearing from the previous BLOCKDIR session.

See also TEXTDIR and ROTATE.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 BLOCKLST

Create an array of blocks for a legend.

Create an array of labelled blocks from selected external blocks.

For an example, see the project file C:\TMCUSTOM\​Geocomp\​Docs\​BLOCKSALL.PRO.

To see charts of our blocks in PDF files, go to DOC​UMENTS; to list internal and external blocks used in a project, use BLOCK LIST; to create an external block in the project folder from an internal block in the project, use BLOCK SAVE; to create a chart of linetypes, use LINETYPS; to make the external blocks internal, use MKBLKINT.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 148
 BLUETOP

Bluetop report.

Create a bluetop report for a roadjob.

Bluetops are pegs with a blue-painted top surface and blue whiskers placed in the ground to the elevation of the finish course.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 BOREHOLE

Import boreholes from a file.

Import points from a file of bore hole data.

Specify whether the Z values are elevations or depths.

The file format is similar to this example:

First line Info and Layer Names ID,E,N,FILL 1,ALV 1,NONCO 1,COHES 1,MUD 1,SNDSTN 1,SNDGRV 1,NONCO 2,COHES 2
Example data lineOXBN15, 32624.26, 151422, 15.78, 13.6, 11.9, 9.1, 9.1, 9.1, 9.1, 9.1, 9.1, 9.1, -8.66,
Example data lineOXBN16, 32553.86, 151409, 14.033, 12, 12, 12, 9.3, 9.3, 9.3, 9.3, 8.1, 6.5, -8.66, -8.66

See also BHOLE01.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 BOX

Draw a pline box by two corners.

Draw a rectangular pline on cardinal bearings at specified opposite corners.

See also GCBOX, which prompts for three corners, POLYGON, which prompts for number of sides, centre location and the distance from centre to vertices, PLOTBOX, which prompts for bearing and distances in sheet units, and PAD, which prompts for two points and an elevation.

If the box is to be used for a DYNAVIEW, locate the first corner at the bottom left so that the insertion point of any rectangular dynaview can always be found at the bottom left.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Pline|​Box S  
 BOXDYNA

Create pline boxes from dynaview extents.

Create rectangular pline boxes at the extents of selected dynaviews on the selected layer and with the colour of that layer.

The plines are created with the name of the dynaview and refer to the dynaview record.

If a dynaview is rotated, or not rectangular, the extents are larger than the dynaview.

These boxes can be selected by PLOT when plotting in Multiple mode.

Creating these boxes in a distinctive colour can help locate dynaviews.

See also DYNAVIEW, FIXDYNA MVIEW, PLOTBOX and SHOWDYNA.

TML date  Source 
07/07/20     Geocomp Update or $200  
 BREAK

Break a pline or set into two parts.

Break a pline or set into two parts at location.

Select a pline or set, then a break location. The pline or set is broken into two parts at the location.

Repeat
Enable this checkbox if you want the command to stay open until Cancel is clicked.
Set or pline
Select the set or pline you wish to break.
Break
Enter a location along the line where you want to break it.

A pline cannot be broken within a spiral or vertical curve.

To break a pline or set by removing a segment, use DELETE​SEGMENT.

In Terramodel prior to 10.5, BREAK deletes set segments like DELETE​SEGMENT does now.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Edit|​Break S 276
 BUILDING

Construct a building with perpendicular or angled sides.

Construct a building with perpendicular or angled sides based on positive (right) and negative (left) offsets. Close the building by direct closure to the beginning point or close on a perpendicular to the beginning line. The beginning line can be cut or extended to match the closing line.

See also BLDG, QSET and TRAVPLIN.

TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
01/09/18 building.txt Cogo|​Traverse|​Complex building Wencomp 4
 CAGDRLX

Report Compute-A-Grade ditch.

Specify a HAL and chainages to report a ditch in Compute-A-Grade .DRL format.

The TML name is CAGDRL_X. If CAGDRLX does not run from the command line, create an alias from CAGDRLX to CAGDRL_X or enter CAGDRL_X.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 CALLOUT

Label objects with predefined callout text.

Create, edit, store and use predefined callout styles to label common features.

Quickly label common point and line features, such as kerb inlets, without having to type the text each time.

Stored callout styles define text in the label and may also define leader lines and text borders.

The predefined callout styles save time, look consistent and reduce typing errors.

Callout styles are stored in multiple external .COS libraries in the C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Terramodel\​Locale\​English and C:\TMCUSTOM\​Geocomp folders in categories. The loaded styles are recorded in TMODWIN.INI and therefore independent of the project. The Geocomp Update loads the geocomp01.cos callout style library.

Callout Options

CALLOUT
Create or edit a callout style, load and clear the styles contained within an external callout style library (.COS) file, and select the callout style to be used.
HAL
If the callout style contains EAT codes for chainage and offset, refer the callout text a horizontal alignment.
LDR / SUBJ
If the callout style contains EAT codes for a subject, refer to that subject. If the callout style includes a leader line, pick the leader line location.
LOC
Enter the insertion point of the callout text. Once you have entered the insertion point location, the coordinates will appear in the Loc box. If you pick a location graphically, the text will be placed. If you enter the coordinates in this control, click on the Text control to place the text.
ROT
Enter a bearing or an angle of rotation (measured from due north) at which the text is to be placed. Valid rotation angles range from 0° to 360° and can include negative angles. The default rotation is 90° which generates horizontal text.
PROPS
Designate a leader line style and a border style and their properties. You can also edit the text object's subject record and its subject HAL record from within this dialog box.
TEXT
Place the text once you have typed it and set the other text parameters to your liking.

See also GC21 which sets the active callout style and GCLABPNT which labels multiple points with EAT text.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Text|​Callout text... S 92
 CAROUSEL

Configure plotter carousels.

Select and edit plotter pen carousel definitions.

For Windows printers, each carousel defines the colour, in RGB, and width in mm, for "pens" to be used when plotting.

For HP-GL and HP-GL/2 plotters, each carousel defines a colour, width and pen speed. The colours and widths are used for raster plotters. Use the standard HP-GL RGB values for colours 1-8. The pen speed is used for physical pen plotters.

Use PLOTSET to map the object colour to a pen number and PLOTTER​SET to assign the default carousel for each Plotter Configuration.

To copy a carousel from another computer, use EDITINI to copy the PenDef section from an .INI file such as TMODWIN.INI or C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​tmodwin_geocomp_defaults.ini.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09 Palettes, Colourmaps, Penmaps and Carousels in Terramodel File|​Plot setup|​Carousel setup S PU3
 CASCADE

Arrange all open views so that all the view names are visible.

Arrange all open views so that all the view names are visible.

Cascade is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY CASCADE which simulates the Cascade command in the Window menu.

Macro date MenuSource 
Macro   Window|​Cascade
File|​Macro|​Play|​cascade
S
User-​definable
 
 CAT

Create a catenary pline.

Create a segmented pline, between two attachment locations in the profile view, following the path of a cable suspended between two points.

Enter the weight, tension and horizontal increment.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 CDSPROF

Create an initial design profile for a cul-de-sac or kerb return.

To create a kerb return,

  • Select the kerb return horizontal alignment at Cul-de-sac.
  • Click Begin info and select the centreline hal of one road, the vertical offset of the kerb alignment at the start of the kerb and the design profile of that road.
  • Click End info and select the centreline hal of the other road, the vertical offset of the kerb alignment at the end of the kerb and the design profile of the other road.
  • Click Create to create a profile pline with chainages from the culdesac alignment and four segments containing vertical curves end matching the grades and elevations of the design alignment profiles.

The kerb return has four segments with vertical curves.

See also GC51 and GCPRFEDT.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
01/09/18 RG 572 Cogo|​Streets|​CdsProf S  
 CENTREV

Recentre views based on chainage of active alignment.

Recentre Plan, Profile, Super and Xsect views by chainage of active alignment at a selected location.

Select a location in the plan, profile, super or xsect views. The plan, profile and super views, if open, are recentred on the horizontal or vertical alignment at the chainage of the location. The active chainage is set to the nearest cross section, and the Xsect view is fitted to the data.

If the selected view is the Xsect, the active chainage is used.

The match button recentres the plan view to the match the profile view.

There are buttons to zoom in or out by 25% and to fit data in all four views.

Ideal for working along a long narrow alignment such as a road, rail or pipe where no roadjob has been defined.

See also ACTIVE, CENVIEW, TPCENVIE and PPSX.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $500  
 CENVIEW

Recentre views based on chainage of road alignment.

Recentre Plan, Profile, Super and Xsect views by chainage of a roadjob at a selected location.

For any selected roadjob, select a location in the plan, profile, super or xsect views. The plan, profile and super views, if open, are recentred on the horizontal or vertical alignment at the chainage of the location. The active chainage is set to the nearest cross section, and the Xsect view is fitted to the data.

If the selected view is the Xsect, the active chainage is used.

The match button uses the centre of the active plan, profile or super view to recentre the other views. If the profile view is active, the plan and super views are scaled to fit the chainage range.

There are buttons to zoom in or out by 25%, to fit data in all four views, and to move to the next or previous chainage and make it active.

Ideal for working along a long narrow alignment such as a road, rail or pipe.

See also ROADJOB, CENTREV, TPCENVIE and PPSX.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Window|​Tile centred by chainage
Window|​Tile centred by station
Geocomp Update or $500  
 CF2SUPER

Create super­elevation slope alignment from existing crossfall.

For every point in a centreline set, compute the crossfall perpendicular to the HAL from the centreline to left and right edge-of-road sets. These crossfalls are created as slope alignments in the Super view on the current layer so you can design to match existing super­elevation.

Xlines are ignored as these are not interpolated linearly.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 CHAINAGE

Set the start chainage of a horizontal alignment pline.

Set the start chainage (also known as beginning station) of a horizontal alignment pline.

Chainages increase away from the first point or vertex.

Chainage equations assigned by a HALMANAGER are used in registered alignments only.

Station and chainage

CHAINAGE is an alias to STATION command.

If the US English language version is installed, dialogs for commands written by Trimble refer to Station. If British English, these dialogs refer to Chainage.

To select menus which refer to station, use MENUCFG to select a _US.M menu file. To refer to Chainage, select a different .M file.

The Terramodel Help refers to Station.

This TML List refers to Chainage and sometimes also to Station.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Edit|​Chainage
Edit|​Station
S 84
 CHECKATT

Check attributes.

Check attributes for errors such as duplicates.

See also FYATBEDIT and DISPFEAT.

TML date  Source 
17/09/20     Geocomp Update or $200  
 CHEKROAD

Check and correct roadway alignment registration.

Check and correct roadway alignment registration.

See also GCSUBGDE, GCDTMGDE and CHKRDDTM.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 CHKRDDTM

Check road DTM and add breaklines across roads.

Check a DTM of a road, add a DTM edge or add breaklines in the direction of the Xlines.

See also CHEKROAD and ROADSETS.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 CHNGATTR

Replace selected attributes based on a dictionary.

Replace attribute names or attribute values of selected objects according to a dictionary file.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 CHNGCOLR

Change colour bylayer to colour by colour number.

For every selected object that has colour number = 0 (= BYLAYER), change the colour number to the colour of the layer.

Objects of Colour 0 cannot be selected by colour in any command, so select by any other method. Once CHNGCOLR has changed the colour number, you will be able to select them by colour.

The displayed colour will not appear to change until and unless you change the layer of the object or the colour in the layer settings.

Select all objects by view to change from colour-by-layer convention to colour-by-object convention.

To change from colour-by-object to colour-by-layer, COLOUR by view to colour 0.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 CHNGHEIG

Change elevation by point name

Change the elevation of all selected points to match the numeric value of the name.

All digits and the last decimal point in the name are considered; all other characters are ignored, for example:

point name new elevation
123.456 123.456
R.L.=123.456 123.456
123.456 FSL 123.456
123.456 I.L. 123456.00
90301 90301.00
TOP01 1.00
RCP dia. 225 class Y1 0.2251
give way sign *
  *

You may need to tidy up the names with GC01, SNR or CHNGNAME first.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 CHNGNAME

Replace characters in names based on a dictionary.

Replace characters in names of selected records according to a selected dictionary file.

Change the name of selected objects by replacing any string of characters in the name that matches the left-hand field from the list with the corresponding string of characters in the right-hand field. Where there is no match, the name is not modified.

Do not use to change names of blocks or text.

Options

Recs:
Select any objects to be renamed.
Stop after 1st Match
Matches are found by working down the dictionary file in order. Stop after the first match or allow multiple changes to the name.
Start Char Loc: and End:
Limit changes to within a range of character positions
Dic:
Enter the name and location of a dictionary file created in a text editor. Use ' and , for delimiters. End the file with an empty new line.
Browse
Browse to select a dictionary file
Edit
Edit the dictionary file in the text editor which is the default app for that file type. For example, use Windows Settings to chose Notepad as the default app for .dic files.
OK
Modify the names according to the dictionary
Cancel
Close the command without modifying names

Examples

C:\TMCUSTOM\​Geocomp\​CHNGNAME.DIC is an example of a dictionary file for substituting CGRDVOL grid labels.


'Row   1 Col   1','A1'

'Row   1 Col   2','B1'

'Row   1 Col   3','C1'

'Row   1 Col   4','D1'

'Row   1 Col   5','E1'

'Row   2 Col   6','A2'

'Row   2 Col   7','B2'

'Row   2 Col   8','C2'

'Row   2 Col   9','D2'

'Row   2 Col  10','E2'

See also

CHNGTEXT
Change multiple text objects using a dictionary file.
SNR
Find and Replace in objects
SNRFILE
Find and Replace in external files
CHTXT
Find and replace stations with chainages

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 RDES
 CHNGTEXT

Replace selected text based on a dictionary.

Replace characters in selected text records according to a dictionary file.

Change selected text objects by replacing any string of characters in the text that matches the left-hand field from the list with the corresponding string of characters in the right-hand field.

Matches are found by working down the dictionary file in order.

Options

Text:
Select text
Match text width
If the new text is a different length, adjust the text width attributes to maintain the previous length.
Stop after First Match
Stop after the first match or allow multiple changes to the text.
Dic:
Enter the name and location of a dictionary file created in a text editor. Use ' and , for delimiters. End the file with an empty new line.
Browse
Browse to select a dictionary file
Edit
Edit the dictionary file in the text editor which is the default app for that file type. For example, use Windows Settings to chose Notepad as the default app for .dic files.
OK
Modify the text according to the dictionary
Cancel
Close the command without modifying text

Examples

Create your dictionary in a text editor or edit a copy of C:\TMCUSTOM\​GEOCOMP\​CHNGTEXT.DIC.

Refer to characters by their three-​digit decimal ASCII value. For example, \010 for new line and \176 for degree (°) sign. What you see depends on the font. Not all fonts contain all characters. For example, in some fonts degree sign is \127. Using fonts such as symbol.fnt, you can specify a symbol by this method.

EAT codes are treated like any other text. For example, '\SUB{Z,3}','\SUB{Z,4}' modifies the number of displayed decimal places in elevations from three to four. If the EAT includes a Name, use CHNGNAME to change the name instead.

These are examples of using a dictionary to change the presentation language:


#Dictionary file format

# Lines with first char as # are ignored

#  use ' character as limiter

#'Current Text','New Text'

#

#'English',​'Espanol'

'Feasibility Study',​'Estudio de factibilidad'

'Road design',​'D seño decarretera'

'North',​'Norte'

'Cross-Section',​'Corte'

#

#'English',​'Francais'

'CHAINAGE',​'PK'

'CH',​'PK'

'SCALES',​'ECHELLE'

'SCALE',​'ECHELLE'

'Scale',​'Echelle'

'LONGITUDINAL SECTION',​'Profil en Long'

'CROSS SECTIONS',​'Profil en Travers'

'OFFSET',​'Distance du centre'

In the example above, 'CHAINAGE' is listed above 'CH'. If instead 'CH' is listed before 'CHAINAGE', and "Stop after 1st match" is not been selected, you get 'PKAINAGE', not 'PK'.

See also

SNR
Find and Replace
SNRFILE
Find and Replace in external files
CHNGNAME
Change names by dictionary file
CHTXT
Change station text to chainage text

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 514
 CHOSDIFF

Report chainage, offset and height difference for selected selected points from DTM.

Select a HAL, a Design DTM and some points and then report the Point Number, Chainage, Offset, Point Elevation, Design DTM Elevation, Elevation Difference and Name.

If you also select an Existing DTM, the report shows Ch, Offset, Design elevation, Point elevation, elevation differences from point to design, diff from existing to design, and Name.

The report can include Easting and Northing, a stripping depth and comma-separation for saving as a .CSV

TML date  Source
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250
 CHTXT

Convert stationing text to chainage text.

Convert text objects representing distance along an alignment from USA stationing format, for example nn+nnn.nn, to UK and Australian chainage format, for example CH nnnnn.nn.

See also CHNGTEXT and SNR.

TML date  Source
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250
 CIRCLE

Create a circular pline.

Create a closed pline of four equal arcs centred on a specified location, with a specified radius.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Pline|​Circle S 29
 CLEANUP

Remove superfluous points from sets and plines.

Remove duplicate sequential, 2D and arc points from selected sets and vertices from zero-length plines. Any such accidentally created points and vertices can cause commands to behave in unexpected ways.

More precisely:

  • Delete from sets every point that has the same point number as the previous point,
  • Delete the last point in a set if it is an arc centre,
  • Delete sets which are zero-length arcs,
  • Remove all centre-points from two-point sets,
  • Remove from zero-length plines all splines and any more than two vertices, and
  • Relayer to layer 0 every point in a set that has no elevation and is at the same X,Y location as any point with an elevation.
  • Report all the changes, if requested.

See also DUPLTRIS.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 30
 CLEARMESS

Clear text from the message scroll window.

See also MESSAGESCROLL.

Command dateGuideMenuSource146
12/03/09HELPTM Windows|​Clear message scroll S 146
 CLIP

Clip plines and sets to boundaries.

Clip plines or sets where they cross selected closed boundaries.

Each object is broken at every boundary, then clipped parts are deleted.

Mode

Inside
Break selected objects crossing the boundaries then delete all parts inside any of the boundaries.
Outside
Break selected objects crossing the boundaries then delete all parts not inside all of the boundaries.
Break
Break all objects at the boundaries without deleting any parts.

The boundaries can be closed plines or text objects. The clipping boundary of text objects is at the extent of the text scaled by the text clip margin defined in DRAFTSET. The location of the insertion point determines whether the text is inside or outside.

  • To clip multiple objects outside one closed boundary, use CLIP Outside.
  • To clip multiple objects inside one closed boundary, use CLIP Inside.
  • To break multiple objects at one closed boundary, use CLIP Break.
  • To break one set or pline at a location, use BREAK.
  • To remove segments from sets or plines, use DELETE​SEGMENT.
  • To clip multiple objects outside all selected boundaries, use CLIPOUT.
  • To trim or extend multiple plines to an open boundary, use GCEXTEND.
  • To trim one pline or set to a distance or to one or more boundaries, use TRIM.
  • To trim or extend selected plines to a maximum length, use GC88.
  • To clip DTMs, use GCCLIP.
  • To clip and merge DTMs, use DTMMATCH, GC33, GC33MULT, GCCLIP or GCMERGE.
  • To automatically clip contours, profiles and cross sections from dead regions, see SETSMOOTH.
  • To clip Xlines, use GCXLINES.
  • To clip hatching or other blocks, use EXPLODE or GCEXPLOD then CLIP Outside.
  • To clip a block to a dynaview, see BLOCK and SCLBLKS.
  • To clip an image, use IMAGE Clip or Dynaimage.
  • To clip subsurface lines in cross sections, see RDDESIGNSET.
  • To clip a road template at a surface, see SHAPE Tie to ground.
  • To clip contours under labels during creation, use CONTOURSET .
  • To clip objects to text, use CLIP Inside.
  • To create solid hatching behind text, use TEXTBACK. If the hatching is the same colour as the background, this looks the same as clipping objects to text.
  • To display objects obscured by other objects, use RENUMREC.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Edit|​Clip S 254
 CLIPOUT

Clip objects outside multiple boundaries.

Clip all objects outside all selected boundaries.

Break selected objects at selected boundaries then delete all parts of the selected objects outside any of the boundaries.

For other variations on clipping, see CLIP.

The TML name is CLIP_OUT. If CLIPOUT does not run from the command line, create an alias from CLIPOUT to CLIP_OUT or enter CLIP_OUT.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 CLOSE

Close the current project without exiting Terramodel.

Close the current project file (.PRO) and the corresponding project lock (.PLK) file that was opened with the project.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM File|​Close project S 255
 CLOSEFIG

Close selected sets and plines.

For selected sets and plines, create a segment from the end to the start.

Optionally, use name masks from a file.

See also ISCLOSED.

TML date MenuSourceGeocomp
29/10/08   Edit|​Close lines S 126
 CMD

Open Windows command prompt.

Open Windows command prompt.

See also COMMAND, EXEC and RUN.

Batch date  SourceGC
13/05/18    Geocomp Update or $200 200
 COLOR

Modify the color of selected objects.

Modify the color number of selected objects to a single specified color number in the range 0 to 255.

Objects with color 0 are reported as having color BYLAYER, and are displayed in the point or line color of their layer.

Blocks with Map Color flag turned ON are displayed in the color of the block. Blocks with Map Color flag turned OFF are displayed in the color of the objects in the block.

Since Terramodel 10.40, COLOR command is normally installed with US English but not with British English.

If COLOR command is not available, either

  • Enter COLOUR at the command line
  • ALIAS from COLOUR to COLOR
  • , or
  • Install COLOR.TML available from Geocomp Systems.

TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
10/10/18HELPTM Modify|​Color S 40
 COLORCODE

Modify the colour of points relative to a tunnel design.

Modify the colour of points by 3D distance from the current roadway.

Operation

  1. Create and make current a roadway template defining a tunnel
  2. Use TUNNELDTM to unwrap a layer of points to be compared with the tunnel design
  3. Run COLORCODE to select points and modify colours
    Tunnel Layer
    Select an unwrapped layer of points to compare with the design
    Select points:
    Select points on the selected layer
    Settings
    Limits and ranges
    Assign colour numbers within ranges of 3D distances.
    Create|Modify point
    Create new points on a new layer or modify the colour of existing points
    Layer
    Specify a new layer for new points
    Assign offset to elevation
    Assign 3D distances to the elevations of new points
    Interpolation spacing
    Interpolate 3D distances from cross sections extracted at the specified spacing
    Colour
    Modify the colours
    Close
    Close the command

See also

COLORPT
Modify colour all points on layer by elevation and contour interval
HDMS
Modify colour by depth

Installation

Since Terramodel 10.40, COLORCODE is normally installed with US English but not with British English.

If COLORCODE is not available, try

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09 Tunnel Training Guide Tunnels|​Modify color codes S 342
 COLORCON

Change the colour of plines by contour interval.

Increment the colour number of selected pline contours based on elevation.

Change the colour of plines, with elevations, within each normal contour interval, to the next colour number. The colour numbers increment by 1 and repeat when the specified number of colours is reached.

Use COLORCON with other commands. Here are some examples:

Bands of colour

To colour isopachs of pavement depth at 0.1m intervals in 1.0m bands

  1. CONTOURSET the normal interval to 0.1 and Index interval to 1
  2. CONTOUR the isopach surface
  3. CONTOURSET the normal interval to 1.0
  4. COLORCON with, say 20, colours—a number large enough so the colours don't start repeating
  5. Modify COLOUR by colour if required.

Reduce the number of contours

To remove every second contour pline supplied at an interval of 0.25

  1. CONTOURSET the normal interval to 0.25
  2. COLORCON with number of colours = 2
  3. DELETE the contour plines with elevations ending in .25 or .75 by colour

Ribbon effect

To modify the colour to match the last digit of the elevation

  1. CONTOURSET the normal interval to 1
  2. CONTOUR the surface
  3. COLORCON with number of colours = 10

Contours with an elevation ending in 1 will be coloured 1, those ending in 2 will be coloured 2, and so on. Contours with an elevation ending in zero (0) will have colour 15 as the colour, since zero is reserved to designate colour by layer.

Change Index contour

To change the index contour of supplied contour plines from 0.25 to 1.0

  1. CONTOURSET the normal interval to 0.25
  2. COLORCON with number of colours = 4
  3. RELAYER the 1.0 interval contour plines by colour
  4. COLOUR the contours by layer

If your contour interval is less than 1.0m, use the COLORCON installed with the Geocomp Update.

COLOURCON is an alias for COLORCON.

See also

COLORPT
Modify point colours by contour interval
GCCOLCON
Colour contours by cut and fill
SHADEDTM
Hatch by elevation range
3DVISUALISER
Create an image coloured by elevation range
COLORCODE or COLOURCODE
Modify point colours by 3D distances from the current roadway.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Modify|​Colour contours by interval
Modify|​Color contours by interval
Modify|​Colour code contours
Modify|​Color code contours
Geocomp Update or $200 156
 COLORPT

Modify the colour of points by contour interval.

Modify the colour number of selected points by increment withing elevation ranges.

Modify the colour of points by elevation ranges determnined by the normal interval in CONTOURSET. The colour numbers increment by 1 and repeat when the specified number of colours is reached.

Colouring points by elevation helps you visualize the direction of the ground slope and identify points considered spikes or depressions.

Colour 15 is used in place of colour 0. If you specify the number of colours as 5, the colour numbers used will be 15, 1, 2, 3, and 4.

For example, to colour points within bands of 1.0m elevation,

  1. CONTOURSET the normal interval to 1.0
  2. COLORCON with number of colours large enough so the colours don't start repeating
  3. Modify COLOUR by colour if required.

See also

COLORCON
Colour contour plines by interval in a similar way
COLORCODE or COLOURCODE
Modify point colours by 3D distances from the current roadway.

TML dateGuide SourceGC
01/09/18 Tunnel Training Guide   S 156
 COLOUR

Modify the colour of selected objects.

Change the colour number of selected objects to a single specified colour number in the range 0 to 255.

Objects with colour 0 are reported as having colour BYLAYER, and are displayed in the point or line colour of their layer.

Blocks with Map Colour flag turned ON are displayed in the colour of the block. Blocks with Map Colour flag turned OFF are displayed in the colour of the objects in the block.

Since Terramodel 10.40, COLOUR command is normally installed with British English but not with US English.

If COLOUR command is not available, either

  • Enter COLOR at the command line
  • ALIAS from COLOR to COLOUR
  • , or
  • Install COLOUR.TML available from Geocomp Systems.

Command date MenuSourceGC
10/10/18   Modify|​Colour S 40
 COLOURCODE

Modify the colour of points relative to a tunnel design.

Modify the colour of points by 3D distance from the current roadway.

Operation

  1. Create and make current a roadway template defining a tunnel
  2. Use TUNNELDTM to unwrap a layer of points to be compared with the tunnel design
  3. Run COLOURCODE to select points and modify colours
    Tunnel Layer
    Select an unwrapped layer of points to compare with the design
    Select points:
    Select points on the selected layer
    Settings
    Limits and ranges
    Assign colour numbers within ranges of 3D distances.
    Create|Modify point
    Create new points on a new layer or modify the colour of existing points
    Layer
    Specify a new layer for new points
    Assign offset to elevation
    Assign 3D distances to the elevations of new points
    Interpolation spacing
    Interpolate 3D distances from cross sections extracted at the specified spacing
    Colour
    Modify the colours
    Close
    Close the command

See also

COLORPT
Modify colour all points on layer by elevation and contour interval
HDMS
Modify colour by depth

Installation

Since Terramodel 10.40, COLOURCODE is normally installed with British English but not with US English.

If COLOURCODE is not available, try

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09 Tunnel Training Guide Tunnels|​Modify colour codes S 342
 COLRLINE

Modify colours and linetypes of selected objects by layer.

Modify the colours and linetypes of selected objects according the layer of the object and a mapping file. The file format is

layer,colour,linetype

See geocomp.lcl for an example.

COLORLINE and COLOURLINE alias to COLRLINE. See also LAYERMAP, GC16 and GC16ADC.

Command dateGuide Source 
12/03/09HELPTM   Geocomp Update or $250  
 COMMAND

Command line.

Open a new command line.

Open a new command line so that a command can be entered from the keyboard while another command is still active.

To start a new command line, select Command from the File menu or press Ctrl+Shift+C.

If you open a new command line while you are still in a command, when this command is complete, control is returned to the previous command.

If the command line has disappeared, see Command​Toggle.

See also CMD.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM File|​Command line
Settings|​Command line
S  
 Command​Toggle

Toggle on or off the visibility of the command line.

Toggle an invisible command line on, select Command line from the Window menu.

The command line toggle only controls visibility, unlike COMMAND in the File menu which opens a new command line on top of the current command.

Command​Toggle is an ALIAS to MACRO​PLAY COMMANDTOGGLE which simulates the Command line command in the Window menu.

Macro date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Window|​Command line
File|​Macro|​Play|​command​toggle
S
User-​definable
 
 COMPASS

Place a compass rose.

Place a compass rose block with true north and optional magnetic deviation and date of survey.

Requires comp-tn.blk and comp-mn.blk which are supplied with the TML.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 616
 COMPGRID

Compactor Grid Settings.

Compactor Grid Settings.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 CONFORM

Report road thickness conformance.

Report whether a road design and subgrade have been constructed with a pavement thickness within tolerance.

Compare selected as-built survey points with a roadway design surface.

The design surface could be a roadway or a finish surface defined in surface manager.

In the Settings, specify a bottom DTM for thickness calculations, a chainage grouping distance, a depth from design, upper and lower elevation tolerances and maximum and minimum thicknesses.

The report shows, for each as-built point within the roadway, the chainage, horizontal offset, point elevation, roadway elevation, point conformance and pavement thickness.

The point conformance compares the elevation of each surveyed point with the elevation of the design surface, less any specified depth from design. If the elevation difference is out of tolerance, the report also shows the tolerance and the amount outside tolerance.

The pavement thickness check compares the elevation of each surveyed point with the bottom DTM. If the thickness is out of tolerance, the report shows the maximum or minimum thickness and the amount outside tolerance.

The report also includes a summary with tolerance percentages, maxima, minima and standard deviation.

For example, suppose you are constructing a road with 130mm (+/- 5mm) asphalt over 300mm (+/-10mm) crushed rock. Construct the subgrade at what's supposed to be 430mm below design. Survey the subgrade to get the "Bottom DTM". Place the rock. Survey again to get "AsBuilt Pts". In CONFORM command, select the design road and AsBuilt Pts. In Settings, enter a depth from design of 0.13, maximum thickness of 0.310 and minimum thickness of 0.290. Reconstruct the rock surface where outside conformance. Resurvey. Rerun CONFORM with the new AsBuilt Pts and other values the same to prove conformance and to create a new Bottom DTM. Place the asphalt. Survey the asphalt. Rerun CONFORM with same design road, new AsBuilt Pts, depth from design 0.00, max thickness 0.135 and min thickness 0.125.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $500  
 CONNECT

Connect two plines or sets across a gap.

Connect two plines or two sets to form a single pline or set connected by a new segment across the gap between the ends nearest to the selected locations.

Pick anywhere on the object nearest the end that you wish to be connected to the other line.

The resulting object retains the properties of the first object including colour and record number. Any objects that refer to either object line thereafter refer to the modified object.

Tick "Repeat" to select the other end of the second line as the nearest end of the first line. Click Cancel to close the command.

See also JOIN which requires the ends to have common locations.

TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
29/10/08 RG 149 Edit|​Connect S 15
 CONTENTS

Function key F1

Help Contents.

Open Contents page with Help for Terramodel.

Open a Table of Contents, Index and Search tabs for Terramodel Help, Import-Export Help and Raw Data Editor Help. CONTENTS can be enabled on any Windows version prior to Windows 10.

These Help pages describe standard commands which are included with all Terramodel 10.61 licences and may require additional modules.

Table of Contents

  • Terramodel
    • How to use Terramodel
    • Menu Options
    • Terramodel Commands
    • Terramodel and Geodimeter
  • Import-Export
    • Download/Import Introduction
    • Export/Upload Introduction
    • Device Options
    • Download
    • Import (Command)
    • Export (Command)
    • Upload
    • Import/Export Scripts
    • Import/Export Script Managers
  • The Raw Data Editor
    • Intro to the Raw data Editor
    • RDE Features
    • Field Data Reduction - Fast Start
    • RDE Dialog box
    • Terramodel Graphics Interface
    • Surveying Basics with RDE
    • RDE - Calculation methods
    • Key names, Data Tags

Other ways to get Help

If CONTENTS is enabled, pressing F1 while using any of these standard commands, often opens Help at a relevant page.

If Geocomp Update L, M or N has been installed, Index tabs for specific Help files are also available from Index or Index + Search in the Help menu of menu files supplied by Geocomp Systems that can be selected from C:\​TMCustom\​Geocomp with MENUCFG.

Help files can be opened at the command line by entering HELPTM, HELPIE, HELPRDE, HELPTOOLBOX, HELPTVL, HELPTV or HELPGFE.

GFE, RDE, TOOLBOX, TV and 3D Visualiser commands have Help in their menus.

This TMLLIST includes all the commands in the Help and many other commands.

WinHlp32

CONTENTS requires Microsoft WinHlp32 to be installed. WinHlp32 is standard for Windows XP, optional for Windows Vista, 7, 8 and 8.1 and not available for Windows 10. If WinHlp32 is not enabled, a webpage with further instructions and links to the required Microsoft update will open instead. See How to use Terramodel Help for more information.

See also ABOUT, GCHELP and DOCUMENTS.

Command date   MenuSource 
12/03/09   Help|​Contents
Help|​Index|​Terramodel
Help|​Index|​Import + export
Help|​Index|​Raw data editor
Help|​Index|​Toolbox
Help|​Index|​3D Visualizer
Help|​Index|​3D Visualiser
Help|​Index|​Visualiser Complete
Help|​Index|​Geodimeter file editor
Function key F1
S
Geocomp Update
 
 CONTOUR

Extract pline contours from a DTM.

Create plines interpolated from a DTM at elevation intervals.

The extent of the DTM is controlled by LINKSET Settings.

The intervals, labelling, linetypes and layers are controlled by CONTOUR​SET.

The contours are created in the view that has the most contourable points on the specified layer. This DTM view is not necessarily the Plan view or the current view.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM DTM|​Contour S 289
 Contour​AtElev

Create plines at a specified contour elevation.

Create contour plines everywhere a specified elevation intersects a specified DTM layer.

The labelling and minimum length are controlled by CONTOUR​SET.

Command date Guide Menu Source GC
12/03/09 HELPTM DTM|​Generate contours at elev S DTM 4
 CONTOUR​SET

Configure contour settings.

Set the contour interval and labeling values for use by contouring commands.

For example, to CONTOUR at 0.25 m intervals and label index contours at 1.0 m intervals, specify a Normal interval of 0.25, an Index interval of 4 and a Label nth contour value of 4

Labeling

Label nth contour
The label interval factor, or the number of normal intervals per labelled contour
Dist. between labels
The distance along the contours at which the labels will be placed
Label text style
The text style used to label the contours
Border style
The text border style for the contour labels
Mirror elevation
Label contours with negative elevations with positive values, and vice versa
Clip lines under labels
Clip index contour lines within their elevation labels with text clip margins set by DRAFTSET
Force placement of labels
Place labels based strictly on the distance between labels, or move the label at bends if needed. Clipping text at bends can change the shape of contours.
Label contours
Label those contours with elevations that are evenly divisible by the normal interval multiplied by the label nth contour interval factor
Label ends of open contours
Label the ends of open contour plines

Line construction

Normal interval
Create normal contour plines on contour layers where the elevation is evenly divisible by the normal interval but not by the index interval
Index interval
Create contour plines on index contour layers where the elevation is evenly divisible by the normal interval multiplied by the index interval factor
Minimum length
Enter the minimum length of contour plines
Splining
None
Do not smooth contour plines
B Spline
Smooth contour plines using B-spline curves which pass inside the control points (vertices)
Overhauser
Smooth contour plines with Overhauser curves that pass through the control points (vertices) and remain tangential to line segments
Exponential
Create contours at exponential intervals for surfaces such as bacterial concentration and corrosivity
Show depression contours
Creates the lowest contour line in a depression using a specified linetype such as DEPRESSION

Layer assignment

Normal
Specify the layer for normal contours. You can use * as a wildcard for the DTM layer name. For example, enter *_CON to create normal contours extracted from the DTM_EXIST layer on layer DTM_EXIST_CON.
Index
Specify the layer for index contours. You can use * as a wildcard for the DTM layer name. For example, enter *_ICON to create index contours extracted from the DTM_EXIST layer on layer DTM_EXIST_ICON.
Overwrite layers
Delete all objects on the contour and index contour layers before creating new contour plines

See also CONTOUR​ATELEV to create a contour at one elevation only, COLORCON to colour plines by interval, COLORPT to colour points by interval, COLORCON to colour by positive or negative elevation, GCMULCON and GCONECON to set contour elevations of plines by interval, LABEL​CONTOURS to label individual contours and LINKSET to display quick contours at the normal interval.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Settings|​Contour settings S 43
 CONTOUR​VOL

Compute volumes from contour plines.

Computes volumes for individual mounds or depressions based on contour plines.

The volumes are obtained by using the average-end-area method, where the area of a closed contour is determined, then averaged with an adjacent contour, and multiplied by the contour interval to obtain an incremental volume. Incremental volumes are then added together to obtain a total volume.

This method is less accurate than that of the EARTHWORK command, but can provide an alternative approximation of mound and depression volumes.

You can use the ContourVol command in two different modes:

Line
Select a series of closed contour plines representing a mound or depression. Click the Volume button to display the accumulated volume in the message scroll area. If you wish to display a more detailed report that can be saved or sent to a printer, click the Report button.
Digitizer
Digitize closed contours representing a mound or depression.
  1. Input the elevation of the first contour using the Elev elevation control.
  2. Digitize a series of points for the first contour using the Loc point control. You must provide a minimum of three points for each contour.
  3. If you select points by typing coordinates in the Loc point control, click the Pt. button to enter the point and proceed to the next point.
  4. When you are done digitising points, click the End button to close the contour.
  5. Repeat for successive contours until you have defined the mound or depression.
  6. Click the Report button to display a detailed report that can be saved or sent to a printer.

The selected contours must be closed, assigned an elevation, and form a continuously rising mound or a continuously falling depression. If the contours are open due to labels, use GCMATCH to create plines across the gaps, then JOIN the contours.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM DTM|​Volumes from contours S DTM V
 CONVDMS

Convert degrees, minutes and seconds (DMS) to decimal degrees or decimal to DMS.

Convert X and Y coordinates of selected points from ddd.mmss format to decimal degrees or decimal degrees to ddd.mmss format.

For example, a point at 123°27′24.4″ East, 89°39′15.6″ North, imported into Terramodel at 123.27244,89.39156, can be transformed by CONVDMS into decimal degrees at 123.45678, 89.65433.

DMS data can be stored in real-number fields using ddd.mmss format long as the applications that process those fields understand how to parse them. These can be imported from .CSV files into Terramodel as X and Y coordinates without error messages, but such coordinates will be incorrect for use in Terramodel until they are transformed to decimal degrees. Often, such coordinates are then transformed to metres or feet.

If your ASCII data includes other characters such as °, or spaces, remove them before importing into Terramodel.

Functions

Pts:
Select points to be transformed
From DDD.MMSS to DEC Degrees
Specify transformation from DMS to Decimal degrees
From DEC Degrees to DDD.MMSS
Specify transformation from Decimal degrees to DMS
Report
Report the new coordinates to P3Pad
Swap X and Y
Swap Lat|Long to Long|Lat during the transformation if required
OK
Complete the transformation
Cancel
Close the command without transforming any points

To convert from decimal degrees to feet or metres, use GCCOORD or COORDCON to select a From coordinate system with a name that starts with LL.

GCCOORD expresses and expects Latitudes south of the equator to be expressed as negative values. To convert Northings to Southings or vice versa, use GC56 with Y*-1.

The TML name is CONV_DMS. If CONVDMS does not run from the command line, create an alias from CONVDMS to CONV_DMS or enter CONV_DMS.

TML date  Source 
16/09/20     Geocomp Update or $200  
 CONVERT

Convert sets to plines or plines to sets.

Convert sets to plines or plines to sets. Any lines that are already of the desired type are not converted.

Colour, linetypes and layer names are retained. Names, start chainage and other attributes are not retained.

Convert Options

Lines
Select the lines to be converted
To (Set or Pline)
Select the desired type of lines
Del old
Delete the original lines
Dup pts ok
If ON, create all new points for sets; if OFF, connect sets to any existing points at the vertices
Lay
Create the new plines or sets on the current layer. If OFF, create on the same layer as the original object.

Tips on using Convert

GCCONVRT
GCCONVRT is an alternative which retains all the attributes such as Name and is much faster.
Dup pts ok
CONVERT can take a long time to convert a lot of plines to sets, especially if "Dup pts ok" is OFF.
Duplicate point removal
Use DTM formation or GC31 instead of CONVERT to remove duplicate points.
Elevation
When converting a set to a pline, the elevation of the new pline is derived from the first point in the set.
Plines and sets
You will keep or lose information specific to the object type. Plines converted to sets lose any spirals and splines. Sets converted to plines lose links to points and therefore their elevations. Sets which are lots lose lot number labels.
Visibility
Any hidden sets segments are omitted resulting in multiple plines. To control the visibility of set segments see DISPLAY​SET Ignore hide, HIDE and REVEAL.
Arcs
When converting a pline to a set, a new point object is created for the radius point and at each PC and PT. If multiple arcs use the same arc points, duplicate points will be created at each arc point.
Chords
To create new sets or plines made up of straight segments, use GCCHORD.
Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Edit|​Convert S 292
 CONVSET

Set slope convention.

Define the slope convention (ratio preference) according your local practice.

Choose either Horizontal run: vertical rise (e.g. 4:1) or Vertical rise: horizontal run (e.g. 1:4).

These conventions can be overridden by Terramodel settings or report formats. Even within the one project, the convention may vary, so check in each case.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Settings|​​Convention settings S  
 COORDCON

Convert between coordinate systems with a look-up table that emphasises USA and UTM.

Convert points, plines, blocks and text between predefined geodetic coordinate systems using predefined ellipsoids and datums by the seven-​parameter or NTv2 distortion grid method.

Operation

Select From and To Coordinate Systems
Select Search to select the From and To coordinate systems.
World regions
Select a region of the world then select a system from that region from the drop-down list.
Define ellipsoid | Define datum | Define CS
If desired coordinate systems are not in any of the regional lists, new ellipsoids, datums and coordinate systems can be defined. Geocomp Systems adds new definitions requested by Customer Care Members. Add coordinate systems from a file by ADDMAPSY.
List selected
List details of the selected coordinate system.
List all
List details of every available ellipsoid, datum and coordinate system.
Any point
List the coordinates of a location in both From and To coordinate systems.
Multiple objects
Select Objs:
Select objects to be transformed.
List
List the coordinates of selected points in both From and To coordinate systems.
Convert
Transform the coordinates of select objects from the From coordinate system to the To coordinate system.

Notes

The look-up tables in COORDCON emphasise USA and UTM coordinate systems. GCCOORD is a similar command that transforms the same coordinate systems but which emphasises Australian and New Zealand systems. Both call the same Mentor database files COORDSYS, DATUMS and ELIPSOID files in C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared\​Mentor.dir. Both commands require COGO module. "List selected" in GCCOORD shows more details.

Coordinate systems with names that start with LL use latitudes and longitudes. The others use eastings and northings.

The principles and operation are described in detail in Terramodel 10 User's Guide Chapter 13: Using Coordcon

Commands that transform coordinates using the same database

GCLLGRID
Draw Latitude and Longitude grids and labels
FYATBOUT, GCKMLIN, GCKMLOUT, LLTABLE and SHADOW
Some other related commands

Commands that use other transformation systems

GC07 and GRIDPLAN
Transform when either coordinate system is not geodetic
MEASUNIT
Convert between foot and metre coordinate systems
CSM and GEOSYS
Manage Trimble coordinate systems
HELPGEOCALC
Help for GeoCalc 4.20, a stand-alone 7-parameter tranformation application.

TML, LUT or DLL date GuideMenu SourceGC
01/09/18 UG 401
Nav notes
Cogo|​Utilities|​Coordinate conversion
HDMS|​Coordinate|​Coordinate transformation
Geocomp Update or $200 Geo​Calc
 COORDS

Display the Coordinate Scroll.

Display cursor coordinate data on a separate scroll dialog.

The data displayed varies depending on the current command, the current control type (locate, bearing, distance, offset, station, point, etc.) and the active view mode (plan, profile, sheet, cross section, etc.).

Coordinate Scroll Options

COORDINATES
When the cursor is in the Plan view, the scroll displays the Northing and Easting. In the profile view, it displays the station and elevation; in the cross section view, the offset and elevation; and in the sheet view, X and Y.
GPS COORDINATES
Reserved for future use.
3-D DIGITIZER
Used when the digitizer responds with X, Y and Z values.
DELTA COORDINATES
Show the change in coordinate values from the anchor point to the rubber band cursor in the current view mode units.
BEARING-​DISTANCE
Show the bearing and distance from the anchor point to the rubber band cursor when in the plan view mode. In the profile or cross section views, show the grade and distance.
CHAINAGE( or STATION)-​OFFSET
With a rubber band cursor and an active chainage control, the chainage and offset relative to a selected alignment is shown in the plan view mode. When the cursor is rubber banding in the plan view, a single line showing the chainage will be shown in profile view and the offset in the cross section view. When rubber banding in the profile view mode the chainage and the difference in elevation from the selected alignment to the cursor is shown.
LAYER-​ELEVATION
Shows the current DTM layer and the elevation on the DTM at the cursor location. Set the current DTM layer first using DTMCH, SPOT or some other command that requires a DTM.
SLOPE-​ASPECT
Shows the slope of the TIN on the current DTM layer at the cursor location and the direction of the surface slope. This option must be used in conjunction with the above layer-​elevation option, to establish the current DTM layer.
VISIBLE
Controls the visibility of the coordinate scroll.
SAVE
Saves the current settings to the TMODWIN.INI file and exits the command.
DONE
Keeps the current settings for the current session without updating the TMODWIN.INI file and exits the command.

Coordinate Scroll tips

  • Use the title bar to drag the scroll to a new location.
  • Minimize the scroll to an icon by clicking its minimize button.
  • Maximize the scroll by double-clicking the minimized Coordinates icon.
  • The coordinate scroll always opens on the primary display, even if you moved it to another display.
  • VIEWSET configures the coordinate scroll labels in each view.
  • Control the number of decimal places for CoordScroll display, and the precision of graphically entered points using a digitizer, by adding or modifying CoordNdec=x in TMODWIN.INI under [CoordScroll].
  • Fix Status Bar / System, etc in EDITINI makes the coordinate scroll visible with coordinates, bearings, distances, stations and offsets, moves the scroll to a fixed location, updates the number of decimal places to match UNITSSET Precision.
  • If you lose the coordinate scroll, check that the scroll is "Visible". The scroll always opens on the primary display, and then can be moved to another display. If you still can't find the coordinate scroll, use RECOVERSCROLL or CORDSCRL or Fix Status Bar / System, etc in EDITINI.
  • Import [CoordScroll] settings from an .INI with EDITINI.

See also

GC75
Report distance and grade between sets or plines
IDSTATION
Report station | Chainage at cursor
GCDTMDIF
Report DTM differences at cursor
GCSPOT
Report DTM elevation at cursor
GCDTMDIF
Report DTM differences at cursor

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Window|​Coordinate scroll S SDS
 COPY

Copy selected objects to a new location or layer.

Duplicate selected objects on a new layer or at a new location.

Options

3d
If ticked, specify the From and To coordinates as X,Y,Z, rather than X,Y.
Lay
If ticked, copy the objects to the current layer, otherwise to their original layers.
From
If not blank, the location from which the distance and direction is computed.
From
If not blank, the location to which the distance and direction is computed

Tips

  • The coordinate order is controlled by VIEWSET.
  • The objects are moved by the distance and direction from the From location to the To location.
  • To enter a known coordinate shift, enter 0,0 (or 0,0,0 if 3D), in "From" and dX,dY( or dX,dY,dZ) in "To".
  • To assign starting point numbers for new points, use the "Start Pn" setting of POINTSET.
  • Not all properties are retained. For example, colours, names and contourability can be modified or omitted.
  • To copy objects to another layer without changing their location, while retaining many of the properties, use GCCOPY.
  • To make multiple copies, use MULTICOPY.
Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Edit|​Copy S 178
 COPYROAD

Copy a roadjob to a new roadjob.

Copy a roadjob to a new roadjob retaining all roadways, registered alignments and phases.

This allows you to quickly recompute a new design without having to re-enter all the values or lose the old design.

The Settings allow you to choose whether to copy surfaces, design templates, subgrade templates, skips, super­elevations, design settings or mass haul information.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 415
 COPYRWAY

Copy one roadjob into a different roadjob.

Copy all roadways from one road job to a different roadjob.

This allows you to merge two road jobs. To copy some roadways, copy the whole roadjob then delete the roadways you don't want.

The Settings allow you to choose whether to copy surfaces, design templates, subgrade templates or supe​relevations.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Roads|​More...|​Copy roadjob Geocomp Update or $200 415
 COPYTEMP

Copy a roadway template to other templates with the same name.

Update all design or subgrade templates in a roadway which have the same template name by copying the design of a nominated template.

This saves having to repeat the same edits to multiple templates with the same template name or repeatedly use the Copy button in TMANAGER.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Roads|​More|​Copy template Geocomp Update or $200 413
 CORDSCRL

Recover a lost coordinate scroll dialog.

If you cannot see the coordinate scroll dialog and you have made it Visible in COORDS, type CORDSCRL, or RECOVERSCROLL (an alias for CORDSCRL), to recover the scroll by resetting the scroll coordinates to approximately 600 pixels down and 600 across from the top left corner of the primary display. You can then move the scroll to where you prefer.

Visible coordinate scrolls always open on the primary display. You can then move the coordinate scroll to another display.

See also EDITINI which recovers the coordinate scroll position and visibility and resets other settings.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 SDS
 COUNT

Count the number of objects of each type in each view.

Report the number of points, plines, text, sets, tables, attributes, dynaviews or blocks that exist in the Plan, Profile, Sheet, XSect, Super, View6, View7 or View8 views.

Only used object types and populated views are counted.

See also

OLIST
A very similar command which is often an alias for COUNT
OLIST2
Count the same objects as COUNT and OLIST and report to P3pad
LAYINFO
Count the number of objects and points by layer for selected objects
DTMINFO
Count the number of points on DTM layers
LIST
List layers, objects, points, unused points, sets, plines and lots
VIEWSET
View settings including view names

TML date MenuSourceGC
13/12/18   Reports|​Count objects Geocomp Update or $250 SDS
 CREATELL

Import lists of layers in layer lists.

Import layer lists, layers, layer colours and layer linetypes from a file

The format of the input file is layer_list,​layer_name,​line_colour,​point_colour,​linetype.

Start all comment lines with the character "#". The first line should be a comment line. Include the word "Update" anywhere after the # on the first line to update all layers in the input file, otherwise colours and linetypes apply to new layers only.

If the file contains any new layers, you are prompted whether to import new layers or import only the layer lists and retain the pre-existing layers.

Only the layer list and layer name fields are required. Background prominence is not imported.

Use LLISTSET to check that the layer lists have been created correctly.

Use LLRPT to export a file suitable for use with CREATELL.

See also CSV2ADC to import a list of layers while creating an AutoDraft Configuration file.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 CROSSCHK

Check for crossing sets or plines.

Wherever selected sets or plines cross, create a point with the name "bl-cross" on layer CROSSING and labelled with symbol 40 (circle).

Any previously created points on layer CROSSING will be deleted.

You could, for example, use CROSSCHK look for crossing lines in a window on an isolated layer.

Use BLINECHK to check sets on a selected layer.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Reports|​​Mark|​​Crossing lines Geocomp Update or $250 43
 CROWFOOT

Toggle on|off arrowheads (crowfeet) from leader lines.

Select a segment label text object and toggle its configuration to either display or not display the crow's feet leader lines that point to the label from the end of the line segment.

If the label is a user-​mode label, toggling crowfeet off will restore the normal leader line established by this command's settings.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 RG 1223 Draft|​Crowfoot toggle S  
 CSM

Coordinate System Manager.

Manage coordinate systems used by Trimble devices only.

If you import a Trimble survey .DC file using the IMPORT script, the coordinate system defined in that file is imported into the .PRO file and used by specific Trimble-related commands. For this to work, the coordinate system must be present in the current system database file CURRENT.CSD. Coordinate System Manager manages CURRENT.CSD.

Use Coordinate System Manager to

  • Browse your parameters
  • Define a local grid
  • Establish a new site if you are working in an area that is not adequately covered by the definitions provided
  • Create or edit a site, zone, datum, ellipsoid, or geoid
  • Duplicate records
  • Select the projection used by a zone
  • Select the ellipsoid of any datum
  • Specify vertical and horizontal adjustments to a zone and save them as a named site
  • Select a geoid model
  • Assign the files to be used by a geoid model or datum transformation
  • Download the latest coordinate system definitions (.ggf) from Trimble
  • Save As a new CSD to replace CURRENT.CSD.

To open Coordinate System Manager, launch the .exe (see below), type CSM in Terramodel with Geocomp Update M or use another Trimble application such as Business Center.

Installation

Terramodel 10.61 installs old versions of Coordinate System Manager and coordinate system definitions and does not update them. To update to CSM 3.3.1.0 download, extract and then copy the files to C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Coordinate System Manager\. Trimble Business Center (TBC), Pathfinder and Geomatics Office (TGO) also install versions of CSM. Once CSM 3.3.1.0 or later is installed, run CSM and download the latest updates to the software and definitions.

CURRENT.CSD

Coordinate System Manager manages the CURRENT.CSD database. The Terramodel installation backs up CURRENT.CSD and replaces it with a old default. You can manually replace CURRENT.CSD with another of the same file name and location. That file could be a copy of one of the back-ups or one created by Save As in Coordinate System Manager. See Tools | Options menu in CSM for the location of CURRENT.CSD and .GGF files (which is usually C:\ProgramData\​Trimble\​GeoData).

Some Coordinate System Manager versions

VersionExecutableFor WindowsLogo colourFolder colour
2.80 C:\Program files\​​​Common Files\​​Trimble\​​Geodb\​​Geodb95.exe95 to 98BlueRed
2.90C:\​Program files\​​​Common Files\​​Trimble\​​Geodb\​Geodbnt.exe32-bitBlueRed
3.3.1.0C:\​​Program files (x86)\​​Trimble\​Coordinate System Manager\Coordinate​System​Manager.exe 64-bitGreenYellow

GeoSys

To view and change the Trimble coordinate system in a project file, see GEOSYS.

See also

COORDCON and GCCOORD
Transform coordinate systems without Coordinate System Manager
AUSGEOID and GC54
Apply AUSGeoid elevation adjustments without Coordinate System Manager.

Alias dateGuide Source 
01/09/18 In-built help   Geocomp Update  
 CSTAKE

Create custom construction staking reports.

Create roadway staking format files which allow you to control the format and content of roadway staking reports.

Open the Construction Staking command bar.

TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
29/10/08 RG 992 Road|​Reports|​Staking|​Construction S 41
 CSV2ADC

Create AutoDraft Configuration (.ADC) file from .CSV. or .MAP.

Convert a table of feature codes into an ASCII Auto​Draft Configuration (.ADC) file and create new layers for use with AUTO​DRAFT.

.CSV

Use a spreadsheet to populate fields following these examples and save as a .CSV:

Feature Code Layer Name Colour Point or Line Description Block name Line Type Text Category
102 TOP 0 L Top of bank   SOLID   Topo
TR Trees 3 P Tree foliage TREE8   Wattle Veg

.MAP

Select a .MAP file created for use in MAPPOINTS command in this format:

Feature code,​lineype,​layer name,​line colour number

Create layers

Select "Create layers" to also create new layers in the current project with the layer name, point or line colour and linetype.

Process

To convert your feature code list from .CSV to .ADC and use in AutoDraft:

  1. Make up a table of feature codes in a spreadsheet
  2. Save that table as .CSV
  3. Use CSV2ADC to convert the .CSV to an .ADC in ASCII format
  4. Edit the .ADC in a text editor, if you want
  5. Open the .ADC in the AutoDraft Editor
  6. Edit or add any extra information using the AutoDraft Editor
  7. Save the binary .ADC file
  8. Use the binary .ADC with AUTO​DRAFT.

Defaults

The fields and values written to the .ADC file are derived from feature codes in the .CSV or .MAP. Default global codes are added.

The AutoDraft Editor saves .ADC files in a binary .ADC format that can only be opened by AutoDraft.

See also

PTS2ADC
Create points for testing AutoDraft

TML date  SourceGC
05/04/19     Geocomp Update or $250 339
 CSV2TAB

Create table of text from .CSV or *.TXT file.

Create a table of text and plines from a comma-separated values (*.CSV) file or tab-separated (*.TXT) file.

Browse to select the input file and then select OK to create the table.

Settings

Loc
Enter the location of the top-left corner of the table.
Use first line in file as table heading
Create a heading on the first row of the table from the first line of the imput file.
Table heading
Enter a heading for the first row of the table. Leave blank to omit the heading row.
Heading Style
Select a text style for any heading.
Layer
Enter the layer for plines and text. The plines are created in the line colour.
Text style
Enter the text style for the data. Use a fixed-width font for numerical data.
Text Colour
Enter the colour for the text only.
Skip the first [ ] lines
Specify the number of lines at the beginning of the input file to be ignored.
Tab or Comma
Specify whether the input file is tab or comma-delimited.
Hatch background
Create hatching behind the table with specified pattern, colour and scale.

The height and width of the rows and columns are calculated from the text styles and view scale. The width of the columns vary to fit the longest text object in each column.

Lines of text with no delimiters are skipped. If your text includes commas, use a tab-delimited file. Both file formats can be saved from spreadsheet programs.

See also

GCTABLE
Create a coordinate table from points
LLTABLE
Create a coordinate table including latitude and longitude from points
TXTIN
Create rows of text from an external text file
TEXT
Create text which can include a link to an external file

TML date  Source 
24/10/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 CULDESAC

Create a cul-de-sac at the end of a pline or set.

SELECT ALIGNMENT
Select the horizontal alignment at the end of which a cul-de-sac will be created on the same layer as the HAL.
CULDESAC TYPE
Select one of four cul-de-sac types:
Knuckle
For widening on the outside of a bend
Typical
Comprising three circular arcs
Teardrop
Including a central traffic island
Hammerhead
With a square end
PROPERTIES
Define the properties for selected type of cul-de-sac.
CREATE
Create points and sets on the current layer using the selected alignment, cul-de-sac type and defined properties.

See HELPTM for diagrams illustrating the four cul-de-sac types.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 HELPTM and RG 574 Cogo|​Streets|​Cul-de-sac S  
 CURRENT

Select the current layer.

Select the current layer by selecting an object or from a list of existing layers.

See also

LAYER
Select or create the current layer from the toolbar
SETCURL
Select the current layer by selecting an object
LAYERNXT
Change the current layer to the next alphabetical layer
LAYERNEW
Create a new and current layer with parameters
LAYERSET
Change properties of layers

TML date  Source 
04/04/19     Geocomp Update or $250  
 CURSOR

Limit the direction and increment of cursor movement

Limit the direction and increment of cursor movement while drawing linework.

Cursor modes

None
No restriction on cursor direction
Ortho
Draw the cursor along an orthogonal line from the last point drawn, based on the azimuth in the Snap Settings
Perpendicular
Draw the cursor along a line perpendicular to the last line segment drawn
Snap settings
Change snap settings to control the increment

To change the cursor mode at the command line or in a toolbox, for

Cursor modeEnter at command line
NoneCursor 0
Ortho onCursor 1
Ortho On|OffCursor -1
Perpendicular onCursor 2
Perpendicular On/OffCursor -2

In the standard Trimble installation of Terramodel, function keys include:

KeyFunction
F7GRIDSET On/Off
F8CURSOR Ortho On|Off
F9SNAPSET On/Off
F11CURSOR Perpendicular On|Off

The Geocomp Update uses these function keys to toggle on|off the display of point numbers (F7), point markers (F8), point elevations (F9) and point names (F11). See EDITINI to import Function key settings.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Settings|​Cursor S  
 CURVE

Insert or edit a pline curve.

Insert an arc, spiral, vertical, combining or Overhauser curve into a pline.

Select the type of curve to be inserted and the IP (also known as control point, vertex or Intersection Point) by clicking on or typing in the pline:cp.

After you select the curve type and vertex, click OK to select the curve properties.

The curve types are:

Arc
A circular curve defined by Arc length, Chord length, DC (Degree of curvature), External distance, Middle ordinate, Radius, or Tangent.
Spiral
A circular curve defined by radius or DC (Degree of Curvature) with two clothoid transition spirals defined by the Back (In) and Ahead (Out) spiral lengths.
Vertical
A parabolic curve in a profile view defined by Length, K factor, Crest, Sight distance or through a point. When the sight distance option is used, the eye and object heights are taken from the DESIGNSET.
Combining
A curve combining two arcs and three spirals. Specify the three spiral lengths, two different arc radii and "% delta 1st arc". In the "% delta first arc" either enter a positive value for the portion of the total delta angle at the IP as divided between the two arcs, or enter negative value for the length of the first arc.
Overhauser
A spline curve where the curve passes through the vertex.
Decurve
Remove a curve

You can also enter curves while entering alignments using the PLINE, SEGEDIT and HALDATA commands.

Command dateGuideMenuSource84
12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Arc|​Pline curve
Draw|​Pline|​Curve
Draw|​Arc|​Curve
Edit|​More...|​Curve in pline
S 84
 CURVESOL

Compute arc properties.

Calculate and report the properties of an arc given two arc properties. No objects are created.

CURVESOL dialog box

Radius, Chord, Arc length, Delta, Mid-Ord, External, Tangent, Deg of curvature
Select and enter the value of any two arc properties
Segment area
List the segment area of the computed arc
Sector area
List the sector area of the computed arc
Curve definition chord length
Calculate degree of curvature solutions based on the arc definition or chord definition of a curve. For the chord definition, also enter the chord length value in the real number control to the right.
Calculate
Once two arc properties have been entered, click Calculate to compute the remaining values.
Report
Report the arc properties in a P3pad report.

Curve parameters are reported to the precision established in UNITSSET.

Arc property combinationRestriction
Arc length, chord Arc length must be greater than the chord distance
Arc length, tangent Arc length must be less than 2 times the tangent length
Chord, middle ordinate Chord distance must be greater than 2 times the middle ordinate
Chord, radius Chord distance must be less than 2 times the radius
Chord, tangent Chord distance must be less than 2 times the tangent
Delta, arc length Delta must not be equal to 360 degrees
Delta, radius Delta must not be equal to 360 degrees
Delta, chord (or external, middle ordinate, or tangent) Delta must be less than 180 degrees
External, middle ordinate The external distance must be greater than the middle ordinate
Middle ordinate, radius The middle ordinate must be less than the radius.

See also CURVE, SCURVE and FILLET.

Command dateGuideMenuSource84
12/03/09HELPTM Cogo|​Utilities|​Curve solutions... S 84
 CUTFILL

Balance cut or fill volumes.

Raise or lower a design DTM automatically until the desired cut, fill or nett volume to an existing DTM is reached.

Move the design vertically until the specified volume between the surfaces is reached. Shift or rotate the design surface for a better fit. Click OK to accept the new design location.

Settings

  1. Balance on Nett, Cut or Fill volume
  2. Specify the desired volume
  3. Specify the allowable volume tolerance
  4. Specify whether to apply shrink and swell factors to volumes
  5. Specify whether to project batters from the design at the tie-in slopes to intersect the existing surface.

Notes

  • Shrink and swell factors are set in EARTHWORK.
  • Batter (tie-in) cut and fill slopes are defined by DESIGNSET and edited by EDIT Slopes.
  • If the design layer cannot form a DTM, but has least one pline, you are prompted whether to convert plines on that layer to sets.
  • Constrain movement of points on the design DTM by names CUT ONLY, FILL ONLY, FIX, FIX X, FIX Y, FIX Z, FIX XZ, FIX YZ, FIX XY or FIX XYZ.
  • Some constraint examples:
    • FIX a long pad or water storage at one end and move the other end
    • FILL ONLY above an existing pipe
  • Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.
  • Set distance and volume units by labelling and conversion factors in UNITSSET.
  • The design DTM must be enclosed by a DTM edge of one or more breakline sets.
  • Any batters must intersect the existing surface.

CUTFILL replaces MOVEPAD.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   DTM|​More...|Balance cut|fill Geocomp Update or $200  
 CVD5EXPT

Export data to Civilcad ASCII .AS5.

Export points, sets and text to Civilcad .AS5 file format.

To export plines, GCCONVRT to sets first.

Civilcad .AS5 files can be imported by Civilcad versions 5 and later.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 CVD5IMPT

Import data from Civilcad .AS5 file.

Import data in Civilcad ASCII .AS5 file format.

The point numbers are retained, with the option of adding a constant.

Strings on a layer with common points are joined into sets.

.AS5 files can contain zero-length arcs which can result in extra circles when exported to DXF or DWG. Use CLEANUP to remove the zero-length arcs.

Civilcad .AS5 files can be exported from Civilcad version 5 and later.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 CVDEXPT

Export data to Civilcad Version 4 ASC.

Export points, sets and text to Civilcad .ASC file format.

Civilcad ASCII 4 (.ASC) files can be imported into Civilcad versions 4 and 5. For later versions of CivilCAD, export .AS5 with CVD5IMPT.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 FC C
 CVDIMPT

Import data from Civilcad Version 4 .ASC.

Import data in Civilcad .ASC file format.

Include points, strings and text.

Layer names are retained and codes are imported as names.

Non-​contourable points in the ASC file are not included in Terramodel DTMs. EDIT and GC53 toggle this attribute.

Strings on a layer with common points are joined into sets.

Civilcad ASCII 4 (.ASC) files can be exported from Civilcad versions 4 and 5. For later versions of Civilcad, export as .AS5 and import with CVD5IMPT.

TML date   Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 FC C
 DATAMINE

Import Datamine binary data.

Import a mine model in Datamine binary data file format.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 DCEDIT

DC File Editor

View or edit Trimble .DC files and Sokkia .SDR files.

You can also run the DC File Editor directly from Start... Programs... Trimble Office... Utilities... DC File Editor.

If you have a 32-bit version of Windows, type DCEDIT32 in the command line instead.

Alias date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Cogo|​Utilities|​Trimble DC file editor S  
 DDIST

Create a point at the intersection of two distances or arcs.

Solve for the intersection of two arcs or distances, and create a point object at the intersection.

DDIST uses two command bars that define the information required for the two distances (arcs) to be intersected. Each arc is defined by a centre point and distance or by selecting an arc segment to define the centre point and distance.

Distance-Distance Options

1st pt/arc
Select either a point or an arc.
Dist
If you select a point, enter a distance from the point in the distance control to the right. If you select an arc, enter a distance from the arc centre. The default distance is the radius.
OK
Click OK to display a ghosted circle to indicate the location of the first arc. Now enter a 2nd point or arc and a distance then pick a location with the mouse to indicate one of the two arc intersection solutions.
Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Cogo|​Lines|​Distance-​distance intersection S 11
 DEADSETS

Show and create dead regions.

Show dead regions within a DTM or create dead regions.

Dead regions are defined by closed breakline sets with Dead smoothness.

DTM:
Select a DTM layer.
Loc Dead Tri:
Select a location inside a DTM triangle and create a closed breakline with Dead smoothness that defines a dead region around that triangle.
Create Dead Regions
Enable creation of dead regions for each triangle that exceeds a Min Tri Area.
Min Tri Area
Enter a minimum triangle area.
Show Dead Regions Layer
Create dead regions by minimum triangle area if enabled, and then hatch every set on the selected layer that defines a dead region. Hatching previously created by this command is deleted first.
Cancel
Close the command retaining any hatching blocks or sets defining dead regions.

See also

SETSMOOTH or EDIT Smooth
Report or edit the smoothness of sets.
DTMCH
Configure the current DTM layer, which is the default for DEADSETS.
BL
Create breaklines

TML date  Source 
19/12/19     Geocomp Update or $200  
 DEFANG

Determine the angle between two bearings.

The angle is displayed in the message area for cutting and pasting into an angle control.

TML date  SourceGC
29/10/08     S 91
 DELBLKS

Delete missing blocks and external text.

Delete all blocks with missing block definitions and all text linked to missing external text files.

"Unable to find block" messages may be due to trying to display:

  • An external block that links to a missing .BLK file
  • An internal block that is not listed in BLOCK command
  • A block with an invalid or too-long name
  • A missing, unlisted or invalid block that is nested inside another block, or
  • A text object that includes $File: to specify the path and name of an external file that is missing.

Common causes include importing a .DWG or .DXF with problem blocks, AUTODRAFT with missing or misspelt block names and moving or deleting a .PRO, .BLK or text file.

Use
DELBLKS
to delete all
  • internal blocks that are not listed in the List mode of BLOCK command
  • external blocks that have no corresponding .BLK file in C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared\​Blocks or any Terramodel Search Path folder such as C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp.
  • text objects with $File: linking to a path and file that no longer exists, and
and, optionally, replace these deleted blocks and text with new points that
  • have the locations of the insertion points
  • have names that include the names of the deleted objects, and
  • are excluded from all DTMs
BLKREAD
to reread the definition of an external .BLK after the .BLK has been updated
EXPLODE
to explode any blocks that contain nested missing blocks (then run DELBLKS again)
DELETE or EDIT
to delete or edit any objects
GCBADEAT
to delete or select EAT text with a subject or parent that no longer exists
BLOCK Purge
to purge selected unused blocks from the list of blocks
GCPURGE
to purge all unused blocks from the list of blocks
BLOCK
List
To list block definitions in a project

TML date MenuSource 
15/03/18 Built-in Draw|​Block|​Delete missing external Geocomp Update or $200  
 DELAYLST

Delete layer lists.

Delete one or more layer lists.

See also LLISTSET.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 DELCROSS

Delete sets between two locations.

Delete all selected sets which cross the line anywhere between two locations.

You may want to run DUPLTRIS, GC58 or DISJOIN first.

See also DELETE​SEGMENT.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 DELETE

Delete selected objects from a project.

Delete selected objects from a project.

You can prevent objects from being selected for deletion by Type with Search Settings and by Layer with LAYERSET.

Once you Delete the objects, it may be necessary to REDRAW your screen to view the changes.

If you Delete all of the points defining a set, the set is also deleted. If you have checked "Protect Pn in Use From Deletion" in Point Settings your points will remain intact if you have selected the points for deletion but not the attached set.

See also Delete​Segment.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Edit|​Delete S 31
 DELETE​SEGMENT

Delete a selected segment from a set or pline.

Click on each segment in turn that you want to delete then click Close to close the command without deleting any other segments.

See also DELETE to delete the whole record, BREAK to break the segment at a location, HIDE to hide or reveal a set segment and SEGEDIT to edit using a table of segments.

In Terramodel prior to 10.5, BREAK deleted set segments like DELETE​SEGMENT does now.

Possible aliases include BREAKSEG, DELETESEG, DELSEG and DS.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Edit|​Delete line segment S 31
 DESC

Change numeric names to alphanumeric.

Change numeric names to alphanumeric names using a user-​defined descriptor mapping file (.PCO).

This is similar to Point Descriptor Expansion during an IMPORT script.

See also AUTODRAFT, CHNGNAME, DESC, GRP2NAME and LAY2NAME.

Command date  SourceGC
29/10/08     S 76
 DESCAD

Change numeric names to alphanumeric with separator.

Change numeric point names to alphanumeric point names using a multi-code separator and global code identifier using a user-​defined descriptor mapping file (.pco).

See also IMPORT, DESC, GRP2NAME and LAY2NAME.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 76
 DESIGN

Project batters from a design DTM to another DTM.

Create breaklines in the Design layer by projecting at fixed batter slopes from a DTM edge to an Original DTM layer.

The DTM edge must consist of one or more contiguous breakline sets that encompasses all other DTM points on the same Design layer. When you create a new set, for example by BL or DTMEDGE, the cut and fill batter slopes are assigned by the current values for Tie-in slopes in DESIGNSET command. You can check or edit the design slopes of a set at any time by EDIT Slopes.

The grade is computed in 3D from the set. This is different to simply grading to an offset and elevation. If the set has a steep longitudinal grade, the difference will be noticeable.

DESIGN breaks arcs on the DTM edge into straight line segments using the Segments Per Arc setting of DISPLAYSET. New points created along the curves and at the intersection with the original surface, and new sets connect the new points.

Any ground intersection points, points along arcs, and sets created by DESIGN are assigned the name of the design layer. DELETE these objects by name or rerunning DESIGN. Name selection is case-sensitive.

See also GC17, GC23, SLICE, CUTFILL, MOVEPAD and SIDESLOPE

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM DTM|​Design S  
 DESIGN​ELEV

Modify elevation to design roadway elevation.

Modify the elevation of existing points so that they lie on the design surface of a designated road job.

Terramodel projects a perpendicular intersection from a location to the HAL to determine the chainage along the HAL and the offset from the HAL. The elevation of the point is interpolated by cutting a slice through the design surface at the station and offset.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​On design|​Design elev S  
 DESIGN​SET

Configure design settings

Configure the default batter slopes and smoothness assigned to new sets and vertical sight distance calculation parameters. These settings are stored with the project file.

Tie-in slopes
Cut slope | Fill slope
These vertical controls let you enter values for cut and fill slopes that will be assigned to newly created sets. The tie-in slopes are used by DESIGN to project the design DTM onto the existing ground DTM. Any change to these values will change the slope of all sets, except sets where the slopes have been fixed by EDIT.
Default set smoothness
Always make the default Soft. The default set smoothness applies to all new sets. Set smoothness affects contour, cross section and profile plines created from DTMs. If many breaklines are Hard or Sharp, 3D Visualiser can be very slow. If many closed breaklines are Dead, you will have many holes in contour plines. If a DTMEDGE is Dead, you will have no contour plines at all. See SETSMOOTH to change the smoothness of existing sets and for an explanation of each smoothness property.
Vertical Curve Design Controls
Set the eye, object, and headlight distances that Terramodel will use when calculating the sight distances used for computing vertical curves based on AASHTO standards.
Eye Height
The distance from the road to the standard eye height of a driver.
Object Height, Stopping:
The distance from the road to the standard object height for computing the safe stopping distance.
Object Height, Passing:
The distance from the road to the standard object height for computing the safe passing distance.
Headlight Height:
The distance from the road to the centre of the standard headlight beam.
Divergence Angle:
The angle of the standard headlight beam divergence.
Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Settings|​Design settings S  
 DESPIKE

Remove spikes from a DTM.

Remove all points in a DTM layer where all the surrounding triangles exceed a maximum grade.

You can

  • Select a DTM layer
  • Specify a maximum grade in %
  • Limit the affected points to a boundary
  • Limit the maximum number of iterations
  • Remove points if any triangle exceeds the maximum grade
  • Remove peaks only

See also GC53, GC69 and 3DFILTER.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 GCGeocode
 DFEDIT

Data Format Editor

Edit logger (.lgr) files which contain the detailed data format used by the IMPORT and EXPORT script managers to interpret the data.

This editor uses DataFormatEditor.dll. If you have 32-bit Windows, type DFEDIT32 instead.

Alias date  SourceGC
01/09/18     User-definable Coordf
 DIAG

Trimble diagnostic report

Report details of the computer relevant to Trimble applications including system architecture, Windows registry, Trimble applications and files.

If TrimRptU.exe does not run, install Trimble Data Transfer Utility and try again.

If you have 32-bit Windows, use DIAG32.

Alias date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Cogo|​Utilities|​Trimble diagnostic report trimble.com  
 DIM

Label dimensions between two locations or along segments.

Create labels showing dimensions between pairs of locations or along segments.

Click Props to configure the labelling method, units, decimal places, and layer.

Operation

Pt-Pt | Segment
Dimension between pairs of locations or along segments
Pts:
Enter two locations
Seg:
Select one segment
Loc:
Locate the new label
Props
Specify the label properties
Dim
Create label at manually entered locations. Not required for mouse-selected locations.
Close
Close the command and retain the new labels

General properties

Distance type
Dimension the whole distance (Linear), the Horizontal (X-axis) distance or Vertical (Y-axis) distance. In the Plan view, Horizontal is the difference in the Eastings, and Vertical is the difference in Northings.
Layer
Select the layer on which to place dimension lines and text. Select layer 0 for current layer.
Dimension blocks
Create the label as a block instead of text and plines. Dimension blocks are named dim n, where n is a sequential number. If you delete a dimension block object, the block definition is discarded when the project is saved.
Force Dimensions outside
Create dimensions with arrows that point inward, or in the same direction, when the dimension is located outside the extension lines.
Format
Select Engineering format which uses decimal project units (feet or metres) set by MEASUNIT or Architectural format which uses feet, inches and fractional inches.
Units suffix
Append a suffix to the labels to show the distance unit.
Sub-units suffix
Append another suffix show the sub-units in the Architectural format.
Number of decimals
Enter the precision for distance labels using the Engineering format.
Units Scale
Enter the factor for the calculated distance. For example, to convert feet to inches, enter 12.0.
Fractional increment
Select the precision of the Architectural format.

Text Properties

Text style
Select the text style for font, height, aspect and slant. The justification is Center-Middle, and the orientation is Legible.
Text Colour
Specify the colour.
Distance from text to line
Enter a factor of the text height for the distance of the text away from the dimension line or the lines from the beginning and the end of the text.
Draw text above dim line
Place dimension text above the dimension lines or even with and between the dimension lines.

Line Properties

Draw dimension line
Enable dimension lines.
Linetype
Select the line type (usually a LEADER LINE).
Colour
Specify the colour for the dimension lines.
Draw dimension line 1
For Segments, create the first extension line.
Line type
Select the line type of the first extension line.
Draw extension line 2
Create the second extension line.
Line type
Select the line type for the second extension line.
Colour
Specify the colour for both extension lines.
Length of outside lines
Define the length of the outside dimension lines in sheet units when you Force Dimensions Outside and locate the dimension text outside the extension lines.
Extension line gap
Define the offset (in sheet units) to the beginning of the extension lines. If a dimension is located within this offset, the lines are extended further.

Vertical exaggeration

Any vertical exaggeration in the current view is applied to the label. If the vertical exaggeration is later changed, the label will then be distorted.

TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
18/12/18 RG 1228 Draft|​Dimensioning S 91
 DISJOIN

Break sets and plines into segments.

Break sets and plines containing straights or arcs into segments. DISJOIN does not break plines containing spirals or vertical curves.

DISJOIN is an alias of GCUNJOIN.

See also JOIN to join sets and plines with common ends and EXPLODE to explode sets and plines with complex linetypes.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 DISPFEAT

Display feature attributes.

Report, label or rename selected records that have feature attributes.

Objs:
Select objects
Create Text in Layer
Specify layer for any new EAT text labels
Text Style
Specify text style for any new EAT text labels
Select attributes
Select Display for a feature attribute to label, rename or report objects with that feature attribute. Select All to select All.
Create Text
Create text labels for selected objects showing the selected feature attribute, and value, if any
Copy Atts to Name
Append to existing names of selected objects the selected feature attributes, and values, if any
Report
Report to P3Pad for selected objects, the selected feature attributes and values, if any

DISPFEAT uses FEATURES.ADF.

See also FYATBEDIT, FYATBEP, FYATBIN, FYATBOUT, CHECKATT, GC12DOUT, GC01, SNR and CHNGNAME.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 DISPLAY​SET

Configure how objects are displayed.

Partially display some objects for quicker redraw times and configure point display size.

View Resolution Segments per

Curves are displayed as a series of short straight segments, but maintain their full mathematical properties for computations.

For any curve, the maximum number of segments for all the components of a curve together is 100 otherwise the curve will not display correctly. For example, if arcs have 20 segments and spirals have 10, the total for Arc curves would be 10+20+10=40, and the total for Combining curves would be 10+20+10+20+10=70.

With more segments the curve appears smoother, takes longer to display and uses more memory. The segments are also used to extract profiles from DTMs and to exporting to relevant files. The PLOTSET resolution is independent.

Segments per Arc
Set the number of segments per circular curve. 10 is typical.
Segments per Spline
The number of segments per splined pline. Splined lines are used primarily for contour lines. A setting of 0 displays the line as unsplined. The maximum number is 100. A typical value is 3.
Segments per Vertical Curve
The number of segments per vertical curve. A typical value is 10.
Segments per Spiral Curve
The number of segments per transition spiral. A typical value is 10.
Quick dynaviews
Toggle on to hide objects displayed through dynaviews and to show dynaview frames only. See also SHOWDYNA.
Quick text
Toggle on to display and plot text as boxes drawn to the limits of the text objects. Toggle off to display and plot normally.
Quick EAT codes
Toggle on to display and plot all EAT codes as the actual codes and not the interpreted value.
Quick linetype
Toggle on to display and plot all linetypes as solid lines.
Ignore hide
Toggle on to reveal set segments hidden by HIDE are displayed and to enable CONVERT to convert hidden set segments to plines.
Hold DV scale
Toggles the way attribute text and the linetype scales are displayed and plotted within dynaviews. When toggled on, attribute text and linetypes are scaled within the individual dynaviews in which they are displayed, based on the scale assigned to the dynaview, as opposed to being based on the plot scale of the viewing mode in which the attribute text or line is drawn. This allows you to create multiple dynaviews showing the same object or even of the same viewport at varying scales. When toggled on, the attribute text and linetypes appear in accordance with their definition, regardless of subsequent alterations of the plot scale of the viewing mode in which these objects are drawn. When toggled off, attribute text and linetypes as displayed within a dynaview, are scaled based on the current plot scale of the target viewing mode, and their appearance will change as that plot scale is altered. Normal text objects are not affected by this setting.
Drag Text Quick
Toggle on to distort the text so the text can be dragged quickly. Toggle off to display legible text as you drag, which is slower.
Point size
Enter the size in pixels for a cross symbol for each point.
Text box size
Enter a minimum number of pixels for text. Text objects and attribute text that are smaller will be displayed as a text box. Enter 0 to always draw the text characters (except when Quick Text is toggled on).
Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Settings|​Display settings S  
 DISTANCE

Report the distance between two locations.

Report the 2D distance between two locations defined by coordinates in From and To point controls.

The distance is displayed in the message scroll in both project units, and in sheet units at the view scale.

You have the option to also display the accumulative length which can be reset.

The locations can be limited by object snaps.

See also GC29 for 3D distances between points and along segments and these other commands that report distances: GC29UTM, REPORTS , GEOMINQ, GC3DSETS, GC75, GC81, LABELSEG, GCDIMLOT and GEOMRPTS.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Reports|​Distance
Inquire|​Distance
S 17
 DIVIDE

Divide a line into intervals.

Create points along a set or pline at intervals.

You specify the number of segments, whether to divide one segment or an entire line, whether the points are moved to round number chainages, and whether to insert the points into sets.

See also GCDIVIDE, 3D, GC28, GC283D, PREDAREA, GC04, INTOSET and GCIN2SET and GC682SET.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Point|​Divide Line S 13
 DLGDOIN

Import a USGS DLG (optional format) file

Import a United States Geological Survey Digital Line Graph-Optional format lines with elevations.

See Terramodel help for details.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 HELPTM File|​Misc. Import/Export|​USGS-O DLG Import S  
 DLGDOOUT

Export a USGS DLG (optional format) file.

Export a United States Geological Survey Digital Line Graph-Optional format lines with elevations.

See Terramodel help for details.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 HELPTM File|​Misc. Import/Export|​USGS-O DLG Export S  
 DLINE

Dimension between two locations.

Draw pline segments between two locations with the specified linetype and labels in the specified text style showing the length in metres to the specified number of decimal places.

See also LABGRADE and DIM.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 91
 DOC​UMENTS

List Terramodel documents.

List user guides, tutorials, manuals, charts, table, classes, notes, lists and help files installed with Geocomp Update.

The documents and associated sample data are installed into C:\TMCUSTOM\​Geocomp\​Docs.

See also HELP and GCHELP.

Command date Guide Menu Source  
01/09/18 Documents Help|​Documents Geocomp Update  
 DRAFTSET

Drafting settings.

Configure the text spacing, text offset distance, and other general drafting settings for the project.

Flip over angle
Configure the angle when attribute set segment labels are automatically flipped so that they can be read from left to right, from the right-hand side and the bottom of the sheet. Valid entries for this parameter are from 0° to 45°. If the value is set to 45°, the label will be upside down if read from the bottom of the sheet, but will appear correct when read from the right-hand side of the sheet. The angle should generally remain at 0° or 10°. This angle is applied to each dynaview so that the same labels can be oriented properly through multiple dynaviews.
Text clip margin
Set the amount of space around text objects, for CONTOUR, CLIP and HATCH when clipping lines to text. Typical values range from 0.3 to 0.5 times the height of the text object. This value also controls the spacing between text and its associated text border, with the exception of the Underline border style which uses the following offset distance value.
Offset distance from line/arc
Set the distance between a line or curve and its label. This value also controls the offset between the line generated by an Underline text border style and the first and second lines of text when that style is used. Typically, enter a value at least twice the diameter of your largest pen.
Space (%) between lines of text
Establish the spacing between lines of attribute text or lines of text objects. A typical value is 50% of the text height.
Fixed Detail Border Size
Configure the fixed height for all text borders with a Detail border style. Borders with other text border styles, vary in height according to the limits of the text and the above text clip margin.
Text Line Colours
Configure the colours for leader lines and borders associated with text. These global settings affect all text in the project file.
Leader Lines
The colour for text leader lines
Underlines
The colour for all text borders with Underline text border style
Margin Lines
The colour for all text borders with Margin text border styles.
Enclosed Borders
The colour for text with other text border styles.
Underline title Text Enlargement (%)
Increase the height of the first line of multi-line text with Underline text border style by this percentage (e.g. 20%). If you use PLOTSET to map the plotter pen selection to the text height, the first line use a different plotter pen.
Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Settings|​Draft settings... S 90
 DRAGHDIN

Import Drag Head log file.

Import Drag Head log file.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     POA  
 DRAINRPT

Report drainage details to a CSV file.

Select drain sets and specify a lid layer.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 DGE 10
 DRAPE

Create sets where selected plines cross a DTM.

Create points on the current layer where selected plines cross links in the selected DTM and connect the points with sets alomng the plines.

If there is no grade change at the link crossing, no point is created.

See also GCDRAPE which also transfers chainages, references and names to the sets.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   DTM|​Drape plines S 298+400+252
 DRILL01

Label a drill hole.

Label a drill hole with some properties of the collar point and drill hole.

The text label includes the name and coordinates of the collar point and the bearing and dip of the drill hole segment at the specified text location. The Settings button controls the text style.

The collar point does not have to be an end point of the drill hole segment.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 DRNGRADE

Label a set segment of a drain with the grade.

Label a selected set segment with text indicating the grade of the segment.

Select a set segment and a text location and, in Settings, specify whether to display an arrow or a table, any added text, the text style and a leader linetype.

Specify Display Arrow to create a pline with an arrow in the direction of slope, labelled with any added text and the grade expressed as a ratio and a percentage.

Specify Display Table to create multi-line text, with a rectangular border and leaderline, showing any added text, the elevation of the upstream point, the set name and the grade expressed as a ratio, the segment length and the elevation of the downstream point. The optional added text can be used for a table heading and the set name could indicate the pipe description or diameter.

See also LABGRADE for a more general grade labelling command.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 DRNVOLMS

Report volumes and surface areas of ponds in a DTM.

Hatch pond extents and report water volumes around low points in a DTM.

DTM:
Select a DTM
Bdys:
Select any limiting boundaries
Water Layer:
Layer for new pond extents
Min Water Depth:
Enter a minimum pond depth
Step:
Enter a step size
Hatch
Create hatch blocks on water layer inside extents
Compute Volumes:
Compute water volumes
OK
For each pond deeper than the minimum, generate contours at step intervals, clip them to selected boundaries, then, for each low point, find the closed contour with the largest area, create pond extent plines and hatch blocks, and report the water elevation, area, depth and volume.
Cancel
Cancel command

See also

DTMDRAIN
Create sets around drainage catchments
GCFALL
Show flow paths and catchments in a DTM
LINKSET
Show triangle slopes
EARTHWORK
Compute volumes of depressions

TML date  Source 
27/02/20     Geocomp Update or $250  
 DTM2LDBX

Export DTM layer to Leica 1200 DBX database files.

Export a DTM layer within a boundary to an XML file and convert to Leica 1200 DBX database using RoadRunnerAddOn.

The database files can be used with Road Runner or DigSmart3D on Leica 1200 instruments. The XML file can also be imported into UMC_3D and iCON.

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

To suit some Leica applications, DTM2LDBX limits DTMs to 99,999 points. To create larger XML files, use DTM2XML.

If you select 'Create Leica DB files', but no .X?? files are created in the same folder as the .XML, download and install Microsoft Visual C++ 2013 Redistributable (x86).

See also ROADRUN, GCPTSOUT , GCMULXML, POWERGDE and PLAN2DBX.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 DTM2XML

Export DTM layer to LandXML triangles.

Export a DTM layer to a layer of triangles in a LandXML .XML file.

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

See also DTM2LDBX , VRMLOUT and EXPORT LandXML script.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 DTMALL

Refresh all DTMs toolbar button

Function key F12 Refresh all DTMs

Relink all DTM layers and redraw the display.

Relink all DTM layers, redraw the display and store the current contour intervals.

DTMALL reads the normal and index intervals defined by CONTOURSET and writes the project variables DTMALL:CONT_INT and DTMALL:CONT_INDEX_I. If you use these project variables in EAT text, run DTMALL each time you change either contour interval.

See also GCDTMALL which also creates arc breaklines, TOGLINKS which turns on and off link visibility without relinking and DTMUPDT which updates only the current DTM layer.

TML date MenuSource
01/09/18   DTM|​More...|​Update all DTM layers
Toolbar button
Function key F12
Geocomp Update or $250  
 DTMCH

Change the current DTM layer.

The current DTM layer is displayed in the Coordinate scroll box with the elevation, aspect and slope at the cursor.

To relink the current DTM layer only, use DTMUPDT.

The current DTM layer is not necessarily the current layer.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   DTM|​More...|​Change current DTM layer Geocomp Update or $250 1
 DTMCONE

Project a cone onto a DTM.

Radiate from a specified x, y location and a specified height difference from the DTM, to the specified DTM layer, in 5° increments.

Join the locations with a pline or join points at those locations with a set and radial sets to the centre point.

Enter a positive height if the centre is above the DTM; a negative height if the centre is below the DTM.

Enter a positive slope to project up; a negative slope to project down. The slope may be entered in any vertical angle mode: Z (degrees from zenith), H (degrees from horizontal), N (degrees from nadir), P or % (percent slope from horizontal), R (ratio of horizontal to vertical) or D (vertical distance).

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
01/09/18 RG 1251 DTM|​Conical projection to DTM S  
 DTMDRAIN

Create set lines around drainage catchments.

Create set lines along the boundaries of drainage catchments of a DTM.

Options

DTM
Select the DTM.
DRAIN
Select the layer for the new sets. The default layer is set by HDEFS.
MIN HEIGHT
Enter a depth above which shallow ponds fill and overflow and boundary sets are created. The default height is the Minimum drainage height setting in HDEFS.

The minimum height is used to eliminate small depressions and must be reviewed for the overall effect.

DTMDRAIN makes assumptions such as water draining to one side of each triangle and consistent ground cover.

See also GCFALL which can use multiple locations per triangle to create catchment boundaries and flow paths.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09 UG 401 Hydro|​Compute drainage S  
 DTMEDGE

Create a set around a DTM edge.

Create a set in the current colour joining every point along the outside links of a selected DTM.

The DTM edge set locks the extent of the DTM, even against changes in link settings. The extent is limited by the outside points and breaklines and current link settings.

Before running DTMEDGE, select a distinctive layer colour and use LAYERSET or QISOLATE to isolate, LINKSET and DTMALL to display the extent of links and EVALDTM to look for breakline problems.

Multiple contiguous breakline set segments around a DTM function as a DTM edge. This means that DESIGN and CUTFILL can use different batter slopes and that the outside of a DTM formed from imported triangles always forms a DTM edge.

Edit a DTM edge set using GCDTMEDG, DELETE​SEGMENT, BL and so on.

If there are any 3D points on the layer outside the DTM edge set, the DTM edge is invalid. GC22 checks for and fixes this.

GCDTMBDY creates pline boundaries at multiple DTM edges.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM DTM|​DTM edge S  
 DTMGRID

Interpolate a grid over a DTM.

Specify origin, bearing, intervals and boundary.

See also GCGENGRD, GRIDELEV, GRIDEXPT, GRIDMAKE, and TRMBGRID.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM DTM|​Generate DTM grid S 221
 DTMINFO

List DTM information by layer for selected points.

List by layer, for the selected points, the layer name, number of points, number of 3D Points, number of 3D points not in DTM, number of points in DTM and the maximum and minimum Easting, Northing and Elevation.

The totals are summed and the ranges also computed for all the selected points.

The DTM status shows which layers have been linked and whether they are part of a Multilayer DTM.

The number of points in the DTM is number of contourable points in the DTM view with the most DTM points on that layer. This is not necessarily the current or Plan view. You are warned if selected points are not on this DTM view.

The selected DTM layers are relinked. If you want a report of duplicate points, run GC92 first.

See also LAYINFO, COUNT, OLIST and LIST.

TML date MenuSourceGC
12/12/18   DTM|​More...|​List DTM layers Geocomp Update or $250 290
 DTMMATCH

Match overlapping DTMs at a match line.

Match two DTMs created by photogrammetry.

The surfaces are adjusted so that any contours created from the new DTM match perfectly at a match line.

DTM
Select two DTM layers to be matched
LINE
Select a pline along which the DTMs are to be matched
DEF
DTM Match Defaults dialog box
NORMAL MERGE
Specify the type of elevation adjustment to be applied to the points.
On
Each point will be adjusted by the ratio of its offset distance from the match line to the maximum adjustment width, times the distance from the elevation of the point to its interpolated elevation to the other DTM layer. This method moves each point towards the other DTM. In the event the DTM layers cross in the overlap area, some points on each DTM may move up and others down. Generally this is the preferred method.
Off
Each point will be adjusted by the ratio of its offset distance from the match line to the maximum adjustment width, times the elevation from layer 1 to layer 2 on the match line perpendicular to the point being adjusted. This method moves each point based on the condition at the match line. If the DTM layers intersect in the overlap area, some points on each DTM may move away from the other DTM.
MAX ADJ WIDTH
Specify the maximum distance from the line in which points will be adjusted.

Tips on using DTMMATCH command

  • The objects on the matched layers can be relayered to the same DTM layer for relinking.
  • DTMMATCH makes significant modifications to the project data including deleting points. We strongly recommend that you keep a copy of the original data by using SAVEAS before you start.
  • If DTMMATCH is to be used several times in one project file, save your work at each step.
  • Before beginning DTMMATCH, you must have two DTM layers that overlap.
  • Along the overlap create a single-segment pline or set where two DTMs are to match. Only points that fall within the length of the segment will be erased.
  • Match lines should not be significantly longer than the limits of the DTM as this can prevent Terramodel from properly determining which points should be deleted.
  • Set lines that cross the match line are clipped. A point will be created to hold each clipped set. The DTMs will re-link if required.
  • Elevations of points that fall within the length of the line and the specified adjustment width will be adjusted according to the method specified. A set is created on each DTM along the match line through the points created. All points outside the match line for each DTM are deleted. The maximum elevation difference found along the match line, and the number of points adjusted, are reported.

See also GCMATCH to match contours, JOIN to join matched contours, GC33 to create the highest or lowest of two overlapping surfaces, GC33MULT to create the highest or lowest of multiple overlapping surfaces, MERGE to create a surface from two overlapping surfaces, GCMERGE to replace a surface with multiple overlapping surfaces, GCCLIP to clip multiple surfaces from a single surface and GCCOPY to copy multiple objects into a single surface.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM DTM|​DTM Match S  
 DTMMATH

Create points by comparison with two DTMs.

Create new points on a third layer with elevations determined by a user-​defined mathematical formula which may include the elevations of the first and second specified DTMs.

In the Settings, specify the formula, whether to use the points from the first or second layers, or both and whether to report the results.

Layer 1
Select a DTM layer
Layer 2
Select a second DTM layer
Layer 3
Select a layer for the new points
Settings
Use layer 1 points
Use layer 1 points
Use layer 2 points
Use layer 2 points
Generate Report
Report each computed value to P3Pad
Formula
Enter a mathematical formula for the elevation of the new points on layer 3

For example, to get an "average" elevation, use a formula like ((Z2-Z1)/2)+Z1 or (Z2+Z1)/2.

See also GC70.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     U  
 DTMPTS

Interpolate elevations of points from a DTM.

Assign elevations to 2D points from a DTM surface.

Points outside the limits of the DTM are not assigned elevations.

Only 2D points are be modified. To modify 3D points, first use GCNOELEV or ELEVATION (Absolute) to make the points 2D by giving them an absolute elevation of *.

See also ELEVOBJS which replaces elevations of point, text and blocks interpolated from a DTM.

See also GC70 which replaces elevations of both 2D and 3D points, and can also combine the point elevations with the DTM elevations.

See also GCPTSTXT which interpolates elevations from nearby text instead of a DTM.

See also DRAPE, DTMGRID, GRIDELEV, GC50, INT3DSET and ELVPLINE.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM DTM|​DTM Pts S 236
 DTMSET

Create sets from DTM links.

Create a set for each link or triangle on a DTM layer.

Specify the new DTM layer, whether to create sets with three segments (triangles) or one segment (links) and whether to copy points to the new layer (or just the sets).

If these sets are used as breaklines in another DTM application, the resulting DTM will be similar.

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

If you are exporting to an application that prefers DXF or DWG 3DFaces, use the AutoCAD Export script instead.

See also GCDTMOUT, GSIDTMOU, QSGRIDOU, KORKDTM and TRMBTIN.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   DTM|​More...|​Create sets from links Geocomp Update or $250 156+SDS-DXF
 DTMSHOT

Create a point on a DTM at a grade and bearing.

Create a point at the intersection of a theoretical 3D line and a DTM.

Specify a DTM layer, a start point, a bearing and a vertical angle.

The start point cannot be at the same elevation as the DTM.

The bearing and vertical angle units are controlled by UNITSSET.

See also GC23 and SLICE.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM DTM|​DTM shot S  
 DTMSTATS

Report the points with the highest and lowest elevations in a layer.

Report the points with highest and lowest elevations in a layer and list the point numbers, the elevation difference and the average elevation.

The highest and lowest points are marked with temporary circles; the bigger circle marks the higher point. The circles disappear on refresh.

All 3D points on the layer are considered including invisible and non-​contourable points. See also RANGE, AVERPTS and EVALDTM.

TML date   Menu Source GC
01/09/18   DTM|​DTM statistics S 169
 DTMUPDT

Relink the current DTM layer and refresh.

Use DTMCH to change the current DTM layer first.

GCARCBL creates breaklines around arcs, DTMALL relinks all layers and GCDTMALL does both.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   DTM|​More...|​Update current DTM layer Geocomp Update or $250 289
 DTMVISTA

Project sets onto a DTM.

Create sets projected onto a DTM from a viewpoint.

Sets
Select sets joining 3D points
View Pt
Select a point from which to project
DTM layer
Select a DTM onto which the sets are to be projected
Step distance around set
Enter a step distance in project units
OK
Create points on the current layer for each step along the sets where they would appear on the DTM from the view point
Cancel
Cancel without creating sets

For example, to lay out a sign on a hillside to be legible from a lookout:

  1. Adopt a view point at the lookout with elevation at eye level
  2. Define four points on a 3D plane near the lookout which frame the vista to the hillside
  3. Draft up a sign to the same proportions at the four points
  4. REVIEW to Plan, EXPLODE text, CONVERT plines to sets, ARCBREAK curves to straights, modify ELEVATION and so on to define the sign as straight set segments joining 3D points
  5. Transform the sign points and sets onto the plane near the lookout using GC3DADJ
  6. Use DTMVIEW to step along the sets, projecting from the viewpoint to the DTM to create points and sets on the current layer

TML date  Source 
07/06/19     Geocomp Update or $250  
 DUMPATT

Report the attribute records stored for a selected object.

Report the attribute records stored for a selected object.

TML date  Source 
29/10/08     S  
 DUPLTRIS

Remove duplicated segments from triangular sets.

Remove segments from triangular sets on a layer that join the same points as segments on other sets on that layer and replace with single segments in the current layer colour.

This can significantly reduce the number of segments in an imported DTM that has a closed set for each triangle.

Select “Shortest Length Side Only” to minimise total breakline length, separate breakline strings like kerbs or remove flat triangles from digitised contours. You can also choose to keep the “Middle Length Side only” if that suits the model better.

Select “Create all triangle sides”, to create a DTM surface very similar to the original but without duplicate triangle sides.

If you don’t need to keep any breaklines or boundaries, you may be able to simply DELETE all the sets on the layer and let Terramodel reform the DTM from the remaining points.

Any point in a set with the same number as the previous point is removed. Duplicate points are removed next time you reform the DTM.

See also REMTRIS, REMOVELINKS, LINKSET, 3DFILTER, GC31, GC58, GC66, GC92, DTMEDGE and CLEANUP.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 DUPLTUS

Remove duplicated segments from triangular sets.

Use DUPLTRIS instead if you have the Geocomp Update.

The TML name is DUPLT_US. If DUPLTUS does not run from the command line, create an alias from DUPLTUS to DUPLT_US or enter DUPLT_US.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     POA  
 DXF3D

Import elevations from .DXF files.

Import elevations from 3D coordinates in a .DXF file corresponding to points in Terramodel.

Replace the elevation of each point in the Plan view with the elevation corresponding to the first matching X,Y coordinate pair in a selected DXF file.

For example, to import elevations from PolyFaceMesh objects in a DXF, use

  1. DXFIN (AutoCAD (dwg or dxf) _i import script) to IMPORT the .DXF file
  2. GCCONVRT to convert the remaining plines to points and sets
  3. DXF3D to read the elevations from the DXF onto the points
  4. DTMALL or DTMUPDT to form the DTM and remove duplicate points to layer 0
  5. DUPLTRIS to remove duplicate segments
  6. DELETE all objects from layer 0

See also ACADCONV, DXFCHANG, DTMPTS, GC31 and GC58.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 DXFCHANG

Change the name of layers in a .DXF file.

Change the layer names in a specified input .DXF file to new layer names in an output .DXF file.

DXFCHANG can be used to substitute layer names with a different naming convention and to accommodate differences in valid characters and maximum layer name lengths.

The format of the .MAP file is:

input layer name,output layer name

Enter any characters to prefix the new layer names.

Import

  1. If the data file is in .DWG format, export from CAD application to .DXF
  2. Open or create a new project in Terramodel
  3. DXFCHANG
  4. Browse to select DXF In (the input file name and DXF Out (the output file name)
  5. Browse to select a Mapping File
  6. Enter any prefix
  7. Select "DXF Out to Import into Terramodel"
  8. OK
  9. DXFIN to import .DXF into Terramodel

Export

  1. DXFOUT
  2. Export from Terramodel to DXF using the "2000" file format
  3. DXFCHANG
  4. Browse to select DXF In (the old file name), DXF Out (the new file name)
  5. Browse to select a Mapping File
  6. Enter any prefix
  7. Select "DXF Out to Import into CAD"
  8. OK
  9. Import .DXF into CAD application

Notes

Prefixes help create new layers which identify the objects imported from a particular .DXF. If no file name is entered for DXF Out, the Out file has the same name as in the DXF In file but with the prefix as a suffix.

Terramodel layer names have a limit of 16 characters.

DXFIN can use a project variable to determine which 16 characters to read.

The maximum length of lines in the .MAP file is 255 characters, so a Terramodel layer-name of up to 16-characters can be mapped to DXF layer-name of up to 238 characters.

Some characters are automatically substituted. The new layer names can have any characters acceptable to the destination CAD software. DXF files exported from Terramodel by DXFOUT have layer names limited to 16 characters that must each be an Upper Case letter, a digit, a -, a _, or a $. While Terramodel has always supported spaces in layer names, this has only been supported in .DXF format since DXF version "2000".

Layer map files in .LNM format created by GC12DIN can also be used.

GCMAPOUT can create create an initial .MAP file from selected objects, with default substitutions, for later amendment or addition of layer names in any text editor.

Layers names in the DXF that are missing from the .MAP file can be added to the end of the .MAP file. Use an empty .MAP file to read all layer names from the .DXF.

Any lines in the .MAP file that start with # are treated as comments and ignored.

Previous revisions of DXFCHANG used object names to specify layer names.

If a CAD application reports an error reading the DXF, try opening the file in ODA Drawings Explorer and saving as .R10 DXF.

See also LAYERMAP and DXF3D.

Prefixing layer names does not require a mapping file.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 DYNAVIEW

Create dynaviews.

Use a dynaview to display a portion of a view in another location.

For instance, create a plotbox around a part of the plan view, create a second plotbox at a difference scale around the same part in profile view, and place dynaviews for both next to each other in the sheet view.

Refresh the view of the dynaview to show the objects inside the plotbox at that time.

Dynaview creation

BOX
Select a plotbox, a closed set or pline that defines extent of the dynaview, such as one created by PLOTBOX, GCBOX or CIRCLE.
LOC
Enter the location of the origin of the new dynaview. This location can be in any view including the same view. Locate the dynaview where the first vertex of the plotbox is to appear.
SCALE
Set the scale at which the new dynaview is drawn. The default scale is the plot scale for the view of the selected Box. Use VIEWSET to preview or modify plot scale for any view.
ROT
Set the angle of rotation for the dynaview. The angle of rotation is measured clockwise relative to the closed polygon. The default rotation aligns the last side with the east-west axis.

Dynaview editing

Use EDIT to edit dynaviews. To select the dynaview by mouse, click on the origin, which for rectangular plotboxes, is the south-west corner by convention.

Editable dynaview properties are layer, attribute if defined, name, auto off, group, boundary, layer list name, scale, rotation and location.

Turn Auto off ON, to turns off the display of objects that are referenced and not a part of the family tree.

The boundary is the closed plotbox pline that defines the extent of the dynaview.

A layer list can be used to display only a nominated layers. See LLISTSET.

See also

PLANSET
Lay out multiple dynaviews
PLOTBOX
Create a plotbox by height and width in sheet units
GCBOX
Create a plot box graphically
EXPLODE
Explode objects incluing Dynaviews
MIRRORDY
Mirror dynaviews about Y-axis
SHOWDYNA
Show objects visible on dynaviews
FIXDYNA
Replace dynaview plotboxes
MVIEW
Create dynaviews from multiple plotboxes
SCLPLOTB
Scale dynaview plotboxes
DISPLAYSET
Display settings including Quick (hidden) dynaviews
BOXDYNA
Create boxes at dynaview extents
LLIST
Modify the layer list of dynaviews
SCLBLKS
Scale blocks and whether clipped in dynaviews

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​DynaView S 93
 EARTHWORK

Compute cut and fill volumes between two DTMs.

Compute cut and fill volumes between two DTMs, for any material (not just Earthworks).

Surfaces

SURFACE TO SURFACE
Compute and report cut and fill volumes between two DTM surfaces.
SURFACE TO DATUM
Compute and report cut and fill volumes between a DTM surface and a datum.
STOCKPILE
Compute and report the volume of a measured stockpile, based on an assumed underlying surface.
DEPRESSION
Compute and report the volume of a measured depression or excavation, based on an assumed original surface.
ISOPACH
Compute and report cut and fill volumes associated with a previously stored isopach surface.

Settings

ACCUMULATE VOLUMES
When checked, EARTHWORK adds previously calculated volumes to the volumes being calculated. You enter previous cut and fill volumes in the real number control shown. The default values will be the cut and fill totals from the last volume calculation. If the box is not checked, the Previous excavation and Previous fill options will be greyed out.
SHRINK|​SWELL FACTORS
These real number controls let you enter factors which will be applied to calculated volumes to obtain excavation and fill quantities. Note: Generally, only the fill factor should be varied, leaving the excavation factor at 1.0.
COMPUTATION METHOD
VOLUMES TOTALS ONLY
When the Volume Totals Only option is selected, only the total volumes will be reported.
VOLUMES BY DEPTH INCREMENT
When the Volumes by Depth Increment option is selected, the excavation|​fill volumes calculations will be reported by a depth increment. When this setting is selected, you may enter the desired reporting interval in the real number control immediately to the right.
VOLUMES BY ELEVATION RANGE
When the Volumes by Elevation Range is selected, the excavation|​fill volumes calculations will be reported by elevation range. When this setting is selected, you may enter the desired reporting interval in the real number control immediately to the right. Terramodel uses the value entered in the index elevation control as a basis for calculating the intervals. For example, if the interval is 2 metres, the index elevation is 100.5 metres, and the elevation range of the excavation\​fill region is 98.5 to 106.5, the volumes are calculated for 98.5-100.5, 100.5-102.5, 102.5-104.5, 104.5-106.5, etc.

EARTHWORK finds the minimum and maximum elevations for the excavation|​fill volume and reports the volumes over the entire elevation range.

ISOPACH DATA CREATION
SAVE COMPUTED ISOPACH
When checked, the isopach surface will be stored on the selected layer. When not checked, the isopach surface is computed in the same manner and then automatically deleted.
ISOPACH COLOURS
Select the colours for points in areas of excavation, points in area of fill in the isopach, and breaklines.

Tips

DTM
A Digital Terrain Model is also referred to as a Triangulated Irregular Network or TIN.
Isopach
The isopach surface is the surface representing the difference between two other surfaces. Isopachs are contours extracted from the isopach surface. CONTOUR or 3D VISUALISER the saved isopach surface to check for erroneous data in the other surfaces.
Quick isopach generation
For an accurate volume, make sure Quick isopach generation in LINKSET is OFF so that all the intersection points between the triangles are included in the isopach surface.
Pond Volumes
The volume of water displayed is the excavation volume rather than the fill volume.
Initial Surface to Design Surface Volumes
If your design surface has batters to an existing surface, project the batters using DESIGN or SIDESLOPE before calculating volumes to insure that the design sideslopes are projected. Otherwise, vertical sideslopes may be projected up or down.
Surface to Surface Computation
Surface-to-surface volumes are calculated by computing the isopach between two DTMs or between a datum and a DTM. First, each point is projected onto the other surface, the corresponding elevation interpolated, and the elevation difference is stored with the generated isopach point. The breaklines (of both surfaces are used to generate isopach breaklines. Additional points are inserted into the isopach breaklines where they cross DTM triangles.
Computation
The triangulated isopach surface is used to determine the volume by breaking the data for each triangle into the appropriate number of truncated vertical prisms. If the three points of a triangle all have positive or all have negative elevations (all fill or all cut) then a single triangular prism is present. If the isopach triangle has both positive and negative elevations (cut and fill) then the triangle is broken into a triangular prism and a quadrilateral prism. See Terramodel Help for this command for illustrations.
The volume of each prism is equal to the average height (that is isopach elevation) times the planimetric area. The total fill volume for the isopach is the sum of all positive prismoidal volumes. The total cut volume is the sum of all negative prismoidal volumes.
This method is more accurate than cross section or grid methods using average end area. The differences obtained between methods depend on the size of the grid or interval of cross sections and irregularity of the surfaces. Smooth surfaces may show differences of less than 1%. Some test cases have shown differences of as much as 10% when the cross section interval is 50 foot and the terrain is rough. As the size of the grid or cross section interval decreases to a very small value, the volumes of these methods agree with volumes computed from the isopach surface triangles.
The accuracy of the calculations is no better than the accuracy of the data and the calculated DTM. If breaklines are not properly used to form the proper TIN, good point data can produce bad volumes. If an insufficient number of points are used to describe a surface, then irregularities from the recorded data to the actual ground will produce volumes differing from field conditions.
Additional points
To roughly estimate how many extra points you must allow for when setting the maximum number of points in Terramodel, using SYSTEM command, add the number of points in the two surfaces and multiply by two. Terramodel has a limit of 8 million points. Some of these points will be duplicate. A point is duplicate if it is on the same layer and is within 1 mm. Duplicate points are often created when computing the isopach surface, especially if a boundary line is used. Duplicate points are relayered to layer 0 during the linking process. These points can then be deleted from layer 0 to save space.
Special Case: Link setting "remove flat triangles"
Normally triangles are created to be as equilateral (equal interior angles) as possible. The "remove flat triangles" setting in LINKSET changes the DTM to eliminate, as much as possible, flat areas. This technique is usually used on data from imported contours, forcing each triangle to have a slope. If the points along a set line are within a tolerance of the first point on the set line then flat triangles are removed. Adding and or removing break lines may be required to achieve the desired results. Note that "flat" lines in DXF and DWG files are automatically imported as plines, so you have to CONVERT to sets.
DTM Edge
Once you have the correct link settings for a DTM, use DTMEDGE to fix the boundary to with a bounding set. Then you can change link settings on another surface without affecting the first surface.
Alias
EARTHWORK command was previously known as VOLUME so VOLUME is often an alias for EARTHWORK.

See also

GC20
Report volumes including cut|fill areas
GCGRDVOL
Report volumes of multiple regions
EARTHWRK
Report volumes by end-area in columns
XVOLUMES
Report end-area volumes to .CSV
DRNVOLMS
Report volumes of ponds
GCDAMVOL
Report volumes of dams

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM DTM|​Earthwork volumes
DTM|​Earthwork reports
DTM|​Compute volumes
S DTM 3
 EARTHWRK

Report roadjob volumes by end-area.

Report accumulated roadjob volumes by end-area in columns to P3Pad or a text file.

Options

Road job
Select a Roadjob
Chainage range
Specify start and end chainages.
Report interval
Enter a report interval. For all chainages, enter *.
Report
Select Screen to report to P3Pad. Select File to specify a text file.
Phase
Select one or all phases
Volumes
Report volumes for each surface material, by subgrade or within each closed shape.
Shrink|​swell factors
Apply shrink and swell factors to volumes for each surface material, by subgrade or within each closed shape.
Full report
Report, for each material used at each cross-section in the chainage range, the total volumes, the volumes by material, Chainage totals and Totals Only.
Chainage|​Station totals
Reports, the cut|fill and total volumes at each cross-section in the report range and Totals Only.
Totals only
Report only the total cut and fill volumes across the report range.

See also EARTHWORK for prismoidal volumes, GCGRDVOL for prismoidal volumes between xlines and XVOLUMES for end-area volumes to .CSV.

If you get zero volumes when you expect sensible values, see FIXLAYERS.

Command date Guide Menu Source GC
29/10/08 RG 1005 Roads|​Reports|​Earthwork...
Channel|​Reports|​Dredge volumes...
S 471
 EDIT

Edit any object.

Edit these properties of any object according to object type.

Sets
A set is a string of straight or arc segments joining point objects.
  • Replace a point with another point.
  • Insert a point into a set before a selected point.
  • Append a point to the end of a set.
  • Delete a selected point from the set. If the set contains only two points, the entire set is deleted.
  • Reverse the order of the points. See also REVERSE.
  • Change the set Smoothness. See SETSMOOTH.
  • Reorder the points of the set so that the selected point becomes the first point in the set, the next point becomes the second and so on.
  • Swap the first specified point with the second specified point
  • Toggle the subtended angle of an arc between > and < 180°.
  • Change cut and fill Slope values.
  • Open or close the set. A closed set connects the first point and last point with a set segment.
  • Change CAD properties: layer, colour, linetype, group, name, reference object (parent) and start chainage.
Plines
A pline is a string of straight or curved segments with a single elevation.
  • Move an IP (PI, intersection point, control point, cp or vertex) from one location to another
  • Insert a vertex before the selected vertex
  • Append one or more vertices to the end of the pline
  • Delete the selected vertex
  • Reverse the order of the vertices of a selected pline.
  • Spline or desplines the pline
  • Reorder the vertices of a pline
  • Swap the first specified vertex with the second specified vertex
  • Close or open the pline
  • Undo the last change to pline
  • Change CAD properties: layer, colour, linetype, group, name, reference object (parent), start chainage, elevation
Text
  • If the text was created by LABELSEG, segment point numbers are displayed. Use LABELSEG to update these text objects.
  • Copy text from another text object
  • Enter up to 255 characters of text
  • Origin is the text insertion location
  • Elevation
  • The bearing orients the text.
  • Open the Eat Code Insertion Aid Dialog Box
  • Leader line colours are set globally by DRAFTSET.
    • Select the leader line style, indicating the use of a leader line, or [none]. If the subject text is a segment label, you can also select the Crows Feet style (dimension arrows). Toggle crow's feet with CROWFOOT.
    • Select leader line linetype. The leader line is drawn from the subject being labeled to the text
    • Designate the location to which the leader line points. The leader line will normally point to the subject of a callout, but it can actually point anywhere you wish
    • Assign a gap in project units between the leader line point and the beginning of the leader line. If the gap is expressed as negative, the gap scales with the view scale
  • Select the border style and linetype. See also DRAFTSET
  • The attributes of a subject of the text object can be used in EAT codes
  • An alignment from which the callout's subject can be locate for EAT codes which display a chainage and offset
  • EAT Extended attribute text
  • Text Metrics. See TEXTMETRICS.
  • Change CAD Properties: layer, colour, group, reference object (parent)
Blocks
  • Change properties: layer, colour, group, reference object, name, origin, elevation, auto scale, map colour, auto rotation, and subject point number
  • The block can be scaled in X, Y and Z, and rotated about those axes.
  • If the block is tied to a point number, the point and block will move together.
  • If AutoScale is ON, the block changes size with the view scale
  • If Map Colour is ON for this block, the block is displayed in the block colour. If OFF, in the colours of the objects in the block. When a block is first created, the block colour is the same as the line colour of the layer.
  • If Auto rotation is ON, the block is rotated so that it is displayed through a dynaview so it can be read from the left or bottom of a sheet.
  • If you change the block name, the appearance will change to match the appearance of any existing block with the new name.
  • Use commands like BLOCK, UNITBLK, MKBLKINT, SCLBLKS and AUTODRAFT to control block placement.
Dynaviews
  • Change properties: layer, name, auto off, group, boundary, layer list name, scale, rotation and location.
  • If Auto off is ON, this turns off the display of objects that are referenced and not a part of the family tree.
  • The boundary is the closed pline that defines the extent of the dynaview.
  • You can limit each dynaview to display only those layers on a nominated layer list. See LLISTSET.
  • The dynaview is located at the first vertex in the boundary pline
Points
  • Change properties: point number, layer, colour, group, name, contourability, location, elevation and label.
  • See LABELPOINT for point labelling.
Tables
Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Edit|​Edit object S 32
 EDIT​INI

Edit TMODWIN.INI.

Edit the Terramodel initialisation file TMODWIN.INI.

Installing Terramodel or the Geocomp Update creates or modifies TMODWIN.INI which contains settings for the Terramodel user-interface that control colours, menus, toolbar buttons, function keys, and so on. Most of these configurations can be controlled from within Terramodel using commands such as those listed below. Use EDITINI to edit other configurations in the file without having to use a text editor.

If there is no current TMODWIN.INI, EDITINI creates a new blank one into which you must "Import Sections from old INI file".

Views

The displayed background, cursor and highlight colours depend on the current palette and colourmap. See PALETTE.

Background colour
Select a colour number for the background of graphics window.
Cursor colour
Select a colour number for the graphics cursor.
HiLight colour
Select a colour number for the colour used to show selected objects.
Frame height and width
Specify the size of the Terramodel window frame on start up.
Command columns
Specify the maximum number of characters for the Command Line.

Terramodel Search Path

Terramodel looks for prototypes, blocks, TMLS and many other file types firstly in the current project folder, then the folders in the Terramodel Search Path (TSP) in order, then specific Terramodel software folders that do not need to be added here. Sub-folders are ignored unless you include them.

Edit or add user-definable locations into the Terramodel Search Path. Use Crtl Enter to insert new lines for each folder.

Click "Add TMCustom to TSP" to add C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP and C:\TMCUSTOM if those folders are not included.

Click "Update Terramodel Search Path" to remove any paths that do not exist and replace the TSP with the new values.

Fix Status Bar / System, etc.

Click "Fix Status Bar / System, etc." to reset values of some properties:

  • Edit set: Clear default mode
  • Coordinate scroll: Visible
  • Coordinate scroll: Location 300 pixels from left and 300 from top of primary display
  • Coordinate scroll: Coordinates visible
  • Coordinate scroll: Bearings and distances visible
  • Coordinate scroll: Station|chainages and offsets visible
  • Coordinate scroll: Match E|N decimal places of coordinate precision in UNITSSET
  • Status bar: Visible
  • Command line: Visible
  • Command line: 200 characters long
  • Message scroll: Visible
  • Message scroll: 2 rows
  • Toolbar: Visible
  • Toolbar: Current layer visible
  • Toolbar: Current linetype visible
  • Toolbar: Current object colour visible
  • Toolbar: Current point colour visible
  • Plotterset: Suspend lock driver off.
  • File menu: 8 recent files
  • System: Undo 19999 objects
  • System: 0.001 units tolerance for unequal arc radii
  • System: Maximum of 20,000,000 objects (in P3Server)
  • Alias: Remove section if present. See ALIAS.

Copy and backup

Copy the current TMODWIN.INI to a selected location or backup to TMODWIN.BUP in its current location.

Import sections from an old INI file.

Import or replace sections from an .INI file that contain colourmaps, palettes, penmaps, carousels, function keys or toolbar. Click "Show Old INI File" to browse to select the INI file, select the relevant sections by Click, Control Click or Shift Click, and then Import. New sections are added. Sections with names that match sections in the current TMODWIN are updated and reported to message scroll. Certain sections indicated by *** are not imported, such as lists of palettes or carousels.

Show old INI File
Browse to select an old TMWODWIN.INI file, or another INI file containing relevant sections in the same format. Typical "old .ini files" include:
  • A TMODWIN.INI that you copied as a backup
  • A TMODWIN.INI that you copied from your old computer
  • A TMODWIN.INI that you abridged with just your changed sections or parts of sections
  • C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​TRIMBLE_​DEFAULTS_​TMODWIN.INI with sections from a default installation with no Geocomp Update
  • C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​GEOCOMP_​AUST_DEFAULTS_​TMODWIN.INI with sections from Geocomp Update with Australian defaults
  • C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​GEOCOMP_​USA_DEFAULTS_​TMODWIN.INI with sections from Geocomp Update with American defaults
  • C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​HDMS_​DEFAULTS_​TMODWIN.INI with sections to suit Hydrographic mapping
  • C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​FIELD_DATA_​TMODWIN.INI with sections to suit Field data module (no key)
  • C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\VIEWER_​TMODWIN.INI with sections to suit Viewer only (no key and restricted menu)
  • C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​DELETE_​COLORMAPS_​TMODWIN.INI with empty colormaps
  • C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​DELETE_​PALETTES_​TMODWIN.INI with empty palettes
  • C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​P3PAD_​REPORT_​TMODWIN.INI with the default P3Pad report font
Import Selected
Import configurations from the selected sections. New configurations are created. Configurations with the same names are updated. Other configurations are unchanged.
Replace Selected
Replace the whole of selected sections. All existing configurations in those sections are deleted. Only imported configurations are retained.
Import Selected Sections or Replace Selected sections
Import or replace selected sections into the current TMODWIN.INI file.

TSP is defined in [System]. If you import TSP, you are prompted whether to continue, or to leave TSP alone.

To make current an imported palette, colourmap, penmap or carousel, use PALETTE, PLOTSET or PLOTTERSET afterwards.

Remove sections from TMODWIN.INI.

To delete a section from TMODWIN.INI, select an empty section with the same name and Replace Selected. To remove a palette or colourmap, select the corresponding empty palette or colourmap section from C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​DELETE_​COLORMAPS_​TMODWIN.INI or C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​DELETE_​PALETTES_​TMODWIN.INI. Penmaps are best removed with PLOTSET. Carousels are best removed with CAROUSEL.

Location of TMODWIN.INI

EDITINI reports the location of the current TMODWIN.INI on the title of the dialog. Depending on your versions of Terramodel and Geocomp Update and how they have been installed, this TMODWIN.INI may be in C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Terramodel\Locale\English (or some other Locale) or in a location set by an environmental variable. In addition, Windows can redirect these changes to a hidden copy in the VirtualStore By using EDITINI, you don't need to know exactly where, when or how.

SlopeTable

DTMAREA, GC44, GC44CSV and GC82 refer to a table of decreasing percentage slope ranges defined in TMODWIN.INI. For example,


[SlopeTable]

TableSize=3

0=200.0

1=100.0

2=50.0

To edit the slope table, copy TMODWIN.INI to a location where you can edit, use a text editor to change the ranges, then import the [SlopeTable] section from that file. To restore the default slope table, import from C:\TMCustom\Geocomp\TMODWIN_TRIMBLE_DEFAULTS.INI.

After defining the slope ranges, specify the corresponding TableSize up to a maximum of 100.

SHADESLP uses a separate Shade Slope Ranges (.SSR) file.

Other commands

See also these commands that edit TMODWIN.INI:

AUTOSAVE
Configure Autosave delay and location
CALLOUT and GC21
Load or change the callout style
COMMANDTOGGLE
Turn on the command line
CAROUSEL
Add or modify a pen carousel definition
COORDS
Configure the coordinate scroll
CORDSCRL
Reset the coordinate scroll
FAVOURITES
Favourite commands
GC64BIT
Convert software paths from 32-bit to 64-bit and add Geocomp folder
GCHELP
Report and edit Terramodel Search Path
LINETYPETOGGLE
Toggle linetype selection on the toolbar
MENUCFG
Configure the menus
NEW, OPEN, SAVE and SAVEAS
Current project name and location
OBJSNAP
Set running (object) snap modes
PALETTE
Select the current palette and colourmap
PLOTTERSET
Add or edit plotter configurations and lock driver on|off
STATUSBARTOGGLE
Toggle the status bar display
SYSTEM
Modify company name and address, macro directory, Max objects, Max alpha points, TML debug level, lock file on open, undo buffer, vertex marker size, cursor aperture size, toolbox autostart, mouse dragging or prompting for new points in sets.
TOOLBOX
Display, edit and save toolboxes in workspaces
VIEWSET and VIEWSCAL
Change view settings

Some of these commands also modify values in P3SERVER.INI, project variables, environmental variables or Windows registry entries.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 MM2
 ELE2NAME

Change the name of selected points and plines to match their elevations.

Change the name of selected points and plines in the Profile and Xsect views to match their Y values and in the Plan and other views to match their Z values.

You can overwrite, prefix or suffix the names.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 ELEV​ALONGSET

Modify the elevation of points along a set using a vertical angle

Modify the elevation of selected points within a particular set based on their position along the set with respect to a 3D reference point in that set, and a vertical angle.

If the specified vertical angle is other than a vertical distance, Terramodel multiplies the implied slope by the horizontal distance between the points along the set's alignment, and adds the resulting change in elevation to the elevation of the reference point to compute the elevation of the selected point.

If *
The selected point's elevation will always be set to the computed elevation.
If <
The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is less than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.
If >
The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is greater than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.

This command is similar to ELEVREFPT, except that the distance between the selected point and the reference point is determined along the horizontal alignment of a set within which they are both members.

See also ELEVREFPLANE.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Modify|​​Elevation|​​Along set S  
 ELEV​ATION

Modify the elevation of selected objects.

Modify the elevation of selected objects to an absolute elevation or relative to the current elevation of the object.

Use the radio buttons to select Absolute or Relative.

Turn 3D points into 2D points by entering an asterisk (*) as the elevation.

One way to balance earthwork is to repeatedly change the relative elevation of the design DTM by layer then repeat to project new sideslopes.

Replaced by GCELEV which does the same thing but with better-labelled radio buttons.

See also GC69 , GC53, GCNOELEV and CUTFILL.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Modify|​Elevation|​Elevation S 9
 ELEV​OBJS

Interpolate elevation of points, text and blocks from a DTM.

Replace the elevation of selected points, text and blocks by interpolating from the DTM.

See also DTMPTS which only adds elevations on 2D points and GCPTSTXT which takes the elevation from the value of the nearest text object.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Modify|​Elevation|​From DTM Geocomp Update or $250 237
 ELEV​REFPLANE

Modify the elevation of points along a set using a vertical angle

Modify the elevation of selected points by projecting them vertically to an imaginary plane surface.

The plane surface is defined with respect to a 3D reference point by specifying a bearing, and a vertical angle.

The vertical angle is applied in the direction of the indicated bearing, establishing the tilt of the plane surface, which passes through the reference point.

If *
The selected point's elevation will always be set to the computed elevation.
If <
The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is less than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.
If >
The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is greater than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.

See also ELEVREFPT.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Modify|​Elevation|​Reference plane S  
 ELEV​REFPT

Modify the elevation of points along a set using a vertical angle

Modify the elevation of selected points based on their horizontal distance from a 3D reference point and a vertical angle relationship.

If the specified vertical angle is other than a vertical distance, the implied slope will be multiplied by the distance between the points, and the resulting change in elevation will be added to the elevation of the reference point to compute the elevation of the selected point.

If the specified vertical angle is entered as a vertical distance, it will simply be added to the elevation of the reference point to get the elevation of the selected points.

If *
The selected point's elevation will always be set to the computed elevation.
If <
The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is less than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.
If >
The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is greater than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.
Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Modify\​Elevation\​Reference point S  
 ELFS

Show elevation and grade of a profile at a chainage.

The chainage can be keyed-in or selected graphically in the profile view.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Reports|​More...|​Elevation at chainage
Reports|​More...|​Elevation at station
U  
 ELLIPSE

Create an ellipse.

Create a pline that aproximates an ellipse.

Major axis record
Select a set or pline that extends along the major axis
Minor axis length
Enter the length of the minor axis
No. segs
Enter the number of segments around the new pline

TML date MenuSource 
18/09/19   Draw|​Pline|​Ellipse Geocomp Update or $250  
 ELV​PLINE

Interpolate elevations onto contour plines.

Modify the elevations of selected plines to match the averages of the elevations interpolated from the specified DTM at the vertices of each pline.

The elevations are rounded to the nearest interval in the current CONTOURSET command settings. Use ELVPLINE to convert 2D plines to contours when you have the DTM.

See also GCCONTXT, GCMULCON and PLTO3D.

TML date MenuSource 
29/10/08   Modify|​Elevation|​Pline elev. from DTM S  
 EMXSALIGN

Import a GeoPak alignment report

Read a specific GeoPak alignment file format.

See also RDSCACALN and RDSGPALIGN.

TML date  Source 
29/10/08     S  
 ERRELIP

Define error ellipse attributes

Define attributes on selected points derived from any error ellipse blocks attached to the points.

These points can then be labelled with attributes using EAT TEXT.

RDE can create elliptical blocks indicating the possible error by least squares. These blocks are circles which are scaled by the errors in x and y, then scaled again by 1000 so they are readily visible, then rotated.

The TML name is ERR_ELIP. If ERRELIP does not run from the command line, create an alias from ERRELIP to ERR_ELIP or enter ERR_ELIP. ERRELIP requires the attribute definition file ERR_ELIP.ADF.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 EVALDTM

Evaluate DTM breaklines

Report potential problems with DTM breakline formation.

For each set in a DTM layer, report:

  • Unused segments
  • 2D Points
  • Non-​contourable points
  • Points on different layers
  • Dead regions

Every straight set segment which connects two 3D contourable points on the same layer is a breakline unless it is crossed by another breakline with a higher record number.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   DTM|​Evaluate DTM surface Geocomp Update or $200 140
 EXEC

Execute an external program

Execute an external .EXE application using arguments for the path and variables.

For example, DCEDIT is an ALIAS for EXEC "C:\Program Files (x86)\​Common Files\​Trimble\​DCEditor\​DCEditor.exe".

See also RUN and CMD.

Command dateGuide SourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM   S 200
 EXIT

Exit Terramodel

Save recent changes to objects, close the current project and exit Terramodel.

If you have made changes to objects since the last save, you will be prompted to save changes. If you have changed project variables only, save changes before exiting.

When you save changes, records are renumbered to remove any gaps in the sequence of record numbers caused by deleting objects.

See also RUN.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM File|​Exit S 0
 EXPLODE

Explode blocks, text, tables, dynaviews and complex linetypes.

Explode selected blocks, text, tables, dynaviews and complex linetypes into components.

To explode theseinto theseuse
one set or plinetwo sets or plinesBREAK
setsset segmentsDISJOIN
sets with arcssets with chordsARCBREAK or GCCHORD
plines with no spirals or vertical curvespline segmentsDISJOIN
plines with spiralsplines with arcs and chordsOFFSETDIST
plines with spirals, vertical curves or splinesplines with 2D chordsGCCHORD or FILTER
alignment plines with arcs, spirals, vertical curves or splinessets with 3D chordsGCCHORD
sets or plines with complex linetypessets or plines and symbol textGCEXPLOD
normal textplinesGCEXPLOD
extended attribute text (EAT) with leader line and bordernormal text and plinesGCEXPLOD
blocksplines, text, blocks and pointsGCEXPLOD or EXPLODE
hatchingplinesGCEXPLOD
label tablesplines and textEXPLODE
dimensionsrounded textTEXTRND
lot labelsnormal textLABELSETS Text
lot segment labelsEAT textLABELSETS Text
point labelstextLABELPOINT Explode
symbolstext with symbol fontLABELPOINT Explode
mass haul diagramsplines and textMASSHAUL and MASSDIAG
dynaviewsobjectsEXPLODE or GCEXPLOD

Exploding blocks

  • Depending on how the blocks were created,
  • EXPLODE and GCEXPLOD explode blocks differently with respect to layers, colours, elevations, names and sets. If one command doesn't do what you hoped, try the other one.
  • Because blocks can be nested inside blocks, you may need to repeat to explode more blocks.
  • Optionally, delete the old objects.
  • Recursive blocks, that contain blocks with same name, cannot be exploded. Use DELETE or BLKREAD.
  • Select or restrict by Type. For example, to select blocks but not text, use SEARCH settings or Right mouse button Type.
  • Explode hatching before you include any in a new block.
  • A block with Map colour ON is displayed in the colour of the block; with Map colour OFF, in the colour of the objects in the block. Use SCLBLKS to change the map colour status of multiple blocks.
  • Use CLIP to break plines or sets at a boundary.
  • Use DELBLKS to delete missing external blocks.
  • Use GCPURGE to purge all unused blocks.
  • Use SYM2BLK to replace symbols with blocks.
  • Use GCBLKFIX to explode blocks, modify the colours of the objects and recreate the blocks.
Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Edit|​Explode S  
 EXPLORE

Windows Explorer toolbar button

Open Windows File Explorer.

Open Windows File Explorer file manager.

Windows File Explorer is also known as Explore, Explorer, My Computer, Computer and This PC.

Alias date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Toolbar button user-definable  
 EXPORT

Export data using scripts.

Using a system of configurable scripts, export data from Terramodel, directly to some survey instruments, or to a data file.

Survey formats

The formats cover a wide range of survey instruments and software including:

  • ASCII points
  • DiNi
  • .DWG and .DXF
  • Elta
  • ESRI .SHP
  • Geocomp
  • Geodimeter
  • LandXML
  • Microstation V7 .DGN
  • Nikon
  • Paydirt SiteWork
  • SDMS
  • Softdesk
  • Sokkia .SDR
  • SMI
  • SpectraPrecision .ALN, .RLN
  • Star*Net
  • Terramodel.PRO
  • Trimble Constructor
  • Trimble DiNi
  • Trimble SCS900
  • Trimble SiteWork
  • Trimble Survey Controller
  • Trimble Survey Data Card
  • Trimble DTM .TTM
  • Trimble Roading 3D .DC
  • Trimble Setout .DC
  • Tripod Data Systems (TDS)

This list includes both standard Terramodel scripts and scripts supplied with the Geocomp Update. Use EXPORTSMGR to create and edit export scripts.

Trimble

Other commands that export to Trimble formats include GCDCOUT, GCLFAOUT, GCMULTDC, GCPTSOUT, GCSZAOUT, GCTMAOUT, GCTTAOUT, SURVCONT, TRMBGRID and TRMBROAD. Refer to www.geocomp.com.au/​support/​terramodel/​acu.html.

ESRI shape files

When exporting shape files, select "Name", "Layer" or "Colour" but not "Attributes" (unless you have previously set up ESRI attributes).

The ESRI files created in the same folder are:.SHP containing geometry, .SHX containing the index and .DBF containing attributes. If a .PRJ containing the projection is requested, ask the recipient to supply theirs, open that in a text editor to discover the projection and use GCCOORD or COORDCON to transform your data to that projection before exporting the files.

See also

GCPTSOUT
Export points to various formats
IMPORT
Import using a script
SNRFILE
Find and replace text in a file

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09 HELPIE, UG, FDM UG File|​Export/​Upload S 188,​FC D,​FC I
 EXPORTGC

Export or report cross sections in Geocomp format.

Given a road job surface, create a Geocomp .CES cross section file or a detailed cross section report similar to that produced by Geocomp RDP 482, or both.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 402,482
 EXPORT​SMGR

Export script manager.

Hide, create, edit, delete or run export scripts.

Create a new export script

Name script and select destination
Give the script a name and specify whether the script action is to export, upload or both.
Instrument|​data collector
If you selected upload, select a device to upload to.
Select output file format
If you selected export, select a file format, such as ASCII points.
Target file
Specify an export file location or name (e.g. *.CSV) which you can leave blank. Specify other information depending on the chosen format such as mapping file or output format.
ASCII formats
For ASCII formats, enter codes delimited by spaces or commas to indicate the data order of the source files. Enter P for Points field, E for Easting, N for Northing, Z for Elevation, D for Description|​Name, X for Station|​Chainage from the active alignment, O for Offset from the active alignment, S for Space or " before and after a literal string, and optionally enter field widths or precisions and point settings.

For Import + Export help, see Index on the Help menu. Press F1 while creating a script might also open Help.

The scripts are stored as files of the same name in the C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared\​ImportExport\ folder. If the script file name is ticked, the script is visible on the EXPORT menu and the file extension is .xe. If not ticked, the script is not visible, and the extension is .xe_.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM File|​Export/​Upload|​Export script manager S  
 EXPORTXS

Export cross section data in Terramodel .XSC format.

Export or list a selected surface from a roadway as cross sections in Terramodel .XSC file format with a chainage range.

Specify Segment 1, unless you are using chainage equations.

The report includes the offset and elevation of each point at each chainage.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     S  
 EXTEND

Extend a pline or set to boundaries or by a distance.

Extend a pline or set to boundaries or by a distance.

To bdy
Extend to a boundary or to a specified distance
Distance
Extend by a specified distance.
Boundaries
Extend to the first the boundary, or lines projected from the ends of the boundary. The boundaries do not need to be closed.
Line
Specify a pline or set to be extended
Add Pt
Create a new segment between the end and the new location.
Move Pt
Move the end of the set or pline segment.

Spirals and vertical curves cannot be extended.

See also GCEXTEND, which extends multiple plines to a single boundary, and GC88, which extends or clips to a specified total distance.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Edit|​Extend S 276
 F7

Function key F7

Toggle point number labels.

Label points with point numbers. F7 command again to turn point numbers off.

Add or change point labels that show the point number, at a legible view scale, for all visible points. If the point number is currently displayed, F7 turns the point number off.

If point markers have already been turned on by F8, elevations by F9 or names by F11, a point label block is selected which continues to show them. These labels are also known as block labels in LABELPOINT and style indices in EDIT.

The point label has the same colour as the point.

Blocks and point symbols are unchanged.

When F7 turns on point numbers, the height of the displayed labels is maintained by adjusting the view scale, if required, to suit the Point Label Height setting in EDITINI.

These point labels are intended for quick use while examining or editing your data. If you are drafting, or otherwise work with fixed view scales, or want control over colours or layers, use LABPT, BLOCK or AUTODRAFT to create text or blocks.

To reassign function keys F7, F8, F9 and F11 to launch F7, F8, F9 and F11 commands, use EDITINI to import the [Function​Keys] section from C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​GEOCOMP_​AUST_​DEFAULTS_​TMODWIN.INI.

See also

GCREDRAW
Update the plan view scale to suit labels then redraw
LABELPOINT
Add or edit point labels
VIEWSET
Change the view scale
VIEWSCAL
Enter a plan view scale or change the plan view scale to suit point labels

TML date MenuSourceGC
15/07/19   Draft|​Label points with numbers
Function key F7
Geocomp Update or $250 F7,136
 F8

Function key F8

Toggle symbol labels.

Label points with circle symbol labels. Run F8 again to turn symbol labels off.

Add or change point labels that show a circle (symbol 40), at a legible view scale, for all visible points. If the symbol label is currently displayed, F8 turns the symbol label off.

If point numbers have already been turned on by F7, elevations by F9 or names by F11, a point label block is selected which continues to show them. These labels are also known as block labels in LABELPOINT and style indices in EDIT.

The circle label has the same colour as the point.

Blocks and point symbols are unchanged.

When F8 turns on circle labels, the height of the displayed labels is maintained by adjusting the view scale, if required, to suit the Point Label Height setting in EDITINI.

To label points with a user-defined symbol number and symbol height, see F8C.

These point labels are intended for quick use while examining or editing your data. If you are drafting, or otherwise work with fixed view scales, or want control over colours or layers, use LABPT, BLOCK or AUTODRAFT to create text or blocks.

To reassign function keys F7, F8, F9 and F11 to launch F7, F8, F9 and F11 commands, use EDITINI to import the [Function​Keys] section from C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​GEOCOMP_​AUST_​DEFAULTS_​TMODWIN.INI.

See also

F8T
Display temporary point markers
GCREDRAW
Update the plan view scale to suit labels then redraw
LABELPOINT
Add or edit point labels
VIEWSET
Change the view scale
VIEWSCAL
Enter a plan view scale or change the plan view scale to suit point labels

TML date MenuSource 
15/07/19   Draft|​label points with circles
Function key F8
Geocomp Update or $250  
 F8C

Toggle preset symbol labels.

Label points with preset symbols. Run F8C again to turn preset symbols off.

Blocks, point labels and other symbols are unchanged.

To preset the symbol, use PROJECTV to create or set the Integer project variable "F8C:​Symbol_Number" to the desired symbol. The default symbol is 34 (+).

The symbol size is dependent on the current view scale at time of creation. To change the size, change the view scale with VIEWSET or VIEWSCAL then toggle off then on.

To preset the symbol size, use PROJECTV to create or set the Double project variable "F8C:​Symbol_Height" to the desired height in sheet units. The default height is 0.10.

The colour of the label is the same as the point colour.

The point labels are the same as those placed by LABELPOINT. These labels are intended for quick use while editing your data. If you are drafting, use LABPT, BLOCK or AUTODRAFT instead for control over colours, size, layers and so on.

To label with circle symbols at heights that adjust view scale for legibility, use F8. To configure the F8 function key to use F8C, ALIAS from F8C to F8 or use EDITINI to edit F8 in the function key section of TMODWIN.INI. To display temporary point markers, use F8T.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 F8T

Display temporary point markers.

Display temporary point markers on all points in visible layers.

The point marker size is dependent on the current view scale. The colour is the cursor colour.

Point markers are temporary and disappear after refresh. They are not objects or labels or vertex markers. Blocks, symbols and point labels are unchanged.

To display circle symbols at heights that adjust view scale for legibility, use F8. To configure the F8 function key to use F8T, ALIAS from F8C to F8 or use EDITINI to edit F8 in the function key section of TMODWIN.INI. To display point markers with a user-defined symbol, use F8C.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18   Reports|​Mark|​Points Geocomp Update or $250 F8,137
 F9

Function key F9

Toggle elevation labels.

Label points with elevations. F9 command again to turn elevation labels off.

Add or change point labels that show the elevation, at a legible view scale, for all visible points. If the point number is currently displayed, F9 turns the point number off.

If point numbers have already been turned on by F7, circles by F8 or names by F11, a point label block is selected which continues to show them. These labels are also known as block labels in LABELPOINT and style indices in EDIT.

The point label has the same colour as the point.

Blocks and point symbols are unchanged.

When F9 turns on elevation labels, the height of the displayed labels is maintained by adjusting the view scale, if required, to suit the Point Label Height setting in EDITINI.

These point labels are intended for quick use while examining or editing your data. If you are drafting, or otherwise work with fixed view scales, or want control over colours or layers, use LABPT, BLOCK or AUTODRAFT to create text or blocks.

To reassign function keys F7, F8, F9 and F11 to launch F7, F8, F9 and F11 commands, use EDITINI to import the [Function​Keys] section from C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​GEOCOMP_​AUST_​DEFAULTS_​TMODWIN.INI.

See also

GCREDRAW
Update the plan view scale to suit labels then redraw
LABELPOINT
Add or edit point labels
VIEWSET
Change the view scale
VIEWSCAL
Enter a plan view scale or change the plan view scale to suit point labels

TML date MenuSourceGC
15/07/19   Draft|​Label points with elevations
Function key F9
Geocomp Update or $250 F9,138
 F11

Function key F11

Toggle point name labels.

Label points with names. F11 command again to turn point name labels off.

Add or change point labels that show the name, at a legible view scale, for all visible points. If the name is currently displayed, F11 turns the name off.

If point numbers have already been turned on by F7, circles by F8 or elevations by F9, a point label block is selected which continues to show them. These labels are also known as block labels in LABELPOINT and style indices in EDIT.

The point label has the same colour as the point.

Blocks and point symbols are unchanged.

When F11 turns on point name labels, the height of the displayed labels is maintained by adjusting the view scale, if required, to suit the Point Label Height setting in EDITINI.

These point labels are intended for quick use while examining or editing your data. If you are drafting, or otherwise work with fixed view scales, or want control over colours or layers, use LABPT, BLOCK or AUTODRAFT to create text or blocks.

To reassign function keys F7, F8, F9 and F11 to launch F7, F8, F9 and F11 commands, use EDITINI to import the [Function​Keys] section from C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​GEOCOMP_​AUST_​DEFAULTS_​TMODWIN.INI.

TML date MenuSourceGC
15/07/19   Draft|​Label points with names
Function key F11
Geocomp Update or $250 F10,110
 FAVORITES

Favourite commands.

Edit a history of up to 30 Terramodel favourite and most recently used commands.

Commands from this history are available by right-​clicking in the graphics area when prompted for a Terramodel command.

Enable command completion to anticipate commands from this history as you type.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM File|​System configuration|​Favorites S 201
 FBLOCK

Import ASCII points into square regions in separate project files.

Import ASCII points into separate Terramodel project files for each square data region of the nominated size. The input data format is assumed to be E N Z or E,N,Z. Blank lines and lines starting with '#' are ignored.

For example, if the region size is 1000m, all points with X between 0 and 1000 and also Y between 0 and 1000, are added to one Terramodel project, whereas those points with X between 0 and 1000 but Y between 1000 and 2000, would be added to a different Terramodel project file, and so on.

Project Variable MAX_​NUMBER_​OF_​FILES restricts the number of files open. The default is 100.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     S  
 FILLET

Create a curve by radius at the intersection of two set segments or two pline segments.

  1. Select the first segment using the Seg1 locate control.
  2. Select the second segment that intersects the first using the Seg1 locate control.
  3. Input the radius for the arc using the Radius distance control.
  4. Specify whether to trim the two selected line segments using the Trim check box. When the box is checked, the lines are trimmed to the point at which the fillet arc is added. If a radius of 0 is used, the lines will be trimmed to the point at which the lines intersect.
  5. Click OK to create the fillet.
Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Arc|​Fillet S 73
 FILTER

Filter vertices in plines.

Create plines made up of straight segments from selected plines within a filter "box".

The number of vertices is reduced along straights, such as contours, and can be increased for splines, arcs and spirals.

The initial filter box is of the specified length and width and is orientated to the first segment. The width is perpendicular to the segment.

FILTER checks for additional vertices contained within the limits of the filter box. Any vertices inside the box are discarded. The first vertex found outside the box is kept, and the last discarded vertex inside the box is added back to the pline. The tube is then reoriented based on the last two vertices, and the process is repeated.

Set the current colour and layer so you can see the difference between the new plines and the old.

See also BLFILTER, GCCHORD, GCFILTER and SETFILT.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Pline|​Filter S DTM F
 FILT3DPT

Filter duplicate points within 3D tolerance.

Relayer any duplicate points within a specified 3D tolerance to layer 0 with the option to report.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 FIXCURVE

Move three-​point-​arc points onto tangents.

Fix non-tangential arcs by moving the end and centre points of three-​point-​arcs onto the line of adjacent straight segments.

In selected sets, for each pair of adjoining arc segments with equal radii, where the first and last surveyed points are approximately tangent points (TPs) and the adjoining set segments are straight, move each "TP" along the adjoining straight until both are exactly tangential and move the centre point so the radii remain equal.

You can also interpolate new elevations along the tangents.

Three-​point arcs are represented by pairs of adjoining arc segments with equal radii. To create a three-point arc, select three points using GC3PTARC, use a POC (point-on-curve) global code in AUTODRAFT or import Geocomp three-​point-​arc strings using GCIMPORT.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 FIXDTM

Fix breaklines connected to points in other layers.

For set segments on a DTM layer that join contourable points on other layers, "fix" them so they function as breaklines.

For each set on the DTM layer, wherever the set is connected to a 3D point on layer 0, and there is 2D point on the DTM layer at the same X and Y location, replace the 2D point in the set with the 3D point.

For any such points found, P3Pad reports the point numbers and "Swapping point number in set".

If the set is connected to a point on any other layer, and there is no point at the same location on the DTM layer, copy the point into the DTM layer and then insert the point into the set.

During DTM formation by any command, duplicate points on a DTM layer relayer to layer 0. Any connected to a set are usually replaced by one on the DTM layer and message scroll reports "Set Node Changed". If this doesn't happen, use FIXDTM or GC31.

See also EVALDTM and GCCOPY.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 FIXDYNA

Replace dynaviewed plotboxes with new plotbox records.

Create new closed plotbox plines to replace selected plotboxes.

For each selected pline, that has a dynaview,

  • Close the pline, if it is open
  • Create a new plotbox pline at the same locations
  • Change the parent of the dynaview to the new plotbox

Delete the old plotboxes or retain them as plines with no dynaviews

Delete any text or plines that referred to the old plotboxes or retain them as records with no parents.

Use FIXDYNA when you have many dynaviews, and visibility of objects in some dynaviews is incorrect because you have lost track of object referencing.

TML date  Source 
15/03/19     Geocomp Update or $200  
 FIXLAYERS

Fix layers.

Repair layers that cannot be used to compute end-area volumes.

Deleting multiple empty layers using LAYERSET in Terramodel 10.20 only, can corrupt a layer attribute in the project such that commands such as AVGEND, EARTHWRK and TEMPLATE report 0.00 volumes and, in road cross sections, materials are not shaded in colour.

Fix these layers in the current project by running FIXLAYERS at the Terramodel command line.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     S  
 FLD2RDE

Import 12D Model .FLD field file.

Import 12D Model .FLD survey file for Raw Data Editor.

Procedure

  1. Copy an .RDE file that contains only comments, such as C:\TMCUSTOM\​Geocomp\​Docs\​EMPTY.RDE, to a new name with extension .RDE.
  2. Use the Empty.RDE _i IMPORT script to import the .RDE file with the new name and create a new survey job in Raw data editor (RDE) with the description "[new file name.RDE] imported at [time and date]".
  3. Exit RDE.
  4. Run FLD2RDE command.
  5. Browse to select a .FLD file created by a data collector with 12D Field software.
  6. Select OK to import the survey, convert the survey to .RDE format, display the survey in P3Pad and display the Procedure button "Copy All from P3pad report into RDE main screen".
  7. Click "Copy All from P3pad report into RDE main screen" to open RDE.
  8. Use Alt-Tab keys together to bring P3Pad editor to the current window.
  9. In P3Pad, use Control-A to Select All text.
  10. Alt-tab to RDE window.
  11. In RDE, use Control-C keys to paste text.
  12. Exit RDE to process the survey and create points.

See also

IMPORT with Geocomp 17-20 FLD_i import script
Import Geocomp or LisCAD coordinate data in Geocomp .FLD format with station identifier in characters 17 to 20 of the description
IMPORT with Geocomp 6-8 FLD_i import script
Import Geocomp or LisCAD coordinate data in Geocomp .FLD format with station identifier in characters 6 to 8 of the description (typically from Leica surveys)
GCIMPORT Data Collector Interface
Import survey observations, convert to Geocomp .FLD format, reduce to coordinates in .PTS|.STR format and import into RDE
DOS Geocomp
Import survey observations, convert to Geocomp .FLD format, reduce to coordinates in .PTS|.STR format and display for editing in Spatial Data System
GC12DIN
Import 12Model Archive .12DA data

TML date  Source 
20/12/19     Geocomp Update or $200  
 FLIPDOWN

Copy objects from an elevation view into a plan view.

Copy selected objects from an "Elevation" view such as Profile, XSect or View6 into a selected "Plan" view.

The objects are created at distances, elevations and offsets, along a reference line selected from the Plan view, equal to their X, Y and Z coordinates in the Elevation view.

The objects refer to the original object so you can then label a point with the original point number or elevation using EAT codes.

See also FLIPUP, BGELEV and GC56.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Cogo|​Flip|​Flip down Geocomp Update or $200  
 FLIPUP

Copy objects from a plan view into an elevation view.

Copy selected objects from a plan view into an "Elevation" drawing in a selected view.

The chainage of the point along the selected baseline determines the x-coordinate, while the elevation of the point determines the y-coordinate position.

The objects maintain the layer, colour and linetype of the original points.

The name of the new object is the original name plus the baseline name and original point number, X, Y and Z.

The objects are referenced to the original object. This enables you to label a point with the original point number, elevation, etc. using EAT codes.

See also FLIPDOWN, BGELEV and GC56.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Cogo|​Flip|​Flip up Geocomp Update or $200  
 FONTCHNG

List or change fonts of selected text.

Report which fonts (typefaces) are used by selected text objects or change all selected of that font to a specified font.

Use this to fix text with incorrect fonts.

The From list shows only fonts used by any of the selected text.

The To list lists alphabetically all fonts which have been loaded into Terramodel or listed in p3server.ini.

If Terramodel cannot find a corresponding FNT file for a font, the font of the text is still changed to that font, but is displayed with the default font, usually TMODELF. To add a new font to the To List, place the FNT file into the fonts folder, specify that font in TEXTMETRICS or STYLESET, then add to the ini file when prompted.

See also LISTFONT and TEXTMETRICS.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Modify|​Text|​Font Geocomp Update or $200  
 FORESTRD

Design a forest road.

Select a registered HAL, check the settings and then press Enter. The result is a road fully designed in horizontal, including fitting of curves, templates, transitions, super­elevation and widening. In conjunction with VAL Editor, design a long road in minutes!

Keep any of your existing curves, superelevation, widening, xlines, and existing profile, or update them.

The settings include design speed, default cross slope, pavement and shoulder width and widening ratio.

Great for forest, haul and mountain roads where the same design criteria apply for most of the length.

Use WALK to get the initial alignment if based on constant grade, otherwise pick some IPs. Use RDVALEDIT to design the vertical alignment. Then modify your horizontal and vertical design to accommodate variations such as intersections.

FORESTRD and a prototype file are customised according to your requirements which could match those of any road authority. The default is setup for NSW RTA and Forestry Tasmania.

See also HAULROAD which also generates vertical and slope alignments, can allow you to edit your alignments and computes volumes.

See also FORESTTB.

TML date  Source 
Custom     POA  
 FORESTTB

Report offsets for a forest road

Use with FORESTRD.

TML date  Source 
Custom     POA  
 FRGOUT

Export FM 700 Full Road Geometry (.FRG) file.

Specify the centreline HAL of a road and records to set out and export this to an .FRG file. This file can then be used to store the full road geometry on Nikon DTM-800 series and Zeiss total stations running Fast Map 700 Road Engineer software. This can then be used for checking and setting out complex surfaces and alignments.

FM700 has built-in Quality Assurance. The default HAL is the active alignment, if set. If the VAL is picked, the elevations are the difference between the height of the object and the VAL, otherwise the elevations are from the points.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 FYATBEDIT

Edit feature attributes.

Copy feature attributes of a parent object onto selected objects.

If the parent object does not have feature attributes, enter feature attribute names and values using a dialog.

Feature attributes can be defined with a Name, Value and Date/Time.

See also DISPFEAT, FYATBEP, FYATBEP, FYATBOUT and CHECKATT.

The TML name is FY_ATBED. If FYATBEDIT does not run from the command line, create an alias from FYATBEDIT to FY_ATBED or enter FY_ATBED. This command requires FEATURES.ADF which is also supplied.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Feature Attribute TML bundle @ $400  
 FYATBEP

Export feature attributes to CSV.

Export feature attributes of selected objects to a comma-separate values (.CSV) file.

Feature attributes can be defined with a Name, Value and Date/Time.

See also DISPFEAT, FYATBEDIT, FYATBIN and FYATBOUT.

The TML name is FY_ATBEP. If FYATBEP does not run from the command line, create an alias from FYATBEP to FY_ATBEP or enter FY_ATBEP. This command requires FEATURES.ADF which is also supplied.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Feature Attribute TML bundle @ $400  
 FYATBIN

Import feature attributes from a survey file.

Import all feature Attribute codes from a selected Trimble .DC, Leica .TLF or .CSV points file.

These feature attributes can be collected in the field for Geographic Information Systems (GIS) purposes.

The steps are:

For Trimble surveys:
  1. Upload a feature code table that uses Feature Attributes to a suitable Trimble
  2. Conduct a feature survey using those field attributes
  3. Extract the Trimble survey data as a .DC.
  4. IMPORT the Trimble DC survey file using the import script "Trimble raw survey data (dc)".
  5. Run FYATBIN from the command line
  6. Browse
  7. Choose Trimble Raw Data Collector Files
  8. Select the same DC file as before
  9. Import attributes onto the corresponding points.

For Leica surveys:
  1. Upload a suitable format file that uses Attributes to a suitable Leica survey instrument
  2. Conduct a feature survey using those field attributes
  3. Extract the Leica Survey data as a .TLF with attributes.
  4. IMPORT the Leica TLF survey file using the import script "Geocomp Leica TLF _i".
  5. Run FYATBIN from the command line
  6. Browse
  7. Select Leica Data Collector Files
  8. Select the same TLF file as before
  9. Import attributes onto the corresponding points.

For spreadsheet data:
  1. Create, edit or import Terramodel objects with unique names
  2. Create a .CSV file
  3. Create the first column with the heading Name then the names of the objects onto which the feature attributes are to be imported
  4. Create the other columns with headings of the feature attribute names then feature attribute values corresponding to the object names
  5. Run FYATBIN from the command line
  6. Browse
  7. Select CSV Data Files
  8. Select the .CSV file
  9. Import attributes onto the corresponding objects.

Notes

Import the attributes immediately after importing the points, so that you can be sure that the point numbers haven't changed.

The "Trimble raw survey data (dc)" import script reads the point name on "D9 Code" records and then "87 Feature Name" records. If both records exist for the same point, the "87" record is used. If the "D9" records are preferred because they are similar but are appended with additional data such as string numbers, use FYATBIN to replace the "87" point names with the "D9" point names.

See also DCEDIT, DISPFEAT, FYATBEDIT, FYATBEP and FYATBOUT.

The TML name is FY_ATBIN. If FYATBIN does not run from the command line, create an alias from FYATBIN to FY_ATBIN or enter FY_ATBIN.

FYATBIN requires FEATURES.ADF which is also supplied.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Feature Attribute TML bundle @ $400  
 FYATBOUT

Export feature attributes to MapInfo files.

Export feature attributes of objects on a selected layer list to Mapinfo MIF/MID files that match D-SPEC as-built drainage specification.

The attribute names are written to the .MIF file and the corresponding values are written to the .MID file. Elevations can be included.

If the Coordinate System selected by GCCOORD is MGA, AMG or ISG, the definition is includes in the header, otherwise the default "non earth" is specified. To add another coordinate system, please contact Geocomp Systems.

Feature attributes can be defined with a Name, Value and Date/Time.

See also DISPFEAT, FYATBEDIT, FYATBEP, FYATBIN and MAPIOUT.

The TML name is FY_ATBOU. If FYATBOUT does not run from the command line, create an alias from FYATBOUT to FY_ATBOU or enter FY_ATBOU. This command requires FEATURES.ADF which is also supplied.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Feature Attribute TML bundle @ $400  
 GARMININ

Import a Garmin GPS Waypoint (.wpt) file.

Import a Garmin GPS Waypoint (.wpt) file.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GARMINOU

Export a Garmin GPS Waypoint (.wpt) file.

Export a Garmin GPS Waypoint (.wpt) file.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC01

Remove characters in a name by a range of character positions.

Nominate the start and end character positions. The range is inclusive.

To remove characters within the range, select Delete.

To retain only those characters within the range, do not select Delete.

The values are stored as project variables.

Note that for text objects, the name is the same as the text value.

See also SNR.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Modify|​More...|​Truncate name Geocomp Update or $250 rdes
 GC02

Modify point names to include chainage|​station and offset.

Modify the name of selected points to include chainage|​station and offset from HAL.

CL HAL:
Select a centreline alignment pline or set
Pts
Select points
Include Sta.|Ch.
Include Sta.|Ch. and the value of station|chainage measured along the alignment
Include Offset
Include offset from selected HAL
Use EAT for Offsets
Configure offset to Offset EAT code format
Hal Pt Labels
If the point has the same chainage|​station as a significant HAL point, append the label such as IP, SC, CS or TP
Settings
Prefix Chainage|​Station
Enter any prefix to chainage|​station
Suffix Chainage|​Station
Enter any suffix to the chainage|​station
Prefix Offset
Enter any prefix to the offset
Suffix Offset
Enter any suffix to the offset
Append to point's name
Append to or replace existing point name
Prefix to point's name
Prefix to or replace existing point name
Create text
Also create text with the same characters as the point name
Text layer
Select layer for new text
Text style
Select style for any text
Text colour
Select a style for any text

The dialog uses the full chainage or station label (such as Chainage or Station) and the short chainage or station label (such as Sta., Ch. or KP) as configured by STAORCHN. These are configured in the [Geocomp] section of TMODWIN.INI for the computer and are independant of the project file. The short label also prefixes the station or chainage value.

If Offset EAT code format is selected, the format of the offset, configured by UNITSSET Labeling, can include any characters and indicate direction such as L or - for left, R for right and CL or 0.000 for zero offset).

The order of the potential components of the new name is: Original name|​chainage prefix|​Short chainage label|​chainage value|​chainage suffix|​offset prefix|​Offset value with Off or EAT codes|​Offset suffix|​HAL point label|​Original name.

See also

NFS
Modify point name to chainage|​station only
LABELOFF
Label point with offset
GC03
Report offsets

TML date  SourceGC
16/11/18     Geocomp Update or $250 176
 GC03

Report chainage and offset from HAL and VAL.

Report Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Elev and Name of selected points, relative to a horizontal and vertical alignment.

Optionally,

  • List Easting and Northing
  • List vertical differences to a specified Design DTM
  • Extend the alignment past the end of the HAL record

In Settings, you can specify

  • Text for headings (up to five)
  • Text for a footer
  • Whether to create a .CSV file in format Pt No, Ch, O|S, Elev, Val Diff,Name
  • Whether to include Easting and Northing
  • Whether to report coordinates before or after Name column
  • Whether change the Point Names to show the Point number, horizontal offset, and elevation difference.

The report includes any pline vertices.

If the HAL is a 3D set, and you do not select a VAL, the elevation differences will be to the set.

Chainages are measured horizontally. See GC14 to use sloping chainages.

See also GC03A to use a master HAL or GC03DRN for an as-built drain report.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Reports|​More...|​Chainage and offset
Reports|​More...|​Station and offset
Geocomp Update or $250 122
 GC03A

Report chainage and offset from master HAL.

Report Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Elev, Val difference, Name and optionally, Coordinates, Vertical differences to a design DTM, up to five headings and a footer.

Specify points, a master HAL and a design Line.

In the Headings dialog, you can "Create CSV file" for use in spreadsheets

The report includes pline vertices.

If the HAL is a 3D set, and you do not select a VAL, the elevation differences will be to the set.

The HAL can be extended past the end of the HAL record. Chainages are measured horizontally.

See also GC03, GC14 for 3D chainages and GC03DRN for an as-built drain report.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Reports|​More...|​Chainage and offset Geocomp Update or $250 122
 GC03DRN

Report chainage and design offset As-Built report from HAL and VAL.

Report selected points showing Pt Number, Chainage, As-built Offset, Design Offset, As-built Height, Design Height, Height difference from VAL, Design Grade As-Built Grade, Easting, Northing and Name|​Description.

Select points, a HAL, and enter the design horizontal and vertical offsets and tolerances for Horizontal, Vertical and Grade.

Optionally, select a VAL, to List Coordinates and enter Headings. To also create a .CSV, select the option under headings. Coordinates are only listed to .CSV.

See also GC03.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 122
 GC03DUAL

Report chainage and offset from two HAL and VAL pairs.

Report Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Elev, Val difference and Name from main Horizontal and Vertical alignments and Secondary Horizontal and Vertical alignments.

You can also list coordinates, extend past the end of the HAL record, and report vertical differences to a design DTM.

In the Secondary HAL/VAL and Settings dialog, enter up to five heading lines and footer for your reports, pick a secondary HAL and VAL and, optionally, create .CSV file for use in spreadsheets.

The report includes pline vertices.

If the HAL is a 3D set, and you do not select a VAL, the elevation differences will be to the set.

See also GC14 for 3D chainages and GC03DRN for an as-built drain report.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 122
 GC03RAKE

Report chainage, offset and rake from HAL and VAL.

Report Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Elevation, Elevation difference, Rake in 1m and Name of selected points, relative to a horizontal and vertical alignment.

You can also

  • List Easting and Northing
  • Extend the alignment past the end of the HAL record

In Settings, you can specify

  • Text for headings (up to five)
  • Text for a footer

If the HAL is a 3D set, and you do not select a VAL, the elevation differences will be to the set.

Chainages are measured horizontally.

See also GC03 for a simple report, GC03A to use a master HAL, GC03DRN for an as-built drain report and GC03WALL for a wall report.

TML date     Source  
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC03WALL

Report chainage, offset, lean and rake of a wall from HAL and VAL.

Report chainage, offset, as built elevation, height above design toe, direction of lean and rake from HAL and VAL.

You can also

  • Backfill to left or right
  • List Easting and Northing
  • Extend the alignment past the end of the HAL record
  • Specify tolerances
  • Specify
    • Text for headings (up to five)
    • Text for a footer

If the HAL is a 3D set, and you do not select a VAL, the elevation differences will be to the set.

Chainages are measured horizontally.

See also GC03 for a simple report, GC03A to use a master HAL, GC03DRN for an as-built drain report and GC03RAKE for a rake report.

TML date     Source  
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC04

Create mid-points on short plines.

Where a single-segment pline is less than a minimum length, create a mid-point.

If the mid-point of the next pline is in the same location, omit the duplicate point.

A common use is to create a single point on each pair of crossing plines imported from CAD.

See also ILINE to intersect lines and GC31 to remove duplicate points, GC83 to select short plines or sets and DIVIDE to divide a pline or set.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 314
 GC05

Calculate the centre of mass between two DTMs.

Calculate the centre of mass between two DTMs and inside a boundary.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC06

Round elevations in project file.

Changes elevations to rounded values.

Only use GC06 where you cannot round the displayed values with EAT codes or precision settings.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC07

Helmert transformation.

Compute shift, rotation and scale values that best fit selected pairs of points then transform the selected objects in 2D.

Objects
Select the objects to be transformed, carefully.
Use Form
Control point
Select up to nine points in the new coordinate system by point number or mouse.
Data point
Select up to nine corresponding points in the old coordinate system.
Weight
Specify the number of times to use each control and data point pair.
Generate report
Report to P3Pad.
Fix scale factor to
Fix the scale factor (e.g. to 1.00) rather than use the computed factor.
Apply Elev shift to Transformed objects
Shift the elevations rather than leave the elevations unchanged.
Calculate.
From the control and data points, weights and scale factor, calculate the Residuals, Rotation, Scale, East shift and North Shift for a 2D Helmert transformation, and the average elevation difference for an elevation shift, and display the calculated values on the right-hand side.
Clear Form
Clear the input information so you can reenter.
Transform Objects
Immediately transform the selected objects in 2D from the old coordinate system to the new, and shift the elevations if specified.
Store Transformation Values
Store calculated values as project variables so you can transform other data in the same project file with the same rotation, scale and shifts.
Store Transformation to hmt
Store calculated values to an external .HMT file so you can transform data in other project files with the same rotation, scale and shifts.
Use Stored Values
If you have previously stored transformation values as project variables using the form, immediately transform the coordinates of the selected objects.
Use HMT file
Select a .HMT file containing transformation values previously stored using the form, and immedately transform the selected objects.
Wld
Read a .WLD file containing coordinate pairs previously created by Arcmap and then compute and report the transformation values.
Hel
Read a .HEL file containing coordinate pairs previously created by 12D Model and then compute and report the transformation values.
Read Control/Data points from a file
Read a .CSV file containing point pairs and weights and compute transformation values.
Transform Points
Transform points using the transformation values read from .WLD, .HEL or .CSV files.

Notes

Use Helmert transformation to transfer between two plane coordinate systems or a geodetic and a plane coordinate system.

If the computed residuals shown in the form are not acceptable, omit point pairs or correct the coordinates before you transform points.

Do not include your control points in your selected objects.

The .HMT file contains three pairs of parameters on one line. The first two combine to store rotation and scale, the second locates the data centroid and the third, locates the control centroid. If a HMT file contains two lines, the first line is a heading displayed in the message scroll and the second line contains the parameters.

.WLD and .HEL files contain pairs of coordinates. New points are created at these locations.

The .CSV format is either Control_Point_number, Data_Point_Number or Control_Point_number, Data_Point_Number, Weight. Use .CSV when you have more than nine point pairs or point pairs are supplied in a spreadsheet.

See also

GRIDPLAN
Transform from Grid to Ground or Ground to Grid
GC38
Affine transformation, which uses different scale factors in North and East
GC3DROT and GC3DADJ
3D transformation
MOVE, SCALE, GCSCALE, ROTATE and RTSCALE
Shift, rotate or scale around a single point
GC56, MIRROR and MIRRORDY
Mirror around an axis

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Modify|​Transform|​Helmert Geocomp Update or $200 37
 GC09

Places blocks or symbols by group.

A mapping file (default = Geocomp.map) determines the block or symbol, the size and scaling behaviour. If the group =0, no symbol is placed.

Most import TMLs written by Geocomp Systems set a group for each object. If you import or create objects in other ways you will need to assign groups to use this function.

GCIMPORT enables this method during the import by selecting "Map Points and Circles with Blocks or Symbols". To place the blocks or symbols at a later stage, use GC09 after setting groups where required.

To replace circles with blocks by group (for example tree canopies), use GCIMPORT or GCINSBLK.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 90
 GC10

List and sum area, 2D length and 3D length.

For each selected pline or set, report the horizontal or slope length and the totals to P3Pad.

As objects are selected, the total distance is updated in message scroll.

Select "Compute closed areas", to report the closed areas and the lengths of unclosed areas.

The slope distance is computed in 3D for set segments connecting 3D points and also 2D distances for plines and set segments joining 2D points.

Use for estimating lengths and areas of kerbs, pipes, paving and so on.

You can also report to .CSV for use in spreadsheets.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Report|​More...|​Lengths + areas Geocomp Update or $200 275
 GC100

Report thickness between two DTMs at selected points.

For each selected point, report the Point number, Chainage, Offset, Easting, Northing, Thickness and Name.

The thickness is the interpolated elevation from the Upper DTM less the Lower DTM.

Where the thickness is expressed as a negative value, the Upper DTM is below the Lower DTM.

Where a point is outside either DTM, the thickness is shown as *.

Points outside the selected Roadjob are marked "Outside Roadjob".

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 224
 GC12DIN

Import 12D Model .12DA or .12DAZ file.

Import 2D, 3D, arc, text and alignment strings from a .12DA or .12DAZ archive file from 12D Model.

The 12D Model archive format is either an ASCII file with extension .12DA or a zipped .12DA with extension 12DAZ.

File selection

12D Archive file
Browse to select a .12DA to import or to first select a .12DAZ file then select the extracted .12DA file to import.
Colour mapping file
Specify a colour mapping files with extension .CNN, in this format:
12DA colour name, Terramodel colour number
Examples are installed in the C:\TMCUSTOM\​Geocomp folder.
Layer name mapping file
Specify a layer name mapping file with extension .LNM, in this format:
12DA model name, Terramodel layer number
Terramodel uses the first matching case in the file. If you select an .LNM file, any new model names in the .12DA file are added to the end of the file. If you don't specify a .LMN, you can create a new one with values suggested by the .12DA file.
Line style mapping file
Specify line style mapping .LSM file in this format:
12DA line styple, Terramodel linetype
Any new line styles in the .12DA file are added to the end of the file. If you don't specify a .LSM, you are prompted to create a new one with values suggested by the .12DA file.

Options

All the following options are OFF by default.
Import hidden super alignment segments
Import super alignments with hidden segments as single sets with hidden segments or as multiple sets with the hidden segments removed.
Convert 2D Super strings to plines
Import 2D super strings (such as cadastral boundaries) as plines or as points and sets. Super strings with elevations, including contours with data_2d, are always imported as sets.
Create sets around TIN edges
Create set boundaries along the edge of each imported TIN for use with EARTHWORK, RELAYER, GCCOPY, GCMERGE, GCGTRACE and so on. This can take a long time.
Ignore triangles with sides less than 1.5m long
Reduce the size of DTM surfaces by ignoring small triangles
Prefix point name with super string name
Prefix points the from super strings with the name of the super string
Import Trimesh_3D Edges
Import Trimesh Primitive_3D edges with Group 5475. See Trimesh note below.
Do not remove duplicate points from TIN models
Neither remove duplicate points nor adjust near-vertical walls to suit Terramodel DTM formation tolerance
Import Vertex ID as Point number
Assign each new point number by Vertex ID ("point_data"). Otherwise, assign the next available integer point number.
Ignore all TINs
Do not any import TINs, Full_TINs or Super_Tins.

.12DA and .12DAZ files

  • .12DA files can be very large. Consider SYSTEM to increase the maximum number of objects or requesting more, smaller, data files.
  • .12DAZ files simply contain zipped .12DA files. Extract the files with any unzipping utility, or use GC12DIN to extract them.
  • After extracting all files from the .12DAZ file, GC12DIN presents any .12DA file that has the same name as the .12DAZ to be imported. If the .12DAZ had been renamed after it was created, browse to select the .12DA file with the original name when prompted.
  • If you are supplied an archive containing multiple .12DA files, such as .mrarchive, rename the extension to .mrarchive.12DAZ so that GC12DIN can extract the files.
  • Creating subfolders for .12DAZ files can help keep track of extracted files.
  • If you are supplied .12DXMLZ files, please ask for .12DA or .12DAZ files files instead.

TINs

  • TIN (triangulated irregular network) is what 12D Model calls a DTM.
  • Each model is imported onto one Terramodel layer, even if it comprises more than one TIN.
  • Nulled triangles in Full_TINs are deleted.
  • Three points are imported for every triangle in a TIN, which results in multiple points at common vertices. By default, GC12DIN removes these duplicate points.
  • The duplicate point TIN tolerance in 12D is tighter than in the 1mm for Terramodel DTMs. If you remove these duplicate points during import, any remaining points nearer than 1mm are moved apart to fix problems forming near-vertical walls, such as backs of kerbs. To check for other duplicate points, use GC92 command.
  • A Super Tin is a list of tins in a .12DA that 12D Model can merge in sequence. The super tins are not imported into Terramodel. Instead, import the TINs then merge them in a layer list using GCMERGE.

Alignments

  • Horizontal, vertical and slope alignments from super alignment strings are imported as plines and registered.
  • If the computed location of the end of an alignment differs from the location given in the file, the misclose is reported.
  • Alignments containing vertical curves are created in the Profile view.
  • Alignments containing arcs and no spirals are imported as straights and arcs. Arc not tangential to the adjacent straight are imported with a warning.
  • Alignments containing spirals are assumed to start and end tangential to straights.
  • Arc centres are hidden. They can be made visible afterwards by ARCENTRE.

Other notes

  • Layer names that are longer than 16 characters are automatically shortened to fit by substituting using common words with abbreviations, removing spaces and beginning characters (other than TIN).
  • To assign the new layer names yourself, use the layer mapping file.
  • Attributes are imported provided GC12.ADF is in the TSP and the attributes were exported to the .12DA file using GC12DOUT.
  • Trimeshes are networks of Primitive_3D triangles that define surfaces, like pipes, that are not TINs. Display imported trimeshes in 3D using TV with Set features turned on in Environment Visibility Settings. If you also import the trimesh edges as single set segments, separate them by group 5475 using SELECTGP, IGRP or ONGRP.
  • 12DA files created by 64-bit 12D Model can contain null characters. GC12DIN extracts the data from any such file to an .ASC file then imports from that .ASC. The null characters can also be removed by STRIPNUL.

See also

GC12DOUT.
Export .12DA files

TML date MenuSourceGC
26/11/18   File|​Misc. import|​12DA Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC12DOUT

Export 12D Archive file.

Export selected objects or DTM layers to a .12DA file for use with 12D Model software.

Export objects, or DTMs, or both to the same .12DA file.

Objs:
Select any plines, sets or text
DTMs(Layer List):
To export one or more DTM layers as standard tin (triangulated irregular network) models of visible triangles, select a layer list defined by LLISTSET. Triangles inside any dead regions defined by SETSMOOTH are not exported.
Browse
Select the output file name and path
Settings
Colour Map:
Map Terramodel colours to 12DA colours using a .CNN mapping file.
Layer Name Map:
Map Terramodel layers to 12DA model names using a .LNM file
Line Style Map:
Map Terramodel linetypes to 12DA line styles using a .LSM file
Prefix TM layer name to 12D record name
Prefix TM layer name to 12D record name
Export Terramodel attributes
Export attributes
Export Points as 12D Super String Points
Export Points as 12D Super String Points
Export
Export 12DModel Archive file (.12DA)

Notes

Use GC12DIN to import .12DA and .12DAZ files.

Use GC12DIN and a text editor to prepare the mapping files.

Names of layers, styles and colours in .12DA can have characters A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9 and space. Names of points, sets and plines exported to strings can be blank or have A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, comma, ., +, -, (, ) and = characters. Other characters such as _ and / are invalid. Any invalid characters that remain after mapping are replaced with spaces.

Text objects are exported with "text" values from the text names, "model" and "name" values from the layer names and "text_colour" names corresponding to the geocomp_64 palette.

If "Export Terramodel Attributes" is selected, any "12DA" Attributes for selected objects are exported to the .12DA, otherwise "Feature" attributes are exported, if any. These require 12DA.ADF or FEATURES.ADF in the TSP. Use EDIT and DUMPATT to show whether any attributes have been set.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   File|​Misc. export|​12DA Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC14

Report the chainage and offset of points measured along HAL and VAL.

Report selected objects showing Pt Number, Chainage, horizontal offset, RL, RL Diff, 3D Chainage, Actual offset, Distance travelled and Name.

The Chainage, horizontal offset, RL (=elevation) and RL Diff (=elevation difference to VAL) are from the point to the closest location on the horizontal alignment measured in 2D. The 3D Chainage and Actual offset are from the same point to the closest location measured in 3D, which will usually be different to the 2D location.

See also GC03.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC14R

Report chainage and offset in TMS ProFit XY format.

Report chainage and offset to a .DAT file used for processing tunnel as-built reports in TMS ProFit software by Amberg Technologies.

See also GC14.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     POA  
 GC14S

Report the chainage and offset of points measured along HAL and VAL, sorted by chainage and offset.

The Chainage, horizontal offset, RL (=elevation) and RL Diff (=elevation difference to VAL) are from the point to the closest location on the horizontal alignment measured in 2D. The 3D Chainage and 3D Offset (=Horizontal component of the 3D actual offset), 3D RL Diff (=vertical component of the 3D Actual offset) are from the same point to the closest location measured in 3D, which will usually be different to the 2D location.

See also GC14.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC14SET

Report the chainage and offset of points measured along alignment set.

Report selected objects showing Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Height, Height difference from set3D chainage, 3D offset, Distance travelled and Description/​name.

See also GC03.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC15

Delete selected plines and sets with total length inside a specified range.

Prompt for records, minimum and maximum total length.

Points will also be deleted with sets.

GC15 is useful for cleaning up lines of unwanted hatching or symbols from imported data.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC16

Modify colours and linetypes by group, name or layer.

Modify the line colour and linetype of selected objects by the group, name or layer in a .CLT mapping file.

Lines in the .CLT must be in one of the following three formats:


Group,Colour,Linetype

Name,Colour,Linetype

Layer,Colour,Linetype

See C:\TMCUSTOM\​Geocomp\GEOCOMP 2.CLT for an example.

Wild cards: * and ? can be used in the group, name or layer.

See also

GC16ADC
Modify line colours and linetypes to match AutoDraft
COLRLINE
Modify colours and linetypes by layer
LAYERMAP
Modify layers, colours and linetypes by mapping file
GCJOINPT
Join points and modify colours and linetypes by .CLT
GCIMPORT
Import Geocomp .PTS and .STR
GCCSVIN
Import .CSV

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 90
 GC16ADC

Modify colour based upon AutoDraft report.

Modify the colours of selected objects by layer to match the colours they would have if set by AutoDraft.

GC16ADC requires an ADC report file which you can create in AUTODRAFT by selecting the Full Report.

Blocks names are also changed to match.

See also GC16 and CSV2ADC.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC17

Project from points on a set to a DTM.

Create a set or pline joining the points created by projecting from points on a set at a specified bearing and slope.

See also SHADOW, GC23, SLICE, SIDESLOPE and DTMCONE.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC18

Report chainage and elevation along a VAL.

Report chainage and elevation along a VAL at an interval.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 412
 GC20

Compute the cut and fill volumes of selected boundaries.

Compute the cut and fill volumes within selected set or pline boundaries and report.

The report shows the volumes, and the horizontal and surface areas, of the cut and fill.

Enter a stripping depth in metres to lower the existing surface by that much.

Select Exclude dead regions to subtract the areas and volumes within dead region boundaries from the totals. Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

Select Additional Surface Info to report the coordinate ranges of the DTMs.

GC20 can be slower than EARTHWORK which reports neither volumes within dead regions nor areas of cut and fill.

See also GCMULVOL and GCGRDVOL.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $500 DTM 3
 GC21

Change the default Callout Style.

Change or establish the current callout style recorded in tmodwin.ini.

For example, GC21 Date to set the current callout style to Date.

Use with an alias or toolbar.

See CALLOUT.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 90
 GC22

Check a DTM Edge boundary.

Report whether a set is suitable for use as a DTM Edge or DTM design boundary.

Select "Report only" to check whether

  • the selected set
    • is open (and, if so, locate the first and last points),
    • has any points with no elevations,
    • has any points that are not contourable,
    • has any points that are not on the same layer,
    • has any segments that are not used by the DTM, or
  • the layer of the set
    • has any DTM points outside the set.

Turn off "Report only", to also

  • Remove points from the set that are not in the DTM, and
  • Relayer DTM points outside the set to a specified layer such as INVALID.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   DTM|​More...|​Check DTM edge Geocomp Update or $200 197
 GC23

Create a set where slopes from points intersect a DTM.

See also DTMSHOT, SIDESLOPE and SLICE.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 DTM C
 GC24

Bowditch adjustment of a lot or traverse.

Adjusts heights if present on points. Puts the adjusted set on layer "ADJUSTED".

Optionally, specify a closing point.

Only works with sets, not plines.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 62
 GC25

Create isopachs at intersection of two DTMs.

Create a temporary isopach surface of the elevation difference between two DTMs then interpolate isopachs where the differences are equal to the nominated value.

Use the isopach elevation of 0.00 to create cut|fill lines. Cut|fill lines indicate where the DTMs intersect and thus the boundary between cut and fill areas.

Select whether to create a 2D pline or 3D set.

The name of the new pline or set is "Cut/Fill Line".

See also CONTOURATELEV.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 DTM C
 GC25MULT

Create multiple isopachs between two DTMs.

Create pline isopachs between two DTMs at a specified interval and range and inside specified boundaries.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC26

Test attribute records.

Create up to four new attribute records for an object: two alphanumeric names, one integer and one double precision real number and save them to the attribute definition file geocomp.adf.

Delete all attributes, or just new ones.

GC26 is mainly used to demonstrate attributes in Terramodel.

Contact Geocomp Systems if you need commands with user-definable attributes.

See also

CALLOUT and other EAT code functions
Label objects with the new attributes
DUMPATT
List all attributes of an object
RMGC
An example of a golf course tree database using attributes
DISFFEAT, FYATBEDIT, FYATBEP, FYATBIN and FYATBOUT
Feature attribute commands
GC26GIS
An example of creating attributes in an external database

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC26GIS

Create attribute database records for an object.

Create one or two attribute records in a MS Access database.

GC26GIS requires the attribute file TMGIS.ADF. contact Geocomp Systems if you need to link Terramodel to a database.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     POA  
 GC27

Place chainage labels on xlines.

Label all xlines with text on the current layer with chainage values parallel to all xlines which refer to the alignment and are within the chainage range, even xlines which are invisible or are on other layers.

Select an alignment with xlines and select a text style.

You can

  • Create the label on the left, right or centre
  • Delete old chainage labels
  • Prefix the label with with "Ch "
  • Place block GC27 instead of text

Xlines on exact metre chainages are shown with no decimal point and no training zeros. Other chainages are labelled to the number of decimal places in UNITSSET Precision.

If you "Use Blk", create or edit your own block GC27 which includes EAT text.

See also GCXLINES, LABELHAL, LABELPI and GCLABELIP.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Draft|​Label Xlines Geocomp Update or $250 93
 GC28

Create 3D points along HAL and VAL at 2D distances.

Create points in the plan view within a specified chainage range, at the nominated interval, HAL points, VAL points or Xlines.

Elevations are interpolated from the vertical alignment. If no VAL is selected, elevations are interpolated from the 3D horizontal alignment set. Point names are derived from a prefix followed by the chainage|​station value. Points are created at the start and end chainages.

HAL
Specify a horizontal alignment.
VAL
Specify a vertical alignment or leave blank.
Start and End
Specify start and end chainages.
Int
Create points at 2D chainages evenly divisible by the nominated interval. Enter a space or * for no points at intervals.
Hal Pts
Create points at vertices and at beginnings and ends of arcs and spirals.
VAL Pts
Create points at vertices, sags and crests and at beginnings and ends of vertical curves.
Xlines
Create points at Xlines.
Create Set
Join the points with a set.
Prefix
Specify any prefix to the point names.

See GC283D for 3D distances and 3D and GC99 for offsets.

TML date MenuSourceGC
14/02/18   Draw|​Point|​Along HAL Geocomp Update or $250 77
 GC283D

Create 3D points along HAL and VAL at 3D distances.

Create points in the plan view within a specified chainage range and interval.

HAL
Specify a horizontal alignment
VAL
Specify a vertical alignment
Start and End
Specify a 2D chainage range.
3D Distance
Create points separated by the 3D distance within the chainage range.
Prefix
Name the points with the cumulative 3D distance and any prefix.

See GC28 to create points at 2D distances and GCIN2SET to insert the points into the set.

The TML name is GC28_3D. If GC283D does not run from the command line, create an alias from GC283D to GC28_3D or enter GC28_3D.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Draw|​Point|​Along HAL Geocomp Update or $250 77
 GC29

Report distance and direction with 3D components to the message scroll.

Report distance, direction and X and Y differences between two locations. If both locations have elevations also report the vertical angle, slope distance, height difference and grade. If points at those locations are connected by an arc segment, also report the arc length and radius.

Operation

Radial
After each measurement, the next measurement is from the first location
Traverse
After each measurement, the next measurement is from the second location
Points
Select locations by mouse or point numbers
Segment
Select locations by set segment
First Pt:
The first location
Second Pt:
The second location
Cancel
Close the command

Notes

The elevation at a location is the elevation of a point at that location, or else an elevation interpolated from the current DTM layer.

In the plan view, report the bearing and distance between two locations. In section views, report the horizontal distance, slope distance and grade.

Enter "GC29 segment" at the command line, to start in segment mode.

TAB and Shift+TAB keys can be used to quickly change the focus. For example, when in Traverse mode, Shift+TAB can return the focus to the first location, which is similar to Radial mode without selecting the Radial option.

See also

DISTANCE
Report bearing and horizontal distance only
GEOMINQ
Report bearing, horizontal distance, and zenith angle and arc properties where appropriate
DTMCH
Set the current DTM layer

TML date MenuSourceGC
07/10/19   Report|​Distance 3D Geocomp Update or $250 17
 GC29UTM

Compute and label ellipsoidal distance and direction.

Report the ellipsoidal distance, ground distance, slope distance, elevation difference, line scale factor, grid bearings (forward and back), grid convergances and arc-to-chord between two locations.

Points | Segment
Select two points or a segment of a set or pline.
Central Meridian
Enter the longitude of the central meridian.
Avg N-value
Enter the average N-value
Settings
Labelling
Label the plane or spheroidal bearings and distances with specified layer, text style and colours.
N-Values
Interpolate N-values from a DTM layer with coordinates in Longitude and Latitude.
Create an Inverse report
Create an Inverse report.

Use AUSGEOID or NZGEOID to import a latitude and longitude grid of N-values, or import a .TMX of such a grid.

TML date  SourceGC
04/02/20     Geocomp Update or $200 UTM 10
 GC30A

Report coordinates and elevation difference measured vertically to DTM, with horizontal alignment and labels.

Report for each selected point, the Point number, Easting, Northing, Point elevation, DTM elevation, elevation Difference and Name.

The report includes the average vertical elevation difference and RMS.

Options and Settings

  • Chainage and Offset to HAL
  • Band width to group points at similar chainages
  • Subtract stripping
  • Sign convention for differences
  • Bandwidth for sorting by chainage
  • High and Low tolerance
  • Modify point names
  • CSV-type report
  • Create difference text
  • Difference text layer, style, bearing and units
  • Point and text colours for cut, fill and tolerance

If project units are feet, all reports, tolerances and difference text labels are in decimal feet. If project units are metres, elevations and differences are reported in metres, tolerances are entered and reported in millimetres, and difference text is labelled in m or mm.

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

TML date  SourceGC
18/10/18   Reports|​More...|​Vertical differences Geocomp Update or $250 236
 GC30PERP

Report coordinates and elevation difference measured perpendicular to DTM.

Report for each selected point, the point number, easting, northing, point elevation, DTM elevation, elevation difference perpendicular to DTM and name.

The average elevation difference perpendicular to the DTM, and RMS, is included.

You can choose a tolerance range, a stripping depth and the sign convention for the difference in elevation.

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

GC42AB is usually preferable for elevation difference and slope reports of road batters.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC31

Remove duplicate points on a layer with tolerances.

Remove duplicate points on a layer within specified tolerances in Easting, Northing and Elevation.

Notes

  • At each location within tolerance, one point is retained and any duplicate points are moved to layer 0.
  • You can also generate a report.
  • Choose "Mean Pts", "Highest" or "Lowest".
  • If the Elevation tolerance is *, all points within the Easting and Northing tolerance are considered and duplicate points with no elevation are relayered to layer 0.
  • Alphanumeric point numbers are retained in preference to integer point numbers.
  • The name of the remaining point is appended with the names of any removed points, unless the names are duplicate or the resulting name exceeds 80 characters.

Duplicate points

  • DTM formation, which occurs whenever a DTM is required by a commands such as CONTOUR and 3DVISUALISER, automatically removes duplicate points within approximately 1mm in the DTM layer, to layer 0, much faster than GC31.
  • Reserve Layer 0 for "junk" objects such as duplicate points so you can safely delete objects on that layer.
  • CONVERT can take a long time to convert a lot of plines to sets, if "Dup pts ok" is OFF. It is much faster to CONVERT with this ON, or use GCCONVRT, then use DTM formation or GC31 to remove duplicate points afterwards.
  • Duplicate points can be removed while importing DWG files by first creating a Terramodel layer called DXF_PT_CHK. This slows the import. Removing duplicate points later by DTM formation is much quicker.
  • If you use GC58 to remove duplicate sets, plines and text, consider carefully whether to remove duplicate points before or afterwards.
  • GC92 reports points within 1 mm with height differences, with an option to move them slightly apart.

See also FILT3DPT which removes or reports selected duplicate points within a single 3D tolerance. These points can be on any layers.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Edit|​More...|​Duplicate points Geocomp Update or $250 170
 GC32

Report visible layers in layerlists.

List the visibility status of each layer in each layerlist.

For each layer, report the line colour, point colour, linetype, number of objects, and whether objects on that layer are visible in each layerlist.

LLAYER is a similar report without the layer lists.

If there are too many layer lists to fit on the report, use LLRPT which reports in layer list order.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 86
 GC33

Create a DTM from the upper or lower regions of two DTMs.

Create a DTM on the selected Higher or Lower DTM layer from the higher or lower of all the regions of the two selected DTM layers.

The new DTM covers the extent of both DTMs; regions within only one DTM are included.

The new DTM can be limited to a boundary.

Points are omitted from the new layer within a narrow band the width of the entered "Clip Dist". A typical value of Clip Dist is 0.01 metres.

Breaklines interpolated by draping from the original surfaces are created in the new surface half way between the band edges and the cut|fill lines. The gap between the new breaklines is therefore half the clip distance.

GC33 is great for use with complex cut and fill volume estimation.

See also GCMATCH to match contours, JOIN to join matched contours, DTMMATCH to match the elevations of two DTMs, GC33MULT to create the highest or lowest of multiple overlapping surfaces, MERGE to create a surface from two overlapping surfaces, GCMERGE to replace a surface with multiple overlapping surfaces, GCCLIP to clip multiple surfaces from a single surface, GCSUBDTM to lower parts of surfaces to subgrade depths and GCCOPY to copy multiple objects into a single surface.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   DTM|​More...|​Upper or lower of 2DTMs Geocomp Update or $200 240
 GC33MULT

Create a DTM from the upper (or lower) components of multiple DTMs.

Select a starting DTM, typically the largest, and a layer list of the other DTM layers.

Nominate the name of the final higher or lower DTM layer.

A new surface is created from the starting DTM and the first DTM in the layer list. That surface is then compared with the next DTM in the layer list, and so on in alphabetical order, which can be also date order in a suitable layer naming convention.

The new DTM covers the extent of all selected DTMs, with small gaps at the transitions to avoid overlaps. Points are omitted from the new layer within a narrow band the width of the entered "Clip Dist". A Clip Dist of 0.01 is suggested.

Breaklines interpolated by draping from the original surfaces are created in the new surface half way between the band edges and the cut|fill lines. The gap between the new breaklines is therefore half the clip distance.

GC33MULT is great for use with complex cut|fill volume estimation.

See also GCMATCH to match contours, JOIN to join matched contours, DTMMATCH to match the elevations of two DTMs, GC33 to create the highest or lowest of two surfaces, MERGE to create a surface from two overlapping surfaces, GCMERGE to replace a surface with multiple overlapping surfaces, GCCLIP to clip multiple surfaces from a single surface, GCSUBDTM to lower parts of surfaces to subgrade depths and GCCOPY to copy multiple objects into a single surface.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC34

Find and report a nominated point by number.

Type in or pick a point then either highlight with concentric circles, recentre the display or recentre the display and zoom by 10x.

The message scroll also reports the point number, easting, northing, elevation, name, layer, view, group, colour, contourability and set, and if the point is part if an arc, connected points, radii and any unequal legs.

The view scale is updated so point labels remain the same size.

See also RECENTER which recentres the display where you pick.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Reports|​Mark|​Find point Geocomp Update or $250 299
 GC35

Create points at centroids of plines and sets.

The centroids can be of any closed shapes including circles.

The elevation is derived from the pline or, if a set, the mean elevation of the points.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Draw|​Point|​At centroids Geocomp Update or $250 181
 GC36

Move points onto a HAL or line.

Move selected points perpendicular to (or square off) the HAL or line until the offset is zero.

Choose two points or a HAL.

See also GC86 to move points by a distance.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Modify|​More...|​​Move points onto alignment Geocomp Update or $250 120
 GC37

Report and label cross section from strings.

Report and label cross sections at chainages and offsets where Xlines intersect selected sets and plines, without using a DTM.

Select the alignment and strings and control the output as follows:

CL HAL:
Nominate an alignment for the centreline.
Objs:
Select sets or plines for the intersecting strings. Only strings with elevations are used.
Create points
Create points on the current layer at the intersecting strings. The point name is derived from the string.
Create CES
Export the cross section as a Geocomp Cross section (.CES) file. This .CES file can be imported into Terramodel (see below), Geocomp Road Design or Geocomp Spatial Data System.
Sort offsets
Select "Sort offsets" to sort strings on offset from left to right, when you want to form a DTM such as a roadway surface. Do not sort on offsets, when you want sort on record number to allow for overlaps such as in a tunnel.
Report
Select Report to Report to P3Pad the Chainage, Offset, Elevation, (optionally) Grade and set and plines.
Show Grade
Select "Show grades" to report the grades between strings.
Label grade
Select "Label grades" to create text labels in the XSect view.

If you show or label grades, choose whether to label as percentage or as Run:Rise ratio.

Roadway

To create a roadway from strings:

  1. Import or create sets along string lines
  2. Create Xlines
  3. Use GC37 to create a .CES file
  4. Register a roadway alignment, create a roadjob, surfaces, and so on
  5. IMPORTXS the model into a roadway, specifying Geocomp Existing as the format

See also GC37CSV, GC94 and GC75.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/03/18   Roads|​Reports...|​Intersecting strings Geocomp Update or $250 80
 GC37CSV

Create cross sections in a .CSV file at strings intersecting xlines.

Create cross sections by intersecting selected sets and plines with xlines of a nominated alignment without reference to any DTM.

The sections are written to a comma-​separated .CSV file.

The file format is Chainage, Offset, Elevation, Grade, String Description, [all fields except the chainage are repeated on the same line for every intersecting string].

See also GC37.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC38

Affine Transformation.

Using up to 10 Control Point|Data Point pairs, compute a best fit of shift, rotation, north scale and east scale and then transform the selected data, and report the residuals.

Text and blocks are shifted, rotated and scaled, but not skewed with the rest of the data. To skew text or blocks too, explode first.

See also GC07 for Helmert transformation, which computes a single scale factor, and GC3DADJ, which transforms in X, Y and Z.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Modify|​Transform|​Affine Geocomp Update or $200 161
 GC39

Move intersection point and update Xlines.

Delete the Xlines on the main registered HAL of a roadway and place new Xlines at alignment points and at the nominated interval.

If you pick the main registered hal, you can move the nearest intersection point to a new location.

The new Xlines will all have the left and right extents of the first of the original Xlines.

Use GCXLINES to create new xlines including hal points or to change offsets.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Roads|​More...|​Move IPs and update Xlines Geocomp Update or $200 84
 GC3D

Create a 3D set offset from horizontal and vertical alignments, with the elevation offset vertical or perpendicular to the VAL.

Create a set in the current layer connecting points at offsets from selected alignments.

Options

Hal Record:
Select a horizontal alignment pline or set. The default is the active HAL.
Val Record:
Select a vertical alignment pline or set. The default is a profile with the same name as the HAL, or a profile which refers to the HAL, if existing. If no record is selected, or the VAL is out of the HAL range, the the new points have no elevations.
Settings
Chainage
Begin:
Enter beginning chainage
End
Enter ending chainage
Incr:
Enter chainage increment
Use Xlines
Also create points at Xlines
Offset distance
Enter the horizontal offset
Delta elevation
Enter the elevation difference
Vertical
The chainage of the new point is the same
Prep to Val
The chainage of the new point is adjusted to be perpendicular to the VAL
Name
Enter the name of the new set
OK
Accept the new settings
Cancel
Retain the old settings
OK
Create points and set
Cancel
Cancel without creating new points or set

See also

3D
Create a 3D set offset from horizontal and vertical alignments
GC28
Create points along horizontal and vertical alignments
GC283D
Create points along horizontal and vertical alignments at 3D distances
TML date MenuSourceGC
08/11/19   Cogo|​Streets|​3D Geocomp Update or $200 77
 GC3DADJ

3D Conformal adjustment.

Transform selected points, text and blocks in 3D, maintaining the shape but applying 3D scaling, rotation and shift.

Use up to nine pairs of control and data points.

To keep the points at the current 3D distances, fix the scale factor to 1.0.

Check the report for Sigma Zero value and other potential problems before completing the transformation.

2D points can be transformed using a default elevation. Plines are not transformed.

Possible uses

  • Adjust heights along long straight traverses.
  • Confirm that a beam will fit between abutments with fixed scale factor of 1.0.

Options

Pts, Text and Blocks
Select objects to be transformed.
Settings
Control Pt:
Enter by point number or select from three to nine Control Points.
Data Pt:
Enter by point number or select the same number of corresponding Data Points.
Generate report
Report transformations to P3Pad
Transform 2d co-ords using default Elev:
Enter an elevation, otherwise consider elevations on control and data points.
Fix Scale Factor to:
Enter a scale factor, otherwise use the computed scale factor.
Calculate
From the control and data points, weights and scale factor, calculate the Residuals, Rotation, Scale, Shifts for a 3D conformal adjustment transformation and Sigma Zero, and display the calculated values, and save the values as project variables.
Transform 3D objects
Immediately transform the selected objects in 3D from the old coordinate system to the new.
Cancel
Close the input dialog without further transformation.
Store Transformation to File
Store calculated values to a .3DADJ file so you can transform data in other project files with the same rotations, scales and shifts.
Use Stored Values
If you have calculated and stored values as project variables, immediately transform the coordinates of the selected objects.
Read Values From File
Read values from a .3DADJ file and update project variables.
Cancel
Close the dialog without further transformation.

See also

GC3DROT
Rotate in 3D around a centroid in steps
GC07
Transform in 2D by Helmert transformation, which transforms using a single computed scale factor
ROT3D
Transform objects in 3D space using exactly 3 pairs of control and data points.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Modify|​Transform|​3D conformal Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC3DROT

Rotate points, text or blocks in 3D by steps.

Select points, text or blocks and then rotate them in X, Y or Z around their centroid in small steps or by 90 degrees.

Once you select the objects, rotate them, use other commands such as GCREVIEW, PAN, DELETE or SET, or restore their original locations.

GC3DROT can also be used to present data in isometric views.

To retain objects in both the original and rotated coordinates, copy objects into View 6 with GCREVIEW.

New objects created after the attributes have been assigned cannot be "restored" with the other objects unless they are sets, blocks or labels that are attached to the selected objects.

Operation

Select Pts, Text and Blocks to Rotate
Select objects to be rotated. If this prompt does not appear, you have previously selected some objects.
Next
Assign attributes to the selected objects that include their original locations and whether they are on or off, turn all other objects off and then Zoom All.
Rotate Dynamically
Rotate the objects towards the entered location by one small step. Use mouse clicks to rotate graphically through multiple successive locations.
Rotate about X, Y or Z axes
Rotate About X or Y
Click buttons to rotate about X or Y axes by small steps or by 90 degrees.
Rotate About Z
Click buttons to rotate clockwise or anticlockwise about Z axis by small steps or by 90 degrees.
Rotate About Point
Enter X, Y and Z coordinates of the origin about which to rotate. The default origin is the centroid of the selected objects.
Close
Close the buttons
Rotate by steps of [ ] degrees
Enter the increment for small steps
Restore Co-Ords
Restore each selected object to its original location, on or off status and attributes, and then Zoom All.
Close
Close and keep the new coordinates.

See also

ROT3D
Rotate by three named pairs of points.
GC3DADJ
Compute and transform points by multiple pairs of points.

TML date  Source 
14/11/19     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC3DSETS

Find the closest or perpendicular 3D distance.

Report closest or perpendicular 3D distance between a set and a point or another set, and create the corresponding points and set.

3D Set:
Select a set of straight segments joining 3D points
3D Set or Point
Select another set of straight segments joining 3D points or a single 3D point
Closest
Report the closest 3D distance between a set and a point or between two sets
Perpendicular
Report the shortest perpendicular 3D distance between a set and a point or between two sets, extended in the directions of the end segments.
Create Line in Layer
Create two points and a connecting set on a specified layer
OK
Report the distance to message scroll and create the points and set if specified.

The closest distance considers only the selected point and sets. The perpendicular distance also considers the extension of end segments beyond the end points. If both the new points are within the extents of the sets, the closest distance is also the perpendicular distance.

GC3DSETS is useful for determining whether points or sets meet minimum 3D distance requirements. See GCOFFELV or similar to define any parallel strings for pipes, trenches or shafts first. See GC75 to report instantaneous horizontal distances perpendicular to an alignment.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Reports|​More...|​Closest 3D distance Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC3PTARC

Create a set through three points.

Create a set consisting of two arcs connecting three points in order.

Replaces THREEPC which does not connect to the middle point. The difference is especially noticeable when all three points have elevations, the mid-point is lowest and you interpolate elevations along kerb sets using a command such as ARCBREAK or GC50.

See also FIXCURVE, BFITCURV and GCARC..

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Cogo|​Curves|​3 points Geocomp Update or $125 46
 GC40

Compare points in two layers by coordinates.

Compare points in two nominated layers and list the differences in easting, northing and elevation.

Settings include minimum distance for comparison and point comparison tolerances (in x, y and z).

The standard report is in the format:

Point Point Bearing Distance DEast DNorth DElev Name_Pt1 Name_Pt2

The Expanded report format is:

Point East North Elev Name Point East North Elev Name DEast DNorth

See also GC40A and GC40M.

Points which are reported as "No match" become the current selection set so they can be readily selected by another command with right-​mouse-​button Previous.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Reports|​More...|​Compare layers Geocomp Update or $250 182
 GC40A

Compare points in two layers by coordinates using search ranges.

Compare points in two nominated layers using search ranges and list the differences in easting, northing and elevation.

Settings include minimum distance for comparison, point comparison search ranges (in x, y and z) and point tolerances in plan and elevation.

The Basic report format is:

Point Point Bearing Distance DEast DNorth DElev Name_Pt1 Name_Pt2

The Expanded report format is:

Point East North Elev Name Point East North Elev Name DEast DNorth DElev

Select "Create CSV file", to export the report as a .CSV file.

See also GC40 and GC40M.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 182
 GC40M

Compare points in two layers by coordinates using alignment.

Compare points in two nominated layers and list the elevations and differences and the easting and northing or the chainage and offset.

Settings include horizontal alignment, point comparison search ranges (in x, y and z) and whether to report as comma separated values.

The Basic report format is:

Elev1, Elev2, DElev, Name1

The "Show Eastings/Northings" report format is:

Point number1, Easting1, Northing1, Elev1, DElev, Name1

The HAL report format is

Chainage, Offset, Elev1, Elev2, DElev, Name1

See also GC40 and GC40A

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC40PILE

Report pile differences

Report differences between pairs of points representing the design and as-built locations of piles.

Typically these points will both be on the top of the pile.

Design:
Select a layer of design points for each pile
AsBuilt
Select a layer of as-built points for each pile
Show Chn and Offset
Report chainage and offset from the active alignment for each point in both layers; otherwise report Easting and Northing
Report vector
Include horizontal bearing and distance between each pair of points
Headings
Enter text for report headings and footer
Settings
Enter point comparison search ranges and tolerances, and whether to report to .CSV
OK
For each point on the design layer, look for one point on the as-built layer within the search ranges and report the differences in coordinates or chainages and offsets between the design and as-built points

TML date  Source 
28/08/19     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC40RAKE

Report pile rakes

Report rakes between pairs of points on piles.

Within the search ranges of each design point, report the rake between a pair of as-built points near the bottom and top of the pile.

The report shows, for each design point, the point number, easting, northing, elevation and point name, and for a corresponding pair of as-built points, the lower point number, the higher point number, the bearing from the lower to the higher and the rake expressed as a horizontal distance per metre of elevation difference.

Design:
Select a layer of design pile points
AsBuilt
Select a layer of as-built pile points
Headings
Enter text for report headings and footer
Settings
Enter point comparison search ranges and tolerances
OK
For each point on the design layer, report the rake between two nearby points on the as-built layer.
Cancel
Cancel the command

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC40TEXT

Label points in two layers with differences.

Label points in two layers with differences in easting, northing and elevation or offsets and elevation.

Compare points in two nominated layers and list the differences.

The differences are of Eastings, Northings and Elevations, unless you select a HAL, in which case the differences are of Offsets and Elevations,

Settings include

  • Standard or Expanded report
  • Minimum distance for comparison
  • Point comparison tolerances (in x, y and z)
  • Number of decimal places for reports
  • Text style
  • Display text or vectors
  • Option to report 2D distance only
  • Option to show alignment direction

Each point is labelled with the Name, "East" Diff, "North" Diff and "Elev" Diff in a single multi-line text object. The "East", "North" and "Elev" titles are derived from View settings.

Points which are reported as "No match" become the current selection set so they can be readily selected by another command with right-​mouse-​button Previous.

See also GC40 and GC40A

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 332
 GC41

Show obstructions in profile view.

Label a horizontal alignment where selected objects cross, or selected points are nearby, with concentric circles or vertical lines in the profile view and points in the plan view.

Options

HAL:
Specify a horizontal alignment
Obstructions
Select points, sets or plines in the plan view that represent obstructions such as pipes or limits such as boundaries
Max Pts OS
Consider only points within this offset from the HAL
Obs Ht
Enter a height for the obstruction labels, such as the outside diameter of pipes
Obvert
Select Obvert to place the top of the circle at the elevation of the point or set
Invert
Select Invert to place the bottom of the circle at the elevation of the point or set
Add text
Also label the obtruction with elevation text
Add Plan Pts
Also create points at the obstructions in the Plan view on CLASH POINTS layer

Circles are displayed and plotted as ellipses if the vertical exaggeration is greater than 1.0.

Selected "obstructions" that have no elevations, such as lot boundaries and xlines, are indicated by tall vertical plines at 0.00 elevations or elevations derived from the HAL.

See also

DRAPE
Interpolate elevations from a DTM at plines
XSLABEL
Add obstructions to cross section plots
SET2PRFL
Draw pipes in Profile
PIPEOBST
Label with chainage and elevation
OVERWALL
Create points and blocks at XLines in XSect view
TP41
Label with instructions from a layerlist

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Cogo|​Streets|​Profile obstructions Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC42

Report point elevation minus roadway elevation.

Report elevations of selected points minus the design elevation a roadway.

The design elevations are calculated from the roadway designed by templates or a finish surface DTM.

Where the elevation difference cannot be determined, or the points are outside the default xline offsets, the points are marked with *.

The basic report shows the chainage, offset, elevation difference and point name.

The extended report shows the point number, chainage, offset, elevation, design elevation, elevation difference and point name.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Roads|​Reports|​Compare points Geocomp Update or $200 429
 GC42AB

As-built roadway report.

Compare points from an as-built roadway survey with the roadway design.

The design elevations are calculated from the roadway designed by templates or a finish surface DTM.

Nominate a roadway, horizontal offset, depth and whether to compare with the design pavement or batter.

The horizontal offset and depth are adjusted by values you enter.

Settings control tolerances, text, colours and reports.

Reports

The report headings show the roadway name and description and the desired depth of material (default = 0). The P3Pad reports also show desired tolerances above and below that depth.

The Pavement report shows point number, chainage, horizontal offset, design elevation, surveyed elevation, difference (mm), High or Low, * if out of tolerance and point name. The pavement difference is the surveyed elevation minus design elevation measured vertically.

The Batter report shows point number, chainage, offset, design elevation, surveyed elevation, difference, an indication when out of tolerance, point name, and prompts whether to include the horizontal offset to the batter. The batter difference is the surveyed elevation minus design elevation in mm measured perpendicular to the design at depth.

List Coordinates to include easting and northing coordinates in the Pavement and Batter reports, where there is room in the P3Pad report. The .CSV always includes coordinates.

List Slopes report includes Des Slp (the instantaneous slope of the design surface), ASB Slp (the slope from the previous As-Built point at that chainage) and Diff Slp (the difference between the two slopes), at the location of each selected point.

CSV report reports to a .CSV file: Point Number, Chainage, Offset, Easting, Northing, Design Ht, Survey Ht, Diff (mm) and Pt Name.

The end of each report shows the number of points, mean of differences, mean of positive differences, mean of negative differences and standard deviation.

Tolerances

In Settings, specify Band Width, High Tolerance, Low Tolerance and Slope Tolerance.

If the Band width is positive, the results are sorted by offset within chainage bands. If zero or negative, they are sorted by chainage only. If *, they are not sorted.

By default, the difference is checked for tolerance before rounding to the nearest mm for the report. Points between 0.5mm out of tolerance and 0.5mm in tolerance have the same reported difference as the tolerance.

To check for tolerance only after rounding to the mm, so that points up to 0.5mm out of tolerance are shown as in tolerance and match the rounded differences, use PROJECTV to define project variable GC42AB:ROUNDTOL.

Differences

Optionally, change the point name to include the difference.

Optionally, Create Difference Text, with specified layer, style and bearing and units (m or mm).

Specify new colours for points in fill, in cut and within tolerance.

Extents

Where the point is outside the extents of the roadway, the elevations and differences are marked with *.

For a point to be within the roadway, it must be within all of these extents:

  • The whole main horizontal alignment
  • Any road design template specified in TEMPLATE Manager,
  • Any Finish Surface specified in SURFACE Manager,
  • Any existing surface specified in SURFACE Manager, and
  • The default left and right xline extents specified in XLINE.

To check whether a point is within the roadway, use ROADSPOT.

If the default extents set by XLINE are less than 100m, GC42AB prompts to increase the extent to 1000m.

Only points that you select are considered! Xlines are not considered!

TML date MenuSourceGC
27/02/19   Roads|​Reports|​Compare as-built Geocomp Update or $200 435
 GC42ABS

Select as-built points within tolerance of roadway design.

Selects points within tolerance of roadway for use in another command.

Nominate roadway, depth, tolerances, and whether to compare against the design pavement or batter.

Once you have selected the points, run the next command that Use Previous to reselect the points in another command.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC42DTM

Compare DTM triangles within tolerance of roadway design.

Compares DTM points, triangle centroids and link midpoints to a roadway.

Nominate roadway, DTM layer, depth, tolerances, and whether to compare against the design pavement or batter.

Where the elevation difference cannot be determined, or the points are outside the default xline offsets, the points are marked with *.

See also DESIGNELEV, GC42, GC42AB and XLINES.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Roads|​Reports|​Compare DTM Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC42HAL

Compare as-built points with HAL in selected Roadway.

Compare as-built points with the horizontal alignment in a selected roadjob.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC42KB

Compare as-built points with HAL and design kerb set.

Compare surveyed points with a design set, such as a kerb, to report whether offsets are within tolerance.

Options

CL HAL
Select a HAL for centreline chainages and offsets. To compute chainages and offsets from the design set, select the same set for CL and design.
Design set
Select a design set, such as a lip or back of kerb.
Offset
Add a horizontal offset to design set.
Depth
Enter a depth offset to design set.
Inside
Consider points to the left of the design set to be Inside. Consider points to the right Outside.
Outside
Consider points to the left of the design set to be Outside. Consider points to the right Inside.
As Built Points
Select surveyed points to compare with the design set.
Settings
Inside Tol | Outside Tol
Select maximum horizontal tolerance Inside or Outside of design set (in mm).
RL High Tol | RL Low Tol
Select maximum vertical tolerance Low or High from design set (in mm).
Limit points by chainage range
Report only points within a specified chainage range.
OK
Report to P3Pad.

Report

Report properties and computed values for each selected As-Built point.

Point Number
Point number.
Chainage
Distance in m along CL HAL.
C/L Offset
Horizontal offset in m from CL.
As Built Offset
Horizontal offset in m to CL minus offset in m from design set to CL.
Diff Offset
Horizontal offset in mm from design set (adjusted by entered Offset in m).
* In
Diff Offset is out of tolerance Inside of design set.
* Out
Diff Offset is out of tolerance Outside design set.
Diff Height
Difference in elevation in mm from design set (adjusted by entered Depth in m).
# Low
Diff Height is out of tolerance below design set.
# High
Diff Height is out of tolerance above design set.
Easting
Easting.
Northing
Northing.
Height
Elevation.
Design Height
Elevation of design set where point is perpendicular.
Name
Point name.

Negative offsets are to the left. Chainages and CL offsets are computed along the CL. As Built offsets and design height where the point is perpendicular to the set.

Use SHOWDIRNto show the direction and reverse if needed.

TML date  Source 
01/03/19     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC42VAL

Compare as-built points with VAL in selected Roadway.

Compare as-built points with the vertical alignment in a selected roadjob.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC43

Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob.

Estimate approximate areas quickly.

This report is presented in chainage ranges. The length of shape is reported for each chainage.

Assumptions

  • Shapes are used only once in a subgrade. If a shape is used more than once, the calculated areas include the shape each time. This could overestimate the area of a shape.
  • The roadway is straight. Because no curve correction is applied, this may over or underestimate the area.

See also GC43S and GC43CSV

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Roads|​Reports|​Surface area of shapes Geocomp Update or $250 475
 GC43CSV

Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob based on chainages, to a comma-​delimited file.

Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob based on chainages, to a comma-​delimited file.

See also GC43 GC43SCSV.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $275  
 GC43MCSV

Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob based on chainages, for multiple surfaces, to a comma-​delimited file.

Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob based on chainages, for multiple surfaces, to a comma-​delimited file.

See also GC43CSV.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $275  
 GC43S

Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob based on chainages, within surface materials.

Compute areas within a selected surface material.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $275  
 GC43SCSV

Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob based on chainages, within surface materials to a CSV.

Compute areas within a selected surface material.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $275  
 GC44

Report surface or horizontal areas of a DTM based on chainages.

Find triangle centroids within specified surface, chainage, boundary, offsets, slope or cut or fill limits, and then calculate and report the areas of matching triangles.

By using centroids, and not precisely clipping triangles, this command is ideal for fast estimation of pavement areas and batter areas on large jobs.

  • Use a Roadjob and Design DTM layer to define the surface
  • Use the maximum slope of the triangle or the crossfall at right angles to the HAL.
  • Select only triangles with centroids within specified
    • slope direction
    • cut or fill condition
    • chainages
    • boundaries
    • offsets
    and exclude those within
    • dead regions
    • plines in a layer list
  • Create points in the current layer at matching centroids.
  • Enter a report heading.
  • Report horizontal or surface areas.
  • Report within Slope ranges.

Slope table

Slope ranges are derived from [SlopeTable] Section of TMODWIN.INI. For example:

[SlopeTable]

TableSize=3

0=200.0

1=100.0

2=50.0

See EDITINI to import a slope table.

Dead regions

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

See also SHADESLP, GC44S and GC44CSV.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Roads|​Reports|​Surface areas by chainage
Roads|​Reports|​Surface areas by station
Geocomp Update or $250 117
 GC44CSV

Report surface or horizontal areas of a DTM based on chainages, to a comma-separated (.CSV) file.

Find triangle centroids within specified surface, chainage, boundary, offsets, slope and cut or fill limits, and then calculate and report the areas of matching triangles.

By using centroids, and not precisely clipping triangles, this command is ideal for fast estimation of areas on large jobs.

  • Use a Roadjob and Design DTM layer to define the surface
  • Use the maximum slope of the triangle or the crossfall at right angles to the HAL.
  • Select only triangles with centroids within specified
    • slope direction
    • Slope ranges
    • cut or fill condition
    • chainages
    • boundaries
    • offsets
    and exclude those within
    • dead regions
    • plines in a layer list
  • Create points in the current layer at matching centroids.
  • Enter a report heading.
  • Report horizontal or surface areas.
  • Report within Slope ranges.

Slope table

Slope ranges are derived from [SlopeTable] Section of TMODWIN.INI. For example:

[SlopeTable]

TableSize=3

0=200.0

1=100.0

2=50.0

See EDITINI to import a slope table.

Dead regions

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $275 117
 GC44S

Report surface or horizontal areas of a DTM within a surface material.

Find triangle centroids within specified surface, chainage, boundary, offset and surface material limits and then calculate and report the areas of matching triangles.

Using centroids to select whole triangles means fast estimation of areas on large jobs at the expense of overestimation or underestimation. Any triangle that overlaps the specified limits is wholly included if the centroid is inside and wholly excluded if the centroid is outside.

  • Use a Roadjob and Design DTM layer to define the surface
  • Use the maximum slope of the triangle or the crossfall at right angles to the HAL.
  • Select only triangles with centroids within specified
    • surface material
    • chainages
    • boundaries
    • offsets
    and exclude those within
    • dead regions
    • plines in a layer list
  • Create points in the current layer at matching centroids
  • Enter a report heading.
  • Report surface or horizontal areas

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $275  
 GC45

Create points along a HAL or VAL at incremental distances.

Create points along a pline or set a nominated interval.

In the profile view, the distances are measured along on the pline.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Draw|​Point|​Along HAL Geocomp Update or $250 28
 GC46

Compute cut volumes between surfaces within blocks.

This is ideal for computing excavation volumes in pits, mines and quarries, where there are large numbers of layers of material. Triangles are used, rather than grids, which increases accuracy.

Set up the surfaces using Surface Manager. The Finish Surface, which represents the design limit of excavation, needs to cover the extent of the other surfaces. You can also nominate multiple boundaries in plan (="blocks"), an elevation range, and a report style. If a .CSV report style is selected, the resulting comma-​separated variable (.CSV) file can be imported into a spreadsheet application for further computation.

If a depth surface is nominated an elevation surface is created then deleted.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 247
 GC47

Create road resheet design profiles.

Create profiles to guide you when drafting road resheet design profiles.

Compare selected points against the centreline and templates in a roadjob to create a proposed profile which maintains the nominated minimum cover, and two other profiles which allow for variations in crossfall.

For example:

  1. Create a roadjob with templates, a horizontal alignment and a vertical alignment.
  2. Run GC47
  3. Select the roadjob
  4. Select points on the existing road surface under the proposed road pavement
  5. Enter a desired minimum depth of cover (e.g. 0.2)
  6. Enter Min% and Max% for the crossfalls
  7. Click OK.
  8. At the chainage of each selected point, GC47 creates a vertex in a profile pline with design elevation = point elevation + (crossfall x offset) + minimum cover
  9. The values are also reported to P3Pad
  10. Re-run GC47 with non-zero tolerance values for Min% and Max% to create two additional profiles
  11. Use these three profiles as guides when you create your final design profile

If your design profile remains below all three profiles then the minimum cover will be satisfied at the selected existing surface points.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 118
 GC48

Create profiles from shapes in a roadway.

Select a roadway, chainage range and interval, and selected shapes.

The created profiles are ideal for checking grades on kerblines, edge of pavement, and so on.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 253,450
 GC49

Create a point on a line at an elevation.

Create a point on the line between two points, at a location such that the new point has the specified elevation.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Draw|​Point|​On line at elevation Geocomp Update or $250 260
 GC50

Grade a set from known points.

Interpolate or extrapolate elevations onto 2D points from elevations of 3D points in the same set.

See also INT3DSET, INTERP3D, GCCONCHK, GCRIVER and GCNOELEV.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Modify|​Elevation|​From points in sets Geocomp Update or $250 185
 GC51

Intersection Design.

Design vertical alignments in intersections. A limit of nine alignments allows for four kerb returns, four splitter islands and a roundabout.

This simplifies a process which would otherwise require repeated use of profile editing, 3D, DTM creation, etc.

Before running this function, design the intersection in 2D and tile plan and profile views so that you can see the updated intersection contours immediately the vertical profiles are edited.

To use this function:

  • Select Settings to nominate up to nine HAL/VAL pairs.
  • Select Recompute to create 3D points along the alignments (on the nominated layer using the 3D settings), regenerate a DTM of the intersection and show updated quick contours.
  • Selecting the radio button for a pair, makes that alignment active, highlights the alignment and its direction in the plan view, and fits the profile view showing only referenced profiles.
  • To edit profiles, make the desired alignment active with the radio button, exit the Settings dialog, pick the design profile then locate the point in the profile to edit.
TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Cogo|​Streets|​Intersection design Geocomp Update or $200 492+77+254
 GC52

Change the group of selected objects.

See also SGRP which has a dialog for keeping track of used groups and SETGRP which sets to the next group.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Modify|​Group Geocomp Update or $250 40
 GC53

Modify, list or highlight contourable or non-​contourable points.

Modify, list or highlight and select the contourablity of selected points.

To be included in a DTM, a point must have 3D coordinates, be on the DTM layer and be contourable. GC53 lists, displays or modifies the contourability.

Options

Points:
Select those points to be considered
Contourable | Non-​Contourable
List, select or make Contourable or Non-​Contourable
Re-Form DTMs
Reform all DTMs afterwards
List
Of the selected points, list those points that are Contourable or those that are Non-​Contourable
Highlight and Select
Of the selected points, highlight with temporary circles those that are Contourable, or those that are Non-​Contourable, and make those selectable by Previous in subsequent commands
Include Points into DTM
Make all selected points Contourable
Exclude Points from DTM
Make all selected points Non-​Contourable
Cancel
Cancel the command

See also

EDIT
Edit the contourability of a single point by the "Include point in DTM" check box
AUTODRAFT
Modify contourability during survey
GCDTMALL
Refresh all DTMs
LINKSET
Display links or quick contours
TMXIN, CVDIMPT, GC12DIN
Commands which can import points that are Contourable or Non-​Contourable
3DFILTER
Filter points from a DTM by making them Non-​Contourable

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   DTM|​More...|​Include or exclude points Geocomp Update or $250 257
 GC54

Transform ellipsoidal elevations to geoidal elevations.

Transform to elevations relative to an ellipsoid to elevations relative to a geoid using differences interpolated from a layer of N-values.

For example, to transform elevations of MGA points from ellipsoidal heights to elevations relative to Australian Height Datum (AHD) using differences from AUSGeoid09:

  1. Use AUSGEOID create a .TMX of AUSGeoid09 N-values on a grid of coordinates transformed to an MGA94 zone.
  2. Use TMXIN to import the N-values.
  3. Use GC54 to select a layer of "Ellipse height points" and subtract N-values interpolated from the "N-Geoid heights" layer to derive elevations on AHD.

If transforming elevations from AHD to AUSGeoid, GCCOPY the N-values to a new layer with a suitable name and then SCALEELV to multiply the Z values by -1.

For more information and more files of N-values, see Geoscience Australia.

The same method can be used for Geoid-​Spheroid differences.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC55

Extrapolate or interpolate heights from two 3D sets onto points in a 2D set using grades along perpendicular bisectors.

For each point on the 2D set, the new elevation is on the grade between the 3D sets, along the perpendicular bisector.

Construction plines on the current layer can show where the grades were measured.

If one of the sets is a DTM edge, and the other draped onto the DTM parallel to and inside the edge, this TML can be used to extend a DTM outwards at approximately the same grade. Alternatively use GC90 or GC91.

See also GC55HAL.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 81
 GC55HAL

Extrapolate or interpolate heights from two 3D sets onto points in a 2D set using grades perpendicular to HAL.

For each point on the 2D set, the new elevation is on the grade between 3D sets, perpendicular to the selected HAL.

Construction plines on the current layer can show where the grades were measured.

See also GC55.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Modify|​Elevation|​From two sets Geocomp Update or $250 81
 GC56

Swap in X,Y or Z.

Swap either X with Y, X with Z or Y with Z.

Alternatively, mirror around X or Y axes.

Adjust for coordinates the wrong way around, contour walls using terrestrial photogrammetry, move or rotate structures in 3D, etc.

Handles points, plines, blocks and text.

Functions that might be useful in conjunction include SCALE, GCSCALE, MIRROR, MIRRORDY, GC07 and GC38.

See also ROT3D, GC3DROT, BGELEV and FLIPUP.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Modify|​Transform|​Swap X Y Z Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC57

Create 3D points from cross sections

Cross sections must be selected in the Xsect View. They may include points.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 157
 GC58

Remove duplicate sets, plines and text from a layer.

Compare objects in a layer or layer list and move duplicates to layer 0.

Use GC58 to remove redundant objects, for example objects that have been imported multiple times. You might want to check for duplicate points first with GC92 or remove them with GC31 or DTM formation.

Duplicate sets join identical point numbers in the same or reversed order.

Duplicate plines have the same (or reversed) vertex coordinates, elevation, colour and spline type.

Duplicate text has the same insertion point coordinates (within a tolerance), characters, layer, colour, slant, height, rotation, aspect, font, orientation, horizontal justification and vertical justification.

Compares objects in the current view only. To compare objects in all views, close all views first.

See also DUPLTRIS to remove duplicate triangle sides and GC58S to remove duplicates from selected objects.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Edit|​More...|​Duplicate sets and plines Geocomp Update or $250 154
 GC58S

Remove selected duplicate sets, plines and text.

Compare selected objects (on any layers) and move duplicates to layer 0.

Use GC58S to remove redundant objects that have been imported multiple times. You might want to remove duplicate points first. See GC31 and GC92.

Duplicate sets must join identical point numbers and have identical layer names but can be reversed.

Duplicate plines must have all identical layer names, vertices, elevation, colour, spline type, etc. but can be reversed.

Duplicate text must have the same layer name, insertion point coordinates, characters, layer, colour, slant, height, rotation, aspect, font, orientation, horizontal justification and vertical justification.

See also GC58 which selects by layer or layer list.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 154
 GC59

Report Quality Assurance from Geodimeter as-built survey.

Read a Geodimeter job file from an as-built survey, compare with a HAL and report. The job file must include the setout points and the corresponding picked-up points.

The report includes Design Chainage, Design Offset, Design Elevation, Setout Chainage, Setout Offset, Setout Elevation, Chainage Difference, Offset Difference and Elevation Difference.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC60

Report radial setout.

  1. Pick a layer containing the station points from which you are setting out
  2. Select the points to set out
  3. Specify a limiting radial distance

For each station in turn, all points within the limit are listed. The report shows the station point, setout point, bearing, horizontal distance, elevation difference and name.

Use this report in the field to set out points by theodolite or level, where you do not have the ability to upload the station and setout points into a total station.

See also LPTSRAD, STAKE and STAKED.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Reports|​More...|​Radial setout Geocomp Update or $250 41
 GC61

Create a point at a distance along a line between two points.

Nominate two points, and a horizontal or slope distance along the line from the first point to the second point.

Once the first point is created, the default distance is the last distance entered. The message scroll keeps track of the total distance entered.

Choose whether to measure the distance from previous point or the first point.

To extrapolate, enter a negative distance or a total distance greater than the distance between the points.

If the points have elevations, the elevation is interpolated.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Draw|​Point|​On line at distance Geocomp Update or $250 28
 GC63

Intersect batter defined by two sets with DTM.

For each Xline, the grade between the sets is extended until it meets the DTM. The created points are joined to create the intersection between the batter and the DTM.

A vertical or perpendicular offset (negative for down) can be applied to the batter.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC64

Intersect two slopes each defined by two sets.

Create points on the slope between two sets where it meets the slope between another two sets.

The created points are placed at each xline of the selected HAL. The xline must extend past the intersection. The points are then joined to create a set at the intersection of the two slopes.

One pair of sets is the "design" and the other is the "batter".

For example, the "design" sets may be on the bottom of subgrade and the "batter" sets may be on a batter. You can also use this to find the low point of a median strip with the "design" being the right batter of a left carriageway and the "batter" being the left batter of a right carriageway.

Vertical or perpendicular offsets (negative for down) can be applied to both slopes.

See also GCXTIE.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC64BIT

Fix initialisation to suit 64-bit or 32-bit Windows.

Correct the TSP, macro, menu and callout folders in a TMODWIN.INI file copied from another computer to suit the current version of Windows 64-bit or 32-bit Windows and add C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP to the Terramodel Search Path (TSP).

Terramodel is installed into C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Terramodel\ on 32-bit computers and C:\Program files\​Trimble\​Terramodel\ on 64-bit computers. The TMODWIN.INI file contains user-interface settings. If you copy tmodwin.ini from a computer with 32-bit Windows to one with 64-bit Windows, or vice versa, the path for the macro, menu and loaded callout styles will be incorrect. This can result in user-interface problems like grey buttons on the toolbar, changed menus and "GC*" commands not being found.

Because there may be multiple copies of TMODWIN.INI on a computer in surprising places, use EDITINI instead to edit and update TMODWIN.INI.

See also GCHELP and TSP.

The GC64BIT command is installed into C:\Program files\​Trimble\​Terramodel\​TMLs or C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Terramodel\​TMLs folder by the Geocomp Update.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update  
 GC65

Create points by manually entering chainage, offset and elevation.

Options

HAL:
Select the horizontal alignment
VAL:
To enter differences in elevation, select the vertical alignment. To enter absolute elevations, leave blank.
Ch: (or Sta: or KP:)
Enter the distance along the HAL(chainage or station)
Off:
Enter the horizontal offset. Enter 0.00 to create the point on the HAL.
Elev:
Enter the elevation. For no elevation, leave blank.
Diff Elev:
Enter the difference in elevation to the selected VAL.
Grp:
Enter a group, or leave blank for group 0.
Name:
Enter the point name, or leave blank.

The dialog uses the full chainage or station label (such as Chainage or Station) and the short chainage or station label (such as Sta., Ch. or KP) as configured by STAORCHN. These are configured in the [Geocomp] section of TMODWIN.INI for the computer and are independant of the project file. The short label also prefixes the station or chainage value.

See also

PSTATION Ground
A similar command
GC65FILE
Import chainage, offset and elevation from a file
EDITINI
Import sections from TMODWIN.INI

TML date MenuSourceGC
27/08/19   Draw​|Point|​By Ch+Offset+Elev
Draw​|Point|​By Stn+Offset+Elev
Geocomp Update or $250 344
 GC65FILE

Import points by chainage, offset and elevation.

Create points relative to a selected HAL from values in a CSV with each line containing chainage, offset, elevation, name or point number.

Fields

The distance along the alignment is imported from the first field. This can be a distance along the HAL (2D) or along the VAL (3D).

The horizontal offset is imported from the second field. If the second field is empty, the offset is 0.000.

The elevation, elevation difference or perpendicular distance from the VAL is imported from the third field. If the third field is empty, the new point has no elevation.

The point name is imported from the fourth field. If the fourth field is empty, the point name is blank.

The point number is imported from the fifth field. If the fifth field is empty or duplicated, the number of the new point is the next integer point number.

Options

HAL:
Select a horizontal alignment.
2D
Import the chainage along the HAL.
3D
Import the 3D distance along any selected VAL.
Extend HAL
Extrapolate beyond the extents of the HAL.
VAL:
To import differences in elevation, select the vertical alignment. To import absolute elevations, leave blank.
Vertical
Import differences in elevation and add the elevation of the VAL.
Perp to Val
Import a distance and create the new point at that perpendicular distance from the VAL.
Create set
Join the imported points with a set.

Chainage or station

The dialog uses the full chainage or station label (such as Chainage or Station) and the short chainage or station label (such as Sta., Ch. or KP). These labels are configured by STAORCHN and stored in the [Geocomp] section of TMODWIN.INI and are thus dependant on the computer and independant of the project file. The short label also prefixes the station or chainage value in some commands. Station values can include + characters.

See also

GC65
to type in the values
GCCHRLIN
to import chainage and elevation into a profile
IMPORTXS
to import cross sections into a roadway
ALIGNIMP
to import alignments only
ALIGNOFF
to import alignment offsets
XLINPTS
to create xlines at the imported points

TML date MenuSource 
14/11/19   Roads​|​More...|​​Import chainage offset elevation
Roads​|More...|​Import station offset elevation
Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC66

Create breaklines at changes of grade, valleys or ridges.

Create breaklines along DTM triangle sides at Changes of Grade (where both triangles slope the same way and the difference in grade is greater than a specified value), Valleys (where both triangles slope up) or Ridges (where both triangles slope down).

This is useful for interpreting and refining DTMs made up from point data.

The breaklines are created in the nominated colour on the DTM layer.

You have the option of ignoring existing breaklines or creating new breaklines only where there isn't already a breakline.

See also GCFOLLOW.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   DTM|More...|​Create ridges and valleys Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC67

Move points onto nearest perpendicular Xlines.

For each Xline in turn, find the chainage where the xline crosses the HAL, then find all points within both the specified "Chainage tolerance" distance value and the extent of the Xline, then move each point to the chainage of the Xline while maintaining the offset from the hal.

If the Xlines are perpendicular to the hal, and the chainage tolerance is less than half the spacing between the Xlines, this has the same effect as moving points onto the nearest Xline.

If "Create XSects" is ticked, the 3D points within the Ch Tol. are used to create cross sections in the XSect view. Cross sections are not sorted on offset.

GC67 is useful when working with surveyed cross section point data.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 66
 GC67A

Move points onto nearest skewed Xlines.

For each Xline in turn, find all points within the specified "Sect Tol." distance perpendicular to the xline then move each point to the nearest location on the Xline.

If "Create XSects" is ticked, 3D points within the Sect Tol. of the chainage where the Xline crosses the alignment are used to create cross sections in the XSect view. The cross sections are not sorted on offset and do not follow skewed cross sections.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC682SET

Add points into sets with connecting breaklines.

Add points into one or two sets, to achieve a minimum number of segments and connect with breaklines.

For each selected set, insert new points where the segment length is greater than the set length divided by the minimum number of segments.

If both the start and end points of the original segment are 3D, elevations are interpolated onto the new points.

"Connect Pts" to create breaklines linking pairs of new points in the new sets.

Enter any name for the new points.

Use GC682SET to create extra breaklines for a smooth transition surface between sets or to divide a set into a fixed number of segments.

See also GCDIVIDE and GCPTDIST.

TML date  Source 
25/10/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC69

Change zero elevations (Z = 0) to no elevation (Z = *).

2D points are often stored in DWG and DXF files as 3D points with elevations equal to zero. Because these elevations are retained when imported into Terramodel, they interfere with DTM formation.

Be careful, as there are cases where zero elevations are correct, especially near coastlines.

See also GCNOELEV to select all 2D points, GC53 to retain elevations but exclude them from DTM and ELEVATION to modify elevations.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Modify|​Elevation|​0.00 to * Geocomp Update or $250 333
 GC70

Combine elevation of point and DTM.

Compares the elevation of each point with the elevation interpolated from the DTM layer and changes the elevation. The options are: DTM, DTM - Z, DTM + Z, Z - DTM, -Z - DTM, DTM * Z and DTM / Z.

For example, use this to convert drill hole depths to absolute elevations.

You have the "* Outside DTM" option to remove the elevations of points outside the extent of the DTM, or leave the elevations of those points unchanged.

See also DTMPTS which modifies the elevations of 2D points only.

See also DTMMATH and ELEVOBJS.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Modify|​Elevation|​Combine with DTM Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC71

Solid hatch along lines.

Create parallel plines on either side of each selected pline or set, close the ends then solid hatch each closed pline.

Parallel lines are offset by half the nominated width in plan units. The pline and hatch are created in the specified layer. To create dashed solid lines, specify a gap and length.

One application is to show line marking.

The hatch is SOLID pattern with spacing = 1. Chose a suitable hatch scale so that you appear to have solid thick lines, independent of view scale and smooth around bends without using a complex linetype.

The line will be plotted wider on paper by the width of the pen assigned to its colour, so use a thin pen.

If the plines to be selected include splines, despline or FILTER a copy first.

GC71 can also be used to create boundaries that follow alignments for use with volumes and dynaimages.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Draw|​Hatch|​Along lines Geocomp Update or $250 510
 GC72

Report satellite horizon curtain.

Compute the vertical angle from selected points to visible sky at a nominated bearing interval.

Useful for entry into GPS satellite visibility software.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC73

Interpolate elevation from VAL.

For each selected point, find the chainage along a HAL, interpolate the elevation from a VAL at that chainage, and modify the elevation of the point.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Modify|​Elevation|​From VAL Geocomp Update or $250 77
 GC74

Set start chainage for multiple HALs.

See also SETSTA and CHAINAGE/​STATION.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 252
 GC75

Show distance and grade between sets or plines at cursor.

Display the chainage, horizontal difference, vertical difference and grade between the sets or plines, perpendicular to the selected HAL, in the message scroll area.

The HAL may be one of the sets or plines.

See also GC37, GC94 and GC3DSETS.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Reports|​More...|​Distance between sets Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC76

Report on Geodimeter .JOB file.

Report on Geodimeter .JOB file.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC77

Change elevation of text to match subject.

Text objects have an elevation of 0.00 by default, even if created by labelling a point with text. Use GC77 to change the elevation of text to the elevation of the subject point. Now when you export to CAD the text will appear at the same height as the point.

See also SYM2BLK which replaces symbols (that display with symbol font) with blocks with elevations.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Modify|​Elevation|​From subject Geocomp Update or $250 92
 GC79

Renumber points to match their point names.

Renumber points to match their point names.

You can remove blanks or force alphabetic characters to upper case.

Points are not renumbered if the point number is already in use.

If the names are alphanumeric, use SYSTEM to set Max Alpha Points high enough.

See also PTS2NAME.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC80

Compare sum of lot areas against boundary.

Report the area of each selected set, and compare the area of the largest set against the sum of all the others.

In a subdivision, the area of the external boundary should equal the sum of the areas of all the other lots, including roads and reserves. If the difference is the size of a lot, look for omitted or duplicated lots of that size. If the difference is smaller, look for incorrectly drawn lots.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 75
 GC81

Report horizontal alignment.

Report coordinates and curves along an alignment.

Report curve details and coordinates along a selected alignment at a nominated interval.

The curve summary lists the hal record, radius, tangent length, arc length, deflection angle and coordinates of the intersection point, start, centre and end.

At the nominated interval, report the chainage, bearing, easting and northing.

The coordinates of the start and end chainage are also listed.

See also HAL and Alignment REPORTS.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC82

Report DTM areas.

Report the planimetric and surface of a DTM within boundaries or slope ranges.

The planimetric, or horizontal, areas are the areas as measured from a plan. The surface area is larger because it takes into account the slopes. The areas could be from any DTM including lot areas, pavement areas or batter areas.

DTM:
Select a DTM from the list.
Bdys:
Select no boundary for the whole DTM or select boundaries to limit areas.
Exclude dead regions
Subtract areas of any dead regions defined by SETSMOOTH.
Report of Slope Ranges
Include areas and percentages of defined slope ranges in the report.

The default layer is the current DTM layer. To set the current DTM layer, see DTMCH.

Dead regions

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

Slope ranges

The slope ranges are defined by decreasing percentage slope in the [SlopeTable] section of TMODWIN.INI. Use EDITINI to import a new SlopeTable.

See also

DTMAREA
Report areas within slope ranges for a whole DTM.
SHADESLP
Create hatching, a report and a legend of slope ranges and define, save slope ranges in an .SSR file.
SLOPE
Create boundaries for a single slope range
GC20
Report volumes and slope ranges
GC44
Report slope areas within chainage ranges
LINKSET
Control link settings
GOLFAREA
Report areas of golf course boundaries

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   DTM|​DTM areas
DTM|​DTM area
Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC83

Select objects less than or greater than specified length.

Select objects with length less than or greater than a nominated Max Length, from selected sets, plines and text.

Objects equal to the length are also selected.

The selected objects can then be selected by the next command using Right-​mouse-​button Previous.

For example, to delete all short plines less than or equal to 10.0m, first use GC83 to select objects less than or equal to 10.0m long from within a selection of objects of Type Pline. Then DELETE the selected objects using Right-​mouse-​button and Previous.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC84

Join multiple plines or sets.

Join multiple consecutive plines or sets if the locations of the ends match. See also JOIN and DISJOIN.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC86

Move objects relative to an alignment or point.

Move points, blocks or text towards or away from an alignment or point by a nominated amount.

If the entered offset is positive, selected objects will be moved away from the alignment or point. If negative, towards. Points closer to the alignment than the negative offset will be moved across the alignment. Points exactly on the alignment, will be moved slightly to the right of the alignment.

Points, Text or Blocks
Select points, text or blocks to be moved.
HAL or Point
Select a set or pline for a horizontal alignment or a reference point.
Offset Distance
Enter a horizontal offset distance.

Use GC86 to move part of a vertical wall by at least 2mm so the DTM forms correctly. See also GC92.

Use GC86 to offset HAL-point labels created by LABELHAL.

Use GC86 to offset a set without copying, by selecting the points by Ofline and the HAL by the set.

Use GC86 to adjust a distance by a prism constant which can't be adjusted in the instrument or in RDE.

To move points exactly onto the alignment, use GC36 instead.

TML date  Source 
21/01/19     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC87

Create an elevation DTM from another elevation DTM and a difference DTM.

Select and existing surface DTM layer, a depth layer and the DTM layer for the new elevations.

See also ADDISO, GC54 and EARTHWORK.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC88

Clip or extend a pline to a defined length.

Clip or extend a pline to a defined length.

See also CLIP and EXTEND.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC89

Create a DTM layer parallel to another DTM.

Create new DTM points at the specified distance parallel to the selected DTM.

The distances are measured perpendicular to the mean of the slopes of the triangles on each point.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC90

Extend DTM to point.

Create a new point on a DTM layer with elevation extrapolated along the slope of the closest DTM triangle.

See also GC91.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC91

Extend DTMs by a horizontal distance.

Create points on one or more DTM layers at a nominated distance along the perpendicular bisectors from each point on the edge of the DTM.

The shortest horizontal distance from the new point to the existing DTM will be no more than the nominated distance.

The elevation on the new point is the average of the elevations extrapolated along the slopes of the two triangles adjacent to the DTM edge point.

The new points are assigned the name "Extend Bdy".

You can "Create Bdy" to create a new DTM edge.

If the new point would fall inside the old DTM, it is not created.

See also GC90 and GC55.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   DTM|​More...|​Extend by horizontal distance Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC92

Report or move duplicate points.

For all selected points, report which points are within 0.001 ground units in horizontal distance and have elevations, with the option to move those points apart.

Use GC92 on models immediately after importing from DWG, DXF, GENIO or 12DA files, and before forming any DTM.

Duplicate points

As Terramodel forms any DTM, wherever there is more than one point with a horizontal proximity of approximately 0.001 ground units (1.0 mm or 0.012 inches), one of those points is left on the DTM layer and the duplicate points are relayered to layer 0.

If the layer contains vertical walls or string lines that should really be on separate layers, such as top and bottom of kerb, or "triangles" created in an application with a proximity tolerance tighter than 0.001, you may not get the desired or expected surface when you form a DTM. For this reason, anytime you import data that you intend to contour, from files such as DWG, GENIO or 12DA, you should run GC92 to report the duplicate points with height differences before running any command that forms a DTM (such as CONTOUR, QPROFILE or 3DVISUALISER). If you notice problems in your contours before running GC92, delete the data, reimport and run GC92 immediately.

Report

The report shows the point numbers, names and layers for selected points which are both at the same horizontal location and have elevations.

Same height and same layer

To see only elevation differences which might affect DTM formation, don't report points with the same height but do only check points in same layer.

Points which are on other layers, have no elevation difference or are not contourable will not affect the DTM. Where the report shows points which will affect the DTM significantly, and you can separate the points by properties such as colour, elevation, "of line" or name, you can use commands to move, delete, relayer or change elevations before forming a DTM.

Reported duplicate points can be selected by right-​mouse-​button Previous in subsequent commands.

Move

You can also use GC92 to move duplicate points. Where the horizontal distance to a second point is less than 0.0011, the second point is moved in that direction to 0.0011. This has the effect of moving points apart. This is especially helpful in a DTM with near vertical walls imported from an application with tighter tolerances.

Repeat

If you Move and select Repeat, the whole selection set is checked again and remaining duplicates are moved in a different direction this time.

You can restrict the movement to only along sets such as kerbs.

Plines

Polylines, and similar .DWG and .DXF data that have varying elevations, import as points and sets; polylines with single elevations import as plines. This means that cadastral boundaries and extracted contours become plines, as intended. So do design contours, tops of levees, flat pads and flat spots which you might want to include in as breaklines in triangulated networks. GC92 reports any plines on the same layer as 3D points, to warn you to GCCONVRT them to sets. If polylines on a constant non-zero grade import as plines, install Geocomp Update 10.61K or later.

See also

GC31 relayers points on a layer that are within a configurable tolerance and GC86 moves selected points relative to an alignment.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Reports|​More...|​Duplicate points Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC93

Mirror or rotate point labels.

For all selected points, mirror or rotate point labels.

The text bearing can be set to any increment of 22.5°.

The bearing is reset to horizontal if the label style is replaced. For example, create point number labels with F7. Rotate with GC93. F7 to retain rotated bearings when toggled on or off. Add elevations with F9 by replacing the label style. This also resets the bearing.

The text on the mirrored point remains legible from the bottom right of display.

See also LABELPOINT.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC94

Report crossfall between two 3D sets.

Report crossfall at xlines between two selected 3D sets.

The standard report includes the chainage, offset and elevation of both sets and the slope between them. Select "Report Slope Only" for just chainage and slope.

Select "Show Ht Diff" to add the Ht Diff and the Eastings and Northings of the points on the first set.

Select "Create point" to create points on the current layer at each intersection of the xlines and the sets.

See also GC37 and GC75.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC95

Delete set segments greater than a nominated length.

For selected sets, remove each segment that exceeds a specified maximum segment length.

You can break and change the colour of the long segments, or simply delete them.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC96

Select points between two DTM layers.

Find those points above one DTM and below another, within the extent of both DTMs.

For each point in the new selection set, the colour is modified, the group is set to the next group number and the report shows the point number, easting, northing, elevation and the elevation of the two DTMs.

You can also select just one DTM.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC99

Create sets parallel to an alignment using a table of offsets.

Create sets parallel to the main alignment of a selected roadjob joining points at offsets along each xline within a chainage range. Any horizontal or vertical alignment offsets defined in the alignment managers are applied first.

In Settings, specify up to nine offset strings on each side. For each string you can specify the horizontal and vertical offset, name and colour.

If the road job has a VAL, you have the option to add heights from the VAL.

On each side, rotate the strings about the HAL and VAL by specifying a slope alignment.

The templates can be saved as project variables, or to a template .TEM file.

See also GCHALOFF, SIDE​SLOPE, 3D, GC28 and MULTIOFF.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Cogo|​Streets|​Parallel sets Geocomp Update or $200 71
 GCACTIVE

List registered horizontal alignments and select the active alignment or current road job.

List alignments registered in the HALMANAGER

The list shows registered HAL number, registered alignment name, record number, number of alignment offsets and record name.

If you Restrict to only Hals in Road jobs, the list shows registered HAL number, registered alignment name, record number, number of alignment offsets and road job name of only alignments used in roadjobs. The current road job is marked with a *.

The active alignment in the current roadjob is highlighted.

Select an alignment from the list, then you can

  • Set that Hal as the active alignment
  • Set that Hal as active alignment and that roadjob as the current road job
  • Select an alignment as the current road job and make that the
  • Pick a Hal graphically, and select the HAL if it is registered
  • Make visible only layers with names matching the roadjob name
  • Set the active alignment
  • Reform the design DTM after adding chords along arcs
  • Re-reference all xlines to the selected alignment
  • Clear the active alignment
  • Exit the command

See also GCHALOFF to create a new pline alignment then make that active.

See also ACTIVE, where you need to know the current record number of the alignment, or to switch to the plan view then find the record graphically.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Active alignment from registered HAL Geocomp Update or $200 84
 GCADDBLK

Insert a block graphically and interpolate elavations.

Display a selected block at the cursor scaled by 1, 2 or three points and insert at a location with the option to interpolate an elevation from a DTM.

To insert a block graphically

  1. UNITBLK command
  2. Settings
  3. Enter or select the name of a block in the project or browse to select an external .BLK file
  4. Choose how to locate and scale the block by 1, 2 or 3 locations
  5. OK
  6. Select 1, 2 or 3 locations using the mouse
  7. Select more locations to insert same block again
  8. Close when finished

Dialog

Pt.1:
Locate the insertion point and change the cursor to display the selected block in the cursor colour.
Pt. 2:
Specify an optional second location.
Pt. 3:
Specify an optional third location.
Settings
Specify the block, scaling, rotation and colour.
Block
Select an internal block or browse to specify the name of an external block. The first external .BLK with that name in the TSP is used. This might not be the selected .BLK.
Map colour
If ON, display with the colour of the block. If OFF, display with the colours of the objects in the block.
1 Point
Insert a point at a location with a specified Y scale, X scale and rotation. Optionally, interpolate the elevation from a selected DTM.
2 Point
Insert a point at a location and scale the block graphically.
Rotate
Rotate the Y axis of the block and scale.
Scale Y
Use the distance between the locations to specify the scale of the block along its Y axis and the keep the X axis scale at 1.0.
Scale X=Y
Use the distance between the locations to specify the same scale of the block along the X and Y axes.
Scale X&Y
Scale the block in X and Y axes in proportion to a window defined by two locations.
No Scale
Rotate the block and keep the scale of X and Y axes at 1.0.
3 Point
Use the distance between the first location and the second to specify the scale of the block along its Y axis and the distance between the first location and the third location to specify the scale along its X axis. Specify Rotate to rotate the Y axis of the block.
OK or Cancel
Accept or reject changes to the settings
Close
Close the command without inserting any more blocks.

Scaling

The scale factors determine the dimensions of the inserted block along its axes.

Unequal scale factors distort the block, for example stretching a pit or gate.

If the block is a unit block, that is the block has been created with the distance along an axis = 1.0, the dimension of the inserted block along that axis is equal to the scale factor. For example, if you create a block from some objects making up a "tree canopy" one unit in diameter, and scale X and Y by 3.50 when you insert into the plan view, the inserted tree block will be 3.50m in diameter. If your block is defined with a radius of one unit, such as "circle radius" block, the inserted block will have a radius of one unit multiplied by the specified scale.

See also

UNITBLK
Insert a unit block
BLOCK
Create, insert or list blocks
MKBLK
Make a a unit block

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Draw|​Block|​Insert graphically
Draw|​Insert unit block
S 90
 GCADDLAY

Prefix name with first four characters of layer name.

Change the name of selected objects to the first four characters of the layer name followed by the original object name.

See also LAY2NAME.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCADJANT

Adjust points for a non-vertical antenna.

Adjust points that have been computed at a fixed height vertically below a target or receiver on a pole, when the pole was actually perpendicular to the surface.

Use GCADJANT to correct points collected by a GPS mounted on a vehicle when the height of the antenna above the surface was not allowed for during GPS installation.

For each point, the true antenna location is determined at the antenna height above the point. By projecting the antenna length from the true antenna location in a direction normal to the average slope of triangles touching the point, a new point is created uphill from the first point, optionally on a new layer.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or POA  
 GCADJDES

Adjust points for a new vertical or slope alignment.

Adjust the elevations of selected survey or design points, by the difference in vertical or slope alignments.

Create a roadjob

  • GCCOPY the points to be modified (so you keep the originals) and relayer any points on a different layer to selected sets.
  • Register the main horizontal alignment with HALMANAGER.
  • Register the old vertical alignment with VALMANAGER.
  • Create a ROADJOB with those registered alignments.

Adjust vertically

  1. Register a new vertical alignment with VALMANAGER by a pline in the Profile view. The new vertical alignment could use a new pline or the old pline with new vertical offsets.
  2. In GCADJDES, select the road, the new VAL and the points to be adjusted.
  3. Click "Modify Pt Hts" to adjust the elevation of the points by adding the difference in elevation between the new VAL and the old VAL.

Adjust slope difference

  1. Register a new "difference" slope alignment with SLOPEMANAGER by a pline in the Super view, or by slope offsets to another slope alignment.
  2. In GCADJDES, select the road, the new slope alignment and the points to be adjusted.
  3. Click "Modify Pt Hts" to adjust the elevation of the points by adding the slope of the slope alignment to the computed slope from the roadjob HAL/VAL.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCANG

Report and label angle-right between locations.

Report the angle-right given locations for backsight, instrument and foresight.

Optionally, label the angle with default text style.

See also ANG and GCLABIP.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCARC

Draw a pline or set arc from any three parameters.

Choose one of 10 Types of arc, for example "Start, Centre, End" or "3 Point".

ARC defaults to the last Type used.

Similar to ARC, which only creates a pline.

The arc is drawn from the first point to the last point.

If a radius is used, a negative radius will draw the arc on the right-hand side.

See also GC3PTARC, ARC2P and ARC2PSET.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Draw|​Set|​Arc
Draw|​Arc|​By 3 parameters
Geocomp Update or $250  
  GCARCBL

Create breaklines along the arc segments of all sets on a designated DTM layer.

Create points at regular intervals along the arc and connect a set from the existing first TP to each of the new points and finally to the end TP of the arc. The number of chords created is based on a specified maximum middle ordinate (arc-to-chord tolerance) value which indicates the maximum allowable deviation from the true arc for any breakline chord.

The chords may be created invisibly.

The selected tolerance and invisibility become the defaults for this project.

The elevation of each point is interpolated along the arc from the elevations of the points at the arc TPs. If either TP has an undefined elevation, Breaklines will not be formed along that arc, and a warning message will be issued in the message area.

Any objects named SETARCBL are deleted, then the new points and sets are named SETARCBL, and given the current colour, so they can be selected separately from the arcs.

The cut and fill slope values of the chords match the values of the arcs. If slope values have not been edited, the current default slopes from DESIGNSET are used as normal.

See also ARCBREAK which replaces the old arcs, ARCBL which does not allow for invisible chords, GCDTMALL which is equivalent to GCARCBL then DTMALL and BLFILTER which filters out excess breakline points.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCBADEAT

Delete or select text objects containing Bad Rec EAT codes.

Select text records that contain Extended Attribute Text with Bad Record codes and optionally delete them.

Bad records are displayed when an EAT code in a text object refers to an object by number that no longer exists.

Selected records can be used in other commands as the Previous selection.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCBENCH

Create a bench set.

Create a bench string beside an existing set.

Select a set, a chainage range and slopes to project up or down. Click Next to specify whether to terminate at a DTM, a datum or a horizontal and vertical offset. Click Next again to specify left or right, layer, Interval or corner tidying.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCBLKFIX

Modify colours of block definitions.

Recreate selected blocks with specified colour and exploded hatching.

When you manually create, import or export blocks, objects in blocks retain the original colours and layers. GCBLKFIX allows you to modify all the colours inside selected blocks to any single colour (such as ByLayer), and all their layers to 0, without having redefine or redraft the blocks. This gives you control over the block object colours for drafting in Terramodel or other CAD software.

What GCBLKFIX does

  1. Select block objects and a new colour
  2. For each selected block, get the block name
  3. For each block name in turn,
    1. Insert the block at 0,0 and scale 1:1 on layer 0 of Sheet view
    2. Explode the block
    3. Explode sub-blocks including hatching
    4. Relayer all new objects to layer 0
    5. Modify new objects to the specified colour
    6. Join any plines
    7. Recreate as an internal block with the same block name
    8. Save the block as a .BLK file in the current project folder
    9. Delete new objects
  4. Redraw

Notes

  • Updates definitions for all selected block objects.
  • Updates all blocks in the project that have the same name as any selected blocks.
  • You don't have to select every block with that name.
  • Modifies the colours of objects in the selected blocks.
  • Does not modify the colour number of the inserted object.
  • Does not modify the map colour status.
  • Blocks with map colour ON will still display in the block colour.
  • To specify colour BYLAYER, choose new colour 0.
  • Explodes sub-blocks such as hatching (which solves problems with conflicting hatch names).
  • Modifies multi-coloured blocks to a single colour.
  • Does not explode text or change fonts.
  • Blocks exported to .DWG display the colours of the objects in the block as mapped by the .ACF.
  • Some CAD operators will appreciate objects on layer 0 in the block definition.
  • You can move or rename .BLK files afterwards.
  • To retain links to external blocks, after updating the block definitions, quit without saving after GCBLKFIX and open the project file again.
  • To use the external block with projects in other folders, move the .BLK to a location on the Terramodel Search Path.
  • Use BLOCK to List or insert blocks or to Save to external.
  • Use MKBLKINT to make selected blocks internal.
  • Use BLKREAD to replace internal blocks with external blocks.
  • Use SCLBLKS to modify the map colour status of blocks.
  • Use EXPLODE or GCEXPLOD to explode blocks.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCBLKPTS

Create points at insertion point of blocks.

Create points at the insertion points of selected 3D blocks, on a specified layer. You have options to include 2D blocks, and to delete the blocks.

See also PTBLKS and TEXT2PNT.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Draw|​Point|​At blocks Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCBOUND

Match extents of boundaries

For each of two DTM edges, copy the points from the other set which are outside the selected set on to the layer of the selected set, then create a new DTM edge.

The two new sets cover the maximum horizontal extent of both boundaries, but with different layers and elevations.

The areas and volumes between the new surfaces are shown in the message scroll area.

Use this to compute volumes between two surfaces by assuming batters of even grade between the extents one of the DTMs.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCBOX

Draw a pline box by three locations.

Draw a rectangular pline at three specified corners. The first corner is at the first location, the second corner is on the bearing from the first location to the second and the third corner is at the third location. You can also enter an elevation.

GCBOX is an alternative to BOX, which creates a pline and PAD which creates a set. Both commands prompt for two points and create sides on cardinal bearings.

See also PLOTBOX, which prompts for bearing and distances in sheet units and POLYGON which prompts for number of sides.

If you create a DYNAVIEW from the box, always locate the first corner in the south west so the insertion point is at the bottom left of the dynaview.

TML date  Source 
21/02/18    Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCCHORD

Create chords from arcs, spirals and splines.

Create plines or sets with straight segments along selected plines or sets.

The points and vertices are located by a specifying a maximum chainage interval and a maximum 3D offset from curve to chord.

The chord offset is measured in 3D to the horizontal and vertical alignments which are defined by the set or by a pline in the Profile view that refers to pline in the Plan view. The plines can include straights, arcs, spirals, combining curves, parabolic vertical curves, circular vertical curves, B-splines or overhauser splines.

Delete the selected objects or not.

Create objects on the current layer or the layers of the selected objects.

To filter excess chords use FILTER or BLFILTER.

See also ARCBREAK, GCDIVIDE and GC682SET.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
  GCCHRLIN

Import a profile from file of chainage and elevation.

Import a profile from a comma-​delimited file in this format:

chainage,elevation

See also GC65FILE.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
  GCCL

Create PPS Tunnelling System CL file.

Create CL file for PPS Tunneling system from HAL, VAL, Xlines, and chainage range.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     POA  
  GCCLIP

Create new DTM surfaces clipped at boundaries.

Use closed pline boundaries to create new surfaces from an existing surface, either inside or outside each polygon. The pline is also draped on the existing surface, the points and sets created are added to each new surface.

This command prepares surfaces for 3d and 4d modelling applications.

  1. Create pline clipping boundaries around design features or regions
  2. Uniquely name each boundary pline.
  3. Run GCCLIP
  4. Nominate the DTM Surface to be clipped
  5. Select the pline boundaries
  6. Select "Keep Inside" or "Keep Outside"
  7. New DTM surfaces are copied from the existing DTM, inside or outside the boundaries.
  8. The new layers have the boundary name suffixed with _IN and _OU.

See also CLIP to clip objects at boundaries, GCMATCH to match contours, JOIN to join matched contours, DTMMATCH to match the elevations of two DTMs, GC33 to create the highest or lowest of two surfaces, GC33MULT to create the highest or lowest of multiple overlapping surfaces, MERGE to create a surface from two overlapping surfaces, GCMERGE to replace a surface with multiple overlapping surfaces, GCSUBDTM to lower parts of surfaces to subgrade depths and GCCOPY to copy multiple objects into a single surface.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCCOLCON

Modify colours of positive, zero, and negative objects.

Modify the colours of selected objects according to three elevation ranges: negative, zero and positive.

GCCOLCON easily modifies the colour of labeled isopachs to show cut and fill.

2D objects are not modified.

Use HDMS, 3DVISUALISER or COLORCON if you need to define more colour bands.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Modify|​Colour contours by +|-
Modify|​Color contours by +|-
Modify|​Colour +/- contours
Modify|​Color +/- contours
Geocomp Update or $250 90
 GCCONCHK

Modify elevations of points in contours.

Modify elevations of 2D points of selected sets to equal elevations of 3D points on the same sets that have matching elevations.

Use to repair sets that represent contours where some of the points are 2D.

See also GC50.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 258
 GCCONIN

Import contours from Geocomp (.CON) file.

Import a contour .CON file created by Geocomp.

TML date   SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 166
 GCCONOUT

Export contours to Geocomp (.CON) file.

Export a Geocomp contour (.CON) file.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 105
 GCCONSIM

Export a contour to simulator (.TXT) file.

Export contours in a TXT format to suit a ship-piloting simulator.

Process

Plines:
Select contour plines
Change CS:
Select a coordinate system
Export file:
Select a location file name
Export
Export the TXT file

Notes

  • The coordinates are transformed into latitudes and longitudes in degrees and decimal minutes.
  • For contours below water level, use negative elevations. Plines with no elevations are skipped.
  • Contours must have straight segments. Plines containing splines, arcs and other curves are skipped. Use SPLINE, CURVE or GCCHORD, if required.
  • Each contour is given a unique, incrementing ID number. Use NAME to add a prefix to a contour ID.

TML date  Source 
17/06/19     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCCONTXT

Modify elevations of labelled contours.

Change the elevation of the plines on the selected layer to match nearby text.

The text is considered nearby if the insertion point is within the specified tolerance of the ends of a pline, or within a tolerance equal to the height of the text from the nearest location on the pline.

If the tolerance is too small, some contours will be missed. If you have only labels on index contours, and the tolerance is too large, some unlabelled contours will be assigned elevations.

By default, plines with elevations already are not changed. To force a change, tick "Do all".

Text containing non-numeric characters is ignored.

To change the pline elevations from nearby points, first use LABPT to label the points with EAT text containing elevations.

Once the plines have elevations, you can GCCONVRT them to sets form an approximate DTM surface from a labelled 2D contour plan.

If there are insufficient labels, the other contour elevations can be set manually using GCMULCON, GCONECON or PLTO3D. If there is a DTM, you could interpolate the contour elevations using ELVPLINE or regenerate the contours.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 258
 GCCONVRT

Convert sets to plines and plines to sets.

If all points in a set have the same elevation, the pline is assigned that elevation, otherwise the pline is assigned no elevation (= *).

Zero length plines are converted to points.

GCCONVRT does not remove duplicate points. If you need to remove duplicate points during the conversion use CONVERT.

If you choose to delete the original sets, you can choose to delete the points in those sets.

GCCONVERT converts hidden and visible set segments.

The new objects may have the original or current layer name, and a prefix.

Unlike CONVERT, GCCONVRT retains all attributes and is much faster with large data sets.

See also GCCHORD to create straight segments along sets or plines.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Edit|​Convert Geocomp Update or $250 292
 GCCOORD

Convert between coordinate systems with a look-up table that emphasises Australia and New Zealand.

Convert points, plines, blocks and text between predefined geodetic coordinate systems using predefined ellipsoids and datums by the seven-​parameter or NTv2 distortion grid method.

Operation

Select From and To Coordinate Systems
Select Search to select the From and To coordinate systems.
World regions
Select a region of the world then select a system from that region from the drop-down list.
Define ellipsoid | Define datum | Define CS
If desired coordinate systems are not in any of the regional lists, new ellipsoids, datums and coordinate systems can be defined. Geocomp Systems adds new definitions for Customer Care Members. Add coordinate systems from a file by ADDMAPSY.
List selected
List details of the selected coordinate system.
List all
List details of every available ellipsoid, datum and coordinate system.
Any point
List the coordinates of a location in both From and To coordinate systems.
Multiple objects
Select Objs:
Select objects to be transformed.
List
List the coordinates of selected points in both From and To coordinate systems.
Convert
Transform the coordinates of select objects from the From coordinate system to the To coordinate system.

Notes

The look-up tables in GCCOORD emphasise Australian and New Zealand coordinate systems. COORDCON is a similar command that transforms the same coordinate systems but which emphasises USA and UTM systems. Both call the same Mentor database files COORDSYS, DATUMS and ELIPSOID in C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared\​Mentor.dir. Both commands require COGO module. "List selected" in GCCOORD shows more details.

Coordinate systems with names that start with LL use latitudes and longitudes. The others use eastings and northings.

The principles and operation are described in detail in Terramodel 10 User's Guide Chapter 13: Using Coordcon.

Commands that transform coordinates using the same database

GCLLGRID
Draw Latitude and Longitude grids and labels
FYATBOUT, GCKMLIN, GCKMLOUT, LLTABLE and SHADOW
Some other related commands

Commands that use other transformation systems

GC07 and GRIDPLAN
Transform when either coordinate system is not geodetic
MEASUNIT
Convert between foot and metre coordinate systems
CSM and GEOSYS
Manage Trimble coordinate systems
HELPGEOCALC
Help for GeoCalc 4.20, a stand-alone 7-parameter tranformation application.

TML, LUT or DLL date GuideMenuSourceGC
01/10/19 UG 401
Nav notes
Cogo|​Utilities|​Coordinate conversion
HDMS|​Coordinate transformation|​Coordinates
Geocomp Update or $200 Geo​Calc
 GCCOPY

Copy selected objects onto a layer.

Copy selected objects onto a single layer retaining location, colour and so on.

GCCOPY is ideal for creating a single layer DTM from objects on multiple layers.

GCCOPY copies many object properties such as colour, elevation, colour, linetype, reference, group, visibility and hidden segments, but not attributes.

Options

Objects
Select Objects to be copied
Layer List
Select objects to be copied by layers in a layer list
Into layer
Select layer for copied objects
Retain Colour by Layer
For any selected objects that have colour = 0 (which means colour ByLayer), either retain colour number = 0 (so the objects display in the colour of the new layer), or change the colour number to the colour of the layer from which the object is copied (so the new object is displayed with the same colour as the old object)
Append Layername
Append the names of the original layers to the names of the new objects
Del Old
Delete or retain the original objects
Update Ref
When both parent and subject objects are copied at the same time, refer to the copied objects, or the original objects
Elev Diff
Add a difference to the elevations of copied objects
Copy
Copy the objects
Cancel
Cancel without copying

Notes

Points in selected sets are copied to the new layer, even if the points are not selected. This avoids invalid breaklines due to sets connected to points on other layers.

Points subject to selected text and blocks are also copied. This enables you to move copied points and update the dimensions.

The new point numbers start above the highest existing point number.

See also

COPY
Copy objects to a new location while retaining the layers. COPY does not copy the name and can change the colour to match the new layer.
GCDTM
Copy objects in layers listed in a .DTP file
LLISTSET
Layer list settings
MULTICOPY
Copy objects to multiple locations
Multilayer​DTM
Create a multi-layer DTM

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Modify|​Copy to layer Geocomp Update or $250 178
 GCCSVIN

Import and string comma-​delimited ASCII (.csv) coordinate data.

Import CSV data in common ASCII formats exported from tables, GPS and other coordinated data sources.

Browse to select one or more .CSV, PTS or .TXT files.

The column delimiters can be commas, tabs or spaces.

Number of fields per linefields assumed to becomment
onenot valid 
twoeasting, northing (or northing, easting) 
threeeasting, northing (or northing, easting), elevation 
fourpoint number, easting, northing (or northing, easting), elevation 
fivepoint number, easting, northing (or northing, easting), elevation, name 
more than fivepoint number, easting, northing (or northing, easting), elevation, name, layerAnswer Yes, when prompted
more than fivepoint number, easting, northing (or northing, easting), elevation, name which can include delimitersAnswer No when prompted, and specify Current layer
more than fivepoint number, easting, northing (or northing, easting), elevation, name including layer, layerAnswer No when prompted, and specify Separate layers

Functions

Entity file
String points as you import using a Geocomp Entity file.
CLT file
Change colours and linetypes as you import using a .CLT file.
MAP file
Insert blocks or symbols using a MAP file.
Easting, Northing or Northing, Easting
Specify the coordinate order.
Current layer or Separate layers
Create the points on the Current Layer or on Separate Layers.
Use additional fields for Point's Layer
This prompt appears if there are more than four delimiters on any line.
Use Long Entity Names
Substitute the name with a Long Name or Short Name read from an ENT file.
Match using Short names
If you specify an ENT file, match using Short Names.
Use Imported Point Numbers
Use point numbers from the file or assign new point numbers.
Add imported Point Number to name
Add imported Point Numbers to names.
Separator
Specify commas, tab or space for the delimiter
Import CSV files
Prompt to select one or more ASCII files to be imported. The default file extensions are .CSV,.PTS and .TXT

Blocks, colours and linetypes

Do not select .ENT, .CLT or .MAP files, unless you have coded descriptions to suit Geocomp DOS. In general, the better way to string, relayer, colour and add blocks is to import the points first then use AUTODRAFT. To modify blocks, symbols, colours or linetypes after import, see GC16, GC09, GCINSBLK, BLOCK Multiple and LAYERMAP.

See also IMPORT ASCII Points to configure the import format and filter by closed pline, GCMFI to import multiple files, FBLOCK to split into regions and GCPTSIN to import points in various file formats.

TML date  Source 
15/01/20     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCDAMVOL

Compute dam volumes in increments.

Compute incremental volumes of water above a DTM or earthworks below a DTM.

Specify a DTM and the volume unit, and, typically, a high water level, a low water level and a vertical increment and a boundary.

Select Water Vols for the volume of water in a depression in a DTM, or Earth Vols for the volume of material in surrounding walls.

The P3Pad report shows, for each boundary, the incremental and cumulative volumes as limited by the DTM surface and the high and low water levels. **** indicates that the area is not changing.

DTM
Digital terrain model layer.
HWL
Enter a High Water Level or * for the highest elevation.
LWL
Enter a Low Water Level or * for the lowest elevation.
Increment
Enter a vertical increment or * for no increments.
Offset
Enter a vertical offset, which may be 0.000, to be added to each increment.
Water Vols
Compute volumes above the DTM.
Earth Vols
Compute volumes below the DTM.
Bdys
Select any limiting boundaries.
CSV File
Also report to a comma-separated-values (.CSV) file for importing into another application.
Cubic Unit
Express the volume in units defined in UNITSSET by the "Volume" label and "Cubic units/volume unit" conversion factor. If the project units are metres, the volume label is typically m³ and the conversion factor is 1. If the project units are feet, the volume label is typically Cu. Yd. and the conversion factor is 27.
Litres
Express the volume in litres. 1 litre = 0.001 cubic metres. The UNITSSET factor is not applied. Only selectable if the project units are metres.
Megalitres
Express the volume in megalitres. 1 megalitre = 1000 cubic metres. The UNITSSET factor is not applied. Only selectable if the project units are metres.
US Gal
Express the volume in gallons. 1 US fluid gallon = 231 cubic inches = 0.13368056 cubic feet = 0.00495113 cubic yards. The UNITSSET factor is not applied. Only selectable if the project units are feet.
AF
Express the volume in acre-feet. 1 acre-foot = 43560 cubic feet = 1613.3333… cubic yards. The UNITSSET factor is not applied. Only selectable if the project units are feet.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Reports|​More...|​Dam volumes Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCDCOUT

Export cross sections at intersecting sets to DC file.

Create a roading .DC file from HAL/VAL or roadway from cross sections where Xlines intersect selected 3D sets.

This is useful with Trimble machine control, especially where your data are supplied as strings or if needs cleaning up in Terramodel.

See also GCMULTDC and IMPORT Roading DC files.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   File|​Misc. Export|​Trimble DC from strings Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCDELSET

Delete sets and points in sets.

Delete selected sets including attached points, without having to select the points.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 60+31
 GCDIMLOT

Label lots with dimensions.

Label multiple closed sets with bearings and distances on the current layer.

The labels are EAT text attached to the points, so the dimensions update as you move the points.

The text is created on the current layer, at the current plan view scale, with the nominated colour and text style.

You can therefore create multiple dimension text layers at different scales for use with different dynaview layerlists.

The lot with the largest area can be dimensioned as a surround lot.

The length suffix is selected from the list defined in UNITSSET Labelling.

See also GCLABLOT, LABELSEG and TEXTRND.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Draw|​text|​Lot dimensions Geocomp Update or $200 75
 GCDIVIDE

Add points into sets based on maximum horizontal distance.

In selected sets, for each segment longer than the specified maximum horizontal distance, insert new points and create new segments. The new segments may be the exact distance in length or shortened so each new segment is equal length.

New arc segments are created using arc lengths.

If both the start and end points of the original segment are 3D, elevations are interpolated onto the new points.

Use GCDIVIDE where points are too far apart for commands like SIDESLOPE and DESIGN to work properly.

Use GC682SET to create breaklines linking two sets and GCPTDIST to check whether any segment has less than a minimum length. See also DIVIDE, GCCHORD and ARCBREAK.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCDRAPE

Create sets where selected plines cross a DTM.

Create points on the current layer where selected plines cross links in the selected DTM and connect the points with sets along the plines.

Each new set is assigned the same start chainage|station, reference object and name as the original pline.

The original plines can be deleted.

If there is no grade change at the link crossing, no point is created.

See also DRAPE which is a standard Terramodel command that assigns beginning station | start chainage 0.000, Ref Obj 0 and no name, and does not give the option to delete plines.

TML date MenuSourceGC
10/10/19   DTM|​Drape plines Geocomp Update or $200 298+400+252
 GCDTM

Relayer objects into a DTM layer using a .DTP file.

Relayer or copy all objects in the plan view, that have group numbers listed in a selected .DTP file, into a specified DTM layer

Set groups first by a command such as GCIMPORT.

Digital Terrain Parameter (.DTP) files are created by Geocomp during DTM formation.

Optionally, copy the boundary as a breakline.

See also GCCOPY and GCDTMIN.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 43
 GCDTMALL

Create arc breaklines, relink all DTM layers and refresh.

For every layer that has at least three 3D contourable points, create arc breaklines, relink the DTM then refresh the display.

The arc breakline points and sets are created in the DTM layer using the current point and line colours.

The arc-to-chord tolerance and visibility of the chords are as previously set by GCARCBL.

See also DTMALL and DTMUPDT which do not change arc breaklines. DTMUPDT just updates one layer.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 289
 GCDTMBDY

Create multiple DTM boundaries.

Create closed plines or sets at the extents of the links on DTM layers.

Specify DTM layers by selecting objects or a layer list.

Specify whether to create lines or sets.

Specify whether to create the boundaries on the DTM layers or the current layer.

These boundaries may be useful for volume computations.

Select sets in the DTM layer to create DTM Edges.

See also DTMEDGE and PTS2BDY.

TML date  SourceGC
30/05/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCDTMDIF

Report elevation differences between three DTMs at cursor.

Report the interpolated elevation and elevation differences between up to three selected DTM layers at the cursor location to the status line (below the command line).

See also

SPOT
Report the elevation of a DTM at a location
GCSPOT
Report the elevation of a DTM at the cursor
ROADDTM
Report elevation of roadjob at a location
COORDS
Configure the coordinate scroll

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCDTMEDG

Remove triangles from a DTM edge.

Edit a DTM edge set by removing edge triangles specified by locations outside and inside the edge.

DTM Edge

Select a set that encloses all the points and triangles on a DTM layer, such as a set created by DTMEDGE.

Once you select the set, the command turns on links, turns off quick contours and regenerates the DTM.

Pt Pt

Select triangles crossing a line between two locations, inside and outside the DTM edge.

For each triangle in turn, working from the outside to the inside, GCDTMEDG deletes the outside segment, creates segments on the other two sides, and then joins them into the edge set.

Notes

  • This command replaces the equivalent manual process using DELETESEGMENT, BL and then JOIN.
  • Before you run DTMEDGE, check the current extent of the triangles with LINKSET.
  • DTM edges override the maximum edge distance and angle in LINKSET.
  • DTM edges defined by multiple sets are not selectable by this command.
  • Breaklines are not removed.
  • Points are not removed.
  • Triangles are not removed if that would split the triangulated network.
  • To see pline contours, create them first by CONTOUR.
  • Toggle quick contours, links or slope arrows during editing with a toolbox including TOGQUICK, TOGLINKS, TOGSLOPE or LINKSET.
  • The colours of links, quick contours and slope arrows are defined by LINKSET.

TML date  Source 
29/03/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCDTMGDE

Create super­elevation slope alignments from a DTM.

Create registered slope alignment plines in the Super view from a design DTM and registered left and right horizontal alignments.

These slope alignments can be especially useful to place SUBGRADE templates. Horizontal offsets can be defined in the HAL​MANAGER.

The selected alignments must be more than 10mm inside the edge of the DTM.

See also SUPER​PLOT, VAL​MANAGER and CHEK​ROAD.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCDTMIN

Import a Geocomp .DTM file onto a layer.

Create closed sets from triangles in a Geocomp .DTM file.

Each set is created with a group of 1037 on the nominated layer.

The DTM boundary is created as a pline.

A Geocomp Digital Terrain Model (.DTM) is a self-contained model of coordinates, triangles and breaklines, from which Geocomp (DOS) can extract contours and sections and compute volumes.

TML date    SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 FC D
 GCDTMOUT

Export a layer as a Geocomp .DTM file.

Create a Geocomp Digital Terrain Model (.DTM) from a DTM layer.

To export the whole DTM, do not select a boundary.

To clip the .DTM at an arbitrary pline boundary, you will need SiteDesign module.

The maximum number of DTM points in Geocomp 9 is 32,767 points and in Geocomp 10 is 99,999 points.

Define any dead regions by SET​SMOOTH.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 43 or SDS-DXF
 GCEARTH

Roadway volume report in columns.

Similar to EARTHWRK and XVOLUMES except the report is laid out in columns separated by commas.

See also AVGEND.

If you get zero volumes when you expect sensible values, see FIXLAYERS.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $125  
 GCELEV

Modify the elevation of selected objects.

Modify the elevation of selected objects to an absolute elevation or relative to the current elevation of the object.

Use the radio buttons to select Absolute or Relative.

Turn 3D points into 2D points by entering an asterisk (*) as the elevation.

To select objects by elevation range, use Right-mouse Elev.

GCELEV is similar to ELEVATION but with a clearer dialog.

See also GC69 , GC53, GCNOELEV and CUTFILL.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Modify|​Elevation|​Elevation Geocomp Update or $125 9
 GCESRIIN

Import ESRI ArcInfo ARC DEM grid files.

Import ESRI ArcInfo ARC Digital Elevation Model grid files.

ESRI DEM files are gridded elevation models from sources such as lidar and Shuttle Radar Topographic Mission CGIAR-CSI.

The ESRI DEM format defines the grid extent with a heading followed by the elevation values like this:


ncols         1100

nrows         1100

xllcorner     520950.0

yllcorner     5257950.0

cellsize      1.0

NODATA_value  -9999

30.02 29.99 29.95 29.9, and so on.

The data can be all on one line, or in rows. The number of values must equal nrows x ncols. No points are created where the value matches the NODATA value.

ESRI DEM files can be huge. You can import only those grid points inside a boundary pline or within a maximum offset from a pline.

You can define your own grid in a spreadsheet. GCESRIIN can import files delimited by spaces, tabs or commas.

To import Trimble Alignment Planning .NED data from Quantm, see GCNEDIN. For ESRI Shape (.SHP) files, use the ESRI (SHP) IMPORT script. For US Geological Survey .DEM files, use the USGS (dem) IMPORT script. For other lidar data, see GCLASIN, LIDARIN and LIDARGRD.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   File|​Misc. Import|ESRI DEM Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCEXPLOD

Explode blocks, text and complex linetypes into components.

Explode blocks, text and complex linetypes into components.

To explode theseinto theseuse
one set or plinetwo sets or plinesBREAK
setsset segmentsDISJOIN
sets with arcssets with chordsARCBREAK or GCCHORD
plines with no spirals or vertical curvespline segmentsDISJOIN
plines with spiralsplines with arcs and chordsOFFSETDIST
plines with spirals, vertical curves or splinesplines with 2D chordsGCCHORD or FILTER
alignment plines with arcs, spirals, vertical curves or splinessets with 3D chordsGCCHORD
sets or plines with complex linetypessets or plines and symbol textGCEXPLOD
normal textplinesGCEXPLOD
extended attribute (EAT) text with leader line and bordernormal text and plinesGCEXPLOD
blocksplines, text, blocks and pointsGCEXPLOD or EXPLODE
hatchingplinesGCEXPLOD
label tablesplines and textEXPLODE
dimensionsrounded textTEXTRND
lot labelsnormal textLABELSETS Text
point labelstextLABELPOINT Explode
symbolstext with symbol fontLABELPOINT Explode
mass haul diagramsplines and textMASSHAUL and MASSDIAG
dynaviewsobjectsEXPLODE or GCEXPLOD

Exploding blocks

  • Depending on how the blocks were created, GCEXPLOD and EXPLODE explode blocks differently with respect to layers, colours, elevations, names and sets. If one command doesn't do what you hoped, try the other one.
  • If the exploded block or text object has an elevation, the pline retains the elevation.
  • Points in blocks do not retain their point numbers.
  • Blocks can be nested inside blocks, so you may need to repeat.
  • Recursive blocks, that contain blocks with same name, cannot be exploded. Use DELETE or BLKREAD.
  • A block with Map colour ON is displayed in the colour of the block; with Map colour OFF, in the colour of the objects in the block. Use SCLBLKS to change the map colour status of multiple blocks.
  • Use DELBLKS to delete missing external blocks.
  • Use GCPURGE to purge all unused blocks.
  • Use SYM2BLK to replace symbols with blocks.
  • Use GCBLKFIX to explode blocks, modify the colours of the objects and recreate the blocks.
TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCEXTEND

Extend or trim multiple plines to a boundary.

Bound
Specify a pline or set as a limiting boundary. The boundary does not need to be closed.
Plines
Select plines to extend or trim.
Max Extend distance
Specify a maximum extend distance or enter *.
Both Ends
Extend or trim in the direction of the last segment from the end closest to the boundary or both ends so that the pline ends on the boundary or lines projected from the ends of the boundary.
Add Pt
If extending, create a new pline segment between end and the new location.
Move Pt
If extending or trimming a straight, move the end of the pline segment.

To extend a pline or set by a distance or to multiple boundaries, see EXTEND. To extend pline to a total distance, see GC88. For other variations on clipping and trimming, see CLIP.

TML date  Source 
01/09/2018     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCEZGIN

Import .EZIGRADE RTK Survey file.

Import .EZIGRADE RTK Survey file produced by Ezigrade from Foresoft.

Select Existing, Design and Field layers and set the coordinate system.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     NFS  
 GCEZGOUT

Export .EZIGRADE RTK Survey file.

Export .EZIGRADE RTK Survey file for Ezigrade from Foresoft.

Specify Coordinate system, Existing, Design, Benchmark and Field layers, grid settings and boundary.

Select .EZIGRADE or .AGD file type to export.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     NFS  
 GCFALL

Create paths flowing from locations on a DTM.

Create plines in the current layer showing paths of maximum DTM slope that approximate the direction of flow of liquids such as water.

Flow paths

Each path stops at a maximum path length if specified, a low point at the bottom of a depression or the lower of two points on a DTM edge link.

Where linked points have exactly the same elevation, one of the elevations is modified very slightly to enable consistent flow directions.

Where there are multiple possible paths, only one of the paths is followed.

Water depth is not considered; any rise of any height is an obstacle that can create a low point.

To show discrete flow paths

Click in Start Loc: then select a location within the DTM.

GCFALL creates a pline on the current layer that falls from that location in the steepest direction and continues across more triangles until the limit is reached. Click more locations to create more flow paths. Click Close to close the command.

To show the whole surface drainage network

Select "Triangle Centroids" to create plines that begin to fall from every triangle on the DTM.

For each catchment, the colours of flow plines are distinguished and a circle is created at the common terminus with the elevation of the DTM and a name showing the total area of triangles and the longest path. The paths are created on the current layer; the circles have the same layer name but with _CIRC on the end. Existing plines on those layers can be deleted.

Water from a single triangle can flow in multiple paths. Specify one, three or six flow path locations per triangle.

To show catchment boundaries

In Settings, select Create Catchment Boundaries and specify a layer. Then select Triangle Centroids to create plines of catchments and flow paths.

To hatch catchments, HATCH selecting catchment boundaries by colour AND layer.

Linetypes

For flow path plines, choose a linetype with a symbol that indicates direction, such as 142, 145, CROW'S FOOT, DIR DASH, DIRECTION, LEADER, LEADER D, TADPOLE, TYRE_TRACK_>>>> or XLEADER. The pline is created in the direction such that the symbols point downhill.

Load these linetypes in LINETYPESET from DIRECTIONAL.LIN, GC10.LIN, LEADERLINE.LIN, TMODEL.LIN, TMODEL_2.LIN or TMODELT.LIN in C:\TMCUSTOM\​Geocomp\ folder. Your choice of linetype and plan view scale affects the size of the symbols and the time taken to display the paths.

See also

DRNVOLMS
Create and report pond extents and volumes
DRAPE
Create sets along pline paths
GCFOLLOW
Create breakline sets along DTMs
LABGRADE
Label grade between points
COORDS
Display slope and aspect of current DTM layer at cursor in coordinate scroll
MG1
Label slopes of triangle centroids
LINKSET
Display direction of slope and quick contours of triangles
WALK
Create a path at a constant grade
DTMDRAIN
Create sets around drainage areas.

TML date  Source 
10/12/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCFILLET

Insert or expand multiple arcs.

Insert arcs into selected sets or plines and increase radii of small arcs in plines.

Sets

At each point in selected sets, a new arc with the entered minimum radius and its new points is inserted. No arc is inserted where an arc already exists or the distance to either adjacent point exceeds the new tangent length. Specify "Delete set IPs" to delete existing set points at new arcs.

Plines

At each vertex in selected plines, a new arc with the entered minimum radius is inserted or the radius of an existing arc is increased. If the distance to either adjacent vertex exceeds the new tangent length, the new radius is reduced to fit. Splines, spirals and vertical curves are not modified.

Closed figures

When an arc is inserted at the beginning of a closed figure, the start chainage is adjusted to match the previous chainage at the new start location.

See also

FILLET
Create an arc at the intersection of two segments
CURVE
Insert or modify a curve at a pline vertex
SCURVE
Insert or modify an arc at a set point
ARCBREAK
Insert points into set arcs
SPLINE
Spline or despline a pline
GCHALEDT
Graphically edit curves in alignments
GCFILTER
Remove points from arcs or recreate arcs from chords

TML date  SourceGC
25/03/19     Geocomp Update or $200 127
 GCFILTER

Filter excess points from straights and arcs in sets.

Filter excess points from sets by offset and radius tolerances, recreate arcs from chords or replace sets with alignment plines.

Relayer filtered points to layer 0. If layer 0 is invisible, these points disappear.

Sets:
Select sets to be filtered
Line Tol:
Horizontal offset tolerance on straights
Arc Tol:
Horizontal offset tolerance on arcs
Elev Tol:
Vertical offset tolerance
Filter Points
Remove points within Line or Arc tolerance and within Elev Tolerance
Convert Chords to Arcs
Convert chords to arcs where the implied radii and centres of arc match
Convert to HAL/VAL Plines
Convert sets to horizontal alignment plines in Plan view and corresponding vertical alignment plines in Profile view

GCFILTER can reduce the size of background maps to be uploaded to instruments.

See also BLFILTER, SETFILT and FILTER.

TML date  SourceGC
09/05/17     Geocomp Update or $200 127
 GCFOLLOW

Create a set that follows segments or links.

Create a set that follows segments or links in both directions from a selected segment.

The first segment is a copy of the selected segment. Segments are then added to each end along segments or links to the point closest to the direction of the previous segment until no point falls within the specified deflection angle.

The new segments can follow existing set segments or triangle sides, can be sets or plines, can be on the current layer or on the layer of the selected set and are the line colour of the current layer.

Use to distinguish breaklines such as kerbs from supplied DTMs.

See also GC66 and GCFALL.

TML date  Source 
27/05/17     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCFIXXML

Fix .XML files with long lines.

Read a specified .XML file and write another with a new line inserted after each > character.

The new .XML file can then be read by Terramodel commands that can't read lines longer than 255 characters, such as GCXMLIN, GCPTSIN and the LandXML import script.

.XML files contain ASCII characters in fields delimited by tags defined by < and > characters. Tabs, spaces and new lines may be included for human readability but are not required by the .XML specification so, to save space, .XML files may have been written all on one long line. Such files exceed the maximum of 255 characters per line that most Terramodel commands expect. GCFIXXML fixes that problem.

See also BIGXMLIN and SNRFILE.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCGENGRD

Create points on a grid pattern.

Create points at nominated interval, bearing and number within a boundary on the specified layer.

Insert the grid origin at the south west corner.

See also DTMGRID, GRIDEXPT, GRIDELEV, GCLABGRD and GRIDMAKE.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Draft|​Label grid Geocomp Update or $250 265
 GCGEOIN

Import Leica .GEO coordinate data.

Import points, lines and attributes from Leica .GEO coordinate files. GEO files are part of the Leica SBG Universal Machine Control (UMC) system.

To export .GEO files, see also GCUMC3D.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCGPXIN

Import GPX GPS data.

Import points from a GPX file and transform from lat/long coordinates to a specified coordinate system.

You can limit to point inside a boundary or close to an alignment.

See The GPS Exchange Format.

See also GPXOUT.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCGRDVOL

Report the cut and fill volumes of regions.

Create region boundaries and report their cut and fill volumes to P3Pad, CSV, text and hatching.

Create region boundaries as closed plines in a rectangular grid (for broad zones) or between xlines (for roads), or select existing boundaries (such as stockpile toes).

GCGRDVOL can improve on EARTHWORK, EARTHWRK and AVGEND for many situations.

Create Grids/Regions

Create rectangular regions at a location
  • Select New grid
  • Locate the north west corner
  • Enter the bearing
  • Enter the number and width of columns
  • Enter the number and height of rows
  • Select a layer and colour for the grid
  • Click OK to create a grid of closed rectangular plines
  • Each pline name indicates the row and column
Create rectangular regions inside a Box
  • Select Sub grid
  • Select any pline to define a the extents of a Box
  • Enter the bearing
  • Enter the number of columns
  • Enter the number of rows
  • Select a layer and colour for the subgrid
  • Click OK to create a grid of closed rectangular plines within the box
  • Each pline name indicates the box and the row and column
Create Regions using active alignment and Xlines
  • Select a layer and colour for the regions
  • Click Create Regions using active alignment and Xlines
  • Each pline name indicates the chainage range
Use existing regions

There is no need to delete and recreate region plines, when prompted, if you are working with

  • the same regions again (e.g. monthly volumes)
  • irregular boundaries from other sources (e.g. stockpiles)
  • imported regions (e.g. transferred by TMXOUT and TMXIN)

Settings

  • Label each region with text showing Cut Volume, Fill Volume, Nett Volumes, Average Depth or Region Name.
  • Enter the Prefix, layer name, style, colour and vertical shift for each label type.
  • To avoid labels overlapping, specify text styles with different vertical justification or enter different shifts (in text height units).
  • To distinguish label types, specify prefixes, layers or colours.
  • Delete previously created labels and hatching, or not.
  • Specify a text bearing.
  • Hatch each region with patterns and colours to indicate whether there is more cut or more fill.
  • Report
    • Cut and fill volumes
    • Maximum depths of cut and fill
    • Net volumes
    • Average depths
    • Region names
    • Cut and fill and boundary areas
    • Topsoil volumes (if any)
    • Dead regions (if any)
    • Cumulative cut, fill and nett volumes.
  • For reports that overflow P3Pad, generate a CSV file.
  • Delete regions with no included volume.

Use Shrink/Swell factors

Apply the shrink and swell factors defined in EARTHWORK Settings.

Compute Volumes

Once you have defined regions and settings, select Compute Volumes.

Exist
Existing DTM surface layer
Proposed
Proposed DTM surface layer
Grids/regions
Select region boundaries (typically by layer)
DTM Bdy
Select an optional limiting boundary
Top Soil
Estimate topsoil volume by multiplying entered thickness by the area of cut. The reported cut volumes are not adjusted for topsoil.
Compute Vols
Compute the volumes, labels and reports

Any dead regions are excluded from the results by SETSMOOTH.

See also EARTHWORK to report volumes within one boundary, GC20 to detail volumes within multiple boundaries, MASSHAUL to create a mass haul diagram, and EARTHWRK and AVGEND for less accurate end-area volumes.

TML date MenuSourceGC
05/06/17   Reports|​More...|​Grid volumes Geocomp Update or $200 222
 GCGSIOUT

Export alignment in Leica RoadPlus GSI format.

Choose from HAL and VAL or Roadjob.

See also GSIDTMOU and GCPTSOUT.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCGT7IN

Import alignment in Topcon/​Civilcad GC7/GTS format.

Import horizontal alignment into the plan view, the vertical alignment into the profile view and the cross sections into the plan view.

The cross section points are strung according to descriptions in the cross section file.

The file names are assumed to have .GT7 file extension, and have the same name except for "- H", "- V" and "- XS" prefixes.

See also GCGTSOUT.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCGTSOUT

Export alignment in Topcon/​Civilcad GTS format.

Export horizontal and vertical alignment, and cross sections extracted at xlines, to separate files.

See also GCGT7IN.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCHALADJ

Adjust a registered HAL to use offsets.

Adjust a registered HAL to use offsets from the nominated main HAL instead of the current alignment record.

Offsets are computed at the nominated interval so the adjusted alignment will initially follow approximately same path, but the adjusted alignment will now follow any edits to the main registered alignment.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCHALDEL

Delete selected registered HALs.

Remove selected registered horizontal alignments from the HAL Manager.

The plines are not deleted.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCHALEDT

Edit a registered horizontal alignment graphically.

Edit the main horizontal alignment of a roadway graphically.

  1. Register your HAL using HALMANAGER
  2. Select your HAL as the main horizontal alignment of your roadway using ROADJOB
  3. Make the pline of the HAL visible and selectable
  4. Make nearby plines invisible or unselectable so you don't select by mistake
  5. In GCHALEDT
    1. Select your roadway from a list
    2. Click in the IP field
    3. Click on a curve or bend in the HAL to select an IP

You can then move the selected IP to a location, insert a new IP after the selected IP, delete the IP, or change the arc radius, spiral in (back) and spiral out (ahead) lengths of the IP.

You can also report the offsets from the design alignment to an as-built set record.

Watch for messages in message scroll.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Roads|More...|​Edit HAL Geocomp Update or $200 84
 GCHALIN

Import Geocomp horizontal alignment (.HAL).

The HAL file is imported as a pline in the plan view.

Use GCIMPORT if you want the SDS data with the HAL.

See also GCHALOUT and GCVERIN.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Roads|​More...|​Import Geocomp HAL Geocomp Update or $250 253
 GCHALOFF

Create a pline HAL from a registered horizontal alignment with offsets.

A pline is created along a registered alignment defined by offsets in the horizontal alignment manager.

The IPs are created at the chainage interval in the Settings.

A report is displayed showing each chainage, offset, easting and northing of each IP.

See also GCVALOFF and VARIOFF.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 157
 GCHALOUT

Export Geocomp horizontal alignment (.HAL).

Converts a pline HAL in the plan view consisting of straights, arcs or spirals, but not splines.

The output file name must be six-digits with extension .HAL, for Geocomp to read it.

To extract sections other than to edge of model at 10m intervals, change the interval and offsets in SDS 84.

See also GCHALIN and GCVEROUT.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 84
 GCHAULMN

Add Masshaul Import and Export materials from a CSV file.

Add a MASSIMPORT table of import or export material for MASSHAUL.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCHELP

GCHelp toolbar button

Report key, version and path configuration

Display a report showing details of key and paths and names of configuration files used by Terramodel and Geocomp Update and store the details as project variables.

Version information

Report

  • Terramodel with Geocomp Update version
  • Security key​|Serial​|licence|​dongle number
  • Toolpak version number
  • GeocompSystems.dll version number
  • GCHELP Revision number and date

Location of Tmodwin.ini

Report the location of the tmodwin.ini that configures the initial Terramodel user-interface. The true location can be a copy of this file hidden by Windows in a VirtualStore.

Terramodel Search Path (TSP)

Terramodel searches the folders in the Terramodel Search Path in sequence for many user-​definable files including the prototype project, workspace, toolbar buttons, TML commands, aliases and blocks. The sequence is the current project folder, then user-definable folders, then C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Terramodel.

Typical user-definable folders include C:\TMCUSTOM\ for your user-​definable files and C:\TMCUSTOM\​GEOCOMP\ for Geocomp Update software.

Make any required changes to the paths. Use Ctrl Enter to start each path on a new line. Click "Update TSP" to update the TSP in the current TMODWIN.INI.

To verify the changes, restart Terramodel then use TSP to check the paths and files.

Terramodel Prototype file

Report the location of the prototype project on the TSP. Browse to select a prototype project file, like SYSTEM but with checks.

Terramodel Project Units, Sheet Units, Workspace and Menu

If a project is open, report the current project units and sheet units defined by MEASUNIT.

Report the name of the current workspace. Use TOOLBOX to select, display and edit workspaces.

Report the location and name of any menu configuration file. Use MENUCFG to select any different file.

Environmental Variable and Net Lock

Report any environmental variables used to locate TMODWIN.INI or network licensing keys.

Modules on Key

Report any Terramodel modules on the security key. Field data module is not reported as that module is not dependant on the key. See also ABOUT Products.

Link buttons

Station​/Chainage
Run STAORCHN to set station or chainage convention for some commands.
Check for Updates
Run UPDATE to open the webpage to check for and download updates to Terramodel.
Edit TMODWIN.INI
Run EDITINI to edit TMODWIN.INI.
Help Terramodel
Run HELPTM to open the Index for Terramodel Help.
Help Import/Export
Run HELPIE to open the Index for Import and Export Help.
Help Toolboxes
Run HELP​TOOLBOX to open the Index tab for Toolbox Help.
Documents
Run DOCUMENTS to open a page of links to documents.
TML List
Run TMLLIST to open the TML List.
Support Links
Open a page of public support links.
Contact Us
Open a page of Contact details for Geocomp Systems.

See also

ABOUT
Display Terramodel version and modules and enter upgrade codes
SYSTEM
Report and edit system variables
TSP
List folders and files on the Terramodel Search Path
TMCUSTOM
Add C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp\ to the TSP

TML date MenuSource 
25/10/18   Help|​GCHelp
Toolbar button
Geocomp Update  
 GCIDCHN

Display the chainage and offset from a selected alignment at the cursor.

Select a pline or set in the plan view and a location in plan, profile, xsect or super view.

The pline or set is made the active alignment and the location of the cursor is displayed in each view.

Click on Recentre Views to recentre open views at the current location.

If Update Plan View is selected, the centre of the Plan view moves to the location you select

If Update XSect View is selected, the cross section of the nearest xline is made the active chainage.

See also IDSTATION and SUPERVIS.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update  
 GCIMPORT

Import Geocomp Points (.PTS) and (Strings (.STR) or use the DOS Data Collector Interface to import survey data.

DOS Geocomp

DOS Geocomp software is a separate DOS application with similar functions to Terramodel for Windows. It can download raw data in a number of different data collector formats, convert them to a Geocomp Standard Field File (.FLD) and then Geocomp Points (.PTS) and (Strings (.STR) with coding, stringing and symbols all automatically applied.

Computed coordinates are stored in a .PTS file with feature code and stringing in a matching .STR file. The resulting 3D points are assigned block or symbol, layer, name and group according to the feature code. They are strung where required with sets of configurable layer, colour and linetype. Blocks representing tree canopies can be sized by the recorded radius.

GCIMPORT imports these files into Terramodel. Other DOS Geocomp import commands are GC09, GCHALIN, GCVERIN, GCCONIN, GCDTMIN, GCPLTIN, GCPLFIN, GCCSVIN, GCINSBLK, GCJOINMP, GCJOINPT, PTJOIN and IMPORTGC.

Import .Pts .Str .Lto .Hal .Ver .Ant .Dmn Files

Select "Import .Pts .Str etc." button and browse to select a GEOCOMP .PTS file. Other files, such as STR (Strings), ANT (Annotations), DMN (Dimensions), LTO (Lots), HAL (Horizontal Alignments) or VER (Vertical Alignments) with the same name as the PTS file in the same folder, are also imported.

This dialog also allows for selection of the ENT table. This table controls the layer names, descriptions/names, colours, linetypes and symbols according to the Geocomp entity number. If the Geocomp files have been derived from survey, the entity and stringing have been worked out from the feature coding.

The layer name can be the short description, long description or moss string code in the ENT file. The entity number may be added to the front of the layer name.

The record name (sometimes called description) is derived from the Geocomp string description, the short name (alpha-code), the long name or the moss (point or string) code in the ENT file.

The Group is derived from the Geocomp Entity.

Points are initially placed in layer 0. As the strings are imported, the points are relayered to the same layer as their sets. Points with no strings remain in layer 0. If "Copy Points into different layers if Point is in different Entities" is enabled, points used by more than one entity will be copied into each layer. Otherwise, the point will be placed only in the layer of the entity of the last string attached to that point.

If "Map Points and Circles with Blocks or Symbols" is selected, blocks or symbols are automatically placed by group. The heading of Geocomp.MAP describes the format of the mapping file. See GC09 and GCINSBLK.

A Geocomp plot parameter file can be used to control text attributes when importing DMN (Dimensions) and ANT (Annotations).

The colour of the points and sets is derived from the GEOCOMP.CLT file in the Terramodel Search Path. If the entity is not in GEOCOMP.CLT, the colours are derived from the colours of the existing layer. If the layer does not exist, it is created, and the colours of the new layer and objects come from the default layer. (See also GC16 which uses the CLT to set the colours without importing the objects).

Data Collector Interface

The DOS Data Collector Interface in GCIMPORT enables Terramodel users without DOS Geocomp but familiar with it, to download and import these same files. This Interface only is installed by Geocomp Update G, H, J, K and L.

DOS Geocomp users can use their own software to download surveys and create .PTS and .STR files. Terramodel and DOS Geocomp users can import into Terramodel with IMPORT .PTS/.STR (see above) or IMPORT Scripts, RDE and AUTODRAFT. The only people who should consider using this DOS Data Collector Interface are experienced DOS Geocomp users who do not have a DOS Geocomp key but do have a 32-bit Windows XP Pro computer and a Terramodel key with CAD module.

Sufficient environment space and free conventional memory must be made available.

ANSI must be supported to download from any instrument other than a Geodimeter.

Geocomp Updates installed these interface files into C:\Program Files\​Trimble\​Shared\​Geocomp. If these are installed anywhere else, edit the TM.BAT and the GEOCOMP.PAR files and set a project variable. Contact Geocomp Systems for details.

Select your data collector type, communication parameters and coding character positions. See the Geocomp manuals for an explanation of these settings.

Downloading from the Data Collector or Instrument to DOS Data Collector Interface

  1. Open a new project
  2. Run GCIMPORT
  3. Select Data Collector. This will launch the Data Collector Interface.
  4. From the Data Collector Interface, select 1, New File Number. Assign a unique four-digit job number and a two-digit version number for the survey data. If you don't do this, you will overwrite previous survey files each time.
  5. Select 3, Data Collector Interface
  6. Select 2, Transfer from [currently configured data collector]
  7. Download the file from the data collector. This creates a data file with a six-digit number (with a file extension dependent on the data collector format) in C:\Program Files\Trimble\​Shared\​Geocomp.
  8. Alternatively, download the data using some other software (e.g. Terramodel Download Script, Geocomp, SokkiaComms, Leica Survey Office, Nikon TransIT or Geodimeter Software Tools) and copy the raw data into the C:\Program Files\Trimble\​Shared\​Geocomp directory with a name six-digit number format.
  9. If you get a black screen, you have an ANSI problem. See www.geocomp.com.au/​support/​geocomp/​ansi.html for solutions on Windows XP.
  10. Select 3, Create Standard Field File. This is a raw data file in a standard Geocomp format.
  11. If you need a control point file, create it in advance using GCPTSOUT and a target of Geocomp CRD. The .CRD file name is in the format CONTnn.CRD where nn are digits indicating the control point file number. The character positions of the station description in the name of the point are critical.
  12. Optionally, Select 8 to edit or view the .FLD file, or use any text editor.
  13. Select 4, Reduce Standard Field File. This creates a pair of Geocomp .PTS and .STR files. The .PTS file contains the coordinates and the .STR file contains the stringing and coding information.
  14. From the main Data Collector Interface menu, select 0 then Enter to return to Terramodel GCIMPORT.
  15. Select Import Survey Data in Terramodel to import the survey data into the current plan view.

Uploading from Terramodel to the Data Collector or Total Station using the DOS Data Collector Interface

  1. Create the coordinate file to upload with PTSOUT or GCPTSOUT, selecting the appropriate data collector format as the Target. Save the coordinate file in C:\Program Files\Trimble\Shared\Geocomp. Use a six-digit name with an extension depending on the target.
  2. Run GCIMPORT
  3. Select Data Collector
  4. From the Data Collector Interface, select 1, New File Number. Assign a unique four-digit job number and a two-digit version number for the survey data. If you don't change these values you will overwrite previous survey files each time.
  5. Select 3, Data Collector Interface
  6. Select 6, Transfer to [currently configured data collector]
  7. Upload the file to the data collector.
  8. From the Data Collector Interface menu, select 0 Enter to return to Terramodel GCIMPORT.

Uploading from Terramodel to the Data Collector or Total Station using other uploading software such as Geodimeter Software Tools or SokkiaComms.

  1. Create the coordinate file to upload with PTSOUT or GCPTSOUT, selecting the appropriate Data Collector format as the Target, or use an alternative method appropriate to your uploading software.
  2. Upload the file according to your software instructions.

Transfer survey data to and from Trimble instruments and Terramodel.

Refer to www.geocomp.com.au/​support/​terramodel/​acu.html.

TML date Guides Menu Source GC
01/09/18 Geocomp 10 User Guide
Geocomp 10 Reference Manual
Geocomp Feature Code Table
The manuals for your total station or data collector
The manuals for your instrument's file transfer software, if used
File|​Misc. Import|​Geocomp .PTS + .STR
Toolbar button (in Geocomp Updates before K)
Geocomp Update 30
 GCIN2SET

Insert points into multiple sets.

Insert the selected points into selected sets if the points are within a specified distance of the set.

The entered set tolerance is stored as a project variable. The initial value is derived from the SetArcTol value in TMODWIN.INI.

If there is already a point in the set at that location, the point is not inserted, unless you replace 2D points with 3D points. If you replace 2D points, selected 3D points are inserted and can be relayered to the same layer as the set. 2D points at those locations can be separated from the set or deleted.

For example, if you have been supplied 2D linework as plines, and 3D points at some of the pline vertices, you can GCCONVRT plines to sets then GCIN2SET to add the 3D points to the set on the set layer. Also, if you have a rectangular grid of plines intersecting at grid points, each point will be added to two sets.

See also INTOSET which selects one line at a time, GC50 to interpolate elevations from 3D points onto 2D points in the sets and DTMPTS to interpolate elevations from a DTM onto 2D points, GC31 or DTMALL to remove duplicate points.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCINCPT

Create points with incrementing point numbers.

Create points with incrementing point numbers at locations.

Configure a prefix, suffix, last point number increment, elevation and name.

See also GCINCTXT.

The TML name is GCINC_PT. If GCINCPT does not run from the command line, create an alias from GCINCPT to GCINC_PT or enter GCINC_PT.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCINCTXT

Create text with incrementing numbers or letters.

Create text records at selected locations with values that start at a specified real number or letters and increase by a specified increment.

The text could indicate house numbers, lot numbers, boreholes, and so on.

The text is created, the increment is added, and then the new value is defined ready to create the next text object. If the value is a real number, the value is trimmed to the number of decimal places. If the value contains any letter, the last character is incremented by the integer part of the increment. If the next character would be after Z or z, the next letter is appended. Any prefix or suffix is added after the increment is applied.

Options

Number/Text:
Enter a starting real number or any other text
Increment:
Enter a real number or a number of letters to increment by
Location:
Enter the location of the new text
Settings
Prefix:
Enter any prefix
Suffix:
Enter any suffix
Text style:
Select the text style
Direction:
Specify the text direction
Decimal places
Specify the number of decimal places for real numbers
Copy text settings
Select a text object from which to copy text settings
OK|Close
Exit settings
OK
Create text and increment the current number/text
Cancel
Cancel without creating any more text

Examples

For sequence start with increment by and set
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 ... 1 1 0 decimal places
-0.50, -0.25, 0.00, 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 1.00, 1.25 ... -0.50 0.25 2 decimal places
A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, A6, A7, A8, A9, A10 ... 1 1 Prefix A and 0 decimal places
a1, b1, c1, d1, e1, f1, g1 ,h1 ,i1 ... a 1 Suffix 1
W, Y, Z, AA, AB ... W 1
A, C, E, G, I ... A 2
A, AA, AAA, AAAA, AAAAAA ... A 27
A, A, A, A, A ... A 0

See also

TEXT
Create text
INCRTEXT
Create integer text incrementing by one
RENUMLOT
Renumber lots (rename closed sets) by incrementing integers
LABELSETS
Label closed sets with lot numbers and areas
GCLABLOT
Create text to label closed sets lot numbers and areas
LOTJOIN
Create closed lots from sets or plines enclosing text

TML date  Source 
28/08/19     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCINSBLK

Replace circles with tree blocks

Place a symbol or block for each selected circular set, scaled to match the diameter.

The most common use is to place large numbers of tree blocks scaled to fit canopy or trunk diameters.

You can delete the original circles.

For a few circles, UNITBLK or BLOCK Insert may be better.

If the circles are plines, CONVERT to a set first, then set the group with GC52 or SGRP.

The block is chosen from a mapping file according to the group of the set. This is the same mapping file used by GCIMPORT and GC09. See Geocomp.map for an example which includes an explanation of the format.

GCIMPORT can import survey data including circles. If you elect not to "Map points and Circles with Blocks or Symbols" at the time, you can use GCINSBLK to replace the circles later.

Use GC09 to place blocks or symbols on points by group, GC35 to create points at centroids of sets or plines, BLOCK Multiple to place blocks on multiple points or AUTODRAFT to place blocks on multiple points by name.

See also LABELSETS.

Tree canopy blocks included with Terramodel include: Tree1 to Tree8, Tree coniferous type 1, Tree deciduous type 1 to 3, GCSYM423, 437, 438, 452 and 453. Symbols 100 to 109 are provided as both symbols and blocks SYM100 to SYM109. DOCUMENTS and Terramodel 10.1 User Guide pages 171 and 200 have block charts.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 93
 GCIRBOOM

Design ramps for pivot irrigation.

Design ramps and process a complete irrigation pivot.

Specify a pivot point, tower height, existing DTM, pivot boom details and settings, then design ramps and process the complete pivot.

TML date  Source  
01/09/18     NFS  
 GCIRDESN

Merge pivot irrigation ramps into DTM.

Merge a topographic DTM, a ramps DTM and a clearance DTM into a pivot irrigation design DTM.

TML date  Source  
01/09/18     NFS  
 GCIRINFO

Check pivot irrigation boom.

Check pivot irrigation boom cross sections.

TML date  Source  
01/09/18     NFS  
 GCIRPROF

Create pivot irrigation profile.

Create pivot irrigation profile along a boom defined using GCIRBOOM.

TML date  Source  
01/09/18     NFS  
 GCJOINMP

Join points with gaps

Create sets on the current layer between selected points.

Join,

  • starting from most westerly point, to nearest point, leaving gaps where outside a maximum distance, or
  • in point number order, or
  • in consecutive point number order

See also PTJOIN, GCJOINPT and AUTODRAFT.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 15
 GCJOINPT

Create sets from points by feature and string in name.

Create sets by joining points according to the feature code and string data in the name following the conventions of Geocomp software.

Join selected points with sets according to feature codes defined by sequential characters starting from the beginning of each name and immediately after any point code separator characters. The characters from the entity start position to the entity end position are treated as the feature code. The characters from the string start position to the string end position are treated as the string number.

Points and sets can be separated into layers or placed on the current layer.

If you specify a Geocomp ENT file, integer feature codes are matched against the entity field in the first column, and other feature codes are matched against the short description in the second column.

Colours and linetypes are determined by the layer settings, unless you specify a colour and linetype file (CLT) file (see GC16).

Blocks and symbols can be placed according to a MAP file (see GC09).

You can specify that the layer name is derived from the long description in column 7 of the ENT file.

GCJOINPT has been replaced by AUTODRAFT where a Feature Code is called a Field Code, a String Number is called a Feature Instance ID, points with Lines are strung even when the string number is blank, and the ENT, CLT and MAP files have been replaced by the ADC file.

See also GCIMPORT, PTJOIN, GCJOINMP and GCCSVIN.

TML date Guide   Source GC
01/09/18 Geocomp Feature Code Table   Geocomp Update or $250 125
 GCKMLIN

Import points from Google Earth (.KML or .KMZ).

Import placemarks and paths from a .KML or .KMZ file, created in Google Earth .or similar, within a selected boundary pline or within a maximum offset of a pline HAL.

The WGS84 latitude and longitude coordinates in the KML are transformed into eastings and northings in the specified coordinate system. Click on Change to pick a different system. The available systems are defined by GCCOORD and COORDCON.

To export from Google Earth, use File, Save, Save image... or Save place as..... and select .KML format.

A .KMZ file contains one.KML file and may also contain folders with other files such as images. GCKMLIN extracts the components into their folders. If the KML file has the name doc.kml or the same name as the .KMZ, GCKMLIN imports the KML. If the .KML name does not match, browse to select and import the .KML. If the .KMZ includes photos, select Image Info to create links to the images.

To import an image saved from Google Earth, use Terramodel IMAGE Manager.

Lines with elevations are imported as points and sets. To modify elevations = 0.00 to *, use GC69. To select objects with any elevation, use right-mouse Elev with range * to *. To select objects with no elevation, use Right-mouse Elev with NOT * to *.

TML date MenuSource 
12/03/20   File|​Misc. Import|​Google Earth KML Geocomp Update or $0  
 GCKMLOUT

Export to Google Earth, NearMap or Web Map Services (WMS).

Display aerial or satellite images of the selected location in Google Earth, NearMap or a Web Map Service.

Operation

  1. Transform your data into a geodetic coordinate system.
  2. Install or configure Google Earth Pro or similar display application.
  3. Connect to the Internet
  4. Run GCKMLOUT
  5. Select Terramodel objects to display on the map.
  6. Change the current Coordinate System, if it does not match your objects.
  7. In Settings, select an output type and relevant parameters.
  8. Browse to select the output file name.
  9. Export the relevant objects in the relevant file format.
  10. The Windows application or Web Mapping Service opens at the location of the selected objects.
  11. Configure and save your map.
  12. Import your map into Terramodel with IMAGE, if you want.

Export to Google Earth

Export selected points, sets and plines, in a Google Earth .KML file, then open Google Earth to display the objects.

The colours of exported points, plines and sets match the colours displayed in Terramodel at the time of export.

Once you have located the data in Google Earth, change the rotation, tilt, colour and style and the visibility of points, lines, Geocomp Systems logo and other data layers. Reset the Tilt and Compass by View|Reset or by R key. Save the image by File|Save|Save Image...

Settings

Google Earth
Export objects to Google Earth .KML format then open the .KML with Google Earth or Google Earth Pro, if installed, to display the objects on the Google Earth global model.
Near Map
Export objects to Nearmap .KML and open NearMap with your default Internet browser. Login to Nearmap then open at the extents of the .KML to display an orthorectified image, but not the objects. To use the image in Terramodel, export the image as a .JPG with its georeferencing .JGW world file then add the image to IMAGE Manager.
Other WMS Map
Select a Web Map Service to open from a list. Settings not relevant to WMS are not selectable.
Show Point Elevs
Include any elevations in Google Earth point labels.
Show Point Numbers
Include point numbers in Google Earth point labels.
Show Object Names
Include object names in Google Earth labels.
Float above surface
Display objects at elevation if above the Google Earth surface. Turn off to display objects on the Google Earth surface.
Show Drop Lines
For objects displayed above the Google Earth Surface, also display extrusions between the object and the surface.
Fill Closed Plines
Fill closed plines with their pline colours.
Text Scale
Specify the size of exported text.
Line width
Specify the line width of exported objects.
Icon Scale
Specify the size of point icons.
Icon name
Specify the name of the icons.
Fill transparency %
Specify the transparency for filled closed plines.
Interpolation of Points around Curves
Specify a maximum 3D distance and a chainage interval for interpolating points and chords around curves.

Point icons

Specify a standard Google Maps icon to mark points on Google Earth in the point colour (not the icon colour). Enter the name and location of a .PNG file at http://maps.google.com/mapfiles/kml/.

For example,

Enter to display this icon from this URL
/shapes/​open-diamond  Google Maps open diamond icon http://maps.google.com/​mapfiles/kml/​shapes/​open-diamond.png
/pushpin/​wht-pushpin  Google Maps pushpin icon http://maps.google.com/​mapfiles/kml/​pushpin/​wht-pushpin.png
/paddle/​wht-blank  Google Maps open diamond icon http://maps.google.com/​mapfiles/kml/​paddle/​wht-blank.png
/paddle/​wht-circle-lv  Google Maps white circle lv icon http://maps.google.com/​mapfiles/kml/​paddle/​wht-circle-lv.png

Fill inside boundaries

To fill closed plines or sets with their colours, select "Fill Closed Plines". For solid fill colours, select 0% transparency.

Pline boundaries created by SHADEDTM, SHADEISO and SHADESLP are always filled.

Use fill instead of hatching to reduce the file size.

Use Google Earth images in Terramodel

Google Earth saved images are not orthorectified and have no registration file. They be added to IMAGE Manager and the manually Registered by picking a pair of Source points in Terramodel and corresponding Destination points on the image.

If Source points are not visible in the image, you can create them like this:

  1. In Terramodel
    1. Create or select two points far apart but within the area of interest
    2. Use GCKMLOUT to export those points to Google Earth
  2. In Google Earth
    1. Save the image with the two points visible
    2. Turn off the points
    3. Save a second image
  3. In Terramodel Image manager
    1. Add the image that shows the points at corners with arbitrary locations
    2. Include the pline box.
  4. In Terramodel POINTS command
    1. create new points at the locations of the points in the image
  5. In Image manager,
    1. detach the image
    2. Add the second image at the corners of the pline box
    3. Register using the new points as the Source and the original points as the Destinations.

 Export to Web Map Services

Select "Other WMS Map" to select a Web Map Service from a list. Each WMS serves a map of the location of the selected object or objects to your computer in a particular file format according to applicable settings. You may need to install or sign up to a corresponding service to view the map. If you want a WMS that is not on this list, please try the User-defined WMS or let us know.

Available Web Map Services include:

Notes

  • Once you have displayed the map, you can then export a map image for use in Terramodel.
  • The coordinates are transformed from the selected geodetic coordinate system to latitudes and longitudes in the .KML or .HTML file. See GCCOORD or COORDCON.
  • To transform points from an arbitrary coordinate system, to a selectable geodetic coordinate system, use GC3DADJ or GC07.
  • The image quality is only as good as the data source.
  • You will need an Internet connection to view the data on the map.
  • "&" characters in names are not valid in .KML so are substituted by "and".
  • Leader lines and text borders are not exported. Text with leader lines are exported at the leader line location. Text with subject points are exported at the point locations.

TML date MenuSource 
24/10/17   File|​Misc. Import|​Google Earth KML Geocomp Update or $0  
 GCLABGRD

Label and draw grid in polygons.

Create a north-south|​east-west grid of plines, labels, or both, within multiple bounding plotboxes.

Select a layer for the grid lines, or select No Grid. The grid can be lines, ticks or dots (short plines)

Select a layer for the labels, or layer 0 for no labels.

Select easting and northing intervals for the grid.

For easting and northing labels, select layers, decimal places, styles, prefixes, suffixes, the number of spaces from the border and whether to label inside or outside the plotbox. The initial default suffixes are derived from the X and Y coordinate labels for the Plan view in VIEWSET.

Plot boxes can be any closed pline, including closed plines those created by PLANSET. Gridlines can cross a polygon up to 20 times.

See also
LABELGRID
Label a simple grid of existing plines within a rectangular box
GRIDMAKE
Create a grid of plines within a closed pline at GRIDSET intervals
GCGENGRD
Create a grid of points on any azimuth
GRIDELEV
Create and a grid of points, interpolate elevations and report.

TML date  SourceGC
06/07/18     Geocomp Update or $200 93
 GCLABIP

Label intersection points.

Label all intersection points on selected HAL, with IP Chainage, and optionally Delta, Easting and Northing.

Chainages are labelled with "Ch".

The text is placed legibly and perpendicular to the HAL at an offset which you can enter or select graphically.

See also LABELPI, LABELHAL and GC27.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 84
 GCLABLOT

Label closed sets with lot area and lot number text.

Label selected closed sets with EAT text showing the lot numbers and lot area.

The lot numbers are derived from the set names.

The areas up to 10,000 square units are labelled as m². Alternative areas above 10,000 square units are divided by 10,000 and labelled as Ha.

The precision of the basic and alternative areas is controlled by UNITSSET.

If you want feet and acres or other area unit labels, or you don't want to use EAT text, use LABELSETS instead.

You can use commands such as LABELSETS, LOTJOIN, NAME, QSET and RENUMLOT to set the lot numbers as set names.

See also GCDIMLOT which labels dimensions using EAT text and GC80 which reports lot areas.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Draw|​Text|​Lot numbers Geocomp Update or $250 91
 GCLABPEG

Label points in a set with pipeline peg labels.

Create text labels at a specified offset from all points in a selected set, showing the word PEG followed by the point name and chainage.

Tick boxes enable extra labels for delta angle (to minutes or seconds) and coordinates.

Use PROJECTV to control the left/right direction.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCLABPNT

Label multiple points with EAT text, leaderline and border.

Label points with user-​definable text labels at an offset perpendicular to a HAL on a specified layer with rounded rectangle borders and leader lines.

Enter the text and text style in the Settings.

The text can include EAT codes referring to the subject points.

Points:
Select points to label
HAL:
Select a horizontal alignment
Offset:
Enter an offset from the HAL
Text layer:
Select a layer for the labels
Settings
Enter text for the label, which can include any EAT codes relevant to points. Also select a text style.
OK
Create text labels for each selected point.
Cancel
Close the command without creating text

To start a new line of text, use Ctrl Enter. To control the format of offsets, use UNITSSET Labeling. To label groups of subject points, enter \SUB{Group}.

For points on a HAL, create a temporary HAL to control the side on which to place the labels. If no HAL is selected, the insertion point of the text is the specified offset to the west of the point.

The border properties are fixed. These can be edited with commands such as EDIT and MATCHOBJ.

See also CALLOUT to label one point at a time with different options.

TML date  Source 
26/02/20     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCLINPTS

List points with invalid coordinates.

List points with an undefined easting or northing or both.

The report also lists the first available point number, the last point number and the maximum and minimum non-zero values for easting, northing or elevation, if any.

Points with undefined coordinates are most commonly created when RDE cannot compute the coordinates from the available survey information. Such points, and any sets connecting them, are not visible and thus not selected by Window, Crossing or Inside controls. They can be selected by other controls, such as Record, View and Point number range.

Elevations are not considered. To select points with undefined elevations (2D points), see GCNOELEV.

TML date   Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCLASIN

Import lidar data in .LAS or .LAZ format.

Import lidar (light radar) survey data from .LAS or .LAZ files following a specification of the American Society for Photogrammetry and Remote Sensing.

.LAS files contain many points with with X, Y and Z coordinates and, sometimes, values for RGB (red|green|blue), Intensity or NIR (Near infra-red).

.LAZ files contain compressed .LAS data.

.LAZ files

  1. If not a .LAZ, see ".LAS extents" below
  2. Click on Import
  3. Change file type to .LAZ files
  4. Select any .LAZ file to extract .LAS data from all .LAZ files in that folder
  5. OK to return to Import dialog and select .LAS files

LAS extents 

  1. Specify "Import LAS File Data Extents ONLY".
  2. Click Import
  3. Select as many .LAS files as you want
  4. Click Open to create pline boxes and text that show for each selected .LAS file the extents, file name and number of points.
  5. Compare the boxes against your other data to determine which .LAS files are relevant.
  6. Prepare or identify any limiting boundaries or corridor alignments.

.LAS points

  1. Run GCLASIN again.
  2. This time, do not select "Import LAS File Data Extents ONLY".
  3. Choose any limits to reduce the number of points to import
  4. Select Import
  5. Select as many .LAS files as you want.
  6. Import points from the selected files that are within the specified limits.

Limits

Limit the number of imported points:

Boundary/Hal
Limit by closed pline boundary or maximum offset to an open HAL pline.
Max offset from HAL
Limit by maximum offset from a HAL and any Xlines. The default offset is 100m.
Closed Plines Layer
Limit by closed pline boundaries on a layer. 0 to deselect.
Limit RGB
Limit the range of colours defined by decimal Red, Green and Blue values.
Limit intensity
Limit the range of intensity values.
Limit NIR
Limit the range of near-infrared values.
Limit to cuboids
Limit the number of imported points by dividing the extents into cuboids and importing only one point from each cuboid. The dimensions of the cuboids in X, Y and Z are the data extents X, Y and Z divided by the cube root of the entered number of cuboids.

Notes

P3Pad reports for each .LAS file, the file name, boundaries used, number of points imported and comments in the file that explain the content.

Only if the comments report values for RGB, Intensity or NIR, can you use those values to limit the data set. For example, you might try to select or exclude trees by high NIR, road pavements by low RGB or windows by high Intensity.

Use GCLASIN to extract .LAS data from .LAZ. They cannot be extracted by typical unzipping utilities.

To import .LAS data only within a distance from control points on a layer, insert circle blocks on those points by layer, explode those blocks then specify that layer for closed plines in GCLASIN.

The .LAS file may not define the coordinate system. If the coordinates are close to 0,0, and you specify when prompted that the coordinates are in decimal longitude|latitude, GCLASIN converts the coordinates to eastings and northings in the current From coordinate system specified by GCCOORD.

If there are no RGB colours in the file, the groups, names, and colours are derived from the values of Intensity, if any. The point colours are derived from the colour in the current PALETTE and colourmap that most closely matches the RGB values or intensity values (divided by 256) of the points in the file.

To approximate observed colours, for a LAS with RGB values, manually create your own palette with up to 64 colours of the surveyed surface, often greys, browns and greens, with a corresponding colourmap of up to 255 colours, import the palette and colourmap with EDITINI and make them current.

To create points with colours that match colours in 3DVISUALISER and Visualizer, choose OldPal for your palette and Default for your colourmap.

.LAS files can be very large. Use SYSTEM to set the maximum number of points in a .PRO file.

See also

LIDARIN
Import ASCII lidar files
LIDARGRD
Import gridded ASCII lidar files
GCESRIIN
Import ESRI DEM lidar files
3DFILTER
Filter lidar data after import

TML date  Source 
01/08/19     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCLAYCOL

Relayer and recolour objects by name and mapping file.

Relayer and colour selected objects by name according to a comma-​delimited mapping file with name, layer, colour.

PLAY.MAP is a supplied example mapping file.

To relayer but not recolour, leave the colour field empty.

See also PTLAYCOL, AUTODRAFT, LAYERMAP and CHNGNAME.

TML dateSourceGC
30/07/20 Geocomp Update or $250 40
 GCLFAOUT

Export Trimble Alignment Planning linear features .LFA

Quantm from Trimble Alignment Planning System uses a linear_features.lfa file to define crossing requirements at linear features.

The set name defines the linear feature description and the layer name defines the linear feature label.

Sets must have all 3D points or all 2D points. If you have some 2D points in the set, assign elevations first, for example by DTMPTS or GC50. If a set has all 2D points, Quantm will interpolate from the DTM.

Export special zones using GCSZAOUT.

Export DTM data using GCTMAOUT.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $POA  
 GCLLGRID

Draw Latitude and Longitude grids and labels.

Create labelled plines representing latitude and longitude according to the selected Coordinate System.

Settings

The settings provide control over the coordinate system, pline spacing and labelling.

Change coordinate system
Select a coordinate system.
Labels...
Interval
Enter the grid line step. The default step interval is 1. For example, enter a value of 3 to label every third grid line.
Offset
Enter the distance in sheet units for the label offset from the edge of the pline box. The default value is 0.5 cm.
Decimals
Enter the number of decimal places for labels. If the seconds are not selected, this value is used for minutes. If minutes are not selected, degrees. For example, to label in the form DDD MM SS.ss, include seconds in Label Components, and enter a value of 2 seconds. For the form DDD MM.dddd, untick seconds and enter 3 decimal places. For DDD.dddd, untick seconds and minutes and enter 4 decimals. Degree signs ° are represented by the character \176 unless changed by a project variable.
Textstyle
Select the text style for latitude and Longitude labels. If labels appear to be missing, they may simply be too small or too large. If labels cross the pline box, you may want to edit them.
Label Components
Enter any required prefix or suffix. For example, for Southern latitudes, use "-" prefix or "S" suffix.
Grids...
Grid interval
Enter the grid interval in seconds of arc. The default interval is 10. For Longitude, one second of arc is approximately 30.9 metres. For Latitude, one second of arc varies from approximately 30.9 metres at the equator to 0 at the poles.
Resolution
Enter the number of pline control points per grid interval. More vertices better approximate the true curve but take longer to compute. For example, with an interval of ten seconds of arc, for a pline segment every two seconds, enter a resolution of five.
Import|​Export
Save the label grid settings file format version between projects.

To label grids in multiple boundaries, enter GCLLGRID M at the command line.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   HDMS|​Coordinate|​Draw latitude and longitude grid Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCLNGIN

Import Geocomp long section .LNG

Import long section as a pline in the profile view

See also GCVERIN.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 412
 GCLOTCNR

Label lot corners with two elevations or a difference

Label points in selected sets with a single text object showing elevations from both an existing DTM and a design DTM at that location, or the elevation difference between the DTMs.

For each point, the text is oriented along the longest of the two connecting segments on the first lot tested.

The design elevation is labelled with F/S.

The text can have a leader line.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCLPTS

List the coordinates of selected points.

List the coordinates and some properties of selected points to a P3Pad or .CSV report. GCLPTS replaces LPOINTS which does not include options to report the RDE status, Group, CSV or Ranges.

The Options include any permutation of Point Number, Record Number, Easting, Northing, Elevation, RDE status, Name, Layer, Colour, View, Symbol Number, Group or Range and whether to also export to a comma-​separated .CSV file.

RDE Status shows, by Yes or No, whether the point is associated with the Raw data editor. If Yes, some points may also have a status code which, in combination with the listed coordinates, and remarks in RDE, can help you work out which points have been fixed in RDE or changed outside of RDE. RDE points that have been deleted in Plan view, can be marked as ignored by RDE and are listed with *,*,* coordinates by GCLPTS — if selected by View; they cannot be selected by Window. RDE points that have been moved outside of RDE are marked as ignored by RDE. Points with unknown RDE status codes are reported with "?", which usually indicates some edit outside RDE. Use Previous to select these points with unknown codes by a command such as RELAYER, or even GCLPTS again.

Select Ranges to append to the P3Pad report the first available point number, the last point number used and the coordinate ranges.

See also LPTSRAD which also reports bearing and distance from a stand point and PORTSC1 which reports heights as depths.

TML date MenuSource 
01/07/18   Reports|List [Points] Geocomp Update or $250 26
 GCMAGNET

Assign point properties by text from Topcon Magnet Field.

Assign names, elevations, numbers and feature attributes to points from text created by Topcon Magnet.

Once you have surveyed using Topcon Magnet, you can transfer your data to Terramodel with point properties and linework.

Method

In Magnet

  1. Complete your survey
  2. Make any edits such as adding lines
  3. Export using AutoCAD with Text Fields
  4. Select .DWG or .DXF file format

Then, in Terramodel

  1. Save your project
  2. File, Download\Import
  3. Import AutoCAD .DWG or .DXF
  4. Run GCMAGNET command
  5. Select all points from Magnet (e.g., by View)
  6. Specify "Delete matching text records"
  7. OK

Notes

  • Points and text are processed in record number order. Do not make any edits that interfere with this order after importing from .DWG or .DXF and before running GCMAGNET.
  • If you select "Delete matching text records", any remaining text indicates discrepancies.
  • In data from .DWG files, the record numbers of text records from Magnet follow the points. From .DXF, they precede the points. Both formats work OK, but .DWG format has a more compact file.
  • Adjacent record numbers of any text on on PNTNO, PNTELEV, PNTDESC and PNTATTRS layers are assigned to the Point number, Elevation, Name and Feature attributes respectively.
  • The point number is changed to the value of any text on the PNTNO layer. If a point already exists with that number, that point is first renumbered to the next available point number.
  • Text on the PNTELEV layer is not used if the point already has an elevation with higher precision. If the point has no elevation, the value is used. If the difference between the two elevations is significant, the text is not deleted and the difference and the old or new point number is reported to message scroll.
  • The point name is changed to the value of any text on the PNTDESC layer.
  • The feature attribute of the point is changed to the value of any text on the PNTATTRS layer.
  • Lines created in Magnet joining points with varying elevations are imported as sets
  • Lines created in Magnet joining plines with the same elevation are imported as plines. GCMAGNET deletes these plines are replaces them with sets joining the points.
  • The names do not include string numbers. To transfer points to Terramodel with string numbers but not strings drafted in Magnet, export a CSV file using a custom report that combines names and strings into a single feature code. Then import the .CSV into Terramodel and run AUTODRAFT. With this method, you do all the edits in Terramodel.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCMAPIN

Import a contour .MAP file.

Import contours from a .MAP file interpolated from Shuttle Radar Topograhy Mission (SRTM) data.

See also GCCONIN.

TML date  Source 
01/10/19     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCMAPOUT

Create a layer map file.

Create a file of layer names of selected objects.

The .MAP file is in the format:

Old layer name, New layer name

New layer names match the layer names of the objects; in old layer names, any character that is not a letter, digit, -, _ or $, is substituted with _, to be consistent with DXF files created by DXFOUT.

DXF

To replace layer names in a DXF file:

  1. Create objects in Terramodel with suitable layer names.
  2. Use GCMAPOUT to create the initial.MAP file.
  3. Use a text editor to define the new layer names
  4. Use DXFOUT to export objects to a 2000 format .DXF file.
  5. Use DXFCHANG to replace layer names in the DXF file.

Terramodel layer names can be up to 16 characters long, yet DXF layer names can have up to 255 or 2049 characters depending in the CAD software. With GCMAPOUT and DXFCHANG you can create .DXF files with longer layer names and more characters.

LAYERMAP

To modify the layer names of objects in the project file:

  1. Use GCMAPOUT to create the initial .MAP file.
  2. Use a text editor to define the new layer names
  3. Use LAYERMAP to replace layer names

See also NAME2LAY and LLRPT.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCMARKER

Display temporary vertex markers on visible plines.

Display temporary vertex markers on visible plines. To turn off the markers, run GCMARKER again or refresh the display with REDRAW or similar.

To use GCMARKER with other commands, create a GCMARKER button in a toolbox.

The marker size is set by SYSTEM. The colour is the cursor colour. Restart Terramodel to see the effect of any changes.

MKV also displays temporary markers, for a single pline or set. Markers turned on or off by MKV are toggled off or on by GCMARKER, and vice versa.

See also F8 and F8T which display point markers.

TML date  SourceGC
21/01/20     Geocomp Update or $200 60
 GCMATCH

Close gaps in contours.

Create new contour segments across the gaps. Then JOIN to create contiguous contours.

Use GCMATCH to match contours at sheet edges and cross gaps at labels.

Also match sets within a tolerance.

See also DTMMATCH which matches overlapping DTMs.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCMATIN

Import a list of road materials.

Add to or modify the materials in the Road Material Manager MATERIALS. The list is exported by GCMATOUT to transfer materials from one project to another.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCMATOUT

Export a list of road materials.

Export a list of materials from the Road Material Manager MATERIALS.

Each material has a name, shrink/swell factor, colour, and is classed as embankment, unsuitable or neither.

Import into another project using GCMATIN.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCMERGE

Merge multiple regions or DTMs.

Create a final layer by merging multiple regions from layers in a sequential layer list.

The objects on the Initial DTM layer are first copied to the Final DTM layer. Then, for each layer in a layer list in alphabetical order, objects in the Final DTM are clipped to boundaries on the listed layer then all the objects from the listed layer are copied into the Final DTM layer. Breaklines are also draped onto the Final DTM 2 mm inside the clipping boundaries. The process is repeated in alphabetical order for each layer in the layer list.

The clipping boundaries are at the "Clip Dist" outside the region boundaries. Make the Clip Dist greater than 3 mm to reduce potential crossing breakline problems.

If "Use DTM Edge" is specified, one region boundary is created for each DTM layer. Otherwise, every closed set with more than three segments is a region boundary.

GCMERGE can be used to merge multiple surveys or design components into big models. If you use GCMERGE to build an end-of-​month DTM, spell layer names so the alphabetical order is also the data order (for example, EOM 09 20090822A).

See also CLIP to clip objects at boundaries, GCMATCH to match contours, JOIN to join matched contours, DTMMATCH to match the elevations of two DTMs, GC33 to create the highest or lowest of two surfaces, GC33MULT to create the highest or lowest of multiple overlapping surfaces, MERGE to create a surface from two overlapping surfaces, GCCLIP to clip multiple surfaces from a single surface, GCSUBDTM to lower parts of surfaces to subgrade depths and GCCOPY to copy multiple objects into a single surface.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCMFI

Import multiple .PTS or CSV files.

Import multiple ASCII coordinate files in common formats.

  1. Specify whether the files is space-separated .PTS or comma-​separated .CSV.
  2. Select a data order from this list: E N Z, N E Z, P E N Z, P N E Z, P E N Z D, P N E Z D, E N Z D or N E Z D.
  3. Next
  4. Browse to select a file to import. If the file extension is not .PTS or .CSV you can select from All files.
  5. Click next again to import another file of the same format
  6. Click Cancel when you have completed importing all the files.

Lines with unexpected data, such as blank fields, letters or spaces, header lines and * for elevations are skipped.

Deep negative elevations are read as 2D.

See also GCPTSIN, IMPORT, GCCSVIN and so on.

TML dateGuide Source 
01/09/18 in-built help   Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCMULCON

Assign contour elevations to multiple 2D plines.

To use GCMULCON:

  1. Set the contour interval using CONTOURSET
  2. Copy or relayer the contour plines to a single layer
  3. Run GCMULCON
  4. Pick the layer with the contour plines
  5. Pick a starting contour height
  6. Pick two locations to define a line across multiple contour plines
  7. The command computes two possible elevations for the last contour, one for uphill and one for downhill.
  8. Apply one of the two end elevations to all the selected contour plines

GCMULCON correctly allows for the line to cross the same contour multiple times.

This is similar to LABELCONTOURS, except the elevations are assigned rather than read.

See also GCONECON, GCCONTXT, GCMATCH, GCRIVER and PLTO3D.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 258
 GCMULTDC

Export sets to a Trimble Roading DC file.

Create a roading .DC file of alignments for every selected 3D set.

See also GCDCOUT and IMPORT Roading DC files.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCMULTGD

Export multiple alignments to Geodimeter .rln files.

Create one .RLN file for each set containing horizontal and vertical alignment only.

Useful for uploading strings for set-out.

See also GCRLNOUT.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCMULXML

Export multiple alignments to a Leica 1200 LandXML file

Create an .xml file of alignments for every selected 3D set.

See also GCXMLOUT and IMPORT LandXML files.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCMULVOL

Compute cut volumes between pairs of DTM surfaces.

Compute cut volumes within boundaries for materials defined by pairs of DTM surfaces listed in a table.

The volumes are computed between each sequential pair of DTM or depth surfaces.

Bdys:
Select limiting boundaries.
Create CSV File
Create a .CSV file with fields for Start Surface, Finish Surface, Boundary Name, Material, Cut Volume, Cut Area, Fill Area, Boundary Area and Boundary Perimeter.
Exclude Dead Regions
Omit volumes within dead regions.
Top and Bottom
Enter pairs of top and bottom layers, and material names, limited by an existing DTM and a Design DTM.
Top Down
Enter of list of layers and materials starting from the top surface. The second and subseqent layers can be elevation surfaces or depth surfaces.
Define surfaces and materials
Enter a table of surfaces and materials.
Compute Volumes
Report cut volumes of the materials within each boundary between each pair of surfaces.
Cancel
Close without computing volumes.

The selected boundaries may represent mining "blocks".

See also

EARTHWORK, GC20, GCGRDVOL, GC46 and XVOLUMES
Other commands that compute multiple volumes
DEADSETS and SETSMOOTH
Commands that control dead regions

TML date  Source 
19/12/19     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCNAMEPT

Name points sequentially along a set.

Rename points along a set from a starting integer with optional prefix and suffix.

See also GCRENUM.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCNEARLN

Select all points near selected sets or plines.

Select all points within a specified tolerance of any set or pline on a layer for selection by Previous in another command.

Options

Set and Pline layer:
Select a layer of sets and plines
Points:
Select points to be considered
Tolerance:
Enter a maximum horizontal distance
Select only Points "Near Line" to selected Sets and Plines
Update the current selection set of objects to only the points within tolerance
Cancel
Cancel without updating the current Terramodel selection set

Usage

  1. Use GCNEARLN to select points
  2. Run a command to process the selected points, such as COLOUR, DELETE, or GCLPTS.
  3. Select records by Right-mouse Previous
  4. Complete the command

Nearline select control

Another way to select objects near a set or pline is to use the NearLine select control.

Click on the black dot then enter an offset and select a set or pline.

To select all the points in the selected set, use the default offset of 0.000.

To select any other objects, enter a larger positive offset even if they are right on the line. Objects are selected if they fall within the linear extent and the distance on either side.

Points, sets and plines must be entirely within the region. Text and blocks must have insertion points within the region.

The reference set or pline can be selected even when sets or lines are turned off on Search settings.

See also

GCOFLINE
Select points of selected sets

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Reports|​More...|​Select points of line Geocomp Update or $250 60
 GCNEDIN

Import Quantm grid data.

Import Grid (.NED) data created by Quantm for Trimble Alignment Planning.

GCESRIIN imports similar data files created by other applications.

See also GCTMAIN.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     POA  
 GCNMEAIN

Import NMEA log data.

Import NMEA strings tagged as $GPGGA´ from GPS receivers.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCNOELEV

Select objects with no elevations (2D).

Select all objects from selected points, sets, plines, text and blocks that have no elevation.

Use the Previous selection of the right-​mouse-​button to use these objects in another command.

Notes

Sets are also selected if all connected points have no elevations.

In other commands, objects with no elevation report elevations of *.

GC50 interpolates elevations from 3D points onto 2D points in the same set.

GC53 retains the elevation on the point but excludes the point from any DTM surface.

GC69 turns points with elevation = 0 into 2D points with elevation = *.

GCCONCHK interpolates elevations from 3D points with identical elevations onto 2D points in the same set.

GCLINPTS lists points with no easting or no northing.

DTMPTS interpolates elevations from a DTM onto 2D points.

Selecting 2D objects by elevation range

2D objects can also be selected using the right-​mouse-​button for any desired filter then for

  • inside an elevation range, by AND Elev and enter range
  • outside an elevation range, by AND NOT Elev and enter range.
  • with any elevation, by AND and Elev and enter range * to *
  • with no elevation by AND NOT Elev and enter ranges * to *

TML date MenuSourceGC
16/03/20   Reports|​More...|​Select 2D points Geocomp Update or $250 88
 GCOBJIN

Import data in Wavefront .OBJ format.

Import points and faces in Wavefront .OBJ format.

Import the vertices as points, and optionally the faces as well.

.OBJ files can 3D models of solids, point clouds, laser scans and so on.

OBJ files can contain other object types such as NURBS surfaces and splines. Simplify these into triangles using another application before running GCOBJIN.

See also GCOBJOUT.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCOBJOUT

Export DTM to Wavefront .OBJ format.

Import a DTM surface to Wavefront .OBJ format.

Select a DTM layer and any limiting boundary, select Settings and then specify the name and location of the output file.

.OBJ files can be used to display 3D models in applications such as CloudCompare and Microsoft Office 2016.

See also GCOBJIN.

TML date  SourceGC
27/09/17     Geocomp Update or $200 327
 GCOFFELV

Create plines or sets at a horizontal and vertical offset.

Pick the set, offset, elevation difference and side.

Pick the set, then
  • if you know the offset and the direction of the set, enter the values
  • if you know the offset, but not the direction, enter the offset and pick the side
  • if you don't know the offset or direction, pick a location to enter the offset and side

See also MULTIOFF, OFFSET​POINT, OFFELEV, GC99, OFFELEVM and SIDESLOPE.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 71
 GCOFLINE

Select all points in selected sets.

Select all points in selected sets for selection by Previous in another command.

Options

Sets:
Select sets
Include Arc Centre Points:
Include or exclud arc centre points
Select all Points "OfLine" selected Sets
Update the current selection set of objects to only the points in selected sets
Cancel
Cancel without updating the current Terramodel selection set

Usage

  1. Use GCOFLINE to select points in sets
  2. Run a command to process the selected points, such as COLOUR, DELETE, or GCLPTS.
  3. Select records by Right-mouse Previous
  4. Complete the command

OfLine select control

Another way to select points in a set is to use the OfLine select control.

When selecting objects in a command, select OfLine in the Right-mouse button menu.

Click on the black dot then select a set.

The reference set or pline can be selected even when sets are turned off on Search settings.

See also

GCONEARLN
Select points near selected sets or plines
SELECTPT
Select points not in sets.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Reports|​More...|​Select points of line Geocomp Update or $250 60
 GCONECON

Modify the elevation of one contour pline or set.

Modify the elevation of one contour pline or set at a time and increment up or down.

To use GCONECON

  1. Set the intended contour interval using CONTOURSET
  2. Copy or relayer the contour plines to a single layer (optional)
  3. Run GCONECON
  4. Enter a contour elevation
  5. Pick a pline or set
    • The elevation is modified
    • The colour is modified
    • The default elevation for the next contour is reset

Note

  • The "contour" can be a pline or set.
  • The colour of the completed contours is always modified to 3.
  • You can specify whether the elevation of the next contour to be selected is Up or Down by the contour interval or the Same.

See also

GCMULCON
Change multiple contours at once
GCCONTXT
Derive elevations from contour label text
PLTO3D
Change change the increment or colour of single contours as you go
GCRIVER
Interpolate elevations onto a digitized river valley

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 258
 GCOUT

Export data to Geocomp .PTS and .STR format.

Geocomp SDS data consists of at least two files with the same name and certain file extensions. The name must be a six-digit integer for Geocomp to read them.

Points
The points file (.PTS) contains the easting, northing, elevation and a standpoint number. The standpoint is 0 when exported from Terramodel. If point has no elevation in Terramodel, the elevation is -9999 in the PTS file, which means no elevation. The point number is derived from the line number.
Strings
The string file (.STR) contains the stringing for those points. The STR file is automatically created with the .PTS file of the same name. Each string has a description (see below) and an entity (see below). The string number is the line number in the string file.
Annotation
The annotation file (.ANT) contains text. This file is only created when text is selected and not exploded. EAT codes in text are replaced with the value. The following characters are substituted to suit Geocomp: ° by ^, " by ~ and new line by two spaces.
Description
The description is the first 20 characters of the name. The following characters are substituted to suit Geocomp: ° by ^, " by ~ and , by ;.
Entity
Geocomp data are divided into entities ranging from 1 to 999. To set the entities, chose from:
  • Match record name with short entity name
  • Match record name with moss code
  • Match record name with long entity name
  • Use group number of record
  • Decode the layer name from the first few characters (e.g. get entity 102 from layer 102_TOP.)

You can choose whether you want to explode blocks, linetypes or text.

The maximum number of points or strings that Geocomp 9.x can read is approximately 32,000. For Geocomp 10.08 and 10.1, the maximum is approximately 132,000.

Other Geocomp data types that can be exported include:

Cross sections CES See EXPORTGC and GC37
Contours CON See GCCONOUT
Digital Terrain Models DTM See GCDTMOUT
Horizontal alignments HAL See GCHALOUT
Vertical Alignments VER See GCVEROUT

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   File|​Misc. Export|​Geocomp PTS + STR Geocomp Update or $250 68
 GCPAD

Place building pads at nominated elevation within a lot.

Create a new set on the current layer, offset from the lot boundary by 0.005 with points at the specified elevation.

Select a free location anywhere inside a lot. Define a standard offset and either a Relative or Absolute Elevation. If an existing set is already offset, then only the Elevation Relative or Absolute values need to be applied.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 283
 GCPAN

Pan by keypad with North = 8.

Pan to the adjacent screen in the direction of the numeric keypad.

As shown in the following table, type in GCPAN, a space and a numeric keypad button indicating the direction.

 
NW = GCPAN 7
 N = GCPAN 8
NE = GCPAN 9
 W = GCPAN 4
 
 E = GCPAN 6
SW = GCPAN 1
 S = GCPAN 2
SE = GCPAN 3
If you want to use a mouse to move to a location, Shift while holding down the middle mouse wheel, or select PAN, RECENTER, GC34 or the VPAN toolbox in the Geocomp workspace.
TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     S 133
 GCPANEL

Create concrete roadway batter panel set out points.

Create points to set out concrete roadway panels given a panel alignment, start chainage, panel gap and hole edge distance.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $500  
 GCPAVSET

Create a CSV file of pavement depths in a format suitable for use in Paveset paving machines.

Specify a roadway, pavement depth, as-built layer, chainage range, offsets (in m) and export CSV file name.

The CSV file includes at the specified offsets, for every xline, the chainage and the difference in mm between design elevations interpolated from the road design and as-built elevations interpolated from the as-built DTM layer.

The optional report also shows the road name and description, layer depth, design elevation and as-built elevations.

If elevations cannot be interpolated from both surfaces at any offset, the output files are deleted with a warning.

You may need to use GC91 or similar to extend the surfaces beyond the as-built points to ensure that elevations can be interpolated. The xlines at the reported offsets should be at the as-built points. The specified chainage range should not exceed the as-built surface.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCPILE

Create pile points along an alignment.

Create points for each pile given alignments, chainage range, spacing, offsets, elevation and pile numbers.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 340
 GCPLFIN

Import a HP-GL or HP-GL/2 (.PLF, .HPG, .GL2, .PLT or .000) plot file into sheet view.

Import and edit plot files in HP-GL and HP-GL/2 format.

Import HP-GL or HP-GL/2 plot file from Geocomp or other software if you don't have the source data, or you just want to send the plot to a Windows printer which does not support HP-GL or HP-GL/2.

Supported plotter commands

Lines
PD, PU, PA, PR
Pen numbers
SP
End of page
PG, NR, Esc%01A
Arcs
AA
Text labels
LB, LO, SI, SL, DI
Page size
PS

Unsupported plotter commands

Polyline-encoding
PE
Color and pen mapping
PC, PW
and all the others
 

Notes

The supported commands make up most HP-GL and HP-GL/2 plot files

Plot files which have been polyline-encoded to reduce the file size, including those from Terramodel, are not supported.

Specify colour mapping during import.

Use the pen carousel to define the pen thickness and colour for each pen.

The plot is placed in the current layer in the sheet view in at the specified location.

Everything is imported as plines.

Dimensions are in sheet units.

The text labels use TMODELF font. You can change the font with TEXTMETRICS or FONTCHNG.

If a .PDF contains vector linework, you can extract these to HP-GL or .DXF with a third-party converter.

You can print to a PDF printer.

Notes for Geocomp users

  • To import Geocomp .PLT files, see GCPLTIN.
  • Use GCPLFIN rather than GCPLTIN, to closely approximate Geocomp plots.
  • Create a PLF from your PLT with SDS 94, RDP 494, or PU4.
  • Linework and symbols are converted to plines.
  • If the first character in the Geocomp .CMD file is *, text is retained as labels, otherwise text is exploded to plines.
  • While Geocomp can be configured to output PLF files to suit almost any vector plotter, GCPLFIN is optimised to import PLF files in HP-GL format.
  • If you specify the Geocomp pen number to equal the Terramodel colour number, and map the colour number to equal the Terramodel pen number, the selected Terramodel pen carousel will use the same pen numbers as the Geocomp plot.

To use Terramodel as a Windows plotter for Geocomp

  1. In Geocomp
    1. Copy GCPLFIN.CMD from C:\TMCUSTOM\​Geocomp to C:\GC10\CFG as OTHER.CMD
    2. Configure Geocomp to use OTHER plotter format
    3. Create a .PLT, for example using Geocomp command SDS 93
    4. "Send plotter instructions to disk file" using Geocomp command SDS 94 or PU 4.
  2. In Terramodel
    1. Configure a carousel
    2. Add a plotter configuration for your Windows plotter and carousel
    3. Create a new Terramodel project
    4. Open the Sheet view
    5. Set a suitable current layer
    6. Run GCPLFIN command
    7. Edit the plot if required.
    8. Plot at 1:1 scale to your Windows plotter (unless you want a different scale).
TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $125  
 GCPLTIN

Import Geocomp .PLT plot file into sheet view.

The Geocomp PLT file format is unique to Geocomp. The font, character height, character width, label origin, orientation and slant are set in the PLT using the entity definition in the Geocomp plot parameter file.

You can modify text by commands including TEXTMETRICS, TXTSCALE, TEXTALIGN, TEXTCASE, TEXTFIT, GCTXTFIT and ALIGNTXT.

Layer
Layers are determined by the entity of the record and the selected Geocomp entity file.
Font
The Geocomp font is substituted by the Terramodel font used in the text style nominated for that font. Some suggested equivalents:
Geocomp font Terramodel font
0 iso3098b, tmodelp
5 tc-romns
10 tmodelf, tc-mono
98 subdiv
99 iso3098b, tmodelp
Character height
The character height is derived directly from the character height in the PLT file text record.
Aspect ratio and text width.
The aspect ratio in Terramodel is the character width in the PLT file multiplied by the width factor divided by the character height in the Geocomp PLT file [Aspect ratio = width * factor / height]. The width of a text record is dependent on the Terramodel font, character width, width factor and characters used. Leave the width factor as 1.0 unless you want to consistently stretch or compress text from a certain font.
Colours
Select Terramodel colour numbers to substitute for Geocomp pen numbers 1 to 20. Use PLOTSET, PLOTTER​SET and CAROUSEL to control the colours and thicknesses on paper. Use PALETTE to control the display colours.
Linetype
Numbered Geocomp linetypes are substituted by linetypes of the same name, otherwise Solid is used. These linetypes can be loaded from GC9.LIN.
Symbols and blocks
Geocomp symbols are substituted with the closest equivalent Terramodel point symbol, unless "Use Terramodel blocks instead of point symbols" is enabled, in which case the matching Geocomp symbol block is used. For example, Geocomp symbol 68 (+) is labelled with point symbol 34 or block GCSYM068.
File format
To import HP-GL/2 files, see GCPLFIN. Use GCPLTIN rather than GCPLFIN, if you don't want to explode linetypes and text.
TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $125 FC D
 GCPRFEDT

Edit profile IPs graphically.

Edit an Intersection Point from a vertical alignment profile in the profile view.

Choose an editing mode such as Drag.

You can set maximum, minimum and increment for grades and whether to display.

See also CURVE to edit the curve details at an IP and RDVALEDIT to use design speed criteria.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Roads|​More...|​​Edit VAL Geocomp Update or $250 412
 GCPROFIL

Create profiles from multiple HALs and DTMs.

Create profiles along multiple HALs interpolated from multiple DTMs.

Operation

Hals:
Select horizontal alignment records or select no records to use the active alignment only.
DTM Layer List
Select DTM layers by a layer list or [None] to select visible layers.
Delete previous profiles
Delete any previously created plines in the profile view that refer to the selected HALs
Create Profiles
For each HAL, create profile plines in the Profile view, referenced to its HAL, interpolated from break points in each selected DTM layer, with the colours, linetypes, object names and layer names from the DTM layers.
Cancel
Cancel the command

The profiles are broken at the edges of the DTM and within dead areas.

If an alignment is active, GCPROFIL, by selecting no records and no layer list, creates profiles from the same DTMs as PROFILE does by breaks and * for DTM layer mask.

See also

PROFILE
Create profiles along one HAL in layers selected by a layer mask.
ROADPROF
Create profiles along roadjob surfaces.
GCQP
Display temporary profiles using a layer list.
ACTIVE
Define an active alignment as the default alignment.
LLISTSET
Define a layer list.
LAYERSET
Select visible layers.

TML date MenuSourceGC
02/05/19   DTM|​More..|​Profiles from layerlist Geocomp Update or $250 235
 GCPTAIN

Import data from TPSetout/​TPStakeout .PTA survey point file.

See also TPSETOUT for exporting to TPSetout and TPSTKOUT for exporting to TPStakeout.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCPTDIST

Check minimum distances between points on sets.

Report record number, layer name and point numbers for each segment.

Indicates with **** whether any segment is less than a specified maximum distance.

Report average distance between points for each set and overall.

Use GCPTSDIST to prove that you have taken sufficient observations in surveys of linear features such as roads.

Use GCDIVIDE to interpolate points at a minimum distance.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCPTSIN

Import points from an ASCII file.

Select from a range of coordinate survey formats.

Formats include:

  • Agtek (.ASC or .AGT)
  • Civilsoft (1 and 2) (.CVL)
  • Geopak (.TXT)
  • Lewis and Lewis (.LEW)
  • Lietz SDRMap (.ASC)
  • LisCAD (.TXT)
  • TDS (.TXT)
  • Wildsoft (.TXT)
  • Lat-Long (.TXT)
  • Geocomp Control (.CRD)
  • Geocomp Field coordinates .(FLD)
  • Trimble E N D (.PTS)
  • Carlson Raw (.RW5)
  • Trimble Recon LM80 (.TXT)
  • Desc East North Elevation (.PTS)
  • Leica (.CST)
  • ASCII GPS (.ASC)
  • Leica GSI16 (.GSI)
  • Geodimeter Area (.ARE or .AGA)
  • LandXML (.XML)
  • Trimble RTX (.XML)

See also PTSIN which imports some of these formats, IMPORT which imports many formats using scripts, GCCSVIN which imports a commonly used .CSV format, LIDARIN and LIDARGRD which filter as they import, CVDIMPT and CVD5IMPT which import Civilcad ASCII and GC12DIN which imports 12D ASCII. GCPTSOUT and PTSOUT export ASCII points.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   File|​Misc. Import|​Points
Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCPTSOUT

Output points to an ASCII file.

Select from a range of coordinate survey point formats for uploading into survey instruments for setout.

Formats include

  • CivilSoft 1 and 2
  • Geopak
  • Lewis and Lewis
  • Lietz SDRMap
  • LisCAD
  • TDS ASCII
  • Wildsoft
  • Leica with 8 character descriptions .GRE
  • Leica with 8 character descriptions .GSI
  • Leica with 16 character descriptions .GSI
  • Sokkia SDR2x
  • Sokkia SDR33
  • Geodimeter Area .ARE
  • Nikon 700 series Upload
  • Geocomp Field .FLD
  • Geocomp Control Point .CRD
  • Trimble $PTNL,PJK .TXT
  • Leica 1200 LandXML
  • Trimble Recon LM80

The Job name field is currently only used with Sokkia formats.

Some of the formats have been modified slightly compared with the similar PTSOUT, such as adopting Easting/Northing order.

Points with undefined (*) easting or northing, are not exported. Points with undefined elevation (2D points), may be exported depending on the format. With some formats, you can choose whether to export the point number or the point name.

See also EXPORT and PTS2TEXT.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   File|​Misc. Import/Export|​Points Export Geocomp Update or $200 188
 GCPTSTXT

Change elevation or name of points on layer by the nearest selected text within tolerance.

Change the elevations or names of points imported from 2D CAD drawings where the points are labelled with text objects.

Select the text objects, a layer of points and a tolerance.

Select whether to replace all elevations or names, or just those which don't already have elevations or names.

Select whether to delete text objects for those points which have been changed.

Select whether to replace the point elevations or the point names.

Select whether the tolerance is to be measured from the points to the insertion points of the text or to the centroids of the text boxes.

If you don't have points, use TEXT2PNT to create points at the insertion point of the text.

See also DTMPTS and GCCONTXT.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCPURGE

Purge all unused blocks.

Purge all blocks which are not used in the project.

To delete unused blocks nested in other unused blocks, select Repeat.

If you import a DWG with blocks, the block definitions remain in the project even if you delete the block objects. Purging these blocks can reduce the project file size substantially, especially if each block has a unique name.

GCPURGE is faster than the Purge in BLOCK. For hundreds of blocks this can mean seconds rather than hours.

If you have missing external blocks, run DELBLKS first.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18   Draw|​Block|​Purge all unused Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCQA

Report chainage, offset and elevation difference to DTM.

Compare points in a survey against a design DTM.

The report shows the chainage, offset, design DTM elevation (=rl), point elevation (=fl) and elevation difference (dz) for each selected point.

You have the option to ignore points outside the DTM extent and specify a stripping depth.

The chainage and offset is computed relative to the active alignment.

See also GC30.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCQP

Interactive quick profile or cross section.

Display profiles (or cross sections) interpolated from DTM layers between two locations.

Pick layers, a section display method, locations in a view (typically, Plan view) then move the mouse to display profiles in the XSect view between those locations.

Options

DTM | Layer List
Select a DTM layer or a DTM layer list.
Line
Select From and To locations to display profiles along a line between them.
Shift
Select From and To locations to display profiles along a line and then move the To location to display profiles parallel to that line.
Rotate
Select About location and then move the To location to display profiles along the line between the two.
Alignment
If an active alignment has been set, select a From location by chainage and offset to display profiles at the chainage of the To location along a line from the left offset to the right offset.

No objects are created. The view scale and length of profiles are automatically adjusted.

Profiles are only shown where the DTMs are valid and not in a dead region.

See also QPROFILE.

TML date  Source 
01/08/2019     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCQV

Move a HAL or VAL IP and recompute roadway volume.

Move a selected point of intersection along a horizontal or vertical alignment to a new location and calculate the resulting cut and fill roadway quantities.

QV Options

ROAD
Terramodel will display the current road in this control. If you have more than one road in your project file, open the drop-down list box to select a different road.
ALIGN
Select the HAL whose alignment you want to modify from this locate control.
LOC
Enter the IP you want to relocate in this point control. Selecting the HAL along a curve or tangent causes Terramodel to locate the closest point of intersection to the location you picked.
CALC
This command button calculates the new cut and fill quantities from the modified HAL, the original vertical alignment, and the stored templates and displays it in the Message scroll.
Tips
  • You must have used the ROADS module to store a road job, shapes, templates, horizontal alignment and vertical alignment in your Terramodel project file before executing GCQV.
  • Execute Undo after each IP modification to return the alignment to its previous form.
  • GCQV is an improved version of QV.
TML dateGuide Source 
01/09/18 RG 1244   Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCREDRAW

gcredraw toolbar button

Redraw all views and reset view scale for point labels.

Redraw all view modes.

If the current view is the Plan view, the plan view scale is also set so that point labels are a consistent, small but legible height.

GCREDRAW is similar to the VIEWSCAL Default for Pt Labels button followed by REDRAW.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   View|​Redraw for labels
Toolbar button
Geocomp Update or $200 132
 GCRENUM

Renumber points in set order.

Sequentially renumber points in selected sets, starting at the highest point number in the project plus one.

See also RENUM, RENUMBER, REVERSE and GCNAMEPT.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 129
 GCREPORT

Start a new report in P3Pad editor.

Start a new report in P3Pad editor by clearing any current report or opening a new P3Pad report window.

Any new report created by a Terramodel command, will replace any currently open report. To keep a report, select File from the P3Pad menu then Save As...

Editor features include Text formatting, Print Preview, Find and Replace, Insert Date and Time and Embed or Insert objects such as images.

The P3Pad report editor can be used to edit Terramodel reports, or write new text. The reports can be Saved and Opened in Text or Rich Text (RTF) formats. Use TXT format to reuse in commands such as TEXT or TXTIN.

Changes to page setup, typeface or font size for new reports take effect only after you close the report editor.

To configure the page setup and fonts during the current Terramodel session only:
  1. Run any Terramodel command that generates a P3Pad report
  2. Use File​|​Page setup menu to configure the paper size, orientation and margins
  3. Use Format​|​Font menu to configure the font style, size and colour
  4. Use Format​|​Paragraph menu to configure the paragraph indentation
  5. Use Format​|​Tabs menu to configure the tabs
  6. Close the P3Pad report
  7. Generate a new report.

To reset the configuration to defaults:

  1. Exit Terramodel
  2. Start a new session.

To configure the default font name, size (in points), left margin (in inches) and top margin (in inches) :

  1. Take a copy of C:\TMCUSTOM\​GEOCOMP\​P3PAD_REPORT​_TMODWIN.INI
  2. Edit that file with a text editor
  3. Run EDITINI
    1. Show Old INI file ;
    2. Browse to select and open that file ;
    3. Select [Report] ;
    4. Import selected sections ;
    5. OK ;
    6. Close

To save all format and content changes to the document:

  • Save As.. Rich Text Format (.RTF).

To save content without formatting:

  • Save As... Text document (.TXT)

To configure the printer used by P3Pad reports:

  • Use Windows Settings or Control panel to configure the default Windows printer.

To preview the report, including margins:

  • Use File|Print preview or configure the default printer as a PDF printer.

To configure the name and address in the headings:

To configure a project description in the headings:

  • Use PROJINFO.
  • The description is not shown if the project name and path are too long.

To line up columns:

  • Use a font such as Courier New or Courier Prime Code which is fixed width (and displays m² correctly).

To use a different editor such as WORDPAD or NOTEPAD:

  • Copy and paste or save and open.

To find and replace characters in a report:

To import or display the report:

  • Use TXTIN to import as lines of text, TEXT to display the file as text or CSV2TAB to import a table as text and plines.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 201
 GCREVIEW

Move or copy objects from one view to another.

The only attribute that is changed is the View mode. The coordinates are retained.

The objects are removed from the original view, unless you do not "Delete Old".

Examples

Review a point from Plan to XSect
A point in the PLAN View with Easting X = 1000, Northing Y = 2000 and Elevation Z = 100 when reviewed to the XSECT view becomes Offset X = 1000, Elevation Y = 2000 and Chainage Z = 100.
Import profile
If you have an ASCII file of a profile in the format "Chainage,Elevation" you could IMPORT into the PLAN view then review to the PROFILE view.
Rotate a copy in 3D
Review objects from the Plan view to View 8, without deleting them. Then use GC3DROT to rotate the copied objects.

See also REVIEW which always deletes the objects from the original view.

TML date Guide Menu Source  
01/09/18 RG 1246 Modify|​​ReView Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCRIVER

Interpolate elevations onto a digitised river.

Create a point wherever a 2D "river" pline crosses a pline representing a contour, with the elevation of the contour pline then create a set along the path of the river pline and interpolate elevations along the set.

For best results, remove flat triangles in LINKSET before forming the terrain model.

See also GC50, GCONECON, GCMULCON, GCCONTXT and ELVPLINE.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 185
 GCRLNOUT

Create Geodimeter Roadline3D Files from sets

Cross sections are created by intersecting sets at Xlines along the alignment.

The HAL, VAL, "roadway templates", and "side templates" are exported to an .RLN file suitable for uploading to Geodimeter Program 39 using Geodimeter Software Tools or the Upload Script.

Selecting "Use names" includes names in the .RLN file. Select "Limit 12 Pts" if uploading, as only 12 points can be uploaded for each side template. Alternatively, if the file is to be imported using the Import script for editing as a Terramodel Roadway, the limit is not required.

The details of each computed point are reported.

See also P39 and See also GCMULTGD.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCRUNWAY

Report runway conformance

Report the conformance at defined offsets of a runway DTM relative to a roadway of the design.

TML date  Source 
25/08/20     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCSCALE

Multiply X, Y or Z by scale factors.

Multiply X (Easting), Y (Northing) or Z (Elevation) of selected objects by scale factors, relative to a location.

Values entered into each field are stored as project variables.

Carefully select all relevant objects only. Consider whether to include points in sets, radius points, objects that have been turned off and invisible and locked layers. Consider selecting objects by Crossing, View or Layers.

To multiply the coordinates, enter values for X, Y or Z Scale.

To avoid scaling in a direction, enter * for X, Y or Z Scale.

To scale relative to a location, enter X, Y or Z coordinates.

To scale without moving the origin, enter 0 for the X, Y or Z.

To scale text, blocks and dynaviews around their insertion points, leave the X,Y Location blank.

To scale from mm to m, use 0.001 in Scales X, Y and Z; from feet to metres, use 0.3048 in Scales X, Y and Z; from southing to northing, use -1 in Scale Y; from depth to height, use -1 in Scale Z.

To multiply or divide EAT text without scaling the subjects, use EAT code math.

See also

SCALE
Scale in X or Y
GC56
Scale or swap around X or Y axis by -1
SCLBLKS
Scale blocks
TXTSCALE
Scales text
MASSDIAG and SCALEGRID
Scale mass haul diagrams
RTSCALE
Scale, rotate and move
SCLPLOTB
Scale plotboxes
MEASUNIT
Report and scale project units
GC07
Scale in X and Y by Helmert transformation
GC38
Scale differently in X and Y by Affine transformation
GC3DADJ
Scale in X, Y and Z by Conformal transformation
MIRROR
Mirror around an axis

TML date  SourceGC
20/12/19     Geocomp Update or $200 123
 GCSCPOT

Report elevation of a DTM at the cursor.

Report the easting, northing and DTM elevation at the cursor.

The elevation is interpolated from the selected DTM surface.

The chainage and offset from any active alignment is also reported.

See also

SPOT
Report the elevation of a DTM at a location
ROADSPOT
Report the elevation of a roadjob at a location
GCDTMDIF
Report elevation differences at the cursor
COORDS
Configure the coordinate scroll
STAORCHN
Display Sta or Ch
ACTIVE
Configure active alignment

TML date  Source 
17/01/20     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCSCANIN

Import Lidar Scan data and filter by many variables.

Import large Lidar scan data sets and filter by ranges of colour, intensity, vertical angle, boundary and chainage.

For example, filter scans from a moving vehicle to distinguish buildings, cables and pavements.

Elevations can be corrected by N-values on a layer defined by AUSGEOID.

Filtered points can be saved to the project, or to an external file, or both.

TML date  Source 
29/08/19     POA  
 GCSDROUT

Export alignment in Sokkia SDR format.

Use a Roadjob, HAL/VAL or intersect 3D sets.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCSKIPMN

Replace skip ranges by CSV or pline boxes.

Replace skip ranges from skips defined in a CSV file or by pline boxes.

Use GCSKIPMN when you have too many skip ranges to manage by manual editing with SKIP.

Add or replace skip ranges from a file which you have previously created in a spreadsheet application.

Create pline boxes at the current skip ranges in both the plan and profile views, centred on the road alignment. After editing these boxes for position and range and updating the alignments, Create Skips from selected boxes.

Options

Roadjob
Select the roadjob
Sort
Sort the skip ranges in chainage order
Report
Report the skip ranges
Import
Import skip ranges from a CSV file with start chainage, end chainage, skip name
Box Width
Specify a width in m for pline box
Create boxes
Create pline boxes at skips
Create skips
Create skips at selected pline boxes
TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCSPELL

Check spelling of text.

Check spelling of words in selected text objects against a dictionary.

Select from Options and Dictionaries.

TML dateGuide Source 
01/09/18 built-in   $200  
 GCSTLOUT

Export DTMs to surface models in .STL format

Export a layer list of DTM surfaces to a stereolithography .STL format file.

Each DTM layer is written as a separate SOLID. Large coordinates are left-truncated to within fit the ranges expected by most .STL software.

.STL files can be used to view triangles in 3D or export to 3D printers in many applications such as SketchUp, Cloud Compare, 3D Viewer and Print 3D.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCSTRATA

Create points at strata from table of materials and depths.

Create multiple points with the same coordinates as selected points, with layer names and elevations derived from a CSV file.

To use GCSTRATA

  1. Relayer the points according zones of typical strata as suggested by a geologist.
  2. Create a CSV file with rows for new layers and columns of depths for each zone.
  3. Run GCSTRATA.
  4. Select the points.
  5. Choose whether to compute elevations or depths.
  6. Select the CSV file.
  7. Choose whether to delete the original points.
  8. Create a new point with a new elevation on the layer in the left column for each point with layer name matching the first row.

For example, using this table, and selecting depths, for each point on layer B4, create a point on each of the six listed layers with the same easting and northing. The elevation of the new point on layer 1_topsoil is 0.1, on layer 2_alluvium is 0.3, etc.


Layer,        A,    B1,    B2,   B3,    B4,



1_topsoil,   0.2,  0.2,   0.2,   0.2,  0.1,



2_alluvium,  0.2,  0.2,   0.2,   2.5,  0.3,



3_colluvium, 0.2,  0.2,   0.2,   2.5,  0.5,



4_RS,        4.8,  2.3,   3.7,   4.7,  1.5,



5_XW,       12.8,  3.6,  12.8,   9.1,  4.1,



6_MW,       13.6,   20,  22.7,  20.1,   28,

If the points are to be used for depth surfaces, select depths so the Z value is derived from the table. If for elevation surfaces, the value in the table is subtracted from the elevation of the original point.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCSTYLE

Modify text by text style.

Modify the metrics of selected text to match a text style and update the default text style.

Select text objects and a text style.

See also

GCTSTYLE
Change the default text style by command line or alias
TEXTSTYLE
Select the default text style from a list
STYLESET
Manage the text styles
TEXTMETRICS
Modify selected text properties
MATCH and MATCHOBJ
Match the properties of a text object

TML date  SourceGC
02/08/19     Geocomp Update or $250 190
 GCSUBDTM

Create a DTM of a subgrade by depth boundaries.

Create a DTM surface for use as a Subgrade below selected boundaries representing depths of material.

The Final DTM is the underside of many subgrade layers each defined by a boundary and a depth below the previous subgrade.

Create a layer list of layers containing closed pline boundaries. The boundaries are processed in alphabetical layer name order.

GCSUBDTM copies all points and sets from the Initial DTM onto a new DTM, drapes the first boundary on the first layer name onto the new DTM, clips the new DTM inside the boundary, creates a new set inside the boundary at a horizontal offset from the set (=Clip Dist) and vertical offset from the DTM (=elevation of pline) and then copies that part of the initial DTM that is outside the boundary to the new DTM layer.

The process is repeated for all closed plines with elevations on the next layer in the specified layer list. The layers are worked through in alphabetical order until the Final DTM is created.

The elevations on the plines are depths (thicknesses) relative to the previous new DTM. A positive elevation value results in a new surface below the previous surface. Negative elevations build the surface up.

This Final DTM could then be a sliced DTM in ROADWAY, a termination surface in SIDESLOPE, a surface for volumes or exported to machine control.

Optionally, compute volumes or keep intermediate DTMs.

See also ROADDTM, GCCLIP and GCSUBGDE.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCSUBGDE

Create plines to transition to subgrade templates.

Create plines to transition to subgrade templates.

See also CHEKROAD, GCDTMGDE and GCSUBDTM.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCSZAOUT

Export Quantm special zones .SZA

Export .SZA files for Quantm for Trimble Alignment Planning. You can specify zones that require special treatment such as cost and crossing requirements.

Select zones by closed plines or sets (or blocks containing closed plines or sets) to export to the special_zones.sza file.

The name of the pline or set (or subject of the block) defines the zone description. The layer name defines the zone label.

Export linear features using GCLFAOUT.

Export terrain data using GCTMAOUT.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     POA  
 GCTABLE

Create a coordinate table.

Label points with EAT text arranged in a table framed by plines.

The columns show Point number, Easting, Northing, Elevation, Name, Chainage, Offset or blank.

Points
Select the points.
Origin
Enter the location of the upper left corner of the table.

Settings

For each of seven possible columns, specify a property to list. Highlight a row in the list box to make the column specifications editable.

Title
Enter up to 61 characters for the title of the table.
Use Title Box
Include a title at the top of the coordinate table.
Width
Enter the number of characters to define the width of each column. Enter 0 to omit a column.
Heading
Enter the heading for the top of each column.
Prefix
Enter a prefix of nil to 13 characters in length. To further widen a column, increase column width instead adding leading spaces to prefix.
Value
Select from Pt# (point number), North (y-value), East (x-value) or Elev (elevation), Name (point name), Chainage (station), Offset (horizontal offset) or None (a blank column).
Lines/Page
Enter the maximum number of rows for each page of the table. New pages are created for rows that exceed that number. The horizontal separation between tables is 1 sheet unit at the current view scale.
Layer
Select the layer on which to create the table text and plines.
Text style
Select text style with a fixed-width font such as tmodelf so the characters line up vertically. The point numbers and coordinates are right-justified. The names are left-justified. The headings are centred.
Colour
Select the colour of the EAT text. The headings and plines are created in the line colour of the current layer. HAL for CH and Offsets
Select a horizontal alignment record
Sort points based on chainage
Sort points by chainage or by point number in alphabetical order starting with integers.

Notes

The text labels show the current properties of the points, not the properties at time the table was created.

If the selected points contain field values that exceed the specified column width, you are prompted to increase the column width or return to Settings.

The numbers of decimal places are controlled by the precision settings in UNITSSET at the time the table was created. If you change precision, recreate the table.

The offsets are displayed in the offset EAT code format labelling settings in UNITSSET. This format controls the included characters, the left and right indicators and the zero offset notation.

See also
LLTABLE
Create a coordinate table with latitude and longitude
LABELTABLE
Create a table of dimensions of short set segments
CSV2TAB
Create a table from text in a *.CSV file

TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
01/09/2018 RG 1226 Draft|​Label coord. tables S 188, 92
 GCTADPOL

Label batter with block showing direction of slope.

Place user-​definabled "tadpole" blocks between two sets representing the top and toe of a batter.

Each block is placed at the specified spacing from from the set joining points of higher elevation to the lower set. The blocks can therefore swap direction at transitions between cut and fill. It doesn't matter which you pick as "Top" and "Toe" unless you are drafting in 2D.

Blocks are scaled to just less than the horizontal distance between the sets. Blocks which exceed the specified maximum length are not placed. Tadpole blocks one unit long are placed with a small gap at the lower end.

Typical tadpole blocks are GCTADPOL, TADPOLE TYPE 1 and TADPOLE TYPE 2.

To create your own tadpole block, draw plines so that the location for the higher batter string is at 0,0 and the lower is at 0,1. Then use BLOCK to Create the block from the plines with the origin at 0,0.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCTMAIN

Import Quantm terrain data.

Use GCTMAIN to verify your .TMA file before submitting it to Trimble Alignment Planning System.

Use MOSSIN to transfer proposed alignments in GENIO format from Quantm to Terramodel.

See GCTMAOUT.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     POA  
 GCTMAOUT

Export Quantm terrain data.

Create a .TMA file for submission to the Trimble Alignment Planning System for route optimization. The TMA file is a grid of points interpolated from a DTM within a boundary.

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

Check your .TMA file by reimporting it using GCTMAIN.

Export Special Zones using GCSZAOUT.

Export Linear Features using GCLFAOUT.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     POA  
 GCTFWIN

Locate TIFF world files (.TFW)

Create text at the north-west corner of TIFF world files showing the file name.

Enter height and width of one of the the images in pixels, then browse to select one of more TFW files.

.TFW files are used by IMAGE manager to locate geo-referenced .TIF files.

The width and height in pixels in an image can be read by File Explorer | Properties | Details or by any photo editor.

TML date  Source 
25/03/20     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCTRACE

Define a region by tracing inside multiple selected plines, sets or text.

Report the area or show the extent of the region enclosed within multiple boundaries around a location by creating a new set, pline or hatching on the current layer in the current view.

You can

  • Continue to select locations Inside to define more regions from the same selected boundaries.
  • Have the different hatch or boundary on different colours or layers, by running GCTRACE twice or modifying later.
  • Name the new boundary set or pline with an incrementing integer "lot" number.
  • Configure the maximum Snap Distance. Smaller gaps are crossed automatically.
  • Remove Duplicate points from the new set.
  • Select a hatch pattern from a list and a scale.
  • Select None, if you don't want to hatch.
  • Report to P3Pad the new boundary record number and name (if selected), Basic Area, Alternative Area and accumulated Alt Area written with units and rounding according to the MEASUNIT and UNITSSET settings. These are always reported to message scroll.

If your pline boundaries are splines, select only a few at a time and check the view resolution interval in DISPLAYSET.

The direction of the boundary set or plines is derived from one of the selected objects.

Closed regions which are inside the selected objects but outside the selected location are excluded as "islands".

Typical applications for GCTRACE include reporting areas, hatching regions and creating closed figures from messy linework. GCTRACE combines the features of TRACEBDY which creates internal boundaries with a fixed maximum snap distance and HATCHENC which reports areas and creates hatching within internal and external boundaries.

To trace outside selected plines or sets, define an island by including an even larger boundary and select a location between them.

See also LOTJOIN to create multiple sets from multiple centres, AUTOSET to create a clockwise set from points, QSET to quickly key in a lot boundary and HATCHPAT and HATCHUSER to hatch closed figures, LABELSETS to label sets with lot names, GCLABLOT to label sets with text, GC80 to compares lot areas and DTMEDGE and GCDTMBDY to create DTM edges.

Some examples:

Define a boundary inside complex data

  1. Select a new current layer
  2. Run GCTRACE
  3. Specify Set or Pline for the new boundary
  4. Specify a snap dist to suit the job
  5. Select all the sets and plines that limit the boundaries
  6. Click the Inside field
  7. Choose a region by clicking a location
  8. The boundary is created.

Quickly hatch many regions

  1. Select a new current layer
  2. Run GCTRACE
  3. Specify a suitable hatch and scale
  4. Specify None for the new boundary
  5. Select all the sets, plines and text that you want to limit the boundaries
  6. Click the Inside field
  7. Choose a region by clicking a location
  8. The region is hatched
  9. Change colour or hatch pattern or current layer, if you want
  10. Click another location
  11. Another region is hatched.

Compute many areas

  1. Select a new current layer
  2. Run GCTRACE
  3. Specify a suitable hatch and scale
  4. Specify None for the new boundary
  5. Specify Report
  6. Select all the sets, plines and text that you want to limit the boundaries
  7. Click the Inside field
  8. Choose a region by clicking a location
  9. The basic and alternative areas are written to the message scroll and the area is reported to P3Pad. The hatching shows which areas you have computed
  10. Change colour or hatch pattern or current layer
  11. Click another location
  12. Another region is hatched and the areas are accumulated in message scroll and P3Pad.

Create closed subdivision lots

  1. Specify a new current layer
  2. Run GCTRACE
  3. Specify a snap dist of say 0.005m
  4. Specify to create sets
  5. Specify an initial lot number
  6. Optionally, specify report
  7. Optionally, specify a hatch pattern and a scale so you can see where you have been
  8. Select all the sets and plines, but no text, to limit the lots
  9. Click inside the first lot
  10. The closed set for the first lot is created with the lot number for the set name
  11. The next lot number increments by 1
  12. Click inside the second lot, etc., until all lots are defined
  13. If you hatched, delete or relayer the hatching

Create all subdivision lots from lot numbers

  1. Specify a new current layer
  2. Run LOTJOIN
  3. Select all the sets and plines
  4. Select lot number text

Determine an area excluding voids

  1. Specify a new current layer
  2. Run GCTRACE
  3. Specify a snap dist to suit the job
  4. Specify to create a report and plines
  5. Specify a hatch and scale
  6. Select all the sets or plines limiting the region making sure that the internal boundaries do not intersect the external boundaries
  7. Click a location inside the external boundaries and outside the internal boundaries
  8. The hatching confirms the region for which the area is reported
  9. You can delete the hatching and use the plines in other commands such as HATCH, SHADEISO or GCGRNGRD.

Hatch except where there is text

  1. Show text boxes using Quick text in Display Settings
  2. Specify a new current layer
  3. Run GCTRACE
  4. Specify a hatch and scale
  5. Select all the sets and plines and text
  6. Click a location inside the boundary lines and outside the text boxes

Hatch closed contours or isopachs

  1. In CONTOURSET, don't spline, clip lines or label
  2. Generate CONTOUR plines
  3. Run GCTRACE
  4. Specify a hatch and scale
  5. Select the contours by layers
  6. Click locations inside the closed boundaries.

Replace sets or plines with closed clockwise sets

  1. Use GC35 to create points at centroids
  2. Use LABPT to create text at centroid points
  3. Specify a new current layer
  4. Run LOTJOIN
  5. Select all the sets and plines
  6. Select lot number text
  7. If you want anticlockwise sets, REVERSE afterwards.
  8. If you want to keep the original directions, use GCTRACE instead
  9. DELETE the original objects later, if you want.

TML date MenuSource 
01/09/18   Draw|​Set|​Trace enclosing boundary
Draw|​Hatch|​Within multiple lines
Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCTSTYLE

Set default text style using the command line.

Set the default text style using the command line and an argument. For example, type GCTSTYLE "seg label" to change the default text style to seg label.

Use in combination with a toolbox, alias or macro.

See also TEXTSTYLE, GCSTYLE and STYLESET.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 190
 GCTTAOUT

Export a set to Trimble .tta and .ttx.

For newer Trimble instruments, replaced by EXPORT Trimble Roading 3D (DC) export using DC file, GCDCOUT or GCMULTDC.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCTURN

Create the swept path of a vehicle.

Create plines showing the swept path of a vehicle.

Place vehicle outlines at intervals along the path.

Store dimensions and layers for a single vehicle or a prime-mover and one or two trailers.

For simple cases, GCTURN can be used in place of AutoTURN and AutoTrack.

Watch a short demonstration (.wmv).

TML dateGuide Source 
01/09/18 GCTURN vehicle dimensions   $350.00  
 GCTXTFIT

Adjust text aspect to right alignment.

Adjust the aspect ratio of selected text so the selected text aligns to a selected location.

For each selected text object with left or centre horizontal justification, modify the aspect so that the right hand edge of the text box lines up vertically with the X coordinate of the selected location.

Text is not modified where the difference in aspect is more than 25% or the text has left horizontal justification.

See also TEXTFIT and TEXTWRAP.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCTXTOUT

Export or report selected text.

Export selected text records to a file or P3Pad report.

Operation

Text
Select text objects
File:
Select the name and location of a new .CSV file
Sort on Northing
Sort on record number or by descending northing for columns of text.
Report
Report text to P3Pad with record numbers.
Recs for Heading
Enter the number of text records to be written to the heading lines.
Recs per Line
Enter the number of text records to be written to each line, after the heading
OK
Export to CSV or report or both
Cancel
Cancel command

Notes

EAT codes are exploded to normal text.

Multi-line text objects are written to single lines separated by | characters.

To convert text to coordinates, select text by crossing with no heading lines, enter the number of columns for Recs per Line, and then export to .CSV. This assumes the selected text has been created row by row, left to right. Then read the coordinates into a spreadsheet or other application or into Plan view using IMPORT ASCII points.

To export tables of text to a .CSV, specify the number of records for a heading and the number of columns. To import such a table, use CSV2TAB.

Replaces TXTOUT.

See also LISTTEXT and TEXT.

TML date MenuSource 
21/08/19   File|​Misc .Export|​Text
File|​Misc. Import/Export|​Text Export
Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCUMC3D

Export files to Leica UMC 3D Machine Control.

Export the centreline, coordinate, profile and triangle files required for any equipment fitted with current versions of Leica Geosystems Universal Machine Control 3D.

Define an alignment using a road job, then select plines or sets to export as a .GEO file or a selected DTM to export as an .XML.

Click on Create UMC 3D Files to be prompted for Arc-to-Chord tolerances and the .LIN output file name. Then click OK to create the files and load them directly onto Leica Machine Control.

Selection

Road job
Select a roadjob to export the main alignment as centreline (.LIN) and profile (.PRF) files.
GEO (3D Lines):
Select points, sets or plines to create a .GEO file.
DTM:
Specify a DTM layer to export as a LandXML file. You can limit the DTM to a boundary.

Export settings

Arc to Chord
Wherever the plines or sets contain arcs or spirals, additional coordinates are written to the .LIN, PRF, or .GEO files using the specified arc-to-chord tolerances.
Generate Report
You can report to P3Pad every record written to the LIN, PRF, GEO or XML files.
Export Filename:
Specify the location and name of the .LIN file. Any PRF, .GEO or .XML file names will match.
Create Files
Write .LIN and .PRF files then any .GEO or .XML files

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

Alternative ways to create .XML

The best way to export strings for any Leica iCON Machine Control is to use ROADRUN, selecting Group, to generate an .XML file. To export a DTM, create a different .XML file with DTM2XML. Do not combine strings and DTM into a single XML file.

See also GCGEOIN, POWERGDE and GRADESMT.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18   Geocomp Update or $250 
 GCUNJOIN

Break sets and plines into segments.

This is different to EXPLODE, which explodes only sets and plines that have complex linetypes.

GCUNJOIN does not break plines containing spirals or vertical curves.

DISJOIN is an alias for GCUNJOIN.

See also JOIN.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCVALDEL

Delete selected registered VALs.

Delete registered Vertical alignments from the VAL Manager while retaining the pline records.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCVALOFF

Create a pline VAL from a registered vertical alignment with offsets.

A pline is created along a registered alignment defined by offsets in the vertical alignment manager.

The vertical IPs are created at the chainage interval in the Settings.

A report is displayed showing each chainage, vertical offset and elevation of each IP.

See also GCHALOFF.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 450+412
 GCVERIN

Import Geocomp vertical alignment (.VER).

The .VER file is imported as a pline in the profile view.

Use GCIMPORT if you want the SDS data with the VER.

See also GCLNGIN, GCHALIN and GCVEROUT.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Roads|​More...|​​Import Geocomp VER Geocomp Update or $250 77,252
 GCVEROUT

Export Geocomp vertical alignment .VER (.VER).

Export a pline in the profile view to a vertical alignment.

You can export the straights and parabolic vertical curves.

For circular curves, only the IP is converted.

See also GCVERIN and GCHALOUT.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 412
 GCWRAP

Change tunnel wrap status of a layer.

Change wrap status of a DTM layer to "wrapped" or "unwrapped", without transforming the points.

Use this when you have "unwrapped" data on a "wrapped" layer, or vice versa.

See TUNNELDTM.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCXLINES

Create or replace xlines with chainage labels on a roadway.

Create or replace xlines along a selected roadway on the nominated layer.

The chainages and offsets are computed from, and the xlines refer to, the main horizontal alignment of the selected roadjob.

Specify the left and right offsets for extents of the new xlines. These offsets also limit the extents of roadways in commands such as ROADSPOT and GC42AB.

Specify an interval for the new xlines. If you don't want xlines at intervals, specify a very large interval.

The xlines are deleted and created on the nominated layer. The default xlines layer is that of the first xline on the alignment. If there are no xlines, the default layer is from the GCXLINES:LAYER project variable set by PROJECTV. If the variable has not been set, the default is the current layer.

The chainage format and precision is controlled by UNITSSET.

The message scroll reports the main alignment name and description for the current road and default xlines layer.

Options

  • Create xlines at Hal and Val points
  • Create xlines at templates
  • Create xlines at start and end of skips but not across skips
  • Create xlines at points near alignment on design surface
  • Limit xlines to a chainage range
  • Keep current xlines
  • Keep current xline labels
  • Interpolate the extents of new xlines from current xlines
  • Label xlines with chainages perpendicular to the alignment
  • Prefix xline labels with text such as Ch, Sta or KP
  • Prefix xline labels with the road name

See also

RDXLINES
Create xlines at single points, chainages or plines
GC39
Recreate xlines after moving intersection points
XLINES
Create xlines without a roadway
GC27
Label xlines
XLINPTS
Create xlines at points near alignment

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Roads|​More...|​​Xlines from road Geocomp Update or $250 84
 GCXMLIN

Import LandXML points within boundaries.

Import points from a LandXML file that fall within a closed pline or within an offset from an open pline.

For XML files with lines longer than 255 characters, import points with BIGXMLIN, or use GCFIXXML to insert new lines and try GCXMLIN again.

See also the LandXML IMPORT script, which can also import surfaces and alignments, and GCPTSIN, which controls point numbers.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCXMLOUT

Export roadjob in LandXML format.

Export roadjob strings at xlines in LandXML cross section format.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCXTIE

Compute a set at the intersection of slopes from two segments.

Select segments from two sets, corresponding slopes and beginning and ending locations.

For example, locate a channel in a median by battering from the carriage ways.

See also GC64.

TML date  Source 
12/08/19     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GDMDIR

List Geodimeter directory and delete files.

List files on a Geodimeter data collector with option to delete.

After requesting the Geodimeter instrument type and some communication parameters, open the Instrument Directory dialog box, which displays the Area and Job files that are currently stored in the Geodimeter instrument or data collector.

You can use GDMDIR to:

  • Determine the current contents of the collector before going into the field.
  • Delete files on the collector using the computer
  • Confirm serial communication before configuring import or export scripts.

To download Geodimeter survey files see, IMPORT. To edit, see GFE and RDE.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM File|​Geodimeter|​Geodimeter directory/​delete files...
File|​Geodimeter directory/​delete files...
Geocap|​|Transfer|​Instrument directory/​delete files...
S GST
 GEOMINQ

Measure bearing and distance.

Report bearing and slope distance between two locations to message scroll.

In Points mode, select two points Points or two locations. In Segment mode, select a set segment.

For two locations, or a pline segment, the show the bearing and horizontal distance.

For two points or a straight set segment, the show the point numbers, bearing, horizontal distance, and zenith angle if the points have elevations.

For an set arc segment, show the point numbers, radius, chord length, arc length, tangent, EX and delta angle.

See also DISTANCE which shows the horizontal distance project units and sheet units at the current view scale, with the option to accumulate.

See also GC29 which shows point numbers, bearing, horizontal distance, dE, dN, vertical angle, slope distance and grade.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Reports|​Geometry inquiry
Inquire|​Brg/Dist
S 17
 GEOMRPTS

Report measured values from objects.

Select objects and print a report of selected objects.

TML date Guide Menu Source GC
01/09/18 RG 429 Reports|​Geometry/​Stakeout
Inquire|​Brg/Dist reports
S 17,41
 GEOSYS

Establish the GPS geodetic system.

Use this to define your local grid before importing Trimble GPS Real-Time Kinetic (RTK) data to compute with RDE.

Establish a geodetic system for the project to which any imported GPS (WGS84-based) data will be converted. This geodetic system cannot be modified after a point is created.

Do not perform geodetic corrections (i.e. "Flat Earth")
Ignore any data that requires geodetic corrections and do not import it. If an imported DC file contains an embedded coordinate system, that coordinate system becomes the current geodetic system.
Use local projection
Use Easting and Northing settings in the RDE\Computation Settings and Tolerances\General Settings tab to create a non-standard geodetic system.
Use current geodetic system
Use the geodetic system currently displayed in the following list box as the "local" geodetic system. When GPS (WGS84-based) data are imported, coordinates are converted to the geodetic system set by this command. To import a DC file with an embedded coordinate system, the two coordinate systems must be the same. The WGS84-based data are not stored; however the geodetic system is stored so that the original data can be re-created if necessary.
Select new geodetic system
Set a different project geodetic system and geoid model before any points are created within the project. Choose from
  • Coordinate System and Zone
  • Calibrated Site
  • Default projection (Transverse Mercator) (or enter your own projection parameters)

GEOSYS uses the Trimble Coordinate System Manager (CSM).

COORDCON and GCCOORD use a different coordinate system library unrelated to GEOSYS.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Settings|​GPS Geodetic System... S  
 GFE

Geodimeter File Editor.

Edit Geodimeter format files including .RAW, .JOB, .UDS, .ARE, .PTS and .PCO.

GFE functions have mostly been replaced by IMPORT, EXPORT and RDE.

Geodimeter data files are unitless so you must independently determine the data units and check that the GFE Settings correspond. For example, by default GFE assumes that the angle units are Grads; you may want to change the setting to DMS. The Easting|Northing column headings may appear to be the wrong way around.

GFE is installed with Terramodel. No security key is required. Geodimeter .JOB files open in GFE by default. GFE fails to open .JOB files in other formats such as Trimble Journal .JOB files.

GFE Help is available from the Help menu in GFE, from the Index submenu in the Help menu and by the HELPGFE command.

See also Geodimeter Software Tools (GST) and GDMDIR.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09 HELPGFE File|​Geodimeter|​Geodimeter File Editor...
File|​Geodimeter File Editor...
S GST
 GM1

Limit the slope of triangles.

Raise the lowest point in affected triangles in a DTM surface by 1 mm until no triangle has a slope greater than the nominated value.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GNCSTEXP

Export GeoNav details.

Export GeoNav Coast, Runline, Centreline, Vessel, Waypoint, Antenna, Station, Clip, Design or Grid database data.

TML   MenuSource  
01/09/18   HDMS|​Export|​GeoNav detail HDMS  
 GNCSTIMP

Import GeoNav details.

Import GeoNav Coast, Runline, Centreline, Vessel, Waypoint, Antenna, Station, Clip, Design, Grid database or Dredge log data.

TML   MenuSource  
01/09/18   HDMS|​Import|​GeoNav detail HDMS  
 GOLFAREA

Report areas of golf course fairways, greens, bunkers and tees.

Report, sum and label the area of each selected closed set or pline representing a fairway, green, bunker or tee.

The areas of all greens, bunkers and tees with centroids inside a fairway are subtracted from the area of that fairway.

The fairways are selected by record. The greens, bunkers and tees are selected by layer.

See also GCTRACE.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GPXOUT

Export points to Topografix/Mapsource GPS eXchange Format (.GPX).

Export selected points to a .GPX file optimised for reading into Garmin Mapsource software.

Use Settings to choose the coordinate system from which your coordinates will be converted to latitude and longitude on WGS84.

The waypoint name is derived from either the Terramodel point number or name.

See also GCGPXIN and GARMINOU.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GRADESMT

Export files to Leica GradeSmart 3D Machine Control for graders and dozers.

Export the centreline, plan, layer and triangle files required for dozers or graders fitted with Leica Geosystems GradeSmart 3D Machine Control.

GRADESMT writes coordinates computed along selected strings to 0.0001m precision using specified tolerances in Carlson .CL, .PLN and .LAY file formats. A DTM can also be exported as a Leica TPStakeout TSB file.

Road job
The exported centreline (.CL) file contains coordinates at chainages along the main alignment of the selected roadjob. Each record in the .CL file is in the format 0,​chainage,​L,​northing,​easting. Create one roadjob for each centreline.
2D (PLN):
Select sets or plines to export as a .PLN file for export as a Plan or background map. Each selected set or pline is written to the .PLN as a POLYLINE with the colour number and name followed by coordinates as easting,​northing. If you want hatching, blocks or text in the Plan, explode them to plines first.
3D (LAY):
Select sets joining 3D points to export as a .LAY file for export as a Layer of strings. Each selected set is written to the .LAY as a POLYLINE with the colour number and name followed by coordinates as easting,​northing,​elevation.
DTM:
Specify a DTM layer to be exported to the Leica TPStakeout ASCII triangle file (.TSA) and binary triangle file (.TSB).
Settings
Chainage Range
Limit the exported coordinates to within a chainage range. The initial default values are derived from the selected roadjob. If you change the alignment, reset the start and end chainages.
Triangles per grid (BinTri):
As this integer value for triangle density increases, the grid squares increase in size and reduce in number. This value is a trade-off between the precision and file size of the TSB file. The initial default value is 20.
Arc to Chord
Wherever the strings contain arcs, the additional coordinates are written to the .CL, .PLN and .LAY files using the specified arc-to-chord tolerances, in another trade-off between precision and file size. The same tolerances are also approximated along spirals, combining curves and splines.
Generate Report
If enabled, every record written to the CL, PLN, LAY and TSA files is also reported to P3Pad.
Export Filename:
Specify the location and name of the .CL file, and thus the .PLN, LAY, .TSA and .TSB files.
Create Files
Write a .CL file, then PLN and LAY files if objects were selected. Then, if the DTM layer is not 0, and you confirm that you want to Export triangles, the TSA file is exported and a separate command window opens to run the Leica program BinTri.Exe which converts the TSA file into a TSB. You will need to press any key when prompted, twice.

If you have multiple alignments, repeat with a different roadjob. These files can be combined into a .PRJ project file using Leica GradeSmart software.

To verify elevations at locations in the .TSB, use Leica TPStakeout software on a Leica survey instrument.

See also TPSTKOUT, POWERGDE, GCUMC3D and ROADRUN.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $500  
 GRIDELEV

Generate a grid of points, interpolate elevations from a DTM and generate a report.

Generate a grid of points
The Grid Layout dialog allows for control of the number of rows and columns, the start location, the rotation and the layer on which the grid points are generated. The grid starts in the top left hand corner, goes across then down. If any points already exist on this layer you will be prompted for the option of deleting any existing points. Thus it is important to have each set of grid points on a unique layer.
Interpolate elevations onto the grid points
This function calls DTMPTS command. Select the DTM layer from which to interpolate the heights and the grid points (by the layer on which you created the grid points).
M.A.D. Report
Generate a report in Mile-a-Day format.
The report is displayed in the Terramodel P3Pad report viewer and saved as an .ELE file.
L.F. Report
Generate a report in Landform format.
The report is displayed in the Terramodel P3Pad report viewer and saved as a .TXT file.
C.A.G Report
Generate a report for Comput-A-Grade irrigation software by Merrilees.
The report is displayed in the Terramodel P3Pad report viewer and saved as an .FRL file.

For all reports, the heading is derived from layer name of the grid points. The report lists only the number of points specified when creating the grid earlier. If you have manually inserted or removed points then this report will be wrong.

See also GCGRDVOL and IRBAY.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 221
 GRIDEXPT

Interpolate an ASCII X,Y,Z file from a DTM and grid.

Interpolate an ASCII X,Y,Z file from a DTM, a bounding pline and an interval.

Specify a bounding box, a DTM layer and a grid interval.

Click Export to be prompted for a file name.

X, Y, Z coordinates are written directly to the file based on the interval and boundary.

Round the coordinates to the nominated interval or increment from the lower left corner of the boundary. The boundary "box" does not have to be rectangular.

Very large grids can be created, limited by disk space not project file size. The generic X,Y,Z file format can be read into many applications including Spreadsheets.

See also

SETSMOOTH
Define any dead regions by to be excluded from the output
GCMFI
Import PTS files
GCGENGRD
Create grid points in the project
DTMPTS
Interpolate elevations from 2D points onto any DTM
DTMGRID
Create grid points in the project and interpolate elevations from a DTM

TML date  SourceGC
27/08/20     Geocomp Update or $250 221+244+188
 GRIDMAKE

Create a grid of points or plines using grid settings.

Create a grid of points or plines then label them like this:

  1. Use SNAPSET to set the grid origin and bearing
  2. Use GRIDSET to define the grid spacing and type
  3. Use GRIDSET to turn the grid on
  4. Use BOX to create a limiting pline
  5. Use GRIDMAKE to create the points or plines
  6. Use GCLABGRD or LABELGRID to label the grid.

See also DTMGRID and GCGENGRD.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Pline|​Grid S 265
 GRIDPLAN

Transform from grid to ground or ground to grid.

Transform all objects in Plan view from "ground" coordinates to a "grid" coordinates, or vice versa, by applying a combined scale factor and rotation around a point.

Operation

Convert to Grid
Convert objects from the current Ground coordinates to Grid coordinates
Convert to Ground
Convert objects from the current Grid coordinates to Ground coordinates
Settings
Origin Point
Select point number and layer for the origin
Lock layer
Lock the origin point layer to prevent accidental deletion or transformation
Currently in Grid or Currently in Ground
Display whether the current coordinates are in Grid or Ground
Enable switch
If the coordinates are incorrectly displayed as Ground, when they are in fact in grid, or vice versa, enable the coordinates to be switched.
Combined Scale Factor:
Enter a combined scale factor
Compute CSF
Compute the combined scale factor at the origin point
Rotation
Enter a rotation
Apply rotation
Rotate the objects, or not
OK
Transform all objects in Plan view, that are not on a locked layer, from Grid to Ground or Ground to Grid, and update the status

See also

GC07
Helmert transformation
RTSCALE
Rotate, translate and scale
GCSCALE
Scale by X, Y and Z.

TML date  SourceGC
23/08/19     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GRIDSET

Configure current grid settings.

Configure the colour, type, spacing and visibility of a display grid for each view mode.

The Grid on tick box, makes the grid visible unless the interval is too close to display or no grid line passes though the display.

Set the Horizontal and Vertical distance between grid intervals, in ground units, for the horizontal and vertical directions. For the Plan, Sheet, and Xsect view modes, the vertical control is dimmed and the vertical spacing is set equal to the horizontal spacing.

Set the grid type to Dots, Ticks or Lines. When the Ticks option is selected, you can enter the horizontal and vertical length of the tick marks in sheet units.

To change the gridset mode at the command line or in a toolbox, for

Gridset modeEnter at command line
NoneGridset 0
OnGridset 1
On/OffGridset -1

To create a grid of points or plines, use GRIDMAKE or GCGENGRD.

To snap to the grid or rotate the grid, use SNAPSET.

To restrict the direction of cursor movement, use CURSOR.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Settings|​Grid settings... S 93
 GRIDVOL

Compute the cut and fill volume in selected grid cells.

Report volumes and create text showing the values in each region. Select regions defined by closed plines of any shape or create rectangular grid cells.

Generate grid
Create regular grid cells as a series of abutting rectangular plines.
Single
Compute the cut & fill volume for a single selected region.
Multiple
Compute the cut & fill volumes for selected grid cells. Report result for the individual cells and the total cut & fill volumes.

Place the generated cells and subcells on different layers, so they can be selected or displayed easily.

If you label the cells with text, use vertical justification in the styles to prevent overwriting.

Regions can be any shape, including stockpile boundaries.

See also GCGRDVOL which also controls boundaries, reports, text layers, style and hatching and can create regions between xlines.

Command date MenuSourceGC
29/10/08   Reports|​More...|​Grid volumes S 222
 GRP2NAME

Change the name of each object to match its group.

This can be helpful where you want to use groups with a function that uses names. For example, where you want to export to a format that includes a name or description field.

You may then want to use DESC to change numeric names to alphanumeric.

See also REGROUP which changes the group to match the layer and LAY2NAME which changes the name of each object to match its layer.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 76
 GSIDTMOU

Export a layer in Leica DTM Stakeout GSI format.

The DTM can be uploaded into Leica Total Stations that include DTM stakeout software, such as TC1100.

Choose between 8-character and 16-character GSI format. Coordinate shift values are set where the coordinates are 1000000 or above.

DTM Layer Name, JobID and export file name.

Export all triangles in the DTM or only DTM triangles entirely inside a pline boundary.

Depending on the software installed on the Leica total station, you may be able to also export triangles by TPSTKOUT or EXPORT LandXML or DXF 3DFaces.

See also GCGSIOUT and EXPORT LandXML for alignments and GCPTSOUT for points.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GSSWP

Geocomp Systems Support web page.

Type GSSWP at the command line to launch your default web browser and start a new window for the Geocomp Systems Support web page.

See also RUN and TMLLIST.

 GST

Geodimeter Software Tools.

Geodimeter Software Tools (or GST) 2.02, GEOTOOL and GEOMODEL were supplied by Geodimeter or SpectraPrecision as a stand-alone applications for communication with Geodimeter survey instruments and contouring.

Their functions are largely replaced by Trimble Data Transfer Utility and Terramodel functions GFE, GDMDIR, RDE, IMPORT and EXPORT.

GST is bundled with the Terramodel 10.61K installation .ISO. If you install GST to C:\​Trimble\​GST\​Geotool.exe, you can execute from a Terramodel command prompt using the GST ALIAS. Check that the Settings are correct for your conventions. The default angle units are Grads; you may want to change them to DMS.

This table explains which functions run for these applications and Trimble and Spectra​Precision Sentinel keys (dongles).

Application launched Modules on key Application actually run Communication with Geodimeter Contouring
GST Key is not checked GST Yes No
GEOTOOL Key is not found GEOTOOL Yes No
GEOTOOL Key has GeoTool module GEOMODEL Yes Yes
GEOTOOL Key has no GeoTool module None No No
Terramodel Key is not found Terramodel Field data Yes Quick contours
Terramodel Key has Contour module Terramodel with Contour Yes Pline contours
Terramodel Key has any module other than Contour Terramodel with other module Yes Quick contours
Data Transfer Utility Key is not checked Data Transfer Utility Yes No

Application date Guide   Source GC
16/05/00 in-built help   ISO
Spectra​Precision
MM 3

 HALDATA

Create a horizontal alignment by entering curves into a table.

Create or edit a horizontal alignment through entry of intersection point coordinates and curve data into a table.

The curve types are

POB
Point Of Beginning: Enter the starting coordinates of the alignment.
ARC
A circular curve: Enter the IP and radius.
COMBINING
A combining curve with spiral | arc | spiral | arc | spiral. Enter the IP, two radii, three clothoid spiral lengths and a "% delta 1st angle". In the "% delta first arc" either enter a positive value for the portion of the total delta angle at the IP as divided between the two arcs, or enter negative value for the length of the first arc.
POINT
Intersection point with no curve: Enter the IP coordinates only.
SPIRAL
A spiral curve with spiral | arc | spiral: Enter IP, radius and two clothoid spiral lengths.

See also CURVE.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Alignments|​HAL data entry S  
 HALMANAGER

Manage registered horizontal alignments.

Register horizontal alignments, chainage equations and horizontal offsets.

Horizontal alignments are used to designate the path that the design will follow, and to control the way in which features are transitioned.

HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT
Change the record number of the alignment associated with the HAL. You can register the same set or pline with more than one HAL.
Name
Change the name of the registered alignment selected in the list of HALs below.
HAL
Enter or pick the set or pline to be registered as the HAL.
NEW ALIGNMENT
Register a horizontal alignment by specifying a name and a pline record.
Chainage (Station) equations
Add, delete or edit any back and ahead chainages and whether the chainages increase or decrease in value from that location.
ALIGNMENT OFFSETS
Add, delete or edit offset alignments defined by chainages and horizontal offsets relative to a pline alignment.
DELETE
Delete the highlighted HAL from the list.

See also GCACTIVE, VALMANAGER, HORIZALIGN and GCHALOFF.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Alignments|​HAL manager
Tunnels|​Alignments|​HAL manager
Channel|​Alignments|​HAL manager
S  
 HALVALRP

Report horizontal and vertical alignments.

At xlines along selected HAL, design VAL and Existing VAL, report chainage, easting, northing, design elevation, existing elevation, elevation difference and grade.

You can consider skips from the current road job.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
 HALXYZ

Create set by three offsets from a set.

Select a set and a chainage, perpendicular and elevation offsets to create a new set.

Set
Select a set
Chainage Offset
Enter the chainage offset along the set.
Perpendicular Offset
Enter the horizontal offset perpendicular to the set.
Elev Diff:
Enter the vertical offset
OK
Create new points and a set connecting those points with straight segments.
Cancel
Cancel the command without creating any points or sets

HALXYZ is an alias for HAL_XYZ.TML.

TML date  Source 
21/02/19     Geocomp Update or $250  
 HAREAB

Basin area.

Calculate the area of a set or polyline and store it as an attribute of a basin.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro|​Basin|​basin area S  
 HATCH

Hatch regions enclosed by boundaries.

Create a single block from hatching plines within selected boundary lines.

Select Pattern to hatch with a predefined hatch pattern using HATCHPAT.

Select User to hatch at a user-​defined angle and spacing using HATCHUSER.

Command dateGuideMenuSource277
12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Hatch closed lines S 277
 HATCHENC

Hatch the region enclosed by selected objects.

Create a single block by hatching within a single region defined by multiple boundary lines.

Select a predefined hatch pattern, a scale and a location inside the boundary lines.

The block boundary is defined by tracing inside selected boundaries.

The hatch patterns can be selected from a list controlled by HATCHPAT.

The hatch scale is stored as a project variable.

HATCHENC has been replaced by GCTRACE which can also create plines or sets, control the maximum snap distance and report Basic and Alt areas.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Draw|​Hatch|​Within multiple lines
Draw|​Hatch enclosed area
Geocomp Update or $250 277
 HATCHPAT

hatch pattern toolbar

Hatch regions within closed boundaries with a pre-defined hatch pattern.

Create internal blocks by hatching within each selected closed boundary using a predefined hatch pattern at a specified scale.

Hatch regions

To hatch regions, select a hatch pattern from the drop-down list, closed boundary records, and a scale.

The initial scale is derived from the plan view scale and the sheet units.

Each button in the Hatch toolbox, included in the Geocomp.ws workspace, selects a corresponding hatch pattern from the default hatch pattern file.

TMODEL.PAT

The listed patterns are read from the first TMODEL.PAT found on the Terramodel Search Path. The default pattern is the first in the file. The TMODEL.PAT is commonly in C:\TMCUSTOM, C:\TMCUSTOM\​GEOCOMP, C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Terramodel\​Geocomp or C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared\​Locale\​English\. Use TSP to check the TSP and EDITINI to edit.

Load a hatch pattern

If the hatch pattern you want is not on the list, select the Load button from the list dialog and select a pattern from another hatch pattern file. Any hatched blocks you create are stored in the project, but the patterns are not. To create more blocks with the same pattern in a future session, load the pattern again or add the pattern to TMODEL.PAT so you can simpley select it.

If you have different .PAT files with the same name, check that TSP finds the right file before you load.

Edit hatch patterns

The hatch patterns are defined in a common AutoCAD-compatable format. Add or edit your own hatch patterns or import patterns from other sources. Manually edit with a text editor or graphically edit with HatchKit for Terramodel from Cadro.

Scrambled hatches

Patterns defined to few significant figures can scramble at large coordinates. Use patterns in TMODEL.PAT supplied with Geocomp Update K or later or use HatchKit to recompile hatches at high precision.

See also

GCTRACE
Hatch inside a boundary defined by multiple objects
HATCHUSER
Hatch with a user-defined pattern
HATCH
Select HATCHPAT or HATCHUSER

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09 UG Draw|​Hatch|​With selected pattern
Draw|​Hatch closed lines
Hatch Toolbox
S 277
 HATCHUSER

Hatch regions enclosed by boundaries with a user-​defined hatch pattern.

Create a single block from hatching plines within selected boundary lines using entered hatch angle, space and scale.

The spacing and scale are in sheet units.

Command dateGuideMenuSource278
12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Hatch|​With user-​defined pattern
Draw|​Hatch closed lines|​User
S 278
 HAULROAD

Design a haul road.

Select a ROADJOB with registered HALs, check the settings and then press Enter. The result is a road fully designed in horizontal, including fitting of curves, templates, transitions, super­elevation and widening; if the same design criteria apply througout, design a long road in minutes!

Keep any of your existing curves, superelevation, widening, xlines, and existing profile, or update them.

The settings include design speed, default cross slope, max super, pavement and shoulder width and widening ratios. You can redesign or recreate curves, superelevations, widening, xlines, profiles and RoadDTM and recompute volumes.

Edit Hal and Edit Val buttons allow you to edit your alignments with GCHALEDT and GCVALEDT.

HAULROAD requires training and a project based on prototype_haulroad.pro.

See also the simpler FORESTRD.

TML date  Source 
Custom     POA  
 HBLIST

List basin hydrograph.

List summary information and hydrographs for a specified basin.

TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro\​Basin\​List basin summary info S  
 HCCN

Calculate curve number.

Calculate a weighted coefficient or curve number given the area and C/CN value.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro|​Basin|​Curve Number /C factor S  
 HCOVER

Hydrology cover sheet.

Create a cover sheet containing company and project information.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro|​Create cover sheet... S  
 HDEFS

Hydrology defaults.

Hydrology default settings.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro|​Hydro defaults... S  
 HDMS

HDMS toolbox

Hydrographic Data Management System.

A suite of tools for processing hydrographic survey data.

HDMS processes hydrographic survey data from in various ASCII formats including GeoNav from Geocomp Systems, HYDROpro from Trimble, and Reson.

Depth labels can be applied, formatted and weeded.

Depths, points and contours can be coloured by depth ranges.

HDMS selects the HDMS commands HDMSDLAB, HDMSRLAB, HDMSTLAB, HDMSEVT, HDMSDW, HDMSBIN and HDMSABT.

Use MENUCFG to select a menu file such as GEOCOMP+HDMS.M or GEOCOMP+HDMS_US.M.

See also:

  • Terramodel HDMS
  • GCCOORD: Coordinate System Transformation within Terramodel
  • GCLLGRID: Create a labelled pline grid of latitudes and longitude
  • LLTABLE: Create table of coordinates including latitudes and longitudes
  • GeoCalc: Coordinate System Transformation - stand alone
  • Nav Notes: Related notes and links
  • GCGeocode: Select, transform or filter millions of points
TML dateGuideMenuSource 
01/08/19 hdms.pdf HDMS
Toolbar button
Toolbox
HDMS  
 HDMSABT

About HDMS.

About HDMS.

TML date Guide Menu Source 
01/09/18 hdms.pdf HDMS|​About HDMS HDMS  
 HDMSBIN

HDMS data binning.

Thin hydrographic point data into square bins.

TML date Guide Menu Source 
01/09/18 hdms.pdf HDMS|​Bin|​Create a depth bin HDMS  
 HDMSCOL

Colour by depth.

Colour objects by depths specified in a Depth Color and Layer style (.DCL) file.

TML date Guide Menu Source 
01/09/18 hdms.pdf HDMS|​Colour by depth|​Colour objects
HDMS|​Color by depth|​Color objects
HDMS  
 HDMSCON

Contour by depth.

Create contours at depths specified in a Depth Color and Layer style (.DCL) file.

TML date Guide Menu Source 
01/09/18 hdms.pdf HDMS|​Colour by depth|​Create contours
HDMS|​Color by depth|​Create contours
HDMS  
 HDMSCSL

Compare sounding lines.

Compare sounding lines.

TML date Guide Menu Source 
01/09/18 hdms.pdf HDMS|​Compare sounding lines HDMS  
 HDMS​DCLBLK

Create a grid of blocks coloured by depth.

Add blocks to depth points and colour the blocks using a DCL file.

To run the example:

  1. Copy C:\​TMCUSTOM\​GEOCOMP\​Docs\​HDMSDCLBLK TEST.PRO, a sample Terramodel project file containing a 5 x 5m grid of depths, to a data folder.
  2. Start Terramodel.
  3. Open the project file hdmsdclblk test.pro.
  4. If you haven't got a HDMS menu, use MENUCFG to select the menu file GEOCOMP+HDMS.M or GEOCOMP+HDMS_US.M.
  5. From the HDMS Menu, select Colour by depth then Colour blocks.
  6. Select some Depth Records.
  7. Select Layer on which to place the Blocks.
  8. Click [Next>>].
  9. Select HDMS​DCLBLK-1x1 from the list (If HDMS​DCLBLK-1x1 is not on the list, Browse to select it from C:\​TMCUSTOM\​Geocomp\.)
  10. Tick Map colour so each block is displayed with the block colour (otherwise you will display the colour of the objects in the block.)
  11. In the Scale box, enter 5.0 or use the mouse to measure some other grid size. (The depths in HDMSDCLBLK TEST.PRO are in a 5 x 5m grid, so a scale option of 5.0 will scale the 1 x 1m block to 5 x 5m.)
  12. In the Rotation box, leave the value as 0.0 degrees. (If you depth grid is rotated, enter the rotation in degrees from north.)
  13. Leave the Create new Layer for each Level option un-ticked. (Selected if separate layers for each DCL level are required for export.)
  14. Click [Browse...] to select the example file Outer Hbr Blue.DCL from C:\TMCUSTOM​\Geocomp.
  15. Click [Edit] to view or edit this DCL file.
  16. Click [Ok] to create a grid of blocks coloured according to the depth of the points. (To colour the points, use HDMSCOL.)

Previously created blocks are not removed; another block is added each time you run HDMS​DCLBLK.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
01/09/18 in-built help HDMS|​Colour by depth|​Colour blocks
HDMS|​Color by depth|​Color blocks
Geocomp Update or $250  
 HDMSDLAB

Label depths.

Label hydrographic depths.

TML date Guide Menu Source 
01/09/18 hdms.pdf HDMS|​Label|​Label depths HDMS  
 HDMSDW

Label and clash depths.

Label and clash hydrographic depths.

Label hydrographic depths then weed out clashing labels by proximity and depth priority.

TML date Guide Menu Source 
01/09/18 hdms.pdf HDMS|​Label|​Label and clash depths HDMS  
 HDMSEVT

Label survey events.

Label hydrographic survey events.

TML date Guide Menu Source 
01/09/18 hdms.pdf HDMS|​Label|​Label events HDMS  
 HDMSNWSE

Smooth a DTM surface.

Smooth a DTM surface using Nearest Neighbour Weighted Surface Estimation.

TML date Guide Menu Source 
01/09/18 hdms.pdf HDMS|​Bin|​NN weighted surface estimation HDMS  
 HDMSRLAB

Label hydrographic runlines.

Label hydrographic runlines.

TML date Guide Menu Source 
01/09/18 hdms.pdf HDMS|​Label|​Label runlines HDMS  
 HDMSRTR

Round, truncate or restore depths.

Round, truncate or restore hydrographic depths.

TML date Guide Menu Source 
01/09/18 hdms.pdf HDMS|​Round, truncate or restore depths HDMS  
 HDMSTC

Adjust sounding time.

Adjust the time of selected hydrographic depth records.

TML date Guide Menu Source 
01/09/18 hdms.pdf HDMS|​Adjust sounding time HDMS  
 HDMSTLAB

Label trackplots.

label hydrographic trackplots.

TML date Guide Menu Source 
01/09/18 hdms.pdf HDMS|​Label|​Label trackplots HDMS  
 HDRAW

Draw hydrographs.

Draw hydrographs in the sheet view.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro|​Hydrographs|​Draw hydrograph S  
 HECIN

Import a HEC-RAS Geometry file.

Import a HEC-RAS Geometry file.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 ADD 9.7 347 File|​Misc. Import/​Export|​HEC-RAS Import S  
 HECOUTGC

Export a HEC-RAS Geometry file.

Export a HEC-RAS Geometry file.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
01/09/18 ADD 9.7 347 File|​Misc. Import/​Export|​HEC-RAS Export Geocomp Update or $250  
 HELP​GEO​CALC

Help for GeoCalc.

GeoCalc 4.20 is a stand-alone geodetic coordinate transformation application by Geocomp Systems for 32-bit Windows which has been superseded by GCCOORD and COORDCON.

GeoCalc help files on Windows 10 or later cannot be opened within GeoCalc but can be opened in Terramodel by HELPGEOCALC command installed with Geocomp Update L and later.

Application date MenuSource 
23/11/99   In GeoCalc: Help|Index Geocomp Update  
 HELPGFE

Help for Geodimeter file editor.

Open the Index Tab for Geodimeter File Editor.

See GFE and DOCUMENTS.

Help date MenuSource 
29/10/08   Help|​Index + search|​Geodimeter file editor
File|​Geodimeter|​Geodimeter file editor...|​Help|​Help topics
File|​Geodimeter file editor...|​Help|​Help topics
Geocomp Update  
 HELPIE

Help for Import-Export.

Open the Index Tab for Import-Export Help.

See also CONTENTS, IMPORT, EXPORT, IMPORTSMGR, EXPORTSMGR and DOCUMENTS.

Help date MenuSource 
12/03/09   Help|​Index|​Import + Export Geocomp Update  
 HELPRDE

Help for Raw data editor.

Open the Index Tab for Raw data editor Help.

See also CONTENTS, RDE and DOCUMENTS

Help date MenuSource 
29/10/08   Help|​Index|​Raw data editor
Edit|​Raw Data Editor|​Help|​Contents
Geocomp Update  
 HELPTM

Help for Terramodel.

Open the Index Tab for Terramodel Help.

See also CONTENTS and DOCUMENTS.

Help date MenuSource 
12/03/09   Help|​Index|​Terramodel
Help|​Contents
Geocomp Update  
 HELP​TOOLBOX

Help for Toolbox.

Open the Index Tab for Toolbox Help.

See TOOLBOX.

Help date MenuSource 
29/10/08   Help|​Index|​Toolbox
Toolbox|​-|​Help...
Geocomp Update  
 HELP​TV

Help for Visualizer.

Open the Index Tabs for Visualizer Help.

See TV and CONTENTS.

Help date MenuSource 
22\03\02   In Terramodel: Help|​Index|​Visualizer Complete
In Visualizer: Help|​Contents
Geocomp Update  
 HELP​TVL

Help for 3D Visualizer.

Open the Index Tabs for Visualizer Help.

See TVL.

Help date MenuSource 
22\03/02   Help|​Index|3D​Visualiser
Help|​Index}3D​Visualizer
DTM|3D Visualiser|​Help|​Contents
DTM|3D Visualizer|​Help|​Contents
Tunnels|3D Visualiser|​Help|​Contents
Tunnels|3D Visualizer|​Help|​Contents
Geocomp Update  
 HGEN

Generate basin hydrographs.

Generate hydrographs for a specified basin point.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro|​Hydrographs|​Generate hydrograph S  
 HGNIMP

Import GeoNav .GPT depths.

Import GeoNav .GPT depths.

TML Guide MenuSource 
01/09/18 hdms.pdf HDMS|​Import|​GeoNav GPT depths HDMS  
 HIDE

Hide or reveal a set segment.

Hide or reveal a single segment of a set.

A hidden segment is not displayed or plotted but can still be selected, labelled, modified, used as a breakline, and so on.

To hide or reveal a single hidden set segment, select the segment with a mouse. To reveal all segments for selected sets, use REVEAL.

To display all segments, use Ignore Hide in DISPLAYSET.

You can also avoid plotting a whole set by using a colour mapped to pen 0 by PLOTSET or giving it a pen-up linetype.

Revealed segments which are OFF or on invisible layers remain off or invisible.

You cannot HIDE pline segments.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Set|​Hide segment
Modify|​On/Off|​Hide set segment
S 49
 HLIST

List hydrographs.

List hydrographs in detail.

TML date MenuSource 
29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro|​Basin|​List hydrograph S  
 HNAVEDIT

HYDROpro NavEdit.

Open HYDROpro NavEdit to export hydrographic survey data.

The NavEdit module of HYDROpro software from Trimble must be installed.

 GuideMenuSource 
  hdms.pdf HDMS|​Export|​NavEdit POA  
 HORIZ​ALIGN

Register one horizontal alignment.

Register a pline or set as a horizontal alignment with a name.

Use registered alignments with commands such as GCACTIVE and ROADJOB.

See also HAL​MANAGER to create and delete registered alignments, add chainage equations or enter alignment offsets.

Command dateGuide Source 
12/03/09HELPTM   S  
 HRLIST

List reach hydrographs.

List inflow and outflow hydrographs for a reach.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro|​Hydrographs|​Inflow/Outflow hydrographs S  
 HROUT

Route hydrographs through a pond.

Route the basin and reach hydrographs through a pond.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro|​Routing|​Pond routing S  
 HROUTR

Route hydrographs through a reach.

Route the basin and reach hydrographs through a reach.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro|​Routing|​Reach routing S  
 HYDROIMP

Import HYDROpro .HPT depths.

Import HYDROpro .HPT depths.

TML Guide MenuSource 
01/09/18 hdms.pdf HDMS|​Import|HydroPro HPT depths HDMS  
 ID

Report properties of the selected object.

Report or edit properties such as object type, point numbers, north and east coordinates, elevation, name, record number, reference record number, CAD properties, layer name, colour number and linetype.

See EDIT for more details of the properties.

See also GC34 to find a point.

Command dateGuideMenuSource72
12/03/09HELPTM Reports|​Identify object
Inquire|​Identify object
S 72
 IDANGLE

Report angle within two lines or three points.

If three point, nominate a pivot point, an ahead bearing and a deflection bearing.

See also ANG and LABELANG.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Reports|​Identify angle
Inquire|​Identify angle
S  
 ID​STATION

Display the chainage and offset.

Display the chainage and offset at the cursor from a selected set or pline.

Select an alignment set or pline. The ACTIVE alignment is the default, unless no active alignment has been set.

For Point, select a location. A rubber band is drawn from the cursor to the lowest chainage perpendicular to the alignment. Chainage and offset are shown in the coordinate scroll. The rubber band and coordinate scroll are updated as the cursor moves.

A negative offset is to the left of the alignment (looking in the direction of increasing chainage).

If the US English language version is installed, Terramodel dialogs and menus refer to Station. If British English, the dialogs refer to Chainage. The Terramodel Help refers to Station. This TML List refers to Chainage.

See also GCIDCHN, CENVIEW and GC03.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Reports|​Identify chainage
Reports|​Identify station
Inquire|​Identify chainage
Inquire|​Identify station
S  
 IGRP

Display only objects in the same group.

Turn all objects in the same group as the selected object on, and all other objects off.

See also QISOLATE, LAYERSET, OFF, OFFALL, ON, ONALL, ONGRP and SETGRP.

TML date  SourceGC
01/09/18     U 47
 ILINE

Create points at intersections of selected lines.

Create points at each intersection of selected sets or plines, on the specified layer, in the specified order and with interpolated elevations.

If elevations can be interpolated from both records, the elevation is interpolated from the set or pline with the lower record number.

TML date MenuSourceGC
01/09/18   Draw|​Point|​At intersections S 303
 IMAGE

Image manager.

Position, display, plot or modify raster images behind your project.

All images are reloaded each time an image is added or revised or a project is opened.

Each image is listed in a table. Select the image then make any changes.

ImageManager table

Classification
The classes are S: Source, C: Clipped, D: Dynaimage, R: Registered and *: Unresolved.
View
The view mode.
Image Name
The file name and type.
Display
Display (Y) or hide (N). Change with the mouse or Display mode
Size
The approximate size in units for the view.
Brightness | Contrast | Fade
Adjust image brightness, contrast and fade by slider controls.
Display image
Toggle display of the image.
Draft Mode
Toggle draft mode. Turn on draft mode to reduce refresh times. Turn off draft mode to correctly display transparent pixels in clipped and rotated images.
Image Up | Image Down
Images at the top of the list are displayed over any overlapping images. Images are initially sorted by date with newer images at the top. Use the buttons to reorder images.
Info
Display more detailed information about an image.
Modify
Modify the source image, specify, add or export a registration file, manual placement, aspect ratio and pline border.
Register
Rotate, translate and scale image by two point pairs. Replace file or create new one.
Clip
Clip image inside or outside a boundary and retain or replace the image file.
Dynaimage
Associate an image with a dynaview, clip to dynaview extent or boundary, combine mosaics, and save the resulting image.
Keeper
Save any derived image (the result of registering, clipping or associating with a dynaview)
Add
Source image:
Select an image to add to your project. For .TIF, .BMP, .JPG or .GIF formats, filter on Image files or the specific file extension. For .PNG, .JPEG, .TIFF, .DCX, .DIB, .PCX, .PICT, .TGA, .WMF or .WPG formats, filter on All files.
Manual placement:
Specify the location of the upper right and lower left corners of the image
Registration file:
Select a registration (world) file, if supplied, to specify location of north-west corner, pixel size and number of pixels.
Apply Registration file
Compute placement of upper right and lower left corner of image from selected registration file.
Keep aspect ratio based on height
Modify the upper right corner to keep the aspect ratio or modify the ratio to keep the location of the upper right corner.
Add pline border to image
Add a pline around the image in the specified view.
Done
Exit Image manager and display the images.
Detach
Remove a link to an image from your project

Notes

Field data module is sufficient to display images. CAD module enables editing with IMAGE manager. Image manager module enables Register, Clip, Dynaimage and Keeper functions.

If an image is missing when you open a project, Browse for another image file, Postpone browsing for that image or Cancel Image manager.

Images rotated by other than 90 or 180 degrees include additional triangles to maintain cardinal orientation. Pixels in these triangles, and any clipped regions, are transparent, provided you specify .TIF or .PNG format when you enter the new file name. If you specify .JPG, these pixels will be black because .JPG does not support transparency.

Where images overlap, the pixels of the top image are displayed. Where there are no pixels, the background colour is displayed in Terramodel and the paper colour is displayed on plots. Where the only pixels are transparent, the background and paper colours are visible if Draft mode is OFF, and displayed as black, if Draft mode is ON.

If the display background is black, you cannot see whether draft mode is on or off, or whether those pixels are transparent. For this reason, when working with transparency, change the background colour to something other than black. To keep a dark background, select a colour such as dark blue. To reveal what colour will be plotted on paper, use a background with a similar colour to the paper, such as white. Use EDITINI to change the background colour, and the cursor and highlight colours if you need to maintain contrast.

.JPG photos from Apple devices can be rotated in a non-standard way that Image manager does not honour. A solution is to open the .JPG in a photo editor such as MS Paint then save as a .TIF.

Images are memory intensive. Images do not use system memory when they are not displayed. Very large images may not display or plot correctly. If so, reduce the size by cropping, tiling or pixel size to that required for your presentation media such as paper or screen. .JPG files deecompress to use much more memory than the file size.

Refer to Terramodel help for more information.

See also

REDRAW
Redisplay the images
ADDIMAGE
Add an image to multiple plotboxes
IMAGEPTH
Change the image paths to a new location
.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM File|​Image manager S  
 IMAGEPTH

Change file locations for IMAGE manager.

Change file locations for, or detach links to, missing images.

If you open a project file in IMAGE manager that has links to images on different paths, the images are not displayed unless you browse to select the new paths.

With IMAGEPTH you can change the path of all images in a project to the single location of any selected image, or detach all missing images.

Restart Terramodel immediately after changing the image path.

Display properties in Image manager such as visibility and location are retained.

TML date  Source 
01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
 IMANAGER

Island manager.

Create, copy and delete traffic island templates and assign templates to road jobs.

The Island Manager has similar features to the finish and subgrade template managers.

The chainage list box shows all of the currently defined templates for the specified roadway, including the station at which the template starts, its name, and the number of shapes it contains on the each side.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Road design|​Island manager S  
 IMPORT

Import data using scripts.

Using a system of configurable scripts, import survey data into Terramodel, directly from some survey instruments or data collectors, or from a data file.

Survey formats

The formats cover a wide range of survey instruments and software including:

  • ASCII points
  • Callidus
  • DiNi
  • DWG and DXF
  • Elta
  • ESRI SHP
  • Geocomp
  • Geodimeter
  • Hand entry
  • iWitness
  • LandScape
  • LandXML
  • Leica
  • Liscad
  • Microstation V7 DGN
  • Nikon
  • Smigs
  • Sokkia
  • SpectraPrecision
  • SMI
  • Terramodel
  • Topcon
  • Trimble
  • Tripod Data Systems (TDS)
  • USGS

This list includes both standard Terramodel scripts and scripts supplied with the Geocomp Update. Use IMPORTSMGR to control and edit the scripts.

Duplicate points

Before you form any DTM, use GC92 to check the imported data for duplicate points with height differences and plines that you might want to be sets.

ESRI shape files

ESRI shapes consist of at least three files in the same folder: .SHP containing geometry, .SHX containing the index and .DBF containing attributes. If a .PRJ is supplied, open that in a text editor to discover the projection and use GCCOORD or COORDCON to set that projection.

XML files

XML files can have lines of data that are too long for the LandXML import script. Use GCFIXXML to insert new lines into these files.

RDE files

There are no scripts to import surveys formatted in Raw Data Editor syntax, but you can copy surveys from the Raw Data Editor into any text editor and save them as .RDE files and make edits. To use the edited survey in Terramodel, open the Raw data editor, create a survey using the Create survey job command in the RDE File menu, then use a text editor to copy the survey data from the .RDE file and paste the contents into the Raw data editor.

The description of any survey job imported into RDE using a script is in the format "FILE NAME.EXT imported at [time and date]". The description of any new survey job is " created at [time and date]". These descriptions can’t be edited in RDE.

To add a survey to Raw data editor with the name of an a imported .RDE file:

  1. Copy an .RDE file that contains only comments, such as C:\TMCUSTOM\​Geocomp\​Docs\​EMPTY.RDE, to a new name with extension .RDE
  2. Use the Empty.RDE _i import script to import the .RDE file with the new name
  3. The new survey job in Raw data editor has the description "[new file name.RDE] imported at [time and date]".
  4. Copy from the .RDE file with your survey.
  5. Paste into Raw data editor

DWG and DXF files

DXF_PT_CHK

If the project contains the layer DXF_PT_CHK, duplicate points are removed during the import. This layer can slow the import. Removing duplicate points later by DTM formation is much quicker.

Select range of characters from layer names

Terramodel layer names have a maximum of 16 characters. AutoCAD layer names can now be much longer. If the AutoCAD layer name is longer than 16 characters, characters must be omitted. Terramodel can read the number of characters from the beginning of each layer name as specified by the project variable "DWGIMPORT:LAYERNAME" with an integer value = from 0 to 16 using PROJECTV. The remaining characters come from the end of the layer name. For example, if you specify 2 characters, you get the first 2 and the last 14. If the project variable is not set, you get the first 16 characters as normal.

For example:

Value of project variableAutoCAD layer nameTerramodel layer name
0Elec LV Cable Type_A1 140313E TYPE_A1 140313
5Elec LV Cable Type_A1 140313 ELEC E_A1 140313
16Elec LV Cable Type_A1 140313ELEC LV CABLE TY
Not setElec LV Cable Type_A1 140313ELEC LV CABLE TY
0Elec LV Cable Type_A1 140313 (SS 140521)0313 (SS 140521)
5Elec LV Cable Type_A1 140313 (SS 140521)ELEC (SS 140521)
16Elec LV Cable Type_A1 140313 (SS 140521)ELEC LV CABLE TY
Not setElec LV Cable Type_A1 140313 (SS 140521)ELEC LV CABLE TY

DGN files

To transfer data to and from Microstation V7 to Terramodel, use .DGN. For Microstation V8, use .DWG. V7 .DGN does not support layer names. Terramodel cannot read or write V8 DGN .files. If you happen to have Microstation or AutoCAD issued since 2010, use that to read .DWG from Terramodel and to read .DGN and save as .DWG for Terramodel to read.

Some versions of Teigha Viewer and Drawings Explorer from Open Design Alliance (ODA) can convert from DGN to DWG or DXF using include DGNIMPORT and SAVEAS commands.

  • Start Drawings Explorer
  • In Drawings Explorer
    1. Open a new file
    2. Choose metric or imperial units
    3. At the command line, type DGNIMPORT
    4. Browse to select a V8 .DGN file
    5. File, Save As a DWG or DXF
  • In Terramodel
    1. DWGIN

    See also

    EXPORT
    Export data using scripts
    GCPTSIN
    Import points in more formats
    DELBLKS
    Delete missing external blocks
    DXFCHANG
    Replace layer names in DXF files
    DXF3D
    Import elevations from .DXF files
    SNRFILE
    Find and replace text in a file

    Command dateGuidesMenuSourceGC
    01/09/18 HELPIE, UG & FDM UG File|​Download/Import S or Geocomp Update 293, FC A, FC D, FC I, FC T
  •  IMPORTGC

    Import Geocomp Cross Sections (.CES).

    Select the Road job and specify the import file type "Geocomp Existing", or "Geocomp Design" depending on the desired surface in the .CES file.

    IMPORTGC is an alias to IMPORTXS which uses IMPORTGC.TML to import Geocomp .CES format files.

    See GC37 to create .CES files.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 157
     IMPORT​SMGR

    Import script manager.

    Hide, reveal, create, edit, delete or run import scripts.

    Create a new script

    Script name and select source/destination
    Give the script a name and specify whether the script action is to download, import or both.
    Instrument/data collector
    If you selected download, select device to download from.
    Select source file format
    If you selected import, select a file format. If your format is not on the list, try ASCII points or Raw survey data.
    Source file
    Specify a file location or name (e.g. *.CSV) which you can leave blank. Specify other information depending on the chosen format such as a road job or a data format template format ("logger") file, such as Generic points comma.lgr.
    View file contents
    Show the View file contents page at runtime. If you selected an ASCII points format, enter codes delimited by spaces or commas to indicate the data order of the source files. Enter P for Points field, E for Easting, N for Northing, Z for Elevation, D for Description/Name or S for Skip a field.
    Units Settings
    Use the Units settings of the current project or specify other units.
    Point settings
    Specify default point settings such as create points on POINTS layer
    Coordinate shift
    Specify any coordinate shift or turn off Show this page at runtime
    Point description expansion
    Expand point descriptions only if you explicitly coded your points to suit. Otherwise, do not show at runtime.

    For Import + Export help, see Index on the Help menu. Press F1 while creating a script might also open Help.

    The scripts are stored as files of the same name in the C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared\​ImportExport\ folder. If the script is ticked, the script is visible on the IMPORT menu and the file extension is .xi. If not ticked, the script is not visible and the extension is .xi_.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Files|​Download/Import|​Import script manager S MM G
     IMPORTXS

    Import cross sections into a Roadway.

    Import cross sections directly into a roadway from a cross section file.

    There are three ways to define cross sections in a roadway, by templates, DTM surfaces and importing stored sections from a file. IMPORTXS imports stored cross sections from a file in Terramodel Roads V8, Texas RDS, Agtek, NCDOT, "Ch,Offset,Elev", "Ch Offset Elev", Softdesk, CEAL Existing, CEAL Design, Geopak, FDOT Terrain, FDOT Finish, Geocomp Existing or Geocomp Design format.

    How to import Cross Sections from a file.

    1. Register a HAL in the HALMANAGER
    2. Define a Road Job in the ROADJOB Manager.
    3. Create xlines using GCXLINES
    4. Insert surfaces using the SURFACE Manager. The order of the surfaces may be important.
    5. If a surface is a finished design surface, define it as Finish.
    6. Check that all surfaces to be imported are not sliced.
    7. Specify for each surface, whether they are elevation or depth surfaces.
    8. In the XSection Manager, Select Import XSection.
    9. Select a Roadjob.
    10. Select Cross Sections to import a stored cross section a selected layer
    11. Select 3D points, to import onto a layer which is already has 3D points.
    12. Select from the listed Import File Types. See note below.
    13. Press Import to select the cross section file.
    14. If the points represent a surface, select Sort points on offset.
    15. Close XSection import and XSection manager.
    16. Go to XSection Editor to see the cross sections.
    17. Return to Import XSection if you have more surfaces to import.

    How to import Cross Sections from a Geocomp .CES file.

    1. Import cross sections as described above.
    2. Select Geocomp Existing format to import the first surface (typically the Existing) in the .CES file.
    3. Select Geocomp Design format to import the second and any other surface (typically Design).
    4. Sections are placed using chainages in the selected HAL, not centre-line coordinates in the CES file.

    How to create a Roadway from strings in the plan view.

    1. Import sets defining roadway strings from a file in a format such as .12DA, GENIO or .DWG.
    2. Use GC92 to check for duplicate points.
    3. Set an active horizontal alignment.
    4. Register an alignment and define a roadjob.
    5. Use SURFACES to insert a surface for your cross sections with Elevation and Slice.
    6. Use GCXLINES to define Xlines at the same intervals used to create the cross section strings.
    7. Use GC37 to create a cross section file in Geocomp .CES format.
      1. Pick your HAL
      2. For Objs:, select sets that define roadway strings.
      3. Select Create .CES and Select Sort offsets.
      4. OK to save .CES file.
    8. Run IMPORTXS. Select the roadjob, the
    9. Select Geocomp Existing format.
    10. Browse to select the .CES file.
    11. Select sort points on offset.
    12. Close
    13. Use XSECTIONEDT to view the cross sections, or RDX to plot the cross sections.

    How to create a Roadway from Points in the plan view.

    1. Register a Horizontal Alignment.
    2. Define Xlines at similar intervals to your field cross sections.
    3. Select XSOUT.
    4. Pick your HAL, and select all your points to be included in the sections.
    5. Define a tolerance for which your points may lay off the Xlines.
    6. Select an output type as ROADS and name the file.
    7. Register your HAL in the Hal Manager.
    8. Use the Road Job Manager to create a new road job which uses the previously defined HAL.
    9. Use the Surfaces button in the Road Job Manager to insert a surface into your cross sections. Select Elevation and Slice.
    10. Run IMPORTXS. Select file type of  Terramodel Road V8 and import the .xsc file created above.
    11. Use XSECTIONEDT to view the cross sections, or RDX to plot the cross sections.

    How to import points without a roadway.

    To import a file of points with chainage, offset and elevation, without a Roadway, see GC65FILE.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    01/09/18 RG 919 Roads|​Road design|​XSection manager S 423
     INCRTEXT

    Create text from incrementing numbers.

    Create text records at selected locations with values starting at a specified integer and incrementing by one.

    Great for house and lot numbers.

    You can set a prefix, suffix, text style and direction.

    See also GCINCTXT which allows for other increments and real numbers.

    TML date MenuSourceGC
    01/09/18   Draw|​Text|​Incrementing text S 92
     INSALT

    Import GeoNav Salt Harvester log files.

    Import GeoNav Salt Harvester log files.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     POA  
     INT3DSET

    Create sets with elevations interpolated or extrapolated from specified points.

    For estimating surfaces for volume calculations. Draw a set like a pline, specifying elevations for only those points where the elevation is known, leave the rest of the points with elevations = *. Elevations where unknown are automatically interpolated or extrapolated from the 3D points.

    The points with known elevations are given the name "tm_3d", and the others are named "tm_2d".

    Use INTERP3D to recompute the elevations on "tm_2d" points if any of the "tm_3d" points are later changed.

    See also GC50.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    29/10/08 RG 1249 Draw|​Set|​Interpolated 3D set S 185
     INTERP3D

    Modify elevations of points with name "tm_2d".

    Elevations are interpolated from elevations of points in the same set with name "tm_3d".

    Use INTERP3D to recompute elevations interpolated by INT3DSET after any points in the set have been changed.

    See also GC50 which does not require named points, but therefore cannot be updated automatically.

    TML dateGuideMenuSource 
    29/10/08 RG 1252 Draw|​Set|​Update interp. 3D S  
     INTOSET

    Insert points into a set.

    Insert the selected points into a selected set if the points are within a specified distance of the set.

    The entered tolerance is stored as a project variable. The initial tolerance value is derived from the SetArcTol value in TMODWIN.INI.

    If there is already a point in the set the original point is unchanged.

    See also GCIN2SET which can select multiple sets and replace 2D points with 3D points.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     U  
     IRBAY

    Design irrigation bays.

    Survey, design, estimate and plot flood irrigation projects in a single application.

    Given the bay layout and existing surface, adjust the slopes and levels of each bay to optimise and balance the earthworks.

    Includes several related files.

    TML dateGuide Source 
    01/09/18 Irrigation Bay Design User's Guide and Reference Manual   POA  
     IRBENT

    Enter elevations on irrigation bay grid point elevations.

    Enter elevations on irrigation bay grid points.

    Use with IRBAY.

    TML dateGuide Source 
    01/09/18 Irrigation Bay Design User's Guide and Reference Manual   POA  
     IRBGRID

    Generate grid of irrigation bay points.

    Generate grid of irrigation bay label points.

    These points can be used to enter elevations with IRBENT or label cut|fill with text.

    Use with IRBAY.

    TML dateGuide Source 
    01/09/18 Irrigation Bay Design User's Guide and Reference Manual   POA  
     IRBTAB

    Create an irrigation bay results table.

    Generate a table of plines and EAT text grid showing selected irrigation bays.

    The table includes the bay name, areas, volumes, slopes and width.

    Use with IRBAY.

    TML dateGuide Source 
    08/02/16 Irrigation Bay Design User's Guide and Reference Manual   POA  
     IRCDTAB

    Report drain or channel grades and widths.

    Report grades and widths for each drain or channel layer in a layer list.

    The set with the lowest horizontal offset on each side is assumed to be the edge of the bed. The set with the next lowest offset is assumed to be the top of batter. The depth is the difference in elevation between the top and the bed.

    Standard channel report

    This report shows the layer name of the channel Section, Length, Bed width, Grade %, Grade 1:, Vol Cut, Vol Fill, Batter 1:, Compact %, Bed width and Flow rate.

    Standard drain report

    This report shows the layer name of the channel Section, Length, Bed width, Grade %, Batter slopes and Net volume.

    The volumes in the standard reports are calculated to a specified Existing surface DTM.

    Enhanced drain report

    This report shows, for each xline, the Chainage, Grade downstream, Depth, Bed elevation, Bed offsets and Batter offsets.

    The chainages and offsets are calculated from a horizontal alignment that is the reference object of sets created by commands such as ROADDTM or SIDESLOPE. You can also manually REFER sets to the HAL.

    Related commands

    See also IRBAY.

    TML date  Source 
    08/12/15     POA  
     IRCHFLO

    Compute parameters for trapezoidal channel flow.

    Survey, design, estimate and plot of flood irrigation projects in a single application.

    For a trapezoidal channel (or drain), enter five of these variables, Flow, Bed Width, Batter Slope, Flow Depth, Bed Slope or Manning Coefficient to determine the Flow, Drain Slope or Manning's Coefficient.

    Part of IRBAY.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     POA  
     IRDTMS

    Generate a single DTM from multiple irrigation bays.

    Generate a DTM on a single later from specified bay sets and an offset between bays.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18 Irrigation Bay Design User's Guide and Reference Manual   POA  
     IRHAUL

    Compute haul distance for a irrigation bay design.

    Specify existing and design DTMs, a cut|fill ratio and a grid spacing.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     POA  
     IRPUTAT

    Set or edit irrigation bay text attributes.

    Set or edit irrigation bay text attributes.

    Requires IR_PUTAT.ADF.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     POA  
     IRSTRUC

    Generate irrigation bay tables and reports.

    Generate irrigation bay tables and reports.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     POA  
     IRSUMTX

    Recalculate totals in irrigation bays results table.

    Recalculate totals in irrigation bays results table.

    TML dateGuide Source 
    01/09/18 Irrigation Bay Design User's Guide and Reference Manual   POA  
     ISCLOSED

    Select closed or open sets or plines.

    Select sets or plines and whether to further select closed or open. The current object selection then consists of those objects which were open or were closed.

    To use those objects in another command, like say COLOUR, select by Previous.

    If checking for closed contours, first create them without clipping lines under labels.

    See also CLOSEFIG.

    TML date  Source 
    27/02/20     Geocomp Update or $250  
     ISLAND

    Traffic island editor.

    The Island Editor has similar menus and features to the finish and subgrade template editors. The most significant difference in the Island Editor is the way the user designs an island — from the outside in.

    Island Editor uses multiHal transitions to tie the outside edge of the template (usually a kerb) to a pre-defined line or group of lines. Then the template is built from pre-existing shapes towards the centre of the island.

    To Create an Island

    1. Use Terramodel to design a road as usual.
    2. Create a line or several lines that outline the edge of the islands.
    3. Name these lines consistently so that you can refer to the group uniquely with a base name and wildcard (ex: Island1, Island2, Island3). Line names are case sensitive.
    4. Enter an island template chainage in the IMANAGER
    5. Open the Island editor
    6. Add the first shape (usually the outer kerb of the island) to the template with a multiHal transition.
    7. Enter the base name and wildcard of the lines outlining the islands in the MultiHal object control.
    8. You should usually click the New Island checkbox for the first shape; selecting this checkbox applies the multiHal transition to the shape.
    9. Build the rest of the island template towards the centre of the island, using familiar island editor functions.
    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Road design|​Island editor S  
     JOB2AGA

    Convert a Geodimeter job file to a Geodimeter raw data file.

    Convert a Geodimeter job file created by a Geodimeter or Trimble instrument into a Geodimeter Raw data file with .AGA file extension suitable for use with GCIMPORT.

    Geodimeter Raw files are slightly different to Geodimeter .JOB files.

    This function does not convert Trimble DC .JOB or Journal .JOB files.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     JOBOUT

    Reverse-engineer Geodimeter job file from points.

    From an instrument point and foresight points, report re-engineered pseudo-​observations to Geodimeter .JOB format.

    If you save the report to a text file with .JOB file extension, you can then import the data into an other application. For example, you view or edit the data in the Geodimeter File Editor (GFE), import the data into the Raw Data Editor (RDE) using the 'Geocomp Geodimeter _i' import script, or correct for a vertical collimation error by creating, editing and importing a Geocomp .FLD file using GCIMPORT.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     JOIN

    Join plines or sets with common ends.

    Join a pline or set with other plines or sets with common ends.

    Select a First object then Lines. Compare the X and Y coordinates of the ends of the object with the ends of selected Lines (of the same type). If there is a match, join the objects together, then repeat until there are no matches.

    Properties such are colour are derived from the first object.

    If the objects must have consecutive record numbers, use GC84. To connect two plines or sets across a gap, use CONNECT.To break sets and plines into segments, use DISJOIN.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Edit|​Join S  
     JOINTEXT

    Join pairs of text records together.

    Join pairs of text records into a single text record separated by a decimal point.

    For each selected text record in turn, find all text within the specified tolerance and then from those records, find the one with the next record number and create a new text record.

    The new text record is created from the text in the records, separated by a decimal point, on the current layer, with the text properties of first of the two records.

    If the records are imported elevation text broken into whole and decimal parts, the resulting text can be used by TEXT2PNT to create points with the complete elevation.

    Compare the old and new text carefully to see if the logic applies to the text as you expect. The results may be "wrong" if the tolerance is wrong, the text is not in pairs, or the record numbers are not in the desired order.

    "Delete old text if joined" to see whether any left over text was not matched into pairs.

    See also

    RENUMREC
    to change the record number order of any objects before joining the text.
    SNR
    to replace the decimal point characters with spaces or nothing.

    TML date  Source 
    07/02/19     Geocomp Update or $250  
     KEAYSIN

    Import data from Keays transfer (TR?) files.

    Import data from Keays transfer (TR?) files.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 FC T
     KEAYSOUT

    Export data to Keays transfer (TR1) files.

    Export data to Keays transfer (TR1) files.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $175  
     KORKDTM

    Export DTM layer to Kork format.

    Export DTM layer to Kork format.

    TML date  Source 
    29/10/08     S  
     LABBENDS

    Suffix point names with deflection angles.

    Suffix point names that begin with HB in a selected set to show deflection angles.

    Specify a minimum deflection angle and units of decimal degrees, degrees and minutes or degrees, minutes and seconds.

    The new names start with HB, followed by the deflection angle and LHB for Left Hand Bend or RHD for Right Hand Bend.

    To label the points, use a command such as F11, LABELPOINT, LABPT or CALLOUT.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $175  
     LABELANG

    Label the angle-right at each point of the selected set.

    Label the angle-right at each point of the selected set using the current text style.

    TML date MenuSource 
    01/09/18   Draft|​Label angle-right S  
     LABELARC

    Label segment with radius as text along.

    Label segment with radius as text along.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     S 91
     LABEL​CONTOURS

    Label contour plines with text.

    Place contour labels on plines manually.

    Pick
    Pick one contour pline
    Cross
    Select multiple contour plines and two points to define and intersecting line

    Use to add labels to contour plines generated by CONTOUR, manually created or imported from a file.

    If any contour plines contain splines, use GCCHORD to replace with many straights first.

    Contours can be clipped at labels using CLIP Inside or TEXTBACK.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Draft|​Label contours S 93
     LABEL​GRID

    Label a box with coordinates.

    Label a rectangular pline box with coordinates at regular intervals.

    Use the the Settings button to select View, Interval, Layer, Text style and Placement before selecting the pline. In Profile and XSect views, the Interval can be different for elevations. The Placement relative to the coordinate can be Above, Centered or Below.

    See also

    GCLABGRD
    Label closed plines with coordinates and a grid.
    GRIDMAKE
    Create a grid at the SNAPSET origin and GRIDSET interval.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Draft|​Label grid S 93
     LABELHAL

    Label horizontal alignment intersection points.

    Label a single location on a HAL, or a whole HAL.

    Settings

    STORE LABELS ON LAYER
    The layer on which to place the labels. The label colour is from the layer colour.
    POINT LABELING LENGTH
    The length of the line (in sheet units) at HAL points. Enter -1 to suppress HAL Point labels.
    STATION LABEL INTERVAL
    The distance along the alignment between labels.
    MINOR TICKS INTERVAL
    Enter the distance along the alignment between minor tick marks. Enter 0 to omit minor ticks.
    LABEL TICK WIDTH
    The width of the ticks (in sheet units) at station labels. Enter 0 to omit ticks.
    MINOR TICK WIDTH
    The width of the minor ticks (at intermediate stations).
    LABEL OFFSET
    The distance from the alignment to the offset text. A positive distance places the text to the right, negative to the left.
    LABEL TEXT STYLE
    The text style for all HAL labels.
    JUSTIFY MINOR TICKS
    Position minor ticks on the Left, Centre or Right of the HAL.
    INCLUDE "+00" IN LABEL
    Include "+00" in all station labeling
    LABEL STA ON ALIGNMENT
    Place station labels parallel to the alignment, otherwise perpendicular.
    ALIGN STATIONS FROM 0+00
    Increments the station labels from 0.00, otherwise the beginning station.
    LABEL CURVE TABLES
    Label the curves with tables.
    DRAW CURVE TABLE BOX
    Draw a box around each curve table.
    POINT OF INTERSECTION
    Populate Points of Intersection Tables with Delta, Chainage, North or East.
    ARC TABLE FORMAT
    Populate Arc Tables with Angle, Arc, Chord, Chord bearing, DC, External distance, Middle ordinate, radius or tangent length.
    SPIRAL TABLE FORMAT
    Populate Spiral Tables with Angle, Chord, Length, LT, ST, XS, YS, K or P.

    Label

    Create Hal labels on a HAL, between start chainage and end chainages.

    Single

    Label a location on a HAL with a leader point and text at a location.

    Settings control chainage prefix, rotation angle from perpendicular or a bearing, left offset suffix and justification, right offset suffix and justification, whether to label whole part of chainages, and whether to label the chainage and offset on the same line.

    See also GC27, GC86, GCLABIP, GCXLINES, LABELPI and LABELVAL.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Draft|​Label HAL S 93,84
     LABELINE

    Label horizontal alignments with names in plotboxes.

    Label selected HALs inside each selected pline box on the selected layer.

    Text objects in the selected text style showing the name of the alignment are placed along the alignment close to the centre of each selected plotbox.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     LABELLOT

    Change lot area labels to show alternative area.

    Change lot area labels created by LABELSETS to show the Alternative Area set in UNITSSET Labeling and Conversion Factors. The Alt areas are typically Acres or Hectares.

    For each selected set, if the area of the set is greater than the entered value, and the "Acreage" text height is 0.000, change the "Acreage" text height to the same value as "Sq. Units" (if non-zero), and change the "Sq. Units" value to 0.000. The text height is in sheet units and may vary from lot to lot.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 64
     LABELOFF

    Label points with offset text.

    Label points with text showing offsets from an alignment.

    Settings

    Prefix Offset
    Enter any prefix.
    Suffix Offset
    Enter any suffix.
    Text Layer
    Select the text layer.
    Text style
    Select the text style.
    Text Bearing
    Enter the text bearing. Enter * for text perpendicular to the alignment.
    Display Offset in Metres or Millimetres
    If project units are metres, display Offset in metres or millimetres.
    Append Units
    Append units (m, mm or Ft) to text.
    Use EAT code
    If units are metres, show offsets in the Offset EAT Code format configured by UNITSSET.
    Leader style
    Add a straight, broken or curved leaderline. Select None for no leaderline.
    Leader linetype
    Select a linetype, such as LEADERLINE, that indicates direction from the text to the point.
    Border style
    Select a text border style. Select None for no border.
    Border Linetype
    Select a text border linetype.
    Gap
    Enter the gap between the the point and the end of any leaderline.

    See also

    GC02
    Modify points names to include chainage and offset
    GC03
    Report chainage and offset

    TML date  SourceGC
    09/08/19     Geocomp Update or $250 64
     LABELPI

    Label intersection points

    Label intersection points with no curve on selected HAL, with IP Chainage, Delta angle, Easting and Northing.

    Chainages are labelled with "Sta".

    The text is placed legibly and perpendicular to the HAL at an offset which you can enter or select graphically.

    See also LABELPI, LABELHAL and GC27.

    TML date MenuSourceGC
    01/09/18   Draft|​Label IPs
    Draft|​Label PI's
    S 84
     LABEL​POINT

    Label points with point labels and symbols.

    Label selected points with symbols and labels derived from point label blocks.

    Label Points Options

    Freeze/Thaw
    Toggle the display of all point labels.
    Settings
    Copy Settings from Pt
    Select a labelled point from which to copy point label settings.
    Symbol
    Map to Symbol
    Map symbols to point names as defined in the SYMBOL.MAP file
    Number
    Enter a symbol number from the SYMBOL.FNT file
    Size
    Enter a size (in sheet units) for your symbols. The size given here remains constant regardless of the drawing scale.
    Rotation
    Enter a rotation angle. The closest 2° increment is used.
    Block Label
    Description
    Select the description of a block containing a predefined point label.
    Rotation
    Enter the rotation angle (between 0° and 337° 30') in 22° 30' degree increments
    Offset
    Enter the offset distance (in sheet units) from the point to the insertion point of the label. This distance is rounded to an even number of multiples, between 0 and 15, of the offset delta distance.
    Brg to Label
    Set the bearing from the point to the insertion point of the block along the offset distance in 22° 30' increments
    Add Line
    Draw a line from each labeled point to the insertion point of its label
    Hi/Low Only
    Label only DTM points at high and low spots.
    Mirror About X
    Mirror the label about the X axis. Any text with in the label will still be readable.
    Offset Delta
    Enter the maximum distance from a point to a label. A typical value is 0.10 or 0.15 (sheet units). A value of 0.0 prevents the label from being moved.
    Pts
    Select the points to be labelled.
    On/Off
    Turn on or off the display of the point labelling for selected points.
    Explode
    Explode point labels into text and pline objects on the layer of the point.
    Move
    Move the block label, but not the symbol, to a new location, provided Offset Delta is not 0.00.
    Label
    Label the selected points

    See also F7, F8, F9, F11, GC93, PTLAB and SYM2BLK.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Draft|​Label points with blocks S 110
     LABEL​ROADHAL

    Label a registered horizontal alignment with intersection points

    Label a registered horizontal alignment using the LABELHAL settings.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Label|​Label HAL
    Roads|​Labeling|​Label HAL
    Channel|​Label|​Label HAL
    Channel|​Labeling|​Label HAL
    S 84
     LABEL​ROADVAL

    Label a registered vertical alignment with intersection points

    Label a registered vertical alignment using the LABELVAL settings.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Label|​Label VAL
    Roads|​Labeling|​Label VAL
    Channel|​Label|​Label VAL
    Channel|​Labeling|​Label VAL
    S 412
     LABEL​SEG

    Label set segments with dimensions.

    Create EAT text objects labelling the bearings or distances of selected straight set segments, and the curve properties of curved set segments.

    The resulting labels dynamically update to display the revised segment geometry as the points that define the labelled set segments move. Labels that are created such that they are aligned with and placed along the line segment move with that segment as it moves. The labels are created in accordance with the current straight line and arc segment label styles which control the content and placement of the geometric properties associated with a line and curve segment respectively.

    Label Segments Options

    AUTO
    Label a straight or curved set segment with a smart text label showing the bearing, distance, or curve properties of that segment. The position of the label is set automatically along the segment. If the points making up this segment move, the text will follow and will be updated to reflect the altered geometry.
    USER
    Label a straight or arc set segment with a text label showing the bearing, distance, or curve properties of that segment. Use where the segment is too short for the label to fit along the segment. The location of the label can be pulled away from the line segment. If desired, a leader line will automatically point from the label to the midpoint of the line segment. If the segment's points move, the displayed geometry will update and the leader line endpoint will move with the segment, but the label's location will not move.
    PT TO PT
    Label a bearing and distance between two selected point objects, whether or not they are connected with a line segment. The label can be located at any position and orientation that you select, or it can automatically be positioned along the line between those two points.
    MULTIPLE
    Label all the currently unlabelled segments of the selected sets with bearings and distances.

    Tips on using Label Segments

    • These labels reference the points which they label so they dynamically reflect the current geometry.
    • The segment labels include abbreviations set by ABBREVSET.
    • To convert the segment to EAT text, use LABELSETS Text.
    • Select a current length suffix for all labels from one of five length options in UNITSSET Labeling. The length suffix can be blank, or include a space, a unit such as m or metres and a classification such as "(F)" to indicate a field measurement.
    • LABELSEG opens in any of four optional modes. The default mode is that of the last used option.
    • Straight pline segments are labelled with standard text that is not linked to points and therefore does not dynamically update.

    See also GCDIMLOT which dimensions using EAT text that is easier to edit and LABELSETS which labels sets with lot numbers and areas.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Draft|​Label segments S 75
     LABEL​SETS

    Label sets with lot number and area.

    SETS
    Identify the sets to be labeled.
    ON/OFF
    Turn on and off the display of the selected labels.
    TEXT
    Creates text objects from the set labels of the selected sets, and stores them on the current layer.
    NUMBER
    Number a series of sets sequentially.
    FREEZE
    Toggle the display of all set attribute labels. Select Freeze to hide attribute set labels. Select Thaw to display the labels.
    SETTINGS
    Customize your set labels with block number, lot number and label attributes.
    LABEL
    Complete the set labelling after you have selected your sets and customized the set labels.

    See also LABELLOT which changes lot labels to show the alternative areas, GCLABLOT which creates EAT text objects instead of labels and LABELSEG which labels set segments with dimensions.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Draft|​Label sets S 64
     LABEL​STA

    Label a chainage using text with a leader line.

    Label a chainage with text leader lines at a chainage and offset from a horizontal alignment.

    1. Run LABELSTA or LABELCH command
    2. Select a horizontal alignment (HAL) in the Plan view mode.
    3. Define an offset distance from the centerline graphically by entering an offset in sheet units.
    4. Pick a chainage to label
    5. Click OK to create the chainage label using the current text style.
    TML date MenuSourceGC
    29/10/08   Draft|​Label chainage values
    Draft|​Label station values
    S 93
     LABEL​TABLE

    Create a table of attribute text for dimensions of short segments in selected sets.

    Create, edit, move, name or control visibility of tables. Label tables are used to tabulate dimensions of short lines in subdivisions.

    FREEZE
    Freeze to hide or Thaw to display all tables.
    SETTINGS
    Configure the table type, bearing, appearance, segment labels, heading and lot labels.
    CREATE
    Create a new line/curve table.
    DELETE
    Delete an existing table.
    NAME TABLE
    Assign a name to an existing table.
    REVISE
    Change an existing table.
    TBL ON/OFF
    Toggle the display of a selected table on or off.
    ADD ENTRY
    Add a selected line or curve segment to an existing table.
    DELETE ENTRY
    Delete a selected line or curve segment to an existing table.
    MOVE ENTRY
    Move a table entry from one location in the table to another.
    FLIP ENTRY
    Move a segment label to the other side of the segment and reverse the bearing direction.
    LABEL ENTRY
    Change the label segment style for that segment.
    MAKETEXT
    Convert a segment label (but not a table) to text objects.
    ON/OFF ENTRY
    Turn on and off the display of selected table entries.
    TURN ENTRY
    Rotate the segment label reference 180° while leaving it on the same side of the segment.

    LABELSEG defines the segment label styles.

    UNITSSET precision controls the decimal places of bearings and distances in the table. Variable precision is not applied.

    EXPLODE replaces the tables and labels with plines and text so you can then TEXTRND bearings and distances or MOVE labels.

    Table objects are only created by LABELTABLE and so are distinct from plines, text and blocks. Other commands, such as GCTABLE, create "tables" of plines and text, but these are not table objects.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Draft|​Label line/curve tables S  
     LABEL​VAL

    Label vertical alignment intersection points.

    Label a single location on a VAL, or a whole VAL.

    See also GC27, GCLABIP, LABELPI and LABELHAL.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Draft|​Label Val S 412
     LAB​GRADE

    Label the grade or distance between two points.

    Create text at a location showing the grade or distance between two locations.

    Select two points or a set segment, and a location for the text label.

    In Settings, specify

    • the text style
    • how to display the grade angle
      • Do not display grade
      • 1H in
      • Percentage
      • Slope angle
      • 1V in
    • any grade label prefix or suffix
    • how to show distance
      • Do not display distance
      • Horizontal distance
      • Slope distance
      • Vertical distance
    • whether to
      • include SD, HD or VD to indicate distance type
      • enter any prefix to the distance
      • enter any suffix to the distance
      • delete old text linked to the same points
      • add a border to the text
      • create an arrow to indicate downhill direction
      • create any such arrow between the points or beside the text

    If you don't want text to flip when drawn from right to left, use a text style with Legible orientation.

    For text border settings, see DRAFTSET. For label precision and for length unit options, see UNITSSET.

    To label grades, both locations must have elevations.

    Labels created from segments link to segment points. If the labels show vertical differences, use TXTHTDIF to recalculate the differences after moving points.

    In the XSect, Profile or FlipUp views, the labels refer to the active alignment. Use ACTIVE​CHAINAGE to step through cross sections in the Xsect view.

    See also DRNGRADE for drains and GC37 to report and label grades between strings at multiple cross sections.

    TML date  Source 
    27/02/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     LABPT

    Label points with EAT text.

    Label selected points according to the current project settings.

    The points can be labelled with EAT text showing point number, easting, northing, elevation, name or symbols. Define the Settings by editing in a form, graphically using editing commands, by copying an existing example or by loading from a file.

    Edit

    1. Use tick boxes to select from point number, northing, easting, elevation, description (=name) and symbol. The elevation can be split into two parts on either side of the decimal point.
    2. For each text label type, Edit point label settings to control the layer, colour, X offset, Y offset, Direction, Prefix, Suffix, Font, Height, Slant, Aspect, Justification and Orientation.
    3. For any symbols, edit the settings to control the symbol number, size, rotation and whether to use a mapping file to replace the symbol according to point name.
    4. OK.

    Graphical Template

    1. Click Graphical template button.
    2. Click Place template.
    3. Select a location anywhere out of the way.
    4. LABPT creates a temporary point labelled with the point number, point name, northing, easting and elevation using default values.
    5. Edit that temporary text using normal commands such as EDIT, COLOUR and TEXTMETRICS.
    6. Click on Retrieve settings. The temporary text goes away.
    7. Click on Settings.
    8. Use Edit buttons to confirm the new settings.
    9. OK.

    Existing point

    1. Click Graphical template button.
    2. Select an existing point that you have previously labelled with EAT text that refers to the point, for example \PAR{P}.
    3. Click on Retrieve settings. The temporary text goes away.
    4. Use Edit buttons to confirm the new settings.
    5. OK.

    Load

    1. Click Load button.
    2. Browse to select settings from an .LPS file previously saved by the Save button.
    3. Use Edit buttons to confirm the new settings.
    4. OK.

    See also LABPTQ.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    01/09/18 RG 256 Draft|​Label points with text Geocomp Update or $250 110
     LABPTQ

    Label selected points with EAT text showing point number, elevation or name.

    Label selected points with EAT text showing any permutation of point number, elevation or name

    Specify the text style and colour for each label. The labels can be on a specified layer or the point layer.

    See also LABPT.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 110
     LANDFILL

    Create a surface of troughs.

    Create a surface of troughs from a specified start low point and longitudinal and transverse slope settings.

    Especially for use in landfill drainage systems.

    Start Pt
    Start point
    Longitudinal:
    Bearing of trough
    Len:
    Length of trough
    Settings
    Longitudinal ground slope
    % Slope in direction of trough
    Minimum trough slope
    Minimum % slope along which a drop of water will flow as it travels from the top ridge of the trough to the invert.
    Computed cross slope
    The cross slope computed from the longitudinal and trough slopes
    Transverse ground slope
    % slope of the trough floor in the direction perpendicular to the trough length.
    Width of trough (top to top).
    The required horizontal distance between the ridges.
    Number of troughs
    Number of troughs to create

    TML dateGuideMenuSource 
    29/10/08 RG 1233 Cogo|​Create landfill floor S  
     LAY2NAME

    Change the name of each object to match its layer.

    This can be helpful where the data has been classified by layer, but you need to plot or export using names.

    Names of text objects and blocks are not changed.

    See also

    NAME
    Modify names
    GCADDLAY
    Prefix names with first 4 characters of layer names
    DESC
    Modify numeric names to alphanumeric
    REGROUP
    Modify groups to match layernames
    GRP2NAME
    Modify names to match groups

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 76
     LAYER

    Select the current layer from the toolbar.

    Select the current layer or create a new layer from the toolbar.

    Select the current layer

    • Open the layer selection from the toolbar, select from the list of existing layers and then OK, or
    • Highlight the current layer on the toolbar, select an object and then the Escape key, or
    • Enter LAYER at the command line, then select from the list of existing layers and then OK

    Create a new layer and make it current

    • Open the layer command from the toolbar or command line, select New, enter the layer name, colours and linetype, then OK.

    See also

    CURRENT
    Select the current layer from a list or by an object
    SETCURL
    Select the current layer by picking an object
    LAYERNXT
    Change the current layer to the next alphabetical layer
    LAYERNEW
    Create a new and current layer with parameters
    LAYERSET
    Change other layer settings

    Command dateGuideMenuSource287
    12/03/09HELPTM Toolbar S 287
     LAYERMAP

    Rename layers, colours or linetypes based on .map file.

    Modify names, colours and linetypes of layers or objects on those layers.

    Select comma-separated ASCII .MAP file in one of these formats:

    old_layer,new_layer
    
    old_layer,new_layer,new_line_colour
    
    old_layer,new_layer,new_line_colour,new_point_colour
    
    old_layer,new_layer,new_line_colour,new_point_colour,new_linetype

    For each line in the .MAP file in turn, where the old_layer name matches a layer name in the project, change the old_layer name to the new_layer name and modify the default line colour, point colour and linetype for new objects on that layer.

    Wild cards * and ? can be used in layer names.

    Select "Modify objects' colours and linetypes" to also modify line colours, point colours and linetypes of existing objects on the layers in the .MAP file.

    Notes

    • Use # to start any comment lines.
    • No other properties are modified.
    • If the new property value is empty (marked by consecutive commas), the property is not modified.
    • The maximum length of a Terramodel layer name is 16.
    • Spaces are valid Terramodel layer name characters

    See also

    LAYERSET
    Graphically modify layer properties
    LAYERNEW
    Add to a map file of new layer names
    DXFCHANG
    Rename layers in DXF files
    GC16
    Modify colours and linetypes of objects by layer, group or record name
    COLRLINE
    Modify colours and linetypes of objects by layer

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     LAYERNEW

    Create a new layer.

    Create a new layer using prompts, a command line argument or a toolbox button.

    Prompts

    Enter LAYERNEW with no arguments to be prompted to enter new layer name, line colour, point colour, and linetype. The Create New Layer button becomes available once you enter a new layer name that does not already exist. Click Create New Layer to create the new layer and make the new layer current.

    Run Excel

    Maintain a list of your project layers in your default spreadsheet application with more details than can be described in 16 characters. Such details might include the source, date, purpose or an equivalent long layer name.

    To create or open the list, enter LAYERNEW with no arguments and select Run Excel. Then, when you "Create New Layer", if an .XSLX with the same name as the project exists, that file is opened. The .XLSX does not exist, but a .CSV with that name exists, the new layer name is added to the end then the .CSV is opened. If neither the XSLX nor .CSV exists, a new .CSV is created containing all the layers in the project including the new layer.

    Command line

    To enter values directly into the command line, enter LAYERNEW followed by a space, a new layer name and colour attributes.

    The line_colour_number and point_colour_number of the new layer are optional integers from 0 to 255. The linetype of the new layer is SOLID.

    For example:

    LAYERNEW layername line_colour_number point_colour_number

    The layer name is required. Only characters to the first space are considered. To include spaces, enclose the layer name with "". For example, enter LAYERNEW top of bank to create layer TOP; enter LAYERNEW "top of bank" to create layer TOP OF BANK; enter LAYERNEW "top of bank" 30 125 to create layer TOP OF BANK with line colour 30 and point colour 125.

    Toolbox

    Use LAYERNEW with or without arguments in a workspace to create a new layer at the click of a toolbox button. Layernew.bmp is available for use in the button.

    Other uses

    The CSV files can also be used to create mapping file for use with LAYERMAP and DXFCHANG.

    See also

    LAYER
    Select or create a new layer from the toolbar
    LAYERSET
    Change layer properties
    CURRENT
    Select the current layer
    CREATELL
    Create layers from a layer list
    CSV2ADC
    Import lists of layer names
    LLRPT
    Report layers in layer lists

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     LAYERNXT

    Change the current layer to the next layer in alphabetical order.

    Change the current layer to the next layer in alphabetical order.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     LAYERSET

    Function key F2

    Create, edit and delete layers.

    Layers have become an accepted standard for CAD systems and are used for grouping common objects together so that they can be manipulated as a whole. When an object is created, it derives its colour and linetype from the current settings of the layer on which it is placed. This creates a simple and logical means of assigning these CAD properties to objects as they are created. These settings are stored with the project file.

    In addition to the common CAD uses of layers, Terramodel also views each layer as a separate DTM. You can separate logical portions of the design onto different layers and control each terrain model on a layer-by-layer basis. The Layer Settings dialog box is used to control several other layer properties. When a single layer is selected, it is highlighted in the layer list box and its name is displayed in the Name edit control. To select a single layer, simply click the desired name in the layer list box. To select multiple layers, press and hold CTRL while clicking your layer selections. To select all of the layers in the layer list box use the Select All command button.

    Limit which layers will be listed in the layer list box by using the mask setup options described later.

    Changes in the colour and linetype settings for layers do not change the properties of any existing objects—only objects that are created subsequently. Objects that are set to display the colour by layer will display the current layer colours.

    Name
    Change the name of the selected layer. This control is only available when a single layer is selected.
    (Layer) Colour
    Establish the colour of all objects, except points, to be created on each selected layer. When an object has a colour number of 0, Terramodel draws the object using the current colour setting of the layer on which the object is drawn.
    Ptcolour
    Establish the colour of points to be created on each selected layer. When an object has a colour number of 0 Terramodel draws the object using the current colour setting of the layer on which the object is drawn.
    (Layer) Linetype
    Establish the linetype that will be used for lines created on one or more selected layers.
    Status
    Set layer display and usage properties. The current status of each layer is displayed in the second column of the layer list box. None of the status properties are applied until the OK command button is selected. Status changes accumulate while you are in the Layer Settings dialog box until you click OK. For instance, you might change the status of certain layers and then use the mask setup to display only a subset of those layers. All status changes are applied when the OK command button is selected — regardless of the layers currently displayed in the layer list box.
    Visibility
    Control the visibility of all objects on one or more selected layers. When a layer is visible a "V" will appear in the second column of the layer list box. In addition to layer visibility, each object also has its own visibility status. If a layer is visible, you can also control the visibility of each object on the layer. When a layer is not visible, none of the objects on that layer are displayed, regardless of the visibility status of each object. When objects are not displayed they cannot be selected by the graphical selection options of the window, or clicking with the record select option. Non-visible objects can be selected by other direct means such as by colour, layer, linetype, etc.
    Snap
    Control whether you can graphically select objects using the window select option and clicking on objects with the record select option. When you can snap to objects on a layer, an "S" will appear in the second column of the layer list box. Searching the database by graphical selection goes much faster when Snap is turned off.
    Lock
    Control whether you can modify objects on the layer or add objects to the layer.
    Isolate
    Display a single selected layer. When the layer is isolated an "I" will appear in the second column of the layer list box. When isolated, only the selected layer will be displayed. When the isolate status is removed, all other layers return to their previous display status. Only one layer at a time can be isolated. When a layer is isolated, you cannot turn off its visibility.
    Delete
    Delete selected layers. When the delete status is set, the V, S, and I designations are replaced with "####" and are dimmed. Layers must be empty, in all views, before they can be deleted. Selected layers are not actually deleted until you click OK.
    Select All
    Select all the layers displayed in the layer list box. When all layers are selected only the visibility, snap, and lock status options can be set.
    Select by Llist
    Select or create a named list of layers. Using LLIST, you can associate this named list of layers with one or more dynaviews, allowing you to view only the layers contained in the layer list through the dynaview(s).
    Info
    Display the number of points on a selected layer as well as the minimum and maximum extents of the points on the layer.
    Offsets
    Enter profile elevation and chainage offsets for the highlighted layer. The elevation and chainage offsets for each layer are measured with respect to the first layer you created for the profile view.
    New
    Create a new layer.
    Mask setup
    Mask setup is a filter which lets you reduce the number of layers shown in the layer list box to those whose names have one or more characters in common. The abbreviated list keeps you from having to scroll through the entire list box to find specific layers.
    Mask
    Enter a mask. The mask supports wildcard characters, for example: *CON* where you want Terramodel to list layers with "CON" anywhere in the layer name.
    Use mask
    This check box toggles the mask off and on.
    Include off/locked layers
    These check boxes let you choose to include layers that have their status off and locked. When the objects on a layer are locked they cannot be edited, and an "L" will appear in the second column of the layer list box. Each time you change the mask phrase or Include options, toggle Off the Use Mask check box then toggle it back on to update your layer list.
    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Settings|​Layer settings...
    Toolbar button L Set
    Function key F2
    S  
     LAYINFO

    List summary information by layer for selected points.

    List by layer, for the selected points, the Layer name, View names, number of records, number of points, number of 3D Points, number of 3D points not in DTM and the maximum and minimum Easting, Northing and Elevation.

    To select all objects in all views, simply click OK.

    The totals are summed and the ranges also computed for all the selected points.

    See also

    LLAYER
    List the number of objects on each layer
    DTMINFO
    List DTM status of selected points
    COUNT
    Count number of objects of each type in each View
    OLIST2
    Count number of objects of each type in each View to P3Pad
    LIST
    List layers, objects, points, unused point numbers, sets, plines or lots

    TML date MenuSource 
    12/12/18   Reports|​More...|​Layer information Geocomp Update or $250  
     LAYLSET

    laylset toolbar button

    Make only layers in selected objects or layerlist visible or invisible.

    Make selected layers visible, and other layers invisible, or vice versa.

    By Objs
    Select layers by selecting objects.
    Save to Layer List
    Create or modify a layer list from the selected layers.
    Layer List
    Select layers by a layer list.
    Make Visible
    Make visible all selected layers and make all other layers invisible.
    Make Invisible
    Make invisible all selected layers and make all other layers visible.

    See also LLISTSET, QUIKLSET and SHOWDYNA.

    TML date MenuSourceGC
    01/09/18   View|Layer list
    Toolbar button
    Geocomp Update or $250 130
     LAYOUT

    Create parallel sets for subdivisions.

    Creates parallel offset lines, intersections and cul-de-sacs from a centreline alignment.

    Layout rights of way, footpaths, kerbs, gutters and intersections for an entire subdivision with a few steps.

    1. Create a layer for each class of roadway. A class of roadway is defined by the required offset line work that Layout creates and the type of intersections you will use.
    2. Create the design centreline for each roadway, placing the line work on each layer by class.
    3. Using the Settings option, define the offset parameters for each of the layers that you will use. Place the offset lines on layers that can be erased by layer name to simplify the process each time you re-design the roadways.
    4. Use the Cul-de-sac option to define a typical cul-de-sac. Use CULDESAC for more complex cul-de-sacs.
    5. Use the Offset option to select all of the centrelines to create offset line work.
    6. Use the Intersect option after the Offset option to layout intersections.

    Streets/Layout Options

    SETTINGS
    Establish offset parameters for centreline alignments based on the layers on which they exist.
    OFFSET
    Create offset alignments for selected centreline alignments.
    INTERSECT
    Create intersections for selected centreline alignments based on the parameters established for Radius and Return types in the Settings option.
    CUL-DE-SAC
    Establish the cul-de-sac parameters for a selected HAL. When a selected alignment is assigned cul-de-sac parameters, it automatically creates a cul-de-sac with the Offset option.
    Command date MenuSourceGC
    12/03/09   Cogo|​Streets|​Layout S 71
     LAYUSTN

    Relayer and colour selected objects based on the first four characters in the name.

    Relayer and colour selected objects created by ROADDTM based on the first four characters of the name.

    The name attribute of each RoadDtm object is derived from the point codes in the Road Template Shapes.

    If the first four characters in the name match the first four characters in the selected .MAP file, then relayer the object to the layer nominated in the map file. If the layer in the map file does not exist, is first created with the nominated colours.

    Each line in the map file is in the format:

    Name,Layer,Colour
    Command date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     LC

    Report coordinates.

    Report the East and North coordinates of the selected location.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     U 72
     LEVEL3W

    Add or edit three-wire level (stadia) information.

    Add or edit three-wire level (stadia) information.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    29/10/08 RG 676 Cogo|​Utilities|​3 Wire level reduction S level
     LEVELLST

    Report the level (stadia) points.

    Report the level (stadia) points.

    TML dateGuideMenuSource 
    29/10/08 RG 679 Cogo|​Utilities|​Level note reports S  
     LEVELS

    Add or edit single wire level (stadia) information.

    Add or edit single wire level (stadia) information.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    29/10/08 RG 673 Cogo|​Utilities|​Level note reductions S level
     LIDARGRD

    Import gridded ASCII lidar data.

    Import X, Y, Z and intensity from common ASCII lidar (light radar) file formats in a grid.

    Settings

    Lidar file
    Browse to select an ASCII file with the format X,Y,Z,Intensity
    Boundary/Hal
    Import only points within a closed boundary pline
    Max offset from Hal
    Import to points within an offset from the selected HAL
    Grid Interval
    Import only points near grid locations defined by coordinates evenly divisible by the grid interval
    Grid east and North Offset
    Enter values to be added to the even grid coordinates
    Max distance
    Import only points within the specified Max Distance of grid locations

    Grid spacing

    For example, if the points in the ASCII file are on a grid at roughly 1.0 spacing and you only want points at 10m spacing, specify a Grid Interval of 10and Max Distance less than 1.0.

    If the grid coordinates are not evenly divisible by the interval, for example the interval is 1.0 yet eastings are 10.5, 11.5, 12.5, etc., enter a Grid East Offset of 0.5.

    Intensity

    Any intensity value is assigned to both the colour number and the name. With colourmaps and penmaps that map these colour numbers to suitable display or plot colours, features such as trees can be made to stand out.

    See also

    LIDARIN
    to ignore grids
    GCESRIIN
    to import ESRI gridded LIDAR files
    GCLASIN
    to import .LAS files
    3DFILTER
    to further reduce the number of points

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     LIDARIN

    Import ASCII lidar data.

    Import X, Y, Z and Intensity or colour from common ASCII lidar (light radar) file formats.

    The comma-separated and tab-separated formats can include fourth or fifth fields to distinguish objects such as trees by colour or name in Terramodel.

    Operation

    1. Limit points
      • To import points only within a boundary, select a boundary.
      • To import only points near an alignment, select a HAL and enter a maximum offset.
      • To import all points, do not select any record.
    2. Click Import
    3. Browse to select ASCII files to import. Default file extensions include .THN, .GRD, .TXT, .NON, .XYZ, .FST, .ASC, .CSV, .DAT and .PTS. Use All files to select files with other extensions.

    Formats

    X,Y,Z or X Y Z
    Create points with Easting, Northing and Elevation from the three fields. The colour is derived from the current point colour.
    X,Y,X,Colour or X Y Z Colour
    Create points with Easting, Northing and Elevation from the first three fields and the colour number and point name from the fourth field.
    X,Y,Z,Colour,Group or X Y Z Colour Group
    Create points with Easting, Northing and Elevation from the first three fields, the colour number from the fourth field, the group number from the fifth field and the name from the fourth and fifth fields.

    See also

    GCLASIN
    Import data from .LAS or .LAZ files
    LIDARGRD
    Import only points on a grid
    GCESRIIN
    Import ESRI gridded LIDAR files
    3DFILTER
    Filter points
    GC56
    Swap X, Y or Z.

    TML date  Source 
    26/02/19     Geocomp Update or $200  
     LINEINT

    Evenly space points where coordinates are wrong.

    Recompute X and Y of points on a set by linear interpolation and even spacing, between two points. The elevations are unchanged.

    Use this to estimate the position of coordinates where the X and Y positions are incorrect but the sequence and elevations are correct, for example when a GPS and echo sounder passes under a bridge.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     LINETYPE

    Modify linetype.

    Modify the linetype of selected plines or sets.

    Select from linetypes previously loaded by LINETYPESET.

    See also

    DISPLAY​SET
    Display the linetype as SOLID using Quick Linetype.
    LLTYPE
    List the linetypes currently loaded in a project and select the current linetype.
    LINEZERO
    Modify the linetype to display By Layer
    LINETYPS
    Show the linetypes loaded into the current project

    Command dateGuideMenuSource40
    12/03/09HELPTM Modify|​Linetype S 40
     LINETYPE​SET

    Load or purge linetype definitions.

    Load definitions from a .LIN file or purge definitions from the project file.

    Load

    List and select linetype definitions.
    Browse...
    Browse to C:\TMCUSTOM\​GEOCOMP and select a linetype definition file.
    Load
    Select some linetype definitions, load them into the project and replace any previous definitions of the same names.
    Done
    Return to Load | Purge | Done

    Purge

    Purge linetype definitions not used by objects or settings in the project.

    Select all
    Select all unused linetype definitions
    Purge
    Purge selected linetype definitions
    Done
    Return to Load | Purge | Done

    Done

    Return to the command line

    Notes

    The maximum number of linetype definitions that can be stored in a project is 254.

    Removing a linetype definition saves a small amount of memory and reduces the length of the list of linetypes.

    The Terramodel .LIN file format is different to the AutoCAD .LIN and Geocomp .LNE formats.

    See also

    LINETYPE
    Modify the linetype of sets or plines.
    LLTYPE
    List the linetypes currently loaded in a project and select the new current linetype.
    LINETYPS
    Create samples of the loaded linetypes in the Sheet view.
    DOCUMENTS
    View documents including charts of available linetypes.
    IMPORT and PCOPY
    Import data and linetype definitions from a Terramodel.PRO.
    LINEZERO
    Modify the linetype of sets or plines to display linetype by layer.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09 UG Chapter 5 Settings|​Linetype settings S  
     Linetype​Toggle

    Toggle on or off the linetype selector on the toolbar.

    Linetype​Toggle is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY LINETYPETOGGLE which simulates the Linetype toolbar toggle in the Window menu.

    See also EDITINI Fixup and LLTYPE.

    Macro date MenuSource 
    Macro   Window|​Toolbar|​Linetype
    File|​Macro|​Play|​linetype​toggle
    S
    User-​definable
     
     LINETYPS

    Draw samples of all loaded linetypes.

    Create samples of linetypes loaded into the current project.

    Create an array of text and plines, in the sheet view, on the current layer, for each loaded linetype, with create text showing the linetype name and a pline with that linetype.

    The array of samples gives a visual indication of what linetypes are available in the current project.

    Once the number of linetypes loaded into a project exceeds 254, any new linetypes are not loaded and used, even when the linetype name is shown on a dialog. When this has happened, LINETYPS warns that the limit has been exceeded, plots the unusable linetypes in a different colour, and plots the index number of each linetype. Use LINETYPESET to purge unused linetypes and load new ones.

    To open charts listing all linetypes that can be loaded from .LIN. files supplied with Geocomp Update, use DOCUMENTS.

    TML date  SourceGC
    16/07/20     Geocomp Update or $250 180
     LINEZERO

    Modify linetype to Bylayer.

    Modify the linetype of selected plines or sets to By Layer.

    Plines or sets with a linetype of By Layer are displayed according to the linetype configured in LAYERSET for the layer they are on.

    See also COLOUR to Colour By Layer and LINETYPE to select other linetypes.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     LINKSET

    Configure DTM links.

    Control the way all DTM points are linked by commands that form DTMs.

    Link settings

    Elevation tolerance for flat triangles
    Set this tolerance for use with Remove Flat triangles.
    Maximum edge distance
    Where the distance between two edge points is greater than this maximum edge distance, the edge link is excluded unless this would prevent every DTM point from being linked into a single connected DTM, or there is a DTM edge formed by a series of connected breakline sets. This reduces the number of long thin triangles around the edge of the model.
    Maximum edge angle
    Where the angle opposite an edge link is greater than the maximum edge angle the link is excluded. This controls the number of thin edge triangles. The maximum value is 179°.
    Display links
    Display links for the selected DTM layers.
    Link colour
    The colour in which all links are displayed. If the colour is 0, the line colour of the layer in LAYERSET is used.
    Display links on layers
    Select one or more DTM layer for which links are to be displayed
    Remove flat triangles
    Rearrange links to remove as many any flat triangles as possible along breaklines when the elevation is within the specified tolerance of the first point in the set. This enhances DTMs created from digitized contour lines.
    Show triangle slope
    Show the slope of each triangle by an arrow. The display size of the arrow is fixed, so the zoom level determines the plotted size of the arrow. See also MG1 and GCFALL.
    Quick contours
    Interpolate and display contours with no smoothing for the selected DTM layers in the link colour. To create smooth contours, or create plines or text labels, use CONTOUR.
    Quick isopach generation
    This should be normally OFF so that during volume computation where the two DTM surfaces intersect additional points and breaklines are created in the isopach surface for a more accurate volume.
    Remove link between BLs
    When enabled, commands that cut cross-sections or profiles from a DTM will remove points interpolated on the link line between breaklines from the cross-section or profile unless:
    • The point on the link line lies 0.10m or more away from the interpolated line segment
    • The two adjacent breaklines share a common endpoint
    • The cross section line crosses two or more link lines between the two breaklines
    Only enable this when required for uploading strings to certain instruments.
    Advanced
    Link buffer
    Specify the number of unused links to initially allocate to each point. By initially allocating additional memory for each link during the linking process, fewer memory operations are required during linking and the link time is reduced. A value of two is recommended for optimal speed. Higher values will waste memory during linking and may take longer.
    Link step
    Determines the order in which points are linked. If the link step is the recommended value of ten, every tenth point is linked before all the other points are linked, added to the DTM. This can save DTM formation time with some gridded data sets. Increase this value if you exceed the maximum number of links that can be connected to a single point.

    Once you have established the correct maximum edge distance and angle for a particular DTM layer, create a DTMEDGE to retain those settings, before changing the link settings to suit a different DTM layer in the same project.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Settings|​Link settings S  
     LinkToggle

    Toggle on or off the DTM link display.

    LinkToggle is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY LINKTOGGLE which toggles the DTM links using LINKSET then REDRAW.

    Macro date MenuSource 
    01/09/18   File|​Macro|​Play|​link​toggle User-​definable  
     LIST

    List information about selected types of objects.

    List information to the P3pad report editor, where it can be formatted, manipulated and saved to a file or sent to your printer.

    Report styles

    Layers
    Display layer name, colour, linetype and number of objects (in all views) for the current layers defined in the project file with LLAYER.
    Objs
    Display the layer the objects exists on, the type of object, the name, the number of elements (for plines and sets), colour and linetype with LOBJS.
    Points
    Display Point number, Northing, Easting, Elevation, Name, etc., with LPOINTS or GCLPTS.
    Upts
    Display the unused point numbers within a specified point number range with LUNUSED.
    Sets
    Display set names, number of points in the set and a list of the point numbers forming the set with LSETS.
    Plines
     Display pline elevation, control points (vertices) and curve information with LPLINES.
    Lots
    Display a table of information about selected lots (closed sets) with LLOTS.

    Each report be started by selecting the LIST button, or directly from the command line by entering the command, or LIST then the first letters of the option. For example, to list the plines, enter LPLINES, LIST PL or LIST then select the Plines button.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource27
    12/03/09HELPTM Reports|​List
    Inquire|​List
    S 27
     LISTFONT

    List and create a table of loaded fonts

    List the loaded fonts in the message scroll and create table of sample text in the sheet view on layer LIST_FONTS.

    This the list of fonts used by text objects, text objects in blocks, text style settings and other Terramodel settings.

    LISTFONT does not list other available fonts. See TEXTMETRICS and FONTCHNG to load other fonts.

    As text is imported from a DWG, DXF or DGN file, if the text font is mapped by the selected AutoCAD Conversion Mapping File (ACF) or Microstation Conversion Mapping file (MCF) to a Terramodel font, the text font will be substituted.

    If the FNT file for a loaded font is missing and not substituted, message scroll displays a warning once, and any text in that font is displayed in the default font, usually TMODELF. To get rid of missing-font warning messages, you could:

    • Change the font of the text using TEXTMETRICS or FONTCHNG.
    • If the text was imported from DWG, DXF or DGN, add the missing font to the .ACF or .MCF conversion mapping file and import again into a new project.
    • Place a FNT file of the right name in the Fonts folder. For example, use FONTC.EXE to convert an .SHP font.
    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     LISTGRP

    List groups used by selected objects.

    List all group numbers, other than 0, in use by any selected object, to message scroll, in numerical order.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 86
     LISTLOTS

    List geometry of lots

    For each selected set, list the name, point numbers and the bearing, distance, (and arc and radius if relevant), of each segment.

    If the set is closed, the area is shown.

    You can write the report to a CSV file.

    See also LLOTS.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 85
     LISTPIPE

    List as-constructed pipe data.

    Compare natural surface points, with a design pipe and alignment.

    Specify the Design HAL, top of pipe set, natural surface points and pipe diameter.

    The report shows Chainage, Offset, Easting, Northing, RL (Top), Pipe cover, Trench depth, Segment grade and Deflection angle.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     LISTREF

    List reference files.

    List all the reference files for the current project.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     LISTTEXT

    List text objects.

    List selected text to a P3Pad report in easting order.

    EAT codes are not converted.

    See also GCTXTOUT which can export by record number, northings or tables.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     LLAYER

    Report the number of objects on each layer.

    Report for all the layers in the project, the colour, linetype and the number of objects.

    The same as LIST... Layers.

    See also

    LAYINFO
    Report number of points and extents of layers of selected objects
    GC32
    Report visibility of layers in layer lists
    LLRPT
    List the layer lists. Transfer layers from one project to another.

    TML date MenuSource 
    01/09/18   Reports|​List [Layers] S  
     LLIST

    Assign a layer list to multiple dynaviews

    Modify the layer list property of selected dynaviews.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Modify|​Layer list S 90
     LLISTSET

    Layer List Settings toolbar button

    Create and edit layer lists.

    Add or delete layers from a layer list and designate which of those layers are to be shown with background prominence.

    If a layer list is associated with a dynaview, only objects on layers on the layer list are displayed within the dynaview, even if the visibility of the layer is turned off. Layer list names can have up to 16 characters.

    For each layer list name, all layers are shown, but only the listed layers are highlighted in the central "Layers" window and shown in the background prominence window. Listed layers can be highlighted in the "Background prominence" window.

    If "Use shift" is enabled in the Advanced settings of PLOTSET, the value of the colour shift is added to the colour number of objects on layers with background prominence in the dynaview. Similarly, the pen shift is added when plotting.

    For example, if pens 65 to 128 are similar to pens 1 to 64 but with lighter colours (or thinner lines), for a dynaview showing design features to plot existing contours in the lighter colours, give the contour layer background prominence in the layer list used by that dynaview, and use a pen shift of 64.

    The Capture command button selects the layers for the currently selected layer list by capturing the current layer visibility settings in LAYERSET.

    Use the Save button to save the layer list configuration.

    See also

    DELAYLST
    Delete layer lists
    EDIT Dynaview
    Assign a layer list to a dynaview
    GC32
    Report number of objects on layer and whether layers are visible in each layerlist
    LAYERSET
    Control layer visibility by dialog or layer list
    LAYLSET
    Control layer visibility by layer list or selected objects
    LLIST
    List layer lists associated with dynaviews
    LLRPT
    Layer names in layer lists to P3Pad and CSV

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Settings|​​Layer list settings
    Toolbar button
    S 90
     LLOTS

    Create a table showing the block, lot, area and % area for each set selected.

    Create a table showing the block, lot, area and % area for each set selected that has been labelled with an area using LABELSETS.

    See also LISTLOTS.

    TML date MenuSourceGC
    29/10/08   Reports|​List [Lots] S 64
     LLRPT

    Layer list report

    Report each layer within each layer list.

    Report each layer within each layer list to P3Pad and to a .CSV in the project file location. The format of the .CSV is

    layer_list,layer_name,line_colour,point_colour,linetype

    To include all layers, first use LAYERSET to make all layers visible, then LLISTSET to Capture the visible layers to a new layer list. Layers with no objects are included.

    Use LLRPT and CREATELL to transfer layers, layer lists, layer colours and layer linetypes from one project to another.

    See also

    LLAYER
    Report the colours, linetype and number of objects for each layer.
    GC32
    Report the colours, linetype, number of objects and layer list visibility for each layer.
    GCMATOUT
    Report materials
    TMXLAYER
    Report layers to a .TMX.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     U 90|180
     LLTABLE

    Create a coordinate table of points including latitudes and longitudes.

    Create a table of coordinates from selected points with columns for Point number, Easting, Northing, Elevation, Description, Latitude and Longitude.

    Points
    Select the points.
    Origin
    Enter the location of the upper left corner of the table.
    Settings
    Title
    Select Use Title Box to include a title of up to 61 characters at the top of the table.
    Field Number
    The row number in the field No. selection is the Column number in the resulting table.
    Width
    Enter the maximum number of characters for the column of the highlighted Field No.
    Heading
    Enter the heading of the column of the highlighted Field No.
    Prefix/Suffix
    Enter up to 13 characters to prefix Pt# (point number), North (y-value), East (x-value), Elev (elevation), Desc (point name) or suffix Latitude and Longitude.
    Value
    Select from Pt#, North, East, Elev, Desc, Latitude, Longitude or None.
    Lines/Page
    Enter the number of lines before starting a new table at the same y-coordinate position and one sheet unit apart to the right.
    Layer
    Select the layer of the new table.
    Text style
    Select the text style of the new table entries.
    Colour
    Select the colour of the new table entries and frame.
    Format of Latitude and Longitude
    Choose from DDD.d, DDD MM.m and DDD MM SS.s
    Number of decimal places (0-6).
    Enter the number of decimal places.
    Create CSV file
    Export the table data to a .CSV file.

    Notes

    • The points are sorted into integer points in point number order followed by alpha points in alphabetical order.
    • The eastings and northings update as the points are moved.
    • To update the latitudes and longitudes, recreate the table.
    • If a suitable "From" coordinate system has not already been configured, you will be notified to first use another command such as GCCOORD or GCLLGRID to specify the "From" system.

    See also GCTABLE and GCLLGRID.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     LLTYPE

    Change the linetype of the current layer.

    Open the linetype dialog so you can change the linetype of new sets and plines in the current layer.

    This is the same as clicking on the linetype picker on the toolbar, or changing the linetype of the current layer using LAYERSET.

    You can also change the linetype using an argument.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Toolbar S 2
     LOADATT

    Load or reload the specified attribute definition file.

    Load or reload the specified attribute definition file

    Command date  Source 
    29/10/08     S  
     LOBJCOLOR

    Change the line colour of the current layer.

    Open the line colour dialog so you can change the colour number of new plines or sets in the current layer.

    This is the same as clicking on the left-hand colour picker on the toolbar, or changing the colour of the current layer using LAYERSET.

    You can also change the colour using an argument.

    Command date MenuSourceGC
    12/03/09 UG Toolbar S 2
     LOBJS

    List details of selected objects.

    Includes the layer, type, number of elements (for plines and sets), colour, point number, font name and linetype.

    The same as LIST... Objs.

    TML date MenuSourceGC
    01/09/18   Reports|​List [Objs] S 27
     LOTJOIN

    Create closed sets from sets or plines enclosing selected text.

    Create closed sets by tracing clockwise inside selected sets and plines around locations at the insertion points of selected text objects.

    The new closed sets are created on the current layer with names derived from the corresponding text objects.

    If you don't have the text, create it with GC35 and LABPT.

    LOTJOIN can be used to:

    • Create closed sets for subdivision lots with names from lot numbers for use with lot-related commands such as LABELSETS and GCDIMLOT.
    • Transfer names from text onto mining block boundaries for use with GCGRDVOL.
    • Trace multiple boundaries, instead of GCTRACE which traces one lot a time.
    • Replace closed sets with sets that are all clockwise, for use with OFFELEVM.

    See also AUTOSET for when you just have the points.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     S 64
     LPLINES

    List details of selected plines.

    Includes the name, starting chainage, elevation, coordinates along the pline, and the radius associated with any vertex that has been curved, of selected plines.

    The same as LIST... Plines.

    TML date MenuSourceGC
    01/09/18   Reports|​List [Plines] S 84
     LPOINTS

    List the coordinates of the selected points.

    List selected points with options to include Point Number, Record Number, Easting, Northing, Elevation, Name, Layer, Colour, View, Symbol Number and General Information.

    In the Geocomp Update, LPOINTS is an alias for GCLPTS which includes options for Group and Export to CSV. To list Layers, Objects, Unused Points, Sets, Plines or Lots, see LIST. To list radiations, see LPTSRAD. To list with heights as depths, see PORTSC1.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    01/09/18 RG 423 Reports|​List [Points] S 26
     LPTCOLOR

    Change the default colour for new points on the current layer.

    Open the points colour dialog so you can change the colour number of new points in the current layer.

    This is the same as clicking on the right-hand colour picker on the toolbar, or changing the default colour of new points on the current layer using LAYERSET.

    You can also change the colour using an argument.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09 UG Toolbar S 2
     LPTSRAD

    List the coordinates and radiations of the selected points.

    Similar to LPOINTS and GCLPTS except it also includes radiations from a stand point.

    If you chose to change the point name to include the bearing and distance, you can use GCTABLE to tabulate them.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 59
     LSEC1

    Label long sections in Geocomp-style.

    Label selected profiles with a table beneath showing chainages, elevations and grades.

    Operation

    1. Set your active alignment
    2. Create or extract profiles
    3. If your profiles extend over multiple sheets, create plotboxes
    4. Select profiles in the profile view in the order you want them labelled
    5. Treat all profiles as Design, or not
    6. The Help button summarizes the process
    7. Click on Label
    8. Modify settings
    9. Click OK to create a table of labels below the profiles
    10. Dynaview the labelled profiles to the Sheet view

    Profiles

    Select plines in the Profile view that represent long sections or vertical alignments. Select by Record and click on the plines in the order you want the profiles to be labelled, from top to bottom.

    PlotBoxes

    If the sections require multiple sheets, select plotboxes to define the chainage range of each sheet. For single sheets, you do not need to select any plotboxes. If selected plotboxes do not refer to an alignment, when you label you are prompted whether to refer them to the active alignment.

    Treat all Profiles as Design

    Profiles treated as Design profiles are labelled with grade and vertical curve details. Either "Treat all Profiles as design" or treat only profiles with vertical curves as design.

    Help

    The Help button shows a brief instructions.

    Label

    Profile Information

    The profile plines are listed in a table by record number and name in the order they were selected. Each has Y or N for "Label Design" indicating whether the profile is to labelled with grades and any vertical curves. To change this status, click on the row in table and change Y or N at the top of the last column.

    Other Profile information to be specified includes linework layer, linetype, chainage and elevation text style, start chainage, end chainage, chainage interval and whether to label at xlines.

    If you selected plotboxes, the start chainage, end chainage and datum elevation are computed from the plotboxes. If not, the initial values are derived from the extents of the selected plines. You can manually edit the ranges, or reset them after you make any edits to the plines.

    Displayed information

    Specify box text style, box width, horizontal line space, datum elevation (see above), vertical curve label interval, vertical curve text style, chainage label text style, decimal places for Cut|Fill, Design Elevation, Existing elevation and chainages, whether to include a side box, match colour, split vertical curve details, label VIP deflection angles, include distances, include sample lines, include design grades or generate a report.

    To label only specific points in a profile, convert the profile to a set, give those points names, and then select "Only label IPs with names when the Profile is a SET".

    Additional boxes and Information

    Specify whether to label horizontal curve, superelevations, cut|fill differences, empty boxes, and plan polygons.

    Any cut|fill values are shown with the entered label in a new box above the label box for the first profile, The values are differences between the elevations of the last and first profiles. To reverse the sign, select "-ve Cut/Fill".

    To show the extent, names and colours of user-​defined closed plines and sets in the Plan view that define regions along the active alignment, select an "Additional Info Layer List for Plan Polygons" with layers in reverse alphabetical order. Such regions might represent, for example, tenure, trench material, pipe type or municipality.

    Active alignment

    To keep profiles along the same horizontal alignment together, use ACTIVE to set an active alignment before creating profiles and plotboxes. To match profiles along different alignments, for example to match the chainages of left and right kerb profiles to a centreline profile, REFER the kerb horizontal alignments to the centreline alignment before extracting the kerb profiles. In the profile view, profiles that refer to a horizontal alignment, and labels that refer to those profiles, are hidden as you change to different active alignments with ACTIVE.

    Multiple scales

    If you need profiles at more than one vertical scale, either create and explode a dynaview before changing vertical scales, or use another view like View 8, to create the more labelled profiles.

    See also LSECUK, TPLSEC, LVC and LABELVAL.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    16/01/19 built-in help Draft|​label profiles (LSEC1) Geocomp Update or $275 493
     LSECUK

    Label long sections in United Kingdom-​style.

    Refer to HELPTM.

    See also LSEC1, TPLSEC, LVC and LABELVAL.

    The TML name is LSEC_UK. If LSECUK does not run from the command line, create an alias from LSECUK to LSEC_UK or enter LSEC_UK.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    01/09/18 HELPTM Draft|​Label profiles (UK)
    Draft|​Label profiles
    S 493
     LSETS

    List set details

    Includes the name, the number of points in the set, and the point numbers that form the selected sets.

    The same as LIST... Sets.

    TML date MenuSourceGC
    29/10/08   Reports|​List [Sets] S 61
     LUNUSED

    List the unused point numbers within the specified point number range.

    The same as LIST... Upts.

    Command date MenuSource 
    29/10/08   Reports|​List [Unused] S  
     LVC

    Label points along a vertical curve.

    See also LSEC1, LSECUK and LABELVAL.

    TML date  SourceGC
    29/10/08     S 412
     LYRPROP

    Edit layer properties.

    Configure isolate, set/pline colour, point colour, linetype, LListDTM.

    See also LAYERSET.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 40
     MacroPlay

    Play a keystroke macro.

    Execute the instructions contained within a saved keystroke macro file.

    You can pick macros from a drop down list of all .MAC files in the Macro folder specified by SYSTEM, such as C:\​TMCUSTOM\​Macros.

    Specify a pause interval in milliseconds.

    Click Run to execute the selected macro with the specified pause interval between each step.

    A macro can be run from a toolbar. For example, to cascade views from the command line, type "macroplay cascade" to play our cascade.mac which is the same as picking Cascade from the Windows menu.

    A macro can also be used in a command ALIAS. For example, if you create an alias with Command "macroplay" and Arguments "cascade", you can play the cascade macro by typing CASCADE at the command line. This new command can now also be used in a toolbox.

    You can launch a macro when Terramodel starts by including MacroPlay in the target property of the Terramodel shortcut.

    If "Enable command completion" is turned on in FAVORITES, the macro may not work properly.

    Macros are created by MACRORECORD.

    To find Macros created by Geocomp Systems search this list for "Macro" or open DOCUMENTS then select Macros under Programming.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM
    README_macros.pdf
    File|​Macro|​Play S  
     MacroRecord

    Record a keystroke macro.

    Record series of keystrokes as a single command to run later.

    When you run MACRORECORD, the message is displayed in the message scroll area: "Macro recording started. Press Ctrl + Break to stop recording."

    Then execute the Terramodel commands that you want to include in your macro.

    Press Ctrl + Break to stop recording then save the macro giving it a suitable name.

    Use MACROPLAY to execute the saved macro.

    To enable picking objects with a mouse, use the Insert key to indicate the start of interactive selection and the End key to indicate the End.

    While in macro-recording mode, use of the keyboard and mouse buttons is restricted to actions that can be replayed by Terramodel. You cannot select commands from menus using the mouse. You must navigate with keys such as Alt + "letter" combinations, Enter, Tab, key and cursor arrows and function keys.

    Macros are saved as .MAC files in the Macro folder specified by SYSTEM such as C:\TMCUSTOM\​Macros.

    • Before creating macros, turn off "Enable command completion" in FAVORITES.
    • Before entering macros, move the mouse to the side of the desk and turn it upside down as a reminder not to use it.
    • Don't use the up arrow cursor key to select a previously used command; type the command again
    • Don't play a macro from a macro
    • Don't play a macro from a toolbar
    • Search the TML list to see if what you want has already be done
    • Consider commissioning someone like Geocomp Systems to write a TML instead
    • Backspaces and deletions will play as you typed them
    • Take your time to get it right

    Keystroke macros are completely different to TMLs. Third-party macro software such as AutoIt can also be used to write macros.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM File|​Macro|​Record S  
     MAGNIFY

    Magnify the view scale by a factor.

    Enter a factor for your view scale. A value greater than 1.0 expands the image, a value less than 1.0 shrinks the image.

    Magnify can be used with arguments. For example, alias ZI to "Magnify 1.5" meaning Zoom In x2 and ZO to "Magnify 0.5" meaning Zoom Out 2X.

    See also ZOOM and ZOOMSCAL.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM View|​Magnify S 134,135
     MAG600IN

    Import Magellan Explorist 600 GPS data.

    Import NMEA strings from Magellan Explorist 600 GPS receivers.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     MAGELLIN

    Import Magellan GPS data.

    Import NMEA strings tagged as $PMGNWPL from Magellan GPS receivers.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     MAGELOUT

    Export Magellan GPS data.

    Export Magellan GPS Waypoint .UPT file.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     MAPIIN

    Import MapInfo .MIF and .MID files.

    Import MapInfo .MIF and .MID files from GIS applications.

    Browse to select a .MIF file and click Import.

    Graphical object types imported are point, line, pline, region, arc, text, rect, roundrect and ellipse.

    A point can have a symbol and attributes. Any "old" Mapinfo symbol is substituted with the nearest equivalent Terramodel symbol.

    Attributes defined in any .MID (Mapinfo database) file with the same name are also imported. Use DISPFEAT to select, report and label attributes.

    The current colour is used unless a colour from 0 to 255 is specified.

    Fonts, patterns and brushes are ignored.

    To import a .TAB database, first convert to .MIF and .MID using a program like Mapinfo or TAB2TAB.

    TML date  Source 
    7/03/19     Geocomp Update or $200  
     MAPIOUT

    Export MapInfo .MIF files.

    Export map linework to .MIF for use in GIS applications.

    Specify a central longitude and scale factor.

    The corresponding database file is .MID. MAPIOUT writes an empty .MID for those applications which require one, such as Trimble Pathfinder.

    Each .MID specification requires a custom TML. For example, FYATBOUT is an example of a custom command to export to MapInfo .MIF|.MID with attributes to suit D-SPEC (as-built drainage specification). Contact Geocomp Systems if you require a custom TML.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or POA for custom .MIF/.MID 320
     MAPPOINTS

    Create sets from point names using MAP file.

    String points and place symbols using an ASCII mapping file.

    Buttons

    Points
    Select points to be strung
    Map file
    Select a .MAP file in the format: Feature code,​lineype,​layer name,​line colour number.
    Properties
    Line identifying symbols
    Enter characters to identify beginning, ending and double-coding
    Arc identiying symbols
    Enter characters to identify arcs defined by point at start, on curve or at end
    Ignore symbols
    Enter rows of characters to identify points that are not to be strung
    Use map file
    Specify whether to use the map file or create sets with SOLID linetypes on the current layer
    Edit map file
    Open the .MAP file in a text editor such as Notepad
    Create
    Create sets joining points

    See also

    AUTODRAFT
    MAPPOINTS has been superseded by AUTODRAFT.
    CSV2ADC
    Convert a .MAP file to an .ADC file for AutoDraft

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Draft|​Linework from points S DC 4
     MASSDIAG

    Scale an exploded masshaul diagram.

    Scale and tidy objects created in the sheet view by the Quick explode function in MASSHAUL so that the units of the axes are chainage and volume.

    Select an empty view, such as View 8. Use VIEWSET to enable vertical exaggeration in View8 and to enter a value that suits the diagram. A typical value is 0.1. After any change of vertical exaggeration, use ALL to apply the change to the current view.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 477
     MASSHAUL

    Create a masshaul diagram.

    Create a graph of earthwork volume against distance.

    Actions on the mass haul command menu include Phase names, Haul ranges, Significant points, Material import/Export, Balance, Report labels and Reports.

    See Terramodel Help for more details.

    Select Quick Explode to create a diagram in the sheet view.

    Use MASSDIAG to rescale and tidy the diagram and GCHAULMN to manage the hauls.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Masshaul|​Diagram... S 477
     MASSIMPORT

    Masshaul import and export locations.

    Specify the chainages where material is imported or exported for a MASSHAUL diagram.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Masshaul|​Import/​Export S  
     MATCH

    Modify objects by matching properties of a another object.

    Modify selected objects to match selected properties of a reference object.

    Objs:
    Select objects to be modified
    Ref Obj:
    Pick one object to compare with
    Cancel
    Close the command without modifying

    Once you pick the reference object, use tick boxes to indicate which properties of the selected objects to modify to match the properties of the reference object.

    Only properties of the reference object type are selectable.

    Tick box settings are not retained.

    The term "Ref Obj" is not used here in the sense used by REFER or any other command.

    See also

    MATCHOBJ
    An improved replacement for MATCH, supplied with Geocomp Update
    TEXTMETRICS
    Modify text properties with the option to copy from a picked object
    GCSTYLE
    Modify text to match a text style
    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    29/10/08 RG 467 Modify|​Match S 40
     MATCHOBJ

    Modify objects to match properties of a picked object.

    Modify selected objects to match selected properties of a picked object.

    Objs:
    Select objects to be modified
    Picked object:
    Pick one object to compare with
    Match selected Objects with Picked Object
    Indicate which properties of the selected objects are to be modified to match the properties of the picked object. Tick box settings are retained for the current session only.
    Cancel
    Close the command without modifying

    See also

    TEXTMETRICS
    Modify text properties with the option to copy from a picked object
    GCSTYLE
    Modify text to match a text style

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    25/10/19 RG 467 Modify|​Match Geocomp Update or $250 40
     MATERIALS

    Material manager.

    List the materials for road design template, subgrade and existing surface managers.

    See Terramodel Help for more detail.

    See GCMATOUT and GCMATIN to import and export materials

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Materials...
    Channel|​Materials...
    S  
     MATRIX

    Create a matrix of copies of selected objects.

    Create multiple copies of selected objects in rows and columns.

    Select the objects, then specify the number of rows and columns. Click Horz to specify the bearing of and spacing between rows. Click Vert to specify the bearing of and spacing between columns.

    Command date MenuSource 
    12/03/09   Edit|​Matrix S  
     MDLIN

    Import MDL ALS *.CDU data.

    Import .CDU data files from Quarryman Autoscanning Laser System (ALS) by Measurement Devices Ltd (MDL).

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     POA  
     MEASUNIT

    Configure measurement units.

    Set the units of measure for the project and the sheet.

    Prototype

    Measurement units for NEW projects are derived from the prototype project specified in SYSTEM. Use GCHELP to confirm the current prototype. If this .PRO file is not found on the TSP, the measurement units will default to feet and inches.

    If you find that you are working in a project with the wrong units, because your prototype was incorrect, the best solution is usually to correct the prototype and start again with a NEW project. If you "Convert Units" instead, you will not be working with a project based on your prototype.

    Project units

    Select from feet or meters (=metres). Do not select User-defined units unless you have commands specially programmed for this purpose using TML.

    Sheet units

    Select from inch, cm, mm, dm or m. If the project units are feet, select inch. If the project units are meters, select cm. If you select any other sheet unit, text created by LABELPOINT will scale incorrectly as might cross sections created by XSHEET and RDX.

    Convert units

    To "Convert units" from metres to feet, or "Convert from feet to meters", in an existing project, select either International foot or U.S. Survey foot. This scales X, Y and Z coordinates of all objects by the factor. This also scales many dimensional settings in the project. For example, the settings for volume units in UNITSSET change from cubic metres to cubic yards and Alt areas from Ha to Acres (or vice versa).

    Scaling

    If project units are feet, select Project to Sheet. If project units are metres, select Project to Project.

    See also

    GCSCALE
    Scale objects in X, Y and Z without changing any settings.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM File|​Measurement units... S 44
     MENUCFG

    Configure the menus.

    Select which Terramodel menus to use by selecting file a containing Terramodel menus.

    Menu configuration file

    Terramodel uses default menus, unless you use MENUCFG to select a different menu configuration file (.M). If you have installed Geocomp Update M, use MENUFCFG to configure Terramodel to use one of the Geocomp menu files. Use GCHELP command to find out which menu configuration file you are using.

    Menus include some commands that vary according to the installed language (English, English (US), Spanish, French or German) and other commands that are hard-coded into the .M file.

    Standard menu configuration files

    If no menu configuration file has been selected, Terramodel uses one of these menu files, depending on the modules on the security key.

    PAYDIRTSITEWORKCAD.M
    For use with Paydirt SiteWork CAD
    SPCAD.M
    For use with Field data and CAD modules
    SPCONSTR.M
    For use with ConstructionPak
    SPDESIGN.M
    For use with DesignPak
    SPFIELDDATA.M
    For use with Field Data module
    SPSURVEY.M
    For use with SurveyPak
    TMODWIN.M
    For use with TerraPak.
    TUNNEL.M
    For use with tunnels
    GSTPLUS.M
    For use with Geodimeter Software Tools

    These .M files can be selected from C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Terramodel\Locale\... according to the installed language.

    Geocomp Update menu configuration files

    The Geocomp Update installs the following alternatives into C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp:

    GEOCOMP.M
    For users outside USA with menus for survey and construction.
    GEOCOMP_US.M
    For users in USA with menus for survey and construction.
    GEOCOMP+.M
    For users outside USA with menus for survey and construction including Tunnel, Hydro and Pipe.
    GEOCOMP+_US.M
    For users in USA with menus for survey and construction including Tunnel, Hydro and Pipe.
    GEOCOMP+HDMS.M
    For users outside USA with menus for hydrographic survey and channel construction.
    GEOCOMP+HDMS_US.M
    For users in USA with menus for hydrographic survey and channel construction.
    VIEWER.M
    For clients and managers to view Terramodel project (.PRO) files.

    Menu configuration file location

    .M files can be manually edited in a text editor. Copy an existing file and give it a new name. New .M files are issued with each Geocomp Update to suit changes to commands.

    The name of the current menu configuration file is configured in TMODWIN.INI for use with all projects. Terramodel searches through the Terramodel Search Path (TSP) to find the .M file with the configured name. GCHELP shows the name and location of the menu file.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM File|​System configuration|​Change menus... S CG F
     MERGE

    Merge two DTMs.

    Create a merged DTM by copying an Inside DTM and that portion of an Outside DTM outside the extent of the Inside DTM.

    The Inside layer is typically a Design surface, such as one created by DESIGN. The Outside surface is typically an existing surface. It must extend beyond the Inside surface, though it does NOT have to completely encompass the Inside surface. The Merged layer should start empty.

    Set names are not transferred to the new layer.

    See also GCMATCH to match contours, JOIN to join matched contours, GC33 to create the highest or lowest of two overlapping surfaces, GC33MULT to create the highest or lowest of multiple overlapping surfaces, DTMMATCH to match elevations of two overlapping surfaces, GCMERGE to replace a surface with multiple overlapping surfaces, GCCLIP to clip multiple surfaces from a single surface and GCCOPY to copy multiple objects into a single surface.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM DTM|​Merge layers... S 198
     MESSAGE​SCROLL

    Toggle on or off the visibility of the message scroll display area above the command line.

    MessageScroll is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY MESSAGESCROLLTOGGLE which simulates the Message scroll command in the Window menu.

    See also CLEARMESS which clears current messages from the message scroll and EDITINI which can reset defaults including turn on message scroll.

    Macro date MenuSource 
    20/06/13   Window|​Message scroll
    File|​Macro|​Play|​messages​croll​toggle
    S
    User-​definable
     
     MG1

    Label and report slopes at triangle centroids.

    At the centroid of each triangle of a selected DTM, create a point with elevation equal to the % slope in the steepest direction and, optionally,

    • Place a triangular symbol showing the direction of slope
    • Create text showing the slope
    • Create a comma-delimited file reporting Easting, Northing, Elevation, Slope and Aspect
    • Create an "Enhanced" comma-delimited file reporting Easting, Northing, Elevation, Slope, Aspect and Area

    Where there is a double triangle and no label, the slope is close to zero. If the text and arrow are too big, reduce the Plan View Scale (try 1:20) with VIEWSCAL. The labels and symbols are placed on the current layer in the current line colour.

    See also GCFALL and LINKSET.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     MHIMPORT

    Import a cut|fill volume report for mass haul analysis.

    Nominate a roadway and phases for MASSHAUL and import a cut|fill volume report in .CSV format.

    See also GCHAULMN which has more options.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     U 476
     MINMAPIN

    Import a MineMap .SVY file.

    Import a MineMap .SVY file.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     MIRROR

    Copy objects to a mirror image.

    Copy selected objects to new locations the same distances beyond an axis defined by two points as the current distances to that axis.

    Labelling and some other parameters are not copied. The new objects retain the original layer names. Tables are not mirrored.

    Text objects are still readable. If you want backwards text, EXPLODE to plines first.

    See also GC93, MIRRORDY and GC56.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Modify\Mirror S 123
     MIRRORDY

    Mirror dynaviews about their Y axes.

    Mirror selected dynaviews about their Y axes and move their insertion points if rotated.

    TML date  Source 
    29/10/08     S  
     MKBLK

    Make an internal unit block.

    Create a 1, 2, or 3 point unit block from selected Terramodel objects.

    Define an insertion point, a Y scale point (for 2 and 3 point blocks) and a Z scale point (for 3 point blocks).

    The selected objects are scaled into a 1 * 1 unit block. Use the measured point to point distances to scale the object. In order to have consistent results when you insert the block, you should orient a block from bottom to top (in the Y direction) and from left to right (in the X direction). EXPLODE any hatching and text into plines first.

    OBJS
    Select the objects that create the unit block.
    Ins:
    Define the insertion point for the unit block.
    Y:
    Select a location for the Y direction and scale. The distance from the insertion point to this point is scaled to 1.0 unit in the Y direction of the unit block. Two and three point blocks are rotated and scaled along the Y axis.
    X:
    Select a location for the X direction and scale. The distance from y-axis to this point is scaled to 1.0 unit in the X direction of the unit block.
    OK
    Click the OK button to create the unit block with a block name and (optional) description.

    A unit block is created so that the critical dimension of the block in the plan view is one unit in size. This means that the placed block will be the size of one unit times the scale you enter. For example, if you create a block from some objects making up a "tree canopy" one unit in diameter, and enter a scale of 3.50 when you place it, the tree block will be 3.50m across. UNITBLK and AUTODRAFT can use up to three block placement points. A one-point block is placed on the insertion point. A two-point block is placed with the insertion point (0,0) at point 1 and (0,1) at point 2. A three-point block is placed with the insertion point (0,0) at point 1, (0,1) at point 2 and (1,0) at point 3.

    You can simply create multiple-point blocks using BLOCK Create if your block data are arranged with those coordinates. With MKBLK you can transform the block as you create it by selecting locations to be "Ins" (0,0 or point 1), "Y" (0,1 or point 2) and "X" (1,0 or point 3).

    To create an external block use the Save option of the BLOCK command.

    TML date MenuSourceGC
    29/10/08   Draw|​Block|​Make S 196
     MKBLKINT

    Convert external blocks to internal blocks.

    Convert selected blocks from a list of external blocks into internal blocks.

    You can also use the Modify function of BLOCK one block at a time.

    Use DELBLKS to delete missing external blocks.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    29/10/08 RG 1236 Draw|​Block|​Make internal S 196
     MKV

    Display temporary vertex markers.

    Display temporary vertex markers at each point of a set or vertex of a pline.

    The vertex marker size is set by SYSTEM. The colour is the cursor colour.

    No objects or labels are created; when the screen refreshes the markers have gone.

    See also

    GCMARKER
    Display vertex markers on visible plines
    SYSTEM
    Configure system variables including vertex marker size

    TML date MenuSourceGC
    21/01/20   Reports|​Mark|​Vertices
    Draw|​Mark vertices
    S F8,60,93, 137,194
     MOSSIN

    Import Survey, Design and Models from Moss GENIO data.

    Import Survey, Design and Models including alignments, surveys, design strings and triangles from Moss GENIO data.

    Interpret GENIO codes using a .MIN mapping file, log errors, and treat 2D, 3D, 6D and 12D strings separately.

    Default GENIO and map file names can be set by PROJECTV.

    See also

    MOSSMIN
    Extract feature codes from a MOSS GENIO file to create an initial .MIN file
    MOSSTRI
    Import triangles within a boundary
    MOSSOUT
    Export MOSS GENIO files for MOSS and MX
    SURVCONT
    Export MOSS GENIO files for Trimble instruments.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    17/01/20 ADD 9.7 353 File|​Misc. Import|​Moss GENIO
    File|​Misc. Import/Export|​Moss Import
    S FC M
     MOSSMIN

    Create MOSS .MIN file from MOSS GENIO features.

    Report features in a selected MOSS GENIO to P3Pad, save the report as a .MIN file in Text format then manually edit the file to enter corresponding properties.

    The MOSS .MIN file is used by MOSSIN to map features in a MOSS GENIO file to desired Terramodel properties. MOSSMIN creates or adds to a .MIN file from the features in a specified MOSS GENIO file. Use the first 1, 2, 3 or 4 characters from the feature code or the characters before the first space.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     MOSSOUT

    Export Moss GENIO data.

    Export MOSS GENIO data using an .MSX mapping file.

    In the dialog, specify how to handle specific string types.

    In the MSX file, for each record (or layer) name filter, specify the name, the layer name or fixed characters for the 080 record in the GENIO file

    Also specify a DEFAULT name filter for selected objects which do not match the name or layer filter.

    The whole file is a single GENIO model, unless you specify multiple models using layerlists.

    If the GENIO file is intended for set out using Trimble Survey Controller or Trimble Access, use SURVCONT instead.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    17/01/20 ADD 9.7 353 File|​Misc. Export|​Moss GENIO
    File|​Misc. Import/Export|​Moss Export
    S FC M
     MOSSTRI

    Import terrain models from Moss GENIO data within a boundary.

    Import triangles from Moss GENIO data within a clipping boundary.

    You have options to create sets for triangle sides and to separate models into layers.

    If the GENIO file includes any objects other than DTM triangles, or you don't need to clip the triangles during the import, use MOSSIN.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     MOVE

    Move objects to another location.

    Move selected objects by the difference between a pair of entered X,Y (or X,Y,Z if 3D is ticked) coordinates.

    If you only have the difference in X,Y, enter 0,0 in From.

    To move objects from one layer to another, use RELAYER. To move objects from one View to another, use REVIEW or GCREVIEW.

    To move a set, make sure you select the set and the points used to define the set.

    If Dragging is ON in SYSTEM, you can see the objects as you move them. If Drag Text Quick is ON in DISPLAYSET, text is displayed as text boxes only during the move.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Modify|​Move S 35
     MOVEPAD

    movepad toolbox

    Move a pad DTM and report volumes.

    Create batters from a pad DTM to the current DTM and calculate cut and fill quantities.

    Project batters up or down from the selected set (around the outside of the pad DTM) to meet the current DTM layer.

    As you shift pad layer by mouse using From and To locations, or a new elevation for the whole pad layer, MOVEPAD recomputes and displays cut and fill quantities in the message scroll.

    To shift the elevation by increments, use the dPad toolbox to select the set with MOVEPAD movepad toolbar button, enter the shift increment with PADSHIFT padshift toolbar button then shift the pad up with PADUP padup toolbar buttton or down with and PADDOWN paddown toolbar button.

    Limitations

    • The slope settings are defined by DESIGNSET or EDIT.
    • If there is no current DTM layer, set one first with DTMCH.
    • You select a set, which selects the pad layer.
    • You can only select one set, so you can only use the one cut slope and one fill slope.
    • The selected set must be a valid DTM edge.
    • The batters must project to intersect the current DTM layer.
    • If you nominate a new elevation, the elevations of all points on the pad layer are replaced resulting in a horizontal pad.
    • If your pad layer includes multiple elevations such as ramps, kerbs, crossfalls or steps, do not enter an elevation.
    • Shrink and swell factors are not applied.

    See also

    CUTFILL
    Move a pad and balance earthworks at the same time.

    Command Purpose
    MOVEPAD Adjust a flat horizontal pad enclosed by a set, and show volumes with no shrink or swell as you move by mouse, or raise or lower by PADUP or PADDOWN
    ELEV and GCELEV Raise or lower all the elevations on a layer by a relative value
    DESIGN Compute the batters from a DTM edge without shifting the pad, using shrink and swell factors
    CUTFILL Compute the batters which meet a target net volume while shifting or rotating the pad and adjusting for shrink and swell factors
    SIDESLOPE Compute the batters using templates

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Modify|​Move pad
    Toolbox
    S 71+​DTMC+​DTM3
     MSCAPEIN

    Import Mincom Minescape grid data.

    The layer is derived from column 4 in the data file.

    The name/description is from the grid row and column numbers in dat file columns 4 and 5.

    Columns 6, 7 and 8 are easting, northing and elevation.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     MTL

    Move text leader line location.

    Move the location of a text leader line.

    Select a text object and specify a new leader line point location.

    You can also change the leader line styles, linetypes and gap.

    Turn Auto TAB ON, to select another text object by default. Turn OFF, to keep moving the location for the same text object.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Metz  
     MULTCODE

    Insert multiple-code separators into names before field codes.

    Insert multiple-code separators into names before field codes listed in a selected AutoDraft report.

    Multiple field codes

    AUTODRAFT compares the characters in a point name, from the beginning to the first space, with the field codes defined in an AutoDraft Configuration file (.ADC). If the first few of those characters match a field code, AutoDraft strings and labels the point according to the code. Also, if the first character after a space matches the multi-code separator character defined in the .ADC, and the following characters match a field code, the point is also strung and labelled according to that other field code.

    For example, a multi-code character of + enables a point double-coded with the name "FENC01 +PATH02" to represent both the end of a fence and also the edge of a path.

    Some other applications, such as Trimble Business Center and Survey Controller, instead of using a multi-code separator, instead compare the characters following each space with the table of field codes. If the survey has been coded this way, for AutoDraft to string and label the points correctly, the multi-code separator character must be first prefixed to each field code.

    To prefix field codes

    1. Import a survey which has been multi-coded with spaces only instead of separator characters
    2. In AUTODRAFT
      • Open the AutoDraft Configuration File using Edit
      • In Global Settings, check the Multiple field code separator character
      • In Feature Definitions, check the field codes
      • From the Reports menu, select Full
    3. In P3Pad
      • Save the report as a text document
    4. In MULTCODE
      • Select the points
      • Select the report text file
      • Add Multi Code Characters
    5. In AUTODRAFT
      • Select the points
      • Select the ADC file

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     MULTICOPY

    Create multiple copies of objects.

    Copy selected objects to a location, as in COPY, but you can continue to copy to other locations.

    To copy a group of points and shift their point numbers, first assign a starting point number in POINTSET.

    To copy objects to another layer without changing their location, click OK without specifying the From and To locations.

    Tick Lay to place objects on current layer, otherwise place on original layer.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Edit|MultiCopy S  
     Multilayer​DTM

    Create a Digital Terrain Model from multiple layers.

    Specify a layer to be either a normal layer or the base layer for a DTM defined by points and sets on multiple layers.

    Define a multi-layer DTM

    1. Create the component layers with objects to be included (e.g. ABCD 1, ABCD 2, etc.)
    2. Create a new layer to use for the base. (e.g. DTM BASE ABCD)
    3. GCCOPY at least three DTM points from any of the component layers into the base layer.
    4. Create a layer list with the same name as the base layer (e.g. DTM BASE ABCD).
    5. Include the component layers (e.g. ABCD 1, ABCD 2, etc.) in the layer list (e.g. DTM BASE ABCD).
    6. Run MULTILAYERDTM command.
    7. Select the base layer (e.g. DTM BASE ABCD).
    8. OK
    9. Use DTMINFO on all points in Plan View to confirm which layers are included.
    10. Use DTM BASE ABCD as a DTM layer in any command that uses a DTM.

    Notes

    • If you select a layer to be a base layer that does not already have a layer list with the same name, LLISTSET opens so you can define the layer list.
    • The objects on the base layer and component layers collectively define a single multilayer DTM.
    • The layer list must have same name as the base layer.
    • A layer that is a component of one multilayer DTM cannot be a component of another multilayer DTM.
    • A layer that is a component of a multilayer DTM cannot form a DTM on its own.
    • To use component layers as stand-alone DTM layers, use MULTILAYERDTM to change the base layer into a normal layer.
    • The base layer must contain at least three contourable points.
    • Dead regions are not honoured.
    • Commands do not indicate whether or not selected layers are base or component layers of a multilayer DTM. For example, if CONTOUR fails and reports that the layer has less than three 3D points, yet you can see and list those 3D points, the layer might be a component of a Multilayer DTM. Use DTMINFO to report whether any points are on "Multi DTM" (base) layers or "Part Multi" (component) layers as well as EDIT or GC53 to report whether they are contourable.

    See also GCCOPY which is usually preferred to MultiLayerDTM.

    TML date MenuSourceGC
    29/10/08   DTM|​Define multilayer DTM S 43
     MULTIOFF

    Create segments, or whole sets or plines, at repeated offsets.

    Create a pline or set, or segment of a pline or set, at a horizontal and vertical offset and then prompt to create new objects at the previous offsets.

    Obj:
    Select a set or pline. The initial default object is the first segment of any active alignment.
    Off:
    Enter a horizontal offset or use the mouse to enter a horizontal offset and direction.
    Right/Left:
    Use the mouse to indicate the direction in which the new object is to be created.
    Elev Diff:
    Enter a positive or negative value to be added to elevations of the new objects.
    Pline
    Create a pline.
    Set
    Create a set.
    Fixed radius
    For plines with arcs, fix radii and adjust offsets, or fix offsets and adjust radii.
    Seg only
    Offset from the selected segment only or from the whole pline or set.
    OK
    Create a new pline or set, offset from the pline or set in the specified direction by the absolute value of the entered offset, and select that new pline or set to be the object from which the next pline or set is to be offset. The new elevations are the elevations of the current object plus any elevation difference. If a set is offset from a pline, or vice versa, the elevation is from the start of the object or segment.
    Cancel
    Stop creating new objects and close the command.

    See also ACTIVE, OFFSEG, OFFSET​DIST, OFFELEV, OFFELEVM, GCOFFELV, SIDE​SLOPE and GC99.

    TML date  Source 
    09/04/19     Geocomp Update or $200 71
     MULTIPIN

    Import MultiPlane RTK Survey or FieldLevel XML.

    Import Trimble MultiPlane RTK Survey or Trimble FieldLevel .XML data, transform the coordinates from the multiplane coordinate system to your specified coordinate system.

    Map Settings
    Select the new coordinate system for the benchmark
    File
    Browse to select a .TXT or .XML input file
    Txt File Feet or Txt File Metres
    If TXT file, specify the data units
    Into Layer
    Select layer for Survey points
    Topo Pts into Layer
    If XML file, select layer for Topo Pts
    Import
    Import the points from the file
    Cancel
    Cancel without importing points

    TML date  Source 
    10/04/19     Geocomp Update or $200  

     MVIEW

    Creates multiple dynaviews.

    Create dynaviews of selected plotboxes in the selected view.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     U  
     MXVALIN

    Import VAL from MX report.

    Import VAL from MX report.

    The MX report is not very precise so neither are the resulting coordinates. Use MOSSIN to import a GENIO file instead if you can get one.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     NAME

    Modify the names of selected objects.

    Modify the names of selected objects to a single name of up to 80 characters.

    Terramodel sometimes refers to the name as the Description.

    Modifying the names blocks or texts will change their appearance.

    Names are case-sensitive.

    See also

    ADD2NAME
    Add a prefix or suffix to names
    CHNGNAME
    Modify names by a dictionary
    ELE2NAME
    Modify names by elevations
    F11
    Display point name labels
    GC01
    Truncate names
    GC02
    Modify names with chainages and offsets
    GCADDLAY
    Prefix names with layer names
    GCNAMEPT
    Name points sequentially along a set
    GCPTSTXT
    Modify point names by nearest text
    GRP2NAME
    Modify names by group
    LABBENDS
    Suffix point names with deflection angles
    LAY2NAME
    Modify names by layer
    NAME2LAY
    Modify layer names by names
    NAMECASE
    Modify the case of names
    NAMEPTS
    Modify point names by set names
    NAMESETS
    Modify set names by point names
    PTS2NAME
    Modify point names by point numbers

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Modify|​Name S 10
     NAME2LAY

    Change the layer of selected objects to match name.

    Specify the layer for objects with no name.

    The selected objects may include text and blocks. Note that the name of a text object is the text.

    See also LAY2NAME, GCLAYCOL, PTLAYCOL, GCMAPOUT and DXFCHANG.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     NAMECASE

    Change the case of names.

    Change the case of names of selected objects to Upper, Lower, Sentence or Title.

    Any objects can be selected including points, sets, plines, text, blocks and tables so be careful.

    Upper
    CHANGE ALL LETTERS TO UPPER CASE
    Lower
    change all letters to lower case
    Sentence
    Change the first character to upper case and all other characters to lower case
    Title
    Change the Initial Letters of the First Word and Words Between Spaces to Uppercase and Change Common Short Words Without Punctuation an of or a the is on but for and in to Lowercase.

    See also PTCASE and TEXTCASE.

    TML date     Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     NAMEPTS

    Rename points in selected sets to match set names.

    Rename each point in selected sets to match the name of the set.

    Where the set has no name, the points will have no name.

    See also NAMESETS to rename sets to match point names.

    TML date  Source 
    27/03/19     Geocomp Update or $250  
     NAMESETS

    Rename unnamed sets to match point names.

    Rename each selected set which has a blank name to match the name of the first named point in the set.

    Specify the number of characters to be used from the beginning of the point name.

    NAMESETS can be useful with MOSS GENIO conversions.

    See also NAMEPTS to rename points to match set names.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     NEW

    new project toolbar button

    Start a new Terramodel project.

    Open the prototype project, then save the project with a new name and location.

    The new project is built on the prototype project specified in SYSTEM, which controls the initial measurement units, conversion factors, layers and objects of the new project.

    Select project type ALN or RLN to open the P29 Roadline or P39 Roadline 3D editor for data entry. To start a new .MP2 MultiPlane project, you will need MultiPlane.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM File|​New
    Toolbar button
    S 1
     NEXTVIEW

    Change the current view mode to the next open view.

    NEXTVIEW is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY NEXTVIEW which executes Control-F6 on the keyboard.

    Macro date MenuSource 
    Macro   File|​Macro|​Play|​next​view User-​definable  
     NFS

    Change the name of selected points using the chainage from a HAL.

    See also GC02 to change or append the name by chainage, offset or Hal points.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     U 176
     NODE

    Pipe node properties.

    Change the properties of selected pipe node point.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    29/10/2008 UG 392 Pipe|​Node properties S DGE 5
     NPSCHART

    Draw a table of set or pline information

    Create a table of plines and text which list properties of a selected set or pline.

    The columns headings are chainage, northing, easting, radius, delta, length, tangent and degree of curvature.

    You can also enter a table heading.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     U  
     NS95

    Nikon NS-95 Database Utility

    Manage data in a Nikon AP700 or AP800 database.

    NS-95 is a DOS utility from Nikon that can work with AP700 and AP800 survey jobs on 32-bit Windows computers.

    Geocomp Update M includes NS-95 version 2.20.

    Open or create a Terramodel project in C:\TMCUSTOM\​GEOCOMP\. To use any other valid DOS directory, copy NS95.EXE and NS95.CFG to that directory.

    The NS-95 Menu

    Type NS95 at the Terramodel command line or Windows command prompt C:\TMCUSTOM\​GEOCOMP>.

    The initial menu options are:

    [J]ob Manager
    
    [A]dd Coordinates
    
    [I]mport Coordinates
    
    [E]xport File Data
    
    [S]ettings
    
    [C]ode & Parameter Files
    
    

    Within each option, the functions shown on the bottom line are selected by function keys. For example, within the Job Manager press the F1 key for Create, F2 for Copy, etc. This replicates the behaviour of the Nikon instrument software. Use the Escape key to close a menu.

    The Settings (for Units, etc) are saved in NS95.CFG.

    An NS95 job consists of a number of database files. These typically have extensions .DBC, .DCI, .DII, .DPI and .DTI. These jobs are typically created on PCMCIA cards by Nikon DTM 700 and 800 series total stations.

    To get a survey job out of the database, either download the data from the instrument in Nikon ASCII Raw data format, or use NS95 to Export in [N]ikon v2.00 Raw File format.

    To import the raw data into Terramodel, use the Geocomp Nikon Raw _i import script. Alternatively, use the Nikon script which communicates using the Remote Device Manager.

    NS95 Command line parameters

    NS95 can also be operated using command line parameters from Windows command prompt or Terramodel.

    Function Switch Para­meters
    Create AP800 job /jcr jobname jobdesc jobclient job­comment
    Create AP700 job /jc7 jobname jobdesc jobclient job­comment
    Copy job /jcp fromjob tojob
    Move job /jmv fromjob tojob
    Delete job /jdl jobname
    Add point to job /jad jobname ptnum id north east elevation code
    NS95 settings /res dmode amode hz coord tmode pmode sl cr scale crc azim
    Import from text /iac jobname filename
    Import civilsoft /ics jobname filename
    Import order /ior importorder
    Export coordinates /eac jobname filename
    Export Civilsoft /ecs jobname filename
    Export DXF /edx jobname filename
    Export Nikon v1.0 /en7 jobname filename
    Export Nikon v2.0 /enr jobname filename
    Export SDR2x /esd jobname filename
    Export TDS /etd jobname filename
    Export Landsoft /els jobname filename
    Prepare code file /cod textfile codefile

    Prepare NS95 with no Geocomp Update

    1. Install Terramodel on 32-bit Windows XP
    2. Obtain a copy of NS95.EXE from your Nikon survey instrument supplier
    3. Create a valid DOS (up to 8-character) data directory
    4. Copy NS95.EXE (and NS95.CFG if you have one) into the DOS data directory, or add the location of NS95.EXE to the DOS path
    5. Check that you can run NS95.EXE from the command line in that DOS directory
    6. In Terramodel, create an ALIAS called NS95 with the command EXEC and the argument NS95
    7. Set the Terramodel data directory to the NS95 data directory by opening or creating a project in that directory

    Exe dateGuide SourceGC
    24/01/01 Nikon NS-95 2.0 Instruction Manual (NS95_V20.pdf)   Geocomp Update
    Your Nikon dealer
    NS95
     NSWSCIMS

    Import NSW SCIMS report.

    Import survey mark points from New South Wales Survey Control Information Management System (NSW SCIMS) report in a CSV file format.

    Command date  Source 
    01/09/18    Geocomp Update or $250  
     NZGEOID

    Import an NZGeoid .SID file

    Import a file of elevation differences (N-values) to be used to transform New Zealand Geoid 2016 elevations to or from New Zealand Vertical Datum 2016.

    The N-values are in a one-minute grid of Latitude and Longitude.

    Select a suitable boundary to limit the number of imported points. For example, importing New_Zealand_Quasigeoid_2016 with no boundary covers the whole country. At the other extreme, selecting a boundary that is too small will import insufficient grid points to interpolate N-values over your whole site.

    Prepare an N-values grid

    1. Obtain a suitable NZGeoid .SID file containing N-Values.
    2. In Terramodel,
      1. Start a NEW project.
      2. Import any clipping boundaries.
      3. Select or create an empty current layer with a suitable name like N-VALUES 2016.
      4. Run NZGEOID to import N-values from the file.
      5. Use TMXOUT to export the clipped N-Value grid to .TMX for later use.

    Settings

    Change
    Select a geodetic coordinate system
    For Bdy:
    Select a limiting boundary in that coordinate system
    Transform Lat. Long into East, North
    Transform the grid into Eastings and Northings in that coordinate system if for adjusting elevations. Do not transform if for adjusting distances.
    Import N values into Current Layer
    Import points from the file that fall within the boundary
    Cancel

    Downloads

    Download NZGeoid2016 .SID files from Land Information NZ (12MB).

    Commands that use N-values

    AUSEOID
    Import Australian N-values
    GC54
    Correct elevations
    GC29UTM
    Measure distances
    TRAVUTM
    Traverse
    GCSCANIN
    Import lidar

    TML date  Source 
    04/02/20     Geocomp Update or $200  
     OBSDIFF

    Report vertical differences between obstructions.

    Report the vertical difference between two sets where they cross.

    If the sets cross more than once, the closest intersection to the location used to select the first set.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     OBJREG

    Automated Plan Set Assembly and Management Program. Register Object to Sheet Command.

    This command is used to register objects drawn on a sheet by the user, to that sheet, or to a specific dynaview on the sheet originally created by PLANSET.

    Register user-​created objects with the sheet, so that when the sheet is moved or deleted, these objects are moved or deleted with it. This association is done using Groups.

    There is one group number associated with each sheet. Objects of a general nature, not associated with a particular plan or profile dynaview, should be registered to the sheet. After selecting the objects to be registered to the sheet, click on the Sheet button to assign them to the sheet in which they lie. Since the program determines the appropriate sheet, you may include items from multiple sheets in the selection set when making a general assignment to a sheet. There are four group numbers associated with a plan or profile dynaview.

    TML dateGuideMenuSource 
    01/09/18 RG 357 Draft|​ASAP-Plan Set|­Object registration S  
     OBJSNAP

    Enable running object snap modes.

    Enable point snap modes, and order of precedence. The running snap modes are always active, but can be temporarily overridden by using a specific option of the point locate control.

    Point snap modes allow more precision when locating and placing objects. As the various snap modes are enabled, they are included in the Order list to the right.

    Change the order of precedence by dragging snap modes to different positions in the Order box. The top position has the highest precedence. If Free is included, any mode after Free will never be considered.

    Running snap modes may cause other commands to appear as if they are not functioning, or act in an undesirable manner. If no object is found at a location that matches the enabled snaps, there is no response until Terramodel finds an object at another location. If Free is on the list, you will always get a location. Include Free if you want to be select by Windows but not if you must select an object.

    See also SEARCH and SNAPSET.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Settings|​Running snaps S  
     OBSDIFF

    Report vertical differences between obstructions.

    Report the vertical difference between two sets where they cross.

    If the sets cross more than once, the closest intersection to the location used to select the first set.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     OFF

    Turn off selected objects.

    Turn off selected objects in any view.

    Selected objects can be turned off regardless of your SEARCH settings.

    To turn the objects back on, use ON to select them the same way, or by Previous if you haven't selected anything else. Select by View or use ONALL to turn everything on. You won't be able to select by Window or Crossing.

    To make a whole layer invisible, without turning the objects on or off, use LAYERSET. To hide a set segment, use HIDE.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Modify|​On/Off|​Objects off
    Modify|​Object off
    S 48
     OFFALL

    Turn off all objects in selected views.

    Turn off all objects in selected views. The default view is the current view. Objects are turned off even for types not searchable according to SEARCH settings.

    To turn objects on, use ON or ONALL.

    ON/OFF is independent of LAYERSET visibility. For an object to be displayed, it must be both ON and on a visible layer.

    TML date Menu GC
    12/11/18   Modify|​On/Off|​All off Geocomp Update or $250 47
     OFFELEV

    Create plines or sets at a horizontal and vertical offset.

    Create pline or set, or segment of pline or set, at an offset from a pline or set.

    Pick the set, side, offset and elevation difference.

    See also MULTIOFF, which offsets from the new line, OFFSET​DIST, which offsets from alignments, OFFSEG, offsets from a segment, OFFELEVM, which also offsets vertically from multiple sets, GCOFFELV, which also offsets vertically, SIDE​SLOPE, which can also create batters, and GC99 which uses a table of offsets.

    TML date MenuSourceGC
    01/09/18   Edit|​Offset distance and elev S 71
     OFFELEVM

    Create plines or sets at a horizontal and vertical offset from multiple sets.

    Specify multiple sets from which to offset and whether to create them on the left, right or both sides.

    See also MULTIOFF, which offsets from the new line, OFFSET​DIST, which offsets from alignments, OFFSEG, offsets from a segment, OFFELEV, which also offsets vertically from one set, GCOFFELV, which also offsets vertically, SIDE​SLOPE, which can also create batters, and GC99 which uses a table of offsets.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 71
     OFFSEG

    Create pline or set at a horizontal offset from a segment.

    Create pline or set, or segment of pline or set, at an offset from a pline or set.

    See also MULTIOFF, which offsets from the new line, OFFSET​DIST, which offsets from alignments, OFFELEV, which also offsets vertically, OFFELEVM, which also offsets vertically from multiple sets, GCOFFELV, which also offsets vertically, SIDE​SLOPE, which can also create batters, and GC99 which uses a table of offsets.

    TML date MenuSourceGC
    01/09/18   Edit|​Offset segment S 71
     OFFSET​DIST

    Create plines or sets at a horizontal offset

    Create pline or set offset from a pline or set alignment.

    Any spirals are replaced with chords.

    See also GCHALOFF, which create plines at offset alignments, MULTIOFF, which offsets from the new line, OFFELEVM, which offsets from multiple sets, OFFSEG, offsets from a segment, OFFELEV, which also offsets vertically from one set, GCOFFELV, which also offsets vertically, SIDE​SLOPE, which can also create batters, and GC99 which uses a table of offsets.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Edit|​Offset distance S 71
     OFFSET​POINT

    Create plines or sets at a horizontal offset though a location.

    Create a pline or set at the horizontal offset of a location from an alignment.

    Any spirals are replaced with chords.

    See also VARIOFF, which offsets through locations at an interval, MULTIOFF, which offsets from the new line, OFFELEVM, which offsets from multiple sets, OFFSEG, offsets from a segment, OFFELEV, which also offsets vertically from one set, GCOFFELV, which also offsets vertically, SIDE​SLOPE, which can also create batters, and GC99 which uses a table of offsets.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Edit|​Offset point S 6
     OLIST

    Count the number of objects of each type in each view.

    Report the number of points, plines, text, sets, tables, attributes, dynaviews, and blocks in the Plan, Profile, Sheet, XSect, Super, View6, View7 and View8 views.

    Only used object types and populated views are listed.

    If view names with spaces are not displayed correctly, use COUNT or OLIST2.

    See also

    COUNT
    A very similar command
    OLIST2
    Count the same objects as COUNT and OLIST and report to P3pad
    LAYINFO
    Count the number of objects and points by layer for selected objects
    DTMINFO
    Count the number of points on DTM layers
    LIST
    List layers, objects, points, unused points, sets, plines and lots
    VIEWSET
    View settings including view names
    TML date MenuSourceGC
    29/10/08   Reports|​Count objects S SDS
     OLIST2

    Count each type of record in each view to P3Pad.

    Report to P3Pad the number of points, plines, text, sets, tables, attributes, dynaviews, and blocks in the Plan, Profile, Sheet, XSect, Super, View6, View7 and View8 views.

    Only used object types and populated views are listed.

    See also OLIST, COUNT, LAYINFO, DTMINFO and LIST.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     S  
     ON

    Turn on selected objects.

    Turn on (make visible) selected objects in any view.

    Objects can be selected regardless of SEARCH settings.

    To turn selected objects off, use OFF or OFFALL.

    To turn objects back on, before you select anything else, select by Previous. You won't be able to select them by Window or Crossing. Select by View or use ONALL to turn everything on.

    To make a whole layer visible, without turning the objects on or off, use LAYERSET. To reveal a hidden set segment, use REVEAL.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Modify|​On/Off|​Objects on
    Modify|​Object on
    S 48
     ONALL

    Turn on all objects in selected views.

    Turn on all objects in selected views. The default view is the current view. Objects are turned on even for types not searchable according to SEARCH settings.

    To turn objects off, use OFF or OFFALL.

    ON/OFF is independent of LAYERSET visibility. For an object to be displayed, it must be both ON and on a visible layer.

    TML date Menu GC
    12/11/18   Modify|​On/Off|​All on Geocomp Update or $250 47
     ONGRP

    Turn on all objects of the nominated group.

    Turn on all objects of the nominated group.

    TML dateGuide SourceGC
    01/09/18 ongrp.txt   Wencomp 48
     OPEN

    open project toolbar button

    Open an existing project.

    Close any open project, then open a nominated pre-existing Terramodel, Roadline or Multiplane project.

    The Info button, allows you to interrogate a project file before you open it. The Info includes file size, date last modified, number of objects, database version, largest point number, largest record number and number of alpha points.

    Objects in Terramodel .PRO files can also be imported by IMPORT and copied by PCOPY.

    .PRO files exported from Trimble Business Center are built on C:\​Program files\​Trimble\​Trimble Business Center\​tmodel.pro which determines the measurement units and so on.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM File|​Open
    Toolbar button
    S 1
     ORDERFORM

    Generate an email containing a report of the currently attached dongle.

    Generate report showing the current serial number, purchase code and modules in an email in your default email client program.

    You will only need this report if requested by your Trimble dealer. Manually change the To: email address to that specified by your Trimble dealer before sending the email.

    Close the email dialog to return to Terramodel.

    OrderForm is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY ORDERFORM​EMAIL which runs ABOUT|Products...|Order Form

    If this macro does not run because the key does not have the CAD module, use ABOUT. If this macro does not create an email, use ORDER​PRINT.

    Macro date MenuSource 
    01/09/18   Help|​About|​Products|​Order form|​E-mail
    File|​Macro|​Play|​order​form​email
    User-​definable  
     ORDERPRINT

    Print a report of the currently attached dongle.

    Print a report showing the current serial number, purchase code and modules to your default Windows printer.

    You will only need this report if requested by your Trimble dealer. If your default is a paper printer, print then fax or scan and email as specified by your Trimble dealer. If your default is a PDF or TXT printer driver, email that report. .PDF is preferred.

    If no report appears, change your default Windows printer.

    OrderPrint is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY ORDERFORMPRINT which uses ABOUT.

    Macro date MenuSource 
    01/09/18   Help|About|​Products|​Order form|Print
    File|​Macro|​Play|​order​form​print
    User-​definable  
     OVERHANG

    Make non-contourable points under overhangs.

    Make non-contourable all points on the selected layer, that are below any closed triangular set on the same layer, and modify the colour.

    Photogrammetry and solid modelling software can create 3D meshes of closed triangles with overhangs. Such meshes have overlapping breaklines and therefore form an incorrect DTM. By removing from the model those points under triangular sets, the resulting DTM approximates the uppermost surface.

    Add points on a grid at the bottom of the cliff face for those triangles that partially overlap.

    To use OVERHANG,

    1. Import or copy the points and sets into a single layer
    2. Do NOT extract contours, quick profiles or 3D views
    3. Run OVERHANG from the command line
    4. Select the layer
    5. Add grid points if needed
    6. Make underhang points non-contourable
    7. You may then want to form DTMs, create 3D views, delete points or sets, 3DFILTER, and or so on.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     OVERWALL

    Create cross sections from points along Xlines.

    Copy points near Xlines to Xsect view, join with sets and label each chainage.

    Options

    HAL:
    Select a horizontal alignment with Xlines
    Points:
    Select points in Plan view
    Sect Tol:
    Enter a maximum chainage difference from Xlines
    Max Join Dist:
    Enter the maximum length for new segments
    Create Blocks
    Create blocks in XSect view

    See also

    ACTIVE
    Set active alignment
    ACTIVE​CHAINAGE
    Set active chainage
    XSECTPTS
    Turn on points in XSect view on active chainage
    LSEC1
    Create cross sections from DTM and Xlines
    XLINPTS
    Create xlines from points

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     P29

    Roadline 2D Editor

    Create and edit the file sets associated with Geodimeter 2D Roadline.

    P29 emulates the Geodimeter Program 29.

    Similar to P39 but 2D.

    Command dateGuide Source 
    12/03/09HELPTM   S  
     P39

    Roadline 3D Editor

    Create and edit the file sets associated with Geodimeter 3D Roadline.

    P39 emulates the Geodimeter Program 39.

    The Roadline 3D Editor opens a dialog of 3D roadway geometric data from a HAL, VAL and a typical section from a pline in the xsect view. This data can then be manually edited or added to in a series of tables.

    The result is a single .RLN file containing the .ARE files for uploading into a Geodimeter instrument. These can then be manually edited or entered in tables.

    Upload the .RLN file into the instrument using the EXPORT/Upload script or Geodimeter Software Tools (GST).

    See also GCRLNOUT and P29.

    Command dateGuide Source 
    12/03/09 P39_doc1   S  
     PAD

    Create a rectangular set.

    Create a rectangular set of four segments joining points located by opposite corners with a single specified elevation.

    See also MOVEPAD and BOX.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Set|​Pad S  
     PADDOWN

    Lower all points in a pad by an increment.

    Subtract an increment specified by PADSHIFT to the elevation of all points in the pad set specified by MOVEPAD.

    PADDOWN uses a command with aliases assigned to pad down toolbar button in the dPAD toolbox in the Geocomp.ws workspace.

    TML date MenuSource 
    01/09/18   Toolbox Geocomp Update or $250  
     PADSHIFT

    Set the shift value used in PADUP and PADDOWN.

    To raise or lower a pad during MOVEPAD without setting all elevations to the same value:

    1. Open the dPAD toolbox in the geocomp.ws workspace.
    2. Set the PADSHIFT project variable using pad shift toolbar button.
    3. Click on the PADUP or PADDOWN button to raise or lower the pad.
    4. Recreate the batters using the MOVEPAD button.

    The default elevation increment is 0.5.

    TML date MenuSource 
    01/09/18   Toolbox Geocomp Update or $250  
     PADUP

    Raise all points in a pad by an increment.

    Add an increment specified by PADSHIFT to the elevation of all points in the pad set specified by MOVEPAD.

    PADUP uses a command with aliases assigned to pad up toolbar button in the dPAD toolbox in the Geocomp.ws workspace.

    TML date MenuSource 
    01/09/18   Toolbox Geocomp Update or $250  
     PALETTE

    Select the current palette and colourmap.

    Select the current palette and colourmap to control the displayed colours of objects.

    The palette is a table of Red, Green and Blue (RBG) colour index triplets, and the colourmap is a table relating these triplets to colour numbers.

    RGB triplets

    The display colour of each Terramodel object is determined by mapping the colour number to the palette triplet number, then finding the RGB colour of that triplet.

    Palette triplets are numbered from 0 to a maximum of 63. Palettes with less triplets, repeat until 63. Colormaps relate these triplets to colour numbers from 0 to 255. Colour number 0 is exceptional: in the current colourmap, colour 0 defines the default background colour; objects of colour 0 are displayed in their layer colour. Colourmap maps typically map colour 0 to palette triplet 0.

    The RGB components range from darkest (0) to brightest (255). Blacks, greys and whites are defined by matching values. Colours are defined by any other permutation.

    For example, if an object with colour 5 is mapped to palette triplet 6, and triplet 6 has RGB value of 0,0,255, the object is displayed in blue.

    Background colours

    The default background colour is usually displayed in black or white because that colour number is usually 0, colourmap value 0 usually maps to triplet 0, and triplet 0 is usually 0,0,0 or 255,255,255.

    Use EDITINI to select background, cursor and highlight colours. Choice of colours can be a matter of preference or accessibility.

    Some colours are swapped automatically to make them easier to see. For example, objects with 0,0,0 (black) triplets only display as black if the background is white. Otherwise, they display as white. Objects with the same colour number as the background colour are displayed in the default background colour.

    PALETTE always displays the background colour as colour 0 even when another colour has been selected. For example, if the default background colour is black, and the background colour has been changed to a blue colour number, in the PALETTE dialog, colour 0 is shown as blue, and the otherwise blue colour, as black.

    Editing colours

    The palettes and colourmaps in PALETTE are read from TMODWIN.INI. To edit or create palettes or colormaps, use EDITINI to save a copy of TMODWIN.INI to a location where you can edit, such as Documents, then use a text editor to open the INI file. Copy the relevant section with a different name, make your changes, use EDITINI again to "Show Old Ini File" and import just the changed sections by name.

    To control colours on plots, see PLOTSET and CAROUSEL.

    Remove a palette or colourmap

    To remove a palette or colourmap, use EDITINI to import an empty palette or colourmap with the same name.

    Default colours

    If the palette size is less than 64 or the colormap size is less than 256, the colours repeat from 1. If any RGB triplet is not defined for a palette, the colour is substituted with the colour from the repeating 20-colour default Windows palette.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM File|​System configuration|​Palette+​Colormap...
    File|​System configuration|​Palette+​Colourmap...
    Settings|​Palette+​Colormap
    S  
     PAN

    pan toolbar button

    Function key F4

    Move a location on a view to another cursor position.

    Move a location on a view to another cursor position using the mouse.

    You can also pan by Control P, holding down the mouse wheel or clicking on a the VPAN toolbox button.

    See also RECENTER and GCPAN.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM View|​Pan
    Toolbar button
    Function key F4
    S 133
     PARABOLA

    Create a parabola.

    Create a pline approximating a parabola by entering values for the variables for the parabolic equation:

    y = A - (x ^ Exp) / B

    See also BESTFIT and CURVE.

    TML date MenuSource 
    29/10/08 RG 1237 Draw|​Pline|​Parabola S  
     PARKING

    Create parking bays (stalls).

    Specify bay (stall) length, width and angle.

    Optionally, average the remainder and place the back line in the bay.

    You may need to adjust the angle by 90° depending on whether the bays are on the right or left.

    TML dateGuideMenuSource 
    01/09/18 RG 626 Cogo|​Create parking stripes S  
     PCOPY

    Copy from a reference project.

    Copy selected objects from a reference project into the active project. The source project can be a reference project, or the master project, that is not the active project.

    See also REFFILE, COPY and TMXIN.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Edit|​Project copy S 30
     PHASE

    Phase editor.

    Divide a phase template into distinct phases for which volumes and mass haul diagrams are to be individually accumulated.

    The phase lines listed from top to bottom within the phase line list box, as shown above, define the phases from left to right in the template. In defining these phase lines, you are defining the right edge of the phase. Its left edge is either at the right edge of the previously defined phase (the previous phase line in the list), or at the left edge of the template, if there is no phase defined to the its left.

    If no phases have been defined, PHASEMAN opens.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Masshaul|​Phase editor...
    Channel|​Phase|​Phase editor...
    S  
     PHASEMAN

    Phase manager.

    Create and manage phases.

    Define chainage limits and the cross-sectional extents of individual phases, allowing you to design a roadway to be constructed in two or more phases, for maintenance of traffic or reporting volumes and mass haul in phases.

    Phases are implemented as templates in which the cross-sectional limits of each particular phase are defined. As in the case of normal roadway templates, a phase template starts at a given chainage station and continues until another template is defined, or until the end of the road job.

    Each defined phase templates is listed. Phase templates differ from other templates. If a phase is included in one phase template and not in the adjacent phase template, the phase retains its full cross-sectional properties in the region where it is defined and abruptly disappears without transition in the region where it is not defined.

    The Edit button opens the Phase Editor PHASE.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Masshaul|​Phase manager...
    Channel|​Phase|​Phase manager...
    S  
     PHASENAME

    Edit phase names.

    Edit the name, visibility, colour, linetype and shading of phases.

    Phase shading is turned On or Off in RDDESIGNSET at Shade areas.

    On
    Turn a phase ON to include in volume reports and to shade. All phases that are turned OFF are lumped into one volume category and are not shaded even when shading is turned on.
    Colour
    Assign a color to a phase line for the mass ordinate in MASSHAUL diagram and the PHASE, TEMPLATE, SUBGRADE and XSECTIONEDT editors.
    Linetype
    Assign a linetype to a phase line for the MASSHAUL diagram in sheet view. The Mass haul diagram dialog shows all lines as solid.
    Shading
    The six shading patterns are determined by the position in the Phase Names dialog. Patterns for seventh and subsequent phase names are repeated in the same order.

    Position in dialogShading pattern
    FirstHorizontal hatch
    SecondVertical hatch
    ThirdForward slash
    FourthBackward slash
    FifthDiagonal hatch
    SixthCross hatch

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|Phase names...
    Channel|​Phase|​Phase names...
    S  
     PHOTOCSV

    Import photo coordinates.

    Import coordinates from a CSV file that represent the locations of photographs.

    Command date  Source 
    01/09/18    Geocomp Update or $250  
     PINSET

    Create point in a set where it crosses another line.

    Create a new point in a selected set (L1) at the intersection with a selected pline or set (L2).

    The default elevation is interpolated from the first set.

    The default point number name is the next available point number.

    The default name is the previously entered name.

    See also INTOSET, GCIN2SET and ILINE.

    21/01/16 pinset.txt   Wencomp  
     PIPE

    Pipe properties.

    Assign pipe attributes to or change the properties of a selected pipe.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    29/10/08 UG 392 Pipe|Pipe properties S DGE 4
     PIPEAIN

    Import pipe survey attributes from a CSV file.

    Import pipe points from a CSV file of coordinates then connect by Asset_ID or String number.

    These are not the attributes used by pipe design commands.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     POA  
     PIPEBREK

    Break a pipe set into two pipes at a point.

    Break a pipe set at a point into two pipes and copy the Asset_ID.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     POA  
     PIPECR

    Edit pipe and node elevations.

    Edit pipe and node elevations.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    29/10/08 UG 392 Pipe|​Elevation by crown S DGE 5
     PIPECALC

    Compute flow rate.

    Compute and store the flow rate Q from rainfall coefficient C, intensity I and catchment area A.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    29/10/08 UG 392 Pipe|​Calculate Q from C,I,A S DGE 9
     PIPECHRT

    Create a pipe chart.

    Create a pipe chart from pipe attributes including node names, point numbers and elevations, pipe lengths, sizes and grades and basin information.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    29/10/08 UG 392 Pipe|​Draw pipe chart S DGE 12
     PIPEDALL

    Draw all pipes.

    Draw and label all pipes in a project file in the profile view.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    29/10/08 UG 392 Pipe|​Draw all pipes S DGE
     PIPEDEF

    Edit default pipe and node settings.

    Edit default pipe and node settings.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    29/10/08 UG 392 Pipe|​Pipe defaults... S DGE 17
     PIPEDELS

    Delete a segment from a pipe set with Asset_ID attributes.

    Delete a segment from a pipe set with Asset_ID attributes.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     PIPEDESN

    Design pipe branch.

    Designs portions of a branch using the pipe and node defaults in PIPEDEF.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    29/10/08 UG 392 Pipe|​Pipe design S DGE 9
     PIPEDRAW

    Draw single pipe.

    Draw single pipe.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    29/10/08 UG 392 Pipe|​Draw pipe S DGE
     PIPEDUMP

    List pipe attributes.

    List attributes of a selected pipe to a file.

    The list is written to a text file called pipes.dmp on the Windows desktop.

    TML dateGuide SourceGC
    29/10/08 UG 392   S DGE
     PIPEINFO

    Report dimensions and cover of a pipe set.

    For a selected set representing a pipe, report pipe dimensions relative to alignments and a DTM layer.

    The report to P3pad shows, for each point, the Back Point Number, Intersection Point Number, Forward Point Number, True 3D Angle, 3D Chainage of Intersection Point, Horizontal Deflection Angle, Vertical Deflection Angle, Bearing In, Bearing Out, 3D Distance In, 3D Distance Out, Zenith Angle In, Zenith Angle Out, Slope In and Slope Out.

    A report to a CSV file shows, for each set segment, the KP chainage, pipe chainages, Invert levels, length, height difference, DTM elevation, cover, grade and horizontal and vertical deflection.

    See also 3DPIPE

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     PIPEJOIN

    Join pipes with Asset_ID.

    Join pipes with Asset_ID.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     POA  
     PIPELBR

    List pipe branches.

    List detailed, calculated properties for nodes and pipes in a selected pipe branch.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    29/10/08 UG 392 Pipe|​List pipe branches S DGE 10
     PIPELL

    Pipe and node label default settings.

    Pipe label and node label default settings.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    29/10/08 UG 392 Pipe|​Pipe label settings S DGE 18
     PIPEMAXV

    List large pipes.

    List all pipes which exceed a specified maximum velocity.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    29/10/08 UG Pipe|​List large velocity S DGE
     PIPEMINV

    List small pipes.

    List all pipes which are below a specified maximum velocity.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    29/10/08 UG 392 Pipe|​List small velocity S DGE
     PIPEOBST

    Label pipes at obstructions.

    Label a pipe in the profile view at obstructions.

    Create labels along a pipe pline selected from the profile view at selected obstruction plines or sets selected from the Plan view.

    The labels are created on the obstruction layers in both the plan and profile views, in the selected text style, with the name of the obstruction, the elevation of the profile and the chainage.

    See also GC41.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     PIPEQ

    Enter the flow rate for a pipe.

    Directly enter the flow rate for any pipe when the flowrate calculation method is None.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    29/10/08 UG 392 Pipe|​Input Q S DGE 5
     PIPEREPT

    Report pipe survey attributes for selected sets.

    Report pipe survey attributes for selected sets.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     PIPERSLT

    Report the results for the pipe or node.

    Report the calculated results for the selected pipe or node.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    29/10/08 UG 392 Pipe|​Display results S DGE
     PIPESCLQ

    Scale pipe flow rate Q for nodes.

    Scale pipe flow rate Q for selected nodes by a factor.

    TML dateGuideMenuSource 
    29/10/08 UG 392 Pipe|​Scale Q values S  
     PIPESOLV

    Solve selected pipe branches.

    Calculate the flowrates, hydraulic properties and water surface profiles for selected branches.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    29/10/08 UG 392 Pipe|​Pipe solve S DGE 9
     PIPESUM

    Pipe summary report.

    Create a summary report of all pipes in the project and display the report in the report editor.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    29/10/08 UG 392 Pipe|​Create summary report S DGE 10
     PIPESWAP

    Swap pipe Asset_ID attribute with String_No.

    Swap pipe Asset_ID attribute with String_No.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $1000  
     PIPEV

    Modify pipe velocity.

    Scale, average, or convert to zero the velocities for all pipes.

    TML dateGuideMenuSource 
    29/10/08 UG 392 Pipe|​Modify velocity S  
     PIPEWSP

    List pipe water surface profile.

    List the water surface computations for each pipe in a selected branch.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    29/10/08 UG 392 Pipe|​List water surface profile S DGE
     PIPEWELD

    Create points at pipe welds from alignment and survey.

    Create points at the final locations of pipe joins that have been surveyed after the pipes have been assembled but before the pipes are placed underground.

    Select a Pipe Weld Set joining 3D points for the alignment along which the welded pipe has been laid, an As-Built Set for the same pipe joining 3D points at welds surveyed before the pipe was placed in the trench, and an As Built Weld Points layer.

    For each point in the pipe weld set, determine the 3D distance along that set and then create a point on the specified layer at the 3D distance measured along the as-built set. If the pipes are surveyed in opposite directions, the as-built set is reversed. Any difference between the 3D lengths of the sets can be evenly distributed to allow for pipe stretching. You can also use SETSTA or CHAINAGE to adjust the start chainages beforehand.

    Attributes can be copied from the weld points to the as-built points.

    PIPEWELD is especially suited to laying long flexible gas pipelines, something like this:

    1. Lay pipe segments beside the proposed alignment
    2. Weld them together into longer pipe sections
    3. Survey the pipe welds recording X,Y and Z coordinates and any attributes
    4. Place the pipe sections into the ground
    5. Survey the beginning and end of each pipe section
    6. Adjust the start chainages as required
    7. Run PIPEWELD
    8. Select two sets representing the before-and-after status of a section of pipe
    9. Click OK to create the new points and report
    10. Repeat for the next pipe section

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $1000  
     PIPEXING

    Draw pipes that cross the alignment.

    Draw pipes that cross the selected alignments or pipe branches.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    29/10/08 UG 392 Pipe|​Draw crossing pipes S DGE 7
     PLANSET

    Automatic Sheet Assembly and Production.

    Generate or regenerate large numbers of plans along alignments.

    See the User Guide p285, Reference Guide p304 and Training Guide: Assembling & Managing a set of plans for extensive information.

    PLANSET requires the ASAP module.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    01/09/18 Assembling & Managing a set of plans Draft|​​ASAP-Plan set S 167
     PLAN2DBX

    Export points and sets to Leica 1200 database files

    Export selected points and sets to a Leica LandXML .XML file and convert to Leica 1200 DBX database using RoadRunnerAddOn.

    The database files can be used with Leica 1200 instruments. The XML file can also be imported into UMC_3D and iCON.

    Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

    If you select 'Create Leica DB files', but no .X?? files are created in the same folder as the .XML, download and install Microsoft Visual C++ 2013 Redistributable (x86).

    See also ROADRUN, GCPTSOUT , GCMULXML, POWERGDE and DTM2LDBX.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     PLANPROF

    Display Plan and Profile views, tiled horizontally.

    Close views then select the Plan and Profile views, tile horizontally, zoom all for each view then select Plan for the Current View mode.

    PlanProf is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY PLANPROF.

    Macro date MenuSource 
    01/09/18   File|​Macro|​Play|​plan​prof User-​definable  
     PLANSHEET

    Display Plan and Sheet views, tiled vertically.

    Close views then select the Plan and Profile views, tile, zoom all for each view then select Plan for the Current View mode.

    PlanProf is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY PLANSHEET.

    Macro date MenuSource 
    01/09/18   File|​Macro|​Play|​plan​sheet User-​definable  
     PLINE

    Create a pline

    Create a pline joining vertices.

    Once three vertices have been entered, you can a curve at the previous vertex using CURVE.

    A pline is also known as a polyline. A vertex is also known as an intersection point, IP, control point, curve point, cp or node.

    A pline can have a single elevation, for example a contour, or no elevation. A pline does not connect to any points, even points that have been used to locate vertices, and therefore is not part of a DTM. If you want your pline to connect to points, have multiple elevations or affect a DTM, use a SET instead.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​​Pline|​​Line S 3
     PLNNONAM

    Display only plines with no names.

    Turn OFF all objects and then turn ON all plines without names.

    Run PLNNONAM again to turn all objects on.

    Objects on invisible layers remain invisible.

    See also SETNONAM, OFF and ALLON.

    Command date   Source 
    01/09/18    Geocomp Update or $250  
     PLOT

    plot toolbar button

    Plot plan to a printer.

    Plot all or part of a project to a plotter, printer or PDF file.

    Plot only a Window, inside multiple plotboxes, or one plot box.

    Select a plotter configuration, carousel, scale and Windows printer driver settings.

    The best way to plot is with scale 1:1 from a dynaview in the sheet view.

    Before plotting, establish the settings that will be used during plotting.

    • PLOTSET establishes the plot resolution for curves and the mapping of plotter pens to object colours.
    • PLOTTER​SET selects and configures the plotting device. Multiple configurations can be created for the same or multiple plotters.
    • CAROUSEL establishes the pen colours, speed and width where applicable.
    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM File|​Plot
    Toolbar button
    S 93,94
     PLOTBOX

    Create pline plotbox in sheet units.

    Create a rectangular pline box by enter height and width in sheet units.

    The box is scaled to project units using the current plan view scale.

    This box can be used as the boundary in the Plan View of a DYNAVIEW in the sheet view.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource93
    12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Pline|​​Plotbox S 93
     PLOTSET

    Plot parameter settings.

    Configure resolution, penmap and background prominence parameters in plots.

    Curves and splines are substituted by short straights. Specify increments and segments for curves and splines, typically 0.01, 0.01, 0.01 and 20.

    In Advanced pen map settings, you can map pen numbers to up to six text heights or specify a colour or pen shift. Any colour or pen shift you specify is added to the colour or pen number of objects in dynaviews, where the object's layer has background prominence in the layer list. The shift does not apply to pen sorting.

    The current pen map determines which pen number is to be used to plot each object colour. You can edit and store pen maps in TMODWIN.INI, but only the current pan map is stored in the prototype file.

    The actual plot colour and pen thickness is determined by the choice of carousel when plotting. The colours displayed in the pen map settings are from the current palette and colourmap, which are independent of the pen map and carousel colours.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource90
    12/03/09HELPTM File|​Plot setup|​​Plot params... S 90
     PLOTTER​SET

    Create plotter configurations.

    Add, edit or delete plotter configurations to suit your installed plotters or printers.

    Windows printer

    To set up a plotter configuration for a Windows printer:

    1. In Windows Setup or Control Panel, install the Windows printer driver
    2. Test that you can print to that printer
    3. In Terramodel, run PLOTTER​SET
    4. Click on Add
    5. Enter the name for a plotter configuration, for example "HP Laser A3 black cadastral"
    6. Click on the Plotter... button
    7. Change your plotter driver to Windows printers
    8. Select your plotter from the list
    9. Do not select plot to file.
    10. Choose whether to sort by pen
    11. Select a default pen carousel
    12. Click Edit to confirm pen colours and pen widths
    13. OK, Close, OK, Close
    14. When you first PLOT, click on Setup, to configure the paper size, and so on, in the Windows plotter driver.

    PDF printer

    To see a print preview, control the number of copies to be printed, or generate a file for plotting later, plot to a PDF printer driver which opens the PDF and then print from your PDF reader.

    To set up a plotter configuration to generate a PDF:

    1. Install a PDF printer driver
    2. In Terramodel, run PLOTTER​SET
    3. Click on Add
    4. Enter the name for a plotter configuration, for example "PDF A4 colour"
    5. Click on the Plotter... button
    6. Change Driver to Windows printers
    7. Select your PDF printer driver from the list
    8. Do not select plot to file.
    9. Choose whether to sort by pen
    10. Select a default pen carousel
    11. Click Edit to confirm pen colours and pen widths
    12. OK, Close, OK, Close
    13. When you first PLOT, click on Setup, to configure the paper size, and so on, in the PDF plotter driver.

    HP-GL and HPGL/2 vector plotters

    The HP-GL and HP-GL/2 printer drivers use graphics languages for older vector plotters that do not have Windows printer drivers and do not plot images. They typically move physical pens or pencils from a carousel.

    Define separate plotter configurations for each physical pen carousel arrangement (e.g. one for coloured pens and one for all black pens of different thickness).

    To set up a plotter configuration for a HP-GL or HP-GL/2 plotter:

    1. In Terramodel, run PLOTTER​SET
    2. Select HPGL2 and click on Edit
    3. Click on the Plotter... button
    4. Select a plotter from the HPGL or HP-GL/2 lists
    5. Select a COM, LPT or other port
    6. Choose whether to sort by pen
    7. Enter values for margin allowance, offset, mirror, rotate 90 and scale to fit. If you don't know these values now, edit these after you have determined them using trial plots.
    8. Select Pen Plotter for the default carousel
    9. Use CAROUSEL to assign the RGB values for the eight standard HP plot colours for pens 1-8 regardless of what pens you physically place in the carousel.
    10. Use CAROUSEL to assign pen speeds to suit your pens and media.
    11. OK, Close, OK, Close

    Settings

    Add
    Add a plot configuration.
    Edit
    Edit a plot configuration.
    Delete
    Delete a plot configuration. Delete any configurations, such as the pre-installed HP 1055CM, HP DesignJet and LaserJet, that do not apply to your plotters or printers. If you delete HPGL2, that will be restored to the list later.
    Set as default configuration
    Select one configuration to be the default for PLOT.
    Suspend lock driver
    Turn this off. Only turn this on if you have trouble plotting to a pen plotter attached to a parallel port Sentinel key.
    Plotter
    Select from lists of HP-GL, HP-GL/2 and Windows printer drivers.
    Setup
    For Windows printers, setup your paper size and so on.
    Plot to file
    Do not select unless you need to examine the raw coding in a text editor.
    Sort by pen
    Plot in incrementing pen number order or record number order.
    Paper size
    For vector plotters, specify page size and margins.
    Mirror
    Mirror the plot image, for example for the back surface of mylar sheets.
    Rotate 90
    For vector plotters, rotate the image 90 degrees.
    Scale to fit
    Scale the plot to fit the paper. Use Dynaviews instead where scaling matters.
    Offset
    Apply X and Y offsets.
    Pen carousel
    Select a default list of pen colours and thicknesses for PLOT.
    Define carousel
    Open CAROUSEL
    .

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM File|​Plot setup|​Plotter setup... S PU 3
     PLTO3D

    Modify the elevation and colour of contour plines.

    Modify the elevation and colour of a contour pline.

    First nominate the first elevation, an interval, an increment and a colour. Then pick the first pline. The elevation and colour that that pline is then modified and the default elevation is incremented. The next pline you select is assigned the new default elevation.

    To form a DTM, GCCONVRT or CONVERT the plines to sets.

    See also GCONECON to increment by the contour interval, GCMULCON to modify multiple plines, GCCONTXT to interpolate elevations from contour label text, ELVPLINE to interpolate elevations from a DTM or GCRIVER to interpolate elevations onto a digitized river valley.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     U 258
     POINT

    Create a point.

    Create a new point on the current layer with the current point colour.

    Loc:
    Enter a location (northing and easting or X and Y). Right-click in the graphics area to compute a location.
    Z:
    Enter an elevation or leave blank for no elevation
    Pn:
    Enter a point number. To accept a default, enter * or adopt a suggested number.
    Name:
    Enter a point name (or description) of up to eighty characters or leave blank.
    Point
    Create the point
    Close
    Close the command with creating any more points

    Use POINTSET to configure default point numbers.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Point|​Point S 50
     POINTSET

    Configure point numbering.

    Configure numbering of points as they are created.

    Settings

    Numbering
    Automatic
    Number new points automatically as they are created, beginning with the Start pn. This is the most common setting.
    Prompt, warn if in use
    Prompt for a point number as each new point is created. Accept the default or enter another number. If you enter a number already assigned, you are prompted for another point number.
    Prompt, no warnings
    Prompt for a point number as each new point is created. Accept the default or enter another number. If the point number you enter is already assigned, overwrite the old point.
    Start pn
    Assign a starting point number for new points as they are created, for default point numbers when prompted and for importing a points file that does not have point numbers.
    Protect pn in use from deletion
    Protect points that are part of a set from deletion unless the set line is also deleted. This is usually OFF. If ON, a point within more than one set, is not deleted if only one of those sets is deleted.
    Prompt for name
    Prompt for a name for each individual new point as it is created. Commands that create multiple design points (such as DESIGN) or that automatically name points will not prompt for a name, regardless of this setting.
    Max integer pn
    Specify a maximum point number to be stored as an integer.
    OK
    Accept any changed settings
    Cancel
    Cancel without changing any settings

    Notes

    These point settings are project variables. See also SYSTEM which can configure the System variables Max Objects and Max alpha pts that are stored in P3Server.ini.

    Any new point with an integer number greater than Max Integer pn is stored as if an alphanumeric (and thus uses more memory and counts against Max Alpha Points.

    To avoid cases where you cannot create or import ranges of certain integer point numbers, Max Integer pn should equal Max objects less Max alpha pts. Commands in Geocomp Update can increase the Max integer pn if less than this number.

    IMPORT ASCII points controls the numbering of imported points within the limits of POINTSET`.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Settings|​Point settings... S 45
     POLYGON

    Create a regular polygon.

    Create a pline with the specified number of sides and a specified distance to the vertices from a centre location.

    Any vertical exaggeration factor is applied.

    TML date MenuSource 
    29/10/08   Draw|​Pline|​Polygon S  
     PONDDEF

    Pond definition.

    Compute areas from closed contours and stores the areas as attributes of the point.

    See PONDVOL.

    TML dateGuideMenuSource 
    29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro|​Ponds|​Pond definition from contours S  
     PONDLIST

    List pond data.

    List pond outlet devices and plot Stage|​Storage|​Discharge curves.

    Use PONDOUT to store pond devices before you list them.

    TML dateGuideMenuSource 
    29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro|​Ponds|​List pond S  
     PONDOUT

    Define pond outlets.

    Define pond outlet devices.

    TML dateGuideMenuSource 
    29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro|​Ponds|​Pond outlet devices S  
     PONDSUM

    Pond summary report.

    Create report summary showing peak inflow and outflow, maximum elevation, maximum volume and routed outflow.

    TML dateGuideMenuSource 
    29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro|​Ponds|​Pond peak flow rate S  
     PONDVOL

    Enter pond volume.

    Enter or edit pond volume data for a point.

    See PONDDEF.

    TML dateGuideMenuSource 
    29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro|​Ponds|​Pond definition from contours S  
     PORTSC1

    List points showing heights as depths.

    Exactly the same report as LPOINTS, except that elevations in the report are multiplied by -1. The elevations of the points are unchanged.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     POWERGDE

    Export files to Leica PowerGrade on UMC 3D Machine Control for graders.

    Export the centreline, plan and triangle files required for dozers or graders fitted with Leica Geosystems PowerGrade 3D Machine Control.

    Define an alignment using a road job, then select plines or sets to export as a PLN file or a selected DTM to export as an XML.

    Options

    Road job
    The exported centreline (.CL) file contains coordinates at chainages along the main alignment of the selected roadjob. Each record in the .CL file is in the format 0,​chainage,​L,​northing,​easting. Define one roadjob for each centreline.
    3D (PLN):
    Select plines or sets to export as a .PLN file. If you select any sets or plines, a .PLN is created. Each set or pline is written to the PLN file starting with POLYLINE followed by the colour number and point name. Subsequent lines define coordinates as easting,​northing,​elevation or easting,​northing.
    DTM:
    Specify a DTM layer to be exported as a LandXML file. You can limit the DTM to a boundary.
    Create Files
    Open the prompt Settings and output file name.
    Arc to Chord
    Wherever the plines or sets contain arcs or spirals, additional coordinates are written to the .CL and .PLN files using the specified arc-to-chord tolerances.
    Generate Report
    Report to P3Pad every record written to the CL, PLN or XML file.
    Export Filename:
    Specify the location and name of the .CL file. Any .PLN or .XML file names will match.
    OK
    Create the .CL file then any .PLN or .XML files

    Then load the files onto Leica UMC 3D Machine Control running PowerGrade software.

    Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

    For iCON, use ROADRUN. See also GCUMC3D, GRADESMT and DTM2XML.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18  Geocomp Update or $250 
     PREDAREA

    Divide a lot (a closed set) into predetermined areas.

    Select a set that represents a road frontage. Select sets that represent the remaining boundaries of an initial parcel of land. Configure Settings. Then click PredArea to create closed sets of predetermined area that represent lots within the parcel.

    Frontage
    Select a single set
    Boundary
    Select sets with common points that together define the remaining parcel boundary. The frontage and one of the boundaries must intersect.
    Settings
    Minimum area
    Enter the minimum lot area in square project units. The area must be than zero.
    Minimum frontage
    Enter the minimum distance along the frontage of each new lot. The distance must be greater than zero.
    Cul-de-sac radius
    Enter a distance just greater than the largest cul-de-sac radius. Any curve with a smaller radius is considered to be part of the cul-de-sac frontage when considering setbacks.
    Min rear length
    Enter any minimum lot width at the rear setback line.
    Lot side lines
    Bearing
    Enable entry of a bearing for the side lot lines.
    Perpendicular
    Enable creation of side lot lines perpendicular or radial to the frontage at the point where they intersect.
    Hide overlapping lot lines
    Turn off any sets segemnts that overlap.
    Setbacks
    Enter any setback distances.
    Frontage
    Enter the depth and width of setbacks from the frontage along tangents (straights), cul-de-sacs and other arcs.
    None
    No setbacks are considered
    Rear
    Enter the minimum setback depth and width at the rear of the lot.
    Build env
    Enter the minimum setback depth and width at the rear of the building envelope.
    Show as
    Create any setback lines as sets or plines
    OK or Cancel
    Accept changes to settings, or not.
    Predarea
    Create
    Create one or more lots. Enter a starting lot number, a bearing if applicable, and locations near the centre each of lot.
    Corner
    Create a corner lot. Enter a bearing and a location near the centre of the lot.
    Pivot
    Create a lot given a fixed point on the frontage.
    Settings
    Return to Settings.
    Undo
    Undo one or more lots just created.

    Differences with ADJAREA:

    AdjAreaPredArea
    Create single lotCreate multiple lots
    Use set and pline boundariesUse set boundaries
    Create closed plineCreate closed set
    Consider boundaries, area and direction or rotationConsider frontage, minimum area, rear length, angle and setback

    See also REARLOTL, and SPLITSET.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09 HELPTM Cogo|​Lots|​Predetermined area
    Cogo|​Predetermined area
    S  
     PPS

    Display Plan, Profile and Sheet views, tiled vertically.

    Close views then select the Plan, Profile and Sheet views, tile horizontally, zoom all for each view then select Plan for the Current View mode.

    PPS is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY PLANPROFSHEETVERT.

    Macro date MenuSource 
    01/09/18   File|​Macro|​Play|​plan​prof​sheet​vert User-​definable  
     PPSX

    Display Plan, Profile, Super and Xsect views, tiled quarterly.

    Close views then select the Plan, Profile, Super and Xsect views, tile, zoom all for each view then select Plan for the Current View mode.

    PPSX is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY PLANPROFSUPERXSECT.

    Macro date MenuSource 
    01/09/18   File|​Macro|​Play|​plan​prof​super​xsect User-​definable  
     PPX

    Display Plan, Profile and Xsect views, tiled vertically.

    Close views then select the Plan, Profile and Xsect views, tile vertically, zoom all for each view then select Plan for the Current View mode.

    PPX is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY PLANPROFXSECT.

    Macro date MenuSource 
    01/09/18   File|​Macro|​Play|​plan​prof​xsect User-​definable  
     PPXS

    Display Plan, Profile, Xsect and Super views, tiled quarterly.

    Close views then select the Plan, Profile, Xsect and Super views, tile, zoom all for each view then select Plan for the Current View mode.

    PPSX is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY PLANPROFXSECTSUPER.

    Macro date MenuSource 
    01/09/18   File|​Macro|​Play|​plan​prof​xsect​super User-​definable  
    PREVIOUS

    previous toolbar button

    Display the previous view.

    See also VRECALL.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM View|​Previous view
    Toolbar button
    S 145
     PRJCLNT

    ASAP Project Data Management - Client data.

    Enter Client data for PLANSET into a form.

    The project variables are:

    PRJCLNT field Project variable EAT Code insertion aid EAT Code

    Client name

    PRJD_​​CLNT_​NAME

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​CLNT_​NAME

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​CLNT_​NAME}

    Street address

    PRJD_​STRT_​ADDR1

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​STRT_​ADDR1

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​STRT_​ADDR1}

    Street address

    PRJD_​STRT_​ADDR2

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​STRT_​ADDR2

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​STRT_​ADDR2}

    City

    PRJD_​CLNT_​CITY

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​CLNT_​CITY

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​CLNT_​CITY}

    St

    PRJD_​CLNT_​STATE

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​CLNT_​STATE

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​CLNT_​STATE

    Zip

    PRJD_​CLNT_​ZIP

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​CLNT_​ZIP

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​CLNT_​ZIP}

    Phone

    PRJD_​CLNT_​PHONE

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​CLNT_​PHONE

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​CLNT_​PHONE}

    Fax

    PRJD_​CLNT_​FAX

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​CLNT_​FAX

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​CLNT_​FAX}

    TML dateGuideMenuSource 
    29/10/08HELPTM, asap doc.pdf and tg-plans.pdf Draft|​ASAP-Project data|​Client data... S  
     PRJINFO

    ASAP Project Data Management - General Information.

    Enter General Project Information for PLANSET into a form.

    The project variables are:

    PRJINFO field Project variable EAT Code insertion aid EAT Code

    Project name

    PRJD_​PROJ_​NAME

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​PROJ_​NAME

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​PROJ_​NAME}

    1st Subtitle

    PRJD_​PROJ_​NAME1

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​PROJ_​NAME1

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​PROJ_​NAME1}

    2nd Subtitle

    PRJD_​PROJ_​NAME2

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​PROJ_​NAME2

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​PROJ_​NAME2}

    Job number

    PRJD_​JOB_​NUM

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​JOB_​NUM

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​JOB_​NUM}

    Department

    PRJD_​DEPT_​NAME

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​DEPT_​NAME

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​DEPT_​NAME}

    TML dateGuideMenuSource 
    29/10/08HELPTM, asap doc.pdf and tg-plans.pdf Draft|​ASAP-Project data|​General information... S  
     PRJLOC

    ASAP Project Data Management - Project location.

    Enter Project location Information for PLANSET into a form.

    The project variables are:

    PRJLOC field Project variable EAT Code insertion aid EAT Code Comment

    Community

    PRJD_​​COMM_​NAME

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​​COMM_​NAME

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​​COMM_​NAME}

     

    City

    PRJD_​CITY_​NAME

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​CITY_​NAME

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​CITY_​NAME}

     

    County

    PRJD_​CNTY_​NAME

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​CNTY_​NAME

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​CNTY_​NAME}

     

    State

    PRJD_​STATE_​NAME

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​STATE_​NAME

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​STATE_​NAME}

     

    Section number

    PRJD_​SECTION

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​SECTION

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​SECTION}

    Integer up to 36

    Township number

    PRJD_​TWNSHIP

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​TWNSHIP

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​TWNSHIP}

    Integer

    Township direction

    PRJD_​TWNSHP_​DIR

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​TWNSHP_​DIR

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​PRJD_​TWNSHP_​DIR}

    North or South

    Range number

    PRJD_​RANGE

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​RANGE

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​RANGE}

    Integer

    Range direction

    PRJD_​RANGE_​DIR

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​RANGE_​DIR

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​RANGE_​DIR}

    East or West

    TML dateGuideMenuSource 
    29/10/08HELPTM, asap doc.pdf and tg-plans.pdf Draft\​ASAP-Project data\​Project location... S  
     PRJLTEXT

    ASAP Project Data Management - Link text to data.

    Link text to a PLANSET project variable.

    Modify a selected text object to show a project variable for use with PLANSET.

    Select a project variable set by PRJINFO (General), PRJLOC (Location), PRJCLNT (Client) or PRJSTAFF (Staff).

    For example, you create a sample text object which displays SAMPLE TEXT in a title block with your desired font, size and colour. Then in PRJLTEXT you select text then the Client Name variable. The text is replaced by EAT text \PROJ​{V,s,PRJD_​CLNT_​NAME} that displays any Client Name you specified by PRJCLNT.

    TML dateGuideMenuSource 
    29/10/08HELPTM, asap doc.pdf and tg-plans.pdf Draft\​ASAP-Project data\​Link text S  
     PRJSTAFF

    ASAP Project Data Management - Staff data.

    Enter Staff data for PLANSET into a form.

    The project variables are:

    PRJSTAFF field Project variable EAT Code insertion aid EAT Code

    Project manager

    PRJD_​PRJMGRNAME

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​PRJMGRNAME

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​PRJMGRNAME}

    Engineer of record Name

    PRJD_​ENG_​REC_​N

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​ENG_​REC_​N

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​ENG_​REC_​N}

    Engineer of record Reg. no.

    PRJD_​ENG_​REC_​RG

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​ENG_​REC_​RG

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​ENG_​REC_​RG}

    Engineer of record State

    PRJD_​ENG_​REC_​ST

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​ENG_​REC_​ST

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​ENG_​REC_​ST}

    Surveyor of record Name

    PRJD_​SRV_​REC_​N

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​SRV_​REC_​N

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​SRV_​REC_​N}

    Surveyor of record Reg. no.

    PRJD_​SRV_​REC_​RG

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​SRV_​REC_​RG

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​SRV_​REC_​RG}

    Surveyor of record State

    PRJD_​SRV_​REC_​ST

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​SRV_​REC_​ST

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​SRV_​REC_​ST}

    Designed by

    PRJD_​DESIGN_​BY

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​DESIGN_​BY

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​DESIGN_​BY}

    Drawn by

    PRJD_​DRAWN_​BY

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​DRAWN_​BY

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​DRAWN_​BY}

    Checked by

    PRJD_​CHECKED_​BY

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​CHECKED_​BY

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​CHECKED_​BY}

    Approved by

    PRJD_​APPROVE_​BY

    Project|​Variable|​PRJD_​APPROVE_​BY

    \PROJ​{V,S,PRJD_​APPROVE_​BY}

    TML dateGuideMenuSource 
    29/10/08HELPTM, asap doc.pdf and tg-plans.pdf Draft|​ASAP-Project data|​Staff data... S  
     PRODUCTS

    Report the serial number and modules on the currently attached dongle.

    Generate a report showing the current serial number, purchase code and modules.

    Products is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY PRODUCTS which uses ABOUT.

    Macro date MenuSource 
    01/09/18   File|​Macro|​Play|​products User-definable  
     PROFILE

    Create profiles from masked DTM layers.

    Create profile plines in the Profile view on a specified layer by interpolation from masked DTM layers along a horizontal alignment.

    The alignment can be a pline or set. The profiles are interpolated along the horizontal alignment in segments according to the resolution in DISPLAYSET at either breaks (DTM links / triangle edges) or chainage intervals (and optionally HAL points). If the HAL is referenced to another HAL, each profile is created using the chainages of the parent HAL.

    The profiles are broken at the chainage range, DTM edge and within dead areas.

    So that the profile pline is referenced to the alignment, VIEWSET should have "Auto reference off" enabled for the profile view. If a pline exists on the specified layer that is referenced to the specified HAL, you will be prompted if you want to delete the previous profile.

    The profiles are extracted from every valid DTM layer with a name matching the DTM layer mask in the Settings. Wildcards are allowed such as * for all DTM layers and DTM* for just DTM layers starting with the letters "DTM".

    If a layer is isolated by LAYERSET, only that DTM layer is interpolated, regardless of layer mask.

    Each pline is assigned the point colour and linetype of the DTM layer from which it is extracted.

    See also GCPROFIL, which selects by a layer list and multiple HALS, and ROADPROF which uses SURFACE manager.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM DTM|Create profile S 401
     PROJECTV

    List and edit project variables.

    List the current values of all project variables that have been set in the project file to date.

    To edit (or delete) a project variable, highlight it in the list box, then click the Edit (or Delete) button.

    Filter the list by entering variable names with wildcards.

    You can Report the details of the filtered variables.

    Command dateGuide Source 
    12/03/09HELPTM   S  
     PROJINFO

    Enter and view user information about a project file.

    Edit project variables for Description, Draftsperson, Revision and Drawing Number and display the created, last modified and last plotted dates.

    For example:

    1. From the File menu, select File menu, then Project Information...
    2. Enter your name into the "Draftperson" field
    3. In TEXT, click on EAT Codes... to open the EAT code insertion aid
    4. Select a Code Type of Project
    5. From the list of Options, select Variable
    6. From the list of Variables, select AUTHOR
    7. The displayed value of the AUTHOR project variable should be your name
    8. Click OK to insert the EAT code \PROJ​{V,S,AUTHOR} into the text
    9. Select a location to place the text, such as in a title block
    10. Click Text
    11. Your name should be displayed as text.
    PROJINFO field Project variable EAT Code insertion aid EAT Code Comment

    Description

    Project|​Title

    \PROJ​{T}

    In the heading of all reports to P3Pad where the project file name and path are short enough

    Draftsperson

    AUTHOR

    Project|​Variable|​AUTHOR

    \PROJ​{V,S,AUTHOR}

     

    Revision

    REVISION

    Project|​Variable|​REVISION

    \PROJ​{V,S,REVISION}

     

    Drawing no

    DRAWING

    Project|​Variable|​DRAWING

    \PROJ​{V,S,DRAWING}

     

    Created

    CREATED

    Project|​Variable|​CREATED

    \PROJ​{V,S,CREATED}

     

    Last modified

    Project|​Modified

    \PROJ​{MM#/DD/YR H1:MM:SS} or similar

    The date when the project was last saved. Choose from a range of formats.

    Last plotted

    PLOTTED

    Project|​Variable|​PLOTTED

    \PROJ​{V,S,PLOTTED}

    Only available after the first PLOT from this project

    See also PROJVARS to edit survey description, PRJINFO for PLANSET variables only and PROJECTV for all project variables.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM File|​Project Information S  
     PROJVARS

    Enter and view survey information about a project file.

    This function shows and allows editing of project variables for Description, Project number, project surveyor and survey date as well as datums, adopted survey marks and dates.

    These values can all be used by EAT code text, such as in title blocks.

    Use PROJINFO for user description, PRJINFO for PLANSET variables only and PROJECTV for all project variables.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     PSTATION

    Create points relative to a horizontal alignment.

    Create points relative to a HAL using survey techniques using one of these options:

    INSTRUMENT
    HAL, chainage, offset, Instrument height, target height
    GROUND
    HAL, chainage, offset, elevation
    STADIA
    HAL, chainage, instrument height, Staff observations

    GROUND is similar to GC65.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Cogo|​Point by chainage
    Cogo|​Point by station
    S  
     PTBLKS

    Create points at the insertion point of selected 3D blocks.

    Create points at the insertion point of selected 3D blocks.

    2D blocks are ignored. Points are named with the block name.

    See also GCBLKPTS and TEXT2PNT.

    TML date MenuSourceGC
    29/10/08   Draft|​Points on 3D blocks S 38
     PTCASE

    Change the case of alpha point numbers.

    Change the case of alphabetic characters in selected point numbers to Upper, Lower, Sentence or Title.

    Upper
    CHANGE ALL LETTERS TO UPPER CASE
    Lower
    change all letters to lower case
    Sentence
    Change the first character to upper case and all other characters to lower case
    Title
    Change the Initial Letters of the First Word and Words Between Spaces to Uppercase and Change Common Short Words Without Punctuation an of or a the is on but for and in to Lowercase.

    See also NAMECASE and TEXTCASE.

    TML date     Source 
    12/02/16     Geocomp Update or $250  
     PTDRAIN

    Create a catchment boundary around a point.

    Create a boundary set around the portion of a DTM that drains to a point.

    See also GCFALL.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Hydro|​Drainage to point S  
     PTJOIN

    Join selected points by sequential point number.

    Join selected points by sequential point number.

    See also SET to join points by ranges of sequential point number, AUTODRAFT to join points by name, GCJOINPT to join points by Geocomp code or GCJOINMP to join points with gaps.

    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 291
     PTLAB

    Edit point label blocks.

    Create or edit point label blocks for use with LABELPOINT and HDMS.

    Point label blocks are external blocks numbered from 001 to 255. They have names in the format PTLM???.BLK (for cm sheet units), and PTLAB???.BLK for inch sheet units, and are stored in C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared\​Blocks.

    These blocks define point labels used to efficiently label multiple points. Point labels once created are not blocks, but properties of points. Point labels can contain a point number, easting, northing, elevation or description, with defined offsets, precision, prefix, justification, font, height, aspect, slant, colour and rotation (in 22.5 degree increments).

    • LABELPOINT selects from a list of block label descriptions and labels many points.
    • The Label button in EDIT allows you to specify a block label style index by number.
    • F7, F9 and F11 place point label blocks for point numbers, elevations and descriptions.
    • HDMS labels depths.
    • BLOCK Multiple places the blocks with EAT text, rather than as point labels.

    Once points have been labelled, GC93 can mirror or rotate point labels on selected points.

    To create or edit a point label block:

    1. OPEN a new temporary project based on your prototype
    2. In MEASUNIT, check that the sheet units are cm (or in), but not mm.
    3. DELETE everything in the sheet view by view.
    4. While in the sheet view, use PTLAB command to load a point label block.
      • To edit a point label block, use Terramodel commands from the menus to edit the sample block shown.
      • To create new point label block, or add a label to an existing block, use INSERT.
      • To create a new point label block as a variant of an existing point label block, LOAD the block then SAVE with a new name and description, then edit that.
    5. When you next run LABELPOINT, the description of the block may be added to the list of descriptions in [POINT_LABELS] or [POINT_METRIC_LABELS] of C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared​\Locale\​English\​p3server.ini (or its copy in VirtualStore). If not, you can add this manually.

    For example, to create a new point label block with point name and elevation 4.0 cm high to the left of the point:

    1. OPEN a new temporary project
    2. Check that the measurement units for sheet units are cm.
    3. DELETE everything in the sheet view by view.
    4. Run PTLAB command.
    5. Load a similar point label block such as 078)2.0-Lt-NM/EL
    6. Without leaving the PTLAB command make changes to the sample. In this case, Modify Scale around 0 0 by X 2.0 and Y 2.0
    7. Save
    8. Assign a Point Label block number that is not already used by a ptlm*.blk file in C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared\​Blocks (such as 201)
    9. Enter a suitable short description (such as 4.0-Lt-NM/EL)
    10. Save
    11. EXIT Terramodel
    12. Open C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared\​Locale\​English\​p3server.ini in a text editor
    13. Save to a location where you can edit (e.g. Desktop)
    14. Add the name to the end of the list of [POINT_METRIC_LABELS] like this 201=4.0-Lt-NM/EL
    15. Copy the edited file to C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Locale\English\p3server.ini, replacing the original
    16. Restart Terramodel
    17. OPEN a project with points
    18. Label points with the LABELPOINT command.

    Command dateGuide Source 
    01/09/18HELPTM   Geocomp Update or $250 110
     PTLAYCOL

    Relayer and recolour points by name and mapping file.

    Relayer and colour selected points by name according to a comma-​delimited mapping file with name, layer, colour.

    PLAY.MAP is a supplied example mapping file.

    To relayer but not recolour, leave the colour field empty.

    See also GCLAYCOL, AUTODRAFT, LAYERMAP and CHNGNAME.

    TML dateGuideSourceGC
    24/07/20 RG 1239 Modify|​Point layer/colour
    Modify|​Point layer/color
    Geocomp Update or $250 40
     PTS2ADC

    Create points for testing AutoDraft.

    Create points for testing AUTODRAFT.

    Create three columns of points on the current layer with names for numerical point and string field codes.

    See also CSV2ADC.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     PTS2BDY

    Create a boundary around points.

    Create closed pline or set around the extent of selected points.

    The edge distances are controlled by LINKSET.

    See also
    DTMEDGE
    Create a closed set around the extent of a DTM
    AUTOSET
    Create a clockwise set linking selected points
    GCTRACE
    Create a closed set or pline inside selected sets or plines

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     PTS2NAME

    Rename points to match their point numbers.

    Rename points to match their point numbers.

    See also GC79

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     PTS2PROF

    Copy points from plan to profile view relative to a HAL.

    Copy selected points to a specified layer in the profile view.

    This is useful for showing obstructions, pits, trees and so on relative to profiles.

    The chainage and offset are relative to the specified HAL.

    There are options to add a 1.0m vertical leader pline and to join the points.

    A report shows Point number, Chainage, Offset, Elevation and Name.

    If a point has no elevations, this is shown in the report but no point is created in the profile view.

    See also SET2PROF, FLIPUP, FLIPDOWN and GC41.

    TML date  Source 
    08/03/19     Geocomp Update or $250  
     PTS2TEXT

    Export a coordinate list.

    The file format is fixed at X Y Z PTNo. For example:

    
    -10.29 -1.97 105.0 13
    
    -12.00 -3.64 6.0 24
    
    -13.79 -1.23 7.0 25
    
    

    See also EXPORT ASCII points, PTSOUT PTSOUT and GCPTSOUT.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 188
     PTS2TRV

    Create a .TRV file from the selected points.

    Traverse (.trv) is an old Terramodel data collector standard format.

    TML date  Source 
    29/10/08     S  
     PTSIN

    Import point data from an ASCII file.

    Select from a range of coordinate survey formats.

    The formats are:

    • Agtek
    • Civilsoft (1 and 2)
    • Geopak
    • Lewis and Lewis
    • Lietz SDRMap
    • LisCAD
    • TDS
    • Wildsoft
    • Lat-Long

    See also GCPTSIN which also imports Geocomp Control Points (.CRD), Geocomp Field File coordinates .(FLD) and Trimble E N D formats.

    See also IMPORT which imports many formats.

    See also GCPTSOUT and PTSOUT.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    29/10/08 RG 77 File|​Misc. Import/Export|​Points Import
    File|​Third party|​Points in
    S FC
     PTSITE

    Modify elevation by elevation difference and grade.

    Modify elevation of a point based on elevation difference and grade between two points.

    Enter a Setup point, a point to be Edited and a new elevation.

    You can enter the elevation or enter a vertical angle with P, %, Z, V, etc. or by selecting a set segment.

    The elevation of the edit point is calculated from the setup point and the vertical angle. Refer to Terramodel User Guide for Coordinate Geometry Controls.

    For example, enter "1.5%" for a grade 1.5% up from horizontal.
    For a 1:150 grade, enter "R150:1" because the format is R vertical.

    See also PTSITE2.

    TML dateGuide SourceGC
    29/10/08 UG 211   S 81
     PTSITE2

    Change elevation by slope and distance relative to a point.

    Modify elevation of a point based on slope and distance between two points.

    Enter a Setup point, a point to be Edited, a distance and a slope.

    See also PTSITE.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     U 81
     PTSOUT

    Output points to an ASCII file.

    Formats include:

    • CivilSoft 1 and 2
    • Geopak
    • Lewis and Lewis
    • Lietz SDRMap
    • LisCAD
    • TDS ASCII
    • Wildsoft

    Many of these formats are for uploading to surveying instruments.

    See also GCPTSOUT which includes more formats, especially those commonly used in Australia.

    See also EXPORT and PTS2TEXT.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    29/10/08 RG 78 File|​Misc. Import/Export|​Points Export
    File|Third party|Points out
    S 188
     PXPS

    Display Plan, Xsect, Profile and Super views, tiled quarterly.

    Close views then select the Plan, Profile, Super and Xsect views, tile, zoom all for each view then select Plan for the Current View mode.

    PXPS is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY PLANXSECTPROFSUPER.

    Macro date MenuSource 
    01/09/18   File|​Macro|​Play|​plan​xsect​prof​super User-definable  
     QISOLATE

    Quick isolate toolbar button

    Isolate or unisolate the current layer.

    Isolate or unisolate the current layer by ISOLATE button on toolbar or QI alias.

    If the current layer has not been isolated by LAYERSET, QISOLATE isolates the current layer so it is the only visible layer, even if some other layer is currently isolated.

    If the current layer is currently isolated, the isolation flag is removed, so all visible layers are displayed.

    Since isolating a layer makes the layer visible, if the layer was previously invisible it will remain visible until it is next made invisible by a command such as LAYERSET.

    See also QUIKLSET.

    TML date MenuSourceGC
    01/09/18   Toolbar button Geocomp Update or $250 47
     QPROFILE

    quick profile toolbar button

    Display profiles between two locations.

    Display profiles along the path between From and To locations, for all visible DTM layers matching the layer mask.

    The colour of each profile is determined by the line colour for the DTM layer.

    LAYER MASK
    Select the layers from which the profiles will be calculated. Simple wildcard naming is allowed. The "*" is used to indicate that multiple characters can be substituted. (For example, a single "*" will display all layers and "DTM*" will display all layers beginning with the characters "DTM".) After changing the layer mask, select the Update button to update the display.
    GRID
    Display the current grid as defined for the profile view using GRIDSET. After checking the Grid option, select the Update button to update the display.
    EXAGGERATION
    Specify how much the vertical scale of the profile should be exaggerated with respect to the horizontal scale.
    AUTO VEF
    When checked the Vertical Exaggeration Factor (VEF) will automatically be applied. The vertical scale will be exaggerated enough for it to fit within the graphics area of the Quick Profile dialog box. When not checked, you can enter a vertical exaggeration factor in the real number control immediately below.
    ALL /ZOOM
    Enlarge or reduce the image of the profile in the graphics area.
    UPDATE
    Updates the displayed profiles and grid to suit the current settings.
    Done
    Close the quick profile display then select another two locations or Cancel.

    See also PROFILE which creates a pline and GCQP which updates the quick profile as you move the mouse in the Plan view.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM DTM|​Quick profile
    Toolbar button
    S 492
     QSET

    Create set quickly by bearing and distance.

    Great for 2D traverse and lot boundary entry.

    Optionally, assign a lot number when closing the set.

    Has undo point option. A curve button allows entry of various curve properties.

    See also ARC, BLDG, BUILDING and TRAVERSE.

    TML date MenuSourceGC
    01/09/18   Cogo|​Traverse|​Quick set S 64
     QSGRIDIN

    Import a Qsurv QGD Grid file

    Import a Qsurv QGD Grid file

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     QSGRIDOU

    Export a Qsurv QGD Grid file.

    Export a Qsurv QGD Grid file.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     QSURVOUT

    Export to Qsurv format.

    Export to Qsurv format.

    Select records, HAL, Xlines (and optional VAL) and export QSURV .HOR, .VAL and .CES files.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     QUIKLSET

    Quick layer settings toolbar button

    Quickly isolate or change the visibility of layers.

    Using arrow keys or a mouse wheel, scroll through each layer by name and see the number of objects of each type displayed on the status line.

    Auto All
    Display extents of visible objects and, if Isolate is ON, display the extents of each displayed layer in turn
    Visible
    Change visibility of the displayed layer
    Isolate
    If ON, display only objects on that layer and count objects of each type and in each view
    Info
    Report the colours, linetype, visibility, snapability and number of each object type of the displayed layer
    OK
    Modify the visibility and isolation of the displayed layer to match

    If Isolate is ON, scrolling through the layers can be a quick way to see which layers are which.

    If the layer selection is active (highlighted), scrolling with the mouse wheel only changes the active layer. Scrolling with the Control key held down zooms the image. If this behaviour is reversed, in Windows 10 go to Settings | Devices | Mouse and turn off "Scroll inactive Windows".

    See also QISOLATE and VISLYR.

    TML date MenuSourceGC
    01/09/18   Settings|​Quick layer settings
    Toolbar button
    Geocomp Update or $250 48
     QV

    Move a HAL IP and recompute roadway volume.

    Moves a selected point of intersection along a horizontal alignment to a new location and calculate the resulting cut and fill roadway quantities.

    QV Options

    ROAD
    Terramodel will display the current road in this control. If you have more than one road in your project file, open the drop-down list box to select a different road.
    ALIGN
    Select the HAL whose alignment you want to modify from this locate control.
    LOC
    Enter the IP you want to relocate in this point control. Selecting the HAL along a curve or tangent causes Terramodel to locate the closest point of intersection to the location you picked.
    CALC
    This command button calculates the new cut and fill quantities from the modified HAL, the original vertical alignment, and the stored templates and displays it in the Message scroll.

    Tips:

    • You must have used the ROADS module to store a road job, shapes, templates, horizontal alignment and vertical alignment in your Terramodel project file before executing QV.
    • Execute Undo after each IP modification to return the alignment to its previous form.
    • GCQV is an improved version of QV.
    TML dateGuide SourceGC
    29/10/08 RG 1244   S 471
     RAILCANT

    Compute elevations by railway cant.

    Compute elevations for railway tracks defined by sets, from alignments and gauge.

    Specify

    H:
    Horizontal alignment
    V:
    Vertical alignment
    C:
    Cant in metres defined by a pline in Profile view
    Start Ch:
    Start chainage
    End:
    End chainage
    Settings
    Rail width (gauge) in metres
    Points:
    Points for which elevations are to be modified
    Apply Cant
    Replace elevations on selected points with elevations computed from HAL, and VAL and Cant alignments.

    See also RAILWAY.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     RAILWAY

    Create offset alignments for a railway with cant.

    Create or modify offset alignments for a railway by adjusting for cant and gauge.

    Method

    1. Create and register alignments with suitable names
      • Horizontal alignments
        • Left
        • Right
        • Centreline
      • Vertical alignments
        • Left
        • Right
        • Centreline
        • Cant (in project units)
      • Slope alignments
        • Left
        • Right
    2. Create a roadjob with the centreline
    3. In RAILWAY,
      1. Select the roadjob
      2. In Settings,
        • Enter the gauge (in project units)
        • Select whether the centreline is midway between the rails or the rails rotate about the lower rail at half-gauge distance from HAL
      3. Compute Hal/Cant offsets.

    See C:\TMCUSTOM\​Geocomp\​Docs\​Upline RailwayGC03.pro for an example of a project file with suitably named alignments.

    See also RAILCANT, GCHALOFF and GCVALOFF.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     RAIN

    List rainfall database.

    List the Rainfall Intensity, Duration and Frequency database used for the Rational method at the current location.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro|​Rainfall|​Rainfall reports S  
     RAINT

    List rainfall report totals.

    List the 6-hour and 24-hour total rainfall values in the default rainfall database file for the SCS method.

    TML dateGuideMenuSource 
    29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro|​Rainfall|​Rainfall report totals S  
     RANGE

    Display and report the highest and lowest elevations within a boundary or along a set.

    Find the highest and lowest points within a boundary or along a set.

    If the selected object is a closed set or pline, find the highest and lowest visible points within the boundary.

    If the boundary is an open set, or you choose "Only use points along the set", find the highest and lowest points along the set.

    The numbers and elevations of the highest and lowest points are reported in the message scroll. The points are labelled with circular symbols which can be turned off or exploded into text with LABELPOINT.

    Non-​contourable points are considered. 2D points are ignored.

    See also DTMSTATS and AVERPTS.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 169
     RCLTABLE

    Create table of arc properties.

    The table shows R, I, T, A, S, V, E & W.

    See also RETTABLE and RETURNS.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     RDDESIGN​CRIT

    Select the road design criteria.

    Select the vertical alignment design criteria from a design criteria file.

    For a roadway, select the design speed, functional classification, terrain and default K factor basis, from a predefined vertical profile design criteria file.

    Also select the number of lanes and maximum super­elevation rate from a predefined super­elevation rates file.

    The predefined files include AASHTO US and Metric specifications.

    See also RDVALEDIT, SUPERELV, DESIGN​SET, RDDESIGN​SET and RDVAL​DESCRT.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Road Design|​Roadways|​Design criteria...
    Channel|​Channel design|​Channels|​Design criteria...
    S  
     RDDESIGN​SET

    Road design settings.

    Configure road design settings.

    Control the display of the graphics screen editors and the operation of the roadway design computation.

    The Road Design Settings Dialog Box has tick boxes to enable:

    • Display Interactive Design, Shade Areas or Clip Subsurface Lines.
    • Use of Template shapes, Subgrade shapes, Transitions, super­elevations, Curve Correction or Phases in design calculations.
    • Display Lines, Labels, Areas, Axis, Centreline or Volumes.
    • Attach templates to the roadway HAL/VAL or finished cross sections
    • Use Skewed cross section volumes
    • Extrapolation of surfaces

    See Terramodel Help for more details.

    See also RDVALEDIT, SUPERELV, RDDESIGN​CRIT, DESIGNSET and RDVALDES​CRT.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Settings|​Design...
    Channel|​Settings|​Design...
    S  
     RDE

    Raw data editor.

    Add new information to raw survey data, to modify the current raw data, or to delete (or comment out) raw data you do not want to use. RDE also allows you to define the initial assumptions for the calculation process and to set tolerance definitions for three computation levels of raw data.

    As you enter the new information, the RDE recomputes (and optionally adjusts!) the coordinates for all the stations and sideshots.

    When you exit RDE, the raw data survey locations have been optimally calculated and already integrated with your project. You can return to further edit your raw data later.

    Data imported using IMPORT Scripts is automatically brought into RDE.

    Label and join the points with AUTODRAFT after exiting RDE.

    No other command is available until you exit RDE.

    Lost RDE window

    The RDE window can be maximised, minimised and restored. The window is displayed where the previous window was last located. If that location is not visible, because that display has since been disconnected or turned off, the window is not visible and import scripts appear to lock up.

    Recovery is often as simple as re-attaching a removed external display or turning on a laptop display.

    To reset the window to a location on the primary display:

    1. Exit Terramodel
    2. If the file RDE_window.reg is not present in C:\TMCUSTOM​\Geocomp​\, download the registration file to that folder and then rename the file to RDE_window.reg
    3. Open RDE_window.reg
    4. Accept the changes to the Windows registry
    5. Start Terramodel
    6. Try Raw data editor, or import or export script, again.

    Help

    RDE Help is available from the Help menu in RDE, from the Index submenu in the Help menu, from the HELPRDE command and from the guides listed below.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09 HELPRDE, UG Chapter 9, FDM User Guide, rdewhitepaper.pdf, Using RDE for Survey Control Edit|​Raw data editor S DC 8
     RDGUIDE

    Road job workflow guide.

    The Road Job Workflow Guide is a wizard designed to help you create a basic road job with all of the required roadway data and provide a place from which to access HALs, VALs, and xlines associated with your roadways when you need to review or edit them.

    If you have any data, such as lines or surfaces, that you want to use in your road job, you should import them before you use the Road Job Workflow Guide. For more advanced road job tasks, use other roadway related commands, such as ROADJOB, ROADWAY, HALDATA, VALDATA, SEGEDIT and GCXLINE.

    The workflow for creating a typical road job and defining the related roadway data includes:

    1. Create a road job by naming and describing it, or select an existing road job. When you create a road job, a roadway of the same name is created by default.
    2. Create a HAL by entering point of intersection (IP) coordinates, line segment geometry, or picking a line or set. You can also assign an existing registered HAL to your roadway.
    3. Review, report on, or add station/chainage equations to the selected or newly created HAL.
    4. Add cross section lines (xlines) at regular intervals or just transition points along the main HAL in your road job.
    5. Define a design by specifying an existing ground surface and either a design surface or template.
      1. Review and edit the road job if it includes a design surface.
      2. Complete the following steps if the road job does not include a design surface.
    6. Select an existing roadway, or create a new roadway for your road job.
    7. Create a VAL by entering point of vertical intersection (PVI) coordinates or picking a line. You can also assign an existing VAL to your roadway.
    8. Review and edit the road job.
    9. Add or edit templates to define your roadway's cross section to finish the process.

    Foundations

    Parts of a road job can include

    • Road job
    • Roadway
    • Horizontal alignment (HAL)
    • Vertical alignment (VAL)
    • Cross section (xline)
    • Design
    • Surface

    How parts of a road job relate to each other

    TERRAMODEL PROJECT
    Must have at least one road job and one roadway defined to perform a roadway design.
    ROAD JOB
    Must have at least one roadway defined.
    ROADWAY
    Must have at least one HAL defined. While every road job must have a main HAL, a VAL is never associated with the road job itself. It is associated with a roadway. Must be defined by both a HAL and a VAL if the road design is template-based.
    HAL
    May be designated as the roadway's main alignment, indicating that it is the HAL on which cross-section stationing is based.
    VAL
    Optional, and assigned to a specific roadway

    A basic road job hierarchy follows this structure:

    • Project Road job
      • Roadway
        • HAL
        • VAL
    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Road job workflow guide S Geocomp 10 User's Guide
     RDSCACALN

    Import a Caice alignment file.

    Import a Caice alignment .TXT file from RDS.

    See also EMSX​ALIGN and RDSGP​ALIGN.

    TML date  Source 
    29/10/08     S  
     RDSDTM​SET

    Road DTM Settings.

    Configure ROADDTM settings.

    NAME
    Enter up to 16 characters for a default name that Terramodel will assign to any points and breaklines it creates on the DTM, other than those that are named based on point codes.
    SURFACE
    Select the surface from which Terramodel is to generate the DTM. If you select the [Finished Design] surface, the top of the finished design will be modelled. If you select the [Subgrade Design] surface, the resulting DTM will coincide with the finished design outside of any subgrade areas but will be modified to coincide with the bottom of the lowest subgrade where they exist. You can also select from any of the defined surfaces and construct a DTM modelling that surface. If the surface was originally based on a DTM you can modify the cross-sections of that surface in the XSection Editor and then create a revised DTM if needed. Finally, you can select from any of the subgrades and create a DTM based on the bottom of that particular subgrade.
    POINT CODE
    Enter a point code filter which will let you build a DTM using only those points on the surface selected in the above Surface control that have that point code assigned. You can enter a point code using the asterisk (*) as a wildcard to select all points with point codes containing the designated substring, or you can enter just an asterisk (*), to select all points on the surface. A single character wildcard (?) can also be used. Any points with codes that don't match the filter are excluded from the DTM. Omitting a code will prevent Terramodel from generating a DTM.
    Chainage (station) range
    Enter the beginning and ending chainages along the road job for the DTM.
    WIDTH
    Designate that the entire road job DTM be generated or designate that only one particular side of a roadway be included.
    ROADJOB
    Create the DTM with respect to the alignment for the current road job.
    ROADWAY
    Create a DTM with respect to the alignment for a roadway within the current road job. This means that the only data that will be created will come from the design for the specified roadway. Select a roadway from the list box to the right.
    FULL CROSS SECTION/LEFT SIDE ONLY/RIGHT SIDE ONLY
    Choose to have a DTM created across the full cross-section, only on the left side of the alignment, or only on the right side of the alignment. These controls are also used to limit a construction staking report to one side if desired.
    OFFSETS
    Create additional points that are offset vertically and horizontally from a designated cross-section node. This feature is intended primarily for the generation of construction staking reports where you may often wish to stake points that are not actually nodes in the cross-section.
    VERTICAL
    Enter an amount by which Terramodel will vertically shift the points it calculates from the surface designated in the Surface control of the Road DTM Settings dialog box. A positive value shifts the point elevations up, a negative value shifts the point elevations down.
    HORIZONTAL
    Enter an amount by which Terramodel will horizontally offset the points it calculates from the surface designated in the Surface control of the Road DTM Settings dialog box. The horizontal offset is measured in the plane of each cross-section. Positive values offset away from a roadway centerline and negative values offset toward a roadway centerline.
    ON GROUND
    Create a new DTM point based on the northing and easting of the corresponding point on the design surface (offset as indicated if applicable), deriving its elevation from the existing ground surface at the resulting location. One example of where this option might be useful is to calculate points at a defined distance outside of the slope tie point for slope staking reports.
    ON SLOPE
    If there are horizontal offsets, determine the inside slope at a point on the design surface, continue that slope to the horizontal offset distance entered in the Horizontal control and create a point. It can be useful for creating temporary grades for a string line that a motor grader or other machines can follow.
    AT ELEVATION
    When horizontal offsets are used, determine the elevation of a point on the design surface and create a new point based on that elevation and the horizontal offset distance entered in the Horizontal control. This option is provided for those cases where you must use the design elevation.
    POINT CODE
    Designate a point code or point code name filter that identifies the cross-sections nodes from which offset points are to be created. In doing so, only those points with point codes that match the point code filter will be offset as indicated in this dialog box. You can designate that all points to be created on the DTM be offset as indicated by placing a * here.
    OBJECTS TO CREATE
    Points and Breaklines
    Select this radio button if you want Terramodel to create both points at surface nodes, and breaklines to connect those surface node points. When you select this radio button, you can specify guidelines for how the points and breaklines should be created by clicking the Options command button below.
    Daylight Line Only
    Select this radio button if you only want Terramodel to create points and breaklines at the intersection of the outside roadway tie slopes and the original DTM.
    Points only
    Selecting this radio button causes Terramodel to create only points at surface nodes.
    Options
    When the Points and Breaklines radio button is clicked, this command button opens the Road DTM Point and Breakline Options dialog box, where you can specify guidelines for how breaklines and points should be created. This button is dimmed when you select either the Daylight line only or Points only radio buttons.
    COMPUTATION PARAMETERS
    Xlines
    Create points at xlines
    Interval
    Create points at a specified chainage interval
    Xlines and Interval
    Create points at both xlines and specified interval
    Thin computed cross sections
    Remove points created at intervals unless the points are greater than the tolerance from the true alignment. Points created at xlines are not thinned.
    DEPTH SURFACE
    Calculate the points for the finish DTM with elevations relative to the existing (top) surface listed in the Surface Manager dialog box.
    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Settings|​DTM...
    Channel|​Settings|​DTM...
    S 482
     RDSECHO

    Report roadjob data.

    Report data in a project for a selected road job such as Materials, Phase names, Shapes, Hals, Vals and Settings.

    See also ROADRPT.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    01/09/18 RG 1009 Road|​Reports|​Input echo...
    Channel|​Reports|​Input echo
    S 482
     RDSGPALIGN

    Import a Geopak alignment report.

    Read a specific Geopak alignment file format.

    See also EMSXALIGN and RDSCACALN.

    TML date  Source 
    29/10/08     U  
     RDVALDESCRT

    Edit roadway vertical alignment design criteria.

    Edit the grade and K factor tables for vertical design criteria file.

    See also RDDESIGNCRIT, SUPERELV, DESIGNSET, RDDESIGNSET and RDVALEDIT.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Alignments|​VAL design criteria...
    Channel|​Alignments|​VAL design criteria...
    S  
     RDVALEDIT

    Edit vertical alignment using design criteria.

    Visually or numerically edit the geometry of a vertical alignment pline associated with a roadway, based on the geometric design criteria as established by RDVALDESCRT.

    This command provides a smart real-time visual solution for designing a vertical alignment. Drag and drop PVIs and vertical curves into a position that matches the alignment and the ground profile. Terramodel automatically inscribes a vertical curve of the minimum acceptable K factor as you insert a PVI. As you dynamically drag the PVI to its location, the length of its vertical curve and those of the adjacent PVIs are constantly adjusted to maintain their current K factors.

    The envelope within which you are able to drag the alignment is limited both by hard physical geometric limitations imposed by adjacent curves, and by the geometric design criteria. You cannot dynamically drag the alignment into a configuration that violates the design criteria. You can therefore confidently edit the alignment in a purely visual manner, knowing that Terramodel is taking care of many of the necessary design constraints for you. The designated criteria imposes such constraints as absolute minimum or desirable minimum K factors associated with safe stopping or passing sight distances, maximum allowable grades and minimum allowable grades for kerbed sections.

    RDValEdit Options

    VAL
    The vertical alignment and PVI or vertical curve to be edited, or the tangent segment into which a new PVI is to be inserted.
    LOCK PVI
    Specify whether the PVI location is to be edited (not checked) or the vertical curve data edited with the PVI fixed in place (checked).
    LOC
    The point at which a PVI is to be located when editing a PVI location, or through which the vertical curve passes.
    EDIT
    Edit a PVI location or vertical curve data.
    ID
    Display the curve data in the message area, or click on a tangent to display the length of the tangent segment and its slope.
    DEL.
    Delete the current PVI, whether you are dragging it or it is in the VAL locate control.
    UNDO
    Undo previous alignment editing operations.

    See also RDDESIGNCRIT, SUPERELV, DESIGNSET, RDDESIGNSET and RDVALDESCRT.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Alignments|​Val editor (design criteria based)
    Channel|​Alignments|​VAL editor
    S 412
     RDX

    Create cross section plots in the sheet view from a roadjob.

    Create road cross-sections at each xline in the Xsect view, and display the cross sections as dynaviews in the Sheet view.

    There are settings for properties of sheets, columns, cross sections, tables and layer names. These settings can be exported and imported.

    All values are in sheet units unless otherwise noted. Use cm or inch sheet units for best results.

    Select a Road Job
    Turn on to select surfaces and horizontal alignment by Road Job. Turn off to manually select HAL and surfaces.
    Chainage or Station Range
    Select beginning and ending chainages. The defaults are from the alignment.
    Erase ALL Cross Section Sheets and Dynaviews
    Erase all previous scross sections, for all alignments, or not.
    Overwrite ALL other Cross Section Sheets for Alignment
    Overwrite all cross sections for the alignment, or not.
    Sheet properties
    Enter the height and width of the new sheets, the location in the sheet view of the origin of the first sheet and the separation distance between sheets. The height and width should be less than the available space on the paper and in any title block.
    Column Properties
    Enter the height, width, separation and offsets of columns of cross sections. The width times the maximum number of columns plus separations must be less than the width in Sheet Properties. Select Axis labels and Grids to create a labelled grid over each column.
    Cross Section Properties
    Specify the scale, placement, labels and table of cross sections.
    Scale
    Enter the horizontal and vertical scale.
    Match scales
    Set the XSect view scales to match the plot scales.
    Placement in Columns
    Configure the order and separation of cross sections.
    Centerline Offset
    Centered
    At the centre of the column, locate the centreline (0.00 offset from the alignment).
    Auto
    At the centre of the column, locate halfway between the left and right extents of the section.
    Offset from column
    At the entered offset from the left of the column, locate the centreline.
    Axis Labels
    Create labelled axes over each section.
    Roadway labels
    If a roadjob was selected, label cross sections with elevations and slopes according to shape classes. For example, label pavements with grades and existing, finished and subgrade elevations.
    Quantity Label
    If a roadjob was selected, label cross sections with volume quanties between sections.
    Chainage (or Station) Label
    Label each section with the chainage (\STA\) and additional text. For example, in the template field enter "Ch=\STA\" to create the label "Ch=100.00".
    Table Settings
    Label each section with a table of offsets and elevations.
    Side box labels
    Include a side box with layer names
    Table Datum Level
    Locate the vertical datum of the top of the table, by the nearest major grid, an offset below the minimum elevation or an absolute elevation.
    Label Datum
    Enter the description and number of decimal places for the datum label.
    Table Rows
    label the Horizontal Offset, Northing, Easting, Design elevation or elevation difference between two surfaces.
    Swap order of Table Rows
    Turn on for offset and existing surface at the bottom of the table; off for them at the top.
    Interval settings
    Create columns of labels at even offset intervals, breaks in slope, where two surfaces intersect (catch) or at crossing HALs to be selected when creating the sections. crossing 3D HALS.
    Block Name
    Select a block to insert at crossing HALS if 3D.
    Label header
    Create labels in a box above the datum showing Chainage, Scale factors, Centreline coordinates or direction.
    Tick and Dropline settings
    Mark all Profiles with tick marks
    Insert short tick mark plines
    Mark vertical lines with Tick Mark
    Insert tick marks or drop lines from the specified surface
    Layers
    Specify layers and colours.
    Import Settings
    Import settings from an .RDX file.
    Export Settings
    Export settings to an .RDX file.
    Create
    For each Xline, create plines in the XSect view for each surface, add any labels, tables or grids, create a plotbox and create a dynaview in the Sheet view.
    Cancel
    Cancel without creating any more sections

    See also

    RDXGC
    An little-used alternative command
    XSHEET
    A similar command for use without a road job

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    30/01/20 RG 1015 Roads|​Plots|​Cross sections...
    Channel|​Plots|​Cross sections...
    S 492
     RDXGC

    Create cross sections plots in a Geocomp style.

    See also RDX. For most situations, RDX is the preferred command.

    The TML name is RDX_GC. If RDXGC does not run from the command line, create an alias from RDXGC to RDX_GC or enter RDX_GC.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $500 492
     RDXLINES

    Create Xlines along a roadway.

    Create xlines along a registered road alignment using various methods as follows:

    1. Select a registered horizontal alignment.
    2. Modify the default left and right Xline extents, if required.
    3. Create Xlines using one of these Xline types:
      Defaults
      This Type doesn't create xlines but sets the default left and right Xline extents used by other types. These defaults also limit the extents of roadways in commands such as ROADSPOT and GC42AB.
      HAL Pts
      Create cross section lines perpendicular to the HAL at each of the PC, PT, TS, SC, SS, LS, ST and PI points with no arcs. The XLINES are created using the default left and right lengths.
      Interval
      Create cross section lines perpendicular to the HAL at a specified interval and within a specified chainage range. The XLINES are created using the default left and right lengths.
      Point
      Create a cross section line perpendicular to the HAL at a specified point. The XLINES are created using the default left and right lengths.
      Chainage ( or Station)
      Create a cross section line perpendicular to the HAL at a specified chainage. The XLINES are created using the default left and right lengths.
      Pline
      Make the selected pline an Xline by changing the name to XLINE and referring the pline to the alignment.

    You can change the xline type and default extents during the function to create additional xlines.

    Any pline with the name XLINE that refers to and crosses a particular horizontal alignment is an Xline, regardless of layer or visibility.

    See also GCXLINES, XLINES and GC39.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Road design|​Road xlines
    Tunnels|​Xlines
    Channel|​Channel design|​Channel xlines
    S 84
     REACH

    Define reach parameters.

    Define the parameters of a reach for a specified set.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro|​Routing|​Create reach from set S  
     READATTB

    Add ATTRIB values from a Trimble DC file and add to point names.

    Suffix to the Terramodel point name all attribute values defined in ATTRIB records for each point in the specified DC file, which has a point number matching a point in the Raw Data Editor.

    You have the option of including the attribute name in addition to the attribute value.

    ATTRIB values from some points in raw survey DC files, especially GPS points, may not be imported. Use READATTB if the Trimble raw survey data (dc) import script does not suffix any required ATTRIB values from the DC file to the point name. If ATTRIB values have already been added to the point name when imported from the DC into RDE, the attribute values are duplicated in the name.

    READATTB does not assign ATTRIB values from the DC file to Terramodel attributes. Contact Geocomp Systems for advice if you want to do that.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     REARLOTL

    Replace segments in a set with a single segment

    Replace segments in a set with a single segment.

    For example, alter a rear lot line created by PREDAREA composed of multiple straight or arc segments to produce a single straight segment across the rear of the lot.

    TML dateGuideMenuSource 
    29/10/08 RG 1245 Cogo|​Lots|​Straighten rear lot line
    Cogo|​Straighten rear lot line
    S  
     RECENTER

    Recentre the window of the active view.

    Relocate the centre of the active view window to a specified coordinate.

    You can also type RECENTRE or hold down the Shift key then click on the mouse wheel.

    See also GC34 which can recentre at a point number.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM View|​Recenter
    View|​Recentre
    S 47
     REDRAW

    redraw toolbar button

    Function key F3

    Refresh the display of the active view window.

    Refresh the display of the active view window.

    See also GCREDRAW which also resets the Plan view scale so point labels are legible.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM View|​Redraw
    Toolbar button
    Function key F3
    S 132
     REDO

    Restore the most recent changes made by Undo.

    Restore the most recent changes made by UNDO.

    Only changes stored in the Undo buffer can be restored. The size of the Undo buffer is set by SYSTEM to a maximum of 19,999 objects.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Edit|​Redo S  
     REFER

    Refer selected objects to a parent.

    Refer selected objects (Objs) to one selected parent object (Parent) such as the current active alignment.

    Multiple "child" objects can refer to (reference, be a child of) only one "parent" (reference) object. Each parent may in turn refer to another object. This is called the "family tree".

    ID command shows the record number of the selected object (Obj) and its parent object (Ref Obj).

    If an active alignment has been set by ACTIVE, commands that prompt for horizontal alignments suggest that alignment by default. Objects in the profile view which refer to an alignment other than the active alignment are hidden.

    Xlines refer to alignments. EAT and Along text can refer to attributes of a parent object with {\PAR}. Commands that label and plot alignments such as PLANSET and LSEC1 refer a lot.

    A DYNAVIEW refers to a plotbox. An objects that refers to a visible parent, such as a plotbox pline, is displayed whether or not they fall within the limits of the parent. If you refer any object to the parent of a dynaview (the plotbox) it is plotted with the dynaview. All other objects are clipped to the limits of the plotbox.

    Objects with parents that are not a part of the tree, can be hidden by Auto off when editing a dynaview.

    In LAYOUT the offset lines refer to the centreline of each road, but the centreline is typically not referenced. With Auto off enabled the offset lines are not displayed in a dynaview. You may optionally reference the dynaview and centrelines to the same object so they are displayed.

    Terramodel determines the great-grand parents of the dynaview, and plots all objects, with a reference, that are descendants of the great-grandparent, with the exception of objects, and their descendants, that are children of other dynaviews.

    Although the process sounds complex, the effect is that you can have multiple overlapping dynaviews and each view will only show the objects that it is supposed to. This process works as a natural by-product of creating horizontal alignments, vertical alignments, labelling the alignments and creating dynaviews around portions of the alignments to create fully annotated plan and profile sheets.

    Terramodel also uses the term "reference" for unrelated concepts such as "reference planes" (ELEVREFPLANE), "reference projects" (REFFILE), "reference stations" (RDE), "reference surfaces" (SURFACE) and "Geodetic Reference Systems" (COORDCON).

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Modify|​Reference S  
     REFERPTH

    Change the path of reference files

    Change the location of reference files set by the Reference File Manager

    Use REFERPTH when Terramodel project refers to Terramodel reference projects that are no longer in their original locations.

    See REFFILE.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     REFFILE

    Reference file manager

    Manage reference files for a project.

    Reference files are displayed while working on a master project.

    The Terramodel project that you open is the master file and is, by default, editable. You can divide your job into several reference files, each addressing a different aspect of the overall design. If someone else works on a file to which you refer, and they save their work, you can see those changes. A team of people can collaborate on a project, each simultaneously editing a different portions, as contained within particular project files, while optionally viewing other related project files.

    The layer settings for a reference file are separate from the layer settings used when that file is an active, editable file. This duplicate set of layer settings is used for display only within the master project. When you open the master project, the referenced project is displayed according to the layer settings stored in the master project. When you save duplicate layer settings, only the master project file is updated.

    If you change the status of a referenced file to active, its own project layer settings are reinstated. If you change the layer settings while it is still active, the layer settings will be saved with the active project settings; they will not be saved with the master file. In other words, you can edit the layer settings from the context of the currently activated reference project, without affecting those settings in the current master project.

    Reference file properties include the file location to enable multiple users to refer to the same file on a central server. If you move the reference files, select the files in the new location.

    Close all other commands before running REFFILE.

    Reference File Manager dialog box

    Project
    List the currently registered reference files with a prefix, a project name, and associated visiblity, snap, lock, and active parameters. The opened project is listed as 0, the master project, and is, by default, the active project.
    Prefix
    Enter a prefix (up to 4 characters in the first column of the list of files) for each listed reference file.
    Add
    Select a project to add to the reference file list.
    Remove
    Select a project to be removed from the list of reference projects on OK and indicate by R in the right-most column.
    Lock
    Set the project to a read-only state, if it is not locked by another user and mark with an asterisk.
    Unlock
    Set the project to a read-write state and removes the asterisk.
    Visible
    Toggle on or off visibility of objects in any inactive reference project within Plan view and mark with V if on. An active project is always visible. REDRAW to refresh screen.
    Snap
    Toggle on or off selectability of objects in a reference project and indicate with S if on. To snap to an object in a non-active reference project, select by object snapping; running snap modes are not functional.
    Color as ref:
    Display all objects in a selected reference file in a single color. This overrides the layer color settings and individually assigned colors. This feature can be used to distinguish reference projects.
    Activate
    Select the active project. Only one project can be active, and thus editable, at a time.
    Layer settings
    Display Layer settings for the reference project
    OK
    Accept the changes
    Cancel
    Close without accepting any changes

    See also

    PCOPY
    Copy from a reference project
    REFLIST
    Report the master project and reference projects
    REFERPTH
    Change the master project to locate multiple reference projects in a new location

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM File|​Reference files... S 295
     REGALIGN

    Register multiple alignments.

    Selected sets and plines in the plan view will be registered as horizontal alignments in the HAL Manager.

    Selected sets and plines in the profile view will be registered as vertical alignments in the VAL Manager.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 66
     REGROUP

    Change the group of each object to match its layer.

    Since groups are limited to integer values from 0 to 65535, only layer names in this range will be considered.

    See also GRP2NAME (or LAY2NAME) which changes the name of each object to match its group (or layer).

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 76
     RELAYFIG

    Relayer selected sets or plines if they are closed.

    Relayer selected sets or plines if they are closed.

    Any number of figures (plines or sets) can be selected, and only the figures that are closed (lots) are relayered. Relayering the lots that are closed quickly enables you to tell which lots still need to be examined.

    RELAYFIG is helpful to surveyors, assessors and others that have to spend a lot of time cleaning up lot boundaries after digitizing or import from another software application.

    See also GCTRACE.

    TML dateGuide SourceGC
    20/01/16 relayfig.txt   Wencomp 75
     RELAYER

    Relayer selected objects.

    Relayer selected objects from one layer to another.

    See also GCCOPY, LAYERMAP, LAYERSET, LAYUSTN, GCNEARLN, and GCOFLINE.

    For a set to be a breakline it must be on the same layer as the points.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Modify|​Relayer S 40
     REMOVE​LINKS

    Remove DTM links

    Remove all DTM links from the active project.

    Removing DTM links can save memory space and .pro file size for archiving, emailing, and uploading to survey instruments.

    To recreate links, recreate the DTM surface with any command that requires a DTM.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM DTM|Remove links S  
     REMTRIS

    Remove edge and diagonal segments joining a square grid of points.

    Remove set segments on the selected layer with lengths equal to the nominated grid interval or the interval multiplied by the square root of 2.

    Use REMTRIS to remove superfluous triangle edges imported from a DTM on a square grid.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     RENUM

    Renumber individual points.

    Renumber points one at a time with incrementing point numbers.

    Enter the new point number then select a point. The number of the selected point is immediately changed to the new number, or the next available number.

    After each change, the default new point number is set to the next available point number.

    To specify whether to change the Point number, Layer, Colour or Name, select Properties.

    Points in the Raw Data Editor must be renumbered in RDE instead.

    See also RENUMBER, GCRENUM and MATCH.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     RENUMBER

    Renumber selected points.

    Compress: All
    Renumber integer points in a project to consecutive integers starting from 1. Any gaps in the sequence are removed. Alpha point numbers are not changed.
    Compress: Some
    Renumber all selected points to consecutive integers starting from a specified number. If any of the new point numbers clash with existing point numbers, no points are renumbered. At least one of the selected points must have an integer number; the others can be integer or alpha points. If all the points have alpha point numbers, RENUM one point first.
    Compress: Shift
    Add specified shift value to selected integer point numbers. If any of the new point numbers clash with existing point numbers, no points are renumbered.
    Record
    Select the points for Some or Shift.
    Start
    Specify the Starting integer point number for All or Some
    Shift
    Specify the positive or negative integer value to add for Shift

    Note:

    • Sets retain connections to renumbered points.
    • Point numbers associated with raw data can only be changed within the Raw Data Editor.
    • Use RENUM to select points one at a time
    • Use GCRENUM to renumber points in the direction of sets
    • Use ASM01 to renumber points in chainage/​station order
    • Use ADD2PTNO to add a prefix or suffix to point numbers
    • Use GC79 to renumber points to match their point names
    • Use PTS2NAME to rename points to match their point numbers
    • use EDIT to edit a point
    • Use RDE to edit a point in raw data
    • Use RENUMREC to reassign record numbers
    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Edit|​Renumber points S 42
     RENUMLOT

    Renumber lots.

    Increase (or decrease) all selected lot numbers by the same integer value.

    For selected lots (closed sets), with lot numbers (names) that start with an integer within the specified range, replace the lot numbers with new numbers equal to the sum of the integer and the increment.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     RENUMREC

    Renumber records to display over other records.

    Copy selected objects, other than points, to the next available record numbers, then delete the old objects. The new objects have higher record numbers and so display and plot later. They can also be thought of as over, above, in front of or on top of the other objects.

    The new record numbers are the next available. If there were no gaps in the sequence of record numbers before running the command, all the new objects will have record numbers higher than all the objects that were not selected. Such gaps are created by any command that deletes objects, such as DELETE and RENUMREC. Gaps are removed by any command that refreshes record numbers, such as SAVE and EXIT.

    To ensure renumbered records are in front (or over or above), first SAVE. To renumber records so they are behind (or under or below), first DELETE sufficient objects with lower record numbers to create a big enough gap in the numbering.

    Sort the new record numbers in one of three ways:

    Sort on Names
    Copy unnamed records first then copy in order of alphabetical name.
    Sort on Groups
    Copy group 0 records first then copy in order of integer group.
    No Sort
    Copy records without sorting, which is noticeably quicker for large datasets.

    If "sort on pen" is not enabled in PLOT, objects are plotted in increasing record number.

    To renumber a text record and create new hatching behind it, see TEXTBACK.

    Two different points cannot have the same point number and therefore cannot be copied to a new record while keeping the old number. To appear to bring points to the front, create gaps behind them and renumber other records. If point numbers don't matter, TMXOUT then TMXIN might do the job.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     REPORTLT

    Report bearings and distances of set segments.

    For each straight segment of selected sets, report the start point number, end point name, bearing from the start point to the end point and the segment length.

    This report is ideal for tabulating sets drawn from corner points to reference mark points.

    The report is comma-​delimited. Save to .CSV for use in spreadsheets where you can add headings, text styles and columns for extra data such as plan numbers.

    Segments containing arcs are ignored.

    See also LABELTABLE, LISTLOTS, Alignment REPORTS and GC80.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 27
     REPORTS

    User-defined reports.

    Report coordinate geometry of sets, plines or points in a user-definable format.

    Report on selected objects using a report definition selected from a report definition file.

    The report definition file is the first TMODWIN.RDF in the TSP, unless a user-defined .RDF has been selected.

    Report:
    Select a report format. Reports in the default TMODWIN.RDF file often include:
    HAL
    Horizontal alignment in Geocomp SDS84 format
    Alignment
    Horizontal alignment in detail
    Closure
    Bearings, distances and coordinates around lots
    Layer Col Length
    Layer, colour and length
    Legal Writer (ft)
    Legal descriptions of lots in metes and bounds
    Geometry
    Geometry in a report similar to GEOMINQ
    Stakeout HAL
    Stake out of alignments
    Sta & Offset
    Station and offset
    Chn & Offset
    Chainage and offset
    Sta Off Elev
    Station, offset and elevation
    Chn Off Elev
    Chainage, offset and elevation
    Vertical
    A report of a vertical profile
    Vertical-Detail
    A detailed report of a vertical profile
    Objects:
    Select objects
    Setup
    Enter values for chainage increment, vertical increment, setup point or backsight bearing, if applicable.
    User
    Select an .RDF file other than TMODWIN.RDF. The path and file is remembered in the current project file. To be the default in new projects, update your prototype.
    OK
    Generate the report in P3Pad
    Cancel
    Cancel the command without generating the report

    Reports in TMOD_AUS.RDF refer to chainage rather than station. Reports in TMOD_USA.RDF refer to station rather than chainage.

    See Terramodel help for a complete list of .RDF codes. Geocomp Systems can create or modify .RDF files for you.

    Reports are written to P3Pad editor from which you can edit and save in .TXT or .RTF formats. To display a .TXT file, use TEXT with $File:. To Find and Replace characters in the resulting TXT file, use SNRFILE. To configure P3Pad Editor, see GCREPORT.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Reports|​User-defined
    Inquire|​Cogo reports
    S  
     RESECT

    Solve a 3-point resection problem.

    By entering the locations of three known points and the angles to these points from an unknown setup point, solve for the location of the setup point.

    TML dateGuideMenuSource 
    29/10/08 RG 680 Cogo|​Utilities|​Resection S  
     RESONIN

    Import Reson ASCII depths.

    Import Reson ASCII .PTS hydrographic depth data.

    TML date MenuSource 
    01/09/18   HDMS|​Import|​Reson ASCII points Geocomp Update or $250  
     RETTABLE

    Create table of arc properties.

    The table shows R, I, T, A, a, b, c & d.

    See also RCLTABLE and RETURNS.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     RETURNS

    Create a kerb return elevation table.

    This option creates a table generated in the plan view to show the elevations of the quarter points in kerb returns.

    Select a segment (usually an arc) of the horizontal alignment and the vertical alignment. Pick a location in the plan view for the table. In Settings, pick a text style and vertical offset. The segment length is reported in the message scroll area.

    The elevations of the points at the start of the segment, one quarter, half way and three quarters along and the end are computed from the VAL and placed in a table. Points with elevations shown as ** are outside the range of the VAL.

    If you pick a segment other than an arc, you are notified.

    See also RETTABLE and RCLTABLE.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     REVEAL

    Reveal all hidden segments of selected sets.

    Reveal all segments in selected sets which have been hidden using HIDE.

    HIDE toggles the status of a set segment between hidden and revealed. This status is a persistent property of the segment.

    Any revealed segments are reported to MessageScroll.

    Revealed segments which are OFF or on invisible layers remain off or invisible. The Ignore Hide setting in DISPLAYSET reveals all segments, even hidden ones.

    REVEAL is an alias to UNHIDE.

    TML date MenuSourceGC
    01/09/18   Modify|​On/Off|​Reveal set segments user-definable 49
     REVERSE

    Reverse the direction.

    Reverse the direction of multiple sets or plines.

    See also

    SHOWDIRN
    Show the direction of sets and plines and reverse if needed
    SHOWDIR
    Show the direction of sets or plines
    EDIT
    Edit a pline or set including using a Reverse function.

    TML date MenuSourceGC
    01/09/18   Edit|​Reverse Geocomp Update or $250 286
     REVIEW

    Move objects from one view to another.

    The only attribute that is changed is the View mode. The coordinates are retained.

    The objects are removed from the original view, unless REVIEW is is an alias for GCREVIEW which you choose whether to "Delete old".

    For example, a point in the PLAN View with Easting X = 1000, Northing Y = 2000 and Elevation Z = 100 when reviewed to the XSECT view becomes Offset X = 1000, Elevation Y = 2000 and Chainage Z = 100.

    In another example, if you have an ASCII file of a profile in the format "Chainage,​Elevation" you could IMPORT into the PLAN view then review to the PROFILE view.

    TML dateGuideMenuSource 
    01/09/18 RG 1246 Modify|​Review
    Modify|​Change view mode
    S  
     RGRAPH

    Create rainfall graph.

    Draw an Intensity, Duration and Frequency (IDF) graph from the rainfall database at the current location in the Sheet view on the specified layer.

    TML dateGuideMenuSource 
    01/09/18 UG 405 Hydro|​​Rainfall|​​Draw rainfall data S  
     RMGC

    Link objects to photos and text for a golf course using attributes.

    Link points, sets and plines to external photos and text objects by defining attributes.

    RMGC is designed to keep track of trees and other assets on a golf course, but it can be used for other purposes as an alternative to a Geographic Information System (GIS).

    In Settings, define full software and data paths for your image viewer and text viewer applications, for example, C:\Windows\​system32\​mspaint.exe or C:\Windows\​system32\​notepad.exe.

    Name the Terramodel objects and rename the external files so that they match. For example, if tree5 is a point name, the associated files might be tree5front.tif, tree5back.tif and tree5.txt.

    Select the folders for the Terramodel project file and the associated image and text files carefully.

    Once the names of objects have been defined, you can use the Attribute dialog to:

    • Define up to four lines of comments, for example, "Planting date: 1/2/98", "Ducks crossing ahead" or "Pipe diameter 225".
    • Rename the object
    • Find all of the images associated with this object (based on the name), such as a photo of the tree or from a golf tee
    • Show any of these images in the image viewer application
    • Find one text file associated with this object (based on the name), such as a history of work done
    • Show this history file in the text viewer application.
    • Create a new history text file for an object by entering the name of the file in the Current History File field. Be selective about naming these files as you have only one history file for each object.

    See also GC26GIS.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $300  
     ROADDTM

    Create a DTM surface layer in the plan view from any surface in the cross-section data.

    Generate DTM Options

    ROAD
    Select a road job from the road jobs you have stored in the Road Job Manager.
    LAYER
    Select a layer on which to store the points and sets for the DTM.
    SETTINGS
    Open the RDSDTMSET to control the creation of the DTM surface and some settings for construction staking.
    CREATE
    Creates the points and sets for the DTM.

    See also SHAPESET and ROADSETS.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Generate DTM
    Tunnels|​Generate design DTM
    Channel|​Generate DTM
    S 157
     ROADGRID

    Road design editor display grid

    Configure the grid displayed in the Shape Editor SHAPE, Template Editor TEMPLATE, Subgrade Editor SUBGRADE, super­elevation Editor SUPERELV, Phase Editor PHASEMAN and XSection Editor XSECTIONEDT.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Settings|​Editor grid...
    Channel|​Settings|​Editor grid...
    S 412
     ROADJOB

    Road Job Manager

    As each new road job is created, Terramodel creates a new roadway with the same name. A road job can be composed of multiple roadways. For example, you can separate roadways for the eastbound and westbound lanes with their own separate HAL and VAL.

    Changes to the road job are also made to the single roadway with the same HAL, VAL, and name. If you intend the roadway to use a different HAL, then this change must be made in the Roadway Manager. Once the name and HAL for a road job and roadway no longer match, the changes to the road job data are not made to the roadway.

    The Road job chainage relates locations along any HAL in the project, Left_Kerb and Right_Kerb for instance, to the chainage along the centreline HAL of the road job.

    Each road job can have a description of up to 80 characters.

    Select a main horizontal alignment for the current road job from the list of registered HALs. The main HAL is that on which cross-section stationing will be based. A HAL that contains an offset should not be selected as the main alignment.

    Optionally, select a vertical alignment from the list of registered VALs. The VAL is not associated with the road job, but with the corresponding roadway.

    The delete button deletes the road job highlighted in the Road Job Manager including all templates, subgrades, super­elevations, skips and stored cross-​sections associated with the road job or any of its roadways, but not surfaces, shapes, or shape classes.

    The Design button opens RDDESIGNCRIT to assign design criteria attributes to a roadway, indicating the specific set of design criteria which is applicable to each individual roadway. These attributes include the functional classification, design speed, and terrain type, and the default basis on which vertical curves are to be designed. The initial criteria files are always aashto.rdc and aashsto.spr in US units, so metric users have to browse to select different criteria files for each new roadjob.

    The Surfaces button opens the SURFACE manager.

    The Roadway button opens the ROADWAY manager.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Road design|​Road job manager...
    Tunnels|​Tunnel manager...
    Channel|​Channel design|​Channel job manager
    S  
     ROADMAT

    Roadjob materials.

    Define the hauling volume properties for each material.

    These properties include the shrinking and swelling percentages for materials that define their loose volume as they are being trucked or otherwise hauled, as compared to their in-place volume. Indicate whether or not these materials are acceptable for use within embankment. Limit the acceptable composition of fill materials. Use hauling volume properties to reflect changing conditions along the course of a particular road job. These settings are used only by MASSHAUL.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Mass haul|​Road job materials S  
     ROADPROF

    Create profiles from road job surfaces.

    Create profiles from all DTM surfaces defined in the surface manager for a selected road job.

    Select the sliced surfaces in the SURFACE manager. They may be elevation or depth surfaces.

    You can add to or replace previously created profiles.

    See also PROFILE and GCPROFIL.

    Command date  Source 
    01/09/18    Geocomp Update or $200  
     ROADREG

    Create roadjobs from registered HALs.

    Create roadjobs or roadways from selected registered horizontal alignments.

    If a current roadjob exists, you can create roadways in the roadjob. The roadjob or roadway is created with the same name as the registered HAL, unless a roadjob or roadway with the same name already exists.

    You can transfer roadjobs with registered alignments from one project to another by the LandXML export and LandXML import scripts.

    Command date  Source 
    01/09/18    Geocomp Update or $200  
     ROADRPT

    Roadway report.

    Report roadway information within a chainage range including alignment, ditch, tie, subgrade, template and super­elevation information.

    See also RDSECHO.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM RG 987 Roads|​Reports|​Roadway...
    Channel|​Reports|​Channel...
    S 482
     ROADRUN

    Export alignment or road strings to Leica RoadRunner or iCON.

    Export an alignment, and 3D sets or plines with vertical alignments, to an XML file for Leica Roadrunner, iCON or UMC3D for use in machine control.

    To use

    1. Register a horizontal alignment and optionally a vertical alignment.
    2. Create a roadjob with those alignments.
    3. Enter ROADRUN at the command line.
    4. From the plan view, select any 3D sets or any plines that have corresponding vertical alignments.
    5. Create Leica database files, only if needed.
    6. Assign the start chainage of each exported alignment to either 0.00 or the chainage of the registered alignment at that location.
    7. Select Group to give the group of strings a name of your choice.
    8. Specify the .XML file name and location.
    9. Click Export.
    10. Load the resulting files into a Leica machine control system.

    Output file name and location

    When you Export, the .XML file is created with the name and location in the File field, a project variable with that name and location is stored and, if specified, corresponding Leica database files are created.

    The initial value of the File: field is set by the project variable. If the project variable has not been set because ROADRUN has not previously exported files in this project, the defaults are the name and path of the current project. You can manually edit the values of the File: field.

    If you click Browse, the .XML name is set to the same as the selected HAL, and the location is set to a folder with the same name as the selected HAL, under the location of the current project file. A new folder is created if it doesn't exist already. Save the new values (with any changes you make) or Cancel.

    Notes

    • Use HALMANAGER and VALMANAGER to register the main alignments.
    • Use ROADJOB to define a roadjob of the registered alignments.
    • Export only the registered horizontal alignment, or sets or plines as well.
    • The output alignments must be 3D, so select sets with elevations on every point, or plines (HALs) with profiles (VALs) that refer to them.
    • Do not refer more than one vertical alignment to the same horizontal alignment. The visibility of any profile-view object that refers to a vertical alignment is controlled by the same active alignment.
    • Group sets or plines into separate surfaces for carriageways or side roads, provided their chainages increase in the direction of the registered alignment.
    • You may need to recreate, break or reverse some sets or plines around traffic islands before you can include them in a Group.
    • If the sets or plines are not logically related to the same centreline, for example, a carpark layout, do not Group them.
    • Leica LandXML format includes RR fields not present in other LandXML files.
    • The registered alignment can have chainage equations.
    • The alignment names are derived from the set or pline names, trimmed to 14 characters.
    • If set or pline names are repeated, the alignment names are made unique by incrementing suffixes.
    • RR, ROADRUN and ROADRUNNER are aliases for ROAD_RUN command. If RR, ROADRUN or ROADRUNNER do not run, create aliases to ROAD_RUN or enter ROAD_RUN.
    • The .XML alone may be sufficient for your Road Runner and iCON. For example, RoadRunner requires the database files; iCON does not. 'Create Leica DB files' if they are required for your Leica machine control application.
    • Leica database files have extensions like .X15 and .XCF. The number of files and their extensions depends on the objects you select.
    • Progress messages during the creation of the .XML file are reported to P3Pad. Progress messages during the conversion of .XML file to .X?? files are reported to a .LOG file.
    • If you select 'Create Leica DB files', but no .X?? files are created in the same folder as the .XML, download and install Microsoft Visual C++ 2013 Redistributable (x86).

    See also DTM2XML for DTMs.

    See also Export data from Terramodel to Leica set-out or Machine Control instruments.

    TML dateGuideMenuSource 
    30/07/19 Leica LandXML to DB-X Add-On File|​Misc. Export|​Leica Roadrunner .XML Geocomp Update or $200  
     ROADSETS

    String points created from road cross sections.

    Join points in the specified layer with sets parallel to the main alignment of the specified roadjob.

    For use after ROADDTM. See also CHKRDDTM.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 157
     ROADSIGPOINT

    Roadway Significant Points for Masshaul.

    Designate where significant points such as roadways, bridges, or other site features cross the road job's main alignment. Use significant points to note places along the road job where hauling is in some way affected by the presence of some obstacle that may delay or block hauling. You can mark a significant point to have no effect on hauling, to block the haul route, or to calculate the hauled material separately. Skips always affect the mass haul diagram and will automatically be labeled.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Mass Haul|​Significant points S  
     ROADSPOT

    Report roadway details at a location.

    Display the northing, easting, elevation, chainage, offset, cross-slope and grade at a selected location on a roadway design surface, and optionally create a point.

    Design Spot Options

    ROAD JOB
    Select a road job from a list of registered road jobs.
    CREATE PT
    Created a point at the location on the current layer at the computed elevation.
    LOC
    Specify a location within the limits of the DTM.
    SPOT
    Compute the elevation at the selected location and report to Message Scroll along with the north and east coordinates, the chainage and offset (with respect to the road job), the cross slope of the roadway and the longitudinal grade of the roadway at that location.

    If the location is at a node in a cross-section, ROADSPOT displays the average of the cross slopes on either side of the node and the average of the longitudinal grades just ahead of and behind the node.

    See also

    SPOT
    Report the elevation of a DTM at a location
    GCSPOT
    Report the elevation of a DTM at the cursor
    GCDTMDIF
    Report elevation differences at the cursor
    COORDS
    Configure the coordinate scroll
    ROADJOB
    Configure the roadjob

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​On design|​Roadspot S  
     ROADWAY

    Roadway manager.

    Create, edit and manage roadways within road jobs.

    Assign additional roadways to a road job in of divided highway where the two sets of lanes travelling in each direction are modelled by different roadways, each employing separate HALs and VALs. Edit a roadway, changing its name, the HAL or VAL assigned to it, or altering its design criteria.

    ROAD JOB NAME
    The name of the current road job, as last selected in the Road Job manager dialog box.
    CURRENT ROADWAY
    Assign a name and horizontal and vertical alignments to the current roadway.
    Name
    Display the name of the roadway highlighted in the roadway list box below
    Horiz. align
    Edit the HAL associated with the current roadway by selecting from list of registered HALs
    Vert. align
    Edit the VAL associated with the current roadway by selecting from list of registered VALs
    The roadway list box
    Lists the roadways you have created, along with their associated HALs and VALs, and the number of superelevation and template definitions
    NEW
    Create a new roadway
    DELETE
    Delete the roadway highlighted in the roadway list box
    DESIGN
    Assign design criteria attributes to a roadway, indicating the specific set of design criteria which is applicable to each individual roadway

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Road design|​Roadways|​Roadway manager...
    Channel|​Channel design|​Channels|​Channel manager...
    S  
     ROTATE

    Rotate around a specified point.

    Rotate selected objects around a specified point by a specified angle.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Modify|​Rotate S 37
     ROT3D

    Rotate points in 3D using three pairs of points.

    Relocate any points and sets in 3D space. Three of those points must be data points, which have names starting with D1, D2 and D3, or d1, d2 and d3, that correspond to three control points, which have names starting with C1, C2 and C3, or c1, c2 and c3.

    You can report the difference in distance between the points as a result of the transformation.

    For example, you can take a design of a bridge or building component and transform it to another location and orientation for assembly or casting, or transform points on a manufactured object to see if it will fit the intended location.

    To lay a structure flat, use GC29 to compute the 3D distances, then use those distances in plan to create the 3 control points.

    See also GC3DADJ for a conformal 3D adjustment using up to 10 pairs of points, GC56 for swapping coordinates and GC3DROT for rotating around axes.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     RPAN

    Recentre display.

    Move the centre of the current view to the selected location.

    Shift-​Middle​Mouse​Click on a wheel mouse is similar. See also RECENTER.

    TML dateGuide SourceGC
    01/09/18 rpan.txt   Wencomp 47
     RTSCALE

    Rotate, translate and scale.

    Simultaneously rotate, translate (move) and scale selected objects.

    3D
    Scale and translate objects in the x, y, and z (elevation) directions using the northings, eastings, and elevations specified in the From: and To: controls. When not checked, Terramodel will only scale and translate objects in the x and y directions.
    OBJS
    Select the objects you want to change.
    FROM
    Enter a point, location on the screen, or x, y and z coordinates from which you want the objects translated, rotated and scaled in this point control.
    TO
    Enter a new point, location on the screen, or x, y and optional z location to move the objects to in this point control.
    SETTINGS
    Set the clockwise angle of rotation, the scale factor and the amount of elevation translation.
    ANGLE
    Enter in this angle control the amount (between -360° and 360°) by which you want to rotate the selected objects. A negative value rotates the objects in a counter-clockwise direction. To specify the angle between two bearings, use the deflection angle snap mode by pressing the right mouse button when the   focus is on the angle option.
    GRID FACTOR
    Apply this scale factor in x and y to the selected objects, with respect to the position you entered in the From: control.
    RATIO
    Calculate the grid factor as the ratio between an original distance and an adjusted distance.
    ELEVATION TRANS
    Translate the elevations by adding or subtracting an elevation difference.

    See also ROTATE, MOVE, GCSCALE and GC07.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Cogo|​Utilities|​Rotate translate & scale S 37
     RUN

    Open an external file.

    The command line syntax is RUN "directory" "filename.ext". This will open the file, using the application associated with the file extension, in the specified directory. Directories relative to the Terramodel directory can be used.

    RUN is an ALIAS which executes TMRUN.EXE, supplied with the Geocomp Update.

    See alias.ini for examples of how to use TMRUN in an alias.

    The extension can be anything including .url, .pif or .lnk. These file types can be used to extend arguments beyond the maximum 66 characters.

    See also EXEC and CMD.

    Executable date  SourceGC
    20/08/03     Geocomp Update 200
     SAVE

    save project toolbar button

    Save current project.

    Save all objects to the current project.

    When you save changes, records are renumbered to remove any gaps in the sequence of record numbers caused by deleting objects.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM and UG File|​Save project
    Toolbar button
    S 16
     SAVEAS

    Save current project with a new name.

    Save all objects to the named project.

    When you save changes, records are renumbered to remove any gaps in the sequence of record numbers caused by by deleting objects.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09 UG File|​Save project as... S 24
     SCALE

    Multiply eastings and northings by scale factors.

    Multiply the eastings and northings of point, pline and text objects by scale factors.

    If the Y scale value is blank, the X scale factor is used for both.

    Some common uses are

    UseX factorY factor
    mm to m0.001 
    feet to metres0.3048 
    southing to northing1-1

    EAT codes can include a factor so that you can change the unit of the display without changing the value of the point.

    To scale a set, make sure you select the set and the points that define the set.

    When scaling sets with arcs, be sure to include the radius points in the selection set.

    See also

    GCSCALE
    Scale in X, Y and Z and store defaults as project variables
    SCALEELV
    Scale in Z
    GRIDPLAN
    Apply Combined scale factor
    GC07, GC38, and GC3DADJ
    Compute and scale in one, two or three dimensions

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Modify|​Scale S 123
     SCALEELV

    Multiply elevations by a scale factor.

    Multiply the elevations of point, pline and text objects by a single scale factor.

    Some common uses are

    UseZ Factor
    mm to m0.001
    feet to metres0.3048
    depth to height-1

    EAT codes can include a factor so that you can change the unit of the display without changing the value of the point. For example, include a factor of 0.001 to display floor elevations in mm while the elevation is in metres.

    See also

    SCALE
    Scale in X or Y
    GCSCALE
    Scale in X, Y and Z, scale relative to a Z offset, and to store the values as project variables.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    01/09/18 RG 1232 Modify|​Elevation|​Scale point elevations S 123
     SCALEGRID

    Mass haul diagram grid settings.

    Establish the settings for the grid which is displayed in the Mass Haul Editor.

    GRID TYPE
    Display the grid as lines composed of dots, tick marks at the grid edge, or solid lines.
    DISPLAY
    Display the base line, labels, axis or grids and specify the colours.
    GRIDLINE SPACING INTERVAL
    Horiz:
    the interval along the vertical axis at which minor horizontal grid lines will be drawn
    Vert
    The interval along the horizontal axis at which a minor vertical grid lines will be drawn.
    MAJOR GRID LINES EVERY NTH INTERVAL
    Horz
    The major horizontal grid multiple
    Vert
    The major vertical grid multiple
    LABEL HEIGHT (PIXELS)
    Designate the label height in units of pixels.
    SCALING FACTOR (Larger is wider)
    Control the ratio of the vertical scale of the diagram to the horizontal scale. In a mass haul diagram, the vertical axis coordinates are measured in units of cubic project units, i.e., cubic feet, or cubic meters, while the horizontal axis coordinates are in chainage. Common values might range from 20 to 100, depending on the length of the project. Enter value of 0 to attempt to find and set an appropriate scale factor.
    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTMRoads|​Mass Haul|​Diagram grid S  
     SCLBLKS

    Scale blocks by a factor or set colour mapping, Auto Scaling, AutoRotation and dynaview clipping.

    Scale selected blocks by a factor or set Map colour, Auto scale, AutoRotation and Dynaview clipping.

    All values are modified at once so if you only want to change one value (e.g. the scale) without changing another (e.g. map colour) be careful with your selection sets and tick boxes. You may need to run this command more than once. You may prefer to run some other command.

    Blocks
    Select the blocks to be modified.
    Block scale
    Enter a block scale.
    Multiply by scale factor
    Multiply the X and Y scale of each block by the entered scale. The relative sizes of selected blocks are unchanged. To double the sizes, enter scale factor of 2.0. To keep the blocks the same size, enter 1.0.
    Reset block scale
    Modify the X and Y scale of each block to the entered block scale. The scale of all selected blocks are made equal. To give all blocks a scale of 2.00, enter a block scale of 2. Blocks drawn with unit radius will still be twice the size of blocks drawn with unit diameter.
    Map colour
    Turn ON Map Colour to display blocks with the colours of the blocks. Turn OFF, to display with the colours of the objects in the blocks.
    Clip by Ins Pt in Dynaviews
    Turn ON, to clip blocks to rectangular plotboxes. Turn OFF, to clip only blocks with insertion points outside the plotbox.
    Auto Scale
    Turn ON, to automatically resize blocks (such as north points) as the current view scale changes so as to retain the same size in the sheet view. Turn OFF, to fix the sizes of blocks (such as tree canopies) in view units.
    Auto Rotate
    Turn ON, to retain the orientation blocks in a rotated dynaview. Turn OFF, to rotate blocks (such as north points) around insertion points with the data.

    For single blocks, you can use EDIT. To scale multiple blocks around a single location, use GCSCALE. To Scale blocks without modifying the insertion point, map colour, AutoScale, AutoRotation or dynaview clipping, use GCSCALE with a blank X, Y location. To modify colours of objects in blocks, use GCBLKFIX. To insert blocks with values derived from featured-coded point names, use AUTODRAFT.

    TML date MenuSourceGC
    18/03/19   Draw|​Block|​Scale U 123|​193
     SCLPLOTB

    Scale closed plines by a factor.

    Scale closed selected plines about their centroid by the specified value.

    If the pline boxes are plotboxes, dynaviews change size to match. The underlying data and dynaview scales do not change.

    Use a scale factor greater than 1 to overlap abutting plotboxes such as those created by PLANSET.

    See also GCSCALE.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     SCS900IN

    Import a Trimble SCS900 record.txt file.

    Import a Trimble Site Controller System (SCS900) record.txt file directly into a specified layer.

    On the SCS900 control unit, select Settings, then Data output options then Store raw data to record.txt file.

    Select "Include Date and Time in Point Names" to append the Local Time and Date to the new point name.

    Select "Use imported Point Number" to use the "Point Name" for the new point number. Otherwise, assign new integer point numbers, starting at the next multiple of 10,000 above the next available point number, and assign new point names from the "Point Code" and "Point Name".

    Using record.txt avoids limitations of the .DXF method.

    Trimble Business Center (TBC) is not required.

    To export to SCS900, use the SCS900 export script in File | Export/Upload.

    TML date  Source 
    06/08/19     Geocomp Update or $200  
     SCURVE

    Insert or edit a set curve.

    Locate a point on a set by point or for IP then define the curve by Arc, Chord, Dc, External, Middle ordinate, Radius and Tangent.

    At the "=" control, enter a distance for the curve parameter, or if Dc, an angle control.

    SCURVE button creates a curve along the set once you have entered the curve parameters.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Arc|​Set curve S 73
     SEARCH

    Search settings

    Control which objects can be selected.

    Control whether commands can find Points, Plines, Sets, Text, Blocks, Block contents, Dynaviews or Tables.

    You can Shift Click anywhere in the dialog box to toggle all the check boxes on or off.

    When quick search is on, the first object found inside the pick box will be used when picking. This increases your range of selection and shortens the time it takes to select an object, but also limits your control over which object is picked. When quick search is off, the object found closest to the center of the pick box will be used.

    The Aperture is the size of the screen cursor pick box, in pixels, used to select objects.

    Search settings are stored with the project file.

    Since attribute text is not an object, it can't be selected regardless of the Search settings.

    Commands such as RENUMBER, TEXTMETRICS, TXTSCALE, TEXTALIGN and TEXTROTATE which operate on a specific object type are not influenced by Search settings.

    See also OBJSNAP.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Settings|​Search settings S  
     SEGEDIT

    Segment editor.

    Edit plines and sets in a table of segments.

    The Segment Editor lets you specify the geometry of a curvilinear pline based on known geometric parameters for each individual line and curve segment without having to first establish the IP locations and then inscribe the curves at the IPs.

    You can change bearings, distances, stations, shapes, and any other elements that define arcs, spirals, lines, or combining spirals, with or without affecting other entities that are dependent upon the line. You can inscribe arcs, spirals, and combining spirals. You can check alignments and save the alignment to your project or to a file.

    You can designate which geometric parameters defining each segment are to be held, which thereby allowing a change in the geometry of one segment to affect the location of subsequent segments. For example, you can correct an error in one leg of a traverse and automatically correct the position of the subsequently defined line segments.

    In SEGEDIT, select an existing pline or set, or New to create a new line or edit an external ALN or ARE alignment file.

    Click New to create a new line or work on an alignment in an external file. The Segment Editor displays the line and automatically updates the line as you make changes in the data entry table. The table lists the starting (POB) chainage and coordinates in the first row and geometric data for each line or curve segment in the following rows.

    To add a segment to the end of the line, click on an Empty Shape cell. To insert a segment, select a cell in the row before the insertion point, then Edit/Insert.

    1. Click the down arrow, and select the shape you want to apply to the segment. Press Tab.
    2. Click on the down arrow in the Hold column, and select a Hold option to define what information should held as the geometry of any preceding segment is altered. Press Tab.
    3. Enter the Bearing for the segment, and press Tab.
    4. Repeat for the other parameters of the segment until all editable cells are filled for the row.

    To inscribe an arc, spiral, or combining spiral:

    1. Click on a cell in the initial segment in the data entry part of the dialog box. The cursor hops to the beginning of the segment.
    2. Click EDIT and Inscribe.
    3. Click on Arc, Spiral, or Combining Spiral. A dialog box appears.
    4. Set up the properties of the inscribed entity, and click OK.

    To quickly go to a segment number:

    1. Click EDIT and Go To. The Go To Segment dialog box appears.
    2. Type the segment number into the box.
    3. Click on OK.

    To change the geometric data associated with a segment, double click in the cell that contains the data you want to change, and type the correct information. When you click in a cell in the data entry part of the Segment Editor, the cursor in the graphic screen hops to the end of the segment you are working with, and the column headings change to show you what the data in the row represent.

    Where points are relocated, the existing points are not moved, but are instead removed from the set, while new points are created as needed.

    To change the geometric data associated with a segment or to mark data as editable or not editable, double click on the row number. Make your selections in the Line Properties, Arc Properties, Spiral Properties or Combining Spiral Properties dialog box, and click on OK.

    To Delete a segment click on a cell in the segment. Click EDIT and Delete.

    To save the segment to your current project, click FILE and Save To Project.

    To save the segment to its own file, click FILE and Save to File or Save to File As. If the file has not been previously saved, a dialog box appears. Type in the file name, and click OK.

    To exit the Segment Editor, click FILE and Exit.

    For more details, please refer to SEGEDIT in the Terramodel help.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Cogo|​Streets|​HAL editor (line segment based) S  
     SELECTAT

    Select objects by feature attribute value.

    Select objects in the current view which have specified feature attribute values.

    StepActionResult
    1.Enter SELECTAT at the command lineStart SELECTAT command
    2.Select some objectsSelect a subset of objects with at least one feature attribute
    3.Refine selection based on selected record's attributesDisplay a table of all attributes of any object in that subset
    4.Activate attribute namesSpecify by name which attributes
    5.Enter search valuesSpecify values of activated attributes
    6.OKSelect objects from previously selected objects that have all the specified values for all the activated attribute names and then exit the SELECTAT command
    7.Select objects by Previous in another commandExecute that command for objects in the subset of your original selection set that have the specified values of the activated attribute names.

    See also DISPFEAT, FYATBEDIT, FYATBEP, FYATBIN and FYATBOUT.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     SELECTGP

    Select objects by group number.

    Select objects in the current view by entering a group number.

    The objects with that group number can be selected in subsequent commands by right-​mouse-​button Previous.

    This avoids the limitation of Right-​mouse-​button Group which requires you to select an example object of that group.

    Groups must be integers in the range 0 to 65535.

    Non-integer values such as those including text or decimal points are treated as group 0.

    See also GC52, GCLPTS, IGRP, ONGRP and SGRP.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 60
     SELECTPT

    Select points not in sets.

    Select points in the current view which are not connected to any set.

    The selected points can then be selected in subsequent commands by right-​mouse-​button Previous.

    See also GCOFLINE.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     SET

    Create a set

    Create a set joining new or existing points.

    Create a Set by

    Draw segments between existing points.
    By selecting points one at a time, you can draw a continuous line that can contain up to 65,000 points.
    Create set segments without selecting existing points.
    As you draw the set, new points are created at the ends of the segments. If you've activated Automatic Numbering in POINTSET, the next available point number will be assigned automatically. If you haven't activated Automatic Numbering, as each set point is created, you will be prompted for point numbers. You can also activate a prompt for point Name.
    Join existing point numbers
    Use the Pn button to join existing points in point number order.

    SET follows the running snap mode settings of OBJSNAP. To connect to existing points you must have enabled the Point running snap. In order to create new points at any position you must have enabled the free running snap.

    Use BL to create a set that is a valid breakline.

    Use SCURVE to add a curve into a set. Use EDIT to edit the points, smoothness or slopes of a set.

    To be prompted when points are being created, enable "Prompt if create pn in set command" in SYSTEM.

    Options

    Loc:
    Enter the point number or position for each set point or new point location.
    Close set
    Connects the beginning and end points of a set with a set segment to form a closed set.
    Undo
    Undo the most recently created set segment and any newly created point.
    Settings
    Assign the set's smoothness, name and beginning chainage.
    New
    Complete the current set and start creating a new set.
    Pn
    Create a set joining a series of point numbers (1,5,10) or ranges of point numbers (1..10).
    Add
    Add a new segment to the end of current set being created
    Close
    Close the command
    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Set|​Set S 15
     SET2PROF

    Create a pline profile of the selected set.

    Create a pline in the profile view with vertices at each chainage where the corresponding point has an elevation.

    The first and last point must have an elevation.

    See also SET2PRFL, PTS2PROF, FLIPUP and GC41.

    TML date MenuSourceGC
    29/10/08   Draw|​Pline|​Val from 3D set S 66
     SET2PRFL

    Create parallel profiles.

    Create parallel plines or sets in the profile view to represent a pipe.

    Create a set or pline in the Profile view with elevations from a set in the Plan view.

    Enter a Pipe Ht to create a parallel set or pline above (+ve) or below (-ve) the profile.

    Specify whether the Pipe Ht is a vertical or perpendicular offset, whether to create a pline or set and whether to create on the current layer or the set layer.

    To allow for wall thickness, collar size and trenching, GCCOPY the set in the Plan view with a negative Elev Diff, then enter a bigger Pipe Ht in SET2PRFL.

    The reference object (parent) of the lines is the original set in the plan view.

    See also SET2PROF and GC41.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     SET2ROAD

    Create roadjobs from sets.

    Create profiles and register horizontal and vertical alignments, and corresponding roadjobs, for each selected set.

    Use SET2ROAD to create roadways to export to SCS900, because unlike DXF, roadways can handle curved 3D alignments.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     SET2TRAV

    Re-engineer Geodimeter .job data from sets.

    Re-engineer Geodimeter .job data from sets.

    From points in a traverse layer, and a spur layer, report re-engineered pseudo-​observations to Geodimeter .JOB format.

    If you save the report to a text file with .JOB file extension, you can then import the data into an other application. For example, you can import the data into the Raw Data Editor (RDE) using the 'Geocomp Geodimeter _i' import script.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     SET2TRV

    Create a .TRV traverse file.

    Create a Traverse (.TRV) file from the selected set.

    TML date  Source 
    29/10/08     S  
     SETAREA

    Create a closed set and report the area between two sets.

    Create a new set by copying two selected sets into the current layer, creating two new sets connecting the ends, joining the four sets into a single closed set then reporting the enclosed area to the message scroll.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     U  
     SETCURL

    Set the current layer by picking an object.

    The current colours and linetype become those of that layer.

    You can do the same thing by highlighting the layer selection dialog on the toolbar and then picking any object.

    See also LAYER to select from a list.

    TML dateGuide SourceGC
    04/08/17 setcurl.txt   Wencomp 2
     SETFILT

    Filter excess points from straights in a set.

    Filter a set without arcs in 2D by line offset tolerance.

    See also BLFILTER, GCFILTER and FILTER.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 127
     SETGRP

    Set the group to the next group.

    The next group is the highest group currently in the project plus one.

    See also SGRP which has a dialog for keeping track of used groups and GC52 which sets to a nominated group.

    TML dateGuide SourceGC
    20/01/16 setgrp.txt   Wencomp 2
     SETLABEL

    Label sets with name.

    Label selected sets with smart text, based on the object name, and places the label on the current layer. The label is placed along the sets at the midpoint.

    TML dateGuide SourceGC
    20/01/16 setlabel.txt   Wencomp 92,171
     SETNONAM

    Display only sets with no names.

    Turn ALL objects OFF and then turn ON sets with no name.

    Run SETNONAM again to turn all objects ON, even those that were off before.

    Objects on invisible layers remain invisible.

    See also PLNNONAM, OFF and ALLON.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     SETSMOOTH

    Change the smoothness and dead region properties of selected breakline sets.

    A set can have one of four smoothness values that affect the way contour lines, profiles and cross sections are created, how surfaces are rendered by 3DVISUALISER, how surfaces are exported and volumes and areas are calculated in some commands. DTM formation is not affected. Changing the smoothness of sets does not affect existing objects such as contours until they are recreated.

    Options

    Sets
    Select sets to which the specified smoothness property is to be applied.
    Soft
    If B-Spline or Overhauser contour splining is enabled in CONTOURSET, CONTOUR splines use a single vertex at the intersection of the contour and the breakline. Use to show smooth transitions, such as natural features.
    Hard
    If B-Spline or Overhauser contour splining is enabled in CONTOURSET, CONTOUR splines use two vertices on either side of the intersection of the contour with the breakline. Use to show harder bends such as tops and bottoms of banks.
    Sharp
    If B-Spline or Overhauser contour splining is enabled in CONTOURSET, CONTOUR splines use vertices on either side of and at the intersection of the contour with the breakline. Use to show abrupt changes at breaklines such as kerbs, gutters and edges of concrete pads. Use sparingly as surfaces with hard and sharp breaklines can take much longer to render in 3DVISUALISER.
    Dead
    Dead regions (also known as dead areas) are defined by closed breaklines with Dead smoothness. Typical dead regions are swamp, vegetation, building and danger zones in surveys and exclusion and unchanged zones in designs.

    Commands that clip contour, profile or cross section plines within dead regions include CONTOUR, PROFILE and XSHEET.

    Commands that export surfaces to file without the triangles inside dead regions include GCSTLOUT, DTM2LDBX, DTM2XML, GC12DOUT, GCUMC3D, GRDPTS, GCDTMOUT, GCTMAOUT, and POWERGDE.

    Commands that subtract dead regions from areas or volumes include CUTFILL, GC20, GC30, GC44CSV, GCMULVOL, SHADEDTM, SHADEISO and SHADESLP.

    Commands that do not consider dead regions include LINKSET (DTM links and quick contours), 3DVISUALISER (3D views) and EARTHWORK (volumes and areas). Use DTMSET, CONTOUR and SHADEISO or GC20 instead.

    Commands that show or create dead regions include DEADSETS.

    Setting smoothness

    Use BL to create a breakline set. Use EDIT to change the smoothness of a single set. Use DESIGNSET to make the default smoothness for all new sets Soft. If the default is Sharp or Hard, on large projects 3DVISUALISER can be very slow. If the default is Dead, new DTM edges make the whole DTM a dead region.

    For the smoothness property to be used by an applicable command, the set segment must be a breakline. For dead regions, the set must also be closed. Breakline segments must be straight, not be crossed by another breakline with a higher record number and join two DTM points in the same layer as the set. DTM points must have elevations other than *, be contourable (not excluded from DTMs) and be on the same layer. The DTM requires least three DTM points able to form a triangle, therefore not all in a straight line.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Modify|​Set smooth S DTM S
     SETSTA

    Set the chainage at a location.

    Set the beginning (start) chainage (station) of an alignment by assigning a chainage at any location on the alignment.

    TML date MenuSourceGC
    01/09/18   Edit|​More...|​Chainage at location
    Edit|​More...|​Station at location
    S 84
     SEWBC

    Create sewer block controls for lots.

    Create sewer block controls from a Sewer branch alignment, Lots, Tie Points and a DTM layer.

    The TML name is SEW_BC. If SEWBC does not run from the command line, create an alias from SEWBC to SEW_BC or enter SEW_BC.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     SFLOOR

    Create a DTM surface in-between two DTMs.

    Create a layer of points on a new safe bottom layer with locations above the bottom surface points and elevations at a specified safety factor (percentage) of difference in elevations between the surfaces.

    Use the Settings to specify the new layer name and the percentage.

    You could use SFLOOR to create a "safe bottom" for a landfill.

    TML dateGuideMenuSource 
    29/10/08 RG 1247 DTM|​Safe landfill floor S  
     SGRP

    Set the group of objects from a list.

    Use a dialog to track group usage.

    The default group is one more than the highest group used in the project.

    See also GC52 to just nominate the group and SETGRP to set the group to the next group.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     U 40
     SHADEDTM

    Shade a DTM by elevation ranges.

    Hatch regions of a DTM within boundaries by elevation ranges and report the areas.

    Specify a DTM, boundaries, elevation ranges and a layer for the hatching.

    For each elevation range, specify the higher and lower elevation and the hatching colour, style and scale.

    Click Shade Elevations to hatch each region for each elevation range and then report the total horizontal and surface areas for each range to the message scroll.

    SHADEDTM forms hatching on the hatching layer in the DTM view. This is the view that has the most contourable points on the specified DTM layer, which is not necessarily the Plan view or the current view. Any boundaries must be in the DTM view. Temporary DTMs are formed inside each boundary where possible using LINKSET Settings.

    Options

    • To separate networks of triangles, separate the boundaries.
    • Use SETMOOTH to define dead regions to be excluded from the hatching and areas.
    • Sort ranges on elevation to help you identify any gaps between ranges.
    • Show hatching boundaries as closed plines, with the same colour and layer as the hatching, for use with commands such as GC10, GC82 or GCGRDVOL.
    • Add a legend in any view showing samples of the hatches for each range on the hatching layer. Specify the legend text style and sample size (at least as big as the text height).
    • Import and export colours, hatch patterns and and hatch scales for the ranges from one project to another using an .SER (shade elevation ranges) file.

    See also SHADESLP, SHADEISO, 3DVISUALISER, COLORCODE|COLOURCODE, COLORCON and GCCOLCON.

    TML date MenuSource 
    12/12/18   Draw|​Hatch|​By elevation ranges Geocomp Update or $500  
     SHADEISO

    Shade two DTMs by isopach ranges.

    Hatch regions of two DTMs within boundaries by isopach range to create a cut|fill map and report the areas and volumes.

    Specify two DTMs, isopach ranges and a layer for the hatching.

    For each isopach range, specify the higher and lower isopach and the hatching colour, style and scale.

    Click Shade Depths to create a temporary isopach surface, hatches each region for each isopach range and then reports the total horizontal areas and the cut, fill and net volumes to message scroll and P3Pad.

    SHADEISO forms hatching on the hatching layer in the DTM view. This is the view that has the most contourable points on both specified DTM layers, which is not necessarily the Plan view or the current view. Any boundaries must be in the DTM view. Temporary DTMs are formed inside each boundary where possible using LINKSET Settings.

    Options

    • To separate networks of triangles, separate the boundaries.
    • Use SETMOOTH to define dead regions to be exclude from the hatching and areas.
    • Retain the hatching boundaries as closed plines, with the same colour and layer as the hatching.
    • Add a legend in any view showing samples of the hatches for each range on the hatching layer. You can specify the legend text style and sample size (at least as big as the text).
    • Import and export colours, hatch patterns and and hatch scales for the ranges from one project to another using an SIR (shade isopach ranges) file.
    • Compute the minimum and maximum isopach depth ranges to help you decide what depth ranges to enter.
    • Report the surface areas for each range and the total cut and fill volumes to a nominated .CSV file then open the CSV in a spreadsheet application.

    See also SHADESLP and SHADEDTM.

    TML date MenuSource 
    12/12/18   Draw|​Hatch|​By isopach ranges Geocomp Update or $500  
     SHADESLP

    Shade a DTM by slope ranges.

    Hatch regions of a DTM by slope ranges and report the areas.

    DTM layer
    Specify a DTM layer.
    Bdys:
    Include only regions inside selected boundaries.
    Hatching layer
    Select a layer for the hatching.
    Exclude layer
    Exclude regions inside boundaries on selected layer.
    Slope ranges
    Define a table of slope ranges.
    • For each slope range, specify the higher and lower slope and the hatching colour, style and scale.
    • Save colours, hatch patterns and and hatch scales for the ranges to read in another project using an SSR (shade slope ranges) file.
    • Sort slope ranges in slope order to check for gaps in sequence
    • Show hatching boundaries as closed plines, with the same colour and layer as the hatching
    • Label surface areas
    • Save areas to a CSV.
    • Use the maximum triangle slope or the crossfall slope at the centroid perpendicular to a specified registered alignment. Maximum slopes are always positive. Crossfall slopes are positive when sloping up and negative when sloping down.
    Legend
    Add a legend at any location in any view showing square sample hatches for each range. The samples are labelled with the slope range, horizontal area and slope area in a specified text style. The samples are at the specified size or the text height, whichever is bigger.
    Shade Slopes
    Report the minimum and maximum triangle slopes to the message scroll, hatch each region for each slope range, report the total horizontal areas, surface areas and the cut, fill and net volumes to P3Pad and draw the legend.

    Notes

    SHADESLP forms hatching on the hatching layer in the DTM view. This view, which has the most contourable points on the specified DTM layer, use usually the Plan view but could be a Profile or FLIPUP view. Any selected boundaries must be in the DTM view.

    Temporary DTMs are formed inside each boundary where possible using LINKSET Settings.

    Dead regions defined by SETMOOTH are also excluded.

    See also SHADEDTM, SHADEISO, GC82, GC44 and SLOPE.

    TML date MenuSourceGC
    12/12/18   Draw|​Hatch|​By slope ranges Geocomp Update or $500 117
     SHADOW

    Compute the limit of shadows.

    Compute sets on the current layer at the edges of sun shadow defined by selected sets projected onto a DTM at a specified Altitude and Azimuth.

    Latitude and Longitude
    Message scroll displays the location of the centre of the display as Latitude and Longitude.
    DTM:
    Specify the DTM to project the shadows onto.
    Sets:
    Specify sufficient objects that cast the shadow
    Step:
    Specify an interval along the sets at which to compute the shadow points
    Azimuth to Sun
    Enter the bearing to the sun at the desired time
    Altitude (Vertical angle from Horizon to Sun)
    Enter the Vertical angle from Horizon to Sun at the desired time

    Determine the Altitude and Azimuth values by entering the Latitude, Longitude and Time into a calculator at Geoscience Australia or US Naval Observatory.

    The suggested Latitude and Longitude is transformed from the Easting and Northing at the centre of the display in the From Coordinate System defined by GCCOORD or COORDCON.

    Terramodel angle units are defined by UNITSSET.

    Define any dead regions in the DTM by SETSMOOTH.

    See also SUNSTAR, DTMSHOT, GC17 and GC72.

    Latitude, longitude, bearing and azimuth are all measured in degrees, minutes and seconds.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $500  
     SHAPE

    Shape Editor

    Create and edit shapes for road design.

    The shape editor shows the shape name and class at the top, the shape graphics in the middle, the shape segments at the bottom left and the controls to create and edit shape segments are at the bottom right. View controls are along the top for shifting and resizing the image on the screen.

    The Properties Tab controls the name of the shape, materials and conditions for use.

    The Grid Settings controls the appearance of the shape graphics.

    If your shape editor appears different to this, and does not allow entry of arc segments, you are using the shape editor from older versions of Terramodel. To use the new shape editor, use PROJECTV to delete the SHAPEEDITOR project variable.

    See Terramodel Help for more details of the operation of the Shape Editor.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Shapes|​Shape Editor
    Channel|​Shapes|​Shape editor...
    S 411
     SHAPECLASS

    Shape class manager

    Manage the shape class library.

    Shape classes provide a way to categorize the shapes that you create, while the shape class library lets you organize the shape classifications.

    Each shape class is assigned one of these types: Roadbed, Shoulder, Ditch, Tie, Median or Miscellaneous.

    Shape class types are given a priority in the order listed above. This priority is used as two roadways are merged, such as at a ramp connection to a main highway. In merging the roadways, as shapes intersect, the ones with the lowest priority drop out first. In this manner, ties, which intersect first, drop out before ditches. Ditches drop out before shoulders, and shoulders before road beds.

    Shape class types are also used when generating a DTM from the design using ROADDTM. They provide guidance in connecting like features between cross-sections with sets which function as breaklines. The connecting sets are created at similar positions, between shapes of like shape class type.

    You can export (and import) shape class libraries containing definitions of all shapes in a class.

    A poorly constructed library will adversely affect the roadway design.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Shapes|​Shape class manager...
    Tunnels|​Tunnel design|​Shapes|​Shape class manager...
    Channel|​Shapes|​Shape class manager...
    S 411
     SHAPEMAN

    Shape manager

    List, copy, delete or edit roadway shapes.

    For a selected shape class, list the shapes, with the number of segments, whether used in cut or fill and whether tied to ground.

    You can also manage shape classes (using SHAPECLASS), create new shapes, edit (using SHAPE), copy, delete, import and export shapes.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Shapes|​Shape manager...
    Tunnels|​Tunnel design|​Shapes|​Shape manager...
    Channel|​Shapes|​Shape manager...
    S 411
     SHAPESET

    Create sets from selected roadway shapes.

    Create sets from selected roadway shapes.

    See also ROADDTM.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $125 157
     SHOWDIR

    Show the direction of sets or plines.

    Select a set or pline with a mouse to show the direction by temporary arrow head symbols in the same colour. Continue selecting to show more.

    To clear the temporary arrows, redraw by clicking the REDRAW or GCREDRAW toolbar button, press function key F3 or roll the mouse wheel. Then click the Show button to show the direction of the most recently selected record.

    The message scroll reports for each set or pline as it is selected whether open or closed and the type, record number, layer, colour, reference object, group, name and length.

    The SHOWDIR linetype is used. The size of the arrow heads can be adjusted by the Point Label Height setting in EDITINI.

    If SHOWDIR linetype is not already loaded, it is loaded from SHOWDIR.LIN. If SHOWDIR.LIN cannot be found, linetype 142 or TYRE_TRACK_>>>> is used. If none of those linetypes is loaded, temporary arrow heads move along the line at an adjustable speed.

    The SHOWDIR linetype can be changed by editing SHOWDIR.LIN.

    The start|end of each closed figure is shown by a marker in the cursor colour.

    Record:
    Select sets or plines, one at a time, to display with temporary arrow heads in the same colour. Report to message scroll whether it is open or closed and the type, record number, layer, colour, reference object, group, name and length.
    Speed
    If a suitable linetype is not loaded, specify a speed to move arrow head symbols.
    Show
    Show the direction of the most recently selected record.
    Cancel
    Cancel the command.

    See also

    SHOWDIRN
    Show the direction and reverse if needed.

    TML date  Source 
    11/07/19     Geocomp Update or $250  
     SHOWDIRN

    Show the direction of set and plines and reverse if needed.

    Select a set or pline with a mouse to show the direction by temporary arrow head symbols in the same colour. Continue selecting to show more. If a pline or set is going the wrong way, reverse it. To change your mind, reverse it again.

    To clear the temporary arrows, redraw by clicking the REDRAW or GCREDRAW toolbar button, press function key F3 or roll the mouse wheel.

    Record:
    Select sets or plines, one at a time, to display with temporary arrow heads in the same colour. Report to message scroll whether it is open or closed and the type, record number, layer, colour, reference object, group, name and length.
    Speed
    If a suitable linetype is not loaded, specify a speed to move arrow head symbols.
    Reverse Current Direction and Show New Direction
    Reverse the direction of the most recently selected record and show the new direction.
    Cancel
    Cancel the command.

    The size of the arrow heads can be adjusted by the Point Label Height setting in EDITINI.

    If SHOWDIR linetype is not already loaded, it is loaded from SHOWDIR.LIN. If SHOWDIR.LIN cannot be found, linetype 142 or TYRE_TRACK_>>>> is used. If none of those linetypes is loaded, temporary arrow heads move along the line at an adjustable speed.

    The SHOWDIR linetype can be changed by editing SHOWDIR.LIN.

    See also

    SHOWDIR
    Show direction without the option to reverse.

    TML date MenuSourceGC
    11/07/19   Edit|​More...|​Show direction Geocomp Update or $250 286
     SHOWDYNA

    Show dynaview layers.

    Show objects only on any layer that is visible in any dynaview.

    Show Dynaview Layers
    Temporarily make visible all layers that are visible in any dynaview and make invisible all other layers.
    Restore
    Restore layer visibility status to show the same layers that were visible before selecting Show Dynaview Layers.

    Show dynaview layers makes all layers displayed by any dynaview visible. This includes all layers in any layer list used by any dynaview and, if any dynaview has no layer list, all currently visible layers.

    Objects that are turned off, segments that are hidden and profiles that refer to alignments other than active are still not shown.

    See also

    DYNAVIEW
    Create a dynaview
    LAYLSET
    Make visible only layers for selected objects or layerlist
    DISPLAYSET Quick dynaviews
    Turn or off visibility of dynaviews. SHOWDYNA temporarily turns off quick dynaviews.
    FIXDYNA
    Replace dynaview plotboxes

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 286
     SIDESLOPE

    Create side slopes from an alignment.

    Generate radiating and offset breaklines that approximate the shape of a side slope projected from a given horizontal alignment.

    The HAL can have elevations associated with it, or you can select a vertical alignment from which SIDESLOPE will extract elevation information.

    Using this command, you can:

    • Create up to five offset alignments on each side of the base alignment. These offsets can serve as segment edges in a roadway template.
    • Configure a separate cross slope for each offset alignment.
    • Project the outermost offset alignment to a defined 3D surface, a datum plane, or a sloping plane defined by one, two or three points, to create a side slope approximation using breaklines that define the DTM.
    • Construct ramps, including benching, based on an alignment and longitudinal slope.
    • Project a design surface inward on a closed alignment.

    SIDESLOPE is more powerful than, and more complex than, 3D, DESIGN, GC23, GC28, GC99, GCBENCH, MOVEPAD, CUTFILL, MULTIOFF, OFFELEV, SLICE, SMPROAD, SMPTMPL or WALK. Sometimes the simpler, specific, function is preferable.

    SIDESLOPE is secured to the Site design module.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09 sideslope tutorial.pdf DTM|​Side Slope S  
     SIGHTDST

    Create vehicular sight lines for a road design.

    Register an active alignment then, at intervals over a chainage range, create lines representing a driver's line of sight where limited by a DTM surface.

    From the resulting lines, you can see whether the design sight line requirements have been met. If not, you can change the alignment or the amount of cut into the batter to suit and try again.

    You can choose the driver's height above the pavement surface and an offset from the HAL.

    Typically, you would run this twice, with positive and negative offsets, to represent travel in both directions.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     SITEWORKIN

    Import Paydirt SiteWork data.

    Import data direct from Trimble Paydirt SiteWork.

    Trimble Paydirt SiteWork is a separate application from Trimble for estimating quantities that is optimised for use with a tablet digitizer. SiteWork version 5.23 includes Terramodel CAD module. Both applications must be installed.

    Transfer data from SiteWork to Terramodel

    1. Start SiteWork
    2. Open a SiteWork project
    3. Make the Plan Data or Cut/Fill Report Windows active
    4. Select Tools|​Export|​To Terramodel
    5. Select Surfaces to export
    6. Select data type to export
    7. Click OK to export the data
    8. Open Terramodel
    9. Display the Terramodel project

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    22/01/09Paydirt SiteWork User Guide
    Paydirt SiteWork Tutorial
    SiteWork Help
    SiteWork|​Tools|​Export|​To Terramodel POA  
     SITEWORKOUT

    SiteWork button

    Export Paydirt SiteWork data.

    Export data to Paydirt SiteWork.

    Trimble Paydirt SiteWork is a separate application from Trimble for estimating quantities that is optimised for use with a tablet digitizer. SiteWork version 5.23 includes Terramodel CAD module. Both applications must be installed.

    Transfer data from SiteWork to Terramodel

    1. In SiteWork
      1. Project | New or Project | Open
      2. Tools | Import | Using Terramodel
    2. In Terramodel
      1. Import any data such as a Terramodel .PRO
      2. Make any edits in Terramodel
      3. SITEWORKOUT or EXPORT SITEWORK or File | Export/Upload | Sitework or Toolbar button
      4. Enter the name for the new SiteWork Surface
      5. Select objects to be exported
      6. Pick reference points and enter the locations of two points to orient the data to the drawing board.
      7. Select "Skip reference" if you will not be digitizing
      8. Finish
      9. Repeat for each new SiteWork layer
      10. File | Exit
    3. In SiteWork
      1. View | Refresh

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    22/01/09Paydirt SiteWork User Guide
    Paydirt SiteWork Tutorial
    SiteWork Help
    SiteWork|​Tools|​Export|​To Terramodel
    Toolbar icon
    POA  
    SKIP

    Skip manager.

    Define chainage ranges to be skipped in a road job.

    Click New to specify a start chainage, end chainage and name for a section of road to be skipped.

    For complex roads with many skips, use GCSKIPMN.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Road design|​Skip manager...
    Channel|​Channel design|​Skip manager...
    S  
     SLICE

    Interpolate batter (tie) points on a DTM given HAL, VAL and side slopes.

    Set chainages by interval or XLines. Nominate horizontal and vertical offsets. Nominate cut and fill slopes.

    See also SIDESLOPE.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM and RG 605 Cogo|​Streets|​Slice S 236
     SLL

    Create splined plines.

    Create B-splined plines by entering vertex locations.

    B-splines are useful for splined leader lines and vegetation and golf course boundaries.

    See also SPLINE, EDIT Spline and STREAM.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM and RG 1248 Draw|​Pline|​Splined leader line S smooth
     SLOPE

    Identify DTM triangles within a slope range.

    Create plines around areas of a DTM where the slope is within a specified range.

    A pline boundary is created around all the qualifying triangles.

    The slope units are controlled by the Default Vertical Angle Entry mode in UNITSSET. Specify a ratio, percentage or a vertical angle from zenith, horizon or nadir.

    If you specify a different current layer for each slope range, it's easier to HATCH all the triangles at once by layer.

    If you can JOIN the plines, use GC82 to compute the horizontal or surface areas.

    See also MG1, GM1 and SW1.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    01/09/18 RG 385 DTM|​DTM Slope S 117
     SLOPE​MANAGER

    Slope alignment manager.

    Slope alignments define cross-slope as a function of the chainage within the Super view, where the coordinates are chainage and cross-slope.

    Slope alignments control the transition of shape segments. The slope of the segment to which it is applied at a chainage is the y coordinate of the slope alignment at that chainage.

    The Slope Manager uses the same dialog as the Val manager (VALMANAGER). If the Alignment Type is set to Profile, change the alignment type to Slope. The manager continues to display the alignments of the chosen type until you select the other type, regardless of whether you select the Slope Manager or Val Manager command.

    You can apply offsets to a slope alignment. The offset units are % grade even though the dialog incorrectly shows Vertical offset.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09 RG 385 Roads|​Alignments|​Slope manager...
    Channel|​Alignments|​Slope manager...
    S  
     SMANAGER

    Subgrade manager.

    Create, copy, delete import and export, subgrade templates and assign templates to road jobs.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Road design|​Subgrade manager...
    Channel|​Channel design|​Overdepth manager...
    S  
     SMOKEDUC

    Create smoke duct mounting points.

    Create smoke duct mounting points.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18    Geocomp Update or $250  
     SMPROAD

    Simple Roads.

    Create road strings in a plan view from a single template.

    Optionally, create a set where the batters intersect the DTM.

    Requires a DTM, HAL, VAL profile and template created by SMPTMPL.

    Optionally, left and right ditches can be added. These ditches are placed according to attributes set in SMPTMPL. Ditch profiles must be referenced to the main profile. To omit ditches, either don't create or don't reference the ditch profile.

    The set points may be created at xlines. If at interval, the interval may be from chainage 0.00 or the nominated chainage (depending on an attribute of the simple template).

    The roadway module is not required.

    See also SIDESLOPE.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    08/10/15 RG 608 and ACC 65 Cogo|​Streets|​SmpRoad S 415
     SMPTMPL

    Define simple road template attributes.

    This template is used with simple roads function SMPROAD. Only one simple road template can be defined at one time.

    The template consists of a pline drawn from left to right in the xsect view. The offsets from 0,0 in the XSection view are the offsets from the alignments.

    Template attributes include batters and a vertical offset.

    Ditches can be located at a batter from the edge of the template at a fixed grade until the elevation of a ditch profile is met. The ditch continues outwards at that elevation to the nominated ditch width and then batters to the DTM.

    See also SIDESLOPE.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    01/09/18 RG 608 and ACC 65 Cogo|​Streets|​SmpTmpl S 411
     SNAPLYR

    Toggle snapability of a specified layer.

    Toggle on or off the Snap status of a layer.

    Control whether you can graphically select objects on a layer using Window, Crossing and Record selection.

    Use SNAPLYR with an argument in an alias or toolbox button.

    Usage: SNAPLYR layername

    Don't use with layer names with space characters. Only characters before any spaces are considered.

    The snap status is shown and can also be controlled by LAYERSET.

    See also VISLYR and QUIKLSET.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     SNAPSET

    Configure the cursor snap settings for the eight view modes.

    Force the display cursor to snap to a grid with specified origin, azimuth, horizontal interval and vertical interval.

    Snap settings

    View
    Select the view mode for the snap settings
    Origin
    Select the origin for the snap grid, for example, 0,0 for the corner of a building.
    Azimuth
    Select the bearing of the snap grid. Usually the azimuth is set to 00°00'00". You could set it a building grid.
    Snap On/Off
    Toggle snapping on and off.
    Snap interval spacing
    Set the Horizontal and Vertical intervals of the snap grid.

    To change the snapset mode at the command line or in a toolbox, for

    Snapset modeEnter at command line
    NoneSnapset 0
    OnSnapset 1
    On/OffSnapset -1

    See also CURSOR which also sets direction of cursor movement, GRIDSET which sets the grid spacing, GRIDMAKE which honours some grid snap settings and OBJSNAP which sets the running snap modes.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Settings|​Snap to grid settings S grid1
     SNR

    Find and replace characters in names or point numbers.

    Replace all examples of a sequence of characters in selected alphanumeric point numbers, text or names of points, plines and sets.

    Method

    Objs:
    Select objects to be modified
    Record name or text
    Modify text or the names of points, plines and sets
    Alpha point number
    Modify alphanumeric point numbers
    Search
    Specify the character string to be found
    Replace
    Specify the replacement character string
    OK
    Replace each found character string with the replacement character string
    Cancel
    Close without modifing any selected objects

    Simple example

    
    Text = hello world
    
    Search = world
    
    Replace = john
    
    New text = hello john

    EAT codes

    SNR finds and replaces text in EAT codes like any other text; this can invalidate EAT text if not done correctly, as in this example:

    
    Text = Z \SUB{Z,2}
    
    Search = Z
    
    Replace = Elev
    
    New text = Elev \SUB{Elev,2}
    
    

    ASCII values

    Refer to non-keyboard characters in text by their three-digit decimal ASCII value, such as \010 for new line and \176 for degree (°) sign. What you see depends on the Terramodel font. Not all fonts contain all characters. For example, in some fonts degree sign is \127. In fonts such as symbol.fnt, you can specify a symbol by this method. See Font FAQ for font charts.

    See also

    SNRFILE
    Find and replace text in a file
    CHNGNAME
    Find and replace characters in names using a dictionary
    CHNGTEXT
    Find and replace characters in text using a dictionary file
    CHNGATTR
    Find and replace characters in attributes using a dictionary file
    CHTXT
    Convert stationing text to chainage text

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     U rep
     SNRFILE

    Find and replace text in an external file.

    Open a selected file and write a copy to a new file, replacing characters according to a mapping file.

    The format of the .MAP file is:

    old text,new text

    Characters are case-sensitive; "ABC" is distinct from "abc".

    Any line in the .MAP file that starts with # is treated as a comment line and ignored.

    The In and Out files must be ASCII-encoded such as .XML, .TXT, .DXF or .CSV, but not binary such as .DOC, .DWG or .XLS.

    Each line in the map file is processed for the whole external file, then the next line in turn. The order is critical. You might need to use temporary characters.

    C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP\LEGAL.MAP is an example of a mapping file that expands reports generated by REPORTS Legal writer(ft).

    ASCII codes

    A character can be defined by a code for an ASCII value. Here are some common examples:

    CharacterCode for ASCII value
    Tab\\009
    New line (add only) \\013\\010
    Escape\\027
    #\\035
    ,\\044
    \\\092
    \\145
    \\146
    \\150
    \\151
    °\\176
    ±\\177
    ²\\178
    ³\\179
    New paragraph\\182
    ·\\183
    Ø\\216
    ñ\\241
    ÷\\247
    ü\\252

    See also

    SNR
    Find and replace in text objects
    CHNGTEXT
    Find and replace text by a map file
    DXFCHANG
    Find and replace DXF layer names

    TML date  Source 
    22/10/19     Geocomp Update or $250  
     SOILNAIL

    Create soil nail sets.

    Create points and sets to locate soil nails.

    Select a HAL pline, an optional VAL pline, a left or right direction, a slope and a .CSV file.

    The fields in the .CSV file are

    point_name,chainage,horizontal offset,elevation,length

    For each row in the .CSV, SOILNAIL creates a point at the chainage, offset and elevation (or relative elevation if a VAL is selected) and a second point, to the left or right of the alignment, at the length (slope distance) and slope angle (in degrees from horizontal). Each pair of points is created on the current layer with the specified name and is linked by a set.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     SPLAY

    Cut splay corners into lots.

    Select the corner of the set to be splayed and nominate a splay distance and text style.

    A new segment is placed in the set.

    Optionally place a pline at the old corner and dimensions as text.

    Legible text orientation is useful for the text style.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     SPLINE

    Spline plines.

    Smooth plines using a spline function.

    Splines are mainly used to smooth contour plines, but they can be used to smooth other plines.

    The three options are

    None
    No smoothing is applied
    B Spline
    B plines are splined using a function such that the path is inside each point used to locate the curve. B splines are commonly used in CAD applications.
    Overhauser
    Overhauser splines are splined using a function such that the splines passes through each point used to locate the curve. Overhauser splines are commonly used for contouring.

    Only plines with no circular, spiral, combining or vertical curves can be splined. It is possible to add a curve to a spline, but not recommended.

    Splines are displayed and plotted as a series of straight pline segments. The number of segments per spline for display is controlled by the View resolution in DISPLAYSET, and for plotting in PLOTSET.

    SLL creates a B-spline graphically. CONTOURSET configures contour splining. EDIT can spline a single pline.

    CURVE inserts an arc, spiral, parabola or combining curve that is not a spline. FILTER can be used to replace a spline with straight segments joining locations on the spline path.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Modify|​Spline|​Despline S smooth
     SPLITSET

    Split closed sets into smaller closed sets.

    Split closed sets into smaller closed sets based on settings specified by the user.

    SPLITSET can split land into aliquot parts, based on midpoint protraction, and can split a lot based on selected points.

    See also PREDAREA and ADJAREA.

    TML dateGuide Source 
    20/01/16 splitset.txt   Wencomp  
     SPOT

    Report DTM elevation at a location.

    Report easting, northing and DTM elevation coordinates at a location.

    See also

    GCSPOT
    Report the elevation of a DTM at the cursor
    ROADSPOT
    Report the elevation of a roadjob at a location
    GCDTMDIF
    Report elevation differences at the cursor
    COORDS
    Configure the coordinate scroll

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM DTM|​Spot elevation S 236
     STAKE

    Report angles, distances and coordinates from a station.

    Report point number, angle-right, distance, northing, easting, elevation and name of selected points relative to selected instrument, foresight and backsight points.

    See also GC60 and LPTSRAD.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 41
     STAKED

    Compare staked (as-built) to design.

    Compare the 2D or 3D locations of selected staked (setout | as-built | as-constructed | monitored) points against design (reference) points and create a report.

    The staked points are matched to the design points by one of three methods:

    Proximity
    Search for a design point within a user-defined tolerance of each staked point
    Proximity and Layer
    Search for a design point on a user-defined layer and within the user-defined tolerance of each staked point
    Point number (offset)
    Search for a design point number that matches each selected staked point number by a user-defined offset value.

    In addition, you can select an offset distance from each staked point to search for a design point.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Reports|​Staked|​Monitoring S  
     STAKING

    Configure a roadway staking report.

    Configure a roadway staking report.

    TML dateGuideMenuSource 
    29/10/08 RG 1000 Road|​Reports|​Staking|​Engineering S  
     STAORCHN

    Configure chainage or station notation.

    Configure commands in Geocomp Update to use station or chainage terminology.

    Commands that honour this configutation include GC02, GC65, GC65FILE, GCSPOT and RDX.

    This notation convention is stored in the [Geocomp] section of TMODWIN.INI rather than a project variable.

    This [Geocomp] section can be included in settings imported by EDITINI such C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​GEOCOMP_​AUST_DEFAULTS_​TMODWIN.INI or C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​GEOCOMP_​USA_DEFAULTS_​TMODWIN.INI.

    See also VIEWSET and UNITSSET

    TML date  Source 
    16/11/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     STARNET

    Import STAR*NET .TER file.

    STAR*NET is a least-squares adjustment application.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     STATION

    Set the beginning station of a horizontal alignment pline.

    Set the beginning station (also known as the start chainage) of a horizontal alignment pline.

    Stations increase away from the first point or vertex.

    Station equations assigned by a HALMANAGER are used in registered alignments only.

    Station and chainage

    CHAINAGE is an alias to STATION command.

    If the US English language version is installed, dialogs for commands written by Trimble refer to Station. If British English, these dialogs refer to Chainage.

    To select menus which refer to Station, use MENUCFG to select a _US.M menu file. To refer to Chainage, select a different .M file.

    The Terramodel Help refers to Station.

    This TML List refers to Chainage and sometimes also to Station.

    See also ACTIVE​CHAINAGE, SETSTA, REVERSE, STAORCHN and GC74.

    Command date MenuSourceGC
    12/03/09   Edit|​Chainage
    Edit|​Station
    S 84
     STATUSBAR

    Toggle on or off the visibility of the status bar display below the command line.

    The status bar shows the name and sometimes short description of the current command or the command currently selected on the menu. The right hand end of the status bar shows the custom control in operation.

    Statusbar is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY STATUSBARTOGGLE which simulates the Status bar command in the Window menu.

    Macro date MenuSource 
    01/09/18   Window|​Message scroll
    File|​Macro|​Play|​status​bar​toggle
    S
    User-definable
     
     STEXT

    Create single line text.

    Create a text object from a single line of entered text at a location with specified text style, metrics and rotation.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Text|​Single Line Text S 92
     STREAM

    Create linework from a stream of locations.

    Create points, sets or plines from a stream of locations.

    The locations can be entered by mouse or digitizer.

    The elevations can be derived from digitizer input,   input or DTM interpolation.

    The locations can be filtered by distance, curve or elevation.

    Stream can be used to digitize plans, especially contour plans.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Stream S 102
     STRIPNUL

    Strip null characters from a file.

    Copy an selected file containing null characters to another file without null characters.

    The new file has the same name with the new extension .ASC.

    Null characters are typically added throughout data files intended to be read exclusively by 64-bit applications.

    For example, an ASCII file containing nulls throughout can be opened by common 64-bit applications such as Excel but the ASCII import command of Terramodel (a 32-bit application) cannot display the contents or import the file until the nulls have been stripped by STRIPNUL.

    See GC12DIN for .12DA files containing null characters.

    TML date  Source 
    16/07/19     Geocomp Update or $250  
     STYLESET

    Text style settings.

    Configure the font, height, aspect ratio slant and justification of text styles, create and delete text styles and highlight one text style as the current text style for new text in this project.

    Text style names can have up to 12 characters.

    See LISTFONT for a description of the list of available fonts.

    Text is created at height defined by the view scale and this height in sheet units (e.g. cm).

    The aspect ratio is a scale factor applied to the text width.

    The slant is specified in degrees to the right of vertical.

    The insertion point is to the left, centre or right and top, middle or bottom of the text according to the horizontal and vertical justification.

    The text orientation can be rigid, fixed or legible.

    Rigid
    As rigid text is rotated, the text direction is rotated. Rigid text can display upside down.
    Fixed
    As fixed text is rotated, the text direction is not changed, even in a dynaview.
    Legible
    As Legible text is rotated, the text direction is rotated, but the text is flipped over where required so that so that it is the right way up when viewed from the bottom or right side of the sheet.

    See also DRAFTSET and TEXTMETRICS.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Settings|​Text style settings S 90
     SUBGRADE

    Subgrade editor.

    Create and edit subgrade templates.

    A subgrade represents a particular material placed beneath the finish surface.

    Subgrades are typically used to model pavement courses, base courses and stabilized subgrades, each one being defined as a separate subgrade.

    Each subgrade is assigned a unique level number L-1, L-2, L-3, etc. indicating the subgrade's vertical position. Level 1 is typically the uppermost subgrade, immediately beneath the finish surface. The level number is just a designation used to denote where a new subgrade is started.

    A subgrade is defined by one or more shapes, and has an associated material type and a depth. In the case of the uppermost subgrade, its depth is measured from the finish template surface. The depth of subsequent subgrades is measured from the bottom of the subgrade beneath which they lie.

    Subgrades are intended to be flexible, giving you the ability to place a subgrade anywhere it is needed. The beginning of a subgrade is located horizontally by a combination of the Locate by, Horiz. Align., Chain, and Offset controls. The vertical position is controlled by the Locate by, Depth, and Chain controls.

    See also TEMPLATE Editor for a desription of the menus.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Road design|​Subgrade editor...
    Channel|​Channel design|​Overdepth editor...
    S 411
     SUNSTAR

    Create an azimuth based on star or sun shots.

    Calculate the astronomical azimuth of a line using observations to stars or the sun, assuming that observations are collected using the Hour-Angle method.

    Open data file

    Open an .AZI file containing your observations. See Chapter 10 of the Reference Guide for the format of .AZI files and the star table STAR.INP.

    Stellar data

    Select a star by number from a list including the sun and 63 other navigational stars.

    Enter latitude, longitude, date and time of the observation.

    Observations

    In the Observation Time-Angle Dialog box, enter number of foresights, star sighting number, stopwatch and horizontal angle then calculate azimuths.

    Polyline

    Create a pline of the average azimuth.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM and RG 683 Cogo|​Utilities|​Star shot reduction S astro
     SUPERELV

    Super­elevation editor.

    Display the super­elevation diagram and enter and edit super­elevation parameters.

    The interface is designed for data entry by parameter or by chainage. When you change a parameter, the parameters are held and the chainages adjust. When you change a chainage, the chainages are held and the parameters adjust. You also have the option of computing the superelevation data automatically.

    Use SUPERPLOT to create slope diagram plines in the Super view. These plines can also be registered as in SLOPE​MANAGER as slope alignments.

    See also RDVALEDIT, RDDESIGN​CRIT, DESIGN​SET, RDDESIGN​SET, RDVALDES​CRT and GCDTMGDE.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Road Design|​super­elevations S 413
     SUPER​PLOT

    Super­elevation diagram.

    Create super­elevation diagram plines in the Super view for a selected road way.

    The super­elevation is defined in the super­elevation Editor SUPERELV.

    There may be multiple shapes within the template that are super​elevated. As an example, the travelled way may have a normal cross slope of -2.00% while a paved and super​elevated shoulder has a cross slope of -6%. The normal cross slope, as defined within the super­elevation editor, would normally be that of the travelled way.

    If you wish to see only the outer edges of the shape segments which are at that normal cross slope in the diagram, select All normals. If you wish to see, within the super­elevation diagram, the outer edge of shape segments of all slopes, select All slopes. If you wish to see just certain shapes, select Selected. You can choose between All slopes (All), All Normals (Normals) and Selected (Selected) in the Settings dialog and also by rotating through the tick box.

    If you choose Selected, choose from slope shapes that are super​elevating in the template, and add the slopes to the list on the right. You can also enter any desired slope within that control, and add it to the Slopes to plot list.

    See also GCDTMGDE.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Plots|​Super­elevation S  
     SUPERVIS

    Report your GPS location.

    Report your GPS location, plan, profile and cross sections.

    Log locations from a Global Positioning System receiver attached to a Terramodel computer, and display views from the current Terramodel project at each location.

    If the computer and GPS are mounted in a vehicle, a site supervisor can see where the vehicle is now in relation to the existing surface and proposed design.

    TML dateGuide Source 
    01/09/18 Sample Supervis images   POA  
     SURFACE

    Surface manager.

    Manage road job surfaces used by Roadway commands.

    Model the existing ground surface as well as any subsurface soil or rock strata beneath which the road or other works. The cross-sectional extent of a subsurface material stratum is defined by the area beneath the associated surface, and above any underlying surfaces. The surfaces can be used for plotting, conversion to points and sets or volumes.

    For design and subgrade surfaces defined by templates, see TEMPLATE and SUBGRADE instead.

    The name of a surface is derived from the name of a selected layer. A "stored" surface surface is defined by cross-section data imported from a file. A "sliced" surface is defined by interpolating through a DTM layer at Xlines.

    Terramodel can compute the earthwork volumes associated with each such subsurface material.

    The surfaces are stored with the road job. When a road job is deleted, its associated surfaces are deleted as well.

    The list defines the existing ground and subsurface strata, materials and flags. The uppermost surface in the list must be an elevation surface. Normally the uppermost surface in the list is the ground surface. The order in which the surfaces are listed must be the order in which they will be encountered from top to bottom.

    Virtual surface merging means that where surfaces intersect, you can use them in road jobs without having to create new merged DTM layers. When a listed surface intersects the surface listed below it, the later surface is virtually altered by merging the surface listed above it into it. As this occurs, all points in the later surface within the areal extent of the preceding surface are ignored and replaced instead by the points within the preceding surface. If the resulting surface intersects the next one listed below it, this process is repeated.

    Define the top surface for computation as an elevation surface, not a depth or reference surface.

    Road job
    Specify the road job
    Surface
    A list of existing surfaces working down from a top surface
    Material
    The material above the Inserted or Appended surface from the list define by the MATERIAL Manager.
    Insert...
    Insert a new surface before the one highlighted.
    Append...
    Append a new surface to the end of the list.
    Delete
    Delete the currently highlighted surface from the list.
    Stripping...
    A stripping surface defined by a table of chainages and stripping depths. This feature is not fully implemented so to avoid confusion we suggest that you define stripping by a depth or elevation surface instead.
    Elevation flag
    An "elevation" surface has absolute elevations. The top surface in the list must be an elevation surface.
    Depth flag
    A "depth" surface has depth measurements relative to the top surface, such as bore hole depth data. If a point on a depth surface has an elevation value of 8.56 feet, its elevation on this surface will be 8.56 feet below the top surface.
    Slice flag
    Interpolate the surface from the DTM at xlines. If not checked, stored cross-sections are used instead.
    Reference flag
    A "reference" surface, such as a seasonal high water table, is shown in cross-sections but not used in any design calculations
    Finish Surface
    For a finished surface defined in the Template manager, select layer 0 and not "Slice". For a finished surface defined by a DTM layer, select the layer, a material and "Slice". For a surface to be widened by templates, also attach design templates using RDDESIGNSET.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​​Road Design|​Road job surfaces...
    Channel|​Channel design|​Channel Job surfaces...
    S  
     SURFAREA

    Report the cut and fill surface areas in a road job.

    Report the cut and fill surface areas in a road job.

    Report, between specified chainages in road job, the chainage differences and the incremental and cumulative average end areas of the existing surface.

    The Roadjob must be registered with the Roadjob Manager.

    Only one phase is included in the total.

    See also XSURAREA which handles multiple phases and produces a CSV report.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     S 475
     SURPEXPT

    Export a Surpac .STR string file.

    Export strings in text .STR format for Surpac mine modelling software.

    Notes

    • The Surpac String Number is the same as the Terramodel Layer Name.
    • To convert the layer name to the appropriate Surpac string number, prefix the layer name with the string number. This gives you control over the string numbers. For example, for layer "CONCRETE" to become string 155 rename the layer to "155-CONCRETE".
    • Focus closely on the string numbers as this is controllable at the Terramodel end. A clean data set is vital.
    • Liaise with the client regarding the string number convention and get them to agree on their numbers.
    • Surpac does not work well with point features. They can exist but if points can be strung, string them. Generally only export individual points if the feature cannot be represented as a line.
    • Surpac is 3D mine model software, not a CAD package. Fancy AUTODRAFT features such as blocks are wasted. Text is lost altogether so the Surpac user may need to put text back in.
    • Do not mix point features and line features on the same layer.
    • To avoid creating duplicate points in Surpac, do not "Export SET points".
    • The Surpac file name convention is "ALPHATEXT​nnnnnnn.str".
    • The groups are derived from the Surpac string numbers.
    • SURPACOUT is aliased to SURPEXPT.
    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 FC S
     SURPIMPT

    Import Surpac .STR text string file.

    Import text strings from Surpac mine modelling software.

    There are two ways to import Surpac string files into Terramodel with the correct layers: using AUTODRAFT and using Entity files.

    AutoDraft method

    1. In AUTODRAFT, create an .ADC file containing Surpac string numbers for feature codes.
    2. Run SURPIMPT
    3. Select the file to import
    4. Leave the entity file field blank
    5. Do not "Import into separate layers"
    6. Do not "Use long entity names"
    7. Tick "Place Surpac String No first in Obj name"
    8. Once you have imported the file, run AUTODRAFT with that ADC file to string and relayer.

    Entity file method

    1. Use a text editor like Notepad to set up a Geocomp Entity File (.ENT), with entity numbers representing Surpac String Numbers and long descriptions matching Terramodel Layer names. For example:
      155,CONC,Y,Y,CONC, ,155-CONCRETE
    2. Run SURPIMPT
    3. Select the file to import
    4. Select the entity file
    5. Tick "Import into separate layers"
    6. Tick "Use long entity names"
    7. Do not "Place Surpac String No first in Obj name"

    Select "Use 6th field to decode Layer Name" if, and only if, the Surpac .STR file has a 6th column for layer name.

    You can choose whether to join strings with numbers from 900 to 999.

    SURPACIN is an alias for SURPIMPT.

    If the file is in Surpac Binary .STR format the conversion stops. You will then need to ask the Surpac user for a Text .STR (or a .DXF or a GENIO) file from Surpac.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 FC S
     SURVCEXP

    Export Carlson SurvCE CL, PRO and SCT files for machine control.

    Export the centreline, profile and cross section files required for machine control with Carlson SurvCE.

    SURVCEXP writes coordinates computed along selected strings to 0.0001m precision using specified tolerances.

    Road job
    The exported centreline (.CL) file contains coordinates at chainages along the main alignment of the selected roadjob. Each record in the .CL file is in the format 0,chainage,L,northing,easting. Create one roadjob for each centreline.
    3D Sets
    Select sets joining 3D points to export. The profile is exported to a Carlson .PRO file (not a Terramodel .PRO). The cross sections are exported to a .SCT file.
    Settings
    Chainage Range
    Limit the exported coordinates to within a chainage range. The initial default values are derived from the selected roadjob. If you change the alignment, reset the start and end chainages.
    Extend Xlines
    If enabled, extend to the selected sets.
    Generate Report
    If enabled, every record written to the .CL, .PRO and .SCT file is also reported to P3Pad.
    Export Filename:
    Specify the location and name of the .CL file, and thus the .PRO and .SCT files.
    Export
    Write a .CL file, PLN and SCT files, and CSV files if selected.

    If you have multiple alignments, repeat with a different roadjob.

    See also GRADESMT, POWERGDE and DTM2XML.

    Carlson SurvCE can also import XSC files created by EXPORTXS as section files.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18  Geocomp Update or $250 
     SURVCONT

    Export Moss GENIO data to Trimble Survey Controller.

    Export MOSS GENIO data using an .MSX mapping file to a Trimble Survey Controller with the GENIO add-on.

    In the dialog, specify how to handle specific string types.

    In the MSX file, for each record (or layer) name filter, specify the name, the layer name or fixed characters for the 080 record in the GENIO file

    Also specify a DEFAULT name filter for selected objects which do not match the name or layer filter.

    The whole file is a single GENIO model, unless you specify multiple models using layerlists.

    SURVCONT creates additional 6D strings for each 12D string and has Options to include a Group ID and exclude the Master Alignment from Cross Sections.

    SURVCONT appends to the file additional TRMB group and string names for Trimble instruments.

    If the GENIO file is intended for use with MX or other non-Trimble systems, use MOSSOUT instead.

    TML date  Source 
    17/01/20     Geocomp Update or $250  
     SVIEW

    views toolbar

    Open or change state of a view.

    Open or change the state of a view using the command line, an alias or a button.

    This command accepts two arguments. The first argument is the view index. The second argument is optional and defines the state of the view window.

    If the view is not already open, a new view is opened and made the current view.

    View modeIndex
    Plan0
    Profile1
    Sheet2
    XSect3
    Super4
    View65
    View76
    View87

    View stateIndex
    Minimize0
    Restore1
    Maximize2
    MaximizeNot specified

    Examples

    AliasCommand and argumentsAction
    Plansview 0Make the plan view current and maximized
    RestoreProfsview 1 1Make the profile view current and restored to original window

    The view names can be configured by VIEWSET.

    See also VNEW which creates a new view of the same mode, even when the view mode already exists.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    01/09/18 sview.txt Toolbox U SDS
     SW1

    Modify colour of points on steep DTM links.

    Modify the colour of DTM points on a triangle side steeper than the specified % slope.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     SYM2BLK

    Replace symbols with blocks.

    Replace symbols on all selected points with corresponding blocks.

    For example, if you have labelled points with symbol 40, SYM2BLK deletes the symbol, and then places block SYM040, with the same location, appearance, size, colour and layer, and attaches the block to the point.

    Terramodel symbols are displayed using characters in the symbol font. If you export those points to DWG, the CAD user sees 2D text characters from symbol font hiding the 3D points. If the CAD user has not loaded symbol.shx, the CAD program displays substitute letters instead. If you draft with blocks instead, or use SYM2BLK to replace symbols with blocks, the blocks are exported to the DWG file with the points. Then the symbol.shx does not need to be loaded and the blocks have the same elevation as the point.

    Commands which place symbols include LABELPOINT and LABPT. GCLPTS can list symbols on points. If you have also labelled the points with text, see GC77 to modify the elevations of the text.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     SYSTEM

    Configure Terramodel system variables.

    Configure system variables in the tmodwin.ini and p3server.ini files.

    Company Name|Address|City, State|Phone
    A maximum of 80 characters of information about your company for headings of listings and reports.
    TSP
    Terramodel Search Path. See TSP.
    Macro Directory
    Where to save and search for   macro files.
    Max objects
    The maximum number of objects that the current project file can contain. With sufficient memory, the maximum can be as high as 20,000,000 objects.
    Max alpha pts
    The maximum number of alphanumeric point IDs that your project can contain.
    Escape count
    The number of objects drawn per display refresh before Terramodel checks to see if you've pressed the Esc key.
    Tml debug level
    Set to 0, unless you are requested to enter some other value by someone debugging TMLs.
    Prototype
    The name of the prototype file. The browse button lets you pick an existing file by name. The location is not used, instead the prototype file is the first project file with that name in the TSP. If the nominated .pro file is not found, the default values used in new projects include Feet and Inches for the measurement units.
    Lock file on open
    Controls the creation of a project locked status file (.PLK). When enabled, a file with the extension of .PLK is created while the project is open. See REFFILE. In the event the file is not properly closed due to a loss of power, the .PLK file must be manually deleted.
    Undo size
    The number of objects in the undo buffer, to a maximum of 19999. See UNDO.
    Marker size
    The size in pixels of the temporary vertex marker.
    Aperture
    The size of the pick cursor box in pixels.
    Dragging on
    Enable graphical movement and rotation of objects.
    Toolbox autostart
    Display the visible toolboxes in the current workspace when you open a project file. Requires CAD module. See TOOLBOX.
    Prompt if create pt in Set Cmd
    Enable SET to prompt for name, elevation and point number.

    None of these settings are stored in the project file. They are all stored in TMODWIN.INI or P3SERVER.INI. Restart Terramodel to use the new values.

    See also POINTSET and EDITINI.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM File|​System configuration|​System...
    File|​Config system|​System...
    S CG 2
     TABLET

    Configure a digitizer tablet.

    Display the Tablet command bar to set up the digitizer communication, orient tablet menus and screen areas and orient the mapping area.

    For most digitizers, install and configure the corresponding WinTAB driver for your digitizer first, then select WinTAB in the digitizer models in Setup.

    See Terramodel help and user guide for details.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM File|​System Configuration|​Tablet
    File|​Config system|​Tablet
    S CG 7, 107
     TAILING

    Create a tailings beach.

    Create a tailings beach from a spigot object, a existing surface DTM and design settings.

    DateGuide Source 
    Custom Custom   POA  
     TANCIRCLE

    Create a set at a tangent to one or two circles.

    Create a set tangential to one or two circles defined by centres and distances.

    Method

    1. Enter a location and corresponding radial distance for one circle.
    2. Enter a location and corresponding radial distance for the other circle. To enter a point only with no circle, enter a radial distance of zero or leave the distance blank.
    3. OK
    4. Temporary lines and circles indicating the tangents and radii are shown.
    5. Graphically select the desired line from the displayed possible solutions.
    6. TANCIRCLE creates the two points joined by a set on the current layer.

    If the circles overlap there are two possible solutions. If apart, there are four. If one circle is inside the other, there are none.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Cogo|​Curves|​Tangent circle S 83
     TC*

    Drill hole and blast pattern layout.

    A suite of commands for use with explosives in open-cut mining or quarrying.

    The components you require depend on your application (material, number of seams, interfacing with other applications, and so on). A typical suite includes custom development, workspaces such as TC_DRILL.WS and the following TMLs:

    TC01
    Setup drill hole project variables
    TC04
    Drill hole pattern layout
    TC04A
    Create drill holes along pline or set
    TC05
    Interpolate drill holes to top surface
    TC06
    Create single drill hole from top
    TC07
    Delete drill holes
    TC08
    Change the length of drill hole
    TC08A
    Change drill hole length relative to surface
    TC09
    Generate validation report
    TC09A
    Generate validation report against reference DTM
    TC09B
    Generate validation report against free surface
    TC10
    Generate blast summary report
    TC11
    Identify drill hole
    TC12
    Export to .CSV file
    TC14
    Display drill hole symbols and names
    TC20
    Add drill hole length to name
    TC99
    Display attributes
    DateGuide Source 
    Custom Custom   POA  
     TD*

    Tile drainage.

    A suite of commands for tile drainage.

    The components you require depend on your application. A typical suite includes custom development, workspaces and the following TMLs:

    TD01
    Create parallel tile drainage
    TD_FILT
    Show and remove tile drainage deviations
    TDINFILL
    Create parallel tiles between tiles
    TD_LABPT
    Label points with text outside a distance from other points
    DateGuide Source 
    Custom Custom   POA  
     TDS

    Tripod Data Systems Survey Link DC.

    Start the TDS Survey Link DC program.

    TDS requires "TDS Survey Link DC" module and software which are no longer supplied by Trimble.

    Replaced by IMPORT scripts.

    Executable date MenuSource 
    N/A   Cogo|​Utilities|​TDS Survey Link DC N/A  
     TEMPLATE

    Template editor.

    Create and edit templates using shapes you have previously defined.

    The template editor displays the effect on the roadway cross sections of the templates at various chainages.

    Enter shapes in order from the centreline outwards and specify for their Transition types (using the Transition menu), Super­elevation status and Alternate status.

    Above the cross section display, there are these menus:

    FILE
    Create and save templates.
    • New
    • Save
    • Save as...
    • Save on the fly (toggle)
    • Exit
    DISPLAY
    Control how the template is displayed in the graphics screen.
    • AutoAll (toggle)
    • All
    • Redraw
    • Magnify
    • Zoom
    • Recenter
    • Previous
    TRANSITION
    Apply transitions to either the left or right template shape highlighted in the Template Shapes list box.
    None
    No transition; any changes in shape apply abruptly at the start of the next template
    Template
    Transition between two shapes with the same number of points
    Subgrade...
    Transition to intersect a subgrade material
    ROW...
    Limit transition to the right-of-way unless above a maximum slope
    Horizontal...
    Transition to a horizontal alignment
    Vertical...
    Transition to a vertical alignment
    Slope...
    Transition to a slope alignment
    Horiz/Slope...
    Transition to a horizontal and a slope alignment
    3D Set...
    Transition to a 3D set
    MultiHal...
    Transition to multiple lines with similar names using wildcards
    SETTINGS
    SHAPE
    WARNINGS
    Road warnings (when applicable)

    Below the menu, the display shows

    • Current chainage
    • Current shape class
    • Current shape
    • Cross section
    • Shape entry for the left and right sides

    See also SUBGRADE Editor.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Road design|​Template editor...
    Channel|​Channel design|​Template editor...
    S 413
     TEXT

    Create a text object.

    Create a text object containing one or more lines of text on the current layer.

    The text object can include a leader line or a border, and can be a callout by assigning it a subject point and optionally a subject HAL.

    Text objects are limited to 4000 characters. Text can include Extended Attribute Text (EAT) codes.

    Include $File:name.txt to link to show the contents of an external ASCII file "name.txt". If the text file is not in the same location as the project, include the path.

    For columns of text such as coordinates, use a fixed-width font in the Terramodel text style.

    See also EDIT, TEXT​METRICS, CSV2TAB and DRAFTSET.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Text|​Text
    Draw|​Text
    S 92
     TEXT2PNT

    Create points at insertion points of text or blocks.

    Create points at the insertion points of text or blocks on the same layer as the text object, with elevation derived from the elevation of the object or digits in the text.

    Select "Ht from Text Value", to use numeric text to set the elevation of the point from the value of the text. This is useful for converting 2D plans, where the elevations are presented as text labels, to 3D. If the text includes non-numeric characters, the elevation may be set to *.

    Select "Ht from Point Ht", to set the elevation of the point to match the elevation of the text or block. This may be useful when data are imported with symbols as 3D text or blocks.

    If the insertion point of each text or block object is a constant offset from the true location, MOVE all the created points by that amount. Use the right mouse button to help you pick the "from" and "to" locations.

    If you have points on a layer at the desired locations, use GCPTSTXT to replace the elevation by the numeric value of the nearest text within a tolerance.

    If you have nearby points with elevations, you may be able to use DTMPTS to interpolate elevations from those points.

    See also TEXT2PT, PTBLKS, GCBLKPTS, GCPTSTXT, ELVPLINE, GCCONTXT and ELEVOBJS.

    TML date MenuSourceGC
    01/09/18   Draw|​Point|​At text Geocomp Update or $250 314,317
     TEXT2PT

    Create a point with the elevation from a text object.

    Create a single point with the elevation of single selected text at a specific location and with a specific name.

    For multiple points, see TEXT2PNT.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     TEXTALIGN

    Align text objects in X or Y.

    Modify the X or Y value of insertion point of all selected text so that the text objects line up vertically or horizontally.

    This is different to ALIGNTXT.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Modify|​Text|​Align X or Y
    Modify|​Text alignment
    S  
     TEXTALONG

    Create text along a selected set or pline.

    Create a text object along a HAL, with a specified location, text style and text metrics.

    The text is created with an Orientation of Along and a Ref Obj of the HAL. To flip the text to the other side of the HAL, modify the Orientation to Along Flipped using EDIT or TEXTMETRICS.

    To label a linear feature such as a road or waterway with the HAL name, include the EAT code \PAR{N}.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Text|​Text along S 92
     TEXTARRO

    Draw an arrow with text inside.

    Create a closed pline representing arrow around the entered text.

    The length and direction is determined by two location points.

    The width is determined by the selected text style.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     TEXTBACK

    Hatch behind selected text.

    Create a hatch block for each selected text object in the specified colour, with a higher record number than all other objects, and then delete and redraft the text with a higher record number still. The text then displays over the hatching and the hatching displays over all other objects.

    The layer and parent of each block match the layer and parent of the text, to keep the same visibility in dynaviews. The hatch size matches the size of the text with the text clip margin from DRAFTSET. The shape matches the shape of the text border, or is rectangular if the text has no border.

    See also RENUMREC.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     TEXTCASE

    Change the case of selected text.

    Change the case of selected text to Upper, Lower, Sentence or Title.

    Upper
    CHANGE ALL LETTERS TO UPPER CASE
    Lower
    change all letters to lower case
    Sentence
    Change the first character to upper case and all other characters to lower case
    Title
    Change the Initial Letters of the First Word and Words Between Spaces to Uppercase and Change Common Short Words Without Punctuation an of or a the is on but for and in to Lowercase.

    See also NAMECASE and PTCASE.

    TML date MenuSource 
    01/09/18   Modify|​Text|​Case
    Modify|​Text case
    Geocomp Update or $250  
     TEXTDIR

    Modify the direction of text objects.

    Modify the direction of text objects to new bearings.

    Text Objs:
    Select text objects
    Bearing of Text
    Enter a new bearing
    Set direction to horizontal
    Specify a new bearing of 90°00′00″ or N90E
    Undo
    UNDO changes
    Modify Text Bearings
    Modify the direction of selected text objects to the new bearing
    Close
    Close command with text in the new direction

    The initial new bearing is the new bearing from the previous TEXTDIR session.

    See also BEARTEXT, BLOCKDIR and TEXTROTATE.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     TEXTFIT

    Adjust the aspect ratio of selected text.

    Adjust the aspect ratio of selected text to fit a space by stretching or shrinking the text width graphically, or by entering a new aspect ratio.

    See also GCTXTFIT and TEXTWRAP.

    TML date  Source 
    29/10/08     S  
     TEXT​METRICS

    Change the font, rotation, orientation, height, justification, slant and aspect ratio of text objects.

    The Edit button allows you to change text settings. Each option has a check box that must be checked before the option can be revised. When you have finished setting options, click OK.

    Define the aspect ratio as negative (i.e. -1) to make the text object draw in a mirrored format.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Modify|​Text|​metrics
    Modify|​Text metrics
    S 90
     TEXTRND

    Round selected bearings and distances for cadastral plans.

    Round bearings and distances in selected text.

    For each selected text object, round the value of a bearing and a distance to a predefined cadastral standard.

    Operation

    Text Objs:
    Selected text objects to be rounded
    State
    Pick a State or Territory from a list to adopt the rounding specifications of the relevant cadastral authority. Geocomp Systems can add more regions as required. Current regional roundings are:

    StateBearingsDistances to 500 mDistances over 500 m
    NONERound to 10″Round to 10 mmRound to 100 mm
    ACTRound to 10″Round to 10 mmRound to 100 mm
    NSWRound to 5″Round to 5 mmRound to 5 mm
    VICRound to 10″Round to 10 mmRound to 100 mm
    QLDRound to 10″Truncate to 1 mm Truncate to 1 mm
    TASRound to 10″Round to 10 mm Round to 10 mm
    NTRound to 10″ Round to 5 mm Round to 5 mm

    Search for Both Bearing and Distance on the same line
    Specify whether a single text record can have both a bearing and a distance.
    OK
    Modify the selected text.
    Cancel
    Cancel without modifying any text

    Notes

    The first sequence of characters on a line of text that includes digits and a degree sign (\176), or an EAT code with a bearing, is treated as a bearing; the first sequence that includes a decimal point, or an EAT code with a distance, is treated as a distance. Any remaining bearings, distances or EAT codes, and any other characters such as letters, numbers, spaces, brackets and new lines, are not modified.

    Text with bearings or distances can be manually entered by TEXT, LABELSEG using \SEG codes and GCDIMLOT using \BRG and \DIST codes. TEXTRND expands these EAT codes into text.

    For two point \SEG codes, the rounded dimensions are computed from the distance between the points. All other rounded dimensions are computed from the displayed text.

    For Tables created by LABELTABLE, EXPLODE into plines and text first.

    See also

    UNITSSET
    for variable precision of dimensions
    BEARTEXT
    to swing bearings by 180°

    TML date  SourceGC
    25/11/19     Geocomp Update or $250 91
     TEXT​ROTATE

    Change the rotation angle of selected text.

    Change the rotation of selected text objects.

    Select the text objects and the angle of rotation.

    Each text object will be rotated about its insertion point.

    See also TEXTDIR and ROTATE.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Modify|​Text|​Rotate
    Modify|​Text rotate
    S 92
     TEXT​STYLE

    Change the current text style.

    Select the current text style from the list of text styles in the project.

    Click Edit to open STYLESET.

    See also GCSTYLE and GCTSTYLE.

    Command dateGuide SourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM   S 190
     TEXT​WRAP

    Modify multi-line text to fit width.

    Remove or insert hard return characters in selected text objects to wrap the line lengths to a text width.

    Replace the last space in a line of text before the specified text-width with a hard return to create as many or as few new lines as required.

    • To shorten or lengthen lines, enter a text width in units of the current view.
    • To keep existing new lines, select "Keep ALL Hard Returns".
    • To keep new paragraphs separated by two new lines, select select "Keep ALL Hard Returns" and "Keep Adjacent Hard Returns Only".
    • To create single lines of text, remove all hard returns by specifying a longer text-width.

    EAT codes are not decoded. Words and EAT codes are broken if strings of characters between spaces are longer then the specified width.

    Text properties, such as insertion point location, height, font, aspect and justification, are not modified.

    To search for or replace a hard return, use SNR command and specify character \010.

    See also EDIT, TEXTFIT and GCTXTFIT.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18    Geocomp Update or $200  
     TILE​CENTRED

    Tile views centred by chainage.

    Tile the Plan, Profile, Super and Xsect views and centre by chainage from a selected roadjob alignment.

    An alias to CENVIEW.

    TML date MenuSource 
    01/09/18   Window|​Tile centred by chainage
    Window|​Tile centered by station
    Geocomp Update or $200  
     TILE​HORIZ

    Tile the open views horizontally.

    TileHoriz is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY TILEHORIZONTAL which simulates the Tile horizontal command in the Window menu.

    Macro date MenuSource 
    01/09/18   Window|​Tile horizontal
    File|​Macro|​Play|​tile​horizontal
    Geocomp Update or $200  
     TILE​VERT

    Tile the open views vertically.

    TileVert is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY TILEVERTICAL which simulates the Tile vertical command in the Window menu.

    Macro date MenuSource 
    01/09/18   Window|​Tile vertical
    File|​Macro|​Play|​tile​vertical
    Geocomp Update or $200  
     TMANAGER

    Template manager.

    Create, copy, delete, import or export finish surface templates, and assign templates to roadways.

    Templates can be exported to Road Template Library (RTL) files, and imported.

    See also GC26GIS and RMGC.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Road design|​Template manager...
    Channel|​Channel design|​Template manager...
    S 413
     TMCUSTOM

    Add C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp\ folder to TSP.

    Add C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp\ folder to the Terramodel Search Path in the current TMODWIN.INI.

    Geocomp Update M creates the folders C:\TMCUSTOM\ and C:\TMCUSTOM\​Geocomp\ and installs its TMLs and other files for new and updated commands into C:\TMCUSTOM\​Geocomp\. These commands are not available to you until you add C:\TMCUSTOM\​Geocomp\ to the Terramodel Search Path by TMCUSTOM command.

    C:\TMCUSTOM\ is the recommended location for user-configurable files such as prototypes and blocks. For Terramodel to find these files,

    If the C:\TMCUSTOM\ folder does not already exist,

    • Create it with TMCUSTOM,
    • Put your custom files into it, and
    • Use TSP to check whether your custom files are on the TSP.

    If C:\TMCUSTOM\ is not in the TSP,

    • Check the spelling of the folder name, and
    • Use EDITINI to add C:\TMCUSTOM\ after C:\TMCUSTOM\​Geocomp\.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update  
     TMGIS

    Link Terramodel with a Microsoft Access database.

    Turn Terramodel into a GIS.

    See also GC26GIS and RMGC.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     POA  
     TMLLIST

    Open the installed TML list.

    Open the TML List in a new window or tab in your default browser.

    The TML List is the file you are reading now.

    To open the installed TML List (which loads quickly and includes links to manuals and user guides installed with Terramodel):

    • Click on the TMLL List shortcut on the Desktop,
    • Type TMLLIST at the command line,
    • Select TML List from the Help menu,
    • Select Documents from the Help menu, and then select TML List (local edition), or
    • Select GCHELP from the toolbar button then select the TML List button

    The latest TML List on the web is here www.geocomp.com.au/​support/​terramodel/​tmllist.html.

    To pin the shortcut to the Taskbar or Start menu Desktop in Windows 7, right-click on the shortcut, select Properties, then prefix the Target field with the text "Explorer ". OK to save and close. Then right-click on the shortcut again and select the Pin option from menu.

    See also GSSWP.

    HTML dateGuideMenuSource 
    updated often Commands (TMLs) Help|​TML List $0  
     TMXIN

    Import a Terramodel eXchange (.TMX) file.

    Import a Terramodel .TMX which has been exported from another Terramodel project.

    If an object in the TMX is on a new layer, the layer is created with the point colour, line colour and linetype of the layer the object was on when the TMX was created. If the layer already exists, the layer properties are unchanged.

    If the .TMX contains external blocks, corresponding .BLK files are created in the current project folder.

    To export objects to .TMX, use TMXOUT.

    to export a .TMX file, use TMXLAYERS or TMXOUT.

    To copy a reference project, see PCOPY.

    To import a project (.PRO), including layers and project variables, use the IMPORT script.

    To import a layer list, use CREATELL.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    01/09/18 RG 79 File|​Misc. Import|​Terramodel .TMX
    File|​Misc. Import/Export|​TMX Import
    File|​TMXin
    S 30
     TMXLAYER

    Export layers to a Terramodel eXchange (.TMX) file.

    Export a .TMX file containing the names, colours and linetypes of all layers in the current project (.PRO).

    To export objects to .TMX, use TMXOUT.

    To copy a reference project (.PRO), see PCOPY.

    To export a layer list, use LLRPT.

    TML dateGuide   
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     TMXOUT

    Export objects to a Terramodel eXchange (.TMX) file.

    Export a Terramodel exchange .TMX file to be imported into another Terramodel project (.PRO).

    Select Objects to export objects and the point colour, line colour and linetype of the layers of the objects. To retain references between objects, for example, between horizontal and vertical alignments, select both objects to export together. Some faulty data are removed, similar to CLEANUP.

    External blocks are embedded into the .TMX.

    To export a .TMX file containing the names, colours and linetypes of all layers in the current project (.PRO), select no objects, and select "Export layer information only" when prompted; or use TMXLAYERS.

    See also PCOPY, to copy a reference project and the Terramodel project EXPORT export script, which exports selected objects to a project file.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    01/09/18 RG 82 File|​Misc .Export|​Terramodel .TMX
    File|​Misc. Import/Export|​TMX Export
    File|​TMXout
    S 68
     TOGLINKS

    Toggle display of DTM links.

    Toggle the "Display links" setting in LINKSET then REDRAW the display.

    Use LINKSET to select the layers first.

    To remove the links from the project, use REMOVELINKS.

    To refresh the DTM, use any command that reforms DTMS such as DTMUPDT, DTMALL or GCDTMALL.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $0 143
     TOGQUICK

    Toggle display of quick contours.

    Toggle the "Quick contours" setting in LINKSET then REDRAW the display.

    Use LINKSET to select the layers and CONTOURSET to set the contour interval first.

    To refresh the DTM, use any command that reforms DTMS such as DTMUPDT, DTMALL or GCDTMALL.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $0 110
     TOGSLOPE

    Toggle display of triangle slopes.

    Toggle the "Show triangle slope" setting in LINKSET then REDRAW the display.

    Use LINKSET to select the layers first.

    To refresh the DTM, use any command that reforms DTMs such as DTMUPDT, DTMALL or GCDTMALL.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $0 325
     TOOLBOX

    toolbox toolbar button

    Create or edit toolboxes.

    A toolbox is a user-definable arrangement of command buttons which float over the Terramodel window. A workspace is a group of toolboxes in specific sizes and screen positions, saved in a .ws file.

    TOOLBOX command displays open toolboxes in the current workspace.

    Run TOOLBOX command at the command line or from the multi-tool icon on the toolbar. Start TOOLBOX whenever you open Terramodel by selecting "Toolbox autostart" in SYSTEM.

    Each command button can include a user-defined title, icon, pop-up note (tool tips) text, left mouse command and right mouse command. The commands can be aliases. Leave the mouse over the button to see the pop-up notes.

    To open the toolbox menu, left-click on the small symbol at the top left of the toolbox you want to edit.

    New button
    Add a new button to the current toolbox
    Toolboxes...
    Open and close, import, rename, delete or create new toolboxes in the current workspace
    Open Workspace
    Open a workspace (.ws) file.
    Save Workspace
    Save changes to the current workspace, otherwise your changes to the workspace will be lost when you close Terramodel.
    Save Workspace As...
    Save the current workspace with a new (.ws) name.
    Help...
    Display the Toolbox help menu. This explains how to edit, create, import, cascade, and otherwise manipulate command buttons, toolboxes and workspaces.
    About
    See also the licence agreement, copyrights and trademarks in the Toolbox Help.
    Exit ToolBox
    Closes the current workspace including all open toolboxes.

    Toolbox Help is available from the Help menu in any toolbox, from the Index submenu in the Help menu and by the HELPTOOLBOX command.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09 HELP​TOOLBOX Toolbar S  
     TP01

    Pipeline project variables.

    Setup project variables for pipeline design optimisation.

    Pipeline Design Optimisation is a suite of commands that minimise joins, segments and earthworks in long pipeline construction projects.

    The TMLs have names starting with TP and are in the category of Pipe optimisation. The components you require depend on the fluid, (such as water, gas or slurry) and the specifications (such the maximum 3D deflection and available joints). A typical suite includes custom development, workspaces such as TP_PIPE.WS, attribute definition files such as TP_PIPE.ADF, and blocks for valves.

    TML date  Source 
    Custom     POA  
     TP02

    Create HAL and VAL sets from HAL and VAL plines.

    Create HAL and VAL sets from HAL and VAL plines.

    Part of the Pipeline Design Optimisation suite.

    See also GC28.

    TML date  Source 
    Custom     POA  
     TP03

    Create 3D pipes using HAL and VAL sets.

    Create 3D pipes using HAL and VAL sets.

    Part of the Pipeline Design Optimisation suite.

    TML date  Source 
    Custom     POA  
     TP10

    Report on 3D pipes.

    Report on 3D pipes.

    Report the number of standard lengths, number of bends and 3D angle between pipe segments.

    Part of the Pipeline Design Optimisation suite.

    See also 3DPIPE.

    TML date  Source 
    Custom     POA  
     TP40

    Place airvalve blocks on pipes.

    Places air valve blocks at positive-to-negative grade changes and scour valve blocks at negative-to-positive grade changes.

    Part of the Pipeline Design Optimisation suite.

    See also AIRVALVE.

    TML date  Source 
    Custom     POA  
     TP41

    Create obstructions in profile view.

    Create obstructions in profile view using pipe centreline and obstruction layer list.

    Part of the Pipeline Design Optimisation suite.

    See also GC41.

    TML date  Source 
    Custom     POA  
     TP99

    Display and edit pipe node design information.

    Display and edit pipe node design information.

    Part of the Pipeline Design Optimisation suite.

    TML date  Source 
    Custom     POA  
     TPCENVIE

    Recentre plan and profile view based on chainage.

    Recentre plan and profile view based on chainage.

    Part of the Pipeline Design Optimisation suite.

    See also CENVIEW.

    TML date  Source 
    Custom     POA  
     TPLSEC

    Create long section plots of pipeline.

    Create long section plots of pipeline showing pipe bearing, land owner, geotechnical information, pipe cover and pipe grade.

    Part of the Pipeline Design Optimisation suite.

    See also LSEC1 and LSECUK.

    TML date  Source 
    Custom     POA  
     TPSETOUT

    Export to TPSetout formats.

    TPSetout is a survey program for hand-held calculators written by Michael Gunter.

    Supported data types include:

    • Points (.pta)
    • Triangles (.tsa)
    • Horizontal alignment (.hza)
    • Vertical alignment (.vta)
    • Crossfall (.cfa)
    • String lines (.hla)
    • Lane descriptions (.ldf)
    • Vertical adjustments (.vtb)
    • Vertical offsets (.clo)
    • Simple batter (.bta)
    • Complex batter (.btb)

    See also GCPTAIN for importing TPsetout .PTA survey files. See also TPSTKOUT for TPStakeout for Leica Total Stations.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     TPSTKOUT

    Export to TPStakeout formats.

    Supported data types include:

    • Points (.pta)
    • Triangles (.tsa)
    • Horizontal alignment (.hza)
    • Vertical alignment (.vta)
    • Crossfall (.cfa)
    • String lines (.hla)
    • Lane descriptions (.ldf)
    • Vertical adjustments (.vtb)
    • Vertical offsets (.clo)
    • Simple batter (.bta)
    • Complex batter (.btb)

    TPStakeout, by Michael Gunter, is a survey program available for Leica TPS Total Stations. See also TPSETOUT.

    See also GCPTAIN for importing TPsetout/​TPStakeout .PTA survey files.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     TRACEBDY

    Create a set bounded by selected lines.

    Select the lines that describe the boundary and then select the centre point. A set is created around the bounding lines.

    Gaps less than 0.5 units are crossed automatically. If you want to control this maximum snap distance, or report areas or create plines or hatching, use GCTRACE instead. Geocomp Update aliases TRACEBDY and TRACE to GCTRACE.

    A typical application is creating a closed set from supplied linework representing a subdivision lot.

    See also LOTJOIN to create multiple sets from multiple centres, AUTOSET to create a clockwise set from points and QSET to quickly key in a lot boundary.

    In Terramodel Help, this TML is called Trace.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Set|​Trace enclosing boundary S  
     TRAV2D

    Enter points by 2D Traverse or Radiation.

    Create 2D points by entry of bearings and distances.

    Enter values from a single standpoint quickly without using the mouse or tab keys.

    To change the standpoint, type a point number or use a mouse.

    If Line is selected, the points are linked to the previous point by a set segment.

    In Trav mode, the dimension is from the previously created point. In Rad mode, it is from the Stand point.

    Specify a deflection angle and scale factor, to save you having to rotate and scale afterwards, if entering values from a cadastral plan or switching between ground and GPS units.

    If a point with the same X, Y and Z already exists, you are prompted whether to create a new point.

    See also QSET, TRAVERSE and TRAVPLIN.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 4,5, 44
     TRAVERSE

    Enter points by 3D traverse or radiation.

    Create points and sets by radiating or traversing from a known point by known bearings and distances.

    SETUP POINT
    Enter a point that represents the instrument location or occupied point for the various Traverse options
    DISTANCE MODE SLOPE/HORIZONTAL
    Select a default mode of entry for all input distances.
    BEARING 3D
    Calculate 3-D points based on a given bearing, distance and vertical angle.
    BEARING 2D
    Calculate 2-D points based on a given bearing and distance.
    BACKSIGHT
    Establish the backsight angle for horizontal angle readings.
    BREAK BACK
    Traverse with broken back curves.
    CONNECT
    Connect the traverse to an existing point.
    SIDESHOT3D
    Store 3-D sideshot points, given a bearing, distance and vertical angle to the new point.
    SIDESHOT2D
    Store 2-D sideshot points, given a bearing and distance to the new point.
    PC/PI/PT
    Designate a traverse point as a point of curvature, point of intersection, or point of tangency on an arc.
    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Cogo|​Traverse|​Traverse
    Cogo|​Traverse
    S 4,5,50
     TRAVPLIN

    Enter a pline by traverse or radiation.

    Create a pline by entry of bearings and distances.

    In Trav mode, the distance is from the end of the new segnent. In Rad mode, the distance is from the start Location.

    Specify a bearing, distance, deflection angle and scale factor.

    See also TRAV2D, TRAVERSE, BLDG and BUILDING.

    TML date  Source 
    23/03/19     Geocomp Update or $250  
     TRAVUTM

    Traverse with ellipsoidal distances.

    Create points by entry of bearings and ellipsoidal distances.

    Elevations can be interpolated from N-values.

    If adjusting for N-values, use AUSGEOID to import a latitude and longitude grid of N-values, or import a .TMX of such a grid.

    See also TRAV2D and GC29UTM.

    The TML name is TRAV_UTM. If TRAVUTM does not run from the command line, create an alias from TRAVUTM to TRAV_UTM or enter TRAV_UTM.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 UTM 7
     TRIM

    Trim a line or arc.

    Trim a line or arc segment by a distance or to an intersection.

    Specify by tick box whether to trim to boundaries or a distance.

    Spiral curves and vertical curves cannot be trimmed.

    For sets, you can choose to Add a new endpoint at the end of the trimmed line while saving the previous endpoint. If the line's points have elevations, the new endpoint will have an interpolated elevation based on the elevations of adjacent points and its linear distance along the line.

    If you don't add a new endpoint, the previous endpoint is moved to the trim location. If the line's points have elevations, the moved endpoint will have an interpolated elevation based on the adjacent points and its linear distance along the line.

    See also CLIP.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Edit|​Trim S 276
     TRISOL

    Calculate solutions of a triangle.

    Calculate solutions of a triangle, given any three known values, and display the solutions in a dialog box or report editor.

    Calculated solutions are shown as ghosted text. No objects are created.

    KNOWN VALUES
    Select the three known triangle properties to enter. Select from:
    • Side, side, side
    • Angle, side, angle
    • Side, angle, angle
    • Angle, side, area
    • Side, angle, side
    • Side, side, area
    SIDE A|SIDE B|SIDE C
    Enter the known values for any of the triangle sides.
    ANGLE A|ANGLE B|ANGLE C
    Enter the known values for any of the interior angles.
    AREA
    If known, enter the area of the triangle.
    PERIMETER
    Display the calculated triangle perimeter.
    CALCULATE
    Calculate the triangle properties and display them in their corresponding boxes.
    REPORT
    Display the triangle calculations in the report editor, where you can edit, format, and print the calculations.

    The calculated solutions are displayed using the settings in UNITSSET.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Cogo|​Utilities|​Triangle solutions S  
     TRISWAP

    Swap links in adjacent triangles.

    Swap links in adjacent triangles by creating a breakline.

    Select a DTM layer to be isolated with links displayed and quick contours turned off.

    Select locations inside two adjacent triangles to be swapped.

    Select Close to stop swapping triangles and isolating the layer.

    TRISWAP creates a new breakline between the points opposite the common triangle side with colour 56 and name "TriSwap Breakline".

    The triangles are only swapped if they are adjacent and the common side is a not a breakline or is a breakline previously created by TRISWAP.

    The initial default layer is the current layer.

    To see the directions of fall, turn on "Show triangle slope" in LINKSET.

    TML date  Source 
    26/07/19     Geocomp Update  
     TRMBGRID

    Export a Trimble gridded DTM (.DTX) file.

    Specify a DTM layer and the origin, extents, intervals and bearing of the grid.

    Requires TRMBUTIL.TML.

    TML dateGuide SourceGC
    01/09/18 trmbgrid.txt   U 221
     TRMBROAD

    Export a roadway to Trimble .tta or .ttx.

    Export a roadway alignment and cross sections.

    TTA files are useful for exporting alignments to Quantm Desktop from Trimble Planning Solutions.

    For most Trimble instruments, TRMBROAD has been replaced by EXPORT Trimble Roading 3D (DC) script, GCDCOUT and GCMULTDC.

    See also Communication between the Trimble Control Unit and Terramodel.

    TML dateGuide SourceGC
    01/09/18 trmbroad.txt   U 80
     TRMBTIN

    Export a DTM layer to a Trimble (.TTM) file.

    Replaced by EXPORT Trimble DTM (TTM).

    TTM files are typically used in Trimble SiteVision.

    See also Trimble DTM (TTM).

    See also Communication between the Trimble Control Unit and Terramodel.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update  
     TRUEDIST

    Report a set or pline segment length with an applied scale factor.

    For any selected set or pline segment, report the horizontal length as the "grid distance" and the scaled distance as "true distance".

    In Settings, enter a scale factor and a precision to be stored as project variables.

    If measurement units are set to Feet, TRUEDIST reports the distance in both feet and miles. If Meters, reports in "Meters".

    TML dateGuide SourceGC
    20/01/16 truedist.txt   Wencomp 44+17
     TSP

    Terramodel search path browser.

    List the files and folders on the Terramodel Search Path.

    Search through the Terramodel Search Path for files used by Terramodel including prototype, TMLs, blocks and bmps. List the location of the current project first, then the TSP folders specified in TMODWIN.INI and finally the Terramodel software folder. The Files window shows the name and folder of each file found by Terramodel.

    To list a file of a particular name, type the file name into the Files box. You may use wildcards such as *.WS or PROTO*.

    Terramodel Search Path

    The Terramodel Search path is stored in the path with the value of the TSP= field in TMODWIN.INI. GCHELP shows the location of the TMODWIN.INI in use, for example C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Locale\​English\​TMODWIN.INI (or a copy in the VirtualStore). Edit using EDITINI. The maximum length of the TSP= value is 256 characters.

    The Geocomp Update M installs files into C:\TMCUSTOM\​Geocomp\. To enable these Geocomp Update M commands, run TMCUSTOM to add C:\TMCUSTOM\​Geocomp\ to the beginning of TSP= in TMODWIN.INI and thus take precedence over other folders.

    Use EDITINI to add your own location to the TSP for your own configuration files such as prototypes, blocks and BMP files. By default, C:\TMCUSTOM is in the TSP, if the folder has been created. EDITINI removes folders from the TSP that cannot be found on the computer.

    SYSTEM and GCHELP show the characters entered into the TSP= field. TSP shows only paths and files Terramodel actually finds in the Terramodel Search Path. Difference are due to confusion such as typos, missing folders and duplicate TMODWIN.INI file. EDITINI deletes invalid folders from the TSP.

    If a block is not found as an internal block, or as an external block in the TSP, BLOCK will then search for .BLK files in C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared\​Blocks. In the same way, if a command you enter at the command line is not an ALIAS, a Terramodel command, or a TML in the Terramodel Search Path, Terramodel will also search for a TML command file with that name in C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Terramodel\​TMLs.

    Some file types are not looked for on the TSP but in fixed locations instead. This includes font (FNT) files which are in C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared\​Fonts and AutoDraft Configuration files (ADC) which are in specified in a project variable by AUTODRAFT.

    Windows can take a copy of TMODWIN.INI for the VirtualStore. If Terramodel is not consistently using the one TMODWIN.INI, either change the Properties of the desktop shortcut to "Run as administrator", or install Geocomp Update L then M to run Terramodel "as invoker.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM File|​System Configuration|​Search Path Browser S CG 2

     TXTHTDIF

    Modify text to show height difference between segment points.

    Update selected text used to label the differences in elevation between segment points to the current elevation differences.

    TML date  Source 
    25/05/17     Geocomp Update or $200  
     TTXOUT

    Export Trimble TTX cross section file.

    Replaced by EXPORT Trimble Roading 3D (DC) script, GCDCOUT and GCMULTDC.

    See also Communication between the Trimble Control Unit and Terramodel.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     S  
     TUNNELDTM

    Unwrap a Tunnel.

    Transform between "wrapped" and "unwrapped" tunnel coordinate systems.

    You can form a DTM of a tunnel wall once it has been "unwrapped".

    The DTM is relative to the current roadway.

    TunnelDTM Options

    DTM layer
    Select a layer containing the tunnel points. You can have multiple layers containing tunnel data in a project file.
    Wrap
    Transform the coordinates of a layer of "unwrapped" tunnel data to true 3D coordinates.
    Unwrap
    Transform the coordinates of a layer of "wrapped" tunnel data to "unwrapped" so that the DTM elevations will be relative to the current roadway.

    Notes

    • Carefully read the Tunnel Training Guide before using TUNNELDTM.
    • Make sure the layer is correctly set to "wrapped" or "unwrapped" according to the nature of the tunnel data before you import or copy that data onto that layer. Use GCWRAP to correct an incorrect status without transforming points.
    • TUNNELDTM needs the Roadway module.
    • Do not edit the HAL or VAL while the points are "unwrapped".
    • Do not form a DTM of wrapped tunnel data.
    • The Tunnels menu is included in tunnel.m and geocomp+.m menu files.
    • 3DVISUALISER, RDX, XSHEET, EARTHWRK, ROADDTM and XSECTIONEDT commands all automatically allow for the "wrapped" or "unwrapped" status of the layer.
    • See also COLORCODE and SHAPE.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    01/09/18HELPTM and Tunnel Training Guide Tunnels|​Wrap/Unwrap DTM S 343
     TV

    Visualizer.

    Display objects, DTMs and images in a perspective view.

    Display objects, DTMs and images in Terramodel project files in Terramodel Visualizer.

    Using TV 2.05 you can

    • Move around the project
    • Rotate the project
    • Define flight paths
    • Record movies
    • Display textures such as grass, sand, pavers and water
    • Display points, sets and plines
    • Display multiple DTMs
    • Add colour, light and shade effects
    • Add structures such as buildings, pipes and bored holes
    • Add trees
    • Add background images such as sky
    • Drape orthophoto images
    • Edit points while viewing in perspective
    • Visualize tunnels

    Terramodel Visualizer is a separate application which you can install from the Terramodel installation disk. Try TV by working with one of four prepared demo projects. Pictures from these projects are included at the end of the Terramodel User Guide. To use TV with your data you need the TV Base module. Some features also require the Image manager, TV OrthoDrape, TV Surface Editor or TV Stereo modules.

    Visualizer Help is available from the Help menu in Visualizer, from the Index submenu in the Help menu and by the HELPTV command.

    See also 3DVISUALISER and XTOCL.

    Application date Guide Menu Source GC
    27/04/07 HELPTV, UGDTM|​More...|​Visualizer S PSV
     TWOPL

    Create a curve from two points and a line.

    Select a point of curvature (PC), back bearing (back tangent) from the first point and point of tangency (PT) for the new arc and create an arc through the two points and a radius point.

    All objects are placed on the current layer using the point and object colours of that layer.

    Command date MenuSourceGC
    12/03/09   Cogo|​Curves|​2 points+line S 19
     TXTIN

    Import text from a file.

    Create one text object for each line in an ASCII file.

    You can browse to select the ASCII file, view the contents and specify a location for the upper left corner, the text style and rotation.

    To import data from a spreadsheet, first export as .PRN. If your text is numeric, use a fixed-width font such as TMODELF so that digits line up vertically.

    See also TEXT and CSV2TAB.

    Command date MenuSourceGC
    12/03/09   File|​Misc. Import|​Text
    File|​Misc. Import/Export|​Text Import
    S 92
     TXTOUT

    Export selected text to an ASCII file.

    Export text objects in descending northing and explode EAT codes to normal text.

    Replaced by GCTXTOUT which can also export in columns.

    See also LISTTEXT which sorts by easting.

    TML date MenuSource 
    01/09/18   File|​Misc .Export|​Text
    File|​Misc. Import/Export|​TMX Export
    S  

     TXTREFEL

    Match elevation of text to point.

    Modify the elevation of text records to match the elevation of the reference object.

    For example, if you label a point with EAT code text, the elevation of the text will be 0.000 or *. If you export this to CAD, the text object will have a different elevation to the point so will not be seen next to the point in 3D. If you run TXTREFEL on the text before you export, the text will have the same elevation as the points.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 9
     TXT​SCALE

    Modify the size of selected text.

    Modify the size of selected text objects by a scale factor.

    Select "Scale Offsets" move the insertion points by also scaling the X and Y offsets to any RefObj (parent) points. LABPT labels parent points with text.

    To fix the insertion points, do not select "Scale Offsets".

    To scale around a single origin, see GCSCALE.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    01/09/18HELPTM Modify|​Text|​Scale
    Modify|​Text scale
    Geocomp Update or $200 92
     TXTSWAP

    Swap the text between two text records with control of location, rotation and subject.

    Swap the text between two text records. Specify whether or not to swap location, rotation and subject. Close to finish swapping.

    Replaces TEXTSWAP which swaps the text location but not the rotation or subject.

    See also BEARTEXT which reverses bearings in text.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 91
     UNDER

    Create a profile of a pipe conduit under a road.

    Create a profile of a pipe conduit under a road given a maximum degree of curvature (R).

    Select a segment (Mid Seg:) of a profile at a location under the 'middle' of a road where there is sufficient cover then a second segment to the left or right of the Mid segment and a radius.

    Create a profile of two back-to-back curves of the nominated radius starting at the Mid segment and working outwards either left or right. Repeat for the other side of the road.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     UNDO

    Undo changes.

    Undo changes to objects made the last command. Repeat to undo each change made by previous commands.

    Undo reverses the changes made, one command at a time. Each time Undo is executed, the effect of preceding command is reversed. You can continue to Undo until either you have reversed all of the desired modifications, or the limit of the Undo buffer is reached. If you attempt to exceed the limit of the Undo buffer, you will receive the message "Undo buffer overflow", and you will no longer be able to reverse your changes. Undo never partially reverses a command. If an entire command cannot be reversed, then none of the objects changed by that command are reversed.

    Use REDO to reverse the effect of the last UNDO.

    The number of objects that can be undone is limited by the size of the Undo buffer specified in SYSTEM up to a maximum of 19,999. If you want to be able to reverse larger changes, you should first SAVE the current project file.

    RDE and SAVE commands flush the Undo buffer. You cannot undo commands performed within RDE or prior to it.

    Undo restores changes regardless of viewing mode, so what is being undone may not be obvious.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Edit|​Undo S 255
     UNHIDE

    Reveal all hidden segments of selected sets.

    Reveal all segments in selected sets which have been hidden using HIDE.

    HIDE toggles the status of a set segment between hidden and revealed. This status is a persistent property of the segment.

    Any revealed segments are reported to MessageScroll.

    Revealed segments which are OFF or on invisible layers remain off or invisible. The Ignore Hide setting in DISPLAYSET reveals all segments, even hidden ones.

    REVEAL may be an alias for UNHIDE.

    TML date MenuSource 
    01/09/18   Modify|​On/Off|​Reveal set segments Geocomp Update or $200  
     UNITBLK

    Insert blocks graphically by 1, 2 or 3 locations.

    Display a selected block at the cursor scaled by 1, 2 or three points and insert at a location.

    Any dimension in the block equal to 1.00 unit will be created in the project with that dimension at 1.00 project units multiplied by the scale factor.

    To insert a block graphically

    1. UNITBLK command
    2. Settings
    3. Enter or select the name of a block in the project or browse to select an external .BLK file
    4. Choose how to locate and scale the block by 1, 2 or 3 locations
    5. OK
    6. Select 1, 2 or 3 locations using the mouse
    7. Select more locations to insert same block again
    8. Close when finished

    Dialog

    Pt.1:
    Locate the insertion point and change the cursor to display the selected block in the cursor colour.
    Pt. 2:
    Specify an optional second location.
    Pt. 3:
    Specify an optional third location.
    Settings
    Specify the block, scaling, rotation and colour.
    Block
    Select an internal block or browse to specify the name of an external block. The first external .BLK with that name in the TSP is used. This might not be the selected .BLK.
    Map colour
    If ON, display with the colour of the block. If OFF, display with the colours of the objects in the block.
    1 Point
    Insert a point at a location with a specified Y scale, X scale and rotation.
    2 Point
    Insert a point at a location and scale the block graphically.
    Rotate
    Rotate the Y axis of the block and scale.
    Scale Y
    Use the distance between the locations to specify the scale of the block along its Y axis and the keep the X axis scale at 1.0.
    Scale X=Y
    Use the distance between the locations to specify the same scale of the block along the X and Y axes.
    Scale X&Y
    Scale the block in X and Y axes in proportion to a window defined by two locations.
    No Scale
    Rotate the block and keep the scale of X and Y axes at 1.0.
    3 Point
    Use the distance between the first location and the second to specify the scale of the block along its Y axis and the distance between the first location and the third location to specify the scale along its X axis. Specify Rotate to rotate the Y axis of the block.
    OK or Cancel
    Accept or reject changes to the settings
    Close
    Close the command without inserting any more blocks.

    Scaling

    The scale factors determine the dimensions of the inserted block along its axes.

    Unequal scale factors distort the block, for example stretching a pit or gate.

    If the block is a unit block, that is the block has been created with the distance along an axis = 1.0, the dimension of the inserted block along that axis is equal to the scale factor. For example, if you create a block from some objects making up a "tree canopy" one unit in diameter, and scale X and Y by 3.50 when you insert into the plan view, the inserted tree block will be 3.50m in diameter. If your block is defined with a radius of one unit, such as "circle radius" block, the inserted block will have a radius of one unit multiplied by the specified scale.

    See also

    GCADDBLK
    Insert a block graphically and interpolate elevation
    BLOCK
    Create, insert or list blocks
    MKBLK
    Make a unit block

    TML date MenuSourceGC
    01/09/18   Draw|​Block|​Insert graphically
    Draw|​Insert unit block
    S 90
     UNITSSET

    Configure dimension mode, precision and labelling.

    Configure display and entry modes, number of decimal places for various units, chainage format, chord or arc definitions for degree of curvature, angle modes, distance modes, unit labels, and unit conversion factors in the current project.

    To avoid future incorrect labels, conventions, units and assumptions in reports, also check and configure these values carefully in your prototype project. Also use MEASUNIT to check project and sheet units and GCHELP to check which prototype is in use.

    Units settings

    Distance mode
    Select horizontal or slope
    Direction mode
    Select north azimuth, south azimuth, east azimuth or bearing
    Angle mode
    Select degrees, minutes and seconds or decimal degrees, grads or mils
    Default entry
    Select default entry mode for bearings and vertical angles
    Chainage | Station format
    Select a format for chainage | station values
    Degree of curve definition
    Enter an arc or chord length
    Temperature and Atmos. pressure
    Enter temperature and pressure units
    Precision...
    Set the display precision of coordinates, distances, % slopes, horizontal angles, temperatures, basic areas, volumes, elevations stations, slope ratios, vertical angles, atmospheric pressures, and alternative areas. Precision of areas, distance and bearings can also vary by tables.
    Labeling...
    Measurement unit identification text
    Length options
    Enter characters for up to five length suffix labelling options for use in commands such as LABELSEG and GCDIMLOT.
    Basic area
    Enter text for the suffix to indicate the unit of basic areas. For example, Sq. ft. or m². To enter ², hold down the Right-ALT key while typing 0178 with the numeric keypad.
    Alt area
    Enter text for the suffix to indicate the unit of areas greater than the sq. units/alternate area value defined in Conv. factors. For example, Acres or Ha.
    Volume
    Enter text for the suffix to indicate the unit of volume. For example, Sq. yds. or m³. To enter ³, hold down the Right-ALT key while typing 0179 with the numeric keypad.
    Temperature/Atmos. pressure
    Enter text for suffixes to indicate temperature and pressure units
    Offset EAT code format
    Label format
    Enter the order of the horizontal offset value {VAL} and direction {DIR} and any literal text such as commas, spaces or distance units. The {VAL} is substituted by the EAT code \HAL{O,x}. The x is substituted by the number of decimal places of distance configured in Precision.
    Dir. Left
    Enter any characters to replace {DIR} for a left offset. These characters might include "Left" or "-".
    Dir. right
    Enter any characters to replace {DIR} for a right offset. These might include "Rt." or nothing at all.
    Zero Offset Notation
    Enter any characters to indicate when the offset value is zero. These might include "Zero offset" or "0.000".
    Conversion factors...
    meters/foot
    Set the conversion factor for converting feet to meters to either International Foot (0.3048) or U. S. Survey foot (12/39.37 = 0.304800609601).
    Sq. Units/Alternate Area:
    Use 43560 for acres and 10000 for hectares.
    Cubic Units/Volume Unit:
    Use 1 cubic metre per cubic metre or 27 cubic feet per cubic yard.

    Notes

    For example, if a point has horizontal offset of 1.123m to the left, and the Offset EAT Code Format has "Label format" of O/S={DIR}{VAL}m, and "Dir. left" of -, then the text object would be defined as O/S=-\HAL{O,3}m and displayed as O/S=-1.123m.

    If the measurement units, unit labels and conversion factors do not match, the areas and volumes on reports will be wrong.

    If you use MEASUNIT to "Convert" the units in a project, UNITSSET settings for units are reset to defaults for metres and feet.

    Display precision settings have no effect on the accuracy of the data stored in the project file or calculations based on that data.

    EDITINI can match the precision of coordinates in coordinate scroll with their precision in UNITSSET.

    UNITSSET affects output of commands such as AREA, CURVESOL, CUTFILL, DTMSHOT, GC02, GC27, GCDAMVOL, GCDIMLOT, GCLABLOT, GCTABLE, GCTRACE, GCXLINES, LABELLOT, LABELSEG, LABELTABLE, LABGRADE, SHADOW, SLOPE, TEXTRND and TRISOL. See also STAORCHN.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Settings|​Units settings S 44
     UPDATE

    Update Terramodel.

    Open a web page with Terramodel and Geocomp Updates.

    TML dateGuideMenuSource 
    01/09/18 Update Help|Updates Geocomp Update  
     UPGRADE

    Enter an upgrade code to enable new Terramodel modules.

    Enter an upgrade code to enable new Terramodel modules. The upgrade code is supplied by your Trimble Terramodel dealer.

    Upgrade is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY UPGRADE which opens the Products dialog in ABOUT command.

    MacroPlay requires CAD module. If you won't have any CAD module until after you enter the upgrade code, use ABOUT command directly instead of UPGRADE.

    Macro date MenuSourceGC
    01/09/18   Help|​About|​Products|​Upgrade
    File|​Macro|​Play|​upgrade
    User-definable GC M
     USTN2MOS

    Modify objects imported from Microstation 7 to look like objects imported from GENIO.

    Modify the start chainages of selected records to match the chainage from the selected HAL and, if the layer name matches an integer value in Column C of the specified CSV file, set the object name to match the value in Column A.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $150  
     VALDATA

    Create a vertical alignment by entering curves into a table.

    Create or edit a vertical alignment through entry of intersection point (IP) coordinates and curve data into a table.

    The curve types are:

    POB
    Point of Beginning: Enter the starting IP coordinates
    ARC
    Circular curve: Enter coordinates and radius
    Point
    Point of Vertical Intersection: Enter IP coordinates
    Vertical
    Parabolic vertical curve: Enter vertical curve length

    See also CURVE.

    Column names can be configured in ABBREVSET.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Alignments|​VAL data entry S  
     VALEDIT

    Shift intersection points in a vertical alignment.

    All the IPs after the nominated point are shifted by the horizontal and vertical difference to the new point.

    This is useful when the vertical alignment needs to be updated because the horizontal alignment is lengthened or shortened. It can also be used to raise or lower all or part of a profile.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $150 412
     VAL​MANAGER

    Manage registered vertical alignments.

    Register vertical alignments, chainage equations and horizontal offsets.

    Vertical alignments in the profile define the elevations that the design will follow.

    VERTICAL ALIGNMENT
    Change the record number of the alignment associated with the VAL. You can register the same set or pline with more than one VAL.
    Name
    Change the name of the registered alignment selected in the list of VALs below.
    VAL
    Enter or pick the pline to be registered as the VAL.
    NEW ALIGNMENT
    Add a horizontal alignment to the list of VALs
    Chainage (Station) equations
    Display a list of the chainage equations for the VAL and add or delete chainage equations.
    ALIGNMENT OFFSETS
    Define an alignment in terms of offsets to a main alignment.
    DELETE
    Delete the highlighted VAL from the list.
    Alignment Type
    For Vertical alignments choose Profile; for Super­elevations choose Slope.

    The VAL Manager uses the same dialog as the Slope manager (SLOPEMANAGER). If the Alignment Type is set to Slope, change the alignment type to Profile. The manager continues to display the alignments of the chosen type until you select the other type, regardless of whether you select the Slope Manager or Val Manager command.

    See also GCACTIVE, HALMANAGER, VERTALIGN and GCVALOFF.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|8203;Alignments|​VAL manager...
    Tunnels|​Alignments|​VAL manager...
    Channel|​Alignments|​VAL manager...
    S  
     VARIOFF

    Insert points of constantly varying offset from a selected alignment.

    Insert points into a variable offset line at nominated intervals, so that the offset varies linearly between the points in the set.

    The interval is measured along the HAL and the offsets from the HAL. Both the HAL and variable offset line can be either a pline or a set. The variable offset line cannot contain curves. The lines must be in the same general direction.

    The points in the variable offset line can be drawn using point snapping modes, including chainage and offset and coordinates. They can also be entered using GC65 or GC65FILE.

    See also GCHALOFF and OFFSET​POINT.

    TML date MenuSource 
    01/09/18   Edit|​Variable line offset S  
     VCLOSE

    Close the active view.

    Close the active view.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09 UG View|​Close view S 0
     VERT​ALIGN

    Register one vertical alignment.

    Register a pline or set as a vertical with a name.

    Use registered alignments with commands such as ROADJOB.

    See also VALMANAGER to create and delete registered alignments, add chainage equations or enter alignment offsets.

    Command dateGuide Source 
    12/03/09HELPTM   S  
     VICRD​SEC

    Create cross sections from cross section plots.

    The computed cross sections are placed in the XSect View. They can then be replotted, converted to surfaces and so on.

    The cross section plot style is assumed to be similar to the VicRoads style. Other styles can be interpreted provided the data types are separated by layer.

    1. Import the Horizontal alignment into the plan view
    2. Make the HAL the active alignment
    3. Import cross section plots into the plan view.
    4. GCSCALE all the data in the plots in X and Y so that the new scale is 1:1.
    5. VICRDSEC
    6. Select the cross section plot data to be considered, typically by Window.
    7. Select the layer containing the existing surface cross sections
    8. Select the layer containing the design surface cross sections
    9. Select the layer containing the chainage labels
    10. Select the layer containing the datum lines

    The chainage values are derived from the chainage text below each section. The horizontal offset is measured from a vertical line found near the chainage label. The datum elevation is derived from the datum label. The section elevations are computed above the datum line.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     VIEW​PORT

    Turn on or off objects inside or outside the field of view.

    Turn on objects inside the field of view, and turn off others. Turning off objects you are not working with can speed up many processes, especially when you have millions of points.

    The field of view is determined by how much and where you have zoomed in.

    Layer or Layer List
    Select a layer or layer list. Only objects on these layers will be modified.
    Set ViewPort
    Turn ON objects on the layer(s) that are inside the field of view, and turn off objects that are entirely outside.
    Clear Viewport
    Turn on all objects on layer(s).

    Other properties that control visibility such as layer visibility, hidden segments, active alignments and display settings are not changed.

    See also

    ON and OFF
    Turn on or off selected objects
    ONALL and OFFALL
    Turn on or off all objects by View mode
    VSAVE and VRECALL
    Save and recall up to six fields of view
    LAYERSET, LAYLSET and QUIKLSET
    Modify visibility of layers by other than turning objects on or off

    TML date  Source 
    14/07/20     Geocomp Update or $200  
     VIEW​ROTATE

    Rotate the display of the active plan view.

    Rotate any plan view by specifying direction of the top of the screen by bearing.

    The rotation affects the active plan view window or the first plan view window subsequently opened.

    The current orientation is displayed in the title bar.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM View|​Rotate view S  
     VIEWSCAL

    Specify the plan view scale.

    Enter a plan view scale or select Default for Pt Labels to change the plan view scale so point labels can easily read and then redraw the display.

    Arguments

    VIEWSCAL can be used with arguments in a toolbox button or on the command line, for example:

    VIEWSCAL 0
    Default for Pt Labels
    VIEWSCAL 0 2500
    Change Plan view scale from anything to 1:2500
    VIEWSCAL 2
    Change Plan view scale from 1:500 to 1:1000 (autoscaled blocks and text are twice the size)
    VIEWSCAL 0.5
    Change Plan view scale from 1:1000 to 1:500 (autoscaled blocks and text are half the size)
    VIEWSCAL -2
    Change Plan view scale from 1:1000 to 1:500 (autoscaled blocks and text are half the size)

    Default for point labels

    Use the "Default for Pt Labels" button to set the Plan view scale so that point labels created with LABELPOINT are a convenient size. The new scale takes into account the sheet units and the Point Label Height set by EDITINI.

    See also

    VIEWSET
    Enter a view scale and settings for any view
    F7
    Change the view scale and then display point numbers
    F9
    Change the view scale and then display elevations
    F11
    Change the view scale and then display point names
    GCREDRAW
    Change the view scale and then redraw the display
    ZOOMSCAL
    Change the zoom level to an approximate scale

    TML date MenuSourceGC
    16/07/19   Settings|​Plan view scale Geocomp Update or $250 190
     VIEWSET

    View settings.

    Controls the view name, coordinate labels, ordering of X and Y, vertical exaggeration and plot scale for each view.

    These settings are stored with the project file.

    There are eight view modes.

    View name
    Edit the name of the view mode up to 10 characters long. The name appears in the display heading and in reports.
    X coordinate label
    This is a name for East for the plan view Chainage or Station for the profile view Offset for Xsect view, and X for the sheet view. This name will appear in reports and when labelling.
    Y coordinate label
    This is a name for North for the plan view, Elevation for the profile and Xsect views, and Y for the sheet view mode. This name will appear in reports and when labelling.
    Z coordinate label
    This is a name for Elevation for the plan view, Offset for the profile view, Chainage or station for Xsect view, and Z for the sheet view. This name will appear in reports and when labeling.
    Plot scale
    Enter the plot scale for the view. This value is used together with the project measurement units to scale text and plotboxes from ground units to sheet units as required. Set plot scale to 1 for the Sheet view. See MEASUNIT.
    Y before X
    Control the ordering of coordinate pairs for entry and display. Tick only if you use a Northing,Easting convention.
    Use sheet coordinates
    Apply the Plot Scale factor when entering values in sheet units. This setting is usually On for the Sheet view and Off for Plan and Profile view. When this setting is enabled the Plot scale is set to one.
    Auto reference off
    If enabled, objects created in that view are referred to the current active alignment. This setting is normally on for the profile view mode only. Some commands override this setting to reference objects in a more desirable manner.
    Use vertical exaggeration
    Apply a vertical exaggeration to the Y axis relative to the X axis. Always enable vertical exaggeration for the profile and cross section views even if the VE =1.0. Vertical curves cannot be entered into profiles unless this is enabled.
    Vertical exaggeration
    Enter the vertical exaggeration of the Y axis with respect to the X axis. For example, if the plot scale is 50, and the vertical exaggeration is 5, in the profile view the scale for elevation (on the Y axis) would be 1:50 and the scale for chainage (along the X axis) would be 1:10. Changes to vertical exaggeration are not visible until the next View ALL or the view is reopened.

    See also VIEWSCAL.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Settings|​View settings S 190
     VISLYR

    Toggle visibility of a specified layer.

    Control whether you can see objects on a layer.

    Use with an argument in an alias or toolbox button.

    Usage: VISLYR layername

    Don't use with layer names that contain spaces. Only characters before any space are considered.

    The visibility status is shown and can also be controlled by LAYERSET.

    Invisible objects cannot be selected by Window, Crossing or Record, but can be selected by Colour.

    Commands which can hide objects without making layers invisible include OFF, HIDE, ACTIVE, ACTIVE​CHAINAGE, DYNAVIEW and DISPLAY​SET.

    See also SNAPLYR and QUIKLSET.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250 48
     VMAX

    Maximise the active view window.

    Maximise the active view window.

    See also VMIN and VRESTORE.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM View|​Maximize view S SDS
     VMIN

    Minimise the active view window.

    Minimise the active view window.

    See also VMAX and VRESTORE.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM View|​Minimize view S 146
     VNEW

    Open a new view window.

    Open a new view window.

    Open a new window in Plan, Profile, Sheet, Xsect, Super, View6, View7 or View8 and make that the current view.

    Select Grab to open a new view window, with extents from two locations in the current view.

    All the original views are retained, thus enabling multiple views of the same data at different scales.

    See also SVIEW.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM View|​New view S 0
     VPAN

    vpan toolbox

    Pan or zoom by keypad with North = 1.

    Pan by complete screens in the current view.

    As shown in the following table, type in VPAN, a space, a digit indicating direction, another space and the number of screens to pan at once.

     
    vpan north west button  
    VPAN 8 1
    vpan north button  
    VPAN 1 1
    vpan north east button  
    VPAN 2 1
    vpan  west button  
    VPAN 7 1
    vpan zoom button  
    VPAN 9 .5 
    vpan east button  
    VPAN 3 1
    vpan south west button  
    VPAN 6 1
    vpan south button  
    VPAN 5 1
    vpan south east button  
    VPAN 4 1
    If you want to use a mouse to move to a location, select PAN, RPAN or GC34.
    Left-click on the VPAN toolbox from Geocomp.ws, or right-click to pan or zoom in the opposite direction.
    See also GCPAN which uses keystrokes that match the arrangement of numeric keypad buttons on a computer.
    TML date MenuSourceGC
    29/10/08   Toolbox S 133
     VRECALL

    Recall a saved view.

    Recall one of up to six views saved by VSAVE for the current view mode.

    See also PREVIOUS.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM View|​Recall view S 145
     VRESTORE

    Restore a view.

    Restore the current view to the state before it was last either minimised or maximised.

    See also VMAX and VMIN.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM View|​Restore view S 145
     VRMLIN

    Import Virtual Reality Markup Language (VRML) .wrl data

    Import groupings, transformations and indexed face sets from VRML97 files.

    Place on a nominated layer, or use node names for layers.

    Create a set for each imported face, or just create the points.

    See also VRMLOUT.

    VRMLIN and VRMLOUT require 32-bit Windows. To install VRMLIN and VRMLOUT commands, open C:\TMCUSTOM​\GEOCOMP\Alt​\Trimble​\Terramodel​\TMVRML.ZIP and follow the instructions in tmvrml_readme.pdf.

    TML dateGuide Source 
    01/09/18 tmvrml_readme   Geocomp Update  
     VRMLOUT

    Export Virtual Reality Markup Language (VRML) .wrl data

    Form a VRML model from sets or a DTM.

    These models can be displayed in perspective from any viewpoint.

    The VRML file format can be displayed in web browsers using VRML or X3D plug-ins such as Cortona.

    Control whether the surface colours are diffuse, emissive or specular. The colour is derived from the set or the layer.

    The objects are nodes of type Indexed Face Set, with names from layers. The format is VRML97. Refer to the built-in help file for more details.

    For a DTM, the front of the faces is viewed from above. To export a VRML DTM with no triangles inside a dead area, use DTM2XML then IMPORT the XML again first.

    For sets, the front of the faces is determined by the clockwise or anti-clockwise direction of the sets. SHOWDIR shows the direction of a set, REVERSE and SHOWDIRN does both. Arcs are replaced with a single chord and 2D points are ignored.

    VRMLIN and VRMLOUT require 32-bit Windows. To install VRMLIN and VRMLOUT commands, open C:\TMCUSTOM​\GEOCOMP\Alt​\Trimble​\Terramodel​\TMVRML.ZIP and follow the instructions in tmvrml_readme.pdf.

    See also VRMLIN, 3DVISUALISER and Visualizer.

    TML dateGuide Source 
    01/09/18 tmvrml_readme   Geocomp Update  
     VSAVE

    Save up to six views for each view mode.

    Recall saved views by VRECALL.

    See also PREVIOUS.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM View|​Save view S 144
     WALK

    Create a pline given a DTM, a slope and a starting location.

    Use to define road alignments by constant slope such as for haul roads.

    The start must be within a triangle, not at a DTM point.

    See also GCFALL and SIDESLOPE.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     U  
     WESCOMIN

    Import data from Wescom software.

    Import data from Wescom software.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 FC W
     WORDPAD

    WordPad toolbar button

    Open WordPad editor.

    Open the Microsoft WordPad document editor.

    See also GCREPORT which opens the P3Pad editor and NOTEPAD which open a text editor.

    Alias dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    01/09/18 built-in Toolbar Windows 201
     XLINES

    Create Xlines along alignments.

    Create xlines along plines or sets with default extents using various methods as follows:

    1. Select the horizontal alignment record. The default is the active alignment, if any.
    2. Modify the default left and right Xline extents, if required.
    3. Create Xlines using one of these Xline types:
      Defaults
      This Type doesn't create xlines but sets the default left and right Xline extents used by other types. These defaults also limit the extents of roadways in commands such as ROADSPOT and GC42AB.
      HAL Pts
      Create cross section lines perpendicular to the HAL at each of the PC, PT, TS, SC, SS, LS, ST and PI points with no arcs. The XLINES are created using the default left and right lengths.
      Interval
      Create cross section lines perpendicular to the HAL at a specified interval and within a specified chainage range. The XLINES are created using the default left and right lengths.
      Point
      Create a cross section line perpendicular to the HAL at a specified point. The XLINES are created using the default left and right lengths.
      Chainage ( or Station)
      Create a cross section line perpendicular to the HAL at a specified chainage. The XLINES are created using the default left and right lengths.
      Pline
      Make the selected pline an Xline by changing the name to XLINE and referring the pline to the alignment.

    You can change the xline type and default extents during the function to create additional xlines.

    Any pline with the name XLINE that refers to and crosses a particular horizontal alignment is an Xline, whether or not it is visible.

    See also GCXLINES, RDXLINES and GC39.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​​Pline|​​Xlines S 66
     XLINPTS

    Create Xlines of points near HAL.

    Create xlines along a HAL at selected points within a maximum offset and left and right extents.

    The TML name is XLIN_PTS. If XLINPTS does not run from the command line, create an alias from XLINPTS to XLIN_PTS or enter XLIN_PTS.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $250  
     XSECTION

    Export cross sections from DTM.

    Export cross sections extracted from a DTM to an ASCII file

    Specify HAL and chainage range then click Xsect.

    Then specify whether to extract sections at Xlines, Interval or Breaks (DTM links). With Intervals and Breaks, specify the left and right extents. With Breaks, tick XSEC to also extract sections at HAL alignment points.

    There are two possible output file formats, which both use .XSC as the file extension.

    ASCII
    Use field designation characters P,N,E,Z,D,X,O or S to define fields similar to EXPORT . For example, ".4E .4N .4Z .4X .4O 8D" exports the file as space-separated Easting, Northing, Elevation, Chainage and Offset to 4 decimal places and 8 characters of Description/​Name.
    Roads
    Terramodel Roads .XSC file

    See also EXPORTXS, XSOUT and GC37.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM DTM|​XSections from DTM S 402
     XSECTION​DIGI

    Digitize cross sections.

    Digitize cross sections from paper plans using a digitizer after establishing a roadway and configuring the digitizer using TABLET first.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​​Road design|​​XSection digitizer...
    Channel|​​Channel design|​XSection digitizer
    S 402
     XSECTION​EDT

    Add, edit or delete cross-sections.

    The horizontal scroll bar located across the top of the graphics is used to move to other chainages along the road job. You can advance to the next cross-section (xline) by clicking on the scroll bar to the right of the button. Clicking on the scroll bar to the left of the button takes you to the previous cross-section. You can drag the button to any location along the road job, necessarily at an xline. You can advance the editor by one step interval by clicking on the left or right arrow buttons at each end of the scroll bar. For road jobs less than 32676 project units in length, the step interval is 1 project unit. For road jobs up to 326760 units, 10 units, and so on. You can resize the editor window by dragging its edges.

    CHAINAGE (STATION)
    Enter the chainage along the main alignment for the cross-section you would like to edit. The chainage that you move to using the scroll bar will be displayed here. If you enter a chainage that has no corresponding stored data and no xline, you will be given the option of having the cross-section interpolated.
    ORIGINAL or MODIFIED SURFACE
    Select a surface to list the Offset and elevation. If you have made changes, additions, or deletions to the surface, the word Modified is used. The slopes of associated with the selected surface will be labeled in the graphics screen if Labels are turned on in ROADGRID.
    DATA ORIGIN
    "Sliced DTM data" means interpolating the cross-section from the listed DTM surface. "Stored surface data" means the surface is composed of offset, elevation pairs entered manually or imported from an ASCII file. While you can edit the values associated with the [Design] surface, they do not update the cross-section because this choice shows the values in the design. If you wish to change these by hand, you must first convert the design points to points on the finish surface using Convert Design in the Edit menu of the XSection Editor.
    OFFSET, ELEVATION
    Enter or edit offset, elevation pairs for each data point in a cross-section. When you click in one of these point controls a marker is displayed on the graphics screen at that point. When editing stored cross-sections, in addition to specifying the coordinates of the points on the cross-section, you can specify their locations using any of the horizontal and vertical data entry modes allowed when defining shapes in SHAPE.
    PTCODE
    Enter or edit a descriptor (point code) for each data point in a cross-section.
    AUTO-TIE
    Indicate a segment using an indicated slope, specifying that slope using one of the horizontal and vertical data entry modes allowed when defining shapes in SHAPE. If the Auto-tie check box is checked, that segment is tied to ground.
    DIRECTION
    Indicate the direction in which the tie segment projects. Use Auto only if you do not know the direction.
    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Road design|​XSection editor...
    Channel|​Channel design|​XSection editor...
    S 421
     XSECTION​MAN

    Cross section manager.

    Manage cross sections for roadways and channels.

    Command dateGuideMenuSource 
    12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​Road design|​XSection manager...
    Channel|​Channel design|​XSection manager...
    S 413
     XSECTPTS

    Turn on points with active chainage.

    If active chainage is not set, turn on all points in XSect view. If active chainage is set, turn on all points with chainage (z-value) equal to active chainage and turn off points with higher or lower chainage values.

    XSECTPTS turns points on and off in XSect view, which might not be the current view.

    See also ACTIVE, ACTIVE​CHAINAGE, ONALL and OFFALL.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     XSECTRPT

    Report the 3D length of cross sections.

    Report the total sloping distance along selected cross section surfaces.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     XSHEET

    Create cross section plots in the sheet view from an alignment and layers.

    Create road cross-sections at each xline in the Xsect view, and display the cross sections as dynaviews in the Sheet view.

    There are settings for properties of sheets, columns, cross sections, tables and layer names. These settings can be exported and imported.

    All values are in sheet units unless otherwise noted. Use cm or inch sheet units for best results.

    Hal
    Select a horizontal alignment. The default is the active alignment.
    Chainage or Station Range
    Select beginning and ending chainages. The defaults are from the alignment.
    Settings
    Sheet properties
    Enter the height and width of the new sheets, the location in the sheet view of the origin of the first sheet and the separation distance between sheets. The height and width should be less than the available space on the paper and in any title block.
    Column Properties
    Enter the height, width, separation and offsets of columns of cross sections. The width times the maximum number of columns plus separations must be less than the width in Sheet Properties. Select Axis labels and Grids to create a labelled grid over each column.
    XSection Properties
    Specify the scale, placement, labels and table of cross sections.
    Scale
    Enter the horizontal and vertical scale.
    Match scales
    Set the XSect view scales to match the plot scales.
    Placement in Columns
    Configure the order and separation of cross sections.
    Centerline Offset
    Centered
    At the centre of the column, locate the centreline (0.00 offset from the alignment).
    Auto
    At the centre of the column, locate halfway between the left and right extents of the section.
    Offset from column
    At the entered offset from the left of the column, locate the centreline.
    Axis Labels
    Create labelled axes over each section.
    Chainage (or Station) Label
    Label each section with the chainage (\STA\) and additional text. For example, in the template field enter "Ch=\STA\" to create the label "Ch=100.00".
    Table Settings
    Label each section with a table of offsets and elevations.
    Side box labels
    Include a side box with layer names
    Table Datum Level
    Locate the vertical datum of the top of the table, by the nearest major grid, an offset below the minimum elevation or an absolute elevation.
    Label Datum
    Enter the description and number of decimal places for the datum label.
    Table Rows
    label the Horizontal Offset, Northing, Easting, Design elevation or elevation difference between two surfaces.
    Swap order of Table Rows
    Turn on for offset and existing surface at the bottom of the table; off for them at the top.
    Interval settings
    Create columns of labels at even offset intervals, breaks in slope, where two surfaces intersect (catch) or at crossing HALs to be selected when creating the sections. crossing 3D HALS.
    Block Name
    Select a block to insert at crossing HALS if 3D.
    Label header
    Create labels in a box above the datum showing Chainage, Scale factors, Centreline coordinates or direction.
    Tick and Dropline settings
    Mark all Profiles with tick marks
    Insert short tick mark plines
    Mark vertical lines with Tick Mark
    Insert tick marks or drop lines from the specified surface
    Erase ALL Cross Section Sheets and Dynaviews
    Erase all previous scross sections, for all alignments, or not.
    Overwrite ALL other Cross Section Sheets for Alignment
    Overwrite all cross sections for the alignment, or not.
    OK

    Select DTM layers from a list of valid and formed DTMs. The selected layer that was first created will be the existing surface.

    For each Xline, create plines in the XSect view for each surface, add any labels, tables or grids, create a plotbox and create a dynaview in the Sheet view.

    Cancel
    Cancel without creating any more sections.

    Layer names and colours are from the selected DTM layers.

    See also

    XSHEETGC
    An little-used alternative command.
    RDX
    A similar command preferred for use with road jobs.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    30/01/20 RG 615 Cogo|​Streets|​XSheet S 492
     XSHEETGC

    Create cross section plots in Geocomp-style.

    Based on XSHEET but with an extra Geocomp settings button which labels the table differently.

    TML date  SourceGC
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200 492
     XSLABEL

    Label obstructions on cross section plots.

    Label the location, size, offset, and elevation of strings and obstructions, defined by sets or plines in the Plan view which intersect cross-sections already created by RDX, RDXGC, XSHEET or XSHEETGC.

    Choose from Pipe Labels, 2D labels and 3D labels. Control the settings of added text, lines and blocks. Create labels on current layer or obstructions layer. Delete or retain previously created labels.

    Options

    HAL
    Select the alignment
    SETTINGS
    SELECTION
    Select Pipe Labels, 2D Lines or 3D Lines. Configure the labelling settings for each selection.
    ADD BLOCK
    Insert a block in the cross-section at each crossing location
    TEXT STYLE
    Selects the text style for the labels
    LINES
    Configuration of leader lines drawn from the block labels to the text labels
    Draw line
    Add a leader line
    Line length
    Specify the length of the leader line in sheet units
    Line below
    Draw the leader line vertically below, otherwise draw above
    NAME
    You can choose to label with names; for pipes, the pipe attribute name; for 2D and 3D lines, the name of each selected line. The location is to the Left, Center or Right of the leader line.
    ELEVATION
    You can choose to label with elevation. The Location is to the Left, Center or Right of the leader line.
    OFFSET
    You can choose to label with offset distance from the alignment. The Location is to the Left, Centre or Right of the leader line.
    CLOSE
    Save the current XSLabel plotting configuration and return to Options
    PIPE LABELS
    Label pipes in Plan view that have attributes defined using commands in the Pipe menu
    2D LINES
    Label 2D sets or plines in Plan view that define the horizontal offsets with elevations interpolated from a selected DTM
    3D LINES
    Label 3D sets or plines in Plan view that define the horizontal offsets with elevations interpolated from the set or pline

    Add block

    If settings for Pipe, 2D lines or 3D lines include "Add Block", blocks with these pre-defined names are added to the labels:

    PIPE_CIR
    A circular-shaped pipe
    PIPE_ARC
    An arch-shaped pipe
    PIPE_RT
    A rectangular- or box-shaped pipe
    PIPE_TPZ
    A trapezoidal-shaped crossing pipe
    XSBLOCK
    For 2D and 3D lines
    User-defined
    If the name of the set or pline consists of exactly three elements delimited by semicolons, the name is parsed as follows:
    block name; block scale; z offset in m

    For example,

    
    waterpipe250;0.25;0.1
    should place waterpipe250.blk, scaled by 0.25, and z-shifted by 0.1 m above the point.

    Each of the default predefined pipe blocks are scaled to one unit internal diameter with the invert at the centre bottom. You may need to modify the block to suit your shape or insertion point.

    The block is defined by the corresponding .BLK file in the C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared\​Blocks folder, unless there is an internal block, or a .BLK in the Terramodel Search Path, with the same name.

    If the insertion point of the block falls outside the dynaview, the block is not visible in the sheet view. Increasing the minor vertical grid spacing, in Cross Section column grid settings, may help because this controls the datum.

    The intersection of the lines are based on the centreline chainage of the cross section. For skewed or non-linear cross-sections, this intersection may not fall where the line crosses the xline.

    See also GC41 to add obstructions to long section plots and OVERWALL to create and label points in XSect view from points in Plan view.

    TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    18/09/19 RG 618 Cogo|​Streets|​XSLabel Geocomp Update or $200 492
     XSOUT

    Export cross sections from points.

    Export cross sections as ASCII files from points using xlines.

    Select the HAL, points and a chainage tolerance.

    Each point inside the tolerance of an xline inside the chainage range is exported onto the cross section file.

    There are two possible output file formats, which both use .XSC as the file extension.

    ASCII
    Use field designation characters P,N,E,Z,D,X,O or S to define fields similar to EXPORT. For example, ".4E .4N .4Z .4X .4O 8D" exports the file as space-separated Easting, Northing, Elevation, Chainage and Offset to 4 decimal places and 8 characters of Description/​Name.
    Roads
    Terramodel Roads .XSC file

    See also EXPORTXS and XSECTION.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM DTM|​XSections from pts S 66
     XSURAREA

    Report surface areas of a road job to a CSV.

    Report, between specified chainages in road job, the chainage differences and the incremental and cumulative average end areas of the existing surface.

    The Roadjob must be registered with the Roadjob Manager.

    Only one phase is included in the total.

    Similar to SURFAREA but with options for chainage interval, phases, headings and footers.

    TML date  Source 
    01/09/18     Geocomp Update or $200  
     XTOCL

    Define walls for Visualizer.

    Define walls for Visualizer using pipes.

    To define walls

    • Select a new layer
    • Create a closed set for the building footprint
    • Create a vertical set from the bottom to the top of the building
    • Give the vertical set a name
    • Run XTOCL
    • Pick the sets, the vertical set name and the number of points per arc
    • Select location of the first point in the vertical set.
    • Save the project
    • Add the "pipe" to the .GTT file
    • Save the GTT file
    • In Visualizer,
      1. Create or open a TV Environment
      2. Add the Terramodel project file
      3. Turn on pipes and sets.

    For an illustrated example, see How to create a solid building in Terramodel Visualizer from its plan outline using pipes.

    TML dateGuide SourceGC
    01/09/18 xtocl.html   U MM 8
     XVOLUMES

    Report volume of all roadway materials to a spreadsheet.

    Report roadway to a .CSV file in detail.

    Reports can include every material in every surface, subgrade and closed shape at every chainage for every phase.

    Shrink/Swell factors shown for every material.

    Incremental or accumulative

    Optionally include five heading lines and a footer.

    See also AVGEND and EARTHWRK.

    You are warned if you exceed 256 columns as this is the limit for some spreadsheet applications.

    If you get zero volumes when you expect sensible values, see FIXLAYERS.

    TML date MenuSource 
    01/09/18   Reports|​More...|​Cross section volumes Geocomp Update or $200  
     ZI

    zoom in 2 times toolbar button

    Zoom in by 2x.

    Resize the active view by a factor of 0.5 around the centre of the display.

    ZI is an ALIAS to "MAGNIFY 1.5".

    See also ZOOM, ZI, ZOOMSCAL and ALL.

    Alias date MenuSourceGC
    01/09/18   Toolbar user-definable 134
     ZO

    zoom out 2 times toolbar button

    Function key F6

    Zoom out by 2x.

    Resize the active view by a factor of 2 around the centre of the display.

    ZO and F6 commands and Function key F6 ALIAS to "MAGNIFY 0.5".

    See also ZOOM, ZI, ZOOMSCAL and ALL.

    Alias date MenuSource 
    01/09/18   View|​Zoom out 2x
    Toolbar
    Function key F6
    user-definable  
     ZOOM

    zoom toolbar button

    Function key F5

    Zoom in by window.

    Resize a part of the active view defined by two locations to a larger scale.

    The mouse can also be used to zoom if it has a scroll wheel that is correctly configured. If the "Scroll inactive windows" feature for mouse and touchpad devices in Windows 10 Settings interferes with the wheel in Terramodel, turn this off.

    See also ZOOMSCAL, MAGNIFY and ALL.

    Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
    12/03/09HELPTM View|​Zoom
    Toolbar
    Function key F5
    S 134
     ZOOMSCAL

    Zoom the active view to an approximate scale.

    Zoom the active view to an approximate scale entered when prompted or by an argument.

    The current view scale is not changed, only the zoom level.

    TML date MenuSource 
    01/09/18   View|​Zoom to scale Geocomp Update or $250